Sandoz Inc

Manufacturer Details

There are currently no manufacturer details available.

Sandoz Inc Drugs

Meropenem

Meropenem

2.1 Adult Patients

The recommended dose of Meropenem for Injection is 500 mg given every 8 hours for skin and skin structure infections and 1 gram given every 8 hours for intra-abdominal infections. When treating complicated skin and skin structure infections caused by P.aeruginosa, a dose of 1 gram every 8 hours is recommended.

Meropenem for Injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over approximately 15 minutes to 30 minutes. Doses of 1 gram may also be administered as an intravenous bolus injection (5 mL to 20 mL) over approximately 3 minutes-5 minutes.

2.2 Use in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage should be reduced in patients with creatinine clearance of 50 mL/min or less. (See dosing table below.)

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft and Gault equation)5 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance.

Males: Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) =
Weight (kg) × (140 - age) 72 × serum creatinine (mg/dL)
Females: 0.85 × above value
Recommended Meropenem for Injection Dosage Schedule for Adult Patients with Renal Impairment Creatinine Clearance(mL/min) Dose (dependent on type of infection) Dosing Interval Greater than 50 Recommended dose (500 mg cSSSI and 1 gram Intra-abdominal) Every 8 hours Greater than 25-50 Recommended dose Every 12 hours 10-25 One-half recommended dose Every 12 hours Less than 10 One-half recommended dose Every 24 hours
There is inadequate information regarding the use of Meropenem for Injection in patients on hemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis.

2.3 Use in Pediatric Patients

Pediatric Patients 3 Months of Age and Older

For pediatric patients 3 months of age and older, the Meropenem for Injection dose is 10 mg/kg, 20 mg/kg or 40 mg/kg every 8 hours (maximum dose is 2 grams every 8 hours), depending on the type of infection (complicated skin and skin structure, intra-abdominal or meningitis). (See dosing table below.) Pediatric patients weighing over 50 kg should be administered Meropenem for Injection at a dose of 500 mg every 8 hours for complicated skin and skin structure infections, 1 gram every 8 hours for intra-abdominal infections and 2 grams every 8 hours for meningitis. Meropenem for Injection should be given as intravenous infusion over approximately 15 minutes to 30 minutes or as an intravenous bolus injection (5 mL to 20 mL) over approximately 3 minutes-5 minutes.

There is limited safety data available to support the administration of a 40 mg/kg (up to a maximum of 2 grams) bolus dose.
Recommended Meropenem for Injection Dosage Schedule for Pediatric Patients 3 Months of Age and Older with Normal Renal Function Type of Infection Dose (mg/kg) Up to a Maximum Dose Dosing Interval Complicated skin and skin structure 10 500 mg Every 8 hours Intra-abdominal 20 1 gram Every 8 hours Meningitis 40 2 grams Every 8 hours
There is no experience in pediatric patients with renal impairment. When treating complicated skin and skin structure infections caused by P. aeruginosa, a dose of 20 mg/kg (or 1 gram for pediatric patients weighing over 50 kg) every 8 hours is recommended.

Pediatric Patients Less Than 3 Months of Age

For pediatric patients (with normal renal function) less than 3 months of age, with intra-abdominal infections, the Meropenem for Injection dose is based on gestational age (GA) and postnatal age (PNA). (See dosing table below). Meropenem for Injection should be given as intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.
Recommended Meropenem for Injection Dosage Schedule for Pediatric Patients Less than 3 Months of Age with Complicated Intra-Abdominal Infections and Normal Renal Function Age Group Dose (mg/kg) Dose Interval Infants less than 32 weeks GA and PNA less than 2 weeks 20 Every 12 hours Infants less than 32 weeks GA and PNA 2 weeks and older 20 Every 8 hours Infants 32 weeks and older GA and PNA less than 2 weeks 20 Every 8 hours Infants 32 weeks and older GA and PNA 2 weeks and older 30 Every 8 hours
There is no experience in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

2.4 Preparation of Solution

For Intravenous Bolus Administration

Constitute injection vials (500 mg and 1 gram) with sterile Water for Injection (see table below). Shake to dissolve and let stand until clear.
Vial Size Amount of Diluent Added (mL) Approximate Withdrawable Volume (mL) Approximate Average Concentration (mg/mL) 500 mg 10 10 50 1 gram 20 20 50
For Infusion

Infusion vials (500 mg and 1 gram) may be directly constituted with a compatible infusion fluid.

Alternatively, an injection vial may be constituted, then the resulting solution added to an intravenous container and further diluted with an appropriate infusion fluid [see Dosage and Administration (2.5) and (2.6)].

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

2.5 Compatibility

Compatibility of Meropenem for Injection with other drugs has not been established. Meropenem for Injection should not be mixed with or physically added to solutions containing other drugs.

2.6 Stability and Storage

Freshly prepared solutions of Meropenem for Injection should be used. However, constituted solutions of Meropenem for Injection maintain satisfactory potency under the conditions described below. Solutions of intravenous Meropenem for Injection should not be frozen.

Intravenous Bolus Administration

Meropenem for Injection vials constituted with sterile Water for Injection for bolus administration (up to 50 mg/mL of Meropenem for Injection) may be stored for up to 3 hours at up to 25°C (77°F) or for 13 hours at up to 5°C (41°F).

Intravenous Infusion Administration

Solutions prepared for infusion (Meropenem for Injection concentrations ranging from 1 mg/mL to 20 mg/mL) constituted with Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% may be stored for 1 hour at up to 25°C (77°F) or 15 hours at up to 5°C (41°F).

Solutions prepared for infusion (Meropenem for Injection concentrations ranging from 1 mg/mL to 20 mg/mL) constituted with Dextrose Injection 5% should be used immediately.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Rivastigmine Patch

Rivastigmine Patch

2.1 Recommended Dosing

Initial Dose

Initiate treatment with one 4.6 mg/24 hours rivastigmine transdermal system applied to the skin once daily [see Dosage and Administration (2.4)].

Dose Titration

Increase the dose only after a minimum of 4 weeks at the previous dose, and only if the previous dose has been tolerated. For mild to moderate AD and PDD patients, continue the effective dose of 9.5 mg/24 hours for as long as therapeutic benefit persists. Patients can then be increased to the maximum effective dose of 13.3 mg/24 hours dose. For patients with severe AD, 13.3 mg/24 hours is the effective dose. Doses higher than 13.3 mg/24 hours confer no appreciable additional benefit, and are associated with an increase in the incidence of adverse reactions [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2), Adverse Reactions (6.1)].

Mild to Moderate Alzheimer’s Disease and Mild to Moderate Parkinson’s Disease Dementia

The effective dosage of rivastigmine transdermal system is 9.5 mg/24 hours or 13.3 mg/24 hours administered once per day; replace with a new patch every 24 hours.

Severe Alzheimer’s Disease

The effective dosage of rivastigmine transdermal system in patients with severe Alzheimer’s disease is 13.3 mg/24 hours administered once per day; replace with a new patch every 24 hours.

Interruption of Treatment

If dosing is interrupted for 3 days or fewer, restart treatment with the same or lower strength rivastigmine transdermal system. If dosing is interrupted for more than 3 days, restart treatment with the 4.6 mg/24 hours rivastigmine transdermal system and titrate as described above.

2.2 Dosing in Specific Populations

Dosing Modifications in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Consider using the 4.6 mg/24 hours rivastigmine transdermal system as both the initial and maintenance dose in patients with mild (Child-Pugh score 5 to 6) to moderate (Child-Pugh score 7 to 9) hepatic impairment [see Use in SpecificPopulations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Dosing Modifications in Patients with Low Body Weight

Carefully titrate and monitor patients with low body weight (<50 kg) for toxicities (e.g., excessive nausea, vomiting) and consider reducing the maintenance dose to the 4.6 mg/24 hours rivastigmine transdermal system if such toxicities develop.

2.3 Switching to Rivastigmine Transdermal System from Rivastigmine Tartrate Capsules or Rivastigmine Tartrate Oral Solution

Patients treated with rivastigmine tartrate capsules or oral solution may be switched to rivastigmine transdermal system as follows:
• A patient who is on a total daily dose of <6 mg of oral rivastigmine can be switched to the 4.6 mg/24 hours rivastigmine transdermal system. • A patient who is on a total daily dose of 6 mg to 12 mg of oral rivastigmine can be switched to the 9.5 mg/24 hours rivastigmine transdermal system.
Instruct patients or caregivers to apply the first patch on the day following the last oral dose.

2.4 Important Administration Instructions

Rivastigmine transdermal system is for transdermal use on intact skin.

(a) Do not use the patch if the pouch seal is broken or the patch is cut, damaged, or changed in any way.

(b) Apply the rivastigmine transdermal system once a day
• Press down firmly for 30 seconds until the edges stick well when applying to clean, dry, hairless, intact healthy skin in a place that will not be rubbed against by tight clothing. • Use the upper or lower back as the site of application because the patch is less likely to be removed by the patient. If sites on the back are not accessible, apply the patch to the upper arm or chest. • Do not apply to a skin area where cream, lotion, or powder has recently been applied.
(c) Do not apply to skin that is red, irritated, or cut.

(d) Replace the rivastigmine transdermal system with a new patch every 24 hours. Instruct patients to only wear 1 patch at a time (remove the previous day’s patch before applying a new patch) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1) and Overdosage (10)]. If a patch falls off or if a dose is missed, apply a new patch immediately and then replace this patch the following day at the usual application time.

(e) Change the site of patch application daily to minimize potential irritation, although a new patch can be applied to the same general anatomic site (e.g., another spot on the upper back) on consecutive days. Do not apply a new patch to the same location for at least 14 days.

(f) May wear the patch during bathing and in hot weather. But avoid long exposure to external heat sources (excessive sunlight, saunas, solariums).

(g) Place used patches in the previously saved pouch and discard in the trash, away from pets or children.

(h) Wash hands with soap and water after removing the patch. In case of contact with eyes or if the eyes become red after handling the patch, rinse immediately with plenty of water and seek medical advice if symptoms do not resolve.
Docetaxel

Docetaxel

For all indications, toxicities may warrant dosage adjustments [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

Administer in a facility equipped to manage possible complications (e.g. anaphylaxis).

2.1 Breast Cancer
• For locally advanced or metastatic breast cancer after failure of prior chemotherapy, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 60 mg/m 2 to 100 mg/m 2 administered intravenously over 1 hour every 3 weeks. • For the adjuvant treatment of operable node-positive breast cancer, the recommended Docetaxel Injection dose is 75 mg/m 2 administered 1 hour after doxorubicin 50 mg/m 2 and cyclophosphamide 500 mg/m 2 every 3 weeks for 6 courses. Prophylactic G-CSF may be used to mitigate the risk of hematological toxicities [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].
2.2 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer
• For treatment after failure of prior platinum-based chemotherapy, docetaxel was evaluated as monotherapy, and the recommended dose is 75 mg/m 2 administered intravenously over 1 hour every 3 weeks. A dose of 100 mg/m 2 in patients previously treated with chemotherapy was associated with increased hematologic toxicity, infection, and treatment-related mortality in randomized, controlled trials [see Boxed Warning, Dosage and Administration (2.7), Warnings and Precautions (5), Clinical Studies (14)]. • For chemotherapy-naïve patients, docetaxel was evaluated in combination with cisplatin. The recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m 2 administered intravenously over 1 hour immediately followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m 2 over 30-60 minutes every 3 weeks [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].
2.3 Prostate Cancer
• For hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m 2 every 3 weeks as a 1 hour intravenous infusion. Prednisone 5 mg orally twice daily is administered continuously [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].
2.4 Gastric Adenocarcinoma
• For gastric adenocarcinoma, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m 2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion, followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m 2, as a 1 to 3 hour intravenous infusion (both on day 1 only), followed by fluorouracil 750 mg/m 2 per day given as a 24-hour continuous intravenous infusion for 5 days, starting at the end of the cisplatin infusion. Treatment is repeated every three weeks. Patients must receive premedication with antiemetics and appropriate hydration for cisplatin administration [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].
2.5 Head and Neck Cancer

Patients must receive premedication with antiemetics, and appropriate hydration (prior to and after cisplatin administration). Prophylaxis for neutropenic infections should be administered. All patients treated on the docetaxel containing arms of the TAX323 and TAX324 studies received prophylactic antibiotics.
• Induction chemotherapy followed by radiotherapy (TAX323)
For the induction treatment of locally advanced inoperable SCCHN, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m2 intravenously over 1 hour, on day one, followed by fluorouracil as a continuous intravenous infusion at 750 mg/m2 per day for five days. This regimen is administered every 3 weeks for 4 cycles. Following chemotherapy, patients should receive radiotherapy. [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].
• Induction chemotherapy followed by chemoradiotherapy (TAX324)
For the induction treatment of patients with locally advanced (unresectable, low surgical cure, or organ preservation) SCCHN, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion on day 1, followed by cisplatin 100 mg/m2 administered as a 30-minute to 3 hour infusion, followed by fluorouracil 1000 mg/m2/day as a continuous infusion from day 1 to day 4. This regimen is administered every 3 weeks for 3 cycles. Following chemotherapy, patients should receive chemoradiotherapy [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.6 Premedication Regimen

All patients should be premedicated with oral corticosteroids (see below for prostate cancer) such as dexamethasone 16 mg per day (e.g., 8 mg twice daily) for 3 days starting 1 day prior to Docetaxel Injection administration in order to reduce the incidence and severity of fluid retention as well as the severity of hypersensitivity reactions [see Boxed Warning, Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

For hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer, given the concurrent use of prednisone, the recommended premedication regimen is oral dexamethasone 8 mg, at 12 hours, 3 hours and 1 hour before the Docetaxel Injection infusion [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

2.7 Dosage Adjustments During Treatment

Breast Cancer

Patients who are dosed initially at 100 mg/m2 and who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than 1 week, or severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions during Docetaxel Injection therapy should have the dosage adjusted from 100 mg/m2 to 75 mg/m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions, the dosage should either be decreased from 75 mg/m2 to 55 mg/m2 or the treatment should be discontinued. Conversely, patients who are dosed initially at 60 mg/m2 and who do not experience febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than 1 week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions, or severe peripheral neuropathy during Docetaxel Injection therapy may tolerate higher doses. Patients who develop ≥grade 3 peripheral neuropathy should have Docetaxel Injection treatment discontinued entirely.

Combination Therapy with Docetaxel Injection in the Adjuvant Treatment of Breast Cancer

Docetaxel Injection in combination with doxorubicin and cyclophosphamide should be administered when the neutrophil count is ≥1,500 cells/mm3. Patients who experience febrile neutropenia should receive G-CSF in all subsequent cycles. Patients who continue to experience this reaction should remain on G-CSF and have their Docetaxel Injection dose reduced to 60 mg/ m2. Patients who experience grade 3 or 4 stomatitis should have their Docetaxel Injection dose decreased to 60 mg/ m2. Patients who experience severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions or moderate neurosensory signs and/or symptoms during Docetaxel Injection therapy should have their dosage of Docetaxel Injection reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions at 60 mg/ m2, treatment should be discontinued.

Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Monotherapy with Docetaxel Injection for NSCLC treatment after failure of prior platinum-based chemotherapy

Patients who are dosed initially at 75 mg/m2 and who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than one week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions, or other grade 3/4 non-hematological toxicities during Docetaxel Injection treatment should have treatment withheld until resolution of the toxicity and then resumed at 55 mg/m2. Patients who develop ≥grade 3 peripheral neuropathy should have Docetaxel Injection treatment discontinued entirely.

Combination therapy with Docetaxel Injection for chemotherapy-naïve NSCLC

For patients who are dosed initially at Docetaxel Injection 75 mg/m2 in combination with cisplatin, and whose nadir of platelet count during the previous course of therapy is <25,000 cells/mm3, in patients who experience febrile neutropenia, and in patients with serious non-hematologic toxicities, the Docetaxel Injection dosage in subsequent cycles should be reduced to 65 mg/m2. In patients who require a further dose reduction, a dose of 50 mg/m2 is recommended. For cisplatin dosage adjustments, see manufacturers' prescribing information.

Prostate Cancer

Combination therapy with Docetaxel Injection for hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer

Docetaxel Injection should be administered when the neutrophil count is ≥1,500 cells/mm3. Patients who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than one week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions or moderate neurosensory signs and/or symptoms during Docetaxel Injection therapy should have the dosage of Docetaxel Injection reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/ m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions at 60 mg/m2, the treatment should be discontinued.

Gastric or Head and Neck Cancer

Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil in gastric cancer or head and neck cancer

Patients treated with Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil must receive antiemetics and appropriate hydration according to current institutional guidelines. In both studies, G-CSF was recommended during the second and/or subsequent cycles in case of febrile neutropenia, or documented infection with neutropenia, or neutropenia lasting more than 7 days. If an episode of febrile neutropenia, prolonged neutropenia or neutropenic infection occurs despite G-CSF use, the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. If subsequent episodes of complicated neutropenia occur the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 60 mg/m2 to 45 mg/m2. In case of grade 4 thrombocytopenia the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. Patients should not be retreated with subsequent cycles of Docetaxel Injection until neutrophils recover to a level >1,500 cells/mm3 and platelets recover to a level >100,000 cells/mm3. Discontinue treatment if these toxicities persist [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Recommended dose modifications for toxicities in patients treated with Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil are shown in Table 1.

Table 1 Recommended Dose Modifications for Toxicities in Patients Treated with Docetaxel Injection in Combination with Cisplatin and Fluorouracil

Toxicity

Dosage adjustment

Diarrhea grade 3

First episode: reduce fluorouracil dose by 20%.

Second episode: then reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Diarrhea grade 4

First episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection and fluorouracil doses by 20%.

Second episode: discontinue treatment.

Stomatitis/mucositis grade 3

First episode: reduce fluorouracil dose by 20%.

Second episode: stop fluorouracil only, at all subsequent cycles.

Third episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Stomatitis/mucositis grade 4

First episode: stop fluorouracil only, at all subsequent cycles.

Second episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Liver dysfunction:

In case of AST/ALT >2.5 to ≤5 × ULN and AP ≤2.5 × ULN, or AST/ALT >1.5 to ≤5 × ULN and AP >2.5 to ≤5 × ULN, Docetaxel Injection should be reduced by 20%.

In case of AST/ALT >5 × ULN and/or AP >5 × ULN Docetaxel Injection should be stopped.

The dose modifications for cisplatin and fluorouracil in the gastric cancer study are provided below:

Cisplatin dose modifications and delays

Peripheral neuropathy: A neurological examination should be performed before entry into the study, and then at least every 2 cycles and at the end of treatment. In the case of neurological signs or symptoms, more frequent examinations should be performed and the following dose modifications can be made according to NCIC-CTC grade:
• Grade 2: Reduce cisplatin dose by 20%. • Grade 3: Discontinue treatment.
Ototoxicity: In the case of grade 3 toxicity, discontinue treatment.

Nephrotoxicity: In the event of a rise in serum creatinine ≥grade 2 (>1.5 × normal value) despite adequate rehydration, CrCl should be determined before each subsequent cycle and the following dose reductions should be considered (see Table 2).

For other cisplatin dosage adjustments, also refer to the manufacturers’ prescribing information.

Table 2 Dose Reductions for Evaluation of Creatinine Clearance

Creatinine clearance result before next cycle

Cisplatin dose next cycle

CrCl ≥60 mL/min

Full dose of cisplatin was given. CrCl was to be repeated before each treatment cycle.

CrCl between 40 and 59 mL/min

Dose of cisplatin was reduced by 50% at subsequent cycle. If CrCl was >60 mL/min at end of cycle, full cisplatin dose was reinstituted at the next cycle.

If no recovery was observed, then cisplatin was omitted from the next treatment cycle.

CrCl <40 mL/min

Dose of cisplatin was omitted in that treatment cycle only.

If CrCl was still <40 mL/min at the end of cycle, cisplatin was discontinued.

If CrCl was >40 and <60 mL/min at end of cycle, a 50% cisplatin dose was given at the next cycle.

If CrCl was >60 mL/min at end of cycle, full cisplatin dose was given at next cycle

CrCl = Creatinine clearance

Fluorouracil dose modifications and treatment delays

For diarrhea and stomatitis, see Table 1.

In the event of grade 2 or greater plantar-palmar toxicity, fluorouracil should be stopped until recovery. The fluorouracil dosage should be reduced by 20%.

For other greater than grade 3 toxicities, except alopecia and anemia, chemotherapy should be delayed (for a maximum of 2 weeks from the planned date of infusion) until resolution to grade ≤1 and then recommenced, if medically appropriate.

For other fluorouracil dosage adjustments, also refer to the manufacturers’ prescribing information.

Combination Therapy with Strong CYP3A4 inhibitors:

Avoid using concomitant strong CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., ketoconazole, itraconazole, clarithromycin, atazanavir, indinavir, nefazodone, nelfinavir, ritonavir, saquinavir, telithromycin and voriconazole). There are no clinical data with a dose adjustment in patients receiving strong CYP3A4 inhibitors. Based on extrapolation from a pharmacokinetic study with ketoconazole in 7 patients, consider a 50% Docetaxel Injection dose reduction if patients require co-administration of a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.8 Administration Precautions

Docetaxel Injection is a cytotoxic anticancer drug and, as with other potentially toxic compounds, caution should be exercised when handling and preparing Docetaxel Injection solutions. The use of gloves is recommended. Please refer to [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16.3)].

If Docetaxel Injection or diluted solution for intravenous infusion should come into contact with the skin, immediately and thoroughly wash with soap and water. If Docetaxel Injection or diluted solution for intravenous infusion should come into contact with mucosa, immediately and thoroughly wash with water.

Contact of the Docetaxel Injection with plasticized PVC equipment or devices used to prepare solutions for infusion is not recommended. In order to minimize patient exposure to the plasticizer DEHP (di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate), which may be leached from PVC infusion bags or sets, the final Docetaxel Injection dilution for infusion should be stored in bottles (glass, polypropylene) or plastic bags (polypropylene, polyolefin) and administered through polyethylene-lined administration sets.

Docetaxel Injection requires dilution prior to administration. Please follow the preparation instructions provided below.

2.9 Preparation and Administration

Docetaxel Injection (10 mg/mL) requires NO prior dilution with a diluent and is ready to add to the infusion solution.

Dilution for Infusion
1. Aseptically withdraw the required amount of Docetaxel Injection solution (10 mg docetaxel/mL) with a calibrated syringe and inject (as a single injection) into a 250 mL infusion bag or bottle of either 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution or 5% Dextrose solution to produce a final concentration of 0.3 to 0.74 mg/mL. If a dose greater than 200 mg of Docetaxel Injection is required, use a larger volume of the infusion vehicle so that a concentration of 0.74 mg/mL Docetaxel Injection is not exceeded. 2. Thoroughly mix the infusion bag or bottle manually by gentle inversion and rotation in a controlled manner and avoid foaming. Shaking or vigorous agitation should be avoided during preparation and transportation to the patient for administration. 3. As with all parenteral products, Docetaxel Injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. If the Docetaxel Injection vial or diluted solution is not clear or appears to have precipitation, these should be discarded.
The Docetaxel Injection diluted solution for infusion should be administered intravenously as a 1-hour infusion under ambient room temperature below 25°C (77°F) and lighting conditions.

2.10 Stability

Docetaxel Injection infusion solution, if stored between 2°C and 25°C (36°F and 77°F) is stable for 4 hours in either 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution or 5% Dextrose solution. Use within 4 hours including storage and administration. Do not freeze infusion solution.
Enalapril Maleate

Enalapril Maleate

Hypertension

In patients who are currently being treated with a diuretic, symptomatic hypotension occasionally may occur following the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets, USP. The diuretic should, if possible, be discontinued for 2 to 3 days before beginning therapy with enalapril maleate tablets, USP to reduce the likelihood of hypotension (see WARNINGS). If the patient's blood pressure is not controlled with enalapril maleate tablets USP alone, diuretic therapy may be resumed.

If the diuretic cannot be discontinued an initial dose of 2.5 mg should be used under medical supervision for at least 2 hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).

The recommended initial dose in patients not on diuretics is 5 mg once a day. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. The usual dosage range is 10 mg to 40 mg per day administered in a single dose or two divided doses. In some patients treated once daily, the antihypertensive effect may diminish toward the end of the dosing interval. In such patients, an increase in dosage or twice daily administration should be considered. If blood pressure is not controlled with enalapril maleate tablets, USP alone, a diuretic may be added. Concomitant administration of enalapril maleate tablets, USP with potassium supplements, potassium salt substitutes, or potassium-sparing diuretics may lead to increases of serum potassium (see PRECAUTIONS).

Dosage Adjustment in Hypertensive Patients with Renal Impairment

The usual dose of enalapril maleate tablets, USP is recommended for patients with a creatinine clearance >30 mL/min (serum creatinine of up to approximately 3 mg/dL). For patients with creatinine clearance ≤30 mL/min (serum creatinine ≥3 mg/dL), the first dose is 2.5 mg once daily. The dosage may be titrated upward until blood pressure is controlled or to a maximum of 40 mg daily.
* See WARNINGS, Anaphylactoid Reactions During Membrane Exposure. † Dosage on nondialysis days should be adjusted depending on the blood pressure response.
Renal Status

Creatinine-Clearance mL/min

Initial Dose mg/day

Normal Renal Function

>80 mL/min

5 mg

Mild Impairment

≤80 >30 mL/min

5 mg

Moderate to Severe Impairment

≤30 mL/min

2.5 mg

Dialysis Patients*

—

2.5 mg on dialysis days†

Heart Failure

Enalapril maleate tablets, USP are indicated for the treatment of symptomatic heart failure, usually in combination with diuretics and digitalis. In the placebo-controlled studies that demonstrated improved survival, patients were titrated as tolerated up to 40 mg, administered in two divided doses.

The recommended initial dose is 2.5 mg. The recommended dosing range is 2.5 mg to 20 mg given twice a day. Doses should be titrated upward, as tolerated, over a period of a few days or weeks. The maximum daily dose administered in clinical trials was 40 mg in divided doses.

After the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets USP, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least 2 hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). If possible, the dose of any concomitant diuretic should be reduced which may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets USP does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension.

Asymptomatic Left Ventricular Dysfunction

In the trial that demonstrated efficacy, patients were started on 2.5 mg twice daily and were titrated as tolerated to the targeted daily dose of 20 mg (in divided doses).

After the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets USP, the patient should be observed under medical supervision for at least 2 hours and until blood pressure has stabilized for at least an additional hour. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). If possible, the dose of any concomitant diuretic should be reduced which may diminish the likelihood of hypotension. The appearance of hypotension after the initial dose of enalapril maleate tablets, USP does not preclude subsequent careful dose titration with the drug, following effective management of the hypotension.

Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Heart Failure and Renal Impairment or Hyponatremia

In patients with heart failure who have hyponatremia (serum sodium less than 130 mEq/L) or with serum creatinine greater than 1.6 mg/dL, therapy should be initiated at 2.5 mg daily under close medical supervision (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION, Heart Failure; WARNINGS; and PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). The dose may be increased to 2.5 mg b.i.d., then 5 mg b.i.d. and higher as needed, usually at intervals of 4 days or more if at the time of dosage adjustment there is not excessive hypotension or significant deterioration of renal function. The maximum daily dose is 40 mg.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients

The usual recommended starting dose is 0.08 mg/kg (up to 5 mg) once daily. Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 0.58 mg/kg (or in excess of 40 mg) have not been studied in pediatric patients (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Clinical Pharmacology in Pediatric Patients).

Enalapril maleate tablets, USP are not recommended in neonates and in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate <30 mL/min/1.73 m2, as no data are available.

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 1 mg/mL Suspension)

Add 50 mL of Bicitra®1 to a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 20 mg tablets of enalapril maleate tablets and shake for at least 2 minutes. Let concentrate stand for 60 minutes. Following the 60 minute hold time, shake the concentrate for an additional minute. Add 150 mL of Ora-Sweet SF™2 to the concentrate in the PET bottle and shake the suspension to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2° to 8°C (36° to 46°F) and can be stored for up to 30 days. Shake the suspension before each use.
Budesonide Suspension

Budesonide Suspension

The recommended starting dose and highest recommended dose of budesonide inhalation suspension, based on prior asthma therapy, are listed in the following table.

Previous Therapy

Recommended Starting Dose

Highest Recommended Dose

Bronchodilators alone

0.5 mg total daily dose administered either once daily or twice daily in divided doses

0.5 mg total daily dose

Inhaled Corticosteroids

0.5 mg total daily dose administered either once daily or twice daily in divided doses

1 mg total daily dose

Oral Corticosteroids

1 mg total daily dose administered either as 0.5 mg twice daily or 1 mg once daily

1 mg total daily dose

2.1 Dosing Recommendations

Dosing recommendations based on previous therapy are as follows:
• Bronchodilators alone: 0.5 mg once daily or 0.25 mg twice daily • Inhaled corticosteroids: 0.5 mg once daily or 0.25 mg twice daily up to 0.5 mg twice daily • Oral corticosteroids: 0.5 mg twice daily or 1 mg once daily
In symptomatic children not responding to non-steroidal therapy, a starting dose of 0.25 mg once daily may be considered. If once-daily treatment does not provide adequate control, the total daily dose should be increased and/or administered as a divided dose. In all patients, it is desirable to downward-titrate to the lowest effective dose once asthma stability is achieved.

2.2 Directions for Use

Budesonide inhalation suspension should be administered via jet nebulizer connected to an air compressor with an adequate air flow, equipped with a mouthpiece or suitable face mask. Ultrasonic nebulizers are not suitable for the adequate administration of budesonide inhalation suspension and, therefore, are NOT recommended.

The effects of mixing budesonide inhalation suspension with other nebulizable medications have not been adequately assessed. Budesonide inhalation suspension should be administered separately in the nebulizer [see PATIENT COUNSELING INFORMATION, Administration with a jet nebulizer (17.1)].

A Pari-LC-Jet Plus Nebulizer (with face mask or mouthpiece) connected to a Pari Master compressor was used to deliver budesonide inhalation suspension to each patient in 3 U.S. controlled clinical studies. The safety and efficacy of budesonide inhalation suspension delivered by other nebulizers and compressors have not been established.
Omeprazole

Omeprazole

Omeprazole delayed-release capsules, USP should be taken before eating. In the clinical trials, antacids were used concomitantly with omeprazole.

Patients should be informed that the omeprazole delayed-release capsule should be swallowed whole.

For patients unable to swallow an intact capsule, alternative administration options are available [seeDOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION(2.8)]

2.1 Short-Term Treatment of Active Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose of omeprazole delayed-release capsules, USP is 20 mg once daily. Most patients heal within four weeks. Some patients may require an additional four weeks of therapy.

2.2 H. pylori Eradication for the Reduction of the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

Triple Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin/amoxicillin) — The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg plus clarithromycin 500 mg plus amoxicillin 1000 mg each given twice daily for 10 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 18 days of omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin) — The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsules 40 mg once daily plus clarithromycin 500 mg three times daily for 14 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 14 days of omeprazole 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

2.3 Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose is 40 mg once daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.4 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with symptomatic GERD and no esophageal lesions is 20 mg daily for up to 4 weeks. The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with erosive esophagitis and accompanying symptoms due to GERD is 20 mg daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.5 Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

The recommended adult oral dose is 20 mg daily. Controlled studies do not extend beyond 12 months [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.4)]

2.6 Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions

The dosage of omeprazole delayed-release capsules in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 120 mg three times daily have been administered. Daily dosages of greater than 80 mg should be administered in divided doses. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with omeprazole for more than 5 years.

2.7 Pediatric Patients

For the treatment of GERD and maintenance of healing of erosive esophagitis, the recommended daily dose for pediatric patients 2 to 16 years of age is as follows:
Patient Weight Omeprazole Daily Dose
10 < 20 kg

10 mg

≥ 20 kg

20 mg

On a per kg basis, the doses of omeprazole required to heal erosive esophagitis in pediatric patients are greater than those for adults.

Alternative administrative options can be used for pediatric patients unable to swallow an intact capsule [seeDOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.8) ].

2.8 Alternative Administration Options

Omeprazole is available as a delayed-release capsule.

For patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, the contents of an omeprazole delayed-release capsule can be added to applesauce. One tablespoon of applesauce should be added to an empty bowl and the capsule should be opened. All of the pellets inside the capsule should be carefully emptied on the applesauce. The pellets should be mixed with the applesauce and then swallowed immediately with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the pellets. The applesauce used should not be hot and should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. The pellets should not be chewed or crushed. The pellets/applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.
Arsenicum Album 200c

Arsenicum Album 200c

2.4 Olanzapine for Injection: Agitation Associated with Schizophrenia and Bipolar I Mania

Dose Selection for Agitated Adult Patients with Schizophrenia and Bipolar I Mania

The efficacy of intramuscular olanzapine for injection in controlling agitation in these disorders was demonstrated in a dose range of 2.5 mg to 10 mg. The recommended dose in these patients is 10 mg. A lower dose of 5 or 7.5 mg may be considered when clinical factors warrant [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.3)]. If agitation warranting additional intramuscular doses persists following the initial dose, subsequent doses up to 10 mg may be given. However, the efficacy of repeated doses of intramuscular olanzapine for injection in agitated patients has not been systematically evaluated in controlled clinical trials. Also, the safety of total daily doses greater than 30 mg, or 10 mg injections given more frequently than 2 hours after the initial dose, and 4 hours after the second dose have not been evaluated in clinical trials. Maximal dosing of intramuscular olanzapine (e.g., 3 doses of 10 mg administered 2 to 4 hours apart) may be associated with a substantial occurrence of significant orthostatic hypotension [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.6)]. Thus, it is recommended that patients requiring subsequent intramuscular injections be assessed for orthostatic hypotension prior to the administration of any subsequent doses of intramuscular olanzapine for injection. The administration of an additional dose to a patient with a clinically significant postural change in systolic blood pressure is not recommended.

If ongoing olanzapine therapy is clinically indicated, oral olanzapine may be initiated in a range of 5 to 20 mg/day as soon as clinically appropriate.

Intramuscular Dosing in Special Populations

A dose of 5 mg/injection should be considered for geriatric patients or when other clinical factors warrant. A lower dose of 2.5 mg/injection should be considered for patients who otherwise might be debilitated, be predisposed to hypotensive reactions, or be more pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.12), DRUG INTERACTIONS (7), and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

Administration of Olanzapine for Injection

Olanzapine for injection is intended for intramuscular use only. Do not administer intravenously or subcutaneously. Inject slowly, deep into the muscle mass.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Directions for Preparation of Olanzapine for Injection with Sterile Water for Injection

Dissolve the contents of the vial using 2.1 mL of Sterile Water for Injection to provide a solution containing approximately 5 mg/mL of olanzapine. The resulting solution should appear clear and yellow. Olanzapine for injection reconstituted with Sterile Water for Injection should be used immediately (within 1 hour) after reconstitution. Discard any unused portion.

The following table provides injection volumes for delivering various doses of intramuscular olanzapine for injection reconstituted with Sterile Water for Injection.

Dose, mg Olanzapine

Volume of Injection, mL

10

Withdraw total contents of vial

7.5

1.5

5

1

2.5

0.5

Physical Incompatibility Information

Olanzapine for injection should be reconstituted only with Sterile Water for Injection. Olanzapine for injection should not be combined in a syringe with diazepam injection because precipitation occurs when these products are mixed. Lorazepam injection should not be used to reconstitute olanzapine for injection as this combination results in a delayed reconstitution time. Olanzapine for injection should not be combined in a syringe with haloperidol injection because the resulting low pH has been shown to degrade olanzapine over time.
Dexmethylphenidate Hydr...

Dexmethylphenidate Hydrochloride

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets are administered twice daily, at least 4 hours apart. Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets may be administered with or without food.

Dosage should be individualized according to the needs and responses of the patient.

Patients New to Methylphenidate

The recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets for patients who are not currently taking racemic methylphenidate, or for patients who are on stimulants other than methylphenidate, is 5 mg/day (2.5 mg twice daily).

Dosage may be adjusted in 2.5 to 5 mg increments to a maximum of 20 mg/day (10 mg twice daily). In general, dosage adjustments may proceed at approximately weekly intervals.

Patients Currently Using Methylphenidate

For patients currently using methylphenidate, the recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets is half the dose of racemic methylphenidate. The maximum recommended dose is 20 mg/day (10 mg twice daily).

Maintenance/Extended Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long the patient with ADHD should be treated with dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets. It is generally agreed, however, that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride tablets for extended periods in patients with ADHD should periodically re-evaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient with periods off medication to assess the patient’s functioning without pharmacotherapy. Improvement may be sustained when the drug is either temporarily or permanently discontinued.

Dose Reduction and Discontinuation

If paradoxical aggravation of symptoms or other adverse events occur, the dosage should be reduced, or, if necessary, the drug should be discontinued.

If improvement is not observed after appropriate dosage adjustment over a 1-month period, the drug should be discontinued.
Amlodipine And Valsarta...

Amlodipine And Valsartan

2.1     General Considerations

Dose once daily. The dosage can be increased after 1 to 2 weeks of therapy to a maximum of one 10/320 mg tablet once daily as needed to control blood pressure. The majority of the antihypertensive effect is attained within 2 weeks after initiation of therapy or a change in dose.

Amlodipine and valsartan tablets may be administered with or without food.

Amlodipine and valsartan tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

2.2     Add-on Therapy

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with amlodipine (or another dihydropyridine calcium-channel blocker) alone or with valsartan (or another angiotensin II receptor blocker) alone may be switched to combination therapy with amlodipine and valsartan tablets.

A patient who experiences dose-limiting adverse reactions on either component alone may be switched to amlodipine and valsartan tablets containing a lower dose of that component in combination with the other to achieve similar blood pressure reductions. The clinical response to amlodipine and valsartan tablets should be subsequently evaluated and if blood pressure remains uncontrolled after 3 to 4 weeks of therapy, the dose may be titrated up to a maximum of 10/320 mg.

2.3     Replacement Therapy

For convenience, patients receiving amlodipine and valsartan from separate tablets may instead wish to receive amlodipine and valsartan tablets containing the same component doses.

2.4     Initial Therapy

A patient may be initiated on amlodipine and valsartan tablets if it is unlikely that control of blood pressure would be achieved with a single agent. The usual starting dose is amlodipine and valsartan tablets 5/160 mg once daily in patients who are not volume-depleted.
Mucus Relief Severe Con...

Mucus Relief Severe Congestion And Cough Maximum Strength

Dosage must be adjusted to the individual needs of each patient but is typically in the range of 20 mEq per day for the prevention of hypokalemia to 40-100 mEq per day or more for the treatment of potassium depletion.

The usual adult dose is 20-100 mEq of potassium per day (one KLOR-CON® 20 mEq packet 1 to 5 times daily after meals or one KLOR-CON® /25 25 mEq packet 1 to 4 times daily after meals).

The contents of each KLOR-CON® packet should be dissolved in at least 4 ounces of cold water or other beverage. The contents of each KLOR-CON® /25 packet should be dissolved in at least 5 ounces of cold water or other beverage. These preparations, like other potassium supplements, must be properly diluted to avoid the possibility of gastrointestinal irritation.
Estradiol Patch

Estradiol Patch

Generally, when estrogen is prescribed for a postmenopausal woman with a uterus, a progestin should be considered to reduce the risk of endometrial cancer. A woman without a uterus does not need a progestin. In some cases, however, hysterectomized women with a history of endometriosis may need a progestin [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2, 5.14)].

Use of estrogen-alone or in combination with a progestin, should be with the lowest effective dose and the shortest duration consistent with treatment goals and risks for the individual woman. Postmenopausal women should be reevaluated periodically as clinically appropriate to determine whether treatment is still necessary.

The adhesive side of estradiol transdermal system should be placed on a clean, dry area of the trunk of the body (including the abdomen or buttocks). Estradiol transdermal system should not be applied to the breasts.

Estradiol transdermal system should be replaced twice weekly. The sites of application must be rotated, with an interval of at least 1 week allowed between applications to a particular site. The area selected should not be oily, damaged, or irritated. The waistline should be avoided, since tight clothing may rub the system off. The system should be applied immediately after opening the pouch and removing the protective liner. The system should be pressed firmly in place with the palm of the hand for about 10 seconds, making sure there is good contact, especially around the edges. In the event that a system should fall off, the same system may be reapplied. If the same system cannot be reapplied, a new system should be applied to another location. In either case, the original treatment schedule should be continued. If a woman has forgotten to apply a patch, she should apply a new patch as soon as possible. The new patch should be applied on the original treatment schedule. The interruption of treatment in women taking estradiol transdermal system might increase the likelihood of breakthrough bleeding, spotting and recurrence of symptoms.

2.1 Moderate to Severe Vasomotor Symptoms

Start therapy with estradiol transdermal system 0.0375 mg per day applied to the skin twice weekly. Dosage adjustment should be guided by the clinical response. In women not currently taking oral estrogens or in women switching from another estradiol transdermal therapy, treatment with estradiol transdermal system may be initiated at once. In women who are currently taking oral estrogens, treatment with estradiol transdermal system should be initiated 1 week after withdrawal of oral hormone therapy, or sooner if menopausal symptoms reappear in less than 1 week. Attempts to taper or discontinue the medication should be made at 3 to 6 month intervals.

Estradiol transdermal system may be given continuously in patients who do not have an intact uterus. In those patients with an intact uterus, estradiol transdermal system may be given on a cyclic schedule (for example, 3 weeks on drug followed by 1 week off drug).

2.2 Moderate to Severe Symptoms of Vulvar and Vaginal Atrophy

Start therapy with estradiol transdermal system 0.0375 mg per day applied to the skin twice weekly. Dosage adjustment should be guided by the clinical response. Attempts to taper or discontinue the medication should be made at 3 to 6 month intervals.

In women not currently taking oral estrogens or in women switching from another estradiol transdermal therapy, treatment with estradiol transdermal system may be initiated at once. In women who are currently taking oral estrogens, treatment with estradiol transdermal system should be initiated 1 week after withdrawal of oral hormone therapy, or sooner if menopausal symptoms reappear in less than 1 week.

Estradiol transdermal system may be given continuously in patients who do not have an intact uterus. In those patients with an intact uterus, estradiol transdermal system may be given on a cyclic schedule (for example, 3 weeks on drug followed by 1 week off drug).

2.3 Hypoestrogenism Due to Hypogonadism, Castration, or Primary Ovarian Failure

2.4 Prevention of Postmenopausal Osteoporosis

Start therapy with estradiol transdermal system 0.025 mg per day applied to the skin twice weekly.

In women not currently taking oral estrogen or in women switching from another estradiol transdermal therapy, treatment with estradiol transdermal system may be initiated at once. In women who are currently taking oral estrogens, treatment with estradiol transdermal system should be initiated 1 week after withdrawal of oral hormone therapy, or sooner if menopausal symptoms reappear in less than 1 week.

Estradiol transdermal system may be given continuously in patients who do not have an intact uterus. In those patients with an intact uterus, estradiol transdermal system may be given on a cyclic schedule (for example, 3 weeks on drug followed by 1 week off drug).
Valsartan And Hydrochlo...

Valsartan And Hydrochlorothiazide

2.1     General Considerations

The usual starting dose is Valsartan and Hydrochlorothiazide Tablets, USP 160/12.5 mg once daily. The dosage can be increased after 1 to 2 weeks of therapy to a maximum of one 320/25 tablet once daily as needed to control blood pressure [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Maximum antihypertensive effects are attained within 2 to 4 weeks after a change in dose.

2.2     Add-On Therapy

A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with valsartan (or another ARB) alone or hydrochlorothiazide alone may be switched to combination therapy with valsartan and hydrochlorothiazide.

A patient who experiences dose-limiting adverse reactions on either component alone may be switched to valsartan and hydrochlorothiazide containing a lower dose of that component in combination with the other to achieve similar blood pressure reductions. The clinical response to valsartan and hydrochlorothiazide should be subsequently evaluated and if blood pressure remains uncontrolled after 3 to 4 weeks of therapy, the dose may be titrated up to a maximum of 320/25 mg.

2.3     Replacement Therapy

Valsartan and Hydrochlorothiazide Tablets, USP may be substituted for the titrated components.

2.4     Initial Therapy

Valsartan and Hydrochlorothiazide Tablets, USP are not recommended as initial therapy in patients with intravascular volume depletion [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

2.5     Use with Other Antihypertensive Drugs

Valsartan and Hydrochlorothiazide Tablets, USP may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.
Risperidone

Risperidone

Table 1. Recommended Daily Dosage by Indication Initial Dose Titration (Increments) Target Dose Effective Dose Range
Schizophrenia: adults (2.1)

2 mg

1 to 2 mg

4 to 8 mg

4 to 16 mg

Schizophrenia: adolescents (2.2)

0.5 mg

0.5 to 1 mg

3 mg

1 to 6 mg

Bipolar mania: adults (2.2)

2 to 3 mg

1 mg

1 to 6 mg

1 to 6 mg

Bipolar mania: children and adolescents (2.2)

0.5 mg

0.5 to 1 mg

1 to 2.5 mg

1 to 6 mg

Irritability in autistic disorder (2.3)

0.25 mgCan increase to0.5 mg by Day 4:(body weight less than 20 kg)0.5 mgCan increase to1 mg by Day 4:(body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

After Day 4, at intervals of > 2 weeks:0.25 mg(body weight less than 20 kg)0.5 mg(body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

0.5 mg:(body weight less than 20 kg)1 mg:(body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg)

0.5 to 3 mg

Severe Renal and Hepatic Impairment in Adults: use a lower starting dose of 0.5 mg twice daily. May increase to dosages above 1.5 mg twice daily at intervals of one week or longer.

2.1 Schizophrenia

Adults

Usual Initial Dose

Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP can be administered once or twice daily. Initial dosing is 2 mg per day. May increase the dose at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 to 2 mg per day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 4 to 8 mg per day. In some patients, slower titration may be appropriate. Efficacy has been demonstrated in a range of 4 mg to 16 mg per day. However, doses above 6 mg per day for twice daily dosing were not demonstrated to be more efficacious than lower doses, were associated with more extrapyramidal symptoms and other adverse effects, and are generally not recommended. In a single study supporting once-daily dosing, the efficacy results were generally stronger for 8 mg than for 4 mg. The safety of doses above 16 mg per day has not been evaluated in clinical trials [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

Adolescents

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg per day, as tolerated, to a recommended dose of 3 mg per day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of adolescent patients with schizophrenia at doses between 1 mg to 6 mg per day, no additional benefit was observed above 3 mg per day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg per day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

While it is unknown how long a patient with schizophrenia should remain on risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP the effectiveness of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP 2 mg per day to 8 mg per day at delaying relapse was demonstrated in a controlled trial in adult patients who had been clinically stable for at least 4 weeks and were then followed for a period of 1 to 2 years [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. Both adult and adolescent patients who respond acutely should generally be maintained on their effective dose beyond the acute episode. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address reinitiation of treatment, it is recommended that after an interval off risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP the initial titration schedule should be followed.

Switching From Other Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching schizophrenic patients from other antipsychotics to risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP or treating patients with concomitant antipsychotics.

2.2 Bipolar Mania

Usual Dose

Adults

The initial dose range is 2 mg to 3 mg per day. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 1 mg per day. The effective dose range is 1 mg to 6 mg per day, as studied in the short-term, placebo-controlled trials. In these trials, short-term (3 week) anti-manic efficacy was demonstrated in a flexible dosage range of 1 mg to 6 mg per day [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.2, 14.3)]. Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP doses higher than 6 mg per day were not studied.

Pediatrics

The initial dose is 0.5 mg once daily, administered as a single-daily dose in the morning or evening. The dose may be adjusted at intervals of 24 hours or greater, in increments of 0.5 mg or 1 mg per day, as tolerated, to the recommended target dose of 1 mg to 2.5 mg per day. Although efficacy has been demonstrated in studies of pediatric patients with bipolar mania at doses between 0.5 mg and 6 mg per day, no additional benefit was observed above 2.5 mg per day, and higher doses were associated with more adverse events. Doses higher than 6 mg per day have not been studied.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from administering half the daily dose twice daily.

Maintenance Therapy

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to guide a clinician in the longer-term management of a patient who improves during treatment of an acute manic episode with risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP. While it is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment beyond an acute response in mania is desirable, both for maintenance of the initial response and for prevention of new manic episodes, there are no systematically obtained data to support the use of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP in such longer-term treatment (i.e., beyond 3 weeks). The physician who elects to use risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 Irritability Associated with Autistic Disorder – Pediatrics (Children and Adolescents)

The dosage of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP should be individualized according to the response and tolerability of the patient. The total daily dose of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP can be administered once daily, or half the total daily dose can be administered twice daily.

For patients with body weight less than 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.25 mg per day. For patients with body weight greater than or equal to 20 kg, initiate dosing at 0.5 mg per day. After a minimum of four days, the dose may be increased to the recommended dose of 0.5 mg per day for patients less than 20 kg and 1.0 mg per day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. Maintain this dose for a minimum of 14 days. In patients not achieving sufficient clinical response, the dose may be increased at intervals of 2 weeks or greater, in increments of 0.25 mg per day for patients less than 20 kg, or increments of 0.5 mg per day for patients greater than or equal to 20 kg. The effective dose range is 0.5 mg to 3 mg per day. No dosing data are available for children who weigh less than 15 kg.

Once sufficient clinical response has been achieved and maintained, consider gradually lowering the dose to achieve the optimal balance of efficacy and safety. The physician who elects to use risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP for extended periods should periodically re-evaluate the long-term risks and benefits of the drug for the individual patient.

Patients experiencing persistent somnolence may benefit from a once-daily dose administered at bedtime or administering half the daily dose twice daily, or a reduction of the dose.

2.4 Dosing in Patients with Severe Renal or Hepatic Impairment

For patients with severe renal impairment (CLcr < 30 mL/min) or hepatic impairment (10 to 15 points on Child Pugh System), the initial starting dose is 0.5 mg twice daily. The dose may be increased in increments of 0.5 mg or less, administered twice daily. For doses above 1.5 mg twice daily, increase in intervals of one week or greater [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6 and 8.7)].

2.5 Dose Adjustments for Specific Drug Interactions

When risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP are co-administered with enzyme inducers (e.g., carbamazepine), the dose of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP should be increased up to double the patient's usual dose. It may be necessary to decrease the risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP dose when enzyme inducers such as carbamazepine are discontinued [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1)]. Similar effect may be expected with co-administration of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP with other enzyme inducers (e.g., phenytoin, rifampin, and phenobarbital).

When fluoxetine or paroxetine is co-administered with risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP the dose of risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP should be reduced. The risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP dose should not exceed 8 mg per day in adults when co-administered with these drugs. When initiating therapy, risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP should be titrated slowly. It may be necessary to increase the risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP dose when enzyme inhibitors such as fluoxetine or paroxetine are discontinued [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1)].

2.7 Directions for Use of Risperidone Orally Disintegrating Tablets, USP

Tablet Accessing

Risperidone Orally Disintegrating Tablets, USP 0.5 mg, 1 mg, 2 mg, 3 mg and 4 mg

Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP 0.5 mg and 1 mg are supplied in unit-of-use pack of 28 tablets (7 blister cards, each containing 4 tablets) and unit-of-use pack of 30 tablets (3 blister cards, each containing 10 tablets).

Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP 2 mg, 3 mg and 4 mg are supplied in unit-of-use pack of 28 tablets (7 blister cards, each containing 4 tablets).

Do not open the blister until ready to administer. For single tablet removal, separate one of the four or ten blister units by tearing apart at the perforations. Bend the corner where indicated. Peel back foil from the side to expose the tablet. DO NOT push the tablet through the foil because this could damage the tablet.

Tablet Administration

Using dry hands, remove the tablet from the blister unit and immediately place the entire risperidone orally disintegrating tablet, USP on the tongue. The risperidone orally disintegrating tablet, USP should be consumed immediately, as the tablet cannot be stored once removed from the blister unit. Risperidone orally disintegrating tablets, USP disintegrate in the mouth within seconds and can be swallowed subsequently with or without liquid. Patients should not attempt to split or to chew the tablet.
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride

•may be taken with or without water
adults and children 6 years and over

one 10 mg tablet once daily; do not take more than one 10 mg tablet in 24 hours. A 5 mg product may be appropriate for less severe symptoms.

adults 65 years and over

ask a doctor

children under 6 years of age

ask a doctor

consumers with liver or kidney disease

ask a doctor

Other information
•Store between 20º to 25º C (68º to 77º F)
Lamotrigine

Lamotrigine

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Rash: There are suggestions, yet to be proven, that the risk of severe, potentially life-threatening rash may be increased by (1) coadministration of lamotrigine with valproate, (2) exceeding the recommended initial dose of lamotrigine, or (3) exceeding the recommended dose escalation for lamotrigine. However, cases have occurred in the absence of these factors [see Boxed Warning]. Therefore, it is important that the dosing recommendations be followed closely.

The risk of nonserious rash may be increased when the recommended initial dose and/or the rate of dose escalation of lamotrigine is exceeded and in patients with a history of allergy or rash to other AEDs.

Lamotrigine Tablet Starter Kits provide lamotrigine at doses consistent with the recommended titration schedule for the first 5 weeks of treatment, based upon concomitant medications for patients with epilepsy (>12 years of age) and Bipolar I Disorder (≥18 years of age) and are intended to help reduce the potential for rash. The use of lamotrigine Starter Kits is recommended for appropriate patients who are starting or restarting lamotrigine [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16 ).

It is recommended that lamotrigine not be restarted in patients who discontinued due to rash associated with prior treatment with lamotrigine, unless the potential benefits clearly outweigh the risks. If the decision is made to restart a patient who has discontinued lamotrigine, the need to restart with the initial dosing recommendations should be assessed. The greater the interval of time since the previous dose, the greater consideration should be given to restarting with the initial dosing recommendations. If a patient has discontinued lamotrigine for a period of more than 5 half-lives, it is recommended that initial dosing recommendations and guidelines be followed. The half-life of lamotrigine is affected by other concomitant medications [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Lamotrigine Added to Drugs Known to Induce or Inhibit Glucuronidation: Drugs other than those listed in the Clinical Pharmacology section [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)] have not been systematically evaluated in combination with lamotrigine. Because lamotrigine is metabolized predominantly by glucuronic acid conjugation, drugs that are known to induce or inhibit glucuronidation may affect the apparent clearance of lamotrigine and doses of lamotrigine may require adjustment based on clinical response.

Target Plasma Levels for Patients With Epilepsy or Bipolar Disorder: A therapeutic plasma concentration range has not been established for lamotrigine. Dosing of lamotrigine should be based on therapeutic response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:Starting Lamotrigine in Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: Although estrogen-containing oral contraceptives have been shown to increase the clearance of lamotrigine [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], no adjustments to the recommended dose-escalation guidelines for lamotrigine should be necessary solely based on the use of estrogen-containing oral contraceptives. Therefore, dose escalation should follow the recommended guidelines for initiating adjunctive therapy with lamotrigine based on the concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (see Table 1 or Table 5). See below for adjustments to maintenance doses of lamotrigine in women taking estrogen-containing oral contraceptives.

Adjustments to the Maintenance Dose of Lamotrigine In Women Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives:
Taking Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: For women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or rifampin, the maintenance dose of lamotrigine will in most cases need to be increased, by as much as 2-fold over the recommended target maintenance dose, in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Starting Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: In women taking a stable dose of lamotrigine and not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or rifampin, the maintenance dose will in most cases need to be increased by as much as 2-fold in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The dose increases should begin at the same time that the oral contraceptive is introduced and continue, based on clinical response, no more rapidly than 50 to 100 mg/day every week. Dose increases should not exceed the recommended rate (see Table 1 or Table 5) unless lamotrigine plasma levels or clinical response support larger increases. Gradual transient increases in lamotrigine plasma levels may occur during the week of inactive hormonal preparation ("pill-free" week), and these increases will be greater if dose increases are made in the days before or during the week of inactive hormonal preparation. Increased lamotrigine plasma levels could result in additional adverse reactions, such as dizziness, ataxia, and diplopia. If adverse reactions attributable to lamotrigine consistently occur during the "pill-free" week, dose adjustments to the overall maintenance dose may be necessary. Dose adjustments limited to the "pill-free" week are not recommended. For women taking lamotrigine in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or rifampin, no adjustment should be necessary to the dose of lamotrigine. Stopping Estrogen-Containing Oral Contraceptives: For women not taking carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or rifampin, the maintenance dose of lamotrigine will in most cases need to be decreased by as much as 50% in order to maintain a consistent lamotrigine plasma level. The decrease in dose of lamotrigine should not exceed 25% of the total daily dose per week over a 2-week period, unless clinical response or lamotrigine plasma levels indicate otherwise [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. For women taking lamotrigine in addition to carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or rifampin, no adjustment to the dose of lamotrigine should be necessary.
Women and Other Hormonal Contraceptive Preparations or Hormone Replacement Therapy: The effect of other hormonal contraceptive preparations or hormone replacement therapy on the pharmacokinetics of lamotrigine has not been systematically evaluated. It has been reported that ethinylestradiol, not progestogens, increased the clearance of lamotrigine up to 2-fold, and the progestin-only pills had no effect on lamotrigine plasma levels. Therefore, adjustments to the dosage of lamotrigine in the presence of progestogens alone will likely not be needed.

Patients With Hepatic Impairment: Experience in patients with hepatic impairment is limited. Based on a clinical pharmacology study in 24 patients with mild, moderate, and severe liver impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], the following general recommendations can be made. No dosage adjustment is needed in patients with mild liver impairment. Initial, escalation, and maintenance doses should generally be reduced by approximately 25% in patients with moderate and severe liver impairment without ascites and 50% in patients with severe liver impairment with ascites. Escalation and maintenance doses may be adjusted according to clinical response.

Patients With Renal Impairment: Initial doses of lamotrigine should be based on patients' concomitant medications (see Tables 1-3 or Table 5); reduced maintenance doses may be effective for patients with significant renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations ( 8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3 )]. Few patients with severe renal impairment have been evaluated during chronic treatment with lamotrigine. Because there is inadequate experience in this population, lamotrigine should be used with caution in these patients.

Discontinuation Strategy:Epilepsy: For patients receiving lamotrigine in combination with other AEDs, a re-evaluation of all AEDs in the regimen should be considered if a change in seizure control or an appearance or worsening of adverse reactions is observed.

If a decision is made to discontinue therapy with lamotrigine, a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) is recommended unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

Discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, or primidone should prolong the half-life of lamotrigine; discontinuing valproate should shorten the half-life of lamotrigine.

Bipolar Disorder: In the controlled clinical trials, there was no increase in the incidence, type, or severity of adverse reactions following abrupt termination of lamotrigine. In clinical trials in patients with Bipolar Disorder, 2 patients experienced seizures shortly after abrupt withdrawal of lamotrigine. However, there were confounding factors that may have contributed to the occurrence of seizures in these bipolar patients. Discontinuation of lamotrigine should involve a step-wise reduction of dose over at least 2 weeks (approximately 50% per week) unless safety concerns require a more rapid withdrawal [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

2.2 Epilepsy - Adjunctive Therapy

This section provides specific dosing recommendations for patients greater than 12 years of age and patients 2 to 12 years of age. Within each of these age-groups, specific dosing recommendations are provided depending upon concomitant AED or other concomitant medications (Table 1 for patients greater than 12 years of age and Table 2 for patients 2 to 12 years of age). A weight-based dosing guide for patients 2 to 12 years of age on concomitant valproate is provided in Table 3.

Patients Over 12 Years of Age: Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 1.
Table 1. Escalation Epilepsy Regimen for Lamotrigine in Patients Over 12 Years of Age With
For Patients Taking
Valproate *
For Patients Taking

AEDs Other Than

Carbamazepine,

Phenytoin,

Phenobarbital, or

Primidone†, and Not
Taking Valproate
For Patients Taking

Carbamazepine,

Phenytoin,

Phenobarbital, or

Primidone† and Not
Taking Valproate Weeks 1 and 2 25 mg every other day 25 mg every day 50 mg/day Weeks 3 and 4 25 mg every day 50 mg/day
100 mg/day
(in 2 divided doses)
Weeks 5 onwards
to maintenance
Increase by 25 to

50 mg/day every 1 to
2 weeks
Increase by 50 mg/day
every 1 to 2 weeks
Increase by

100 mg/day every 1 to
2 weeks.
Usual

Maintenance
Dose
100 to 200 mg/day

with valproate alone

100 to 400 mg/day with

valproate and other

drugs that induce

glucuronication
(in 1 or 2 divided doses)
225 to 375 mg/day
(in 2 divided doses)
300 to 500 mg/day
(in 2 divided doses)
* Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

† These drugs induce glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7),

Pharmacokinetics (12.3)]. Other drugs which have similar effects include estrogen-containing oral contraceptives and rifampin [see Drug Interactions (7), Pharmacokinetics 12.3)]. Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General Dosing Considerations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin should follow the same dosing titration/maintenance regimen used with drugs that induce glucuronidation and increase clearance.

Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age:Recommended dosing guidelines are summarized in Table 2.

Smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations than those used in clinical trials are recommended because of the suggestion that the risk of rash may be decreased by smaller starting doses and slower dose escalations. Therefore, maintenance doses will take longer to reach in clinical practice than in clinical trials. It may take several weeks to months to achieve an individualized maintenance dose. Maintenance doses in patients weighing less than 30 kg, regardless of age or concomitant AED, may need to be increased as much as 50%, based on clinical response.

Table 2. Escalation Regimen for LAMOTRIGINE in Patients 2 to 12 Years of Age With Epilepsy

For Patients Taking
Valproate *
For Patients Taking

AEDs Other Than

Carbamazepine,

Phenytoin,

Phenobarbital, or

Primidone†, and Not
Taking Valproate
For Patients Taking

Carbamazepine,

Phenytoin,

Phenobarbital, or

Primidone† and Not
Taking Valproate Weeks 1 and 2
0.15 mg/kg/day

in 1 or 2 divided doses,

rounded down to the

nearest whole tablet

(see Table 3 for weight
based dosing guide)
0.3mg/kg/day

in 1 or 2 divided doses,

rounded down to the
nearest whole tablet
0.6mg/kg/day

in 2 divided doses,

rounded down to the
nearest whole tablet Weeks 3 and 4
0.3mg/kg/day

in 1 or 2 divided doses,

rounded down to the

nearest whole tablet

(see Table 3 for weight
based dosing guide)
0.6mg/kg/day

in 2 divided doses,

rounded down to the
nearest whole tablet
1.2mg/kg/day

in 2 divided doses,

rounded down to the
nearest whole tablet
Weeks 5

onwards to
maintenance
The dose should be

increased every 1 to

2 weeks as follows:

calculate

0.3 mg/kg/day, round

this amount down to

the nearest whole

tablet, and add this

amount to the

previously
administered daily dose
The dose should be

increased every 1 to

2 weeks as follows:

calculate 0.6 mg/kg/day,

round this amount down

to the nearest whole

tablet, and add this

amount to the previously
administered daily dose
The dose should be

increased every 1 to

2 weeks as follows:

calculate 1.2 mg/kg/day,

round this amount down

to the nearest whole

tablet, and add this

amount to the previously
administered daily dose
Usual

Maintenance
Dose
1 to 5mg/kg/day

(maximum

200 mg/day in 1 or

2 divided doses).

1 to 3mg/kg/day with
valproate alone
4.5 to 7.5mg/kg/day

(maximum 300 mg/day
in 2 divided doses)
5 to 15mg/kg/day

(maximum 400 mg/day
in 2 divided doses)
Maintenance

dose in

patients less
than 30 kg
May need to be

increased by as much

as 50%, based on
clinical response
May need to be increased

by as much as 50%,

based on clinical
response
May need to be

increased by as much as

50%, based on clinical
response
Note: Only whole tablets should be used for dosing.

* Valproate has been shown to inhibit glucuronidation and decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].

† These drugs induce glucuronidation and increase clearance [see Drug Interactions (7),Pharmacokinetics (12.3)]. Other drugs which have similar effects include estrogen-containingoral contraceptives and rifampin [see Drug Interactions (7), Pharmacokinetics (12.3)].Dosing recommendations for oral contraceptives can be found in General DosingConsiderations [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Patients on rifampin should follow thesame dosing titration/maintenance regimen used with drugs that induce glucuronidation andincrease clearance.

Table 3. The Initial Weight-Based Dosing Guide for Patients 2 to 12 Years Taking Valproate (Weeks 1 to 4) With Epilepsy
If the patient's weight is Give this daily dose, using the most appropriate combination of LAMOTRIGINE 2-mg and 5-mg tablets Greater than And less than Weeks 1 and 2 Weeks 3 and 4 6.7 kg 14 kg 2 mg every other day 2 mg every day 14.1 kg 27 kg 2 mg every day 4 mg every day 27.1 kg 34 kg 4 mg every day 8 mg every day 34.1 kg 40 kg 5 mg every day 10 mg every day
Usual Adjunctive Maintenance Dose for Epilepsy: The usual maintenance doses identified in Tables 1 and 2 are derived from dosing regimens employed in the placebo-controlled adjunctive studies in which the efficacy of lamotrigine was established. In patients receiving multidrug regimens employing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, or primidone without valproate, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine as high as 700 mg/day have been used. In patients receiving valproate alone, maintenance doses of adjunctive lamotrigine as high as 200 mg/day have been used. The advantage of using doses above those recommended in Tables 1 through 4 has not been established in controlled trials.

2.3 Epilepsy - Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy to Monotherapy

The goal of the transition regimen is to effect the conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine under conditions that ensure adequate seizure control while mitigating the risk of serious rash associated with the rapid titration of lamotrigine.

The recommended maintenance dose of lamotrigine as monotherapy is 500 mg/day given in 2 divided doses.

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].

Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, or Primidone to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine:After achieving a dose of 500 mg/day of lamotrigine according to the guidelines in Table 1, the concomitant AED should be withdrawn by 20% decrements each week over a 4-week period. The regimen for the withdrawal of the concomitant AED is based on experience gained in the controlled monotherapy clinical trial.

Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy With Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine:The conversion regimen involves 4 steps outlined in Table 4.

Table 4. Conversion From Adjunctive Therapy With Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine in Patients ≥16 Years of Age with Epilepsy
Lamotrigine Valproate Step 1 Achieve a dose of 200 mg/day according to guidelines in Table 1 (if not already on 200 mg/day). Maintain previous stable dose. Step 2 Maintain at 200 mg/day. Decrease to 500 mg/day by decrements no greater than 500 mg/day/week and then maintain the dose of 500 mg/day for 1 week. Step 3 Increase to 300 mg/day and maintain for 1 week.
Simultaneously decrease to 250 mg/day and maintain for
1 week. Step 4 Increase by 100 mg/day every week to achieve maintenance dose of 500 mg/day. Discontinue.
Conversion from Adjunctive Therapy With AEDs Other Than Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Valproate to Monotherapy With Lamotrigine:No specific dosing guidelines can be provided for conversion to monotherapy with lamotrigine with AEDs other than carbamazepine, phenobarbital, phenytoin, primidone, or valproate.

2.4 Bipolar Disorder

The goal of maintenance treatment with lamotrigine is to delay the time to occurrence of mood episodes (depression, mania, hypomania, mixed episodes) in patients treated for acute mood episodes with standard therapy. The target dose of lamotrigine is 200 mg/day (100 mg/day in patients taking valproate, which decreases the apparent clearance of lamotrigine, and 400 mg/day in patients not taking valproate and taking either carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or rifampin, which increase the apparent clearance of lamotrigine). In the clinical trials, doses up to 400 mg/day as monotherapy were evaluated; however, no additional benefit was seen at 400 mg/day compared with 200 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. Accordingly, doses above 200 mg/day are not recommended. Treatment with lamotrigine is introduced, based on concurrent medications, according to the regimen outlined in Table 5. If other psychotropic medications are withdrawn following stabilization, the dose of lamotrigine should be adjusted. For patients discontinuing valproate, the dose of lamotrigine should be doubled over a 2-week period in equal weekly increments (see Table 6). For patients discontinuing carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, or rifampin, the dose of lamotrigine should remain constant for the first week and then should be decreased by half over a 2-week period in equal weekly decrements (see Table 6). The dose of lamotrigine may then be further adjusted to the target dose (200 mg) as clinically indicated.

If other drugs are subsequently introduced, the dose of lamotrigine may need to be adjusted. In particular, the introduction of valproate requires reduction in the dose of lamotrigine [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

To avoid an increased risk of rash, the recommended initial dose and subsequent dose escalations of lamotrigine should not be exceeded [see Boxed Warning].

Table 5. Escalation Regimen for Lamotrigine for Patients With Bipolar Disorder*
For Patients Taking Valproate‡ For Patients Not Taking Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Rifampin† and Not Taking Valproate‡ For Patients Taking Carbamazepine, Phenytoin, Phenobarbital, Primidone, or Rifampin† and Not Taking Valproate‡ Weeks 1 and 2 25 mg every other day 25 mg daily 50 mg daily Weeks 3 and 4 25 mg daily 50 mg daily 100 mg daily, in divided doses Week 5 50 mg daily 100 mg daily 200 mg daily, in divided doses Week 6 100 mg daily 200 mg daily 300 mg daily, in divided doses Week 7 100 mg daily 200 mg daily up to 400 mg daily, in divided doses
* See Drug Interactions (7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) for a description of known drug interactions.

† Carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, and rifampin have been shown to increase the apparent clearance of lamotrigine.

‡ Valproate has been shown to decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine.

Table 6. Dosage Adjustments to Lamotrigine for Patients With Bipolar Disorder Following Discontinuation of Psychotropic Medications*

Discontinuation of

Psychotropic Drugs

(excluding

Carbamazepine,

Phenytoin,

Phenobarbital,

Primidone, Rifampin†, or
Valproate‡)
After Discontinuation

of Valproate‡

After Discontinuation of

Carbamazepine,

Phenytoin,

Phenobarbital,

Primidone, or Rifampin†

Current dose of

lamotrigine (mg/day)
100
Current dose of

lamotrigine (mg/day)
400 Week1
Maintain current dose of
lamotrigine 150 400 Week 2
Maintain current dose of
lamotrigine 200 300
Week 3
onward
Maintain current dose of
lamotrigine 200 200
* See Drug Interactions (7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3) for a description of known dru interactions.

† Carbamazepine, phenytoin, phenobarbital, primidone, and rifampin have been shown to increase the apparent clearance of lamotrigine.

‡ Valproate has been shown to decrease the apparent clearance of lamotrigine.

The benefit of continuing treatment in patients who had been stabilized in an 8- to 16-week open-label phase with lamotrigine was established in 2 randomized, placebo-controlled clinical maintenance trials [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. However, the optimal duration of treatment with lamotrigine has not been established. Thus, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.
Fluorouracil

Fluorouracil

General Instructions

Fluorouracil Injection, USP should be administered only intravenously, using care to avoid extravasation. No dilution is required.

All dosages are based on the patient's actual weight. However, the estimated lean body mass (dry weight) is used if the patient is obese or if there has been a spurious weight gain due to edema, ascites or other forms of abnormal fluid retention.

It is recommended that prior to treatment each patient be carefully evaluated in order to estimate as accurately as possible the optimum initial dosage of Fluorouracil.

Dosage

12 mg/kg are given intravenously once daily for 4 successive days. The daily dose should not exceed 800 mg. If no toxicity is observed, 6 mg/kg are given on the 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th days unless toxicity occurs. No therapy is given on the 5th, 7th, 9th or 11th days. Therapy is to be discontinued at the end of the 12th day, even if no toxicity has become apparent. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS sections.)

Poor risk patients or those who are not in an adequate nutritional state (see CONTRAINDICATIONS and WARNINGS sections) should receive 6 mg/kg/day for 3 days. If no toxicity is observed, 3 mg/kg may be given on the 5th, 7th and 9th days unless toxicity occurs. No therapy is given on the 4th, 6th or 8th days. The daily dose should not exceed 400 mg.

A sequence of injections on either schedule constitutes a "course of therapy."

Maintenance Therapy

In instances where toxicity has not been a problem, it is recommended that therapy be continued using either of the following schedules:
Repeat dosage of first course every 30 days after the last day of the previous course of treatment. When toxic signs resulting from the initial course of therapy have subsided, administer a maintenance dosage of 10 to 15 mg/kg/week as a single dose. Do not exceed 1 gm per week.
The patient's reaction to the previous course of therapy should be taken into account in determining the amount of the drug to be used, and the dosage should be adjusted accordingly. Some patients have received from 9 to 45 courses of treatment during periods which ranged from 12 to 60 months.

Handling and Disposal

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.2–7 There is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropriate.

Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Although the Fluorouracil solution may discolor slightly during storage, the potency and safety are not adversely affected. If a precipitate occurs due to exposure to low temperatures, resolubilize by heating to 140°F and shaking vigorously; allow to cool to body temperature before using.
Fomepizole

Fomepizole

Treatment Guidelines : If ethylene glycol or methanol poisoning is left untreated, the natural progression of the poisoning leads to accumulation of toxic metabolites, including glycolic and oxalic acids (ethylene glycol intoxication) and formic acid (methanol intoxication). These metabolites can induce metabolic acidosis, nausea/vomiting, seizures, stupor, coma, calcium oxaluria, acute tubular necrosis, blindness, and death. The diagnosis of these poisonings may be difficult because ethylene glycol and methanol concentrations diminish in the blood as they are metabolized to their respective metabolites. Hence, both ethylene glycol and methanol concentrations and acid base balance, as determined by serum electrolyte (anion gap) and/or arterial blood gas analysis, should be frequently monitored and used to guide treatment. Treatment consists of blocking the formation of toxic metabolites using inhibitors of alcohol dehydrogenase, such as fomepizole, and correction of metabolic abnormalities. In patients with high ethylene glycol or methanol concentrations (≥ 50 mg/dL), significant metabolic acidosis, or renal failure, hemodialysis should be considered to remove ethylene glycol or methanol and the respective toxic metabolites of these alcohols. Treatment with fomepizole :Begin fomepizole treatment immediately upon suspicion of ethylene glycol or methanol ingestion based on patient history and/or anion gap metabolic acidosis, increased osmolar gap, visual disturbances, or oxalate crystals in the urine, OR a documented serum ethylene glycol or methanol concentration greater than 20 mg/dL. Hemodialysis :Hemodialysis should be considered in addition to fomepizole in the case of renal failure, significant or worsening metabolic acidosis, or a measured ethylene glycol or methanol concentration of greater than or equal to 50 mg/dL. Patients should be dialyzed to correct metabolic abnormalities and to lower the ethylene glycol concentrations below 50 mg/dL. Discontinuation of fomepizole Treatment :Treatment with fomepizole may be discontinued when ethylene glycol or methanol concentrations are undetectable or have been reduced below 20 mg/dL, and the patient is asymptomatic with normal pH. Dosing of fomepizole :A loading dose of 15 mg/kg should be administered, followed by doses of 10 mg/kg every 12 hours for 4 doses, then 15 mg/kg every 12 hours thereafter until ethylene glycol or methanol concentrations are undetectable or have been reduced below 20 mg/dL, and the patient is asymptomatic with normal pH. All doses should be administered as a slow intravenous infusion over 30 minutes (see Administration). Dosage with Renal Dialysis : Fomepizole Injection is dialyzable and the frequency of dosing should be increased to every 4 hours during hemodialysis. Fomepizole Dosing in Patients Requiring Hemodialysis DOSE AT THE BEGINNING OF HEMODIALYSIS If <6 hours since last fomepizole dose If ≥ 6 hours since last fomepizole dose Do not administer dose Administer next scheduled dose DOSING DURING HEMODIALYSIS Dose every 4 hours DOSING AT THE TIME HEMODIALYSIS IS COMPLETED Time between last dose and the end ofhemodialysis <1 hour Do not administer dose at the end ofhemodialysis 1-3 hours Administer 1/2 of next scheduled dose >3 hours Administer next scheduled dose MAINTENANCE DOSING OFF HEMODIALYSIS Give next scheduled dose 12 hours from last dose administered Administration : Fomepizole solidifies at temperatures less than 25°C (77°F). If the fomepizole solution has become solid in the vial, the solution should be liquefied by running the vial under warm water or by holding in the hand. Solidification does not affect the efficacy, safety, or stability of fomepizole. Using sterile technique, the appropriate dose of fomepizole should be drawn from the vial with a syringe and injected into at least 100 mL of sterile 0.9% sodium chloride injection or dextrose 5% injection. Mix well. The entire contents of the resulting solution should be infused over 30 minutes. Fomepizole, like all parenteral products, should be inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration.
Stability : Fomepizole diluted in 0.9% sodium chloride injection or dextrose 5% injection remains stable and sterile for at least 24 hours when stored refrigerated or at room temperature. Fomepizole does not contain preservatives. Therefore, maintain sterile conditions, and after dilution do not use beyond 24 hours.

Solutions showing haziness, particulate matter, precipitate, discoloration, or leakage should not be used.
L-cysteine Hydrochlorid...

L-cysteine Hydrochloride

L-Cysteine Hydrochloride Injection USP is intended for use only after dilution in Crystalline Amino Acid Injection. Each 0.5 gram of L-Cysteine Hydrochloride Monohydrate should be combined aseptically with 12.5 grams of Crystalline Amino Acid Injection, such as that present in 250 mL of 5% Crystalline Amino Acid Injection. The admixture is then diluted with 250 mL of dextrose 50% or such lesser volume as indicated. Equal volumes of 5% Crystalline Amino Acid Injection and dextrose 50% produce a final solution which contains Crystalline Amino Acid Injection 2.5% in dextrose 25%, which is suitable for administration by central venous infusion. Administration of the final admixture should begin within one hour of mixing. Otherwise, the admixture should be refrigerated immediately and used within 24 hours of the time of mixing. For the recommended rate of administration, see the Crystalline Amino Acid Injection package insert.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
L-cysteine Hydrochlorid...

L-cysteine Hydrochloride

L-Cysteine Hydrochloride Injection USP is intended for use only after dilution in Crystalline Amino Acid Injection. Each 0.5 gram of L-Cysteine Hydrochloride Monohydrate should be combined aseptically with 12.5 grams of Crystalline Amino Acid Injection, such as that present in 250 mL of 5% Crystalline Amino Acid Injection. The admixture is then diluted with 250 mL of dextrose 50% or such lesser volume as indicated. Equal volumes of 5% Crystalline Amino Acid Injection and dextrose 50% produce a final solution which contains Crystalline Amino Acid Injection 2.5% in dextrose 25%, which is suitable for administration by central venous infusion. Administration of the final admixture should begin within one hour of mixing. Otherwise, the admixture should be refrigerated immediately and used within 24 hours of the time of mixing. For the recommended rate of administration, see the Crystalline Amino Acid Injection package insert.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Fludarabine Phosphate

Fludarabine Phosphate

2.1 Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia (CLL)

The recommended adult dose of Fludarabine Phosphate Injection is 25 mg/m2 diluted in 100 to 125 cc of 5% dextrose injection USP or 0.9% sodium chloride USP administered intravenously over a period of approximately 30 minutes daily for five consecutive days. Each 5-day course of treatment should commence every 28 days. Dosage may be decreased or delayed based on evidence of hematologic or nonhematologic toxicity. Physicians should consider delaying or discontinuing the drug if neurotoxicity occurs.

A number of clinical settings may predispose to increased toxicity from Fludarabine Phosphate Injection. These include advanced age, renal insufficiency, and bone marrow impairment. Such patients should be monitored closely for excessive toxicity and the dose modified accordingly.

The optimal duration of treatment has not been clearly established. It is recommended that three additional cycles of Fludarabine Phosphate Injection be administered following the achievement of a maximal response and then the drug should be discontinued.

2.2 Renal Impairment

Adult patients with moderate impairment of renal function (creatinine clearance 30 to 70 mL/min/1.73 m2) should have a 20% dose reduction of Fludarabine Phosphate Injection. [See Warnings and Precautions (5.7)]

2.3 Use of Infusion Solutions

Fludarabine Phosphate Injection contains no antimicrobial preservative and should be used within 8 hours of opening. Care must be taken to assure sterility of infusion solutions. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Losartan Potassium And ...

Losartan Potassium And Hydrochlorothiazide

Hypertension

Dosing must be individualized. The usual starting dose of losartan is 50 mg once daily, with 25 mg recommended for patients with intravascular volume depletion (e.g., patients treated with diuretics) (see WARNINGS, Hypotension — Volume-Depleted Patients) and patients with a history of hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS, Impaired Hepatic Function). Losartan can be administered once or twice daily at total daily doses of 25 to 100 mg. If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-a-day dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response.

Hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 to 50 mg once daily and can be given at doses of 12.5 to 25 mg as losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets.

To minimize dose-independent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy.

The side effects (see WARNINGS) of losartan are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent side effects.

Replacement Therapy: The combination may be substituted for the titrated components.

Dose Titration by Clinical Effect: A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with losartan monotherapy (see above) or hydrochlorothiazide alone may be switched to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg (losartan 50 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg) once daily. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100/25 mg (losartan 100 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg) once daily. A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with losartan 100 mg monotherapy (see above) may be switched to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100/12.5 mg once daily. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100/25 mg (losartan 100 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg) once daily.

A patient whose blood pressure is inadequately controlled by 25 mg once daily of hydrochlorothiazide, or is controlled but who experiences hypokalemia with this regimen, may be switched to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg (losartan 50 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg) once daily, reducing the dose of hydrochlorothiazide without reducing the overall expected antihypertensive response. The clinical response to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg should be subsequently evaluated, and if blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100/25 mg (losartan 100 mg/hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg) once daily.

The usual dose of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets is one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg once daily. More than two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg once daily or more than one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100/25 mg once daily is not recommended. The maximal antihypertensive effect is attained about 3 weeks after initiation of therapy.

Use in Patients with Renal Impairment: The usual regimens of therapy with losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be followed as long as the patient's creatinine clearance is >30 mL/min. In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment: Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended for titration in patients with hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS, Impaired Hepatic Function) because the appropriate 25 mg starting dose of losartan cannot be given.

Severe Hypertension

The starting dose of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets for initial treatment of severe hypertension is one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg once daily (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects). For patients who do not respond adequately to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg after 2 to 4 weeks of therapy, the dosage may be increased to one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100/25 mg once daily. The maximum dose is one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100/25 mg once daily. Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended as initial therapy in patients with hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS, Impaired Hepatic Function) because the appropriate 25 mg starting dose of losartan cannot be given. They are also not recommended for use as initial therapy in patients with intravascular volume depletion (e.g., patients treated with diuretics, see WARNINGS, Hypotension—Volume-Depleted Patients).

Hypertensive Patients with Left Ventricular Hypertrophy

Treatment should be initiated with losartan potassium tablets 50 mg once daily. Hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg should be added or losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50/12.5 mg substituted if the blood pressure reduction is inadequate. If additional blood pressure reduction is needed, losartan potassium tablets 100 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg or losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100/12.5 mg may be substituted, followed by losartan potassium tablets 100 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg or losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100/25 mg. For further blood pressure reduction other antihypertensives should be added (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Losartan Potassium, Reduction in the Risk of Stroke).

Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with or without food.
Atomoxetine Hydrochlori...

Atomoxetine Hydrochloride

2.1 Acute Treatment

Dosing of children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight

Atomoxetine hydrochloride capsules should be initiated at a total daily dose of approximately 0.5 mg/kg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 1.2 mg/kg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. No additional benefit has been demonstrated for doses higher than 1.2 mg/kg/day [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14 )].

The total daily dose in children and adolescents should not exceed 1.4 mg/kg or 100 mg, whichever is less.

Dosing of children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults

Atomoxetine hydrochloride capsules should be initiated at a total daily dose of 40 mg and increased after a minimum of 3 days to a target total daily dose of approximately 80 mg administered either as a single daily dose in the morning or as evenly divided doses in the morning and late afternoon/early evening. After 2 to 4 additional weeks, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 100 mg in patients who have not achieved an optimal response. There are no data that support increased effectiveness at higher doses [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14 )].

The maximum recommended total daily dose in children and adolescents over 70 kg and adults is 100 mg.

2.2 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

It is generally agreed that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. The physician who elects to use atomoxetine hydrochloride capsules for extended periods should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient.

2.3 General Dosing Information

Atomoxetine hydrochloride capsules may be taken with or without food.

Atomoxetine hydrochloride capsules can be discontinued without being tapered.

Atomoxetine hydrochloride capsules are not intended to be opened, they should be taken whole [see PATIENT COUNSELING INFORMATION (17.6 )].

The safety of single doses over 120 mg and total daily doses above 150 mg have not been systematically evaluated.

2.4 Dosing in Specific Populations

Dosing adjustment for hepatically impaired patients

For those ADHD patients who have hepatic insufficiency (HI), dosage adjustment is recommended as follows: For patients with moderate HI (Child-Pugh Class B), initial and target doses should be reduced to 50% of the normal dose (for patients without HI). For patients with severe HI (Child-Pugh Class C), initial dose and target doses should be reduced to 25% of normal [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6 )].

Dosing adjustment for use with a strong CYP2D6 inhibitor or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs

In children and adolescents up to 70 kg body weight administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, or in patients who are known to be CYP2D6 PMs, atomoxetine hydrochloride should be initiated at 0.5 mg/kg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 1.2 mg/kg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated.

In children and adolescents over 70 kg body weight and adults administered strong CYP2D6 inhibitors, e.g., paroxetine, fluoxetine, and quinidine, atomoxetine hydrochloride should be initiated at 40 mg/day and only increased to the usual target dose of 80 mg/day if symptoms fail to improve after 4 weeks and the initial dose is well tolerated.
Enoxaparin Sodium

Enoxaparin Sodium

All patients should be evaluated for a bleeding disorder before administration of enoxaparin sodium injection, unless the medication is needed urgently. Since coagulation parameters are unsuitable for monitoring enoxaparin sodium injection activity, routine monitoring of coagulation parameters is not required [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

For subcutaneous use, enoxaparin sodium injection should not be mixed with other injections or infusions. For intravenous use (i.e., for treatment of acute STEMI), enoxaparin sodium injection can be mixed with normal saline solution (0.9%) or 5% dextrose in water.

Enoxaparin sodium injection is not intended for intramuscular administration.

2.1 Adult Dosage

Abdominal Surgery

In patients undergoing abdominal surgery who are at risk for thromboembolic complications, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 40 mg once a day administered by SC injection with the initial dose given 2 hours prior to surgery. The usual duration of administration is 7 to 10 days; up to 12 days administration has been administered in clinical trials.

Hip or Knee Replacement Surgery

In patients undergoing hip or knee replacement surgery, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 30 mg every 12 hours administered by SC injection. Provided that hemostasis has been established, the initial dose should be given 12 to 24 hours after surgery. For hip replacement surgery, a dose of 40 mg once a day SC, given initially 12 (±3) hours prior to surgery, may be considered. Following the initial phase of thromboprophylaxis in hip replacement surgery patients, it is recommended that continued prophylaxis with enoxaparin sodium injection 40 mg once a day be administered by SC injection for 3 weeks. The usual duration of administration is 7 to 10 days; up to 14 days administration has been administered in clinical trials.

Medical Patients During Acute Illness

In medical patients at risk for thromboembolic complications due to severely restricted mobility during acute illness, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 40 mg once a day administered by SC injection. The usual duration of administration is 6 to 11 days; up to 14 days of enoxaparin sodium injection has been administered in the controlled clinical trial.

Treatment of Deep Vein Thrombosis With or Without Pulmonary Embolism

In outpatient treatment, patients with acute deep vein thrombosis without pulmonary embolism who can be treated at home, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 1 mg/kg every 12 hours administered SC. In inpatient (hospital) treatment, patients with acute deep vein thrombosis with pulmonary embolism or patients with acute deep vein thrombosis without pulmonary embolism (who are not candidates for outpatient treatment), the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 1 mg/kg every 12 hours administered SC or 1.5 mg/kg once a day administered SC at the same time every day. In both outpatient and inpatient (hospital) treatments, warfarin sodium therapy should be initiated when appropriate (usually within 72 hours of enoxaparin sodium injection). Enoxaparin sodium injection should be continued for a minimum of 5 days and until a therapeutic oral anticoagulant effect has been achieved (International Normalization Ratio 2.0 to 3.0). The average duration of administration is 7 days; up to 17 days of enoxaparin sodium injection administration has been administered in controlled clinical trials.

Unstable Angina and Non-Q-Wave Myocardial Infarction

In patients with unstable angina or non-Q-wave myocardial infarction, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 1 mg/kg administered SC every 12 hours in conjunction with oral aspirin therapy (100 to 325 mg once daily). Treatment with enoxaparin sodium injection should be prescribed for a minimum of 2 days and continued until clinical stabilization. The usual duration of treatment is 2 to 8 days; up to 12.5 days of enoxaparin sodium injection has been administered in clinical trials. [See Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Clinical Studies (14.5)].

Treatment of Acute ST-Segment Elevation Myocardial Infarction:

In patients with acute ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is a single IV bolus of 30 mg plus a 1 mg/kg SC dose followed by 1 mg/kg administered SC every 12 hours (maximum 100 mg for the first two doses only, followed by 1 mg/kg dosing for the remaining doses). Dosage adjustments are recommended in patients ≥75 years of age [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)]. All patients should receive aspirin as soon as they are identified as having STEMI and maintained with 75 to 325 mg once daily unless contraindicated.

When administered in conjunction with a thrombolytic (fibrin-specific or non-fibrin specific), enoxaparin sodium injection should be given between 15 minutes before and 30 minutes after the start of fibrinolytic therapy. In the pivotal clinical study, the enoxaparin sodium injection treatment duration was 8 days or until hospital discharge, whichever came first. An optimal duration of treatment is not known, but it is likely to be longer than 8 days.

For patients managed with percutaneous coronary intervention (PCI): If the last enoxaparin sodium injection SC administration was given less than 8 hours before balloon inflation, no additional dosing is needed. If the last enoxaparin sodium injection SC administration was given more than 8 hours before balloon inflation, an IV bolus of 0.3 mg/kg of enoxaparin sodium injection should be administered [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

2.2 Renal Impairment

Although no dose adjustment is recommended in patients with moderate (creatinine clearance 30-50 mL/min) and mild (creatinine clearance 50-80 mL/min) renal impairment, all such patients should be observed carefully for signs and symptoms of bleeding.

The recommended prophylaxis and treatment dosage regimens for patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) are described in Table 1 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Table 1 Dosage Regimens for Patients with Severe Renal Impairment(creatinine clearance <30mL/minute) Indication Dosage Regimen Prophylaxis in abdominal surgery 30 mg administered SC once daily Prophylaxis in hip or knee replacement surgery 30 mg administered SC once daily Prophylaxis in medical patients during acute illness 30 mg administered SC once daily Inpatient treatment of acute deep vein thrombosis with or without pulmonary embolism, when administered in conjunction with warfarin sodium 1 mg/kg administered SC once daily Outpatient treatment of acute deep vein thrombosis without pulmonary embolism, when administered in conjunction with warfarin sodium 1 mg/kg administered SC once daily Prophylaxis of ischemic complications of unstable angina and non-Q-wave myocardial infarction, when concurrently administered with aspirin 1 mg/kg administered SC once daily Treatment of acute ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction in patients <75 years of age, when administered in conjunction with aspirin 30 mg single IV bolus plus a 1 mg/kg SC dose followed by 1 mg/kg administered SC once daily. Treatment of acute ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction in geriatric patients ≥75 years of age, when administered in conjunction with aspirin 1 mg/kg administered SC once daily (no initial bolus)
2.3 Geriatric Patients with Acute ST-Segment Elevation Myocardial Infarction

For treatment of acute ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction in geriatric patients ≥75 years of age, do not use an initial IV bolus. Initiate dosing with 0.75 mg/kg SC every 12 hours (maximum 75 mg for the first two doses only, followed by 0.75 mg/kg dosing for the remaining doses) [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

No dose adjustment is necessary for other indications in geriatric patients unless kidney function is impaired [see Dosage and Administration (2.2)].

2.4 Administration

Enoxaparin sodium injection is a clear, colorless to pale yellow sterile solution, and as with other parenteral drug products, should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration.

The use of a tuberculin syringe or equivalent is recommended when using enoxaparin sodium injection multiple-dose vials to assure withdrawal of the appropriate volume of drug.

Enoxaparin sodium injection must not be administered by intramuscular injection. Enoxaparin sodium injection is intended for use under the guidance of a physician.

For subcutaneous administration, patients may self-inject only if their physicians determine that it is appropriate and with medical follow-up, as necessary. Proper training in subcutaneous injection technique (with or without the assistance of an injection device) should be provided.

Subcutaneous Injection Technique

Patients should be lying down and enoxaparin sodium injection administered by deep SC injection. To avoid the loss of drug when using the 30 and 40 mg prefilled syringes, do not expel the air bubble from the syringe before the injection. Administration should be alternated between the left and right anterolateral and left and right posterolateral abdominal wall. The whole length of the needle should be introduced into a skin fold held between the thumb and forefinger; the skin fold should be held throughout the injection. To minimize bruising, do not rub the injection site after completion of the injection.

Enoxaparin sodium injection prefilled syringes and graduated prefilled syringes are for single, one-time use only and are available with a system that shields the needle after injection.
Remove the needle shield by pulling it straight off the syringe (see Figure A). If adjusting the dose is required, the dose adjustment must be done prior to injecting the prescribed dose to the patient.Figure A

Inject using standard technique, pushing the plunger to the bottom of the syringe (see Figure B).Figure B

Remove the syringe from the injection site keeping your finger on the plunger rod (see Figure C).Figure C

Orient the needle away from you and others, and activate the safety system by firmly pushing the plunger rod. The protective sleeve will automatically cover the needle and an audible “click” will be heard to confirm shield activation (see Figure D).Figure D

Immediately dispose of the syringe in the nearest sharps container (see Figure E).Figure E

NOTE:
The safety system can only be activated once the syringe has been emptied. Activation of the safety system must be done only after removing the needle from the patient's skin. Do not replace the needle shield after injection. The safety system should not be sterilized.
Activation of the safety system may cause minimal splatter of fluid. For optimal safety activate the system while orienting it downwards away from yourself and others.

Intravenous (Bolus) Injection Technique

For intravenous injection, the multiple-dose vial should be used. Enoxaparin sodium injection should be administered through an intravenous line. Enoxaparin sodium injection should not be mixed or co-administered with other medications. To avoid the possible mixture of enoxaparin sodium injection with other drugs, the intravenous access chosen should be flushed with a sufficient amount of saline or dextrose solution prior to and following the intravenous bolus administration of enoxaparin sodium injection to clear the port of drug. Enoxaparin sodium injection may be safely administered with normal saline solution (0.9%) or 5% dextrose in water.
Topotecan

Topotecan

Prior to administration of the first course of Topotecan Injection, patients must have a baseline neutrophil count of >1,500 cells/mm3 and a platelet count of >100,000 cells/mm3.

2.1 Small Cell Lung Cancer

Recommended Dosage
The recommended dose of topotecan is 1.5 mg/m2 by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes daily for 5 consecutive days, starting on day 1 of a 21-day course. In the absence of tumor progression, a minimum of 4 courses is recommended because tumor response may be delayed. The median time to response in 4 small cell lung cancer trials was 5 to 7 weeks.
Dosage Modification Guidelines
In the event of severe neutropenia (defined as <500 cells/mm3) during any course, reduce the dose by 0.25 mg/m2 (to 1.25 mg/m2) for subsequent courses. Alternatively, in the event of severe neutropenia, administer G-CSF (granulocyte-colony stimulating factor) following the subsequent course (before resorting to dose reduction) starting from day 6 of the course (24 hours after completion of topotecan administration). In the event the platelet count falls below 25,000 cells/mm3, reduce doses by 0.25 mg/m2 (to 1.25 mg/m2) for subsequent courses.
2.2 Cervical Cancer

Recommended Dosage

The recommended dose of Topotecan Injection is 0.75 mg/m2 by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes daily on days 1, 2, and 3; followed by cisplatin 50 mg/m2 by intravenous infusion on day 1 repeated every 21 days (a 21-day course).

Dosage Modification Guidelines

Dosage adjustments for subsequent courses of Topotecan Injection in combination with cisplatin are specific for each drug. See manufacturer’s prescribing information for cisplatin administration and hydration guidelines and for cisplatin dosage adjustment in the event of hematologic toxicity.
In the event of severe febrile neutropenia (defined as <1000 cells/mm3 with temperature of 38°C or 100.4°F), reduce the dose of Topotecan Injection to 0.60 mg/m2 for subsequent courses. Alternatively, in the event of severe febrile neutropenia, administer G-CSF following the subsequent course (before resorting to dose reduction) starting from day 4 of the course (24 hours after completion of administration of Topotecan Injection). If febrile neutropenia occurs despite the use of G-CSF, reduce the dose of Topotecan Injection to 0.45 mg/m2 for subsequent courses. In the event the platelet count falls below 25,000 cells/mm3, reduce doses to 0.60 mg/m2 for subsequent courses.
2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Specific Populations

Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment of Topotecan Injection appears to be required for patients with mild renal impairment (Clcr 40 to 60 mL/min.). Dosage adjustment of Topotecan Injection to 0.75 mg/m2 is recommended for patients with moderate renal impairment (20 to 39 mL/min.). Insufficient data are available in patients with severe renal impairment to provide a dosage recommendation for Topotecan Injection. [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]

Topotecan Injection in combination with cisplatin for the treatment of cervical cancer should only be initiated in patients with serum creatinine ≤1.5 mg/dL. In the clinical trial, cisplatin was discontinued for a serum creatinine >1.5 mg/dL. Insufficient data are available regarding continuing monotherapy with Topotecan Injection after cisplatin discontinuation in patients with cervical cancer.

2.4 Instructions for Handling, Preparation and Intravenous Administration

Handling

Topotecan is a cytotoxic anticancer drug. Prepare Topotecan Injection under a vertical laminar flow hood while wearing gloves and protective clothing. If Topotecan Injection solution contacts the skin, wash the skin immediately and thoroughly with soap and water. If Topotecan Injection contacts mucous membranes, flush thoroughly with water.

Use procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1-4

Preparation and Administration

The appropriate volume of the Topotecan Injection is diluted in a minimum of 50 mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP prior to administration. Infuse over 30 minutes. Topotecan Injection diluted for infusion is stable for 4 hours at room temperature or 24 hours at refrigerated temperature in ambient lighting conditions.

Topotecan Injection is supplied as a multiple dose vial. Studies have shown the product is stable for 28 days after initial puncture when stored under refrigerated conditions.
Idarubicin Hydrochlorid...

Idarubicin Hydrochloride

(See WARNINGS)

For induction therapy in adult patients with AML the following dose schedule is recommended:

Idarubicin Hydrochloride Injection 12 mg/m2 daily for 3 days by slow (10 to 15 min) intravenous injection in combination with cytarabine. The cytarabine may be given as 100 mg/m2 daily by continuous infusion for 7 days or as cytarabine 25 mg/m2 intravenous bolus followed by cytarabine 200 mg/m2 daily for 5 days continuous infusion. In patients with unequivocal evidence of leukemia after the first induction course, a second course may be administered. Administration of the second course should be delayed in patients who experience severe mucositis, until recovery from this toxicity has occurred, and a dose reduction of 25% is recommended. In patients with hepatic and/or renal impairment, a dose reduction of Idarubicin Hydrochloride Injection should be considered. Idarubicin Hydrochloride Injection should not be administered if the bilirubin level exceeds 5 mg%. (SeeWARNINGS.)

The benefit of consolidation in prolonging the duration of remissions and survival is not proven. There is no consensus regarding optional regimens to be used for consolidation. (See CLINICAL STUDIES for doses used in U.S. Clinical studies.)

Preparation and Administration Precautions

Caution in handling the solution must be exercised as skin reactions associated with Idarubicin Hydrochloride Injection may occur. Skin accidentally exposed to Idarubicin Hydrochloride Injection should be washed thoroughly with soap and water and if the eyes are involved, standard irrigation techniques should be used immediately. The use of goggles, gloves, and protective gowns is recommended during preparation and administration of the drug.

Care in the administration of Idarubicin Hydrochloride Injection will reduce the chance of perivenous infiltration. It may also decrease the chance of local reactions such as urticaria and erythematous streaking. During intravenous administration of Idarubicin Hydrochloride Injection extravasation may occur with or without an accompanying stinging or burning sensation even if blood returns well on aspiration of the infusion needle. If any signs or symptoms of extravasation have occurred, the injection or infusion should be immediately terminated and restarted in another vein. If it is known or suspected that subcutaneous extravasation has occurred, it is recommended that intermittent ice packs (1/2 hour immediately, then 1/2 hour 4 times per day for 3 days) be placed over the area of extravasation and that the affected extremity be elevated. Because of the progressive nature of extravasation reactions, the area of injection should be frequently examined and plastic surgery consultation obtained early if there is any sign of a local reaction such as pain, erythema, edema or vesication. If ulceration begins or there is severe persistent pain at the site of extravasation, early wide excision of the involved area should be considered.

Idarubicin Hydrochloride Injection should be administered slowly (over 10 to 15 minutes) into the tubing of a freely running intravenous infusion of Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (0.9%) or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP. The tubing should be attached to a Butterfly needle or other suitable device and inserted preferably into a large vein.

Incompatibility

Unless specific compatibility data are available, Idarubicin Hydrochloride Injection should not be mixed with other drugs. Precipitation occurs with heparin. Prolonged contact with any solution of an alkaline pH will result in degradation of the drug.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and containers permit.

Handling and Disposal

Procedures for handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1-8 There is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropriate.
Fluorouracil

Fluorouracil

General Instructions

Fluorouracil Injection, USP should be administered only intravenously, using care to avoid extravasation. No dilution is required.

All dosages are based on the patient's actual weight. However, the estimated lean body mass (dry weight) is used if the patient is obese or if there has been a spurious weight gain due to edema, ascites or other forms of abnormal fluid retention.

It is recommended that prior to treatment each patient be carefully evaluated in order to estimate as accurately as possible the optimum initial dosage of Fluorouracil.

Dosage

12 mg/kg are given intravenously once daily for 4 successive days. The daily dose should not exceed 800 mg. If no toxicity is observed, 6 mg/kg are given on the 6th, 8th, 10th and 12th days unless toxicity occurs. No therapy is given on the 5th, 7th, 9th or 11th days. Therapy is to be discontinued at the end of the 12th day, even if no toxicity has become apparent. (See WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.)

Poor risk patients or those who are not in an adequate nutritional state (see CONTRAINDICATIONS and WARNINGS sections) should receive 6 mg/kg/day for 3 days. If no toxicity is observed, 3 mg/kg may be given on the 5th, 7th and 9th days unless toxicity occurs. No therapy is given on the 4th, 6th or 8th days. The daily dose should not exceed 400 mg.

A sequence of injections on either schedule constitutes a "course of therapy."

Maintenance Therapy

In instances where toxicity has not been a problem, it is recommended that therapy be continued using either of the following schedules:
Repeat dosage of first course every 30 days after the last day of the previous course of treatment. When toxic signs resulting from the initial course of therapy have subsided, administer a maintenance dosage of 10 to 15 mg/kg/week as a single dose. Do not exceed 1 gm per week.
The patient's reaction to the previous course of therapy should be taken into account in determining the amount of the drug to be used, and the dosage should be adjusted accordingly. Some patients have received from 9 to 45 courses of treatment during periods which ranged from 12 to 60 months.

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.2-7 There is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropiate.

Note

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Although the Fluorouracil solution may discolor slightly during storage, the potency and safety are not adversely affected. If a precipitate occurs due to exposure to low temperatures, resolubilize by heating to 140°F and shaking vigorously; allow to cool to body temperature before using.

DIRECTION FOR PROPER USE OF PHARMACY BULK PACKAGE

Pharmacy Bulk Packages are for use in a Pharmacy Admixture Service only in a vertical laminar flow hood. The container closure should be penetrated only one time utilizing a suitable sterile dispensing set or transfer device which allows measured distribution of the contents. Swab vial stopper with an antiseptic solution. Insert the device/set into the vial using aseptic technique.

Once the sterile dispensing set or transfer device has been inserted into the container, withdrawal of the contents should be accomplished without delay. However, if this is not possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from the initial entry may be allowed to complete fluid aliquoting/transferring operations. The transferred drug solution should be used promptly. Discard the contents no later than 4 hours after initial closure puncture.
Nicardipine Hydrochlori...

Nicardipine Hydrochloride

Nicardipine hydrochloride injection is intended for intravenous use. Titrate dose to achieve the desired blood pressure reduction. Individualize dosage depending on the blood pressure to be obtained and the response of the patient. The time course of blood pressure decrease is dependent on the initial rate of infusion and the frequency of dosage adjustment. With constant infusion, blood pressure begins to fall within minutes. It reaches about 50% of its ultimate decrease in about 45 minutes. Preparation WARNING: VIALS MUST BE DILUTED BEFORE IV INFUSION Dilution: Nicardipine hydrochloride injection is administered by slow continuous infusion at a CONCENTRATION OF 0.1 mg/mL. Each vial (25 mg) should be diluted with 240 mL of compatible intravenous fluid (see below), resulting in 250 mL of solution at a concentration of 0.1 mg/mL. Nicardipine hydrochloride injection has been found to be compatible and stable in glass or polyvinyl chloride containers for 24 hours at controlled room temperature with: Dextrose (5%) Injection, USP Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.45%) Injection, USP Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USP Dextrose (5%) with 40 mEq Potassium, USP Sodium Chloride (0.45%) Injection, USP Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USP Nicardipine hydrochloride injection is NOT compatible with Sodium Bicarbonate (5%) Injection, USP, or Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP. THE DILUTED SOLUTION IS STABLE FOR 24 HOURS AT ROOM TEMPERATURE. Inspection: As with all parenteral drugs, Nicardipine hydrochloride injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Nicardipine hydrochloride injection is normally light yellow in color. Dosage Dosage as a Substitute for Oral Nicardipine Therapy The intravenous infusion rate required to produce an average plasma concentration equivalent to a given oral dose at steady state is shown in the following table:

Oral Nicardipine Dose Equivalent I.V. Infusion Rate 20 mg q8h 0.5 mg/hr = 5 mL/hr 30 mg q8h 1.2 mg/hr = 12 mL/hr 40 mg q8h 2.2 mg/hr = 22 mL/hr Dosage for Initiation of Therapy in a Patient not receiving oral nicardipine Initiate therapy at 50 mL/hr (5 mg/hr). If desired blood pressure reduction is not achieved at this dose, the infusion rate may be increased by 25 mL/hr (2.5 mg/hr) every 5 minutes (for rapid titration) to 15 minutes (for gradual titration) up to a maximum of 150 mL/hr (15 mg/hr), until desired blood pressure reduction is achieved. Following achievement of the blood pressure goal utilizing rapid titration, decrease the infusion rate to 30 mL/hr (3 mg/hr). Drug Discontinuation and Transfer to Oral Antihypertensive Agents Discontinuation of infusion is followed by a 50% offset action in about 30 minutes. If treatment includes transfer to an oral antihypertensive agent other than oral nicardipine, initiate therapy upon discontinuation of nicardipine hydrochloride injection. If oral nicardipine is to be used, administer the first dose 1 hour prior to discontinuation of the infusion.
Bio-scriptives Repiderm...

Bio-scriptives Repiderm

2.1 Dosage in Patients with Cancer Receiving Myelosuppressive Chemotherapy or Induction and/or Consolidation Chemotherapy for AML

The recommended starting dosage of ZARXIO is 5 mcg/kg/day‚ administered as a single daily injection by subcutaneous injection‚ by short intravenous infusion (15 to 30 minutes)‚ or by continuous intravenous infusion. Obtain a complete blood count (CBC) and platelet count before instituting ZARXIO therapy and monitor twice weekly during therapy. Consider dose escalation in increments of 5 mcg/kg for each chemotherapy cycle‚ according to the duration and severity of the absolute neutrophil count (ANC) nadir. Recommend stopping ZARXIO if the ANC increases beyond 10‚000/mm3[see Warnings and Precautions (5.10)].

Administer ZARXIO at least 24 hours after cytotoxic chemotherapy. Do not administer ZARXIO within the 24-hour period prior to chemotherapy [see Warnings and Precautions (5.12)]. A transient increase in neutrophil count is typically seen 1 to 2 days after initiation of ZARXIO therapy. Therefore, to ensure a sustained therapeutic response‚ administer ZARXIO daily for up to 2 weeks or until the ANC has reached 10‚000/mm3 following the expected chemotherapy-induced neutrophil nadir. The duration of ZARXIO therapy needed to attenuate chemotherapy-induced neutropenia may be dependent on the myelosuppressive potential of the chemotherapy regimen employed.

2.2 Dosage in Patients with Cancer Undergoing Bone Marrow Transplantation

The recommended dosage of ZARXIO following bone marrow transplantation (BMT) is 10 mcg/kg/day given as an intravenous infusion no longer than 24 hours. Administer the first dose of ZARXIO at least 24 hours after cytotoxic chemotherapy and at least 24 hours after bone marrow infusion. Monitor CBCs and platelet counts frequently following marrow transplantation.

During the period of neutrophil recovery‚ titrate the daily dosage of ZARXIO against the neutrophil response (see Table 1).
Table 1: Recommended Dosage Adjustments During Neutrophil Recovery in Patients with Cancer Following BMT Absolute Neutrophil Count ZARXIO Dosage Adjustment * If ANC decreases to less than 1000/mm3 at any time during the 5 mcg/kg/day administration‚ increase ZARXIO to 10 mcg/kg/day‚ and then follow the above steps.
When ANC greater than 1000/mm3 for 3 consecutive days

Reduce to 5 mcg/kg/day*

Then, if ANC remains greater than 1000/mm3 for 3 more consecutive days

Discontinue ZARXIO

Then, if ANC decreases to less than 1000/mm3

Resume at 5 mcg/kg/day

2.3 Dosage in Patients Undergoing Autologous Peripheral Blood Progenitor Cell Collection and Therapy

The recommended dosage of ZARXIO for the mobilization of autologous peripheral blood progenitor cells (PBPC) is 10 mcg/kg/day given by subcutaneous injection. Administer ZARXIO for at least 4 days before the first leukapheresis procedure and continue until the last leukapheresis. Although the optimal duration of ZARXIO administration and leukapheresis schedule have not been established‚ administration of filgrastim for 6 to 7 days with leukaphereses on days 5‚ 6‚ and 7 was found to be safe and effective [see Clinical Studies (14.4)]. Monitor neutrophil counts after 4 days of ZARXIO‚ and discontinue ZARXIO if the white blood cell (WBC) count rises to greater than 100‚000/mm3.

2.4 Dosage in Patients with Severe Chronic Neutropenia

Prior to starting ZARXIO in patients with suspected chronic neutropenia, confirm the diagnosis of severe chronic neutropenia (SCN) by evaluating serial CBCs with differential and platelet counts‚ and evaluating bone marrow morphology and karyotype. The use of ZARXIO prior to confirmation of a correct diagnosis of SCN may impair diagnostic efforts and may thus impair or delay evaluation and treatment of an underlying condition‚ other than SCN‚ causing the neutropenia.

The recommended starting dosage in patients with Congenital Neutropenia is 6 mcg/kg as a twice daily subcutaneous injection and the recommended starting dosage in patients with Idiopathic or Cyclic Neutropenia is 5 mcg/kg as a single daily subcutaneous injection.

Dosage Adjustments in Patients with Severe Chronic Neutropenia

Chronic daily administration is required to maintain clinical benefit. Individualize the dosage based on the patient’s clinical course as well as ANC. In the SCN postmarketing surveillance study, the reported median daily doses of filgrastim were: 6 mcg/kg (congenital neutropenia), 2.1 mcg/kg (cyclic neutropenia), and 1.2 mcg/kg (idiopathic neutropenia). In rare instances, patients with congenital neutropenia have required doses of filgrastim greater than or equal to 100 mcg/kg/day.

Monitor CBCs for Dosage Adjustments

During the initial 4 weeks of ZARXIO therapy and during the 2 weeks following any dosage adjustment‚ monitor CBCs with differential and platelet counts. Once a patient is clinically stable‚ monitor CBCs with differential and platelet counts monthly during the first year of treatment. Thereafter, if the patient is clinically stable, less frequent routine monitoring is recommended.

2.5 Important Administration Instructions

Patient self-administration and administration by a caregiver may benefit from training by a healthcare professional. Training should aim to demonstrate to those patients and caregivers how to measure the dose using the prefilled syringe, and the focus should be on ensuring that a patient or caregiver can successfully perform all of the steps in the Instructions for use of ZARXIO prefilled syringe with BD UltraSafe Passive™ Needle Guard. If a patient or caregiver is not able to demonstrate that they can measure the dose and administer the product successfully, you should consider whether the patient is an appropriate candidate for self-administration of ZARXIO [see Instructions for Use].

ZARXIO prefilled syringe with BD UltraSafe Passive™ Needle Guard is not designed to allow for direct administration of doses of less than 0.3 mL (180 mcg). The spring-mechanism of the needle guard apparatus affixed to the prefilled syringe interferes with the visibility of the graduation markings on the syringe barrel corresponding to 0.1 mL and 0.2 mL. The visibility of these markings is necessary to accurately measure doses of ZARXIO less than 0.3 mL (180 mcg) for direct administration to patients. Thus, the direct administration to patients requiring doses of less than 0.3 mL (180 mcg) is not recommended due to the potential for dosing errors.

ZARXIO is supplied in single-dose prefilled syringes (for subcutaneous use) [see Dosage Forms and Strengths (3)]. Prior to use‚ remove the prefilled syringe from the refrigerator and allow ZARXIO to reach room temperature for a minimum of 30 minutes and a maximum of 24 hours. Discard any prefilled syringe left at room temperature for greater than 24 hours. Visually inspect ZARXIO for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration (the solution is clear and colorless to slightly yellowish). Do not administer ZARXIO if particulates or discoloration are observed.

Discard unused portion of ZARXIO in prefilled syringes. Do not save unused drug for later administration.

If you miss a dose of ZARXIO, talk to your doctor about when you should give your next dose.

Subcutaneous Injection

Inject ZARXIO subcutaneously in the outer area of upper arms, abdomen, thighs, or upper outer areas of the buttock. If patients or caregivers are to administer ZARXIO, instruct them in appropriate injection technique and ask them to follow the subcutaneous injection procedures in the Patient Information.

Administration Instructions for the Prefilled Syringe

Persons with latex allergies should not administer the ZARXIO prefilled syringe, because the needle cap contains natural rubber latex (derived from latex).

Dilution

If required for intravenous administration, ZARXIO may be diluted in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP to concentrations between 5 mcg/mL and 15 mcg/mL. ZARXIO diluted to concentrations from 5 mcg/mL to 15 mcg/mL should be protected from adsorption to plastic materials by the addition of Albumin (Human) to a final concentration of 2 mg/mL. When diluted in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, or 5% Dextrose plus Albumin (Human)‚ ZARXIO is compatible with glass, polyvinylchloride, polyolefin, and polypropylene.

Do not dilute with saline at any time, because the product may precipitate.

Diluted ZARXIO solution can be stored at room temperature for up to 24 hours. This 24 hour time period includes the time during room temperature storage of the infusion solution and the duration of the infusion
Nicardipine Hydrochlori...

Nicardipine Hydrochloride

Nicardipine hydrochloride injection is intended for intravenous use. Titrate dose to achieve the desired blood pressure reduction. Individualize dosage depending on the blood pressure to be obtained and the response of the patient. The time course of blood pressure decrease is dependent on the initial rate of infusion and the frequency of dosage adjustment. With constant infusion, blood pressure begins to fall within minutes. It reaches about 50% of its ultimate decrease in about 45 minutes. Preparation WARNING: VIALS MUST BE DILUTED BEFORE IV INFUSION Dilution: Nicardipine hydrochloride injection is administered by slow continuous infusion at a CONCENTRATION OF 0.1 mg/mL. Each vial (25 mg) should be diluted with 240 mL of compatible intravenous fluid (see below), resulting in 250 mL of solution at a concentration of 0.1 mg/mL. Nicardipine hydrochloride injection has been found to be compatible and stable in glass or polyvinyl chloride containers for 24 hours at controlled room temperature with: Dextrose (5%) Injection, USP Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.45%) Injection, USP Dextrose (5%) and Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USP Dextrose (5%) with 40 mEq Potassium, USP Sodium Chloride (0.45%) Injection, USP Sodium Chloride (0.9%) Injection, USP Nicardipine hydrochloride injection is NOT compatible with Sodium Bicarbonate (5%) Injection, USP, or Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP. THE DILUTED SOLUTION IS STABLE FOR 24 HOURS AT ROOM TEMPERATURE. Inspection: As with all parenteral drugs, Nicardipine hydrochloride injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Nicardipine hydrochloride injection is normally light yellow in color. Dosage Dosage as a Substitute for Oral Nicardipine TherapyThe intravenous infusion rate required to produce an average plasma concentration equivalent to a given oral dose at steady state is shown in the following table:

Oral Nicardipine Dose Equivalent I.V. Infusion Rate 20 mg q8h 0.5 mg/hr = 5 mL/hr 30 mg q8h 1.2 mg/hr = 12 mL/hr 40 mg q8h 2.2 mg/hr = 22 mL/hr Dosage for Initiation of Therapy in a Patient not receiving oral nicardipine Initiate therapy at 50 mL/hr (5 mg/hr). If desired blood pressure reduction is not achieved at this dose, the infusion rate may be increased by 25 mL/hr (2.5 mg/hr) every 5 minutes (for rapid titration) to 15 minutes (for gradual titration) up to a maximum of 150 mL/hr (15 mg/hr), until desired blood pressure reduction is achieved. Following achievement of the blood pressure goal utilizing rapid titration, decrease the infusion rate to 30 mL/hr (3 mg/hr). Drug Discontinuation and Transfer to Oral Antihypertensive AgentsDiscontinuation of infusion is followed by a 50% offset action in about 30 minutes. If treatment includes transfer to an oral antihypertensive agent other than oral nicardipine, initiate therapy upon discontinuation of nicardipine hydrochloride injection. If oral nicardipine is to be used, administer the first dose 1 hour prior to discontinuation of the infusion.
Hydrocodone Bitartrate ...

Hydrocodone Bitartrate And Acetaminophen Solution

2.1 Dosage in Adults

Use the lowest effective dose for the patient. The recommended initial dose is 6.25 mg for women and either 6.25 or 12.5 mg for men, taken only once per night immediately before bedtime with at least 7 to 8 hours remaining before the planned time of awakening. If the 6.25 mg dose is not effective, the dose can be increased to 12.5 mg. In some patients, the higher morning blood levels following use of the 12.5 mg dose increase the risk of next day impairment of driving and other activities that require full alertness [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1)]. The total dose of zolpidem tartrate extended-release tablets should not exceed 12.5 mg once daily immediately before bedtime.

The recommended initial doses for women and men are different because zolpidem clearance is lower in women.

2.2 Special Populations

Elderly or debilitated patients may be especially sensitive to the effects of zolpidem tartrate. Patients with hepatic insufficiency do not clear the drug as rapidly as normal subjects. The recommended dose of zolpidem tartrate extended-release tablets in both of these patient populations is 6.25 mg once daily immediately before bedtime [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1); USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.5)].

2.3 Use with CNS Depressants

Dosage adjustment may be necessary when zolpidem tartrate extended-release tablets are combined with other CNS depressant drugs because of the potentially additive effects [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1)].

2.4 Administration

Zolpidem tartrate extended-release tablets should be swallowed whole, and not be divided, crushed, or chewed. The effect of zolpidem tartrate extended-release tablets may be slowed by ingestion with or immediately after a meal.
Diazepam

Diazepam

For all indications, toxicities may warrant dosage adjustments [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

Administer in a facility equipped to manage possible complications (e.g. anaphylaxis).

2.1 Breast Cancer
• For locally advanced or metastatic breast cancer after failure of prior chemotherapy, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 60 mg/m 2 to 100 mg/m 2 administered intravenously over 1 hour every 3 weeks. • For the adjuvant treatment of operable node-positive breast cancer, the recommended Docetaxel Injection dose is 75 mg/m 2 administered 1 hour after doxorubicin 50 mg/m 2 and cyclophosphamide 500 mg/m 2 every 3 weeks for 6 courses. Prophylactic G-CSF may be used to mitigate the risk of hematological toxicities [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].
2.2 Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer
• For treatment after failure of prior platinum-based chemotherapy, docetaxel was evaluated as monotherapy, and the recommended dose is 75 mg/m 2 administered intravenously over 1 hour every 3 weeks. A dose of 100 mg/m 2 in patients previously treated with chemotherapy was associated with increased hematologic toxicity, infection, and treatment-related mortality in randomized, controlled trials [see Boxed Warning, Dosage and Administration (2.7), Warnings and Precautions (5), Clinical Studies (14)]. • For chemotherapy-naïve patients, docetaxel was evaluated in combination with cisplatin. The recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m 2 administered intravenously over 1 hour immediately followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m 2 over 30-60 minutes every 3 weeks [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].
2.3 Prostate Cancer
• For hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m 2 every 3 weeks as a 1 hour intravenous infusion. Prednisone 5 mg orally twice daily is administered continuously [ see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].
2.4 Gastric Adenocarcinoma
• For gastric adenocarcinoma, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m 2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion, followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m 2, as a 1 to 3 hour intravenous infusion (both on day 1 only), followed by fluorouracil 750 mg/m 2 per day given as a 24-hour continuous intravenous infusion for 5 days, starting at the end of the cisplatin infusion. Treatment is repeated every three weeks. Patients must receive premedication with antiemetics and appropriate hydration for cisplatin administration [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].
2.5 Head and Neck Cancer

Patients must receive premedication with antiemetics, and appropriate hydration (prior to and after cisplatin administration). Prophylaxis for neutropenic infections should be administered. All patients treated on the docetaxel containing arms of the TAX323 and TAX324 studies received prophylactic antibiotics.
• Induction chemotherapy followed by radiotherapy (TAX323)
For the induction treatment of locally advanced inoperable SCCHN, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion followed by cisplatin 75 mg/m2 intravenously over 1 hour, on day one, followed by fluorouracil as a continuous intravenous infusion at 750 mg/m2 per day for five days. This regimen is administered every 3 weeks for 4 cycles. Following chemotherapy, patients should receive radiotherapy. [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].
• Induction chemotherapy followed by chemoradiotherapy (TAX324)
For the induction treatment of patients with locally advanced (unresectable, low surgical cure, or organ preservation) SCCHN, the recommended dose of Docetaxel Injection is 75 mg/m2 as a 1 hour intravenous infusion on day 1, followed by cisplatin 100 mg/m2 administered as a 30-minute to 3 hour infusion, followed by fluorouracil 1000 mg/m2/day as a continuous infusion from day 1 to day 4. This regimen is administered every 3 weeks for 3 cycles. Following chemotherapy, patients should receive chemoradiotherapy [see Dosage and Administration (2.7)].

2.6 Premedication Regimen

All patients should be premedicated with oral corticosteroids (see below for prostate cancer) such as dexamethasone 16 mg per day (e.g., 8 mg twice daily) for 3 days starting 1 day prior to Docetaxel Injection administration in order to reduce the incidence and severity of fluid retention as well as the severity of hypersensitivity reactions [see Boxed Warning, Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

For hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer, given the concurrent use of prednisone, the recommended premedication regimen is oral dexamethasone 8 mg, at 12 hours, 3 hours and 1 hour before the Docetaxel Injection infusion [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

2.7 Dosage Adjustments During Treatment

Breast Cancer

Patients who are dosed initially at 100 mg/m2 and who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than 1 week, or severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions during Docetaxel Injection therapy should have the dosage adjusted from 100 mg/m2 to 75 mg/m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions, the dosage should either be decreased from 75 mg/m2 to 55 mg/m2 or the treatment should be discontinued. Conversely, patients who are dosed initially at 60 mg/m2 and who do not experience febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than 1 week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions, or severe peripheral neuropathy during Docetaxel Injection therapy may tolerate higher doses. Patients who develop ≥grade 3 peripheral neuropathy should have Docetaxel Injection treatment discontinued entirely.

Combination Therapy with Docetaxel Injection in the Adjuvant Treatment of Breast Cancer

Docetaxel Injection in combination with doxorubicin and cyclophosphamide should be administered when the neutrophil count is ≥1,500 cells/mm3. Patients who experience febrile neutropenia should receive G-CSF in all subsequent cycles. Patients who continue to experience this reaction should remain on G-CSF and have their Docetaxel Injection dose reduced to 60 mg/ m2. Patients who experience grade 3 or 4 stomatitis should have their Docetaxel Injection dose decreased to 60 mg/ m2. Patients who experience severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions or moderate neurosensory signs and/or symptoms during Docetaxel Injection therapy should have their dosage of Docetaxel Injection reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions at 60 mg/ m2, treatment should be discontinued.

Non-Small Cell Lung Cancer

Monotherapy with Docetaxel Injection for NSCLC treatment after failure of prior platinum-based chemotherapy

Patients who are dosed initially at 75 mg/m2 and who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than one week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions, or other grade 3/4 non-hematological toxicities during Docetaxel Injection treatment should have treatment withheld until resolution of the toxicity and then resumed at 55 mg/m2. Patients who develop ≥grade 3 peripheral neuropathy should have Docetaxel Injection treatment discontinued entirely.

Combination therapy with Docetaxel Injection for chemotherapy-naïve NSCLC

For patients who are dosed initially at Docetaxel Injection 75 mg/m2 in combination with cisplatin, and whose nadir of platelet count during the previous course of therapy is <25,000 cells/mm3, in patients who experience febrile neutropenia, and in patients with serious non-hematologic toxicities, the Docetaxel Injection dosage in subsequent cycles should be reduced to 65 mg/m2. In patients who require a further dose reduction, a dose of 50 mg/m2 is recommended. For cisplatin dosage adjustments, see manufacturers' prescribing information.

Prostate Cancer

Combination therapy with Docetaxel Injection for hormone-refractory metastatic prostate cancer

Docetaxel Injection should be administered when the neutrophil count is ≥1,500 cells/mm3. Patients who experience either febrile neutropenia, neutrophils <500 cells/mm3 for more than one week, severe or cumulative cutaneous reactions or moderate neurosensory signs and/or symptoms during Docetaxel Injection therapy should have the dosage of Docetaxel Injection reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/ m2. If the patient continues to experience these reactions at 60 mg/m2, the treatment should be discontinued.

Gastric or Head and Neck Cancer

Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil in gastric cancer or head and neck cancer

Patients treated with Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil must receive antiemetics and appropriate hydration according to current institutional guidelines. In both studies, G-CSF was recommended during the second and/or subsequent cycles in case of febrile neutropenia, or documented infection with neutropenia, or neutropenia lasting more than 7 days. If an episode of febrile neutropenia, prolonged neutropenia or neutropenic infection occurs despite G-CSF use, the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. If subsequent episodes of complicated neutropenia occur the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 60 mg/m2 to 45 mg/m2. In case of grade 4 thrombocytopenia the Docetaxel Injection dose should be reduced from 75 mg/m2 to 60 mg/m2. Patients should not be retreated with subsequent cycles of Docetaxel Injection until neutrophils recover to a level >1,500 cells/mm3 and platelets recover to a level >100,000 cells/mm3. Discontinue treatment if these toxicities persist [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

Recommended dose modifications for toxicities in patients treated with Docetaxel Injection in combination with cisplatin and fluorouracil are shown in Table 1.

Table 1 Recommended Dose Modifications for Toxicities in Patients Treated with Docetaxel Injection in Combination with Cisplatin and Fluorouracil

Toxicity

Dosage adjustment

Diarrhea grade 3

First episode: reduce fluorouracil dose by 20%.

Second episode: then reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Diarrhea grade 4

First episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection and fluorouracil doses by 20%.

Second episode: discontinue treatment.

Stomatitis/mucositis grade 3

First episode: reduce fluorouracil dose by 20%.

Second episode: stop fluorouracil only, at all subsequent cycles.

Third episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Stomatitis/mucositis grade 4

First episode: stop fluorouracil only, at all subsequent cycles.

Second episode: reduce Docetaxel Injection dose by 20%.

Liver dysfunction:

In case of AST/ALT >2.5 to ≤5 × ULN and AP ≤2.5 × ULN, or AST/ALT >1.5 to ≤5 × ULN and AP >2.5 to ≤5 × ULN, Docetaxel Injection should be reduced by 20%.

In case of AST/ALT >5 × ULN and/or AP >5 × ULN Docetaxel Injection should be stopped.

The dose modifications for cisplatin and fluorouracil in the gastric cancer study are provided below:

Cisplatin dose modifications and delays

Peripheral neuropathy: A neurological examination should be performed before entry into the study, and then at least every 2 cycles and at the end of treatment. In the case of neurological signs or symptoms, more frequent examinations should be performed and the following dose modifications can be made according to NCIC-CTC grade:
• Grade 2: Reduce cisplatin dose by 20%. • Grade 3: Discontinue treatment.
Ototoxicity: In the case of grade 3 toxicity, discontinue treatment.

Nephrotoxicity: In the event of a rise in serum creatinine ≥grade 2 (>1.5 × normal value) despite adequate rehydration, CrCl should be determined before each subsequent cycle and the following dose reductions should be considered (see Table 2).

For other cisplatin dosage adjustments, also refer to the manufacturers’ prescribing information.

Table 2 Dose Reductions for Evaluation of Creatinine Clearance

Creatinine clearance result before next cycle

Cisplatin dose next cycle

CrCl ≥60 mL/min

Full dose of cisplatin was given. CrCl was to be repeated before each treatment cycle.

CrCl between 40 and 59 mL/min

Dose of cisplatin was reduced by 50% at subsequent cycle. If CrCl was >60 mL/min at end of cycle, full cisplatin dose was reinstituted at the next cycle.

If no recovery was observed, then cisplatin was omitted from the next treatment cycle.

CrCl <40 mL/min

Dose of cisplatin was omitted in that treatment cycle only.

If CrCl was still <40 mL/min at the end of cycle, cisplatin was discontinued.

If CrCl was >40 and <60 mL/min at end of cycle, a 50% cisplatin dose was given at the next cycle.

If CrCl was >60 mL/min at end of cycle, full cisplatin dose was given at next cycle

CrCl = Creatinine clearance

Fluorouracil dose modifications and treatment delays

For diarrhea and stomatitis, see Table 1.

In the event of grade 2 or greater plantar-palmar toxicity, fluorouracil should be stopped until recovery. The fluorouracil dosage should be reduced by 20%.

For other greater than grade 3 toxicities, except alopecia and anemia, chemotherapy should be delayed (for a maximum of 2 weeks from the planned date of infusion) until resolution to grade ≤1 and then recommenced, if medically appropriate.

For other fluorouracil dosage adjustments, also refer to the manufacturers’ prescribing information.

Combination Therapy with Strong CYP3A4 inhibitors:

Avoid using concomitant strong CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., ketoconazole, itraconazole, clarithromycin, atazanavir, indinavir, nefazodone, nelfinavir, ritonavir, saquinavir, telithromycin and voriconazole). There are no clinical data with a dose adjustment in patients receiving strong CYP3A4 inhibitors. Based on extrapolation from a pharmacokinetic study with ketoconazole in 7 patients, consider a 50% Docetaxel Injection dose reduction if patients require co-administration of a strong CYP3A4 inhibitor [see Drug Interactions (7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.8 Administration Precautions

Docetaxel Injection is a cytotoxic anticancer drug and, as with other potentially toxic compounds, caution should be exercised when handling and preparing Docetaxel Injection solutions. The use of gloves is recommended. Please refer to [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16.3)].

If Docetaxel Injection or diluted solution for intravenous infusion should come into contact with the skin, immediately and thoroughly wash with soap and water. If Docetaxel Injection or diluted solution for intravenous infusion should come into contact with mucosa, immediately and thoroughly wash with water.

Contact of the Docetaxel Injection with plasticized PVC equipment or devices used to prepare solutions for infusion is not recommended. In order to minimize patient exposure to the plasticizer DEHP (di-2-ethylhexyl phthalate), which may be leached from PVC infusion bags or sets, the final Docetaxel Injection dilution for infusion should be stored in bottles (glass, polypropylene) or plastic bags (polypropylene, polyolefin) and administered through polyethylene-lined administration sets.

Docetaxel Injection requires dilution prior to administration. Please follow the preparation instructions provided below.

2.9 Preparation and Administration

Docetaxel Injection (10 mg/mL) requires NO prior dilution with a diluent and is ready to add to the infusion solution.

Dilution for Infusion
1. Aseptically withdraw the required amount of Docetaxel Injection solution (10 mg docetaxel /mL) with a calibrated syringe and inject (as a single injection) into a 250 mL infusion bag or bottle of either 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution or 5% Dextrose solution to produce a final concentration of 0.3 to 0.74 mg/ mL. If a dose greater than 200 mg of Docetaxel Injection is required, use a larger volume of the infusion vehicle so that a concentration of 0.74 mg/mL Docetaxel Injection is not exceeded. 2. Thoroughly mix the infusion bag or bottle manually by gentle inversion and rotation in a controlled manner and avoid foaming. Shaking or vigorous agitation should be avoided during preparation and transportation to the patient for administration. 3. As with all parenteral products, Docetaxel Injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration whenever the solution and container permit. If the Docetaxel Injection vial or diluted solution is not clear or appears to have precipitation, these should be discarded.
The Docetaxel Injection diluted solution for infusion should be administered intravenously as a 1-hour infusion under ambient room temperature below 25°C (77°F) and lighting conditions.

2.10 Stability

Docetaxel Injection infusion solution, if stored between 2°C and 25°C (36°F and 77°F) is stable for 4 hours in either 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution or 5% Dextrose solution. Use within 4 hours including storage and administration. Do not freeze infusion solution.
Irinotecan Hydrochlorid...

Irinotecan Hydrochloride

2.2 Colorectal Single Agent Regimens 1 and 2

Administer irinotecan hydrochloride injection as a 90-minute intravenous infusion. The currently recommended regimens are shown in Table 3.

A reduction in the starting dose by one dose level of irinotecan hydrochloride injection may be considered for patients with any of the following conditions: prior pelvic/abdominal radiotherapy, performance status of 2, or increased bilirubin levels. Dosing for patients with bilirubin >2 mg/dL cannot be recommended because there is insufficient information to recommend a dose in these patients.
Table 3. Single-Agent Regimens of Irinotecan Hydrochloride Injection and Dose Modifications * Subsequent doses may be adjusted as high as 150 mg/m 2 or to as low as 50 mg/m 2 in 25 to 50 mg/m 2 decrements depending upon individual patient tolerance. † Subsequent doses may be adjusted as low as 200 mg/m 2 in 50 mg/m 2 decrements depending upon individual patient tolerance ‡ Provided intolerable toxicity does not develop, treatment with additional cycles may be continued indefinitely as long as patients continue to experience clinical benefit.
Regimen 1 (weekly)*

125 mg/m2 intravenous infusion over 90 minutes, days 1,8,15,22 then 2-week rest

Starting Dose and Modified Dose Levels† (mg/m2)

Starting Dose

Dose Level -1

Dose Level -2

125

100

75

Regimen 2 (every 3 weeks)‡

350 mg/m2 intravenous infusion over 90 minutes, once every 3 weeks†

Starting Dose and Modified Dose Levels (mg/m2)

Starting Dose

Dose Level -1

Dose Level -2

350

300

250

Dose Modifications

Based on recommended dose-levels described in Table 3, Single-Agent Regimens of Irinotecan Hydrochloride Injection and Dose Modifications, subsequent doses should be adjusted as suggested in Table 4, Recommended Dose Modifications for Single-Agent Schedules. All dose modifications should be based on the worst preceding toxicity.
Table 4: Recommended Dose Modifications for Single-Agent Schedules* A new cycle of therapy should not begin until the granulocyte count has recovered to ≥1500/mm3, and the platelet count has recovered to ≥100,000/mm3, and treatment-related diarrhea is fully resolved. Treatment should be delayed 1 to 2 weeks to allow for recovery from treatment-related toxicities. If the patient has not recovered after a 2-week delay, consideration should be given to discontinuing irinotecanhydrochloride injection. Worst Toxicity NCI Grade† (Value) During a Cycle of Therapy At the Start of the Next Cycles of Therapy (After Adequate Recovery), Compared with the Starting Dose in the Previous Cycle* Weekly Weekly Once every 3 weeks * All dose modifications should be based on the worst preceding toxicity † National Cancer Institute Common Toxicity Criteria (version 1) ‡ Pretreatment § Excludes alopecia, anorexia, asthenia
No toxicity

Maintain dose level

↑ 25 mg/m2 up to a maximum dose of 150 mg/m2

Maintain dose level

Neutropenia

1 (1500 to 1999/mm3)

Maintain dose level

Maintain dose level

Maintain dose level

2 (1000 to 1499/mm3)

↓ 25 mg/m2

Maintain dose level

Maintain dose level

3 (500 to 999/mm3)

Omit dose until resolved to ≤ grade 2, then ↓ 25 mg/m2

↓ 25 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

4 (<500/mm3)

Omit dose until resolved to ≤ grade 2, then ↓ 50 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

Neutropenic fever

Omit dose until resolved, then ↓ 50 mg/m2 when resolved

↓ 50 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

Other hematologic toxicities

Dose modifications for leukopenia, thrombocytopenia, and anemia during a cycle of therapy and at the start of subsequent cycles of therapy are also based on NCI toxicity criteria and are the same as recommended for neutropenia above.

Diarrhea

1 (2–3 stools/day > pretx‡)

Maintain dose level

Maintain dose level

Maintain dose level

2 (4–6 stools/day > pretx)

↓ 25 mg/m2

Maintain dose level

Maintain dose level

3 (7–9 stools/day > pretx)

Omit dose until resolved to ≤ grade 2, then ↓ 25 mg/m2

↓ 25 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

4 (≥10 stools/day > pretx)

Omit dose until resolved to ≤ grade 2 then ↓ 50 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

Other nonhematologic§ toxicities

1

Maintain dose level

Maintain dose level

Maintain dose level

2

↓ 25 mg/m2

↓ 25 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

3

Omit dose until resolved to ≤ grade 2, then ↓ 25 mg/m2

↓ 25 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

4

Omit dose until resolved to ≤ grade 2, then ↓ 50 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

↓ 50 mg/m2

2.3 Dosage in Patients with Reduced UGT1A1 Activity

When administered in combination with other agents, or as a single-agent, a reduction in the starting dose by at least one level of irinotecan hydrochloride injection should be considered for patients known to be homozygous for the UGT1A1*28 allele [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.2) and WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.3)]. However, the precise dose reduction in this patient population is not known, and subsequent dose modifications should be considered based on individual patient tolerance to treatment (see Tables 3 and 4).

2.4 Premedication

It is recommended that patients receive premedication with antiemetic agents. In clinical studies of the weekly dosage schedule, the majority of patients received 10 mg of dexamethasone given in conjunction with another type of antiemetic agent, such as a 5-HT3 blocker (e.g., ondansetron or granisetron). Antiemetic agents should be given on the day of treatment, starting at least 30 minutes before administration of irinotecan hydrochloride injection. Physicians should also consider providing patients with an antiemetic regimen (e.g., prochlorperazine) for subsequent use as needed. Prophylactic or therapeutic administration of atropine should be considered in patients experiencing cholinergic symptoms.

2.5 Preparation of Infusion Solution

Inspect vial contents for particulate matter and discoloration and repeat inspection when drug product is withdrawn from vial into syringe.

Irinotecan hydrochloride injection 20 mg/mL is intended for single use only and any unused portion should be discarded.

Irinotecan hydrochloride injection must be diluted prior to infusion. Irinotecan hydrochloride injection should be diluted in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, (preferred) or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, to a final concentration range of 0.12 mg/mL to 2.8 mg/mL. Other drugs should not be added to the infusion solution.

The solution is physically and chemically stable for up to 24 hours at room temperature and in ambient fluorescent lighting. Solutions diluted in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, and stored at refrigerated temperatures (approximately 2° to 8°C, 36° to 46°F), and protected from light are physically and chemically stable for 48 hours. Refrigeration of admixtures using 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, is not recommended due to a low and sporadic incidence of visible particulates. Freezing irinotecan hydrochloride injection and admixtures of irinotecan hydrochloride injection may result in precipitation of the drug and should be avoided.

The irinotecan hydrochloride injection solution should be used immediately after reconstitution as it contains no antibacterial preservative. Because of possible microbial contamination during dilution, it is advisable to use the admixture prepared with 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, within 24 hours if refrigerated (2° to 8°C, 36° to 46°F). In the case of admixtures prepared with 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, or Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, the solutions should be used within 4 hours if kept at room temperature. If reconstitution and dilution are performed under strict aseptic conditions (e.g., on Laminar Air Flow bench), irinotecan hydrochloride injection solution should be used (infusion completed) within 12 hours at room temperature or 24 hours if refrigerated (2° to 8°C, 36° to 46°F).

2.6 Safe Handling

Care should be exercised in the handling and preparation of infusion solutions prepared from irinotecan hydrochloride injection. The use of gloves is recommended. If a solution of irinotecan hydrochloride injection contacts the skin, wash the skin immediately and thoroughly with soap and water. If irinotecan hydrochloride contacts the mucous membranes, flush thoroughly with water. Several published guidelines for handling and disposal of anticancer agents are available.

2.7 Extravasation

Care should be taken to avoid extravasation, and the infusion site should be monitored for signs of inflammation. Should extravasation occur, flushing the site with sterile water and applications of ice are recommended.
Phenylephrine Hydrochlo...

Phenylephrine Hydrochloride

Phenylephrine hydrochloride is generally injected subcutaneously, intramuscularly, slowly intravenously, or in dilute solution as a continuous intravenous infusion. In patients with paroxysmal supraventricular tachycardia and, if indicated, in case of emergency, phenylephrine hydrochloride is administered directly intravenously. The dose should be adjusted according to the pressor response.
Dosage Calculations Dose Required Use Phenylephrine HCl Injection 1% 10 mg 1 mL 5 mg 0.5 mL 1 mg 0.1 mL
For convenience in intermittent intravenous administration, dilute 1 mL phenylephrine hydrochloride 1% with 9 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP, to yield 0.1% phenylephrine hydrochloride.
Dose Required Use Diluted Phenylephrine HCl Injection 1% 0.1 mg 0.1 mL 0.2 mg 0.2 mL 0.5 mg 0.5 mL
Mild or Moderate Hypotension

Subcutaneously or Intramuscularly: Usual dose, from 2 mg to 5 mg. Range, from 1 mg to 10 mg. Initial dose should not exceed 5 mg.

Intravenously: Usual dose, 0.2 mg. Range, from 0.1 mg to 0.5 mg. Initial dose should not exceed 0.5 mg.

Injections should not be repeated more often than every 10 to 15 minutes. A 5 mg intramuscular dose should raise blood pressure for one to two hours. A 0.5 mg intravenous dose should elevate the pressure for about 15 minutes.

Severe Hypotension and Shock – Including Drug-Related Hypotension

Blood volume depletion should always be corrected as fully as possible before any vasopressor is administered. When, as an emergency measure, intra-aortic pressures must be maintained to prevent cerebral or coronary artery ischemia, phenylephrine hydrochloride can be administered before and concurrently with blood volume replacement.

Hypotension and occasionally severe shock may result from overdosage or idiosyncrasy following the administration of certain drugs, especially adrenergic and ganglionic blocking agents, rauwolfia and veratrum alkaloids, and phenothiazine tranquilizers. Patients who receive a phenothiazine derivative as preoperative medication are especially susceptible to these reactions. As an adjunct in the management of such episodes, phenylephrine hydrochloride is a suitable agent for restoring blood pressure.

Higher initial and maintenance doses of phenylephrine hydrochloride are required in patients with persistent or untreated severe hypotension or shock. Hypotension produced by powerful peripheral adrenergic blocking agents, chlorpromazine, or pheochromocytomectomy may also require more intensive therapy.

Continuous Infusion

Add 10 mg of the drug (1 mL of 1 percent solution) to 500 mL of Dextrose Injection, USP, or Sodium Chloride Injection, USP (providing a 1:50,000 solution). To raise the blood pressure rapidly, start the infusion at about 100 µg to 180 µg per minute (based on 20 drops per mL this would be 100 to 180 drops per minute). When the blood pressure is stabilized (at a low normal level for the individual) a maintenance rate of 40 µg to 60 µg per minute usually suffices (based on 20 drops per mL this would be 40 to 60 drops per minute). If the drop size of the infusion system varies from the 20 drops per mL, the dose must be adjusted accordingly.

If a prompt initial pressor response is not obtained, additional increments of phenylephrine hydrochloride (10 mg or more) are added to the infusion bottle. The rate of flow is then adjusted until the desired blood pressure level is obtained. (In some cases, a more potent vasopressor, such as norepinephrine bitartrate, may be required.) Hypertension should be avoided. The blood pressure should be checked frequently. Headache and/or bradycardia may indicate hypertension. Arrhythmias are rare.

Spinal Anesthesia – Hypotension

Routine parenteral use of phenylephrine hydrochloride has been recommended for the prophylaxis and treatment of hypotension during spinal anesthesia. It is best administered subcutaneously or intramuscularly three or four minutes before injection of the spinal anesthetic. The total requirement for high anesthetic levels is usually 3 mg, and for lower levels, 2 mg. For hypotensive emergencies during spinal anesthesia, phenylephrine hydrochloride may be injected intravenously, using an initial dose of 0.2 mg. Any subsequent dose should not exceed the previous dose by more than 0.1 mg to 0.2 mg and no more than 0.5 mg should be administered in a single dose. To combat hypotension during spinal anesthesia in children, a dose of 0.5 mg to 1 mg per 25 pounds body weight, administered subcutaneously or intramuscularly, is recommended.

Prolongation of Spinal Anesthesia

The addition of 2 mg to 5 mg of phenylephrine hydrochloride to the anesthetic solution increases the duration of motor block by as much as approximately 50 percent without any increase in the incidence of complications such as nausea, vomiting, or blood pressure disturbances.

Vasoconstrictor for Regional Analgesia

Concentrations about ten times those employed when epinephrine is used as a vasoconstrictor are recommended. The optimum strength is 1:20,000 (made by adding 1 mg of phenylephrine hydrochloride to every 20 mL of local anesthetic solution). Some pressor responses can be expected when 2 mg or more are injected.

Paroxysmal Supraventricular Tachycardia

Rapid intravenous injection (within 20 to 30 seconds) is recommended; the initial dose should not exceed 0.5 mg, and subsequent doses, which are determined by the initial blood pressure response, should not exceed the preceding dose by more than 0.1 mg to 0.2 mg, and should never exceed 1 mg.

DIRECTIONS FOR PROPER USE OF PHARMACY BULK PACKAGE

The pharmacy bulk package is for use in a Pharmacy Admixture Service only.

Use of this product is restricted to a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. Prior to entering the vial, remove the flip-off seal and cleanse the rubber closure with a suitable antiseptic agent.

The container closure may be penetrated only one time, utilizing a suitable sterile transfer device or dispensing set which allows measured distribution of the contents. The date and time the vial was initially opened should be recorded. For dilution, transfer individual dose(s) to appropriate volume(s) of Sterile Water for Injection, USP for intravenous solutions. Use of a syringe with needle is not recommended. Multiple entries increase the potential of microbial and particulate contamination.

The withdrawal of container contents should be accomplished without delay using aseptic technique. However, should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from initial closure entry is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations.
Paclitaxel

Paclitaxel

Note: Contact of the undiluted concentrate with plasticized PVC equipment or devices used to prepare solutions for infusion is not recommended. In order to minimize patient exposure to the plasticizer DEHP [di-2-ethylhexyl)phthalate], which may be leached from PVC infusion bags or sets, diluted Paclitaxel Injection, USP solutions should be stored in bottles (glass, polypropylene) or plastic bags (polypropylene, polyolefin) and administered through polyethylene-lined administration sets.

All patients should be premedicated prior to Paclitaxel Injection, USP administration in order to prevent severe hypersensitivity reactions. Such premedication may consist of dexamethasone 20 mg PO administered approximately 12 and 6 hours before Paclitaxel Injection, USP, diphenhydramine (or its equivalent) 50 mg IV 30 to 60 minutes prior to Paclitaxel Injection, USP, and cimetidine (300 mg) or ranitidine (50 mg) IV 30 to 60 minutes before Paclitaxel Injection, USP.

For patients with carcinoma of the ovary, the following regimens are recommended (see CLINICAL STUDIES: Ovarian Carcinoma):
For previously untreated patients with carcinoma of the ovary, one of the following recommended regimens may be given every 3 weeks. In selecting the appropriate regimen, differences in toxicities should be considered (see Table 11 in ADVERSE REACTIONS: Disease-Specific Adverse Event Experiences). Paclitaxel Injection, USP administered intravenously over 3 hours at a dose of 175 mg/m2 followed by cisplatin at a dose of 75 mg/m2; or Paclitaxel Injection, USP administered intravenously over 24 hours at a dose of 135 mg/m2 followed by cisplatin at a dose of 75 mg/m2. In patients previously treated with chemotherapy for carcinoma of the ovary, paclitaxel has been used at several doses and schedules; however, the optimal regimen is not yet clear. The recommended regimen is Paclitaxel Injection, USP 135 mg/m2 or 175 mg/m2 administered intravenously over 3 hours every 3 weeks.
For patients with carcinoma of the breast, the following regimens are recommended (see CLINICAL STUDIES: Breast Carcinoma):
For the adjuvant treatment of node-positive breast cancer, the recommended regimen is Paclitaxel Injection, USP, at a dose of 175 mg/m2 intravenously over 3 hours every 3 weeks for four courses administered sequentially to doxorubicin-containing combination chemotherapy. The clinical trial used four courses of doxorubicin and cyclophosphamide (see CLINICAL STUDIES: Breast Carcinoma). After failure of initial chemotherapy for metastatic disease or relapse within 6 months of adjuvant chemotherapy, paclitaxel at a dose of 175 mg/m2 administered intravenously over 3 hours every 3 weeks has been shown to be effective.
For patients with non-small cell lung carcinoma, the recommended regimen, given every 3 weeks, is Paclitaxel Injection, USP administered intravenously over 24 hours at a dose of 135 mg/m2 followed by cisplatin, 75 mg/m2.

For patients with AIDS related Kaposi's sarcoma, Paclitaxel Injection, USP administered at a dose of 135 mg/m2 given intravenously over 3 hours every 3 weeks or at a dose of 100 mg/m2 given intravenously over 3 hours every 2 weeks is recommended (dose intensity 45 to 50 mg/m2/week). In the two clinical trials evaluating these schedules (see CLINICAL STUDIES: AIDS- related Kaposi's Sarcoma), the former schedule (135 mg/m2 every 3 weeks) was more toxic than the latter. In addition, all patients with low performance status were treated with the latter schedule (100 mg/m2 every 2 weeks).

Based upon the immunosuppression in patients with advanced HIV disease, the following modifications are recommended in these patients:
Reduce the dose of dexamethasone as one of the three premedication drugs to 10 mg PO (instead of 20 mg PO); Initiate or repeat treatment with Paclitaxel Injection, USP only if the neutrophil count is at least 1000 cells/mm3; Reduce the dose of subsequent courses of Paclitaxel Injection, USP by 20% for patients who experience severe neutropenia (neutrophil <500 cells/mm3 for a week or longer); and Initiate concomitant hematopoietic growth factor (G-CSF) as clinically indicated.
For the therapy of patients with solid tumors (ovary, breast, and NSCLC), courses of Paclitaxel Injection, USP should not be repeated until the neutrophil count is at least 1500 cells/mm3 and the platelet count is at least 100,000 cells/mm3. Paclitaxel Injection, USP should not be given to patients with AIDS-related Kaposi's sarcoma if the baseline or subsequent neutrophil count is less than 1000 cells/mm3. Patients who experience severe neutropenia (neutrophil <500 cells/mm3 for a week or longer) or severe peripheral neuropathy during Paclitaxel Injection, USP therapy should have dosage reduced by 20% for subsequent courses of Paclitaxel Injection, USP. The incidence of neurotoxicity and the severity of neutropenia increase with dose.

Hepatic Impairment: Patients with hepatic impairment may be at increased risk of toxicity, particularly grade III to IV myelosuppression (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and PRECAUTIONS: Hepatic). Recommendations for dosage adjustment for the first course of therapy are shown in Table 17 for both 3- and 24-hour infusions. Further dose reduction in subsequent courses should be based on individual tolerance. Patients should be monitored closely for the development of profound myelosuppression.
Table 17 Recommendations For Dosing In Patients With Hepatic Impairment Based On Clinical Trial Dataa a These recommendations are based on dosages for patients without hepatic impairment of 135 mg/m2 over 24 hours or 175 mg/m2 over 3 hours; data are not available to make dose adjustment recommendations for other regimens (eg, for AIDS-related Kaposi’s sarcoma)b Differences in criteria for bilirubin levels between the 3- and 24-hour infusion are due to differences in clinical trial design c Dosage recommendations are for the first course of therapy; further dose reduction in subsequent courses should be based on individual tolerance Degree of Hepatic Impairment Transaminase Levels Bilirubin Levelsb Recommended Paclitaxel Dosec 24-hour infusion <2 × ULN and ≤1.5 mg/dL 135 mg/m2 2 to <10 × ULN and ≤1.5 mg/dL 100 mg/m2 <10 × ULN and 1.6 to 7.5 mg/dL 50 mg/m2 ≥10 × ULN or >7.5 mg/dL Not recommended 3-hour infusion <10 × ULN and ≤1.25 × ULN 175 mg/m2 <10 × ULN and 1.26 to 2 × ULN 135 mg/m2 <10 × ULN and 2.01 to 5 × ULN 90 mg/m2 ≥10 × ULN or >5 × ULN Not recommended
Preparation and Administration Precautions: Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1-4 To minimize the risk of dermal exposure, always wear impervious gloves when handling vials containing Paclitaxel Injection, USP. If Paclitaxel Injection, USP solution contacts the skin, wash the skin immediately and thoroughly with soap and water. Following topical exposure, events have included tingling, burning, and redness. If Paclitaxel Injection, USP contacts mucous membranes, the membranes should be flushed thoroughly with water. Upon inhalation, dyspnea, chest pain, burning eyes, sore throat, and nausea have been reported.

Given the possibility of extravasation, it is advisable to closely monitor the infusion site for possible infiltration during drug administration (see PRECAUTIONS: Injection Site Reaction).

Preparation for Intravenous Administration: Paclitaxel Injection, USP must be diluted prior to infusion. Paclitaxel Injection, USP should be diluted in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; 5% Dextrose injection, USP; 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; or 5% Dextrose in Ringer's Injection to a final concentration of 0.3 to 1.2 mg/mL. The solutions are physically and chemically stable for up to 48 hours at ambient temperature (approximately 25°C) and room lighting conditions. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Upon preparation, solutions may show haziness, which is attributed to the formulation vehicle. No significant losses in potency have been noted following simulated delivery of the solution through IV tubing containing an in-line (0.22 micron) filter.

Data collected for the presence of the extractable plasticizer DEHP [di-(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate] show that levels increase with time and concentration when dilutions are prepared in PVC containers. Consequently, the use of plasticized PVC containers and administration sets is not recommended. Paclitaxel Injection, USP solutions should be prepared and stored in glass, polypropylene, or polyolefin containers. Non-PVC containing administration sets, such as those which are polyethylene-lined, should be used.

Paclitaxel Injection, USP should be administered through an in-line filter with a microporous membrane not greater than 0.22 microns. Use of filter devices such as IVEX-2® filters which incorporate short inlet and outlet PVC-coated tubing has not resulted in significant leaching of DEHP.

The Chemo Dispensing Pin™ device or similar devices with spikes should not be used with vials of Paclitaxel Injection, USP since they can cause the stopper to collapse resulting in loss of sterile integrity of the Paclitaxel Injection, USP solution.

Stability: Unopened vials of Paclitaxel Injection, USP, are stable until the date indicated on the package when stored between 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F), in the original package. Neither freezing nor refrigeration adversely affects the stability of the product. Upon refrigeration components in the Paclitaxel Injection, USP vial may precipitate, but will redissolve upon reaching room temperature with little or no agitation. There is no impact on product quality under these circumstances. If the solution remains cloudy or if an insoluble precipitate is noted, the vial should be discarded. Solutions for infusion prepared as recommended are stable at ambient temperature (approximately 25°C) and lighting conditions for up to 48 hours.

HOW SUPPLIED

NDC 66758-043-01 30 mg/5 mL multidose vial individually packaged in a carton.

NDC 66758-043-02 100 mg/16.7 mL multidose vial individually packaged in a carton.

NDC 66758-043-03 300 mg/50 mL multidose vial individually packaged in a carton.

Storage

Store the vials in original cartons between 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F); excursions permitted to 15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Retain in the original package to protect from light.

Handling and Disposal

See DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Preparation and Administration Precautions.

Rx only

For Sandoz Inc. Customer Service call 1-800-525-8747.

Manufactured by:

EBEWE Pharma Ges.m.b.H. Nfg.KGA-4866 Unterach, AUSTRIA

Manufactured for:

Princeton, NJ 08540

Rev. June 2011

REFERENCES

1. NIOSH Alert: Preventing occupational exposures to antineoplastic and other hazardous drugs in healthcare settings. 2004. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, DHHS (NIOSH) Publication No. 2004-165.

2. OSHA Technical Manual, TED 1-0.15A, Section VI: Chapter 2. Controlling occupational exposure to hazardous drugs. OSHA, 1999. http://www.osha.gov/dts/osta/otm/otm_vi/otm_vi_2.html.

3. American Society of Health-System Pharmacists. ASHP guidelines on handling hazardous drugs. Am J Health-Syst Pharm. 2006;63:1172-1193.

4. Polovich M, White JM, Kelleher LO, eds. 2005. Chemotherapy and biotherapy guidelines and recommendations for practice. 2nd ed. Pittsburgh, PA: Oncology Nursing Society.

Chemo Dispensing Pin™ is a trademark of B. Braun Medical Incorporated.____________________________________________________________________________

* Cremophor® EL is the registered trademark of BASF Aktiengesellschaft.

Cremophor® EL is further purified by a Bristol-Myers Squibb Company proprietary process before use.

DaunoXome® is a registered trademark of Gilead Sciences, Inc.

DOXIL® is a registered trademark of ALZA Corporation

Patient Information

PACLITAXEL INJECTION, USP

Read this patient information leaflet before you start taking Paclitaxel Injection, USP. There may be new information. This information does not take the place of talking to your healthcare provider about your medical condition or your treatment.

What is the most important information I should know about Paclitaxel Injection, USP?

Paclitaxel Injection, USP can cause serious side effects including death.

Serious allergic reactions (anaphylaxis) can happen in people who receive Paclitaxel Injection, USP. Anaphylaxis is a serious medical emergency that can lead to death and must be treated right away.

Tell your healthcare provider right away if you have any of these signs of an allergic reaction:
trouble breathing sudden swelling of your face, lips, tongue, throat, or trouble swallowing hives (raised bumps) or rash
Your healthcare provider will give you medicines to lessen your chance of having an allergic reaction.

What Is Paclitaxel Injection, USP?

Paclitaxel Injection, USP is a prescription medicine used to treat some forms of:
ovarian cancer breast cancer lung cancer Kaposi’s sarcoma
It is not known if Paclitaxel Injection, USP is safe or effective in children.

Who should not receive Paclitaxel Injection, USP?

Do not receive Paclitaxel Injection, USP if:
you are allergic to any of the ingredients in Paclitaxel Injection, USP. See the end of this leaflet for a complete list of ingredients in Paclitaxel Injection, USP. are allergic to medicines containing Cremophor® EL* (polyoxyethylated castor oil). you have low white blood cell counts.
What should I tell my healthcare provider before receiving Paclitaxel Injection, USP?

Before receiving Paclitaxel Injection, USP, tell your healthcare provider about all your medical conditions, including if you:
have liver problems have heart problems are pregnant or plan to become pregnant. Paclitaxel Injection, USP can harm your unborn baby. Talk to your healthcare provider if you are pregnant or plan to become pregnant. are breast-feeding or plan to breast-feed. It is not known if Paclitaxel Injection, USP passes into your breast milk. You and your healthcare provider should decide if you will receive Paclitaxel Injection, USP or breast-feed.
Tell your healthcare provider about all the medicines you take, including prescription and non prescription medicines, vitamins, and herbal supplements.

Know the medicines you take. Keep a list of them and show it to your healthcare provider and pharmacist when you get a new medicine.

How will I receive Paclitaxel Injection, USP?
Paclitaxel Injection, USP is injected into a vein (intravenous [IV] infusion) by your healthcare provider.
Your healthcare provider will do certain tests while you receive Paclitaxel Injection, USP.

What are the possible side effects of Paclitaxel Injection, USP?

Tell your healthcare provider right away if you have:
severe stomach pain severe diarrhea
The most common side effects of Paclitaxel Injection, USP include:
low red blood cell count (anemia) feeling weak or tired hair loss numbness, tingling, or burning in your hands or feet (neuropathy) joint and muscle pain nausea and vomiting hypersensitivity reaction - trouble breathing; sudden swelling of your face, lips, tongue, throat, or trouble swallowing; hives (raised bumps) or rash diarrhea mouth or lip sores (mucositis) infections - if you have a fever (temperature above 100.4°F) or other sign of infection, tell your healthcare provider right away swelling of your hands, face, or feet bleeding events irritation at the injection site low blood pressure (hypotension)
Tell your healthcare provider if you have any side effect that bothers you or that does not go away.

These are not all the possible side effects of Paclitaxel Injection, USP. For more information, ask your healthcare provider or pharmacist.

Call your doctor for medical advice about side effects. You may report side effects to FDA at 1-800-FDA-1088.

General information about the safe and effective use of Paclitaxel Injection, USP.

Medicines are sometimes prescribed for purposes other than those listed in a patient information leaflet. Do not use Paclitaxel Injection, USP for a condition for which it was not prescribed. Do not give Paclitaxel Injection, USP to other people, even if they have the same symptoms that you have. It may harm them.

This patient information leaflet summarizes the most important information about Paclitaxel Injection, USP. If you would like more information, talk with your healthcare provider. You can ask your pharmacist or healthcare provider for information about Paclitaxel Injection, USP that is written for health professionals. For more information call Sandoz Inc., at 1-800-525-8747.

What are the ingredients in Paclitaxel Injection, USP?

Active ingredient: paclitaxel.

Inactive ingredients include: purified Cremophor® EL (polyoxyethylated castor oil) and dehydrated alcohol, USP.

What is cancer?

Under normal conditions, the cells in your body divide and grow in an orderly, controlled way. Cell division and growth are necessary for the human body to perform its functions and to repair itself, when necessary. Cancer cells are different from normal cells because they are not able to control their own growth. The reasons for this abnormal growth are not yet fully understood.

A tumor is a mass of unhealthy cells that are dividing and growing fast and in an uncontrolled way. When a tumor invades surrounding healthy body tissue, it is known as a malignant tumor. A malignant tumor can spread (metastasize) from its original site to other parts of the body if not found and treated early.

Manufactured by:

Ges.m.b.H. Nfg.KGA-4866 Unterach, AUSTRIA

Manufactured for:

Princeton, NJ 08540

Rev. June 2011
Carvedilol

Carvedilol

Carvedilol should be taken with food to slow the rate of absorption and reduce the incidence of orthostatic effects.

2.1 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP-TITRATION. Treatment with carvedilol may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that carvedilol be started at 6.25 mg twice daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 12.5 mg twice daily, then again to the target dose of 25 mg twice daily. A lower starting dose may be used (3.125 mg twice daily) and/or the rate of up-titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β-blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.2 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of carvedilol is 6.25 mg twice daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 12.5 mg twice daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure one hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 25 mg twice daily if tolerated and needed. The full antihypertensive effect of carvedilol is seen within 7 to 14 days. Total daily dose should not exceed 50 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.3 Hepatic Impairment

Carvedilol should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4 )].

2.1 Left Ventricular Dysfunction Following Myocardial Infarction

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED AND MONITORED DURING UP-TITRATION. Treatment with carvedilol may be started as an inpatient or outpatient and should be started after the patient is hemodynamically stable and fluid retention has been minimized. It is recommended that carvedilol be started at 6.25 mg twice daily and increased after 3 to 10 days, based on tolerability, to 12.5 mg twice daily, then again to the target dose of 25 mg twice daily. A lower starting dose may be used (3.125 mg twice daily) and/or the rate of up-titration may be slowed if clinically indicated (e.g., due to low blood pressure or heart rate, or fluid retention). Patients should be maintained on lower doses if higher doses are not tolerated. The recommended dosing regimen need not be altered in patients who received treatment with an IV or oral β-blocker during the acute phase of the myocardial infarction.

2.2 Hypertension

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. The recommended starting dose of carvedilol is 6.25 mg twice daily. If this dose is tolerated, using standing systolic pressure measured about 1 hour after dosing as a guide, the dose should be maintained for 7 to 14 days, and then increased to 12.5 mg twice daily if needed, based on trough blood pressure, again using standing systolic pressure one hour after dosing as a guide for tolerance. This dose should also be maintained for 7 to 14 days and can then be adjusted upward to 25 mg twice daily if tolerated and needed. The full antihypertensive effect of carvedilol is seen within 7 to 14 days. Total daily dose should not exceed 50 mg.

Concomitant administration with a diuretic can be expected to produce additive effects and exaggerate the orthostatic component of carvedilol action.

2.3 Hepatic Impairment

Carvedilol should not be given to patients with severe hepatic impairment [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4 )].
Vinorelbine Tartrate

Vinorelbine Tartrate

Single-Agent Vinorelbine Injection USP

The usual initial dose of single-agent Vinorelbine Injection USP is 30 mg/m2 administered weekly. The recommended method of administration is an intravenous injection over 6 to 10 minutes. In controlled trials, single-agent Vinorelbine Injection USP was given weekly until progression or dose-limiting toxicity.

Vinorelbine Injection USP in Combination with Cisplatin

Vinorelbine Injection USP may be administered weekly at a dose of 25 mg/m2 in combination with cisplatin given every 4 weeks at a dose of 100 mg/m2.

Blood counts should be checked weekly to determine whether dose reductions of Vinorelbine Injection USP and/or cisplatin are necessary. In the SWOG study, most patients required a 50% dose reduction of Vinorelbine Injection USP at day 15 of each cycle and a 50% dose reduction of cisplatin by cycle 3.

Vinorelbine Injection USP may also be administered weekly at a dose of 30 mg/m2 in combination with cisplatin, given on days 1 and 29, then every 6 weeks at a dose of 120 mg/m2.

Dose Modifications for Vinorelbine Injection USP

The dosage should be adjusted according to hematologic toxicity or hepatic insufficiency, whichever results in the lower dose for the corresponding starting dose of Vinorelbine Injection USP (see Table 5).

Dose Modifications for Hematologic Toxicity

Granulocyte counts should be ≥1,000 cells/mm3 prior to the administration of Vinorelbine Injection USP. Adjustments in the dosage of Vinorelbine Injection USP should be based on granulocyte counts obtained on the day of treatment according to Table 5.
Table 5: Dose Adjustments Based on Granulocyte Counts Granulocytes on Day of Treatment (Cells/mm3) Percentage of Starting Dose of VINORELBINE ≥1,500 100% 1,000 to 1,499 50% <1,000 Do not administer. Repeat granulocyte count in 1 week. If 3 consecutive weekly doses are held because granulocyte count is <1,000 cells/mm3, discontinue VINORELBINE. Note: For patients who, during treatment with vinorelbine, experienced fever and/or sepsis while granulocytopenic or had 2 consecutive weekly doses held due to granulocytopenia, subsequent doses of vinorelbine should be: >1,500 75 1,000 to 1,499 37.5% <1,000 See above
Dose Modifications for Hepatic Insufficiency

Vinorelbine Injection USP should be administered with caution to patients with hepatic insufficiency. In patients who develop hyperbilirubinemia during treatment with Vinorelbine Injection USP, the dose should be adjusted for total bilirubin according to Table 6.
Table 6: Dose Modification Based on Total Bilirubin Total Bilirubin(mg/dL) Percentage of Starting Dose of VINORELBINE ≤2.0 100% 2.1 to 3.0 50% >3.0 25%
Dose Modifications for Concurrent Hematologic Toxicity and Hepatic Insufficiency

In patients with both hematologic toxicity and hepatic insufficiency, the lower of the doses based on the corresponding starting dose of Vinorelbine Injection USP determined from Table 5 and Table 6 should be administered.

Dose Modifications for Renal Insufficiency

No dose adjustments for Vinorelbine Injection USP are required for renal insufficiency. Appropriate dose reductions for cisplatin should be made when Vinorelbine Injection USP is used in combination.

Dose Modifications for Neurotoxicity

If Grade ≥2 neurotoxicity develops, Vinorelbine Injection USP should be discontinued.

Administration Precautions

Caution - Vinorelbine Injection USP must be administered intravenously. It is extremely important that the intravenous needle or catheter be properly positioned before any Vinorelbine Injection USP is injected. Leakage into surrounding tissue during intravenous administration of Vinorelbine Injection USP may cause considerable irritation, local tissue necrosis, and/or thrombophlebitis. If extravasation occurs, the injection should be discontinued immediately, and any remaining portion of the dose should then be introduced into another vein. Since there are no established guidelines for the treatment of extravasation injuries with Vinorelbine Injection USP, institutional guidelines may be used. The ONS Chemotherapy Guidelines provide additional recommendations for the prevention of extravasation injuries.1

As with other toxic compounds, caution should be exercised in handling and preparing the solution of Vinorelbine Injection USP. Skin reactions may occur with accidental exposure. The use of gloves is recommended. If the solution of Vinorelbine Injection USP contacts the skin or mucosa, immediately wash the skin or mucosa thoroughly with soap and water. Severe irritation of the eye has been reported with accidental contamination of the eye with another vinca alkaloid. If this happens with Vinorelbine Injection USP, the eye should be flushed with water immediately and thoroughly.

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be used. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.2-8 There is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropriate.

Vinorelbine Injection USP is a clear, colorless to pale yellow solution. Parenteral drug products should be visually inspected for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. If particulate matter is seen, Vinorelbine Injection USP should not be administered.

Preparation for Administration

Vinorelbine Injection USP must be diluted in either a syringe or IV bag using one of the recommended solutions. The diluted Vinorelbine Injection USP should be administered over 6 to 10 minutes into the side port of a free-flowing IV closest to the IV bag followed by flushing with at least 75 to 125 mL of one of the solutions. Diluted Vinorelbine Injection USP may be used for up to 24 hours under normal room light when stored in polypropylene syringes or polyvinyl chloride bags at 5° to 30°C (41° to 86°F).

Syringe

The calculated dose of Vinorelbine Injection USP should be diluted to a concentration between 1.5 and 3.0 mg/mL. The following solutions may be used for dilution:5% Dextrose Injection, USP0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

IV Bag

The calculated dose of Vinorelbine Injection USP should be diluted to a concentration between 0.5 and 2 mg/mL. The following solutions may be used for dilution:5% Dextrose Injection, USP0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USPRinger's Injection, USPLactated Ringer's Injection, USP

Stability

Unopened vials of Vinorelbine Injection USP are stable until the date indicated on the package when stored under refrigeration at 2° to 8°C (36° to 46°F) and protected from light in the carton. Unopened vials of Vinorelbine Injection USP are stable at temperatures up to 25°C (77°F) for up to 72 hours. This product should not be frozen.
Ephedrine Sulfate

Ephedrine Sulfate

Depending on the clinical circumstances, Ephedrine Sulfate Injection may be given subcutaneously, intramuscularly or intravenously.

Usual adult dose: 25 to 50 mg (range 10 to 50 mg) injected subcutaneously or intramuscularly (equivalent to 0.2 to 1.0 mL of 5% solution) is usually adequate to prevent or minimize hypotension secondary to spinal anesthesia. Repeat doses should be governed by blood pressure response or, if used as a bronchodilator, according to the degree of improvement. Absorption (onset of action) by the intramuscular route is more rapid (within 10 to 20 minutes) than by subcutaneous injection. The intravenous route may be used if an immediate effect is desired.

When used during labor, administer only sufficient dosage to maintain blood pressure at or below 130/80.

In acute attacks of asthma, the smallest effective dose should be used (usually 0.25 to 0.5 mL) or as otherwise determined by the patient's response.

Usual pediatric dose: 750 micrograms per kg of body weight or 25 mg/M2 of body surface injected intravenously or subcutaneously, four times daily or as otherwise determined by the patient's response.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. See PRECAUTIONS.
Argatroban Solution

Argatroban Solution

Each 125 mL glass vial contains 125 mg of argatroban (1mg/mL); and, as supplied, is ready for intravenous infusion. Dilution is not required.

Argatroban Injection is a clear, colorless to pale yellow solution. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Do not use if the solution is cloudy, contains precipitates, or if the flip-off seal is not intact.

2.1 Dosing in Patients With Heparin-Induced Thrombocytopenia

Initial Dosage:

Before administering argatroban, discontinue heparin therapy and obtain a baseline aPTT. The recommended initial dose of argatroban for adult patients without hepatic impairment is 2 mcg/kg/min, administered as a continuous infusion (see Table 1).

Table 1.

Recommended Doses and Infusion Rates for 2 mcg/kg/min Dose of Argatroban for Patients
With HIT* and Without Hepatic Impairment (1 mg/mL Concentration)
Body Weight
(kg)
Dose
(mcg/min)
Infusion Rate
(mL/hr) 50 100 6 60 120 7 70 140 8 80 160 10 90 180 11 100 200 12 110 220 13 120 240 14 130 260 16 140 280 17
* with or without thrombosis

Monitoring Therapy:

For use in HIT, therapy with Argatroban Injection is monitored using the aPTT with a target range of 1.5 to 3 times the initial baseline value (not to exceed 100 seconds). Tests of anticoagulant effects (including the aPTT) typically attain steady-state levels within 1 to 3 hours following initiation of Argatroban Injection. Check the aPTT 2 hours after initiation of therapy and after any dose change to confirm that the patient has attained the desired therapeutic range.

Dosage Adjustment:

After the initiation of Argatroban Injection, adjust the dose (not to exceed 10 mcg/kg/min) as necessary to obtain a steady-state aPTT in the target range [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.2 Dosing in Patients Undergoing Percutaneous Coronary Interventions

Initial Dosage:

Initiate an infusion of Argatroban Injection at 25 mcg/kg/min and administer a bolus of 350 mcg/kg via a large bore intravenous line over 3 to 5 minutes (see Table 2). Check an activated clotting time (ACT) 5 to 10 minutes after the bolus dose is completed. The PCI procedure may proceed if the ACT is greater than 300 seconds.

Dosage Adjustment:

If the ACT is less than 300 seconds, an additional intravenous bolus dose of 150 mcg/kg should be administered, the infusion dose increased to 30 mcg/kg/min, and the ACT checked 5 to 10 minutes later (see Table 2).

If the ACT is greater than 450 seconds, decrease the infusion rate to 15 mcg/kg/min, and check the ACT 5 to 10 minutes later (Table 3).

Continue titrating the dose until a therapeutic ACT (between 300 and 450 seconds) has been achieved; continue the same infusion rate for the duration of the PCI procedure.

In case of dissection, impending abrupt closure, thrombus formation during the procedure, or inability to achieve or maintain an ACT over 300 seconds, additional bolus doses of 150 mcg/kg may be administered and the infusion dose increased to 40 mcg/kg/min. Check the ACT after each additional bolus or change in the rate of infusion.

Table 2.

Recommended Starting and Maintenance Doses (Within the Target ACT Range) of Argatroban Injection in Patients Undergoing PCI Without Hepatic Impairment
(1 mg/mL Concentration)
Body

Weight
(kg)
Starting Bolus Dose
(350 mcg/kg)
Starting and Maintenance

Continuous Infusion Dosing

For ACT 300-450 seconds
25 mcg/kg/min
Bolus

Dose
(mcg)
Bolus

Volume
(mL)
Continuous

Infusion

Dose
(mg/min)
Continuous

Infusion

Rate
(mL/hr) 50 17500 18 1250 75 60 21000 21 1500 90 70 24500 25 1750 105 80 28000 28 2000 120 90 31500 32 2250 135 100 35000 35 2500 150 110 38500 39 2750 165 120 42000 42 3000 180 130 45500 46 3250 195 140 49000 49 3500 210
NOTE: 1 mg = 1000 mcg; 1 kg = 2.2 lbs

Table 3.

Recommended Dose Adjustments of Argatroban Injection for Patients Outside of ACT
Target Range Undergoing PCI Without Hepatic Impairment (1 mg/mL Concentration)
Body

Weight
(kg)
If ACT

Less than 300 seconds

Dosage Adjustment†
30 mcg/kg/min
If ACT

Greater than 450 seconds

Dosage Adjustment*
15 mcg/kg/min
Additional

Bolus

Dose
(mcg)
Bolus

Volume
(mL)
Continuous

Infusion

Dose
(mcg/min)
Continuous

Infusion

Rate
(mL/hr)
Continuous

Infusion

Dose
(mcg/min)
Continuous

Infusion

Rate
(mL/hr) 50 7500 8 1500 90 750 45 60 9000 9 1800 108 900 54 70 10500 11 2100 126 1050 63 80 12000 12 2400 144 1200 72 90 13500 14 2700 162 1350 81 100 15000 15 3000 180 1500 90 110 16500 17 3300 198 1650 99 120 18000 18 3600 216 1800 108 130 19500 20 3900 234 1950 117 140 21000 21 4200 252 2100 126
NOTE: 1 mg = 1000 mcg; 1 kg = 2.2 lbs

† Additional intravenous bolus dose of 150 mcg/kg should be administered if ACT less than 300 seconds.

* No bolus dose is given if ACT greater than 450 seconds

Monitoring Therapy:

For use in PCI, therapy with Argatroban Injection is monitored using ACT. Obtain ACTs before dosing, 5 to 10 minutes after bolus dosing, following adjustments in the infusion rate, and at the end of the PCI procedure. Obtain additional ACTs every 20 to 30 minutes during a prolonged procedure.

Continued Anticoagulation after PCI:

If a patient requires anticoagulation after the procedure, Argatroban Injection may be continued, but at a rate of 2 mcg/kg/min and adjusted as needed to maintain the aPTT in the desired range. [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)].

2.3 Dosing in Patients With Hepatic Impairment

For adult patients with HIT and moderate or severe hepatic impairment (based on Child-Pugh classification), an initial dose of 0.5 mcg/kg/min is recommended, based on the approximately 4-fold decrease in argatroban clearance relative to those with normal hepatic function. Monitor the aPTT closely, and adjust the dosage as clinically indicated.

Monitoring Therapy:

Achievement of steady state aPTT levels may take longer and require more dose adjustments in patients with hepatic impairment compared to patients with normal hepatic function.

For patients with hepatic impairment undergoing PCI and who have HIT or are at risk for HIT, carefully titrate argatroban until the desired level of anticoagulation is achieved. Use of Argatroban in PCI patients with clinically significant hepatic disease or AST/ALT levels ≥3 times the upper limit of normal should be avoided [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

2.4 Dosing in Pediatric Patients With Heparin-Induced Thrombocytopenia/ Heparin-Induced Thrombocytopenia and Thrombosis Syndrome

Initial Dosage:

Initial argatroban infusion doses are lower for seriously ill pediatric patients compared to adults with normal hepatic function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

Monitoring Therapy:

In general, therapy with argatroban is monitored using the aPTT. Tests of anticoagulant effects (including the aPTT) typically attain steady-state levels within one to three hours following initiation of argatroban in patients without hepatic impairment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Dose adjustment may be required to attain the target aPTT. Check the aPTT two hours after initiation of therapy and after any dose change to confirm that the patient has attained the desired therapeutic range.

Dosage Adjustment: [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)]

2.5 Conversion to Oral Anticoagulant Therapy

Initiating Oral Anticoagulant Therapy:

When converting patients from Argatroban to oral anticoagulant therapy, consider the potential for combined effects on International Normalized Ratio (INR). To avoid prothrombotic effects and to ensure continuous anticoagulation when initiating warfarin, overlap Argatroban Injection and warfarin therapy. There are insufficient data available to recommend the duration of the overlap. Initiate therapy using the expected daily dose of warfarin. A loading dose of warfarin should not be used.

The relationship between INR and bleeding risk is altered when argatroban and warfarin are co-administered. The combination of argatroban and warfarin does not cause further reduction in the vitamin K–dependent factor Xa activity than that which is seen with warfarin alone. The relationship between INR obtained on combined therapy and INR obtained on warfarin alone is dependent on both the dose of argatroban and the thromboplastin reagent used. The INR value on warfarin alone (INRW) can be calculated from the INR value on combination argatroban and warfarin therapy [see Drug Interactions (7.2) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

Co-Administration of Warfarin and Argatroban Injection at Doses Up to 2 mcg/kg/min:

Measure INR daily while Argatroban Injection and warfarin are co-administered. In general, with doses of Argatroban Injection up to 2 mcg/kg/min, Argatroban Injection can be discontinued when the INR is >4 on combined therapy. After Argatroban Injection is discontinued, repeat the INR measurement in 4 to 6 hours. If the repeat INR is below the desired therapeutic range, resume the infusion of Argatroban Injection and repeat the procedure daily until the desired therapeutic range on warfarin alone is reached.

Co-Administration of Warfarin and Argatroban Injection at Doses Greater than 2 mcg/kg/min:

For doses greater than 2 mcg/kg/min, the relationship of INR between warfarin alone to the INR on warfarin plus argatroban is less predictable. In this case, in order to predict the INR on warfarin alone, temporarily reduce the dose of Argatroban Injection to a dose of 2 mcg/kg/min. Repeat the INR on Argatroban Injection and warfarin 4 to 6 hours after reduction of the Argatroban Injection dose and follow the process outlined above for administering Argatroban Injection at doses up to 2 mcg/kg/min.
Chlorpromazine Hydrochl...

Chlorpromazine Hydrochloride

Adults

Adjust dosage to individual and the severity of his condition, recognizing that the milligram for milligram potency relationship among all dosage forms has not been precisely established clinically. It is important to increase dosage until symptoms are controlled. Dosage should be increased more gradually in debilitated or emaciated patients. In continued therapy, gradually reduce dosage to the lowest effective maintenance level, after symptoms have been controlled for a reasonable period.

The 100 mg and 200 mg tablets are for use in severe neuropsychiatric conditions.

Elderly Patients

In general, dosages in the lower range are sufficient for most elderly patients. Since they appear to be more susceptible to hypotension and neuromuscular reactions, such patients should be observed closely. Dosage should be tailored to the individual, response carefully monitored, and dosage adjusted accordingly. Dosage should be increased more gradually in elderly patients.

Psychotic Disorders

Increase dosage gradually until symptoms are controlled. Maximum improvement may not be seen for weeks or even months. Continue optimum dosage for 2 weeks; then gradually reduce dosage to the lowest effective maintenance level. Daily dosage of 200 mg is not unusual. Some patients require higher dosages (e.g., 800 mg daily is not uncommon in discharged mental patients).

Hospitalized Patients

Acute Schizophrenic or Manic States

It is recommended that initial treatment be with chlorpromazine injection until patient is controlled. Usually patient becomes quiet and cooperative within 24 to 48 hours and oral doses may be substituted and increased until the patient is calm. 500 mg a day is generally sufficient. While gradual increases to 2000 mg a day or more may be necessary, there is usually little therapeutic gain to be achieved by exceeding 1000 mg a day for extended periods. In general, dosage levels should be lower in the elderly, the emaciated and the debilitated.

Less Acutely Disturbed

25 mg t.i.d. Increased gradually until effective dose is reached - usually 400 mg daily.

Outpatients

10 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d., or 25 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

More Severe Cases

25 mg t.i.d. After 1 or 2 days, daily dosage may be increased by 20 to 50 mg at semi-weekly intervals until patient becomes calm and cooperative.

Prompt Control of Severe Symptoms

Initial treatment should be with intramuscular chlorpromazine. Subsequent doses should be oral, 25 to 50 mg t.i.d.

Nausea and Vomiting

10 to 25 mg q4 to 6h, p.r.n., increased, if necessary.

Presurgical Apprehension

25 to 50 mg, 2 to 3 hours before the operation.

Intractable Hiccups

25 to 50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d. If symptoms persist for 2 to 3 days, parenteral therapy is indicated.

Acute Intermittent Porphyria

25 to 50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d. Can usually be discontinued after several weeks, but maintenance therapy may be necessary for some patients.

Pediatric Patients (6 months to 12 years of age)

Chlorpromazine should generally not be used in pediatric patients under 6 months of age except where potentially lifesaving. It should not be used in conditions for which specific pediatric dosages have not been established.

Severe Behavioral Problems

Outpatients

Select route of administration according to severity of patient's condition and increase dosage gradually as required. Oral: 1/4 mg/lb body weight q4 to 6h, p.r.n. (e.g., for 40 lb child - 10 mg q4 to 6h).

Hospitalized Patients

As with outpatients, start with low doses and increase dosage gradually. In severe behavior disorders higher dosages (50 to 100 mg daily and in older children, 200 mg daily or more) may be necessary. There is little evidence that behavior improvement in severely disturbed mentally retarded patients is further enhanced by doses beyond 500 mg per day.

Nausea and Vomiting

Dosage and frequency of administration should be adjusted according to the severity of the symptoms and response of the patient. The duration of activity following intramuscular administration may last up to 12 hours. Subsequent doses may be given by the same route if necessary. Oral: 1/4 mg/lb body weight (e.g., 40 lb child - 10 mg q4 to 6h).

Presurgical Apprehension

1/4 mg/lb body weight orally 2 to 3 hours before operation.
Trifluoperazine Hydroch...

Trifluoperazine Hydrochloride

Adults

Dosage should be adjusted to the needs of the individual. The lowest effective dosage should always be used. Dosage should be increased more gradually in debilitated or emaciated patients. When maximum response is achieved, dosage may be reduced gradually to a maintenance level. Because of the inherent long action of the drug, patients may be controlled on convenient b.i.d. administration; some patients may be maintained on once-a-day administration.

When trifluoperazine HCl is administered by intramuscular injection, equivalent oral dosage may be substituted once symptoms have been controlled.

Note: Although there is little likelihood of contact dermatitis due to the drug, persons with known sensitivity to phenothiazine drugs should avoid direct contact.

Elderly Patients

In general, dosages in the lower range are sufficient for most elderly patients. Since they appear to be more susceptible to hypotension and neuromuscular reactions, such patients should be observed closely. Dosage should be tailored to the individual, response carefully monitored, and dosage adjusted accordingly. Dosage should be increased more gradually in elderly patients.

Non-psychotic Anxiety

Usual dosage is 1 or 2 mg twice daily. Do not administer at doses of more than 6 mg per day or for longer than 12 weeks.

Psychotic Disorders

ORAL: Usual starting dosage is 2 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. (Small or emaciated patients should always be started on the lower dosage).

Most patients will show optimum response on 15 mg or 20 mg daily, although a few may require 40 mg a day or more. Optimum therapeutic dosage levels should be reached within two or three weeks.

Psychotic Children

Dosage should be adjusted to the weight of the child and the severity of the symptoms. These dosages are for children ages 6 to 12, who are hospitalized or under close supervision.

ORAL: The starting dosage is 1 mg administered once a day or b.i.d. Dosage may be increased gradually until symptoms are controlled or until side effects become troublesome.

While it is usually not necessary to exceed dosages of 15 mg daily, some older children with severe symptoms may require higher dosages.
Cefepime

Cefepime

The recommended adult and pediatric dosages and routes of administration are outlined in the following table. Cefepime for injection should be administered intravenously over approximately 30 minutes.
Table 12: Recommended Dosage Schedule for Cefepime for Injection, USP in Patients with CrCL >60 mL/min Site and Type of Infection Dose Frequency Duration (days) Adults * including cases associated with concurrent bacteremia † or until resolution of neutropenia. In patients whose fever resolves but who remain neutropenic for more than 7 days, the need for continued antimicrobial therapy should be re-evaluated frequently. ‡ intramuscular route of administration is indicated only for mild to moderate, uncomplicated or complicated UTIs due to E. coli when the intramuscular route is considered to be a more appropriate route of drug administration. Moderate to Severe Pneumonia due to S. pneumoniae*, P. aeruginosa, K. pneumoniae, or Enterobacter species 1-2 g IV every 12 hours 10 Empiric therapy for febrile neutropenic patients (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES.) 2 g IV every 8 hours 7† Mild to Moderate Uncomplicated or Complicated Urinary Tract Infections, including pyelonephritis, due to E. coli, K. pneumoniae, or P. mirabilis* 0.5-1 gIV/IM‡ every 12 hours 7-10 Severe Uncomplicated or Complicated Urinary Tract Infections, including pyelonephritis, due to E. coli or K. pneumoniae* 2 g IV every 12 hours 10 Moderate to Severe Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections due to S. aureus or S. pyogenes 2 g IV every 12 hours 10 Complicated Intra-abdominal Infections (used in combination with metronidazole) caused by E. coli, viridans group streptococci, P. aeruginosa, K. pneumoniae, Enterobacter species, or B. fragilis. (See CLINICAL STUDIES.) 2 g IV every 12 hours 7-10 Pediatric Patients (2 months up to 16 years) The maximum dose for pediatric patients should not exceed the recommended adult dose.The usual recommended dosage in pediatric patients up to 40 kg in weight for uncomplicated and complicated urinary tract infections (including pyelonephritis), uncomplicated skin and skin structure infections, and pneumonia is 50 mg/kg/dose, administered every 12 hours (50 mg/kg/dose, every 8 hours for febrile neutropenic patients), for durations as given above.
Impaired Hepatic Function

No adjustment is necessary for patients with hepatic impairment.

Impaired Renal Function

In patients with creatinine clearance less than or equal to 60 mL/min, the dose of cefepime for injection should be adjusted to compensate for the slower rate of renal elimination. The recommended initial dose of cefepime for injection should be the same as in patients with normal renal function except in patients undergoing hemodialysis. The recommended doses of cefepime for injection in patients with renal impairment are presented in Table 13.

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft and Gault equation)3 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function:
Males: Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) = Weight (kg) × (140-age) 72 × serum creatinine (mg/dL) Females: 0.85 × above value Table 13: Recommended Dosing Schedule for Cefepime for Injection in Adult Patients (Normal Renal Function, Renal Impairment, and Hemodialysis) CreatinineClearance (mL/min) Recommended Maintenance Schedule * On hemodialysis days, cefepime should be administered following hemodialysis. Whenever possible, cefepime should be administered at the same time each day. >60 Normal recommended dosing schedule 500 mg every 12 hours 1 g every 12 hours 2 g every 12 hours 2 g every 8 hours 30-60 500 mg every 24 hours 1 g every 24 hours 2 g every 24 hours 2 g every 12 hours 11-29 500 mg every 24 hours 500 mg every 24 hours 1 g every 24 hours 2 g every 24 hours <11 250 mg every 24 hours 250 mg every 24 hours 500 mg every 24 hours 1 g every 24 hours CAPD 500 mg every 48 hours 1 g every 48 hours 2 g every 48 hours 2g every 48 hours Hemodialysis* 1 g on day 1, then 500 mg every 24 hours thereafter 1 g every 24 hours
In patients undergoing continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis, cefepime for injection may be administered at normally recommended doses at a dosage interval of every 48 hours (see Table 13).

In patients undergoing hemodialysis, approximately 68% of the total amount of cefepime present in the body at the start of dialysis will be removed during a 3-hour dialysis period. The dosage of cefepime for injection for hemodialysis patients is 1 g on Day 1 followed by 500 mg every 24 hours for the treatment of all infections except febrile neutropenia, which is 1 g every 24 hours. Cefepime for injection should be administered at the same time each day and following the completion of hemodialysis on hemodialysis days (see Table 13).

Data in pediatric patients with impaired renal function are not available; however, since cefepime pharmacokinetics are similar in adults and pediatric patients (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), changes in the dosing regimen proportional to those in adults (see Tables 12 and 13) are recommended for pediatric patients.

Administration

For Intravenous Infusion

Constitute the 500 mg, 1 g, or 2 g vial, and add an appropriate quantity of the resulting solution to an intravenous container with one of the compatible intravenous fluids listed in the Compatibility and Stability subsection. THE RESULTING SOLUTION SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED OVER APPROXIMATELY 30 MINUTES.

Intermittent intravenous infusion with a Y-type administration set can be accomplished with compatible solutions. However, during infusion of a solution containing cefepime, it is desirable to discontinue the other solution.

Intramuscular Administration

For intramuscular administration, cefepime for injection (cefepime hydrochloride) should be constituted with one of the following diluents: Sterile Water for Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride, 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.5% or 1.0% Lidocaine Hydrochloride, or Sterile Bacteriostatic Water for Injection with Parabens or Benzyl Alcohol (refer to Table 14).

Preparation of cefepime for injection solutions is summarized in Table 14.
Table 14: Preparation of Solutions of Cefepime for Injection Single-Dose Vials for Intravenous/Intramuscular Administration Amount of Diluent to be added (mL) Approximate Available Volume (mL) Approximate Cefepime Concentration (mg/mL) cefepime vial content 500 mg (IV) 5 5.6 100 500 mg (IM) 1.3 1.8 280 1 g (IV) 10 11.3 100 1 g (IM) 2.4 3.6 280 2 g (IV) 10 12.5 160
Compatibility and Stability

Intravenous

Cefepime for injection is compatible at concentrations between 1 mg/mL and 40 mg/mL with the following intravenous infusion fluids: 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% and 10% Dextrose Injection, M/6 Sodium Lactate Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, Lactated Ringers and 5% Dextrose Injection, Normosol-R™, and Normosol-M™ in 5% Dextrose Injection. These solutions may be stored up to 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20° to 25° C (68° to 77° F) or 7 days in a refrigerator 2° to 8° C (36° to 46° F).

Cefepime for injection admixture compatibility information is summarized in Table 15.
Table 15: Cefepime Admixture Stability Stability Time for Cefepime for Injection Concentration Admixture and Concentration IV Infusion Solutions RT/L(20°-25° C) Refrigeration(2°-8° C) NS = 0.9% Sodium Chloride InjectionD5W = 5% Dextrose Injectionna = not applicableRT/L = Ambient room temperature and light 40 mg/mL Amikacin 6 mg/mL NS or D5W 24 hours 7 days 40 mg/mL Ampicillin 1 mg/mL D5W 8 hours 8 hours 40 mg/mL Ampicillin 10 mg/mL D5W 2 hours 8 hours 40 mg/mL Ampicillin 1 mg/mL NS 24 hours 48 hours 40 mg/mL Ampicillin 10 mg/mL NS 8 hours 48 hours 4 mg/mL Ampicillin 40 mg/mL NS 8 hours 8 hours 4-40 mg/mL Clindamycin Phosphate 0.25-6 mg/mL NS or D5W 24 hours 7 days 4 mg/mL Heparin 10-50 units/mL NS or D5W 24 hours 7 days 4 mg/mL Potassium Chloride 10-40 mEq/L NS or D5W 24 hours 7 days 4 mg/mL Theophylline 0.8 mg/mL D5W 24 hours 7 days 1-4 mg/mL na Aminosyn II® 4.25% with electrolytes and calcium 8 hours 3 days 0.125-0.25 mg/mL na Inpersol™ with 4.25% dextrose 24 hours 7 days
Solutions of cefepime for injection, like those of most beta-lactam antibiotics, should not be added to solutions of ampicillin at a concentration greater than 40 mg/mL, and should not be added to metronidazole, vancomycin, gentamicin, tobramycin, netilmicin sulfate or aminophylline because of potential interaction. However, if concurrent therapy with cefepime for injection is indicated, each of these antibiotics can be administered separately.

Intramuscular

Cefepime for injection (cefepime hydrochloride) constituted as directed is stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20° to 25° C (68° to 77° F) or for 7 days in a refrigerator 2° to 8° C (36° to 46° F) with the following diluents: Sterile Water for Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, Sterile Bacteriostatic Water for Injection with Parabens or Benzyl Alcohol, or 0.5% or 1% Lidocaine Hydrochloride.

NOTE: PARENTERAL DRUGS SHOULD BE INSPECTED VISUALLY FOR PARTICULATE MATTER BEFORE ADMINISTRATION.

As with other cephalosporins, the color of cefepime for injection powder, as well as its solutions, tend to darken depending on storage conditions; however, when stored as recommended, the product potency is not adversely affected.
Haloperidol

Haloperidol

There is considerable variation from patient to patient in the amount of medication required for treatment. As with all antipsychotic drugs, dosage should be individualized according to the needs and response of each patient. Dosage adjustments, either upward or downward, should be carried out as rapidly as practicable to achieve optimum therapeutic control.

To determine the initial dosage, consideration should be given to the patient’s age, severity of illness, previous response to other antipsychotic drugs, and any concomitant medication or disease state. Children, debilitated or geriatric patients, as well as those with a history of adverse reactions to antipsychotic drugs, may require less haloperidol. The optimal response in such patients is usually obtained with more gradual dosage adjustments and at lower dosage levels, as recommended below.

Clinical experience suggests the following recommendations:

Oral Administration

Initial Dosage Range

Adults
Moderate Symptomatology 0.5 mg to 2 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Severe Symptomatology 3 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.
To achieve prompt control, higher doses may be required in some cases.
Geriatric or Debilitated Patients 0.5 mg to 2 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Chronic or Resistant Patients 3 mg to 5 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. Patients who remain severely disturbed or inadequately controlled may require dosage adjustment. Daily dosages up to 100 mg may be necessary in some cases to achieve an optimal response. Infrequently, haloperidol has been used in doses above 100 mg for severely resistant patients; however, the limited clinical usage has not demonstrated the safety of prolonged administration of such doses.
Children

The following recommendations apply to children between the ages of 3 and 12 years (weight range 15 to 40 kg). Haloperidol is not intended for children under 3 years old. Therapy should begin at the lowest dose possible (0.5 mg per day). If required, the dose should be increased by an increment of 0.5 mg at 5 to 7 day intervals until the desired therapeutic effect is obtained. (See chart below.)

The total dose may be divided, to be given b.i.d. or t.i.d.
Psychotic Disorders 0.05 mg/kg/day to 0.15 mg/kg/day Non-Psychotic Behavior Disorders and Tourette’s Disorder 0.05 mg/kg/day to 0.075 mg/kg/day Severely disturbed psychotic children may require higher doses. In severely disturbed, non-psychotic children or in hyperactive children with accompanying conduct disorders, who have failed to respond to psychotherapy or medications other than antipsychotics, it should be noted that since these behaviors may be short-lived, short-term administration of haloperidol may suffice. There is no evidence establishing a maximum effective dosage. There is little evidence that behavior improvement is further enhanced in dosages beyond 6 mg per day.
Maintenance Dosage

Upon achieving a satisfactory therapeutic response, dosage should then be gradually reduced to the lowest effective maintenance level.

Switchover Procedure

The oral form should supplant the injectable as soon as practicable. In the absence of bioavailability studies establishing bioequivalence between these two dosage forms, the following guidelines for dosage are suggested. For an initial approximation of the total daily dose required, the parenteral dose administered in the preceding 24 hours may be used. Since this dose is only an initial estimate, it is recommended that careful monitoring of clinical signs and symptoms, including clinical efficacy, sedation, and adverse effects, be carried out periodically for the first several days following the initiation of switchover. In this way, dosage adjustments, either upward or downward, can be quickly accomplished. Depending on the patient’s clinical status, the first oral dose should be given within 12-24 hours following the last parenteral dose.
Cefadroxil

Cefadroxil

Cefadroxil monohydrate is acid-stable and may be administered orally without regard to meals. Administration with food may be helpful in diminishing potential gastrointestinal complaints occasionally associated with oral cephalosporin therapy.

Adults

Urinary Tract Infections

For uncomplicated lower urinary tract infections (i.e., cystitis) the usual dosage is 1 or 2 g per day in a single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.).

For all other urinary tract infections the usual dosage is 2 g per day in divided doses (b.i.d.).

Skin and Skin Structure Inections

For skin and skin structure infections the usual dosage is 1 g per day in single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.).

Pharyngitis and Tonsillitis

Treatment of group A beta-hemolytic streptococcal pharyngitis and tonsillitis–1 g per day in single (q.d.) or divided doses (b.i.d.) for 10 days.

Children

For urinary tract infections, the recommended daily dosage for children is 30 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours. For pharyngitis, tonsillitis, and impetigo, the recommended daily dosage for children is 30 mg/kg/day in a single dose or in equally divided doses every 12 hours. For other skin and skin structure infections, the recommended daily dosage is 30 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 12 hours. In the treatment of beta-hemolytic streptococcal infections, a therapeutic dosage of cefadroxil should be administered for at least 10 days.

Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment, the dosage of cefadroxil should be adjusted according to creatinine clearance rates to prevent drug accumulation. The following schedule is suggested. In adults, the initial dose is 1000 mg of cefadroxil and the maintenance dose (based on the creatinine clearance rate [mL/min/1.73 m2]) is 500 mg at the time intervals listed below.
Creatinine Clearances Dosage Interval 0-10 mL/min 36 hours 10-25 mL/min 24 hours 25-50 mL/min 12 hours
Patients with creatinine clearance rates over 50 mL/min may be treated as if they were patients having normal renal function.
Cosyntropin

Cosyntropin

This product should not be given intramuscularly.

Cosyntropin injection may be administered as a direct intravenous injection when used as a rapid screening test of adrenal function. It may also be given as an intravenous infusion over a 4 to 8 hour period to provide a greater stimulus to the adrenal glands. Doses of cosyntropin injection 0.25 to 0.75 mg have been used in clinical studies and a maximal response noted with the smallest dose.

A suggested method for a rapid screening test of adrenal function has been described by Wood and Associates1. A control blood sample of 6 to 7 mL is collected in a heparinized tube. The drug product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to injection. Inject 1 mL of cosyntropin injection. Discard any unused portion. In the pediatric population, aged 2 years or less, a dose of 0.125 mg will often suffice. A second blood sample is collected exactly 30 minutes later. Both blood samples should be refrigerated until sent to the laboratory for determination of the plasma cortisol response by some appropriate method. If it is not possible to send them to the laboratory or perform the fluorimetric procedure within 12 hours, then the plasma should be separated and refrigerated or frozen according to need.

Two alternative methods of administration are intravenous injection and infusion. Cosyntropin injection can be injected intravenously in 2 to 5 mL of 0.9 % Sodium Chloride Injection, USP over a 2-minute period. When given as an intravenous infusion: cosyntropin injection, 0.25 mg/mL may be added to either 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP and given at the rate of approximately 40 micrograms per hour over a 6-hour period. It should not be added to blood or plasma as it is apt to be inactivated by enzymes. Adrenal response may be measured in the usual manner by determining urinary steroid excretion before and after treatment or by measuring plasma cortisol levels before and at the end of the infusion. The latter is preferable because the urinary steroid excretion does not always accurately reflect the adrenal or plasma cortisol response to ACTH.

The usual normal response in most cases is an approximate doubling of the basal level, provided that the basal level does not exceed the normal range. Patients receiving cortisone, hydrocortisone or spironolactone should omit their pre-test doses on the day selected for testing. Patients taking inadvertent doses of cortisone or hydrocortisone on the test day and patients taking spironolactone or women taking drugs which contain estrogen may exhibit abnormally high basal plasma cortisol levels.

A paradoxical response may be noted in the cortisone or hydrocortisone group as seen in a decrease in plasma cortisol values following a stimulating dose of cosyntropin injection.

In the spironolactone or estrogen group only a normal incremental response is to be expected. Many patients with normal adrenal function, however, do not respond to the expected degree so that the following criteria have been established to denote a normal response:
The control plasma cortisol level should exceed 5 micrograms/100 mL. The 30-minute level should show an increment of at least 7 micrograms/100 mL above the basal level. The 30-minute level should exceed 18 micrograms/100 mL. Comparable figures have been reported by Greig and co-workers2.
If the increase in plasma cortisol levels at 30 minutes is equivocal, a consideration should be given to repeat cortisol sampling at later time points (e.g. 60 and/or 90 minutes). In a study in normal volunteers, plasma cortisol levels peaked about 2.5 ± 0.5 hours after an intravenous injection of cosyntropin (see Fig. 1).

In patients with a raised plasma bilirubin or in patients where the plasma contains free hemoglobin, falsely high fluorescence measurements will result. The test may be performed at any time during the day but because of the physiological diurnal variation of plasma cortisol the criteria listed by Wood cannot apply. It has been shown that basal plasma cortisol levels and the post cosyntropin injection increment exhibit diurnal changes. However, the 30-minute plasma cortisol level remains unchanged throughout the day so that only this single criterion should be used3.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit. Unused cosyntropin injection should be discarded.
Leflunomide

Leflunomide

Loading Dose

Due to the long half-life in patients with RA and recommended dosing interval (24 hours), a loading dose is needed to provide steady-state concentrations more rapidly. It is recommended that leflunomide therapy be initiated with a loading dose of one 100 mg tablet per day for 3 days.

Elimination of the loading dose regimen may decrease the risk of adverse events. This could be especially important for patients at increased risk of hematologic or hepatic toxicity, such as those receiving concomitant treatment with methotrexate or other immunosuppressive agents or on such medications in the recent past. (See WARNINGS: Hepatotoxicity).

Maintenance Therapy

Daily dosing of 20 mg is recommended for treatment of patients with RA. A small cohort of patients (n=104), treated with 25 mg/day, experienced a greater incidence of side effects; alopecia, weight loss, liver enzyme elevations. Doses higher than 20 mg/day are not recommended. If dosing at 20 mg/day is not well tolerated clinically, the dose may be decreased to 10 mg daily. Due to the prolonged half-life of the active metabolite of leflunomide, patients should be carefully observed after dose reduction, since it may take several weeks for metabolite levels to decline.

Monitoring

Hematology parameters and liver enzymes should be monitored (see PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests; WARNINGS: Hepatotoxicity; WARNINGS: Immunosuppression Potential/Bone Marrow Suppression).
Methylprednisolone Acet...

Methylprednisolone Acetate

Because of possible physical incompatibilities, methylprednisolone acetate injectable suspension should not be diluted or mixed with other solutions.

The initial dosage of parenterally administered methylprednisolone acetate will vary from 4 to 120 mg depending on the specific disease entity being treated. However, in certain overwhelming, acute, life-threatening situations, administrations in dosages exceeding the usual dosages may be justified and may be in multiples of the oral doses.

It Should Be Emphasized that Dosage Requirements are Variable and Must Be Individualized on the Basis of the Disease Under Treatment and the Response of the Patient. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dose should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small increments at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. Situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient’s individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment. In this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of the corticosteroid for a period of time consistent with the patient’s condition. If after long term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

A. Administration for Local Effect

Therapy with methylprednisolone acetate does not obviate the need for the conventional measures usually employed. Although this method of treatment will ameliorate symptoms, it is in no sense a cure and the hormone has no effect on the cause of the inflammation.

1. Rheumatoid and Osteoarthritis

The dose for intra-articular administration depends upon the size of the joint and varies with the severity of the condition in the individual patient. In chronic cases, injections may be repeated at intervals ranging from one to five or more weeks depending upon the degree of relief obtained from the initial injection. The doses in the following table are given as a general guide:
Size of Joint Examples Range of Dosage
Large

Knees

Ankles
Shoulders
20 to 80 mg

Medium

Elbows
Wrists
10 to 40 mg

Small

Metacarpophalangeal

Interphalangeal

Sternoclavicular
Acromioclavicular
4 to 10 mg

Procedure: It is recommended that the anatomy of the joint involved be reviewed before attempting intra-articular injection. In order to obtain the full anti-inflammatory effect it is important that the injection be made into the synovial space. Employing the same sterile technique as for a lumbar puncture, a sterile 20 to 24 gauge needle (on a dry syringe) is quickly inserted into the synovial cavity. Procaine infiltration is elective. The aspiration of only a few drops of joint fluid proves the joint space has been entered by the needle. The injection site for each joint is determined by that location where the synovial cavity is most superficial and most free of large vessels and nerves. With the needle in place, the aspirating syringe is removed and replaced by a second syringe containing the desired amount of methylprednisolone acetate. The plunger is then pulled outward slightly to aspirate synovial fluid and to make sure the needle is still in the synovial space. After injection, the joint is moved gently a few times to aid mixing of the synovial fluid and the suspension. The site is covered with a small sterile dressing.

Suitable sites for intra-articular injection are the knee, ankle, wrist, elbow, shoulder, phalangeal, and hip joints. Since difficulty is not infrequently encountered in entering the hip joint, precautions should be taken to avoid any large blood vessels in the area. Joints not suitable for injection are those that are anatomically inaccessible such as the spinal joints and those like the sacroiliac joints that are devoid of synovial space. Treatment failures are most frequently the result of failure to enter the joint space. Little or no benefit follows injection into surrounding tissue. If failures occur when injections into the synovial spaces are certain, as determined by aspiration of fluid, repeated injections are usually futile.

If a local anesthetic is used prior to injection of methylprednisolone acetate, the anesthetic package insert should be read carefully and all the precautions observed.

2. Bursitis

The area around the injection site is prepared in a sterile way and a wheal at the site made with 1 percent procaine hydrochloride solution. A 20 to 24 gauge needle attached to a dry syringe is inserted into the bursa and the fluid aspirated. The needle is left in place and the aspirating syringe changed for a small syringe containing the desired dose. After injection, the needle is withdrawn and a small dressing applied.

3. Miscellaneous: Ganglion, Tendinitis, Epicondylitis

In the treatment of conditions such as tendinitis or tenosynovitis, care should be taken, following application of a suitable antiseptic to the overlying skin, to inject the suspension into the tendon sheath rather than into the substance of the tendon. The tendon may be readily palpated when placed on a stretch. When treating conditions such as epicondylitis, the area of greatest tenderness should be outlined carefully and the suspension infiltrated into the area. For ganglia of the tendon sheaths, the suspension is injected directly into the cyst. In many cases, a single injection causes a marked decrease in the size of the cystic tumor and may effect disappearance. The usual sterile precautions should be observed, of course, with each injection.

The dose in the treatment of the various conditions of the tendinous or bursal structures listed above varies with the condition being treated and ranges from 4 to 30 mg. In recurrent or chronic conditions, repeated injections may be necessary.

4. Injections for Local Effect in Dermatologic Conditions

Following cleansing with an appropriate antiseptic such as 70% alcohol, 20 to 60 mg of the suspension is injected into the lesion. It may be necessary to distribute doses ranging from 20 to 40 mg by repeated local injections in the case of large lesions. Care should be taken to avoid injection of sufficient material to cause blanching since this may be followed by a small slough. One to four injections are usually employed, the intervals between injections varying with the type of lesion being treated and the duration of improvement produced by the initial injection.

B. Administration for Systemic Effect

The intramuscular dosage will vary with the condition being treated. When employed as a temporary substitute for oral therapy, a single injection during each 24-hour period of a dose of the suspension equal to the total daily oral dose of methylprednisolone tablets is usually sufficient. When a prolonged effect is desired, the weekly dose may be calculated by multiplying the daily oral dose by 7 and given as a single intramuscular injection.

In pediatric patients, the initial dose of methylprednisolone may vary depending on the specific disease entity being treated. The range of initial doses is 0.11 to 1.6 mg/kg/day. Dosage must be individualized according to the severity of the disease and response of the patient. The recommended dosage may be reduced for pediatric patients, but dosage should be governed by the severity of the condition rather than by strict adherence to the ratio indicated by age or body weight.

In patients with the adrenogenital syndrome, a single intramuscular injection of 40 mg every two weeks may be adequate. For maintenance of patients with rheumatoid arthritis, the weekly intramuscular dose will vary from 40 to 120 mg. The usual dosage for patients with dermatologic lesions benefited by systemic corticoid therapy is 40 to 120 mg of methylprednisolone acetate administered intramuscularly at weekly intervals for one to four weeks. In acute severe dermatitis due to poison ivy, relief may result within 8 to 12 hours following intramuscular administration of a single dose of 80 to 120 mg. In chronic contact dermatitis repeated injections at 5 to 10 day intervals may be necessary. In seborrheic dermatitis, a weekly dose of 80 mg may be adequate to control the condition.

Following intramuscular administration of 80 to 120 mg to asthmatic patients, relief may result within 6 to 48 hours and persist for several days to two weeks. Similarly in patients with allergic rhinitis (hay fever) an intramuscular dose of 80 to 120 mg may be followed by relief of coryzal symptoms within six hours persisting for several days to three weeks.

If signs of stress are associated with the condition being treated, the dosage of the suspension should be increased. If a rapid hormonal effect of maximum intensity is required, the intravenous administration of highly soluble methylprednisolone sodium succinate is indicated.

In treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis daily doses of 160 mg of methylprednisolone for a week followed by 64 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective.

For the purpose of comparison, the following is the equivalent milligram dose of the various glucocorticoids:
Cortisone, 25 Triamcinolone, 4 Hydrocortisone, 20 Paramethasone, 2 Prednisolone, 5 Netamethasone, 0.75 Prednisone, 5 Dexamethasone, 0.75 Methylprednisolone, 4
Those dose relationships apply only to oral or intravenous administration of these compounds. When these substances or their derivatives are injected intramuscularly or into joint spaces, their relative properties may be greatly altered.
Methazolamide

Methazolamide

The effective therapeutic dose administered varies from 50 mg to 100 mg 2 or 3 times daily. The drug may be used concomitantly with miotic and osmotic agents.
Prochlorperazine Maleat...

Prochlorperazine Maleate

Adults

(For children’s dosage and administration, see below.) Dosage should be increased more gradually in debilitated or emaciated patients.

Elderly Patients

In general, dosages in the lower range are sufficient for most elderly patients. Since they appear to be more susceptible to hypotension and neuromuscular reactions, such patients should be observed closely. Dosage should be tailored to the individual, response carefully monitored, and dosage adjusted accordingly. Dosage should be increased more gradually in elderly patients.

1. To Control Severe Nausea and Vomiting

Adjust dosage to the response of the individual. Begin with the lowest recommended dosage.

Oral Dosage – Tablets

Usually one 5 mg or 10 mg tablet 3 or 4 times daily. Daily dosages above 40 mg should be used only in resistant cases.

2. In Adult Psychiatric Disorders

Adjust dosage to the response of the individual and according to the severity of the condition. Begin with the lowest recommended dose. Although response ordinarily is seen within a day or two, longer treatment is usually required before maximal improvement is seen.

Oral Dosage

Non-Psychotic Anxiety – Usual dosage is 5 mg 3 or 4 times daily. Do not administer in doses of more than 20 mg per day or for longer than 12 weeks.

Psychotic Disorders including Schizophrenia – In relatively mild conditions, as seen in private psychiatric practice or in outpatient clinics, dosage is 5 or 10 mg 3 or 4 times daily.

In moderate to severe conditions, for hospitalized or adequately supervised patients, usual starting dosage is 10 mg 3 or 4 times daily. Increase dosage gradually until symptoms are controlled or side effects become bothersome. When dosage is increased by small increments every 2 or 3 days, side effects either do not occur or are easily controlled. Some patients respond satisfactorily on 50 to 75 mg daily.

In more severe disturbances, optimum dosage is usually 100 to 150 mg daily.

Children

Do not use in pediatric surgery.

Children seem more prone to develop extrapyramidal reactions, even on moderate doses. Therefore, use lowest effective dosage. Tell parents not to exceed prescribed dosage, since the possibility of adverse reactions increases as dosage rises.

Occasionally the patient may react to the drug with signs of restlessness and excitement; if this occurs, do not administer additional doses. Take particular precaution in administering the drug to children with acute illnesses or dehydration (see under Dystonia).

1. Severe Nausea and Vomiting In Children

Prochlorperazine should not be used in pediatric patients under 20 pounds in weight or 2 years of age. It should not be used in conditions for which children’s dosages have not been established. Dosage and frequency of administration should be adjusted according to the severity of the symptoms and the response of the patient. The duration of activity following intramuscular administration may last up to 12 hours. Subsequent doses may be given by the same route if necessary.

Oral Dosage

More than 1 day’s therapy is seldom necessary.
Weight Usual Dosage Not to Exceed under 20 lbs not recommended 20 to 29 lbs 2½ mg 1 or 2 times a day 7.5 mg per day 30 to 39 lbs 2½ mg 2 or 3 times a day 10 mg per day 40 to 85 lbs
2½ mg 3 times a day or
5 mg 2 times a day 15 mg per day
2. In Children with Schizophrenia

Oral Dosage

For children 2 to 12 years, starting dosage is 2-1/2 mg 2 or 3 times daily. Do not give more than 10 mg the first day. Then increase dosage according to patient’s response.

FOR AGES 2 to 5, total daily dosage usually does not exceed 20 mg.

FOR AGES 6 to 12, total daily dosage usually does not exceed 25 mg.
Temazepam

Temazepam

While the recommended usual adult dose is 15 mg before retiring, 7.5 mg may be sufficient for some patients, and others may need 30 mg. In transient insomnia, a 7.5 mg dose may be sufficient to improve sleep latency. In elderly or debilitated patients, it is recommended that therapy be initiated with 7.5 mg until individual responses are determined.
Oxazepam

Oxazepam

Because of the flexibility of this product and the range of emotional disturbances responsive to it, dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effects.
OXAZEPAM Usual Dose
Mild-to-moderate anxiety, with associated

tension, irritability, agitation or related

symptoms of functional origin or secondary to
organic disease
10 to 15 mg, 3 or 4 times daily

Severe anxiety syndromes, agitation, or anxiety
associated with depression
15 to 30 mg, 3 or 4 times daily

Older patients with anxiety, tension, irritability

and agitation

Initial dosage: 10 mg, 3 times daily.

If necessary, increase cautiously to 15 mg,
3 or 4 times daily
Alcoholics with acute inebriation,
tremulousness, or anxiety on withdrawal
15 to 30 mg, 3 or 4 times daily

This product is not indicated in pediatric patients under 6 years of age. Absolute dosage for pediatric patients 6 to 12 years of age is not established.
Ranitidine Syrup

Ranitidine Syrup

Active Duodenal Ulcer: The current recommended adult oral dosage of ranitidine oral solution, USP for duodenal ulcer is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily. An alternative dosage of 300 mg or 20 mL of oral solution (4 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 300 mg of ranitidine) once daily after the evening meal or at bedtime can be used for patients in whom dosing convenience is important. The advantages of one treatment regimen compared to the other in a particular patient population have yet to be demonstrated (see Clinical Trials: Active Duodenal Ulcer). Smaller doses have been shown to be equally effective in inhibiting gastric acid secretion in US studies, and several foreign trials have shown that 100 mg twice daily is as effective as the 150-mg dose.

Antacid should be given as needed for relief of pain (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal Ulcers: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) at bedtime.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison syndrome):

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily. In some patients it may be necessary to administer ranitidine oral solution, USP 150-mg doses more frequently. Dosages should be adjusted to individual patient needs, and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 6 g/day have been employed in patients with severe disease.

Benign Gastric Ulcer: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily.

Maintenance of Healing of Gastric Ulcers: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) at bedtime.

GERD: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily.

Erosive Esophagitis: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) 4 times daily.

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis: The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) twice daily.

Pediatric Use: The safety and effectiveness of ranitidine oral solution, USP have been established in the age-group of 1 month to 16 years. There is insufficient information about the pharmacokinetics of ranitidine oral solution, USP in neonatal patients (less than 1 month of age) to make dosing recommendations.

The following 3 subsections provide dosing information for each of the pediatric indications.

Treatment of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers: The recommended oral dose for the treatment of active duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg twice daily to a maximum of 300 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients.

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers: The recommended oral dose for the maintenance of healing of duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg once daily to a maximum of 150 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients.

Treatment of GERD and Erosive Esophagitis: Although limited data exist for these conditions in pediatric patients, published literature supports a dosage of 5 to 10 mg/kg/day, usually given as 2 divided doses.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function: On the basis of experience with a group of subjects with severely impaired renal function treated with ranitidine oral solution, USP, the recommended dosage in patients with a creatinine clearance <50 mL/min is 150 mg or 10 mL of oral solution (2 teaspoonfuls of oral solution equivalent to 150 mg of ranitidine) every 24 hours. Should the patient's condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 12 hours or even further with caution. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating ranitidine. Ideally, the dosing schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.

Elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, therefore caution should be exercised in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics: Geriatrics and PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Diclofenac Potassium

Diclofenac Potassium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diclofenac potassium tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use diclofenac potassium tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with diclofenac potassium tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

For treatment of pain or primary dysmenorrhea the recommended dosage is 50 mg t.i.d. With experience, physicians may find that in some patients an initial dose of 100 mg of diclofenac potassium tablets, followed by 50-mg doses, will provide better relief.

For the relief of osteoarthritis the recommended dosage is 100 to 150 mg/day in divided doses, 50 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis the recommended dosage is 150 to 200 mg/day in divided doses, 50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d.

Different formulations of diclofenac (diclofenac sodium enteric-coated tablets; diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets; diclofenac potassium tablets) are not necessarily bioequivalent even if the milligram strength is the same.
Thiothixene

Thiothixene

DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION

Dosage of thiothixene capsules should be individually adjusted depending on the chronicity and severity of the symptoms of schizophrenia. In general, small doses should be used initially and gradually increased to the optimal effective level, based on patient response.

Some patients have been successfully maintained on once-a-day thiothixene therapy.

The use of thiothixene capsules in children under 12 years of age is not recommended because safe conditions for its use have not been established.

In milder conditions, an initial dose of 2 mg three times daily is recommended. If indicated, a subsequent increase to 15 mg/day total daily dose is often effective.

In more severe conditions, an initial dose of 5 mg twice daily is recommended.

The usual optimal dose is 20 to 30 mg daily. If indicated, an increase to 60 mg/day total daily dose is often effective. Exceeding a total daily dose of 60 mg rarely increases the beneficial response.
Dorzolamide Hydrochlori...

Dorzolamide Hydrochloride Solution Drops

The dose is one drop of Dorzolamide Hydrochloride Ophthalmic Solution in the affected eye(s) three times daily.

Dorzolamide Hydrochloride Ophthalmic Solution may be used concomitantly with other topical ophthalmic drug products to lower intraocular pressure. If more than one topical ophthalmic drug is being used, the drugs should be administered at least ten minutes apart.
Metronidazole Gel

Metronidazole Gel

The recommended dose is one applicator full of metronidazole vaginal gel USP, 0.75% (approximately 5 grams containing approximately 37.5 mg of metronidazole) intravaginally once or twice a day for 5 days. For once a day dosing, metronidazole vaginal gel USP, 0.75% should be administered at bedtime.
Nafcillin

Nafcillin

The penicillinase-resistant penicillins are available for oral administration and for intramuscular and intravenous injection. The sodium salts of methicillin, oxacillin and nafcillin may be administered parenterally and the sodium salts of cloxacillin, dicloxacillin, oxacillin and nafcillin are available for oral use.

Nafcillin for Injection is available for intramuscular and intravenous injection. The usual I.V. dosage for adults is 500 mg every 4 hours. For severe infections, 1 g every 4 hours is recommended. Administer slowly over at least 30 to 60 minutes to minimize the risk of vein irritation and extravasation.
RECOMMENDED DOSAGE FOR NAFCILLIN FOR INJECTION, USP
Drug

Adults

Infants and Children

<40 kg (88 lbs)

Other Recommendations

Nafcillin

500 mg IM every 4 to 6 hours

IV every 4 hours

25 mg/kg IM twice daily

Neonates 10 mg/kg IM twice daily

Nafcillin

1 gram IM or IV every 4 hours (severe infections)

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to nafcillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient; therefore, it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with nafcillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer duration of therapy.

Concurrent administration of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins and probenecid increases and prolongs serum penicillin levels. Probenecid decreases the apparent volume of distribution and slows the rate of excretion by competitively inhibiting renal tubular secretion of penicillin.

Oral preparations of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins should not be used as initial therapy in serious, life-threatening infections (see PRECAUTIONS: General). Oral therapy with the penicillinase-resistant penicillins may be used to follow-up the previous use of a parenteral agent as soon as the clinical condition warrants.

Nafcillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of nafcillin are necessary.

No dosage alterations are necessary for patients with renal dysfunction, including those on hemodialysis. Hemodialysis does not accelerate nafcillin clearance from the blood.

For patients with hepatic insufficiency and renal failure, measurement of nafcillin serum levels should be performed and dosage adjusted accordingly.

For intramuscular gluteal injections, care should be taken to avoid sciatic nerve injury. With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.

Do not add supplementary medication to Nafcillin for Injection, USP.

Prior to administration parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit.
Nafcillin

Nafcillin

The intent of the pharmacy bulk package for this product is for preparation of solutions for IV infusion only.

Nafcillin for Injection is available for intravenous use.

The usual I.V. dosage for adults is 500 mg every 4 hours. For severe infections, 1 gram every 4 hours is recommended. Administer slowly over at least 30 to 60 minutes to minimize the risk of vein irritation and extravasation.

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to nafcillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient; therefore, it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with nafcillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer duration of therapy.

Nafcillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of nafcillin are necessary.

No dosage alterations are necessary for patients with renal dysfunction, including those on hemodialysis. Hemodialysis does not accelerate nafcillin clearance from the blood.

For patients with hepatic insufficiency and renal failure, measurement of nafcillin serum levels should be performed and dosage adjusted accordingly.

With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Nafcillin

Nafcillin

The intent of the pharmacy bulk package for this product is for preparation of solutions for IV infusion only.

Nafcillin for Injection is available for intravenous use.

The usual I.V. dosage for adults is 500 mg every 4 hours. For severe infections, 1 gram every 4 hours is recommended. Administer slowly over at least 30 to 60 minutes to minimize the risk of vein irritation and extravasation.

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to nafcillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient; therefore, it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with nafcillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer duration of therapy.

Nafcillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of nafcillin are necessary.

No dosage alterations are necessary for patients with renal dysfunction, including those on hemodialysis. Hemodialysis does not accelerate nafcillin clearance from the blood.

For patients with hepatic insufficiency and renal failure, measurement of nafcillin serum levels should be performed and dosage adjusted accordingly.

With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.
Nafcillin Sodium

Nafcillin Sodium

The usual IV dosage for adults is 500 mg every 4 hours. For severe infections, 1 g every 4 hours is recommended. Administer slowly over at least 30 to 60 minutes to minimize the risk of vein irritation and extravasation. Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to nafcillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient, therefore it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with nafcillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer duration of therapy.

Nafcillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of nafcillin are necessary.

No dosage alterations are necessary for patients with renal dysfunction, including those on hemodialysis. Hemodialysis does not accelerate nafcillin clearance from the blood.

For patients with hepatic insufficiency and renal failure, measurement of nafcillin serum levels should be performed and dosage adjusted accordingly.

With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Do not add supplementary medication to nafcillin for injection.

Directions for Use

Nafcillin For Injection vials in the ADD-Vantage Drug Delivery System are for IV use only and are to be used with ADD-Vantage diluent containers of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 50 mL and 100 mL, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, 50 mL and 100 mL.

Reconstitute ADD-Vantage vials as directed in the Instructions for Use section.

Only 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, and 5% Dextrose Injection, USP are available for use in the ADD-Vantage Delivery System for intravenous infusion of nafcillin for injection. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of nafcillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

There is no clinical experience available on the use of this agent in neonates or infants for this route of administration.

This route of administration should be used for relatively short-term therapy (24 to 48 hours) because of the occasional occurrence of thrombophlebitis particularly in elderly patients.

If another agent is used in conjunction with nafcillin therapy, it should not be physically mixed with nafcillin but should be administered separately.

Instructions for Use

To Open Diluent Container:

Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (see Figure 1) then pull straight up to remove the cap (see Figure 2). NOTE: Do not access vial with syringe. b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover (see Figure 3). 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click (see Figure 4). The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove (see Figure 4). 3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately.
To Prepare Admixture:
1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container (see Figure 5). 3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial (see Figure 6). Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.
Preparation for Administration:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

At concentrations ranging from 10 to 40 mg/mL in either 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP nafcillin sodium will have utility times of 24 hours at room temperature (25°C).
Nafcillin Sodium

Nafcillin Sodium

The usual IV dosage for adults is 500 mg every 4 hours. For severe infections, 1 g every 4 hours is recommended. Administer slowly over at least 30 to 60 minutes to minimize the risk of vein irritation and extravasation. Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to nafcillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient, therefore it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with nafcillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer duration of therapy.

Nafcillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of nafcillin are necessary.

No dosage alterations are necessary for patients with renal dysfunction, including those on hemodialysis. Hemodialysis does not accelerate nafcillin clearance from the blood.

For patients with hepatic insufficiency and renal failure, measurement of nafcillin serum levels should be performed and dosage adjusted accordingly.

With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Do not add supplementary medication to nafcillin for injection.

Directions for Use

Nafcillin For Injection vials in the ADD-Vantage Drug Delivery System are for IV use only and are to be used with ADD-Vantage diluent containers of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 50 mL and 100 mL, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, 50 mL and 100 mL.

Reconstitute ADD-Vantage vials as directed in the Instructions for Use section.

Only 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, and 5% Dextrose Injection, USP are available for use in the ADD-Vantage Delivery System for intravenous infusion of nafcillin for injection. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of nafcillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

There is no clinical experience available on the use of this agent in neonates or infants for this route of administration.

This route of administration should be used for relatively short-term therapy (24 to 48 hours) because of the occasional occurrence of thrombophlebitis particularly in elderly patients.

If another agent is used in conjunction with nafcillin therapy, it should not be physically mixed with nafcillin but should be administered separately.

Instructions for Use

To Open Diluent Container:

Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (see Figure 1) then pull straight up to remove the cap (see Figure 2). NOTE: Do not access vial with syringe. b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover (see Figure 3). 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click (see Figure 4). The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove (see Figure 4). 3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately.
To Prepare Admixture:
1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container (see Figure 5). 3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial (see Figure 6). Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.
Preparation for Administration:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

At concentrations ranging from 10 to 40 mg/mL in either 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP nafcillin sodium will have utility times of 24 hours at room temperature (25°C).
Alprazolam

Alprazolam

Dosage should be individualized for maximum beneficial effect. While the usual daily dosages given below will meet the needs of most patients, there will be some who require doses greater than 4 mg/day. In such cases, dosage should be increased cautiously to avoid adverse effects.

Anxiety Disorders and Transient Symptoms of Anxiety

Treatment for patients with anxiety should be initiated with a dose of 0.25 to 0.5 mg given three times daily. The dose may be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, at intervals of 3 to 4 days, to a maximum daily dose of 4 mg, given in divided doses. The lowest possible effective dose should be employed and the need for continued treatment reassessed frequently. The risk of dependence may increase with dose and duration of treatment.

In all patients, dosage should be reduced gradually when discontinuing therapy or when decreasing the daily dosage. Although there are no systematically collected data to support a specific discontinuation schedule, it is suggested that the daily dosage be decreased by no more than 0.5 mg every three days. Some patients may require an even slower dosage reduction.

Panic Disorder

The successful treatment of many panic disorder patients has required the use of alprazolam at doses greater than 4 mg daily. In controlled trials conducted to establish the efficacy of alprazolam in panic disorder, doses in the range of 1 to 10 mg daily were used. The mean dosage employed was approximately 5 to 6 mg daily. Among the approximately 1700 patients participating in the panic disorder development program, about 300 received alprazolam in dosages of greater than 7 mg/day, including approximately 100 patients who received maximum dosages of greater than 9 mg/day. Occasional patients required as much as 10 mg a day to achieve a successful response.

Dose Titration

Treatment may be initiated with a dose of 0.5 mg three times daily. Depending on the response, the dose may be increased at intervals of 3 to 4 days in increments of no more than 1 mg per day. Slower titration to the dose levels greater than 4 mg/day may be advisable to allow full expression of the pharmacodynamic effect of alprazolam. To lessen the possibility of interdose symptoms, the times of administration should be distributed as evenly as possible throughout the waking hours, that is, on a three or four times per day schedule.

Generally, therapy should be initiated at a low dose to minimize the risk of adverse responses in patients especially sensitive to the drug. Dose should be advanced until an acceptable therapeutic response (ie, a substantial reduction in or total elimination of panic attacks) is achieved, intolerance occurs, or the maximum recommended dose is attained.

Dose Maintenance

For patients receiving doses greater than 4 mg/day, periodic reassessment and consideration of dosage reduction is advised. In a controlled postmarketing dose-response study, patients treated with doses of alprazolam greater than 4 mg/day for 3 months were able to taper to 50% of their total maintenance dose without apparent loss of clinical benefit. Because of the danger of withdrawal, abrupt discontinuation of treatment should be avoided. (See WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDENCE.)

The necessary duration of treatment for panic disorder patients responding to alprazolam is unknown. After a period of extended freedom from attacks, a carefully supervised tapered discontinuation may be attempted, but there is evidence that this may often be difficult to accomplish without recurrence of symptoms and/or the manifestation of withdrawal phenomena.

Dose Reduction

Because of the danger of withdrawal, abrupt discontinuation of treatment should be avoided (see WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS, DRUG ABUSE AND DEPENDENCE).

In all patients, dosage should be reduced gradually when discontinuing therapy or when decreasing the daily dosage. Although there are no systematically collected data to support a specific discontinuation schedule, it is suggested that the daily dosage be decreased by no more than 0.5 mg every three days. Some patients may require an even slower dosage reduction.

In any case, reduction of dose must be undertaken under close supervision and must be gradual. If significant withdrawal symptoms develop, the previous dosing schedule should be reinstituted and, only after stabilization, should a less rapid schedule of discontinuation be attempted. In a controlled postmarketing discontinuation study of panic disorder patients which compared this recommended taper schedule with a slower taper schedule, no difference was observed between the groups in the proportion of patients who tapered to zero dose; however, the slower schedule was associated with a reduction in symptoms associated with a withdrawal syndrome. It is suggested that the dose be reduced by no more than 0.5 mg every 3 days, with the understanding that some patients may benefit from an even more gradual discontinuation. Some patients may prove resistant to all discontinuation regimens.

Dosing in Special Populations

In elderly patients, in patients with advanced liver disease or in patients with debilitating disease, the usual starting dose is 0.25 mg, given two or three times daily. This may be gradually increased if needed and tolerated. The elderly may be especially sensitive to the effects of benzodiazepines. If side effects occur at the recommended starting dose, the dose may be lowered.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

The Single Use ADD-Vantage® vials are for intravenous use only.

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae.

Adults – Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months. The doses for the preceding infections may be given by intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous drip therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

The recommended adult and pediatric dosages and routes of administration are outlined in the following table 10. Cefepime for injection should be administered intravenously over approximately 30 minutes.
Table 10: Recommended Dosage Schedule for Cefepime for Injection in Patients with CrCL Greater Than 60 mL/min* Site and Type of Infection Dose Frequency Duration(days) Adults * Adjust dose in patients with CrCL less than or equal to 60 mL/min † including cases associated with concurrent bacteremia. ‡ For Pseudomonas aeruginosa, use 2 g IV every 8 hours (50 mg per kg per dose in pediatric patients 2 months up to 16 years) § or until resolution of neutropenia. In patients whose fever resolves but who remain neutropenic for more than 7 days, the need for continued antimicrobial therapy should be re-evaluated frequently. ¶ Intramuscular route of administration is indicated only for mild to moderate, uncomplicated or complicated UTIs due to E. coli when the intramuscular route is considered to be a more appropriate route of drug administration.
Moderate to Severe Pneumonia due to S. pneumoniae†,P. aeruginosa‡, K. pneumoniae, or Enterobacter species

1 to 2 g IV

Every 8 to 12 hours

10

Empiric therapy for febrile neutropenic patients (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES.)

2 g IV

Every 8 hours

7§

Mild to Moderate Uncomplicated or Complicated Urinary Tract Infections, including pyelonephritis, due to E. coli, K. pneumoniae, or P. mirabilis†

0.5 to 1 gIV/IM¶

Every 12 hours

7 to 10

Severe Uncomplicated or Complicated Urinary Tract Infections, including pyelonephritis, due to E. coli or K. pneumoniae†

2 g IV

Every 12 hours

10

Moderate to Severe Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections due to S. aureus or S. pyogenes

2 g IV

Every 12 hours

10

Complicated Intra-abdominal Infections (used in combination with metronidazole) caused by E. coli, viridans group streptococci, P. aeruginosa‡, K. pneumoniae, Enterobacterspecies, or B. fragilis. (See CLINICAL STUDIES.)

2 g IV

Every 8 to 12 hours

7 to 10

Pediatric Patients (2 months up to 16 years)

The maximum dose for pediatric patients should not exceed the recommended adult dose.The usual recommended dosage in pediatric patients up to 40 kg in weight for uncomplicated and complicated urinary tract infections (including pyelonephritis), uncomplicated skin and skin structure infections, and pneumonia is 50 mg per kg per dose, administered every 12 hours (50 mg per kg per dose, every 8 hours for febrile neutropenic patients), for durations as given above.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment

No adjustment is necessary for patients with hepatic impairment.

Patients with Renal Impairment

In patients with creatinine clearance less than or equal to 60 mL/min, the dose of cefepime for injection should be adjusted to compensate for the slower rate of renal elimination. The recommended initial dose of cefepime for injection should be the same as in patients with normal renal function except in patients undergoing hemodialysis. The recommended doses of cefepime for injection in patients with renal impairment are presented in Table 11.

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft and Gault equation)4 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function:

Males: Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) =

Weight (kg) × (140-age)

72 × serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Females: 0.85 × above value
Table 11: Recommended Dosing Schedule for Cefepime for Injection in Adult Patients (Normal Renal Function, Renal Impairment, and Hemodialysis) Creatinine Clearance(mL/min) Recommended Maintenance Schedule * On hemodialysis days, cefepime should be administered following hemodialysis. Whenever possible, cefepime should be administered at the same time each day.
Greater than 60 Normal recommended dosing schedule

500 mg every 12 hours

1 g every 12 hours

2 g every 12 hours

2 g every 8 hours

30 to 60

500 mg every 24 hours

1 g every 24 hours

2 g every 24 hours

2 g every 12 hours

11 to 29

500 mg every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours

1 g every 24 hours

2 g every 24 hours

Less than 11

250 mg every 24 hours

250 mg every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours

1 g every 24 hours

CAPD

500 mg every 48 hours

1 g every 48 hours

2 g every 48 hours

2 g every 48 hours

Hemodialysis*

1 g on day 1, then 500 mg every 24 hours thereafter

1 g every 24 hours

In patients undergoing continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis, cefepime for injection may be administered at normally recommended doses at a dosage interval of every 48 hours (see Table 11).

In patients undergoing hemodialysis, approximately 68% of the total amount of cefepime present in the body at the start of dialysis will be removed during a 3-hour dialysis period. The dosage of cefepime for injection for hemodialysis patients is 1 g on Day 1 followed by 500 mg every 24 hours for the treatment of all infections except febrile neutropenia, which is 1 g every 24 hours.

Cefepime for injection should be administered at the same time each day and following the completion of hemodialysis on hemodialysis days (see Table 11).

Data in pediatric patients with impaired renal function are not available; however, since cefepime pharmacokinetics are similar in adults and pediatric patients (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY), changes in the dosing regimen proportional to those in adults (see Tables 10 and 11) are recommended for pediatric patients.

Administration

For Intravenous Infusion

Dilute with a suitable parenteral vehicle prior to intravenous infusion. Constitute the 1 g, or 2 g vial, and add an appropriate quantity of the resulting solution to an intravenous container with one of the compatible intravenous fluids listed in the Compatibility and Stability subsection. THE RESULTING SOLUTION SHOULD BE ADMINISTERED OVER APPROXIMATELY 30 MINUTES.

Intermittent intravenous infusion with a Y-type administration set can be accomplished with compatible solutions. However, during infusion of a solution containing cefepime, it is desirable to discontinue the other solution.

Intramuscular Administration

For intramuscular administration, cefepime for injection should be constituted with one of the following diluents: Sterile Water for Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride, 5% Dextrose Injection, 0.5% or 1% Lidocaine Hydrochloride, or Sterile Bacteriostatic Water for Injection with Parabens or Benzyl Alcohol (refer to Table 12).

Preparation of cefepime for injection solutions is summarized in Table 12.
Table 12: Preparation of Solutions of Cefepime for Injection Single-Dose Vials forIntravenous/IntramuscularAdministration Amount of Diluent tobe added (mL) ApproximateAvailableVolume (mL) ApproximateCefepime Concentration(mg/mL)
cefepime vial content

1 g (IV)

10

11.3

100

1 g (IM)

2.4

3.6

280

2 g (IV)

10

12.5

160

Compatibility and Stability

Intravenous

Cefepime for injection is compatible at concentrations between 1 mg per mL and 40 mg per mL with the following intravenous infusion fluids: 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% and 10% Dextrose Injection, M/6 Sodium Lactate Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, Lactated Ringers and 5% Dextrose Injection, Normosol™-R, and Normosol™-M in 5% Dextrose Injection. These solutions may be stored up to 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20° C to 25° C (68° F to 77° F) or 7 days in a refrigerator 2° C to 8° C (36° F to 46° F).

Cefepime for injection admixture compatibility information is summarized in Table 13.
Table 13: Cefepime Admixture Stability Stability Time for Cefepime for Injection Concentration Admixture andConcentration IV InfusionSolutions RT/L (20° to 25° C) Refrigeration (2° to 8° C)
40 mg/mL

Amikacin 6 mg/mL

NS or D5W

24 hours

7 days

40 mg/mL

Ampicillin 1 mg/mL

D5W

8 hours

8 hours

40 mg/mL

Ampicillin 10 mg/mL

D5W

2 hours

8 hours

40 mg/mL

Ampicillin 1 mg/mL

NS

24 hours

48 hours

40 mg/mL

Ampicillin 10 mg/mL

NS

8 hours

48 hours

4 mg/mL

Ampicillin 40 mg/mL

NS

8 hours

8 hours

4 to 40 mg/mL

Clindamycin Phosphate 0.25 to 6 mg/mL

NS or D5W

24 hours

7 days

4 mg/mL

Heparin 10 to 50 units/mL

NS or D5W

24 hours

7 days

4 mg/mL

Potassium Chloride 10 to 40 mEq/L

NS or D5W

24 hours

7 days

4 mg/mL

Theophylline 0.8 mg/mL

D5W

24 hours

7 days

1 to 4 mg/mL

na

Aminosyn™ II 4.25% with electrolytes and calcium

8 hours

3 days

0.125 to 0.25 mg/mL

na

Inpersol™ with 4.25% dextrose

24 hours

7 days

NS = 0.9% Sodium Chloride InjectionD5W = 5% Dextrose Injectionna = not applicableRT/L = Ambient room temperature and light

Solutions of cefepime for injection, like those of most beta-lactam antibiotics, should not be added to solutions of ampicillin at a concentration greater than 40 mg per mL, and should not be added to metronidazole, vancomycin, gentamicin, tobramycin, netilmicin sulfate, or aminophylline because of potential interaction. However, if concurrent therapy with cefepime for injection is indicated, each of these antibiotics can be administered separately.

Intramuscular

Cefepime for injection constituted as directed is stable for 24 hours at controlled room temperature 20° C to 25° C (68° F to 77° F) or for 7 days in a refrigerator 2° C to 8° C (36° F to 46° F) with the following diluents: Sterile Water for Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, Sterile Bacteriostatic Water for Injection with Parabens or Benzyl Alcohol, or 0.5% or 1% Lidocaine Hydrochloride.

NOTE: PARENTERAL DRUGS SHOULD BE INSPECTED VISUALLY FOR PARTICULATE MATTER BEFORE ADMINISTRATION. IF PARTICULATE MATTER IS EVIDENT IN RECONSTITUTED FLUIDS, THE DRUG SOLUTION SHOULD BE DISCARDED.

As with other cephalosporins, the color of cefepime for injection powder, as well as its solutions, tend to darken depending on storage conditions; however, when stored as recommended, the product potency is not adversely affected.
Isosorbide Dinitrate

Isosorbide Dinitrate

As noted under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, multiple-dose studies with ISDN and other nitrates have shown that maintenance of continuous 24-hour plasma levels results in refractory tolerance. Every dosing regimen for isosorbide dinitrate tablets must provide a daily dose-free interval to minimize the development of this tolerance. With immediate-release ISDN, it appears that one daily dose-free interval must be at least 14 hours long.

As also noted under CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, the effects of the second and later doses have been smaller and shorter-lasting than the effects of the first.

Large controlled studies with other nitrates suggest that no dosing regimen with isosorbide dinitrate tablets should be expected to provide more than about 12 hours of continuous anti-anginal efficacy per day.

As with all titratable drugs, it is important to administer the minimum dose which produces the desired clinical effect. The usual starting dose of isosorbide dinitrate is 5 mg to 20 mg, two or three times daily. For maintenance therapy, 10 mg to 40 mg, two or three times daily is recommended. Some patients may require higher doses. A daily dose-free interval of at least 14 hours is advisable to minimize tolerance. The optimal interval will vary with the individual patient, dose and regimen.
Hydroxychloroquine Sulf...

Hydroxychloroquine Sulfate

DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION

One tablet of 200 mg of hydroxychloroquine sulfate is equivalent to 155 mg base.

Malaria

Suppression

In adults, 400 mg (= 310 mg base) on exactly the same day of each week. In infants and children, the weekly suppressive dosage is 5 mg, calculated as base, per kg of body weight, but should not exceed the adult dose regardless of weight.

If circumstances permit, suppressive therapy should begin two weeks prior to exposure. However, failing this, in adults an initial double (loading) dose of 800 mg (= 620 mg base), or in children 10 mg base/kg may be taken in two divided doses, six hours apart. The suppressive therapy should be continued for eight weeks after leaving the endemic area.

Treatment of the acute attack

In adults, an initial dose of 800 mg (= 620 mg base) followed by 400 mg (= 310 mg base) in six to eight hours and 400 mg (= 310 mg base) on each of two consecutive days (total 2 g hydroxychloroquine sulfate or 1.55 g base). An alternative method, employing a single dose of 800 mg (= 620 mg base), has also proved effective.

The dosage for adults may also be calculated on the basis of body weight; this method is preferred for infants and children. A total dose representing 25 mg of base per kg of body weight is administered in three days, as follows:

First dose: 10 mg base per kg (but not exceeding a single dose of 620 mg base).

Second dose: 5 mg base per kg (but not exceeding a single dose of 310 mg base) 6 hours after first dose.

Third dose: 5 mg base per kg 18 hours after second dose.

Fourth dose: 5 mg base per kg 24 hours after third dose.

For radical cure of vivax and malariae malaria concomitant therapy with an 8-aminoquinoline compound is necessary.
Triamterene And Hydroch...

Triamterene And Hydrochlorothiazide

The usual dose of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide capsules is one or two capsules given once daily, with appropriate monitoring of serum potassium and of the clinical effect. (See WARNINGS: Hyperkalemia.)
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

The Single Use ADD-Vantage® vials are for intravenous use only.

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae.

Adults – Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months. The doses for the preceding infections may be given by intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous drip therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.
Regonol

Regonol

REGONOL® (pyridostigmine bromide injection USP) is for intravenous use only. This drug should be administered by or under the supervision of experienced clinicians familiar with the use of agents which reverse or antagonize the effects of neuromuscular blocking agents. Dosage must be individualized in each case. The dosage information which follows is derived from studies based upon units of drug per unit of body weight and is intended to serve as a guide only. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see PRECAUTIONS).

Reversal doses of REGONOL® range from 0.1 to 0.25 mg/kg.5,10,11,12,13 The onset time to peak effect is dose-dependent; return of twitch height to 90% of control occurs within approximately 6 minutes following administration of a 0.25 mg/kg dose of REGONOL®.5,12 At lower doses, full recovery usually occurs within 15 minutes in most patients, although others may require a half-hour or more.

When REGONOL® is given intravenously to reverse the action of muscle relaxant drugs, it is recommended that atropine sulfate (0.6 to 1.2 mg) or an equipotent dose of glycopyrrolate be given immediately prior to or simultaneously with the administration of REGONOL®. Side effects, notably excessive secretions and bradycardia are thereby minimized. Please refer to the appropriate prescribing information prior to the use of glycopyrrolate or atropine sulfate.

To obtain maximum clinical benefits of REGONOL® and to minimize the possibility of overdosage, the monitoring of muscle twitch response to peripheral nerve stimulation is advised. REGONOL® should be administered after spontaneous recovery of neuromuscular function has begun.

Satisfactory reversal can be evident by adequate voluntary respiration, respiratory measurements and use of a peripheral nerve stimulator device. It is recommended that the patient be well-ventilated and a patent airway maintained until complete recovery of normal respiration is assured. Once satisfactory reversal has been attained following administration of REGONOL®, recurrence of paralysis is unlikely to occur.

Inadequate reversal of neuromuscular blockade by anticholinesterase drugs is possible with all curariform drugs, and is managed by manual or mechanical ventilation until recovery is judged adequate. The administration of additional doses of anticholinesterase reversal agents is not recommended since excessive dosages of such drugs may produce depolarizing block through their own pharmacological actions.

Use in Pediatrics

The safety and efficacy of REGONOL® (pyridostigmine bromide injection USP) in pediatric patients have not been established, therefore no dosing recommendations can be made (see PRECAUTIONS).
Clemastine Fumarate

Clemastine Fumarate

DOSAGE SHOULD BE INDIVIDUALIZED ACCORDING TO THE NEEDS AND RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

The recommended starting dose is 1.34 mg (1/2 tablet) twice daily. Dosage may be increased as required. Clemastine fumarate tablets are recommended for the dermatologic indications at the 2.68 mg dosage level only.

The maximum recommended dosage is 2.68 mg three times daily. Many patients respond favorably to a single dose which may be repeated as required, but not to exceed three tablets daily.
Oxacillin

Oxacillin

The intent of the pharmacy bulk package for this product is for preparation of solutions for IV infusion only.

The penicillinase-resistant penicillins are available for oral administration and for intramuscular and intravenous injection. The sodium salts of methicillin, oxacillin, and nafcillin may be administered parenterally and the sodium salts of cloxacillin, dicloxacillin, oxacillin, and nafcillin are available for oral use.

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to oxacillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient, therefore it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with oxacillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer term of therapy.

Concurrent administration of oxacillin and probenecid increases and prolongs serum penicillin levels. Probenecid decreases the apparent volume of distribution and slows the rate of excretion by competitively inhibiting renal tubular secretion of penicillin. Penicillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of penicillin are necessary.

Oral preparations of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins should not be used as initial therapy in serious, life-threatening infections (See PRECAUTIONS: General). Oral therapy with the penicillinase-resistant penicillins may be used to follow-up the previous use of a parenteral agent as soon as the clinical condition warrants. With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.
RECOMMENDED DOSAGES FOR OXACILLIN FOR INJECTION, USP
Drug

Adults

Infants and Children <40 kg (88 lbs)

Other Recommendations

Oxacillin

250 to 500 mg IV every 4 to 6 hours (mild to moderate infections)

50 mg/kg/day IV in equally divided doses every 6 hours (mild to moderate infections)

1 gram IV every 4 to 6 hours (severe infections)

100 mg/kg/day IV in equally divided doses every 4 to 6 hours (severe infections)

Premature and Neonates 25 mg/kg/day IV

Directions for use

For Administration by Intravenous Drip

Reconstitute as directed below (Pharmacy Bulk Package) prior to further dilution.
STABILITY PERIODS FOR OXACILLIN FOR INJECTION, USP* * IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that a product should be used as soon after preparation as feasible.
Concentration

mg/mL

Sterile

Water for

Injection,

USP

0.9%

Sodium

Chloride

Injection,

USP

Sodium

Lactate

Injection,

USP

(M/6

Sodium

Lactate)

5%

Dextrose

Injection,

USP

5%

Dextrose

and

0.45%

Sodium

Chloride

Injection,

USP

10%

Invert

Sugar

Injection,

USP

Lactated

Ringers

Injection,

USP

ROOM TEMPERATURE (25°C)

10-100

4 Days

4 Days

10-30

24 Hrs

24 Hrs

0.5-2

6 Hrs

6 Hrs

6 Hrs

REFRIGERATION (4°C)

10-100

7 Days

7 Days

10-30

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

FROZEN (-15°C)

50-100

30 Days

250/1.5 mL

30 Days

100

30 Days

10-100

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

Stability

Studies on Oxacillin Sodium at concentrations of 0.5 mg/mL and 2 mg/mL in various intravenous solutions listed below indicate the drug will lose less than 10% activity at room temperature (70° F) during a 6-hour period.

IV Solution

5% Dextrose in Normal Saline

10% D-Fructose in Water

10% D-Fructose in Normal Saline

Lactated Potassic Saline Injection

10% Invert Sugar in Normal Saline

10% Invert Sugar Plus 0.3% Potassium Chloride in Water

Travert 10% Electrolyte #1

Travert 10% Electrolyte #2

Travert 10% Electrolyte #3

Only those solutions listed above should be used for the intravenous infusion of Oxacillin Sodium. The concentration of the antibiotic should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of oxacillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

If another agent is used in conjunction with oxacillin therapy, it should not be physically mixed with oxacillin but should be administered separately.

Pharmacy Bulk Package

This glass Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle contains 10 grams Oxacillin Sodium and is designed for use in the pharmacy in preparing IV admixtures. Add 93 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP or Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 0.9%. The resulting solution will contain 100 mg oxacillin per mL and will require further dilution.

CAUTION: NOT TO BE DISPENSED AS A UNIT.

Directions For Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package
1. The container closure may be penetrated only one time after reconstitution, utilizing a suitable sterile dispensing set which allows measured distribution of the contents. 2. Use of this product is restricted to a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. 3. Once this container closure has been punctured, withdrawal of the contents should be completed without delay. If prompt fluid transfer cannot be accomplished, discard the contents no later than 4 hours after initial closure puncture. This time limit should begin with the introduction of solvent or diluent into the Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle. 4. A plastic ball attached to the pharmacy bulk package provides a suitable hanging device while dispensing contents.
Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

HOW SUPPLIED

Oxacillin for Injection, USP, is available in a Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle which contains oxacillin sodium monohydrate equivalent to 10 grams oxacillin.

NDC 0781-9113-95 10 grams Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle, Packaged in carton of ten Pharmacy Bulk Package bottles.

Storage

Store the dry powder at 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature].

NOVAPLUS is a registered trademark of Novation, LLC.

02-2015M

46153874

Manufactured in Austria by Sandoz GmbH

for Sandoz Inc., Princeton, NJ 08540
Oxacillin

Oxacillin

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to oxacillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type of severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient, therefore it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with oxacillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. Treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer duration of therapy.

With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.
RECOMMENDED DOSAGES FOR OXACILLIN FOR INJECTION, USP Drug Adults Infants and Children<40 kg (88 lbs) OtherRecommendations
Oxacillin

250 to 500 mg IM or IV every 4 to 6 hours (mild to moderate infections)

50 mg/kg/day IM or IV in equally divided doses every 6 hours (mild to moderate infections)

1 gram IM or IV every 4 to 6 hours (severe infections)

100 mg/kg/day IM or IV in equally divided doses every 4 to 6 hours (severe infections)

Premature and Neonates 25 mg/kg/day IM or IV

Directions for use

For Intramuscular Use

Use Sterile Water for Injection, USP. Add 5.4 mL to the 1 gram vial and 10.6 mL to the 2 gram vial. Shake well until a clear solution is obtained. After reconstitution, vials will contain 250 mg of active drug per 1.5 mL of solution. The reconstituted solution is stable for 3 days at 70° F or for one week under refrigeration (40° F).

For Direct Intravenous Use

Use Sterile Water for Injection, USP or Sodium Chloride Injection, USP. Add 10 mL to the 1 gram vial and 20 mL to the 2 gram vial. Withdraw the entire contents and administer slowly over a period of approximately 10 minutes.

For Administration by Intravenous Drip

Reconstitute as directed above (For Direct Intravenous Use) prior to diluting with Intravenous Solution.
STABILITY PERIODS FOR OXACILLIN FOR INJECTION, USP Concentration mg/mL Sterile Waterfor Injection, USP 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP M/6MolarSodium Lactate Solution 5% Dextrose inWater 5% Dextrose in 0.45% Sodium Chloride 10% Invert Sugar Injection, USP Lactated Ringers Solution
ROOM TEMPERATURE (25°C)

10 to 100

4 Days

4 Days

10 to 30

24 Hrs

24 Hrs

0.5 to 2

6 Hrs

6 Hrs

6 Hrs

REFRIGERATION (4°C)

10 to 100

7 Days

7 Days

10 to 30

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

FROZEN (-15°C)

50 to 100

30 Days

250/1.5 mL

30 Days

100

30 Days

10 to 100

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

Stability studies on oxacillin sodium at concentrations of 0.5 mg/mL and 2 mg/mL in various intravenous solutions listed below indicate the drug will lose less than 10% activity at room temperature (70° F) during a 6-hour period.

IV Solution

5% Dextrose in Normal Saline

10% D-Fructose in Water

10% D-Fructose in Normal Saline

Lactated Potassic Saline Injection

10% Invert Sugar in Normal Saline

10% Invert Sugar Plus 0.3% Potassium Chloride in Water

Travert 10% Electrolyte #1

Travert 10% Electrolyte #2

Travert 10% Electrolyte #3

Only those solutions listed above should be used for the intravenous infusion of oxacillin sodium. The concentration of the antibiotic should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of oxacillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

If another agent is used in conjunction with oxacillin therapy, it should not be physically mixed with oxacillin but should be administered separately.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Do not add supplementary medication to oxacillin for injection, USP.
Metoprolol Tartrate

Metoprolol Tartrate

Hypertension

The dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets should be individualized. Metoprolol tartrate tablets should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg daily in single or divided doses, whether used alone or added to a diuretic. The dosage may be increased at weekly (or longer) intervals until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. In general, the maximum effect of any given dosage level will be apparent after 1 week of therapy. The effective dosage range of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 to 450 mg per day. Dosages above 450 mg per day have not been studied. While once-daily dosing is effective and can maintain a reduction in blood pressure throughout the day, lower doses (especially 100 mg) may not maintain a full effect at the end of the 24-hour period, and larger or more frequent daily doses may be required. This can be evaluated by measuring blood pressure near the end of the dosing interval to determine whether satisfactory control is being maintained throughout the day. Beta1 selectivity diminishes as the dose of metoprolol tartrate is increased.

Angina Pectoris

The dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets should be individualized. Metoprolol tartrate tablets should be taken with or immediately following meals.

The usual initial dosage of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 mg daily, given in two divided doses. The dosage may be gradually increased at weekly intervals until optimum clinical response has been obtained or there is pronounced slowing of the heart rate. The effective dosage range of metoprolol tartrate tablets is 100 to 400 mg per day. Dosages above 400 mg per day have not been studied. If treatment is to be discontinued, the dosage should be reduced gradually over a period of 1 to 2 weeks (see WARNINGS).

Myocardial Infarction

Early Treatment

During the early phase of definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, treatment with metoprolol tartrate can be initiated as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized.

Treatment in this early phase should begin with the intravenous administration of three bolus injections of 5 mg of metoprolol tartrate each; the injections should be given at approximately 2-minute intervals. During the intravenous administration of metoprolol tartrate, blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram should be carefully monitored.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (15 mg), metoprolol tartrate tablets, 50 mg every 6 hours, should be initiated 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose and continued for 48 hours. Thereafter, patients should receive a maintenance dosage of 100 mg twice daily (see Late Treatment below).

Patients who appear not to tolerate the full intravenous dose should be started on metoprolol tartrate tablets either 25 mg or 50 mg every 6 hours (depending on the degree of intolerance) 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose or as soon as their clinical condition allows. In patients with severe intolerance, treatment with metoprolol tartrate should be discontinued (see WARNINGS).

Late Treatment

Patients with contraindications to treatment during the early phase of suspected or definite myocardial infarction, patients who appear not to tolerate the full early treatment, and patients in whom the physician wishes to delay therapy for any other reason should be started on metoprolol tartrate tablets, 100 mg twice daily, as soon as their clinical condition allows. Therapy should be continued for at least 3 months. Although the efficacy of metoprolol tartrate beyond 3 months has not been conclusively established, data from studies with other beta-blockers suggest that treatment should be continued for 1 to 3 years.
Oxacillin

Oxacillin

The intent of the pharmacy bulk package for this product is for preparation of solutions for IV infusion only.

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to oxacillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type of severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient, therefore it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with oxacillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. Treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer duration of therapy.

With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.
RECOMMENDED DOSAGES FOR OXACILLIN FOR INJECTION, USP Drug Adults Infants and Children <40 kg (88 lbs) OtherRecommendations
Oxacillin

250 to 500 mg IV every 4 to 6 hours (mild to moderate infections)

50 mg/kg/day IV in equally divided doses every 6 hours (mild to moderate infections)

Oxacillin

1 gram IV every 4 to 6 hours (severe infections)

100 mg/kg/day IV in equally divided doses every 4 to 6 hours (severe infections)

Premature and Neonates 25 mg/kg/day IV

Directions for use

For Administration by Intravenous Drip

Reconstitute as directed below (Pharmacy Bulk Package) prior to further dilution.
STABILITY PERIODS FOR OXACILLIN FOR INJECTION, USP Concentration mg/mL Sterile Waterfor Injection, USP 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP M/6MolarSodium Lactate Solution 5% Dextrose inWater 5% Dextrose in 0.45% Sodium Chloride 10% Invert Sugar Injection, USP Lactated Ringers Solution
ROOM TEMPERATURE (25°C)

10 to 100

4 Days

4 Days

10 to 30

24 Hrs

24 Hrs

0.5 to 2

6 Hrs

6 Hrs

6 Hrs

REFRIGERATION (4°C)

10 to 100

7 Days

7 Days

10 to 30

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

FROZEN (-15°C)

50 to 100

30 Days

250/1.5 mL

30 Days

100

30 Days

10 to 100

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

Stability studies on oxacillin sodium at concentrations of 0.5 mg/mL and 2 mg/mL in various intravenous solutions listed below indicate the drug will lose less than 10% activity at room temperature (70° F) during a 6-hour period.

IV Solution

5% Dextrose in Normal Saline

10% D-Fructose in Water

10% D-Fructose in Normal Saline

Lactated Potassic Saline Injection

10% Invert Sugar in Normal Saline

10% Invert Sugar Plus 0.3% Potassium Chloride in Water

Travert 10% Electrolyte #1

Travert 10% Electrolyte #2

Travert 10% Electrolyte #3

Only those solutions listed above should be used for the intravenous infusion of oxacillin sodium. The concentration of the antibiotic should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of oxacillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

If another agent is used in conjunction with oxacillin therapy, it should not be physically mixed with oxacillin but should be administered separately.

Pharmacy Bulk Package

This glass Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle contains 10 grams Oxacillin Sodium and is designed for use in the pharmacy in preparing IV admixtures. Add 93 mL Sterile Water for Injection, USP or Sodium Chloride Injection, USP 0.9%. The resulting solution will contain 100 mg oxacillin per mL and will require further dilution.

CAUTION: NOT TO BE DISPENSED AS A UNIT.

Directions for Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package
1. The container closure may be penetrated only one time after reconstitution, utilizing a suitable sterile dispensing set which allows measured distribution of the contents. 2. Use of this product is restricted to a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. 3. Once this container closure has been punctured, withdrawal of the contents should be completed without delay. If prompt fluid transfer cannot be accomplished, discard the contents no later than 4 HOURS after initial closure puncture. This time limit should begin with the introduction of solvent for diluent into the Pharmacy Bulk Package.
Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Do not add supplementary medication to Oxacillin for Injection, USP.

HOW SUPPLIED

Oxacillin for Injection, USP, is available in a Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle which contains oxacillin sodium monohydrate equivalent to 10 grams oxacillin.

NDC 0781-3103-95 10 grams Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle, Packaged in carton of ten Pharmacy Bulk Package bottles.

Storage

Store the dry powder at 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature].

REFERENCES
1. Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Methods for Dilution Antimicrobial Susceptibility Tests for Bacteria That Grow Aerobically; Approved Standard-Tenth Edition. CLSI Document M07-A10. Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute, 950 West Valley Road, Suite 2500, Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087, USA, 2015. 2. Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing; Twenty-fifth Informational Supplement. CLSI Document M100-S25. Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute, 950 West Valley Road, Suite 2500, Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087, USA, 2015. 3. Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (CLSI). Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Disk Susceptibility Tests; Approved Standard Twelfth Edition. CLSI Document M02-A12. Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute, 950 West Valley Road, Suite 2500, Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087, USA, 2015.
09-2015M

46171124

Manufactured in Austria by Sandoz GmbH

for Sandoz Inc., Princeton, NJ 08540

Product of Italy
Isoniazid

Isoniazid

(See also INDICATIONS)

NOTE: For preventive therapy of tuberculous infection and treatment of tuberculosis, it is recommended that physicians be familiar with the following publications: (1) the recommendations of the Advisory Council for the Elimination of Tuberculosis, published in the MMWR: vol 42; RR-4, 1993 and (2) Treatment of Tuberculosis and Tuberculosis Infection in Adults and Children, American Journal of Respiratory and Critical Care Medicine: vol 149; 1359-1374, 1994.

Isoniazid Injection USP is used in conjunction with other effective antituberculous agents.

For Treatment of Tuberculosis

Drug susceptibility testing should be performed on the organism initially isolated from all patients with newly diagnosed tuberculosis. If the bacilli becomes resistant, therapy must be changed to agents to which the bacilli are susceptible.

Usual Parenteral Dosage (Depending On the Regiman Used)

Adults

5 mg/kg up to 300 mg daily in a single dose; or 15 mg/kg up to 900 mg/day, two or three times/week

Children:

10 to 15 mg/kg up to 300 mg daily in a single dose; or 20 to 40 mg/kg up to 900 mg/day, two or three times/week

Patients with Pulmonary Tuberculosis Without HIV Infection

There are three regimen options for the initial treatment of tuberculosis in children and adults:

Option 1: Daily isoniazid, rifampin, and pyrazinamide for 8 weeks followed by 16 weeks of isoniazid and rifampin daily or 2 to 3 times weekly.

Ethambutol or streptomycin should be added to the initial regimen until sensitivity to isoniazid and rifampin is demonstrated. The addition of a fourth drug is optional if the relative prevalence of isoniazid-resistant Mycobacterium tuberculosis isolates in the community is less than or equal to four percent.

Option 2: Daily isoniazid, rifampin, pyrazinamide and streptomycin or ethambutol for 2 weeks followed by twice weekly administration of the same drugs for 6 weeks, subsequently twice weekly isoniazid and rifampin for 16 weeks.

Option 3: Three times weekly with isoniazid, rifampin, pyrazinamide and ethambutol or streptomycin for 6 months.

*All regimens given twice weekly or 3 times weekly should be administered by directly observed therapy (see also Directly Observed Therapy).

The above treatment guidelines apply only when the disease is caused by organisms that are susceptible to the standard antituberculous agents. Because of the impact of resistance to isoniazid and rifampin on the response to therapy, it is essential that physicians initiating therapy for tuberculosis be familiar with the prevalence of drug resistance in their communities. It is suggested that ethambutol not be used in children whose vital acuity cannot be monitored.

Patients with Pulmonary Tuberculosis and HIV Infection

The response of the immunologically impaired host to treatment may not be satisfactory as that of a person with normal host responsiveness.

For this reason, therapeutic decisions for the impaired host must be individualized. Since patients co-infected with HIV may have problems with malabsorption, screening of antimycobacterial drug levels, especially in patients with advanced HIV disease, may be necessary to prevent the emergence of MDRTB.

Patients with Extra Pulmonary Tuberculosis

The basic principles that underlie the treatment of pulmonary tuberculosis also apply to Extra pulmonary forms of the disease. Although there have not been the same kinds of carefully conducted controlled trials of treatment of Extra pulmonary tuberculosis as for pulmonary disease, increasing clinical experience indicates that a 6 to 9 month short-course regimens are effective. Because of the insufficient data, miliary tuberculosis, bone/joint tuberculosis, and tuberculosis meningitis in infants and children should receive 12 month therapy.

Bacteriologic evaluation of Extra pulmonary tuberculosis may be limited by the relative inaccessibility of the sites of disease. Thus, response to treatment often must be judged on the basis of clinical and radiographic findings.

The use of adjunctive therapies such as surgery and corticosteroids is more commonly required in Extra pulmonary tuberculosis than in pulmonary disease. Surgery may be necessary to obtain specimens for diagnosis and to treat such processes as constrictive pericarditis and spinal cord compression from Potts Disease. Corticosteroids have been shown to be of benefit in preventing cardiac constriction from tuberculous pericarditis and in decreasing the neurologic sequelae of all stages of tuberculosis meningitis, especially when administered early in the course of the disease.

Pregnant Women with Tuberculosis

The options listed above must be adjusted for the pregnant patient. Streptomycin interferes with in utero development of the ear and may cause congenital deafness. Routine use of pyrazinamide is also not recommended in pregnancy because of inadequate teratogenicity data. The initial treatment regimen should consist of isoniazid and rifampin. Ethambutol should be included unless primary isoniazid resistance is unlikely (isoniazid resistance rate documented to be less than 4%).

Treatment of Patients with Multi-Drug Resistant Tuberculosis (MDRTB)

Multiple-drug resistant tuberculosis (i.e., resistance to at least isoniazid and rifampin) presents difficult treatment problems. Treatment must be individualized and based on susceptibility studies. In such cases, consultation with an expert in tuberculosis is recommended.

Directly Observed Therapy (DOT)

A major cause of drug-resistant tuberculosis is patient non-compliance with treatment. The use of DOT can help assure patient compliance with drug therapy. DOT is the observation of the patient by a health care provider or other responsible person as the patient ingests antituberculosis medications. DOT can be achieved with daily, twice weekly or thrice weekly regimens, and is recommended for all patients.

For Preventative Therapy of Tuberculosis

Before isoniazid preventive therapy is initiated, bacteriologically positive or radiographically progressive tuberculosis must be excluded. Appropriate evaluations should be performed if Extra pulmonary tuberculosis is suspected.

Adults over 30 Kg: 300 mg per day in a single dose.

Infants and Children: 10 mg/kg (up to 300 mg daily) in a single dose.

In situations where adherence with daily preventative therapy cannot be assured, 20 to 30 mg/kg (not to exceed 900 mg) twice weekly under the direct observation of a health care worker at the time of administration8.

Continuous administration of isoniazid for a sufficient period of time is an essential part of the regimen because relapse rates are higher if chemotherapy is stopped prematurely. In the treatment of tuberculosis, resistant organisms may multiply and the emergence during the treatment may necessitate a change in the regimen.

For following patient compliance: the Potts-Cozart test9, a simple colorimetric6 method of checking for isoniazid in the urine, is a useful tool for assuring patient compliance, which is essential for effective tuberculosis control. Additionally, isoniazid test strips are also available to check patient compliance.

Concomitant administration of pyridoxine (B6) is recommended in the malnourished and in those predisposed to neuropathy (e.g., alcoholics and diabetics).
Dorzolamide Hydrochlori...

Dorzolamide Hydrochloride And Timolol Maleate

The dose is one drop of Dorzolamide Hydrochloride and Timolol Maleate Ophthalmic Solution in the affected eye(s) two times daily.

If more than one topical ophthalmic drug is being used, the drugs should be administered at least ten minutes apart (see also PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions).
Carteolol Hydrochloride...

Carteolol Hydrochloride Solution

The usual dose is one drop of Carteolol Hydrochloride Ophthalmic Solution 1% in the affected eye(s) twice a day.

If the patient's IOP is not at a satisfactory level on this regimen, concomitant therapy with pilocarpine and other miotics, and/or epinephrine or dipivefrin, and/or systemically administered carbonic anhydrase inhibitors, such as acetazolamide, can be instituted.
Tropicamide Solution

Tropicamide Solution

For refraction, instill one or two drops of 1% solution in the eye(s), repeated in five minutes. If patient is not seen within 20 to 30 minutes, an additional drop may be instilled to prolong mydriatic effect. For examination of fundus, instill one or two drops of 0.5% solution 15 or 20 minutes prior to examination. Individuals with heavily pigmented irides may require higher strength or more doses. Mydriasis will reverse spontaneously with time, typically in 4 to 8 hours. However, in some cases, complete recovery may take up to 24 hours.
Tobramycin Solution

Tobramycin Solution

In mild to moderate disease, instill one or two drops into the affected eye(s) every four hours. In severe infections, instill two drops into the eye(s) hourly until improvement, following which treatment should be reduced prior to discontinuation.
Metronidazole Gel

Metronidazole Gel

Apply and rub in a thin film of metronidazole topical gel USP, 0.75%, twice daily, morning and evening, to entire affected areas after washing.

Areas to be treated should be cleansed before application of metronidazole topical gel USP, 0.75%. Patients may use cosmetics after application of metronidazole topical gel USP, 0.75%.
Fenoldopam Mesylate

Fenoldopam Mesylate

Adult Patients

The optimal magnitude and rate of blood pressure reduction in acutely hypertensive patients have not been rigorously determined, but, in general, both delay and too rapid decreases appear undesirable in sick adult patients. An initial Fenoldopam Mesylate Injection, USP dose may be chosen from Table 2 and 3 in the Clinical Pharmacology Section that produces the desired magnitude and rate of blood pressure reduction in a given clinical situation. Doses below 0.1 mcg/kg/min have very modest effects and appear only marginally useful in this population. In general, as the initial dose increases, there is a greater and more rapid blood pressure reduction. However, lower initial doses (0.03 to 0.1 mcg/kg/min) titrated slowly have been associated with less reflex tachycardia than have higher initial doses (≥0.3 mcg/kg/min). In clinical trials, doses from 0.01 to 1.6 mcg/kg/min have been studied. Most of the effect of a given infusion rate is attained in 15 minutes.

Fenoldopam Mesylate Injection, USP should be administered by continuous intravenous infusion. A bolus dose should not be used. Hypotension and rapid decreases of blood pressure should be avoided. The initial dose should be titrated upward or downward, no more frequently than every 15 minutes (and less frequently as goal pressure is approached) to achieve the desired therapeutic effect. The recommended increments for titration are 0.05 to 0.1 mcg/kg/min.

Use of a calibrated, mechanical infusion pump is recommended for proper control of infusion rate during Fenoldopam Mesylate Injection, USP infusion. In clinical trials, fenoldopam treatment was safely performed without the need for intra-arterial blood pressure monitoring; blood pressure and heart rate were monitored at frequent intervals, typically every 15 minutes. Frequent blood pressure monitoring is recommended.

The Fenoldopam Mesylate Injection, USP infusion can be abruptly discontinued or gradually tapered prior to discontinuation. Oral antihypertensive agents can be added during Fenoldopam Mesylate Injection, USP infusion or following its discontinuation. Patients in controlled clinical trials have received intravenous fenoldopam for as long as 48 hours.
Flumazenil

Flumazenil

Flumazenil injection is recommended for intravenous use only. It is compatible with 5% dextrose in water, lactated Ringer’s and normal saline solutions. If flumazenil injection is drawn into a syringe or mixed with any of these solutions, it should be discarded after 24 hours. For optimum sterility, flumazenil injection should remain in the vial until just before use. As with all parenteral drug products, flumazenil injection should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

To minimize the likelihood of pain at the injection site, flumazenil injection should be administered through a freely running intravenous infusion into a large vein.

Reversal of Conscious Sedation

Adult Patients

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a second dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient’s response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil injection be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Pediatric Patients

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for conscious sedation in pediatric patients greater than 1 year of age, the recommended initial dose is 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, further injections of 0.01 mg/kg (up to 0.2 mg) can be administered and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 0.05 mg/kg or 1 mg, whichever is lower. The dose should be individualized based on the patient’s response. The mean total dose administered in the pediatric clinical trial of flumazenil was 0.65 mg (range: 0.08 mg to 1.00 mg). Approximately one-half of patients required the maximum of five injections.

Resedation occurred in 7 of 60 pediatric patients who were fully alert 10 minutes after the start of flumazenil administration (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). The safety and efficacy of repeated flumazenil administration in pediatric patients experiencing resedation have not been established.

It is recommended that flumazenil injection be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

The safety and efficacy of flumazenil in the reversal of conscious sedation in pediatric patients below the age of 1 year have not been established.

Reversal of General Anesthesia in Adult Patients

For the reversal of the sedative effects of benzodiazepines administered for general anesthesia, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 15 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting an additional 45 seconds, a further dose of 0.2 mg (2 mL) can be injected and repeated at 60-second intervals where necessary (up to a maximum of 4 additional times) to a maximum total dose of 1 mg (10 mL). The dosage should be individualized based on the patient’s response, with most patients responding to doses of 0.6 mg to 1 mg (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be administered at 20-minute intervals as needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.2 mg/min) should be administered at any one time, and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

It is recommended that flumazenil injection be administered as the series of small injections described (not as a single bolus injection) to allow the practitioner to control the reversal of sedation to the approximate endpoint desired and to minimize the possibility of adverse effects (see INDIVIDUALIZATION OF DOSAGE).

Management of Suspected Benzodiazepine Overdose in Adult Patients

For initial management of a known or suspected benzodiazepine overdose, the recommended initial dose of flumazenil injection is 0.2 mg (2 mL) administered intravenously over 30 seconds. If the desired level of consciousness is not obtained after waiting 30 seconds, a further dose of 0.3 mg (3 mL) can be administered over another 30 seconds. Further doses of 0.5 mg (5 mL) can be administered over 30 seconds at 1-minute intervals up to a cumulative dose of 3 mg.

Do not rush the administration of flumazenil injection. Patients should have a secure airway and intravenous access before administration of the drug and be awakened gradually (see PRECAUTIONS).

Most patients with a benzodiazepine overdose will respond to a cumulative dose of 1 mg to 3 mg of flumazenil injection, and doses beyond 3 mg do not reliably produce additional effects. On rare occasions, patients with a partial response at 3 mg may require additional titration up to a total dose of 5 mg (administered slowly in the same manner).

If a patient has not responded 5 minutes after receiving a cumulative dose of 5 mg of flumazenil injection, the major cause of sedation is likely not to be due to benzodiazepines, and additional flumazenil injection is likely to have no effect.

In the event of resedation, repeated doses may be given at 20-minute intervals if needed. For repeat treatment, no more than 1 mg (given as 0.5 mg/min) should be given at any one time and no more than 3 mg should be given in any one hour.

Safety and Handling

Flumazenil injection is supplied in sealed dosage forms and poses no known risk to the healthcare provider. Routine care should be taken to avoid aerosol generation when preparing syringes for injection, and spilled medication should be rinsed from the skin with cool water.
Clemastine Fumarate

Clemastine Fumarate

adults and children 12 years and older:

1 tablet every 12 hours; not more than 2 tablets in 24 hours

children under 12 years:

ask a doctor
Meclizine Hydrochloride...

Meclizine Hydrochloride

take first dose one hour before starting activity adults and children (12 years and over) 25 to 50 mg (2 to 4 tablets) once daily or as directed by a doctor not more than 4 tablets in 24 hours
Carboplatin

Carboplatin

NOTE : Aluminum reacts with carboplatin causing precipitate formation and loss of potency, therefore, needles or intravenous sets containing aluminum parts that may come in contact with the drug must not be used for the preparation or administration of Carboplatin Injection.

Single-Agent Therapy

Carboplatin Injection, as a single agent, has been shown to be effective in patients with recurrent ovarian carcinoma at a dosage of 360 mg/m2 IV on day 1 every 4 weeks (alternatively see Formula Dosing). In general, however, single intermittent courses of Carboplatin Injection should not be repeated until the neutrophil count is at least 2,000 and the platelet count is at least 100,000.

Combination Therapy with Cyclophosphamide

In the chemotherapy of advanced ovarian cancer, an effective combination for previously untreated patients consists of:

Carboplatin Injection - 300 mg/m2 IV on day 1 every 4 weeks for 6 cycles (alternatively see Formula Dosing).

Cyclophosphamide-600 mg/m2 IV on day 1 every 4 weeks for 6 cycles. For directions regarding the use and administration of cyclophosphamide please refer to its package insert. (See CLINICAL STUDIES.)

Intermittent courses of Carboplatin Injection in combination with cyclophosphamide should not be repeated until the neutrophil count is at least 2,000 and the platelet count is at least 100,000.

Dose Adjustment Recommendations

Pretreatment platelet count and performance status are important prognostic factors for severity of myelosuppression in previously treated patients.

The suggested dose adjustments for single agent or combination therapy shown in the table below are modified from controlled trials in previously treated and untreated patients with ovarian carcinoma. Blood counts were done weekly, and the recommendations are based on the lowest post-treatment platelet or neutrophil value.
Platelets Neutrophils Adjusted Dose* (From Prior Course) * Percentages apply to carboplatin injection as a single agent or to both carboplatin and cyclophosphamide in combination. In the controlled studies, dosages were also adjusted to a lower level (50% to 60%) for severe myelosuppression. Escalations above 125% were not recommended for these studies.
> 100,000

> 2,000

125%

50–100,000

500–2,000

No Adjustment

< 50,000

< 500

75%

Carboplatin Injection is usually administered by an infusion lasting 15 minutes or longer. No pre- or post-treatment hydration or forced diuresis is required.

Patients with Impaired Kidney Function

Patients with creatinine clearance values below 60 mL/min are at increased risk of severe bone marrow suppression. In renal-impaired patients who received single-agent carboplatin therapy, the incidence of severe leukopenia, neutropenia, or thrombocytopenia has been about 25% when the dosage modifications in the table below have been used.
Baseline Creatinine Clearance Recommended Dose on Day1
41–59 mL/min

250 mg/m2

16–40 mL/min

200 mg/m2

The data available for patients with severely impaired kidney function (creatinine clearance below 15 mL/min) are too limited to permit a recommendation for treatment.

These dosing recommendations apply to the initial course of treatment. Subsequent dosages should be adjusted according to the patient's tolerance based on the degree of bone marrow suppression.

Formula Dosing

Another approach for determining the initial dose of Carboplatin Injection is the use of mathematical formulae, which are based on a patient's pre-existing renal function or renal function and desired platelet nadir. Renal excretion is the major route of elimination for carboplatin. (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.)

The use of dosing formulae, as compared to empirical dose calculation based on body surface area, allows compensation for patient variations in pretreatment renal function that might otherwise result in either underdosing (in patients with above average renal function) or overdosing (in patients with impaired renal function).

A simple formula for calculating dosage, based upon a patient's glomerular filtration rate (GFR in mL/min) and Carboplatin Injection target area under the concentration versus time curve (AUC in mg/mL∙min), has been proposed by Calvert. In these studies, GFR was measured by 51Cr-EDTA clearance.

CALVERT FORMULA FOR CARBOPLATIN DOSING

Total Dose (mg)=(target AUC) × (GFR + 25)

Note: With the Calvert formula, the total dose of carboplatin is calculated in mg, not mg/m2.

The target AUC of 4 mg/mL∙min to 6 mg/mL∙min using single-agent carboplatin appears to provide the most appropriate dose range in previously treated patients. This study also showed a trend between the AUC of single-agent carboplatin administered to previously treated patients and the likelihood of developing toxicity.
% Actual Toxicity in Previously Treated Patients AUC (mg/mL∙min) Gr 3 or Gr 4 Thrombocytopenia Gr 3 or Gr 4 Leukopenia
4 to 5

16%

13%

6 to 7

33%

34%

Geriatric Dosing

Because renal function is often decreased in elderly patients, formula dosing of Carboplatin Injection based on estimates of GFR should be used in elderly patients to provide predictable plasma Carboplatin Injection AUCs and thereby minimize the risk of toxicity.

PREPARATION OF INTRAVENOUS SOLUTIONS

Carboplatin Injection is a premixed aqueous solution of 10 mg/mL carboplatin.

Carboplatin Injection, 10 mg/mL aqueous solution can be further diluted to concentrations as low as 0.5 mg/mL with 5% Dextrose in Water (D5W) or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP.

When prepared as directed, Carboplatin Injection aqueous solutions are stable for 8 hours at room temperature (25°C). Since no antibacterial preservative is contained in the formulation, it is recommended that Carboplatin Injection aqueous solutions be discarded 8 hours after dilution.
Nevirapine

Nevirapine

Each 50 mL glass vial contains 50 mg argatroban (1 mg/mL); and, as supplied, is ready for intravenous infusion. Dilution is not required.

Argatroban Injection is a clear, colorless to pale yellow solution. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if solution is cloudy, contains precipitates, or if the white flip top cap is not intact.

Vial may be inverted for use with a medical infusion set.

2.1 Dosing in Patients with Heparin-Induced Thrombocytopenia

Initial Dosage:

Before administering argatroban, discontinue heparin therapy and obtain a baseline aPTT. The recommended initial dose of Argatroban for adult patients without hepatic impairment is 2 mcg/kg/min, administered as a continuous infusion (see Table 1).
Table 1. Recommended Doses and Infusion Rates for 2 mcg/kg/min Dose of Argatroban for Patients With HIT* and Without Hepatic Impairment (1 mg/mL Concentration)
*with or without thrombosis
Body Weight (kg) Dose (mcg/min) Infusion Rate (mL/hr) 50 100 6 60 120 7 70 140 8 80 160 10 90 180 11 100 200 12 110 220 13 120 240 14 130 260 16 140 280 17
Monitoring Therapy:

For use in HIT, therapy with Argatroban Injection is monitored using the aPTT with a target range of 1.5 to 3 times the initial baseline value (not to exceed 100 seconds). Tests of anticoagulant effects (including the aPTT) typically attain steady-state levels within 1 to 3 hours following initiation of Argatroban Injection. Check the aPTT 2 hours after initiation of therapy and after any dose change to confirm that the patient has attained the desired therapeutic range.

Dosage Adjustment:

After the initiation of Argatroban Injection, adjust the dose (not to exceed 10 mcg/kg/min) as necessary to obtain a steady state aPTT in the target range [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.2 Dosing in Patients Undergoing Percutaneous Coronary Intervention

Initial Dosage:

Initiate an infusion of Argatroban Injection at 25 mcg/kg/min and administer a bolus of 350 mcg/kg via a large bore intravenous line over 3 to 5 minutes (see Table 2). Check an activated clotting time (ACT) 5 to 10 minutes after the bolus dose is completed. The PCI procedure may proceed if the ACT is greater than 300 seconds.

Dosage Adjustment:

If the ACT is less than 300 seconds, an additional intravenous bolus dose of 150 mcg/kg should be administered, the infusion dose increased to 30 mcg/kg/min, and the ACT checked 5 to 10 minutes later (see Table 2).

If the ACT is greater than 450 seconds, the infusion rate should be decreased to 15 mcg/kg/min, and the ACT checked 5 to 10 minutes later (Table 3).

Continue titrating the dose until a therapeutic ACT (between 300 and 450 seconds) has been achieved; continue the same infusion rate for the duration of the PCI procedure.

In case of dissection, impending abrupt closure, thrombus formation during the procedure, or inability to achieve or maintain an ACT over 300 seconds, additional bolus doses of 150 mcg/kg may be administered and the infusion dose increased to 40 mcg/kg/min. Check the ACT after each additional bolus or change in the rate of infusion.
Table 2. Recommended Starting and Maintenance Doses (Within the Target ACT Range) of Argatroban Injection in Patients Undergoing PCI Without Hepatic Impairment (1 mg/mL Concentration)
NOTE: 1 mg = 1000 mcg; 1 kg = 2.2 lbs
Body Weight (kg) Starting Bolus Dose (350 mcg/kg) Starting Maintenance Continuous Infusion Dosing For ACT 300-450 seconds 25 mcg/kg/min Bolus Dose (mcg) Bolus Volume (mL) Continuous Infusion Dose (mg/min) Continuous Infusion Rate (mL/hr) 50 17500 18 1250 75 60 21000 21 1500 90 70 24500 25 1750 105 80 28000 28 2000 120 90 31500 32 2250 135 100 35000 35 2500 150 110 38500 39 2750 165 120 42000 42 3000 180 130 45500 46 3250 195 140 49000 49 3500 210 Table 3. Recommended Dose Adjustments of Argatroban Injection for Patients Outside of ACT Target Range Undergoing PCI Without Hepatic Impairment (1 mg/mL Concentration)
NOTE: 1 mg = 1000 mcg; 1 kg – 2.2 lbs

† Additional intravenous bolus dose of 150 mcg/kg should be administered if ACT less than 300 seconds.

* No bolus dose is given if ACT greater than 450 seconds.
Body Weight (kg) If ACT Less than 300 seconds Dosage Adjustment† 30 mcg/kg/min If ACT Greater than 450 seconds Dosage Adjustment* 15 mcg/kg/min Additional Bolus Dose (mcg) Bolus Volume (mL) Continuous Infusion Dose (mcg/min) Continuous Infusion Rate (mL/hr) Continuous Infusion Dose (mcg/min) Continuous Infusion Rate (mL/hr) 50 7500 8 1500 90 750 45 60 9000 9 1800 108 900 54 70 10500 11 2100 126 1050 63 80 12000 12 2400 144 1200 72 90 13500 14 2700 162 1350 81 100 15000 15 3000 180 1500 90 110 16500 17 3300 198 1650 99 120 18000 18 3600 216 1800 108 130 19500 20 3900 234 1950 117 140 21000 21 4200 252 2100 126
Monitoring therapy:

For use in PCI, therapy with Argatroban Injection is monitored using ACT. Obtain ACTs before dosing, 5 to 10 minutes after bolus dosing, following adjustments in the infusion rate, and at the end of the PCI procedure. Obtain additional ACTs every 20 to 30 minutes during a prolonged procedure.

Continued Anticoagulation after PCI:

If a patient requires anticoagulation after the procedure, Argatroban Injection may be continued, but at a rate of 2 mcg/kg/min and adjusted as needed to maintain the aPTT in the desired range [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)].

2.3 Dosing in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

For adult patients with HIT and moderate or severe hepatic impairment (based on Child-Pugh classification), an initial dose of 0.5 mcg/kg/min is recommended, based on the approximately 4-fold decrease in argatroban clearance relative to those with normal hepatic function. Monitor the aPTT closely, and adjust the dosage as clinically indicated.

Monitoring Therapy:

Achievement of steady state aPTT levels may take longer and require more dose adjustments in patients with hepatic impairment compared to patients with normal hepatic function.

For patients with hepatic impairment undergoing PCI who have HIT or are at risk for HIT, carefully titrate argatroban until the desired level of anticoagulation is achieved. Use of Argatroban in PC patients with clinically significant hepatic disease or AST/ALT levels ≥ 3 times the upper limit of normal should be avoided. [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

2.4 Dosing in Pediatric Patients With Heparin-Induced Thrombocytopenia/Heparin-Induced Thrombocytopenia and Thrombosis Syndrome

Initial Dosage:

Initial argatroban infusion doses are lower for seriously ill pediatric patients compared to adults with normal hepatic function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

Monitoring Therapy:

In general, therapy with argatroban is monitored using the aPTT. Tests of anticoagulant effects (including the aPTT) typically attain steady-state levels within one to three hours following initiation of argatroban in patients without hepatic impairment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Dose adjustment may be required to attain the target aPTT. Check the aPTT two hours after initiation of therapy and after any dose change to confirm that the patient has attained the desired therapeutic range.

Dosage Adjustment: [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)]

2.5 Conversion to Oral Anticoagulant Therapy

Initiating Oral Anticoagulant Therapy

When converting patients from Argatroban to oral anticoagulant therapy, consider the potential for combined effects on the International Normalized Ratio (INR). To avoid prothrombotic effects and to ensure continuous anticoagulation when initiating warfarin, overlap Argatroban Injection and warfarin therapy. There are insufficient data available to recommend the duration of the overlap. Initiate therapy using the expected daily dose of warfarin. A loading dose of warfarin should not be used.

The relationship between INR and bleeding risk is altered when argatroban and warfarin are coadministered. The combination of argatroban and warfarin does not cause further reduction in the vitamin-K dependent factor Xa activity than that which is seen with warfarin alone. The relationship between INR obtained on combined therapy and INR obtained on warfarin alone is dependent on both the dose of argatroban and the thromboplastin reagent used. The INR value on warfarin alone (INRw) can be calculated from the INR value on combination argatroban and warfarin therapy [see Drug Interactions (7.2) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

Co-Administration of Warfarin and Argatroban Injection at Doses up to 2 mcg/kg/min: Measure INR daily while Argatroban Injection and warfarin are co-administered. In general, with doses of Argatroban Injection up to 2 mcg/kg/min, Argatroban Injection can be discontinued when the INR is greater than 4 on combined therapy. After Argatroban Injection is discontinued, repeat the INR measurement in 4 to 6 hours. If the repeat INR is below the desired therapeutic range, resume the infusion of Argatroban Injection and repeat the procedure daily until the desired therapeutic range on warfarin alone is reached.

Co-Administration of Warfarin and Argatroban Injection at Doses Greater than 2 mcg/kg/min: For doses greater than 2 mcg/kg/min, the relationship of INR between warfarin alone to the INR on warfarin plus argatroban is less predictable. In this case, in order to predict the INR on warfarin alone, temporarily reduce the dose of Argatroban Injection to a dose of 2 mcg/kg/min. Repeat the INR on Argatroban Injection and warfarin 4 to 6 hours after reduction of the Argatroban Injection dose and follow the process outlined above for administering Argatroban Injection at doses up to 2 mcg/kg/min.
Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride

The usual dietary potassium intake by the average adult is 50 to 100 mEq per day. Potassium depletion sufficient to cause hypokalemia usually requires the loss of 200 mEq or more of potassium from the total body store.

Dosage must be adjusted to the individual needs of each patient. The dose for the prevention of hypokalemia is typically in the range of 20 mEq per day. Doses of 40-100 mEq per day or more are used for the treatment of potassium depletion. Dosage should be divided if more than 20 mEq per day is given such that no more than 20 mEq is given in a single dose.

Each Potassium Chloride Extended-release Tablet provides 8 mEq or 10 mEq of potassium chloride.

Potassium Chloride Extended-release Tablets should be taken with meals and with a glass of water or other liquid. This product should not be taken on an empty stomach because of its potential for gastric irritation (see WARNINGS).

NOTE: Potassium Chloride Extended-release Tablets must be swallowed whole and never crushed, chewed or sucked.
Potassium Chloride

Potassium Chloride

The usual dietary intake of potassium by the average adult is 50 to 100 mEq per day. Potassium depletion sufficient to cause hypokalemia usually requires the loss of 200 or more mEq of potassium from the total body store.

Dosage must be adjusted to the individual needs of each patient. The dose for the prevention of hypokalemia is typically in the range of 20 mEq per day. Doses of 40-100 mEq per day or more are used for the treatment of potassium depletion. Dosage should be divided if more than 20 mEq per day is given such that no more than 20 mEq is given in a single dose.

Each Potassium Chloride Extended-release Tablet, USP provides either 1500 mg of potassium chloride equivalent to 20 mEq of potassium or 750 mg of potassium chloride equivalent to 10 mEq of potassium. Potassium Chloride Extended-release Tablets, USP should be taken with meals and with a glass of water or other liquid. This product should not be taken on an empty stomach because of its potential for gastric irritation (see WARNINGS).

Patients having difficulty swallowing whole tablets may try one of the following alternate methods of administration:
a. Break the tablet in half and take each half separately with a glass of water. b. Prepare an aqueous (water) suspension as follows: Place the whole tablet(s) in approximately one-half glass of water (4 fluid ounces). Allow approximately 2 minutes for the tablet(s) to disintegrate. Stir for about half a minute after the tablet(s) has disintegrated. Swirl the suspension and consume the entire contents of the glass immediately by drinking or by the use of a straw. Add another one fluid ounce of water, swirl, and consume immediately. Then, add an additional one fluid ounce of water, swirl, and consume immediately. Aqueous suspension of Potassium Chloride Extended-release Tablets, USP that is not taken immediately should be discarded. The use of other liquids for suspending Potassium Chloride Extended-release Tablets, USP is not recommended.
Chlorpromazine Hydrochl...

Chlorpromazine Hydrochloride

Adjust dosage to individual and the severity of his condition, recognizing that the milligram for milligram potency relationship among all dosage forms has not been precisely established clinically. It is important to increase dosage until symptoms are controlled. Dosage should be increased more gradually in debilitated or emaciated patients. In continued therapy, gradually reduce dosage to the lowest effective maintenance level, after symptoms have been controlled for a reasonable period.

The 100 mg and 200 mg tablets are for use in severe neuropsychiatric conditions.

Elderly Patients

In general, dosages in the lower range are sufficient for most elderly patients. Since they appear to be more susceptible to hypotension and neuromuscular reactions, such patients should be observed closely. Dosage should be tailored to the individual, response carefully monitored, and dosage adjusted accordingly. Dosage should be increased more gradually in elderly patients.

Psychotic Disorders

Increase dosage gradually until symptoms are controlled. Maximum improvement may not be seen for weeks or even months. Continue optimum dosage for 2 weeks; then gradually reduce dosage to the lowest effective maintenance level. Daily dosage of 200 mg is not unusual. Some patients require higher dosages (e.g., 800 mg daily is not uncommon in discharged mental patients).

Hospitalized Patients

Acute Schizophrenic or Manic States

It is recommended that initial treatment be with chlorpromazine HCl injection until patient is controlled. Usually patient becomes quiet and cooperative within 24 to 48 hours and oral doses may be substituted and increased until the patient is calm. 500 mg a day is generally sufficient. While gradual increases to 2,000 mg a day or more may be necessary, there is usually little therapeutic gain to be achieved by exceeding 1,000 mg a day for extended periods. In general, dosage levels should be lower in the elderly, the emaciated and the debilitated.

Less Acutely Disturbed

25 mg t.i.d. Increase gradually until effective dose is reached – usually 400 mg daily.

Outpatients

10 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d., or 25 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d.

More Severe Cases

25 mg t.i.d. After 1 or 2 days, daily dosage may be increased by 20 to 50 mg at semi-weekly intervals until patient becomes calm and cooperative.

Prompt Control Of Severe Symptoms

Initial treatment should be with intramuscular chlorpromazine. Subsequent doses should be oral, 25 to 50 mg t.i.d.

Nausea and Vomiting

10 to 25 mg q4 to 6h, p.r.n., increased, if necessary.

Presurgical Apprehension

25 to 50 mg, 2 to 3 hours before the operation.

Intractable Hiccups

25 to 50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d. If symptoms persist for 2 to 3 days, parenteral therapy is indicated.

Acute Intermittent Porphyria

25 to 50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d. Can usually be discontinued after several weeks, but maintenance therapy may be necessary for some patients.

Chlorpromazine should generally not be used in pediatric patients under 6 months of age except where potentially lifesaving. It should not be used in conditions for which specific pediatric dosages have not been established.

Severe Behavioral Problems

Outpatients

Select route of administration according to severity of patient's condition and increase dosage gradually as required. Oral: ¼ mg/lb body weight q4 to 6h, p.r.n. (e.g., for 40 lb child – 10 mg q4 to 6h).

Hospitalized Patients

As with outpatients, start with low doses and increase dosage gradually. In severe behavior disorders higher dosages (50 to 100 mg daily and in older children, 200 mg daily or more) may be necessary. There is little evidence that behavior improvement in severely disturbed mentally retarded patients is further enhanced by doses beyond 500 mg per day.

Nausea and Vomiting

Dosage and frequency of administration should be adjusted according to the severity of the symptoms and response of the patient. The duration of activity following intramuscular administration may last up to 12 hours. Subsequent doses may be given by the same route if necessary. Oral: ¼ mg/lb body weight (e.g., 40 lb child – 10 mg q4 to 6h).

Presurgical Apprehension

¼ mg/lb body weight orally 2 to 3 hours before operation.
Fluvastatin Sodium Er

Fluvastatin Sodium Er

2.1 General Dosing Information

Dose range: 20 mg to 80 mg/ day.

Fluvastatin sodium capsules / fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablets can be administered orally as a single dose, with or without food.

Do not break, crush or chew fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablets or open fluvastatin sodium capsules prior to administration.

Do not take two fluvastatin sodium capsules 40 mg at one time.

Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of ≥25%, the recommended starting dose is 40 mg as one capsule in the evening, 80 mg as one fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablet administered as a single dose at any time of the day or 80 mg in divided doses of the 40 mg capsule given twice daily. For patients requiring LDL-C reduction to a goal of <25% a starting dose of 20 mg may be used.

2.2 Adult Patients with Hypercholesterolemia (Heterozygous Familial and Nonfamilial) and Mixed Dyslipidemia

Adult patients can be started on either fluvastatin sodium capsules or fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablets. The recommended starting dose for fluvastatin sodium capsules is one 40 mg capsule in the evening, or one fluvastatin sodium capsule 40 mg twice daily. Do not take two fluvastatin sodium capsules 40 mg at one time.

The recommended starting dose for fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablets is one 80 mg tablet administered as a single dose at any time of the day.

2.3 Pediatric Patients (10-16 years of age) with Heterozygous Familial Hypercholesterolemia

The recommended starting dose is one fluvastatin sodium capsule 20 mg. Dose adjustments, up to a maximum daily dose administered either as fluvastatin sodium capsules 40 mg twice daily or one fluvastatin sodium extended-release tablet 80 mg once daily should be made at 6 week intervals. Doses should be individualized according to the goal of therapy [see NCEP Pediatric Panel Guidelines and CLINICAL STUDIES (14)]1.

1National Cholesterol Education Program (NCEP): Highlights of the Report of the Expert Panel on Blood Cholesterol Levels in Children and Adolescents. Pediatrics.89(3):495-501. 1992.

2.4 Use with Cyclosporine

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg b.i.d. fluvastatin sodium capsules in patients taking cyclosporine [see Drug Interactions 7.1].

2.5 Use with Fluconazole

Do not exceed a dose of 20 mg b.i.d. fluvastatin sodium capsules in patients taking fluconazole [see Drug Interactions 7.2].
Cafergot

Cafergot

Procedure: For the best results, dosage should start at the first sign of an attack. Adults: Take 2 tablets at the start of attack; 1 additional tablet every 1/2 hour, if needed for full relief (maximum 6 tablets per attack, 10 per week).

Maximum Adult Dosage

Total dose for any one attack should not exceed 6 tablets. Total weekly dosage should not exceed 10 tablets. Ergotamine tartrate and caffeine tablets should not be used for chronic daily administration. In carefully selected patients, with due consideration of maximum dosage recommendations, administration of the drug at bedtime may be an appropriate short-term preventive measure.
Bc Arthritis

Bc Arthritis

All dosing should be given in a twice-a-day regimen. Oxcarbazepine oral suspension and oxcarbazepine film-coated tablets may be interchanged at equal doses.

Oxcarbazepine should be kept out of the reach and sight of children.

Before using oxcarbazepine oral suspension, shake the bottle well and prepare the dose immediately afterwards. The prescribed amount of oral suspension should be withdrawn from the bottle using the oral dosing syringe supplied. Oxcarbazepine oral suspension can be mixed in a small glass of water just prior to administration or, alternatively, may be swallowed directly from the syringe. After each use, close the bottle and rinse the syringe with warm water and allow it to dry thoroughly.

Oxcarbazepine can be taken with or without food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.1     Adjunctive Therapy for Adults

Treatment with oxcarbazepine should be initiated with a dose of 600 mg/day, given in a twice-a-day regimen. If clinically indicated, the dose may be increased by a maximum of 600 mg/day at approximately weekly intervals; the recommended daily dose is 1200 mg/day. Daily doses above 1200 mg/day show somewhat greater effectiveness in controlled trials, but most patients were not able to tolerate the 2400 mg/day dose, primarily because of CNS effects. It is recommended that the patient be observed closely and plasma levels of the concomitant AEDs be monitored during the period of oxcarbazepine titration, as these plasma levels may be altered, especially at Trileptal doses greater than 1200 mg/day [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

2.2     Conversion to Monotherapy for Adults

Patients receiving concomitant AEDs may be converted to monotherapy by initiating treatment with oxcarbazepine at 600 mg/day (given in a twice-a-day regimen) while simultaneously initiating the reduction of the dose of the concomitant AEDs. The concomitant AEDs should be completely withdrawn over 3-6 weeks, while the maximum dose of oxcarbazepine should be reached in about 2-4 weeks. Oxcarbazepine may be increased as clinically indicated by a maximum increment of 600 mg/day at approximately weekly intervals to achieve the recommended daily dose of 2400 mg/day. A daily dose of 1200 mg/day has been shown in one study to be effective in patients in whom monotherapy has been initiated with oxcarbazepine. Patients should be observed closely during this transition phase.

2.3     Initiation of Monotherapy for Adults

Patients not currently being treated with AEDs may have monotherapy initiated with oxcarbazepine. In these patients, oxcarbazepine should be initiated at a dose of 600 mg/day (given in a twice-a-day regimen); the dose should be increased by 300 mg/day every third day to a dose of 1200 mg/day. Controlled trials in these patients examined the effectiveness of a 1200 mg/day dose; a dose of 2400 mg/day has been shown to be effective in patients converted from other AEDs to oxcarbazepine monotherapy (see above).

2.4     Adjunctive Therapy for Pediatric Patients (Aged 2-16 Years)

In pediatric patients aged 4-16 years, treatment should be initiated at a daily dose of 8-10 mg/kg generally not to exceed 600 mg/day, given in a twice-a-day regimen. The target maintenance dose of oxcarbazepine should be achieved over two weeks, and is dependent upon patient weight, according to the following chart:

      20-29 kg - 900 mg/day

      29.1-39 kg - 1200 mg/day

      >39 kg - 1800 mg/day

In the clinical trial, in which the intention was to reach these target doses, the median daily dose was 31 mg/kg with a range of 6-51 mg/kg.

In pediatric patients aged 2-<4 years, treatment should also be initiated at a daily dose of 8-10 mg/kg generally not to exceed 600 mg/day, given in a twice-a-day regimen. For patients under 20 kg, a starting dose of 16-20 mg/kg may be considered [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. The maximum maintenance dose of oxcarbazepine should be achieved over 2-4 weeks and should not exceed 60 mg/kg/day in a twice-a-day regimen.

In the clinical trial in pediatric patients (2 to 4 years of age) in which the intention was to reach the target dose of 60 mg/kg/day, 50% of patients reached a final dose of at least 55 mg/kg/day.

Under adjunctive therapy (with and without enzyme-inducing AEDs), when normalized by body weight, apparent clearance (L/hr/kg) decreased when age increased such that children 2 to <4 years of age may require up to twice the oxcarbazepine dose per body weight compared to adults; and children 4 to ≤12 years of age may require a 50% higher oxcarbazepine dose per body weight compared to adults.

2.5     Conversion to Monotherapy for Pediatric Patients (Aged 4-16 Years)

Patients receiving concomitant antiepileptic drugs may be converted to monotherapy by initiating treatment with oxcarbazepine at approximately 8-10 mg/kg/day given in a twice-a-day regimen, while simultaneously initiating the reduction of the dose of the concomitant antiepileptic drugs. The concomitant antiepileptic drugs can be completely withdrawn over 3-6 weeks while oxcarbazepine may be increased as clinically indicated by a maximum increment of 10 mg/kg/day at approximately weekly intervals to achieve the recommended daily dose. Patients should be observed closely during this transition phase.

The recommended total daily dose of oxcarbazepine is shown in the table below.

2.6     Initiation of Monotherapy for Pediatric Patients (Aged 4-16 Years)

Patients not currently being treated with antiepileptic drugs may have monotherapy initiated with oxcarbazepine. In these patients, oxcarbazepine should be initiated at a dose of 8-10 mg/kg/day given in a twice-a-day regimen. The dose should be increased by 5 mg/kg/day every third day to the recommended daily dose shown in the table below.
Table 1 Range of Maintenance Doses of Oxcarbazepine for Children by Weight During Monotherapy
From

To

Weight in kg

Dose (mg/day)

Dose (mg/day)

      20

600

900

      25

900

1200

      30

900

1200

      35

900

1500

      40

900

1500

      45

1200

1500

      50

1200

1800

      55

1200

1800

      60

1200

2100

      65

1200

2100

      70

1500

2100

2.7     Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In general, dose adjustments are not required in patients with mild-to-moderate hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3).]

2.8     Patients with Renal Impairment

In patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) oxcarbazepine therapy should be initiated at one-half the usual starting dose (300 mg/day) and increased slowly to achieve the desired clinical response [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]
Cefdinir

Cefdinir

(see INDICATIONS AND USAGE for Indicated Pathogens)

Powder for Oral Suspension

The recommended dosage and duration of treatment for infections in pediatric patients are described in the following chart; the total daily dose for all infections is 14 mg/kg, up to a maximum dose of 600 mg per day. Once-daily dosing for 10 days is as effective as b.i.d. dosing. Once-daily dosing has not been studied in skin infections; therefore, cefdinir for oral suspension should be administered twice daily in this infection. Cefdinir for oral suspension may be administered without regard to meals.
Pediatric Patients (Age 6 Months Through 12 Years)
Type of Infection

Dosage

Duration

Acute Bacterial Otitis Media

7 mg/kg q12h

or

14 mg/kg q24h

5 to 10 days

10 days

Acute Maxillary Sinusitis

7 mg/kg q12h

or

14 mg/kg q24h

10 days

10 days

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis

7 mg/kg q12h

or

14 mg/kg q24h

5 to 10 days

10 days

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections

7 mg/kg q12h

10 days
CEFDINIR FOR ORAL SUSPENSION PEDIATRIC DOSAGE CHART * Pediatric patients who weigh ≥ 43 kg should receive the maximum daily dose of 600 mg.
Weight

125 mg/5 mL

250 mg/5 mL

9 kg/20 lbs

2.5 mL q12h or 5 mL q24h

Use 125 mg/5 mL product

18 kg/40 lbs

5 mL q12h or 10 mL q24h

2.5 mL q12h or 5 mL q24h

27 kg/60 lbs

7.5 mL q12h or 15 mL q24h

3.75 mL q12h or 7.5 mL q24h

36 kg/80 lbs

10 mL q12h or 20 mL q24h

5 mL q12h or 10 mL q24h

≥43 kg*/95 lbs

12 mL q12h or 24 mL q24h

6 mL q12h or 12 mL q24h

Patients With Renal Insufficiency

For adult patients with creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min, the dose of cefdinir should be 300 mg given once daily.

Creatinine clearance is difficult to measure in outpatients. However, the following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance (CLcr) in adult patients. For estimates to be valid, serum creatinine levels should reflect steady-state levels of renal function.

Males:

CLcr =

(weight) (140 – age)

(72) (serum creatinine)

Females:

CLcr =

0.85 x above value

where creatinine clearance is in mL/min, age is in years, weight is in kilograms, and serum creatinine is in mg/dL.(3)

The following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance in pediatric patients:

CLcr = K x

body length or height

serum creatinine

where K=0.55 for pediatric patients older than 1 year(4) and 0.45 for infants (up to 1 year).(5)

In the above equation, creatinine clearance is in mL/min/1.73 m2, body length or height is in centimeters, and serum creatinine is in mg/dL.

For pediatric patients with a creatinine clearance of < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2, the dose of cefdinir should be 7 mg/kg (up to 300 mg) given once daily.

Patients on Hemodialysis

Hemodialysis removes cefdinir from the body. In patients maintained on chronic hemodialysis, the recommended initial dosage regimen is a 300 mg or 7 mg/kg dose every other day. At the conclusion of each hemodialysis session, 300 mg (or 7 mg/kg) should be given. Subsequent doses (300 mg or 7 mg/kg) are then administered every other day.
Directions for Mixing Cefdinir for Oral Suspension
Final Concentration

Final Volume(mL)

Amount of Water

Directions

125 mg/5 mL

60

100

37 mL

62 mL

Tap bottle to loosen powder, then add water in 2 portions. Shake well after each aliquot.

250 mg/5 mL

60

100

37 mL

62 mL

Tap bottle to loosen powder, then add water in 2 portions. Shake well after each aliquot.

After mixing, the suspension can be stored at controlled room temperature (20°-25°C/68°-77°F). The container should be kept tightly closed, and the suspension should be shaken well before each administration. The suspension may be used for 10 days, after which any unused portion must be discarded.
Cefdinir

Cefdinir

(see INDICATIONS AND USAGE for Indicated Pathogens)

The recommended dosage and duration of treatment for infections in adults and adolescents are described in the following chart; the total daily dose for all infections is 600 mg. Once-daily dosing for 10 days is as effective as b.i.d. dosing. Once-daily dosing has not been studied in pneumonia or skin infections; therefore, cefdinir capsules should be administered twice daily in these infections. Cefdinir capsules may be taken without regard to meals.
Adults and Adolescents (Age 13 Years and Older)
Type of Infection

Dosage

Duration

Community-Acquired Pneumonia

300 mg q12h

10 days

Acute Exacerbations of Chronic Bronchitis

300 mg q12h

or

600 mg q24h

5 to 10 days

10 days

Acute Maxillary Sinusitis

300 mg q12h

or

600 mg q24h

10 days

10 days

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis

300 mg q12h

or

600 mg q24h

5 to 10 days

10 days

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections

300 mg q12h

10 days

Patients With Renal Insufficiency

For adult patients with creatinine clearance < 30 mL/min, the dose of cefdinir should be 300 mg given once daily.

Creatinine clearance is difficult to measure in outpatients. However, the following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance (CLcr) in adult patients. For estimates to be valid, serum creatinine levels should reflect steady-state levels of renal function.

Males:

CLcr =

(weight) (140 – age)

(72) (serum creatinine)

Females:

CLcr =

0.85 x above value

where creatinine clearance is in mL/min, age is in years, weight is in kilograms, and serum creatinine is in mg/dL.(3)

The following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance in pediatric patients:

CLcr = K x

body length or height

serum creatinine

where K=0.55 for pediatric patients older than 1 year(4) and 0.45 for infants (up to 1 year).(5)

In the above equation, creatinine clearance is in mL/min/1.73 m2, body length or height is in centimeters, and serum creatinine is in mg/dL.

For pediatric patients with a creatinine clearance of < 30 mL/min/1.73 m2, the dose of cefdinir should be 7 mg/kg (up to 300 mg) given once daily.

Patients on Hemodialysis

Hemodialysis removes cefdinir from the body. In patients maintained on chronic hemodialysis, the recommended initial dosage regimen is a 300 mg or 7 mg/kg dose every other day. At the conclusion of each hemodialysis session, 300 mg (or 7 mg/kg) should be given. Subsequent doses (300 mg or 7 mg/kg) are then administered every other day.
Triamterene Hydrochloro...

Triamterene Hydrochlorothiazide

The usual dose of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 37.5 mg/25 mg is one or two tablets daily, given as a single dose, with appropriate monitoring of serum potassium (see WARNINGS). The usual dose of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 75 mg/50 mg, is one tablet daily, with appropriate monitoring of serum potassium (see WARNINGS). There is no experience with the use of more than one triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 75 mg/50 mg daily or more than two triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 37.5 mg/25 mg daily. Clinical experience with the administration of two triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 37.5 mg/25 mg daily in divided doses (rather than as a single dose) suggests an increased risk of electrolyte imbalance and renal dysfunction.

Patients receiving 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide who become hypokalemic may be transferred to triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 75 mg/50 mg directly. Patients receiving 25 mg hydrochlorothiazide who become hypokalemic may be transferred to one triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 37.5 mg/25 mg directly.

In patients requiring hydrochlorothiazide therapy and in whom hypokalemia cannot be risked, therapy may be initiated with triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 37.5 mg/25 mg. If an optimal blood pressure response is not obtained with this product the dose should be increased to two tablets daily as a single dose, or to one triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 75 mg/50 mg daily. If blood pressure still is not controlled, another antihypertensive agent may be added (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).

Clinical studies have shown patients taking less bioavailable formulations of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide in daily doses of 25 to 50 mg of hydrochlorothiazide and 50 to 100 mg of triamterene may be safely changed to one triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide tablet 37.5 mg/25 mg daily. All patients changed from less bioavailable formulations of triamterene and hydrochlorothiazide to this tablet formulation should be monitored clinically and for serum potassium after the transfer.
Anectine

Anectine

The dosage of succinylcholine should be individualized and should always be determined by the clinician after careful assessment of the patient (see WARNINGS).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are not clear and colorless should not be used.

Adults

For Short Surgical Procedures

The average dose required to produce neuromuscular blockade and to facilitate tracheal intubation is 0.6 mg/kg ANECTINE Injection given intravenously. The optimum dose will vary among individuals and may be from 0.3 to 1.1 mg/kg for adults. Following administration of doses in this range, neuromuscular blockade develops in about 1 minute; maximum blockade may persist for about 2 minutes, after which recovery takes place within 4 to 6 minutes. However, very large doses may result in more prolonged blockade. A 5- to 10-mg test dose may be used to determine the sensitivity of the patient and the individual recovery time (see PRECAUTIONS).

For Long Surgical Procedures

The dose of succinylcholine administered by infusion depends upon the duration of the surgical procedure and the need for muscle relaxation. The average rate for an adult ranges between 2.5 and 4.3 mg per minute.

Solutions containing from 1 to 2 mg per mL succinylcholine have commonly been used for continuous infusion. The more dilute solution (1 mg per mL) is probably preferable from the standpoint of ease of control of the rate of administration of the drug and, hence, of relaxation. This IV solution containing 1 mg per mL may be administered at a rate of 0.5 mg (0.5 mL) to 10 mg (10 mL) per minute to obtain the required amount of relaxation. The amount required per minute will depend upon the individual response as well as the degree of relaxation required. Avoid overburdening the circulation with a large volume of fluid. It is recommended that neuromuscular function be carefully monitored with a peripheral nerve stimulator when using succinylcholine by infusion in order to avoid overdose, detect development of Phase II block, follow its rate of recovery, and assess the effects of reversing agents (see PRECAUTIONS).

Intermittent IV injections of succinylcholine may also be used to provide muscle relaxation for long procedures. An IV injection of 0.3 to 1.1 mg/kg may be given initially, followed, at appropriate intervals, by further injections of 0.04 to 0.07 mg/kg to maintain the degree of relaxation required.

Pediatrics

For emergency tracheal intubation or in instances where immediate securing of the airway is necessary, the IV dose of succinylcholine is 2 mg/kg for infants and small children; for older children and adolescents the dose is 1 mg/kg (see BOX WARNING and PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use).

Rarely, IV bolus administration of succinylcholine in infants and children may result in malignant ventricular arrhythmias and cardiac arrest secondary to acute rhabdomyolysis with hyperkalemia. In such situations, an underlying myopathy should be suspected.

Intravenous bolus administration of succinylcholine in infants or children may result in profound bradycardia or, rarely, asystole. As in adults, the incidence of bradycardia in children is higher following a second dose of succinylcholine. The occurrence of bradyarrhythmias may be reduced by pretreatment with atropine (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use).

Intramuscular Use

If necessary, succinylcholine may be given intramuscularly to infants, older children, or adults when a suitable vein is inaccessible. A dose of up to 3 to 4 mg/kg may be given, but not more than 150 mg total dose should be administered by this route. The onset of effect of succinylcholine given intramuscularly is usually observed in about 2 to 3 minutes.

Compatibility and Admixtures

Succinylcholine is acidic (pH 3.5) and should not be mixed with alkaline solutions having a pH greater than 8.5 (e.g., barbiturate solutions). ANECTINE Injection is stable for 24 hours after dilution to a final concentration of 1 to 2 mg/mL in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP. Aseptic techniques should be used to prepare the diluted product. Admixtures of ANECTINE should be prepared for single patient use only. The unused portion of diluted ANECTINE should be discarded.
Propranolol Hydrochlori...

Propranolol Hydrochloride

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

The usual dose is 1 to 3 mg administered under careful monitoring, such as electrocardiography and central venous pressure. The rate of administration should not exceed 1 mg (1 mL) per minute to diminish the possibility of lowering blood pressure and causing cardiac standstill. Sufficient time should be allowed for the drug to reach the site of action even when a slow circulation is present. If necessary, a second dose may be given after two minutes. Thereafter, additional drug should not be given in less than four hours. Additional propranolol hydrochloride should not be given when the desired alteration in rate or rhythm is achieved.

Transfer to oral therapy as soon as possible.
Amoxicillin And Clavula...

Amoxicillin And Clavulanate Potassium

All recommended dosages for Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension and Chewable Tablets are included in this section for informational purposes only. Some of the dosages may not be obtainable with the 400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL and 200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL strengths of oral suspension or the 400 mg/57 mg and 200 mg/28.5 mg strengths of chewable tablets.

Dosage

Pediatric Patients

Based on the amoxicillin component, amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension and chewable tablets should be dosed as follows:

Neonates and Infants Aged < 12 Weeks (3 Months)

Due to incompletely developed renal function affecting elimination of amoxicillin in this age group, the recommended dose of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension and chewable tablets is 30 mg/kg/day divided q12h, based on the amoxicillin component. Clavulanate elimination is unaltered in this age group. Experience with the 200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL formulation in this age group is limited and, thus, use of the 125 mg/31.25 mg per 5 mL oral suspension is recommended.

Patients Aged 12 Weeks (3 Months) and Older
* The q12h regimen is recommended as it is associated with significantly less diarrhea. (See CLINICAL STUDIES.) However, the q12h formulations (200 mg/28.5 mg and 400 mg/57 mg) contain aspartame and should not be used by phenylketonurics. † Each strength of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium suspension is available as a chewable tablet for use by older children. ‡ Duration of therapy studied and recommended for acute otitis media is 10 days.
INFECTIONS

DOSING REGIMEN

q12h*

q8h

200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL or 400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL oral suspension†

125 mg/31.25 mg per 5 mL or 250 mg/62.5 mg per 5 mL oral suspension†

Otitis media‡, sinusitis, lower respiratory tract infections, and more severe infections

45 mg/kg/day

q12h

40 mg/kg/day

q8h

Less severe infections

25 mg/kg/day

q12h

20 mg/kg/day

q8h

Pediatric Patients Weighing 40 kg and More

Should be dosed according to the following adult recommendations: The usual adult dose is one amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium 500 mg/125 mg tablet every 12 hours or one amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium 250 mg/125 mg tablet every 8 hours. For more severe infections and infections of the respiratory tract, the dose should be one amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium 875 mg/125 mg tablet every 12 hours or one amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium 500 mg/125 mg tablet every 8 hours. Among adults treated with 875 mg/125 mg every 12 hours, significantly fewer experienced severe diarrhea or withdrawals with diarrhea versus adults treated with 500 mg/125 mg every 8 hours. For detailed adult dosage recommendations, please see complete prescribing information for amoxicillin/clavulanate potassium tablets.

Hepatically impaired patients should be dosed with caution and hepatic function monitored at regular intervals. (See WARNINGS.)

Adults

Adults who have difficulty swallowing may be given the 125 mg/31.25 mg per 5 mL or 250 mg/62.5 mg per 5 mL suspension in place of the 500 mg/125 mg tablet. The 200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL suspension or the 400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL suspension may be used in place of the 875 mg/125 mg tablet. See dosage recommendations above for children weighing 40 kg or more.

The amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium, USP 250 mg/125 mg tablet and the 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet do not contain the same amount of clavulanic acid (as the potassium salt). Amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium, USP 250 mg/125 mg tablet contains 125 mg of clavulanic acid, whereas the 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet contains 62.5 mg of clavulanic acid. Therefore, the amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium, USP 250 mg/125 mg tablet and the 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet should not be substituted for each other, as they are not interchangeable.

Due to the different amoxicillin to clavulanic acid ratios in the amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium, USP 250 mg/125 mg tablet versus the amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium, USP 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet, the amoxicillin and clavulanate 250 mg/125 mg tablet should not be used until the child weighs at least 40 kg and more.

DIRECTIONS FOR MIXING ORAL SUSPENSION

Prepare a suspension at time of dispensing as follows: Tap bottle until all the powder flows freely. Add approximately 2/3 of the total amount of water for reconstitution (see table below) and shake vigorously to suspend powder. Add remainder of the water and again shake vigorously.

AMOXICILLIN AND CLAVULANATE POTASSIUM 200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL SUSPENSION

Bottle Size

Amount of Water

Required for Suspension

100 mL

88 mL

Each teaspoonful (5 mL) will contain 200 mg amoxicillin and 28.5 mg of clavulanic acid as the potassium salt.

AMOXICILLIN AND CLAVULANATE POTASSIUM 400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL SUSPENSION

Bottle Size

Amount of Water Required for

Reconstitution

100 mL

84 mL

Each teaspoonful (5 mL) will contain 400 mg amoxicillin and 57 mg of clavulanic acid as the potassium salt.

NOTE: SHAKE ORAL SUSPENSION WELL BEFORE USING.

Reconstituted suspension must be stored under refrigeration and discarded after 10 days.

Administration

Amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension and chewable tablets may be taken without regard to meals; however, absorption of clavulanate potassium is enhanced when amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension and chewable tablets are administered at the start of a meal. To minimize the potential for gastrointestinal intolerance, amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension and chewable tablets should be taken at the start of a meal.

Tablets may be chewed before being swallowed or may be swallowed whole.
Calcipotriene

Calcipotriene

Apply a thin layer of calcipotriene cream, 0.005% to the affected skin twice daily and rub in gently and completely. The safety and efficacy of calcipotriene cream, 0.005% have been demonstrated in patients treated for eight weeks.
Penicillin G Potassium

Penicillin G Potassium

Buffered Penicillin G Potassium for Injection, USP may be given intravenously or intramuscularly. The usual dose recommendations are as follows:
CLINICAL INDICATION DOSAGE * Because of its short half-life, Penicillin G is administered in divided doses, usually every 4 to 6 hours with the exception of meningococcal meningitis/septicemia, i.e., every 2 hours.
Serious infections due to susceptible strains of streptococci (including S. pneumoniae) and staphylococci-septicemia, empyema, pneumonia, pericarditis, endocarditis and meningitis

5 to 24 million units/day depending on the infection and its severity administered in equally divided doses every 4 to 6 hours

Anthrax

Minimum of 8 million units/day in divided doses every 6 hours. Higher doses may be required depending on susceptibility of organism.

Actinomycosis

  Cervicofacial disease

1 to 6 million units/day*

  Thoracic and abdominal disease

10 to 20 million units/day*

Clostridial infections

  Botulism (adjunctive therapy to antitoxin)

20 million units/day*

  Gas gangrene (debridement and/or surgery as  indicated)

  Tetanus (adjunctive therapy to human tetanus  immune globulin)

Diphtheria (adjunctive therapy to antitoxin and for the prevention of the carrier state)

2 to 3 million units/day in divided doses for 10 to 12 days*

Erysipelothrix endocarditis

12 to 20 million units/day for 4 to 6 weeks*

Fusospirochetosis (severe infections of the oropharnyx [Vincent’s], lower respiratory tract and genital area)

5 to 10 million units/day*

Listeria infections

  Meningitis

15 to 20 million units/day for 2 weeks*

  Endocarditis

15 to 20 million units/day for 4 weeks*

Pasteurella infections including bacteremia and meningitis

4 to 6 million units/day for 2 weeks*

Haverhill fever, Rat-bite fever

12 to 20 million units/dayfor 3 to 4 weeks*

Disseminated gonococcal infections, such as meningitis endocarditis, arthritis, etc., caused by penicillin-susceptible organisms

10 million units/day*; duration depends on the type of infection

Syphilis (neurosyphilis)

12 to 24 million units/day, as 2 to 4 MU every 4 hours for 10 to 14 days; many experts recommend additional therapy with Benzathine PCN G 2.4 MU IM weekly for 3 doses after completion of IV therapy

Meningococcal meningitis and/or septicemia

24 million units/day as 2 million units every 2 hours

Pediatric patients

This product should not be administered to patients requiring less than one million units per dose. (see PRECAUTIONS – Pediatric Use).
CLINICAL INDICATION DOSAGE
Serious infections, such as pneumonia and endocarditis, due to susceptible strains of streptococci (including S. pneumoniae) and meningococcus

150,000 units/kg/day divided in equal doses every 4 to 6 hours; duration depends on infecting organism and type of infection.

Meningitis caused by susceptible strains of pneumococcus and meningococcus

250,000 units/kg/day divided in equal doses every 4 hours for 7 to 14 days depending on the infecting organism (maximum dose of 12 to 20 million units/day)

Disseminated Gonococcal infections (penicillin-susceptible strains)

weight less than 45 kg:

  Arthritis

100,000 units/kg/day in 4 equally divided doses for 7 to 10 days

  Meningitis

250,000 units/kg/day in equal doses every 4 hours for 10 to 14 days

  Endocarditis

250,000 units/kg/day in equal doses every 4 hours for 4 weeks

  Arthritis, meningitis, endocarditis

weight 45 kg or greater: 10 million units/day in 4 equally divided doses with the duration of therapy depending on the type of infection

Syphilis (congenital and neurosyphilis) after the newborn period

200,000 to 300,000 units/kg/day (administered as 50,000 units/kg every 4 to 6 hours) for 10 to 14 days

Diphtheria (adjunctive therapy to antitoxin and for prevention of the carrier state)

150,000 to 250,000 units/kg/day in equal doses every 6 hours for 7 to 10 days

Rat-bite fever; Haverhill fever (with endocarditis caused by S. moniliformis)

150,000 to 250,000 units/kg/day in equal doses every 4 hours for 4 weeks

Renal Impairment

Penicillin G is relatively nontoxic, and dosage adjustments are generally required only in cases of severe renal impairment.

The recommended dosage regimens are as follows: Creatinine clearance less than 10 mL/min/1.73m2; administer a full loading dose (see recommended dosages in the tables above) followed by one-half of the loading dose every 8 to 10 hours.

Uremic patients with a creatinine clearance greater than 10 mL/min/1.73m2; administer a full loading dose (see recommended dosages in the tables above) followed by one-half of the loading dose every 4 to 5 hours.

Additional dosage modifications should be made in patients with hepatic disease and renal impairment.

For most acute infections, treatment should be continued for at least 48 to 72 hours after the patient becomes asymptomatic. Antibiotic therapy for Group A β-hemolytic streptococcal infections should be maintained for at least 10 days to reduce the risk of rheumatic fever.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Preparation of Solution

Solutions of penicillin should be prepared as follows: Loosen powder. Hold vial horizontally and rotate it while slowly directing the stream of diluent against the wall of the vial. Shake vial vigorously after all the diluent has been added. Depending on the route of administration, use Sterile Water for Injection, USP or Sterile Isotonic Sodium Chloride Solution for Parenteral use.

Note: Penicillins are rapidly inactivated in the presence of carbohydrate solutions at alkaline pH.

Reconstitution

The following table shows the amount of solvent required for solution of various concentrations:
Approx. Desired Concentration (units/mL) Approx. Volume for 1,000,000 units (mL) Solvent for Vial of 5,000,000 units (mL) Infusion Only 20,000,000 units (mL)
100,000

9.8

--

--

250,000

3.8

18

72

500,000

1.8

8

31.5

750,000

--

4.7

--

1,000,000

--

3

11.5

When the required volume of solvent is greater than the capacity of the vial, the penicillin can be dissolved by first injecting only a portion of the solvent into the vial, then withdrawing the resultant solution and combining it with the remainder of the solvent in a larger sterile container.

Penicillin G Potassium for Injection, USP is highly water soluble. It may be dissolved in small amounts of Water for Injection, or Sterile Isotonic Sodium Chloride Solution for Parenteral Use. All solutions should be stored in a refrigerator. When refrigerated, penicillin solutions may be stored for seven days without significant loss of potency.

Buffered Penicillin G Potassium for Injection may be given intramuscularly or by continuous intravenous drip for dosages of 500,000, 1,000,000 or 5,000,000 units. It is also suitable for intrapleural, intraarticular, and other local installations.

THE 20,000,000 UNIT (20 MILLION UNIT) DOSAGE MAY BE ADMINISTERED BY INTRAVENOUS INFUSION ONLY.

(1) Intramuscular Injection: Keep total volume of injection small. The intramuscular route is the preferred route of administration. Solutions containing up to 100,000 units of penicillin per mL of diluent may be used with a minimum of discomfort. Greater concentration of penicillin G per mL is physically possible and may be employed where therapy demands. When large doses are required, it may be advisable to administer aqueous solutions of penicillin by means of continuous intravenous drip.

(2) Continuous Intravenous Drip: Determine the volume of fluid and rate of its administration required by the patient in a 24-hour period in the usual manner for fluid therapy, and add the appropriate daily dosage of penicillin to this fluid. For example, if an adult patient requires 2 liters of fluid in 24 hours and a daily dosage of 10 million units of penicillin, add 5 million units of 1 liter and adjust the rate of flow so the liter will be infused in 12 hours.

(3) Intrapleural or Other Local Infusion: If fluid is aspirated, give infusion in a volume equal to 1/4 or 1/2 the amount of fluid aspirated, otherwise, prepare as for an intramuscular injection.

(4) Intrathecal Use: The intrathecal use of penicillin in meningitis must be highly individualized. It should be employed only with full consideration of the possible irritating effects of penicillin when used by this route. The preferred route of therapy in bacterial meningitides is intravenous, supplemented by intramuscular injection.
Amoxicillin And Clavula...

Amoxicillin And Clavulanate Potassium

Since both the Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 250 mg/125 mg and 500 mg/125 mg Tablets contain the same amount of clavulanic acid (125 mg, as the potassium salt), two Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 250 mg/125 mg Tablets are not equivalent to one Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 500 mg/125 mg Tablet; therefore, two Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 250 mg/125 mg Tablets should not be substituted for one Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 500 mg/125 mg Tablet.

Dosage

Adults

The usual adult dose is one Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 500 mg/125 mg Tablet every 12 hours or one Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 250 mg/125 mg Tablet every 8 hours. For more severe infections and infections of the respiratory tract, the dose should be one Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 875 mg/125 mg Tablet every 12 hours or one Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 500 mg/125 mg Tablet every 8 hours.

Patients with impaired renal function do not generally require a reduction in dose unless the impairment is severe. Severely impaired patients with a glomerular filtration rate of <30 mL/min. should not receive the 875 mg/125 mg tablet. Patients with a glomerular filtration rate of 10 to 30 mL/ min. should receive 500 mg/125 mg or 250 mg/125 mg every 12 hours, depending on the severity of the infection. Patients with a less than 10 mL/min. glomerular filtration rate should receive 500 mg/125 mg or 250 mg/125 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection.

Hemodialysis patients should receive 500 mg/125 mg or 250 mg/125 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. They should receive an additional dose both during and at the end of dialysis.

Hepatically impaired patients should be dosed with caution and hepatic function monitored at regular intervals. (See WARNINGS.)

Pediatric Patients

Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to the adult recommendations.

Due to the different amoxicillin to clavulanic acid ratios in the Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets (250 mg/125 mg) versus the Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Chewable Tablets (250 mg/62.5 mg), the Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 250 mg/125 mg Tablets should not be used until the pediatric patient weighs at least 40 kg or more.

Administration: Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets may be taken without regard to meals; however, absorption of clavulanate potassium is enhanced when Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets are administered at the start of a meal. To minimize the potential for gastrointestinal intolerance, Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets should be taken at the start of a meal.
Methotrexate Sodium

Methotrexate Sodium

Neoplastic Diseases

Oral administration in tablet form is often preferred when low doses are being administered since absorption is rapid and effective serum levels are obtained. Methotrexate sodium (preservative free) injectable products may be given by the intramuscular, intravenous, intra-arterial, or intrathecal route. However, the preserved formulation contains Benzyl Alcohol and must not be used for intrathecal or high dose therapy. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Choriocarcinoma and Similar Trophoblastic Diseases

Methotrexate is administered orally or intramuscularly in doses of 15 to 30 mg daily for a five-day course. Such courses are usually repeated for 3 to 5 times as required, with rest periods of one or more weeks interposed between courses, until any manifesting toxic symptoms subside. The effectiveness of therapy is ordinarily evaluated by 24-hour quantitative analysis of urinary chorionic gonadatropin (hCG), which should return to normal or less than 50 IU/24 hr usually after the third or fourth course and usually be followed by a complete resolution of measurable lesions in 4 to 6 weeks. One to two courses of methotrexate after normalization of hCG is usually recommended. Before each course of the drug careful clinical assessment is essential. Cyclic combination therapy of methotrexate with other antitumor drugs has been reported as being useful.

Since hydatidiform mole may precede choriocarcinoma, prophylactic chemotherapy with methotrexate has been recommended.

Chorioadenoma destruens is considered to be an invasive form of hydatidiform mole.

Methotrexate is administered in these disease states in doses similar to those recommended for choriocarcinoma.

Leukemia

Acute lymphoblastic leukemia in pediatric patients and young adolescents is the most responsive to present day chemotherapy. In young adults and older patients, clinical remission is more difficult to obtain and early relapse is more common.

Methotrexate alone or in combination with steroids was used initially for induction of remission in acute lymphoblastic leukemias. More recently corticosteroid therapy, in combination with other antileukemic drugs or in cyclic combinations with methotrexate included, has appeared to produce rapid and effective remissions. When used for induction, methotrexate in doses of 3.3 mg/m2 in combination with 60 mg/m2 of prednisone, given daily, produced remissions in 50% of patients treated, usually within a period of 4 to 6 weeks. Methotrexate in combination with other agents appears to be the drug of choice for securing maintenance of drug-induced remissions. When remission is achieved and supportive care has produced general clinical improvement, maintenance therapy is initiated, as follows: methotrexate is administered 2 times weekly either by mouth or intramuscularly in total weekly doses of 30 mg/m2. It has also been given in doses of 2.5 mg/kg intravenously every 14 days. If and when relapse does occur, reinduction of remission can again usually be obtained by repeating the initial induction regimen.

A variety of combination chemotherapy regimens have been used for both induction and maintenance therapy in acute lymphoblastic leukemia. The physician should be familiar with the new advances in antileukemic therapy.

Meningeal Leukemia

In the treatment or prophylaxis of meningeal leukemia, methotrexate must be administered intrathecally. Preservative free methotrexate is diluted to a concentration of 1 mg/mL with an appropriate sterile, preservative free medium such as 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP.

The cerebrospinal fluid volume is dependent on age and not body surface area. The CSF is at 40% of the adult volume at birth and reaches the adult volume in several years.

Intrathecal methotrexate administration at a dose of 12 mg/m2 (maximum 15 mg) has been reported to result in low CSF methotrexate concentrations and reduced efficacy in pediatric patients and high concentrations and neurotoxicity in adults. The following dosage regimen is based on age instead of body surface area:
Age (years) Dose (mg)
<1

6

1

8

2

10

3 or older

12

In one study in patients under the age of 40, this dosage regimen appeared to result in more consistent CSF methotrexate concentrations and less neurotoxicity. Another study in pediatric patients with acute lymphocytic leukemia compared this regimen to a dose of 12 mg/m2 (maximum 15 mg), a significant reduction in the rate of CNS relapse was observed in the group whose dose was based on age.

Because the CSF volume and turnover may decrease with age, a dose reduction may be indicated in elderly patients.

For the treatment of meningeal leukemia, intrathecal methotrexate may be given at intervals of 2 to 5 days. However, administration at intervals of less than 1 week may result in increased subacute toxicity. Methotrexate is administered until the cell count of the cerebrospinal fluid returns to normal. At this point one additional dose is advisable. For prophylaxis against meningeal leukemia, the dosage is the same as for treatment except for the intervals of administration. On this subject, it is advisable for the physician to consult the medical literature.

Untoward side effects may occur with any given intrathecal injection and are commonly neurological in character. Large doses may cause convulsions. Methotrexate given by the intrathecal route appears significantly in the systemic circulation and may cause systemic methotrexate toxicity. Therefore, systemic antileukemic therapy with the drug should be appropriately adjusted, reduced or discontinued. Focal leukemic involvement of the central nervous system may not respond to the intrathecal chemotherapy and is best treated with radiotherapy.

Lymphomas

In Burkitt's Tumor, Stages I-II, methotrexate has produced prolonged remissions in some cases. Recommended dosage is 10 to 25 mg/day orally for 4 to 8 days. In Stage III, methotrexate is commonly given concomitantly with other antitumor agents. Treatment in all stages usually consists of several courses of the drug interposed with 7 to10 day rest periods. Lymphosarcomas in Stage III may respond to combined drug therapy with methotrexate given in doses of 0.625 to 2.5 mg/kg daily.

Mycosis Fungoides (cutaneous T cell lymphoma)

Therapy with methotrexate as a single agent appears to produce clinical responses in up to 50% of patients treated. Dosage in early stages is usually 5 to 50 mg once weekly. Dose reduction or cessation is guided by patient response and hematologic monitoring. Methotrexate has also been administered twice weekly in doses ranging from 15 to 37.5 mg in patients who have responded poorly to weekly therapy. Combination chemotherapy regimens that include intravenous methotrexate administered at higher doses with leucovorin rescue have been utilized in advanced stages of the disease.

Osteosarcoma

An effective adjuvant chemotherapy regimen requires the administration of several cytotoxic chemotherapeutic agents. In addition to high-dose methotrexate with leucovorin rescue, these agents may include doxorubicin, cisplatin, and the combination of bleomycin, cyclophosphamide and dactinomycin (BCD) in the doses and schedule shown in the table below. The starting dose for high dose methotrexate treatment is 12 grams/m2. If this dose is not sufficient to produce a peak serum methotrexate concentration of 1,000 micromolar (10-3 mol/L) at the end of the methotrexate infusion, the dose may be escalated to 15 grams/m2 in subsequent treatments. If the patient is vomiting or is unable to tolerate oral medication, leucovorin is given IV or IM at the same dose schedule.
Drug* Dose* Treatment Week After Surgery * Link MP, Goorin AM, Miser AW, et al; The effect of adjuvant chemotherapy on relapse-free survival in patients with osteosarcoma of the extremity. N Engl J of Med 1986; 314(No.25): 1600-1606. † See each respective package insert for full prescribing information. Dosage modifications may be necessary because of drug-induced toxicity.
Methotrexate

12 g/m2 IV as 4 hour infusion (starting dose)

4,5,6,7,11,12,15,16,29,30,44,45

Leucovorin

15 mg orally every six hours for 10 doses starting at 24 hours after start of methotrexate infusion.

Doxorubicin† as a single drug

30 mg/m2 day IV × 3 days

8,17

Doxorubicin†

50 mg/m2 IV

20,23,33,36

Cisplatin†

100 mg/m2 IV

20,23,33,36

Bleomycin†

15 units/m2 IV × 2 days

2,13,26,39,42

Cyclophosphamide†

600 mg/m2 IV × 2 days

2,13,26,39,42

Dactinomycin†

0.6 mg/m2 IV × 2 days

2,13,26,39,42

When these higher doses of methotrexate are to be administered, the following safety guidelines should be closely observed.

GUIDELINES FOR METHOTREXATE THERAPY WITH LEUCOVORIN RESCUE

1. Administration of methotrexate should be delayed until recovery if:
the WBC count is less than 1500/microliter the neutrophil count is less than 200/microliter the platelet count is less than 75,000/microliter the serum bilirubin level is greater than 1.2 mg/dL the SGPT level is greater than 450 U mucositis is present, until there is evidence of healing persistent pleural effusion is present; this should be drained dry prior to infusion.
2. Adequate renal function must be documented.

a. Serum creatinine must be normal, and creatinine clearance must be greater than 60 mL/min, before initiation of therapy.

b. Serum creatinine must be measured prior to each subsequent course of therapy. If serum creatinine has increased by 50% or more compared to a prior value, the creatinine clearance must be measured and documented to be greater than 60 mL/min (even if the serum creatinine is still within the normal range).

3. Patients must be well hydrated, and must be treated with sodium bicarbonate for urinary alkalinization.

a. Administer 1,000 mL/m2 of intravenous fluid over 6 hours prior to initiation for the methotrexate infusion. Continue hydration at 125 mL/m2/hr (3 liters/m2/day) during the methotrexate infusion, and for 2 days after the infusion has been completed.

b. Alkalinize urine to maintain pH above 7.0 during methotrexate infusion and leucovorin calcium therapy. This can be accomplished by the administration of sodium bicarbonate orally or by incorporation into a separate intravenous solution.

4. Repeat serum creatinine and serum methotrexate 24 hours after starting methotrexate and at least once daily until the methotrexate level is below 5 × 10-8 mol/L (0.05 micromolar).

5. The table below provides guidelines for leucovorin calcium dosage based upon serum methotrexate levels. (See table below.‡)Patients who experience delayed early methotrexate elimination are likely to develop nonreversible oliguric renal failure. In addition to appropriate leucovorin therapy, these patients require continuing hydration and urinary alkalinization, and close monitoring of fluid and electrolyte status, until the serum methotrexate level has fallen to below 0.05 micromolar and the renal failure has resolved. If necessary, acute, intermittent hemodialysis with a high-flux dialyzer may also be beneficial in these patients.

6. Some patients will have abnormalities in methotrexate elimination, or abnormalities in renal function following methotrexate administration, which are significant but less severe than the abnormalities described in the table below. These abnormalities may or may not be associated with significant clinical toxicity. If significant toxicity is observed, leucovorin rescue should be extended for an additional 24 hours (total 14 doses over 84 hours) in subsequent courses of therapy. The possibility that the patient is taking other medications which interact with methotrexate (e.g., medications which may interfere with methotrexate binding to serum albumin, or elimination) should always be reconsidered when laboratory abnormalities or clinical toxicities are observed.

CAUTION: DO NOT ADMINISTER LEUCOVORIN INTRATHECALLY.

Psoriasis, Rheumatoid Arthritis, and Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

Adult Rheumatoid Arthritis

Recommended Starting Dosage Schedules
Single oral doses of 7.5 mg once weekly.1
2. Divided oral dosages of 2.5 mg at 12 hour intervals for 3 doses given as a course once weekly.1
1 Methotrexate Sodium Tablets for oral administration are available.
Polyarticular-Course Juvenile Rheumatoid Arthritis

The recommended starting dose is 10 mg/m2 given once weekly.

For either adult RA or polyarticular-course JRA dosages may be adjusted gradually to achieve an optimal response. Limited experience shows a significant increase in the incidence and severity of serious toxic reactions, especially bone marrow suppression, at doses greater than 20 mg/wk in adults. Although there is experience with doses up to 30 mg/m2/wk in children, there are too few published data to assess how doses over 20 mg/m2/wk might affect the risk of serious toxicity in children. Experience does suggest, however, that children receiving 20 to 30 mg/m2/wk (0.65 to 1 mg/kg/wk) may have better absorption and fewer gastrointestinal side effects if methotrexate is administered either intramuscularly or subcutaneously.

Therapeutic response usually begins within 3 to 6 weeks and the patient may continue to improve for another 12 weeks or more.

The optimal duration of therapy is unknown. Limited data available from long-term studies in adults indicate that the initial clinical improvement is maintained for at least two years with continued therapy. When methotrexate is discontinued, the arthritis usually worsens within 3 to 6 weeks.

The patient should be fully informed of the risks involved and should be under constant supervision of the physician. [See Information for Patients under PRECAUTIONS]. Assessment of hematologic, hepatic, renal, and pulmonary function should be made by history, physical examination, and laboratory tests before beginning, periodically during, and before reinstituting methotrexate therapy. [See PRECAUTIONS]. Appropriate steps should be taken to avoid conception during methotrexate therapy [See PRECAUTIONS and CONTRAINDICATIONS].

All schedules should be continually tailored to the individual patient. An initial test dose may be given prior to the regular dosing schedule to detect any extreme sensitivity to adverse effects [See ADVERSE REACTIONS]. Maximal myelosuppression usually occurs in seven to ten days.

Psoriasis

Recommended Starting Dose Schedule
Weekly single oral, IM or IV dosage schedule: 10 to 25 mg per week until adequate response is achieved.2 Divided oral dose schedule: 2.5 mg at 12 hour intervals for three doses.2
Dosages in each schedule may be gradually adjusted to achieve optimal clinical response; 30 mg/week should not ordinarily be exceeded.

Once optimal clinical response has been achieved, each dosage schedule should be reduced to the lowest possible amount of drug and to the longest possible rest period. The use of methotrexate may permit the return to conventional topical therapy, which should be encouraged.
2 Methotrexate Sodium Tablets for oral administration are available.
Handling and Disposal

Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be considered. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1-7 There is no general agreement that all of the procedures recommended in the guidelines are necessary or appropriate.

Dilution Instructions for Liquid Methotrexate Injection Product

Methotrexate Injection, USP, Isotonic liquid, preservative free, for single use only.

If desired, the solution may be further diluted immediately prior to use with an appropriate sterile, preservative free medium such as 5% dextrose solution, USP or sodium chloride injection, USP.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Furosemide

Furosemide

Edema

Therapy should be individualized according to patient response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain that response.

Adults

The usual initial dose of furosemide is 20 to 80 mg given as a single dose. Ordinarily a prompt diuresis ensues. If needed, the same dose can be administered 6 to 8 hours later or the dose may be increased. The dose may be raised by 20 or 40 mg and given not sooner than 6 to 8 hours after the previous dose until the desired diuretic effect has been obtained. The individually determined single dose should then be given once or twice daily (e.g., at 8 am and 2 pm). The dose of furosemide may be carefully titrated up to 600 mg/day in patients with clinically severe edematous states.

Edema may be most efficiently and safely mobilized by giving furosemide on 2 to 4 consecutive days each week.

When doses exceeding 80 mg/day are given for prolonged periods, careful clinical observation and laboratory monitoring are particularly advisable. (See PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests.)

Geriatric Patients

In general, dose selection for the elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Pediatric Patients

The usual initial dose of oral furosemide in pediatric patients is 2 mg/kg body weight, given as a single dose. If the diuretic response is not satisfactory after the initial dose, dosage may be increased by 1 or 2 mg/kg no sooner than 6 to 8 hours after the previous dose. Doses greater than 6 mg/kg body weight are not recommended. For maintenance therapy in pediatric patients, the dose should be adjusted to the minimum effective level.

Hypertension

Therapy should be individualized according to the patient’s response to gain maximal therapeutic response and to determine the minimal dose needed to maintain the therapeutic response.

Adults

The usual initial dose of furosemide for hypertension is 80 mg, usually divided into 40 mg twice a day. Dosage should then be adjusted according to response. If response is not satisfactory, add other antihypertensive agents.

Changes in blood pressure must be carefully monitored when furosemide is used with other antihypertensive drugs, especially during initial therapy. To prevent excessive drop in blood pressure, the dosage of other agents should be reduced by at least 50 percent when furosemide is added to the regimen. As the blood pressure falls under the potentiating effect of furosemide, a further reduction in dosage or even discontinuation of other antihypertensive drugs may be necessary.

Geriatric Patients

In general, dose selection and dose adjustment for the elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Methylprednisolone

Methylprednisolone

The initial dosage of methylprednisolone tablets may vary from 4 mg to 48 mg per day depending on the specific disease entity being treated. In situations of less severity lower doses will generally suffice while in selected patients higher initial doses may be required. The initial dosage should be maintained or adjusted until a satisfactory response is noted. If after a reasonable period of time there is a lack of satisfactory clinical response, methylprednisolone tablets should be discontinued and the patient transferred to other appropriate therapy.

IT SHOULD BE EMPHASIZED THAT DOSAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE VARIABLE AND MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED ON THE BASIS OF THE DISEASE UNDER TREATMENT AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. It should be kept in mind that constant monitoring is needed in regard to drug dosage. Included in the situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient’s individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment; in this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of methylprednisolone tablets for a period of time consistent with the patient’s condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

Multiple Sclerosis

In the treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis daily doses of 200 mg of prednisolone for a week followed by 80 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective (4 mg of methylprednisolone is equivalent to 5 mg of prednisolone).

Alternate Day Therapy

Alternate day therapy is a corticosteroid dosing regimen in which twice the usual daily dose of corticoid is administered every other morning. The purpose of this mode of therapy is to provide the patient requiring long-term pharmacologic dose treatment with the beneficial effects of corticoids while minimizing certain undesirable effects, including pituitary-adrenal suppression, the Cushingoid state, corticoid withdrawal symptoms, and growth suppression in children.

The rationale for this treatment schedule is based on two major premises: (a) the anti-inflammatory or therapeutic effect of corticoids persists longer than their physical presence and metabolic effects and (b) administration of the corticosteroid every other morning allows for re-establishment of more nearly normal hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) activity on the off-steroid day.

A brief review of the HPA physiology may be helpful in understanding this rationale. Acting primarily through the hypothalamus a fall in free cortisol stimulates the pituitary gland to produce increasing amounts of corticotropin (ACTH) while a rise in free cortisol inhibits ACTH secretion. Normally the HPA system is characterized by diurnal (circadian) rhythm. Serum levels of ACTH rise from a low point about 10 pm to a peak level about 6 am. Increasing levels of ACTH stimulate adrenal cortical activity resulting in a rise in plasma cortisol with maximal levels occurring between 2 am and 8 am. This rise in cortisol dampens ACTH production and in turn adrenal cortical activity. There is a gradual fall in plasma corticoids during the day with lowest levels occurring about midnight.

The diurnal rhythm of the HPA axis is lost in Cushing’s disease, a syndrome of adrenal cortical hyperfunction characterized by obesity with centripetal fat distribution, thinning of the skin with easy bruisability, muscle wasting with weakness, hypertension, latent diabetes, osteoporosis, electrolyte imbalance, etc. The same clinical findings of hyperadrenocorticism may be noted during long-term pharmacologic dose corticoid therapy administered in conventional daily divided doses. It would appear, then, that a disturbance in the diurnal cycle with maintenance of elevated corticoid values during the night may play a significant role in the development of undesirable corticoid effects. Escape from these constantly elevated plasma levels for even short periods of time may be instrumental in protecting against undesirable pharmacologic effects.

During conventional pharmacologic dose corticosteroid therapy, ACTH production is inhibited with subsequent suppression of cortisol production by the adrenal cortex. Recovery time for normal HPA activity is variable depending upon the dose and duration of treatment. During this time the patient is vulnerable to any stressful situation. Although it has been shown that there is considerably less adrenal suppression following a single morning dose of prednisolone (10 mg) as opposed to a quarter of that dose administered every 6 hours, there is evidence that some suppressive effect on adrenal activity may be carried over into the following day when pharmacologic doses are used. Further, it has been shown that a single dose of certain corticosteroids will produce adrenal cortical suppression for two or more days. Other corticoids, including methylprednisolone, hydrocortisone, prednisone, and prednisolone, are considered to be short acting (producing adrenal cortical suppression for 1 1/4 to 1 1/2 days following a single dose) and thus are recommended for alternate day therapy.

The following should be kept in mind when considering alternate day therapy:
Basic principles and indications for corticosteroid therapy should apply. The benefits of alternate day therapy should not encourage the indiscriminate use of steroids. Alternate day therapy is a therapeutic technique primarily designed for patients in whom long-term pharmacologic corticoid therapy is anticipated. In less severe disease processes in which corticoid therapy is indicated, it may be possible to initiate treatment with alternate day therapy. More severe disease states usually will require daily divided high dose therapy for initial control of the disease process. The initial suppressive dose level should be continued until satisfactory clinical response is obtained, usually four to ten days in the case of many allergic and collagen diseases. It is important to keep the period of initial suppressive dose as brief as possible particularly when subsequent use of alternate day therapy is intended.Once control has been established, two courses are available: (a) change to alternate day therapy and then gradually reduce the amount of corticoid given every other day or (b) following control of the disease process reduce the daily dose of corticoid to the lowest effective level as rapidly as possible and then change over to an alternate day schedule. Theoretically, course (a) may be preferable. Because of the advantages of alternate day therapy, it may be desirable to try patients on this form of therapy who have been on daily corticoid for long periods of time (e.g., patients with rheumatoid arthritis). Since these patients may already have a suppressed HPA axis, establishing them on alternate day therapy may be difficult and not always successful. However, it is recommended that regular attempts be made to change them over. It may be helpful to triple or even quadruple the daily maintenance dose and administer this every other day rather than just doubling the daily dose if difficulty is encountered. Once the patient is again controlled, an attempt should be made to reduce this dose to a minimum. As indicated above, certain corticosteroids, because of their prolonged suppressive effect on adrenal activity, are not recommended for alternate day therapy (e.g., dexamethasone and betamethasone). The maximal activity of the adrenal cortex is between 2 am and 8 am, and it is minimal between 4 pm and midnight. Exogenous corticosteroids suppress adrenocortical activity the least, when given at the time of maximal activity (am). In using alternate day therapy it is important, as in all therapeutic situations, to individualize and tailor the therapy to each patient. Complete control of symptoms will not be possible in all patients. An explanation of the benefits of alternate day therapy will help the patient to understand and tolerate the possible flare-up in symptoms which may occur in the latter part of the off-steroid day. Other symptomatic therapy may be added or increased at this time if needed. In the event of an acute flare-up of the disease process, it may be necessary to return to a full suppressive daily divided corticoid dose for control. Once control is again established alternate day therapy may be reinstituted. Although many of the undesirable features of corticosteroid therapy can be minimized by alternate day therapy, as in any therapeutic situation, the physician must carefully weigh the benefit-risk ratio for each patient in whom corticoid therapy is being considered.
Leuprolide Acetate Kit

Leuprolide Acetate Kit

The recommended dose is 1 mg (0.2 mL or 20 unit mark) administered as a single daily subcutaneous injection. As with other drugs administered chronically by subcutaneous injection, the injection site should be varied periodically. Each 0.2 mL contains 1 mg of leuprolide acetate, sodium chloride for tonicity adjustment, 1.8 mg of benzyl alcohol as preservative and water for injection. The pH may have been adjusted with sodium hydroxide and/or acetic acid. Follow the pictorial directions on the Administering the Injection Insert. NOTE: As with all parenteral products, inspect the solution for discoloration and particulate matter before each use.

Leuprolide acetate injection can be administered by a patient/parent or health care professional.

The dose of leuprolide acetate injection must be individualized for each child. The dose is based on a mg/kg ratio of drug to body weight. Younger children require higher doses on a mg/kg ratio.

After 1-2 months of initiating therapy or changing doses, the child must be monitored with a GnRH stimulation test, sex steroids, and Tanner staging to confirm downregulation. Measurements of bone age for advancement should be monitored every 6-12 months. The dose should be titrated upward until no progression of the condition is noted either clinically and/or by laboratory parameters.

The first dose found to result in adequate downregulation can probably be maintained for the duration of therapy in most children. However, there are insufficient data to guide dosage adjustment as patients move into higher weight categories after beginning therapy at very young ages and low dosages. It is recommended that adequate downregulation be verified in such patients whose weight has increased significantly while on therapy.

As with other drugs administered by injection, the injection site should be varied periodically.

Discontinuation of leuprolide acetate injection should be considered before age 11 for females and age 12 for males.

The recommended starting dose is 50 mcg/kg/day administered as a single subcutaneous injection. If total downregulation is not achieved, the dose should be titrated upward by 10 mcg/kg/day. This dose will be considered the maintenance dose.

Follow the pictorial directions on the reverse side of this package insert for administration.

NOTE: As with other parenteral products, inspect the solution for discoloration and particulate matter before each use.
Cosyntropin

Cosyntropin

Cosyntropin for Injection may be administered intramuscularly or as a direct intravenous injection when used as a rapid screening test of adrenal function. It may also be given as an intravenous infusion over a 4 to 8 hour period to provide a greater stimulus to the adrenal glands. Doses of Cosyntropin for Injection 0.25 to 0.75 mg have been used in clinical studies and a maximal response noted with the smallest dose. A suggested method for a rapid screening test of adrenal function has been described by Wood and Associates (1). A control blood sample of 6 to 7 mL is collected in a heparinized tube. Reconstitute 0.25 mg of Cosyntropin for Injection with 1mL of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP and inject intramuscularly. The reconstituted drug product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to injection. Reconstituted Cosyntropin for Injection should not be retained. In the pediatric population, aged 2 years or less, a dose of 0.125 mg will often suffice. A second blood sample is collected exactly 30 minutes later. Both blood samples should be refrigerated until sent to the laboratory for determination of the plasma cortisol response by some appropriate method. If it is not possible to send them to the laboratory or perform the fluorimetric procedure within 12 hours, then the plasma should be separated and refrigerated or frozen according to need. Two alternative methods of administration are intravenous injection and infusion. Cosyntropin for Injection can be injected intravenously in 2 to 5 mL of saline over a 2-minute period. When given as an intravenous infusion:

Cosyntropin for Injection, 0.25 mg may be added to glucose or saline solutions and given at the rate of approximately 40 micrograms per hour over a 6-hour period. It should not be added to blood or plasma as it is apt to be inactivated by enzymes. Adrenal response may be measured in the usual manner by determining urinary steroid excretion before and after treatment or by measuring plasma cortisol levels before and at the end of the infusion. The latter is preferable because the urinary steroid excretion does not always accurately reflect the adrenal or plasma cortisol response to ACTH. The usual normal response in most cases is an approximate doubling of the basal level, provided that the basal level does not exceed the normal range. Patients receiving cortisone, hydrocortisone or spironolactone should omit their pre-test doses on the day selected for testing. Patients taking inadvertent doses of cortisone or hydrocortisone on the test day and patients taking spironolactone or women taking drugs which contain estrogen may exhibit abnormally high basal plasma cortisol levels. A paradoxical response may be noted in the cortisone or hydrocortisone group as seen in a decrease in plasma cortisol values following a stimulating dose of Cosyntropin for Injection.

In the spironolactone or estrogen group only a normal incremental response is to be expected. Many patients with normal adrenal function, however, do not respond to the expected degree so that the following criteria have been established to denote a normal response:

1. The control plasma cortisol level should exceed 5 micrograms/100 mL.

2. The 30-minute level should show an increment of at least 7 micrograms/100 mL above the basal level.
3. The 30-minute level should exceed 18 micrograms/100 mL. Comparable figures have been reported by Greig and co-workers (2).
Plasma cortisol levels usually peak about 45 to 60 minutes after an injection of Cosyntropin for Injection and some prefer the 60-minute interval for testing for this reason. While it is true that the 60-minute values are usually higher than the 30-minute values, the difference may not be significant enough in most cases to outweigh the disadvantage of a longer testing period. If the 60-minute test period is used, the criterion for a normal response is an approximate doubling of the basal plasma cortisol value. In patients with a raised plasma bilirubin or in patients where the plasma contains free hemoglobin, falsely high fluorescence measurements will result. The test may be performed at any time during the day but because of the physiological diurnal variation of plasma cortisol the criteria listed by Wood cannot apply. It has been shown that basal plasma cortisol levels and the post Cosyntropin for Injection increment exhibit diurnal changes. However, the 30-minute plasma cortisol level remains unchanged throughout the day so that only this single criterion should be used (3).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit. Reconstituted Cosyntropin for Injection should not be retained.
Triamcinolone Acetonide...

Triamcinolone Acetonide

General

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see PRECAUTIONS).

IT SHOULD BE EMPHASIZED THAT DOSAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE VARIABLE AND MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED ON THE BASIS OF THE DISEASE UNDER TREATMENT AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. Situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient’s individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment. In this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of the corticosteroid for a period of time consistent with the patient’s condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

In pediatric patients, the initial dose of triamcinolone may vary depending on the specific disease entity being treated. The range of initial doses is 0.11 to 1.6 mg/kg/day in three or four divided doses (3.2 to 48 mg/m2bsa/day).

For the purpose of comparison, the following is the equivalent milligram dosage of the various glucocorticoids:

Cortisone, 25

Triamcinolone, 4

Hydrocortisone, 20

Paramethasone, 2

Prednisolone, 5

Betamethasone, 0.75

Prednisone, 5

Dexamethasone, 0.75

Methylprednisolone, 4

These dose relationships apply only to oral or intravenous administration of these compounds. When these substances or their derivatives are injected intramuscularly or into joint spaces, their relative properties may be greatly altered.

Intra-Articular Administration

Dosage

The initial dose of triamcinolone acetonide injectable suspension for intra-articular administration may vary from 2.5 mg to 5 mg for smaller joints and from 5 mg to 15 mg for larger joints, depending on the specific disease entity being treated. Single injections into several joints, up to a total of 20 mg or more, have been given.

Intralesional

For intralesional administration, the initial dose per injection site will vary depending on the specific disease entity and lesion being treated. The site of injection and volume of injection should be carefully considered due to the potential for cutaneous atrophy.

Multiple sites separated by one centimeter or more may be injected, keeping in mind that the greater the total volume employed the more corticosteroid becomes available for systemic absorption and systemic effects. Such injections may be repeated, if necessary, at weekly or less frequent intervals.

Localization of Doses

The lower dosages in the initial dosage range of triamcinolone acetonide may produce the desired effect when the corticosteroid is administered to provide a localized concentration. The site and volume of the injection should be carefully considered when triamcinolone acetonide is administered for this purpose.

Administration

STRICT ASEPTIC TECHNIQUE IS MANDATORY. The vial should be shaken before use to ensure a uniform suspension. Prior to withdrawal, the suspension should be inspected for clumping or granular appearance (agglomeration). An agglomerated product results from exposure to freezing temperatures and should not be used. After withdrawal, inject without delay to prevent settling in the syringe.

Injection Technique

For treatment of joints, the usual intra-articular injection technique should be followed. If an excessive amount of synovial fluid is present in the joint, some, but not all, should be aspirated to aid in the relief of pain and to prevent undue dilution of the steroid.

With intra-articular administration, prior use of a local anesthetic may often be desirable. Care should be taken with this kind of injection, particularly in the deltoid region, to avoid injecting the suspension into the tissues surrounding the site, since this may lead to tissue atrophy.

In treating acute nonspecific tenosynovitis, care should be taken to ensure that the injection of triamcinolone acetonide injectable suspension is made into the tendon sheath rather than the tendon substance. Epicondylitis may be treated by infiltrating the preparation into the area of greatest tenderness.

Intralesional

For treatment of dermal lesions, triamcinolone acetonide injectable suspension should be injected directly into the lesion, i.e., intradermally or subcutaneously. For accuracy of dosage measurement and ease of administration, it is preferable to employ a tuberculin syringe and a small-bore needle (23 to 25 gauge). Ethyl chloride spray may be used to alleviate the discomfort of the injection.
Triamcinolone Acetonide...

Triamcinolone Acetonide

General

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see PRECAUTIONS).

The initial dose of triamcinolone acetonide injectable suspension may vary from 2.5 mg to 100 mg per day depending on the specific disease entity being treated (see Dosage section below). However, in certain overwhelming, acute, life threatening situations, administration in dosages exceeding the usual dosages may be justified and may be in multiples of the oral dosages.

IT SHOULD BE EMPHASIZED THAT DOSAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE VARIABLE AND MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED ON THE BASIS OF THE DISEASE UNDER TREATMENT AND THE RESPONSE OF THE PATIENT.

After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. Situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient’s individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment. In this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of the corticosteroid for a period of time consistent with the patient’s condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

Dosage

Systemic

The suggested initial dose is 60 mg, injected deeply into the gluteal muscle. Atrophy of subcutaneous fat may occur if the injection is not properly given. Dosage is usually adjusted within the range of 40 mg to 80 mg, depending upon patient response and duration of relief. However, some patients may be well controlled on doses as low as 20 mg or less.

Hay fever or pollen asthma: Patients with hay fever or pollen asthma who are not responding to pollen administration and other conventional therapy may obtain a remission of symptoms lasting throughout the pollen season after a single injection of 40 mg to 100 mg.

In the treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis, daily doses of 160 mg of triamcinolone for a week followed by 64 mg every other day for one month are recommended (see PRECAUTIONS: Neuro-Psychiatric).

In pediatric patients, the initial dose of triamcinolone may vary depending on the specific disease entity being treated. The range of initial doses is 0.11 to 1.6 mg/kg/day in three or four divided doses (3.2 to 48 mg/m2bsa/day).

For the purpose of comparison, the following is the equivalent milligram dosage of the various glucocorticoids:

Cortisone, 25

Triamcinolone, 4

Hydrocortisone, 20

Paramethasone, 2

Prednisolone, 5

Betamethasone, 0.75

Prednisone, 5

Dexamethasone, 0.75

Methylprednisolone, 4

These dose relationships apply only to oral or intravenous administration of these compounds. When these substances or their derivatives are injected intramuscularly or into joint spaces, their relative properties may be greatly altered.

Local

Intra-Articular Administration

A single local injection of triamcinolone acetonide is frequently sufficient, but several injections may be needed for adequate relief of symptoms.

Initial Dose

2.5 mg to 5 mg for smaller joints and from 5 mg to 15 mg for larger joints, depending on the specific disease entity being treated. For adults, doses up to 10 mg for smaller areas and up to 40 mg for larger areas have usually been sufficient. Single injections into several joints, up to a total of 80 mg, have been given.

Administration

General

STRICT ASEPTIC TECHNIQUE IS MANDATORY. The vial should be shaken before use to ensure a uniform suspension. Prior to withdrawal, the suspension should be inspected for clumping or granular appearance (agglomeration). An agglomerated product results from exposure to freezing temperatures and should not be used. After withdrawal, triamcinolone acetonide injectable suspension should be injected without delay to prevent settling in the syringe. Careful technique should be employed to avoid the possibility of entering a blood vessel or introducing infection.

Systemic

For systemic therapy, injection should be made deeply into the gluteal muscle (see WARNINGS). For adults, a minimum needle length of 1 1/2 inches is recommended. In obese patients, a longer needle may be required. Use alternative sites for subsequent injections.

Local

For treatment of joints, the usual intra-articular injection technique should be followed. If an excessive amount of synovial fluid is present in the joint, some, but not all, should be aspirated to aid in the relief of pain and to prevent undue dilution of the steroid.

With intra-articular administration, prior use of a local anesthetic may often be desirable. Care should be taken with this kind of injection, particularly in the deltoid region, to avoid injecting the suspension into the tissues surrounding the site, since this may lead to tissue atrophy.

In treating acute nonspecific tenosynovitis, care should be taken to ensure that the injection of the corticosteroid is made into the tendon sheath rather than the tendon substance. Epicondylitis may be treated by infiltrating the preparation into the area of greatest tenderness.
Bromocriptine Mesylate

Bromocriptine Mesylate

General

It is recommended that bromocriptine mesylate tablets be taken with food. Patients should be evaluated frequently during dose escalation to determine the lowest dosage that produces a therapeutic response.

Hyperprolactinemic Indications

The initial dosage of bromocriptine mesylate tablets in adults is one-half to one 2.5 mg scored tablet daily. An additional 2.5 mg tablet may be added to the treatment regimen as tolerated every 2 to 7 days until an optimal therapeutic response is achieved. The therapeutic dosage ranged from 2.5 to 15 mg daily in adults studied clinically.

Based on limited data in children of age 11 to 15, (see Pediatric Usesubsection) the initial dose is one-half to one 2.5 mg scored tablet daily. Dosing may need to be increased as tolerated until a therapeutic response is achieved. The therapeutic dosage ranged from 2.5 to 10 mg daily in children with prolactin-secreting pituitary adenomas.

In order to reduce the likelihood of prolonged exposure to bromocriptine mesylate tablets should an unsuspected pregnancy occur, a mechanical contraceptive should be used in conjunction with bromocriptine mesylate tablet therapy until normal ovulatory menstrual cycles have been restored. Contraception may then be discontinued in patients desiring pregnancy.

Thereafter, if menstruation does not occur within 3 days of the expected date, bromocriptine mesylate tablet therapy should be discontinued and a pregnancy test performed.

Acromegaly

Virtually all acromegalic patients receiving therapeutic benefit from bromocriptine mesylate tablets also have reductions in circulating levels of growth hormone. Therefore, periodic assessment of circulating levels of growth hormone will, in most cases, serve as a guide in determining the therapeutic potential of bromocriptine mesylate tablets. If, after a brief trial with bromocriptine mesylate tablet therapy, no significant reduction in growth hormone levels has taken place, careful assessment of the clinical features of the disease should be made, and if no change has occurred, dosage adjustment or discontinuation of therapy should be considered.

The initial recommended dosage is one-half to one 2.5 mg bromocriptine mesylate tablet on retiring (with food) for 3 days. An additional one-half to 1 tablet should be added to the treatment regimen as tolerated every 3 to 7 days until the patient obtains optimal therapeutic benefit. Patients should be reevaluated monthly and the dosage adjusted based on reductions of growth hormone or clinical response. The usual optimal therapeutic dosage range of bromocriptine mesylate tablets varies from 20 to 30 mg/day in most patients. The maximal dosage should not exceed 100 mg/day.

Patients treated with pituitary irradiation should be withdrawn from bromocriptine mesylate tablet therapy on a yearly basis to assess both the clinical effects of radiation on the disease process as well as the effects of bromocriptine mesylate tablet therapy. Usually a 4 to 8 week withdrawal period is adequate for this purpose. Recurrence of the signs/ symptoms or increases in growth hormone indicate the disease process is still active and further courses of bromocriptine mesylate tablets should be considered.

Parkinson's Disease

The basic principle of bromocriptine mesylate tablet therapy is to initiate treatment at a low dosage and, on an individual basis, increase the daily dosage slowly until a maximum therapeutic response is achieved. The dosage of levodopa during this introductory period should be maintained, if possible. The initial dose of bromocriptine mesylate tablets is one-half of a 2.5 mg tablet twice daily with meals. Assessments are advised at two week intervals during dosage titration to ensure that the lowest dosage producing an optimal therapeutic response is not exceeded. If necessary, the dosage may be increased every 14 to 28 days by 2.5 mg/day with meals. Should it be advisable to reduce the dosage of levodopa because of adverse reactions, the daily dosage of bromocriptine mesylate tablets, if increased, should be accomplished gradually in small (2.5 mg) increments.

The safety of bromocriptine mesylate tablets has not been demonstrated in dosages exceeding 100 mg/day.
Indomethacin

Indomethacin

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of indomethacin and other treatment options before deciding to use indomethacin. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with indomethacin, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Indomethacin is available as 25 and 50 mg capsules.

Adverse reactions appear to correlate with the size of the dose of indomethacin in most patients but not all. Therefore, every effort should be made to determine the smallest effective dosage for the individual patient.

Pediatric Use

Indomethacin ordinarily should not be prescribed for pediatric patients 14 years of age and under (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use).

Adult Use

Dosage Recommendations for Active Stages of the Following
1. Moderate to severe rheumatoid arthritis including acute flares of chronic disease; moderate to severe ankylosing spondylitis; and moderate to severe osteoarthritis. Suggested Dosage: Indomethacin capsules 25 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d. If this is well tolerated, increase the daily dosage by 25 or by 50 mg, if required by continuing symptoms, at weekly intervals until a satisfactory response is obtained or until a total daily dose of 150-200 mg is reached. DOSES ABOVE THIS AMOUNT GENERALLY DO NOT INCREASE THE EFFECTIVENESS OF THE DRUG. In patients who have persistent night pain and/or morning stiffness, the giving of a large portion, up to a maximum of 100 mg, of the total daily dose at bedtime may be helpful in affording relief. The total daily dose should not exceed 200 mg. In acute flares of chronic rheumatoid arthritis, it may be necessary to increase the dosage by 25 mg or, if required, by 50 mg daily. If minor adverse effects develop as the dosage is increased, reduce the dosage rapidly to a tolerated dose and OBSERVE THE PATIENT CLOSELY. If severe adverse reactions occur, STOP THE DRUG. After the acute phase of the disease is under control, an attempt to reduce the daily dose should be made repeatedly until the patient is receiving the smallest effective dose or the drug is discontinued. Careful instructions to, and observations of, the individual patient are essential to the prevention of serious, irreversible, including fatal, adverse reactions. As advancing years appear to increase the possibility of adverse reactions, indomethacin should be used with greater care in the elderly (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use). 2. Acute painful shoulder (bursitis and/or tendinitis). Initial Dose: 75-150 mg daily in 3 or 4 divided doses. The drug should be discontinued after the signs and symptoms of inflammation have been controlled for several days. The usual course of therapy is 7-14 days. 3. Acute gouty arthritis. Suggested Dosage: Indomethacin capsules 50 mg t.i.d. until pain is tolerable. The dose should then be rapidly reduced to complete cessation of the drug. Definite relief of pain has been reported within 2 to 4 hours. Tenderness and heat usually subside in 24 to 36 hours, and swelling gradually disappears in 3 to 5 days.
Bicalutamide

Bicalutamide

2.1 Recommended Dose and Schedule

The recommended dose for bicalutamide therapy in combination with an LHRH analog is one 50 mg tablet once daily (morning or evening), with or without food. It is recommended that bicalutamide be taken at the same time each day. Treatment with bicalutamide should be started at the same time as treatment with an LHRH analog. If a dose of bicalutamide is missed, take the next dose at the scheduled time. Do not take the missed dose and do not double the next dose.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Renal Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with renal impairment [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment. In patients with severe liver impairment (n=4), although there was a 76% increase in the half-life (5.9 and 10.4 days for normal and impaired patients, respectively) of the active enantiomer of bicalutamide no dosage adjustment is necessary [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].
Lorazepam

Lorazepam

Lorazepam is administered orally. For optimal results, dose, frequency of administration, and duration of therapy should be individualized according to patient response. To facilitate this 0.5 mg, 1 mg, and 2 mg tablets are available.

The usual range is 2 to 6 mg/day given in divided doses, the largest dose being taken before bedtime, but the daily dosage may vary from 1 to 10 mg/day.

For anxiety, most patients require an initial dose of 2 to 3 mg/day given b.i.d. or t.i.d.

For insomnia due to anxiety or transient situational stress, a single daily dose of 2 to 4 mg may be given, usually at bedtime.

For elderly or debilitated patients, an initial dosage of 1 to 2 mg/day in divided doses is recommended to be adjusted as needed and tolerated.

The dosage of lorazepam should be increased gradually when needed to help avoid adverse effects. When higher dosage is indicated, the evening dose should be increased before the daytime doses.
Diltiazem Hydrochloride...

Diltiazem Hydrochloride

Hypertension. Dosage needs to be adjusted by titration to individual patient needs. When used as monotherapy, usual starting doses are 120 to 240 mg once daily. Maximum antihypertensive effect is usually observed by 14 days of chronic therapy; therefore, dosage adjustments should be scheduled accordingly. The usual dosage range studied in clinical trials was 120 to 540 mg once daily. Current clinical experience with 540 mg dose is limited; however, the dose may be increased to 540 mg once daily.

Angina. Dosages for the treatment of angina should be adjusted to each patient’s needs, starting with a dose of 120 mg to 180 mg once daily. Individual patients may respond to higher doses of up to 540 mg once daily. When necessary, titration should be carried out over 7 to 14 days.

Concomitant use with Other Cardiovascular Agents
1. Sublingual Nitroglycerin (NTG): May be taken as required to abort acute anginal attacks during diltiazem hydrochloride therapy. 2. Prophylactic Nitrate Therapy: Diltiazem hydrochloride may be safely coadministered with short- and long-acting nitrates. 3. Beta-blockers: (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS.) 4. Antihypertensives : Diltiazem hydrochloride has an additive antihypertensive effect when used with other antihypertensive agents. Therefore, the dosage of diltiazem hydrochloride or the concomitant antihypertensives may need to be adjusted when adding one to the other.
Hypertensive or anginal patients who are treated with other formulations of diltiazem can safely be switched to diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules at the nearest equivalent total daily dose. Subsequent titration to higher or lower doses may, however, be necessary and should be initiated as clinically indicated.

Sprinkling the Capsule Contents on Food

Diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsules may also be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the capsule contents on a spoonful of applesauce. The applesauce should be swallowed immediately without chewing and followed with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the capsule contents. The applesauce should not be hot, and it should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. Any capsule contents/applesauce mixture should be used immediately and not stored for future use. Subdividing the contents of a diltiazem hydrochloride extended-release capsule is not recommended.
Levofloxacin

Levofloxacin

2.1 Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function

The usual dose of Levofloxacin Injection is 250 mg or 500 mg administered by slow infusion over 60 minutes every 24 hours or 750 mg administered by slow infusion over 90 minutes every 24 hours, as indicated by infection and described in Table 1.

These recommendations apply to patients with creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min. For patients with creatinine clearance <50 mL/min, adjustments to the dosing regimen are required [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)].
Table 1: Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function (creatinine clearance ≥ 50mL/min) Type of Infection* Dosed Every 24 hours Duration (days)† * Due to the designated pathogens [see Indications and Usage (1)] . † Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician. ‡ Due to methicillin-susceptible Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus pneumoniae (including multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae, Haemophilus parainfluenzae, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Moraxella catarrhalis, Chlamydophila pneumoniae, Legionella pneumophila, or Mycoplasma pneumonia [see Indications and Usage (1.2)]. § Due to Streptococcus pneumoniae (excluding multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae , Haemophilus parainfluenzae , Mycoplasma pneumoniae , or Chlamydophila pneumoniae [see Indications and Usage (1.3)]. ¶ This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae , Proteus mirabilis and AP due to E. coli, including cases with concurrent bacteremia. # This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Enterococcus faecalis , Enterococcus cloacae, Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae , Proteus mirabilis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa; and for AP due to E. coli. Þ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis . This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [see Clinical Studies (14.9)]. ß The safety of levofloxacin in adults for durations of therapy beyond 28 days or in pediatric patients for durations beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk. à Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis . Higher doses of levofloxacin typically used for treatment of pneumonia can be used for treatment of plague, if clinically indicated.
Nosocomial Pneumonia

750 mg

7-14

Community Acquired Pneumonia‡

500 mg

7-14

Community Acquired Pneumonia§

750 mg

5

Acute Bacterial Sinusitis

750 mg

5

500 mg

10-14

Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis

500 mg

7

Complicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI)

750 mg

7-14

Uncomplicated SSSI

500 mg

7-10

Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis

500 mg

28

Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)¶

750 mg

5

Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)#

250 mg

10

Uncomplicated Urinary Tract Infection

250 mg

3

Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure),adult and pediatric patients > 50 kgÞ,ß Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 monthsof ageÞ,ß

500 mgSee Table 2 below (2.2)

60ß 60ß

Plague, adult and pediatric patients >50 kgà Pediatric patients <50 kg and ≥6 monthsof age

500 mg

See Table 2 below (2.2)

10 to 14

10 to 14

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Patients

The dosage in pediatric patients ≥ 6 months of age is described below in Table 2.
Table 2: Dosage in Pediatric Patients ≥ 6 months of age Type of Infection* Dose Freq. Once every Duration† * Due to Bacillus anthracis [see Indications and Usage (1.13)] and Yersinia pestis [see Indications and Usage (1.14)]. † Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician. ‡ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [see Clinical Studies (14.9)] § The safety of levofloxacin in pediatric patients for durations of therapy beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.10), Use in Specific Populations (8.4), and Clinical Studies (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk. ¶ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis .
Inhalational Anthrax (post-exposure)‡,§

  Pediatric Patients > 50 kg

500 mg

24hr

60 days§

  Pediatric Patients < 50 kg  and ≥ 6 months of age

8 mg/kg(not to exceed250 mg per dose)

12hr

60 days§

Plague¶

  Pediatric Patients >50 kg

500 mg

24hr

10 to 14 days

  Pediatric Patients <50 kg

and ≥ 6 months of age

8 mg/kg(not to exceed250 mg per dose)

12hr

10 to 14 days

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Adults with Renal Impairment

Administer levofloxacin with caution in the presence of renal insufficiency. Careful clinical observation and appropriate laboratory studies should be performed prior to and during therapy since elimination of levofloxacin may be reduced.

No adjustment is necessary for patients with a creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min.

In patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min), adjustment of the dosage regimen is necessary to avoid the accumulation of levofloxacin due to decreased clearance [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Table 3 shows how to adjust dose based on creatinine clearance.
Table 3: Dosage Adjustment in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min) Dosage in Normal Renal Function Every 24 hours Creatinine Clearance 20 to 49 mL/min Creatinine Clearance 10 to 19 mL/min Hemodialysis or Chronic Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis (CAPD)
750 mg

750 mg every 48 hours

750 mg initial dose, then500 mg every 48 hours

750 mg initial dose, then500 mg every 48 hours

500 mg

500 mg initial dose, then250 mg every 24 hours

500 mg initial dose, then250 mg every 48 hours

500 mg initial dose, then250 mg every 48 hours

250 mg

No dosage adjustmentrequired

250 mg every 48 hours. Iftreating uncomplicatedUTI, then no dosageadjustment is required

No information on dosingadjustment is available

2.4 Drug Interaction With Chelation Agents: Antacids, Sucralfate, Metal Cations, Multivitamins

Levofloxacin Injection

Levofloxacin Injection should not be co-administered with any solution containing multivalent cations, e.g., magnesium, through the same intravenous line [see Dosage and Administration (2.6)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

Levofloxacin Injection

Caution: Rapid or bolus intravenous infusion of levofloxacin has been associated with hypotension and must be avoided. Levofloxacin Injection should be infused intravenously slowly over a period of not less than 60 or 90 minutes, depending on the dosage. Levofloxacin Injection should be administered only by intravenous infusion. It is not for intramuscular, intrathecal, intraperitoneal, or subcutaneous administration.

Hydration for Patients Receiving Levofloxacin Injection

Adequate hydration of patients receiving intravenous levofloxacin should be maintained to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria and cylindruria have been reported with quinolones [see Adverse Reactions (6.1) and Patient Counseling Information (17.2)].

2.6 Preparation of Intravenous Product

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Because only limited data are available on the compatibility of Levofloxacin Injection with other intravenous substances, additives or other medications should not be added to Levofloxacin Injection Premix in Single-Use Flexible Containers, or infused simultaneously through the same intravenous line. If the same intravenous line is used for sequential infusion of several different drugs, the line should be flushed before and after infusion of Levofloxacin Injection with an infusion solution compatible with Levofloxacin Injection and with any other drug(s) administered via this common line.

Levofloxacin Injection Premix in Single-Use Flexible Containers (5 mg/mL)

Levofloxacin Injection is supplied in flexible containers within a foil overwrap. These contain a premixed, ready to use levofloxacin solution in 5% dextrose (D5W) for single-use. The 100 mL premixed flexible containers contain either 250 mg/50 mL or 500 mg/100 mL of levofloxacin solution. The 150 mL flexible container contains 750 mg/150 mL of levofloxacin solution. The concentration of each container is 5 mg/mL. No further dilution of these preparations is necessary. Because the premix flexible containers are for single-use only, any unused portion should be discarded.

Instructions for the Use of Levofloxacin Injection Premix in Flexible Containers:
1. Tear outer wrap at the notch and remove solution container. 2. Check the container for minute leaks by squeezing the inner bag firmly. If leaks are found, or if the seal is not intact, discard the solution, as the sterility may be compromised. 3. Do not use if the solution is cloudy or a precipitate is present. 4. Use sterile equipment. 5. WARNING: Do not use flexible containers in series connections. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawn from the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is complete.
Preparation for Administration:
1. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 2. Remove cover from port at bottom of container. 3. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 4. Suspend container from hanger. 5. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber during infusion of Levofloxacin Injection Premix in Flexible Containers. 6. Open flow control clamp to expel air from set. Close clamp. 7. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
Athletes Foot

Athletes Foot

2.1 Dosing Guidelines
• Dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection dosing should be individualized and titrated to desired clinical response. • Dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection is not indicated for infusions lasting longer than 24 hours. • Dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection should be administered using a controlled infusion device.
2.2 Dosage Information
Table 1: Dosage Information
INDICATION

DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION

Initiation of Intensive Care Unit Sedation

For adult patients: a loading infusion of one mcg/kg over 10 minutes.

For adult patients being converted from alternate sedative therapy: a loading dose may not be required [see Dosage and Administration (2.2)].

For patients over 65 years of age: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic-function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Maintenance of Intensive Care Unit Sedation

For adult patients: a maintenance infusion of 0.2 to 0.7 mcg/kg/hour. The rate of the maintenance infusion should be adjusted to achieve the desired level of sedation.

For patients over 65 years of age: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Initiation of Procedural Sedation

For adult patients: a loading infusion of one mcg/kg over 10 minutes. For less invasive procedures such as ophthalmic surgery, a loading infusion of 0.5 mcg/kg given over 10 minutes may be suitable.

For awake fiberoptic intubation in adult patients: a loading infusion of one mcg/kg over 10 minutes.

For patients over 65 years of age: a loading infusion of 0.5 mcg/kg over 10 minutes [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Maintenance of Procedural Sedation

For adult patients: the maintenance infusion is generally initiated at 0.6 mcg/kg/hour and titrated to achieve desired clinical effect with doses ranging from 0.2 to 1 mcg/kg/hour. The rate of the maintenance infusion should be adjusted to achieve the targeted level of sedation.

For awake fiberoptic intubation in adult patients: a maintenance infusion of 0.7 mcg/kg/hour is recommended until the endotracheal tube is secured.

For patients over 65 years of age: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

For adult patients with impaired hepatic function: a dose reduction should be considered [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment

Due to possible pharmacodynamic interactions, a reduction in dosage of dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection or other concomitant anesthetics, sedatives, hypnotics or opioids may be required when co-administered [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

Dosage reductions may need to be considered for adult patients with hepatic impairment, and geriatric patients [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7), Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Preparation of Solution

Strict aseptic technique must always be maintained during handling of dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection, 200 mcg/2 mL (100 mcg/mL)

Dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection must be diluted with 0.9% sodium chloride injection to achieve required concentration (4 mcg/mL) prior to administration. Preparation of solutions is the same, whether for the loading dose or maintenance infusion.

To prepare the infusion, withdraw 2 mL of dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection, and add to 48 mL of 0.9% sodium chloride injection to a total of 50 mL. Shake gently to mix well.

2.5 Administration with Other Fluids

Dexmedetomidine infusion should not be co-administered through the same intravenous catheter with blood or plasma because physical compatibility has not been established.

Dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection has been shown to be incompatible when administered with the following drugs: amphotericin B, diazepam.

Dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection has been shown to be compatible when administered with the following intravenous fluids:
• 0.9% sodium chloride in water • 5% dextrose in water • 20% mannitol • Lactated Ringer’s solution • 100 mg/mL magnesium sulfate solution • 0.3% potassium chloride solution
2.6 Compatibility with Natural Rubber

Compatibility studies have demonstrated the potential for absorption of dexmedetomidine to some types of natural rubber. Although dexmedetomidine hydrochloride injection is dosed to effect, it is advisable to use administration components made with synthetic or coated natural rubber gaskets.
Clindamycin In 5 Percen...

Clindamycin In 5 Percent Dextrose

If diarrhea occurs during therapy, this antibiotic should be discontinued (see WARNING box).

Adults: Parenteral (IV Administration): Serious infections due to aerobic gram-positive cocci and the more susceptible anaerobes (NOT generally including Bacteroidesfragilis, Peptococcus species and Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens):

600 to 1200 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

More severe infections, particularly those due to proven or suspectedBacteroidesfragilis, Peptococcus species, or Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens:

1200 to 2700 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

For more serious infections, these doses may have to be increased. In life-threatening situations due to either aerobes or anaerobes these doses may be increased. Doses of as much as 4800 mg daily have been given intravenously to adults. See Infusion Rates section below.

Alternatively, drug may be administered in the form of a single rapid infusion of the first dose followed by continuous IV infusion as follows:
To Maintain Serum Clindamycin Levels Rapid Infusion Rate Maintenance Infusion Rate
Above 4 mcg/mL

10 mg/min for 30 min

0.75 mg/min

Above 5 mcg/mL

15 mg/min for 30 min

1 mg/min

Above 6 mcg/mL

20 mg/min for 30 min

1.25 mg/min

Neonates (less than 1 month):

15 to 20 mg/kg/day in 3 to 4 equal doses. The lower dosage may be adequate for small prematures.

Pediatric patients 1 month of age to 16 years: Parenteral (IV) administration: 20 to 40 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 equal doses. The higher doses would be used for more severe infections. As an alternative to dosing on a body weight basis, pediatric patients may be dosed on the basis of square meters body surface: 350 mg/m2/day for serious infections and 450 mg/m2/day for more severe infections.

Parenteral therapy may be changed to oral clindamycin palmitate hydrochloride powder for oral solution or clindamycin hydrochloride capsule when the condition warrants and at the discretion of the physician.

In cases of β-hemolytic streptococcal infections, treatment should be continued for at least 10 days.

Infusion Rates

Infusion rates for clindamycin in 5% dextrose injection should not exceed 30 mg per minute. The usual infusion rates are as follows:
Dose Strength Time
300 mg/50 mL

6 mg/mL

10 min

600 mg/50 mL

12 mg/mL

20 min

900 mg/50 mL

18 mg/mL

30 min

Administration of more than 1200 mg in a single 1-hour infusion is not recommended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

DIRECTIONS FOR USE

Clindamycin in 5% dextrose injection in Cryovac Plastic Container

Premixed clindamycin in 5% dextrose injection is for intravenous administration using sterile equipment. Check for minute leaks prior to use by squeezing bag firmly. If leaks are found, discard solution as sterility may be impaired. Do not add supplementary medication. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use unless solution is clear and seal is intact.

Caution: Do not use plastic containers in series connections. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawn from the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is complete.

Preparation for Administration:
1. Suspend container from eyelet support. 2. Remove protector from outlet port at bottom of container. 3. Attach administration set. Refer to complete directions accompanying set.
Rizatriptan Benzoate

Rizatriptan Benzoate

2.1 Dosing Information in Adults

The recommended starting dose of rizatriptan benzoate tablets are either 5 mg or 10 mg for the acute treatment of migraines in adults. The 10 mg dose may provide a greater effect than the 5 mg dose, but may have a greater risk of adverse reactions [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

Redosing in Adults

Although the effectiveness of a second dose or subsequent doses has not been established in placebo-controlled trials, if the migraine headache returns, a second dose may be administered 2 hours after the first dose. The maximum daily dose should not exceed 30 mg in any 24-hour period. The safety of treating, on average, more than four headaches in a 30-day period has not been established.

2.2 Dosing Information in Pediatric Patients (Age 6 to 17 Years)

Information related to usage of rizatriptan benzoate in pediatric patients (6 to 17 years old) is approved for Merck & Co., Inc.’s Rizatriptan Benzoate Tablets. However, due to Merck & Co., Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric patient (6 to 17 years old) usage information.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment for Patients on Propranolol

Adult Patients

In adult patients taking propranolol, only the 5 mg dose of rizatriptan benzoate tablets are recommended, up to a maximum of 3 doses in any 24-hour period (15 mg) [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

Pediatric Patients

Dosage adjustment information of rizatriptan benzoate in pediatric patients (6 to 17 years old) taking propranolol is approved for Merck & Co., Inc.’s Rizatriptan Benzoate Tablets. However, due to Merck & Co., Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that dosage adjustment information.
Valacyclovir Hydrochlor...

Valacyclovir Hydrochloride

• Valacyclovir tablets, USP may be given without regard to meals. • Valacyclovir oral suspension (25 mg/mL or 50 mg/mL) may be prepared extemporaneously from 500 mg valacyclovir tablets, USP for use in pediatric patients for whom a solid dosage form is not appropriate [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.3) ].
2.1 Adult Dosing Recommendations

Cold Sores (Herpes Labialis)

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets, USP for treatment of cold sores is 2 grams twice daily for 1 day taken 12 hours apart. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest symptom of a cold sore (e.g., tingling, itching, or burning).

Genital Herpes

Initial Episode

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets, USP for treatment of initial genital herpes is 1 gram twice daily for 10 days. Therapy was most effective when administered within 48 hours of the onset of signs and symptoms.

Recurrent Episodes

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets, USP for treatment of recurrent genital herpes is 500 mg twice daily for 3 days. Initiate treatment at the first sign or symptom of an episode.

Suppressive Therapy

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets, USP for chronic suppressive therapy of recurrent genital herpes is 1 gram once daily in patients with normal immune function. In patients with a history of 9 or fewer recurrences per year, an alternative dose is 500 mg once daily.

In HIV-infected patients with a CD4+ cell count ≥100 cells/mm3, the recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets, USP for chronic suppressive therapy of recurrent genital herpes is 500 mg twice daily.

Reduction of Transmission

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets, USP for reduction of transmission of genital herpes in patients with a history of 9 or fewer recurrences per year is 500 mg once daily for the source partner.

Herpes Zoster

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets, USP for treatment of herpes zoster is 1 gram 3 times daily for 7 days. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom of herpes zoster and is most effective when started within 48 hours of the onset of rash.

2.2 Pediatric Dosing Recommendations

Cold Sores (Herpes Labialis)

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets,USP for the treatment of cold sores in pediatric patients ≥12 years of age is 2 grams twice daily for 1 day taken 12 hours apart. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest symptom of a cold sore (e.g., tingling, itching, or burning).

Chickenpox

The recommended dosage of valacyclovir tablets, USP for treatment of chickenpox in immunocompetent pediatric patients 2 to <18 years of age is 20 mg/kg administered 3 times daily for 5 days. The total dose should not exceed 1 gram 3 times daily. Therapy should be initiated at the earliest sign or symptom [seeUSE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.4), CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3), CLINICAL STUDIES (14.4)].

2.3 Extemporaneous Preparation of Oral Suspension

Ingredients and Preparation per USP-NF

Valacyclovir tablets, USP 500 mg, cherry flavor, and Suspension Structured Vehicle USP-NF (SSV). Valacyclovir oral suspension (25 mg/mL or 50 mg/mL) should be prepared in lots of 100 mL.

Prepare Suspension at Time of Dispensing as Follows
• Prepare SSV according to the USP-NF. • Using a pestle and mortar, grind the required number of valacyclovir 500 mg tablets until a fine powder is produced (5 valacyclovir tablets, USP for 25 mg/mL suspension; 10 valacyclovir tablets, USP for 50 mg/mL suspension. • Gradually add approximately 5 mL aliquots of SSV to the mortar and triturate the powder until a paste has been produced. Ensure that the powder has been adequately wetted. • Continue to add approximately 5 mL aliquots of SSV to the mortar, mixing thoroughly between additions, until a concentrated suspension is produced, to a minimum total quantity of 20 mL SSV and a maximum total quantity of 40 mL SSV for both the 25 mg/mL and 50 mg/mL suspensions. • Transfer the mixture to a suitable 100 mL measuring flask. • Transfer the cherry flavor* to the mortar and dissolve in approximately 5 mL of SSV. Once dissolved, add to the measuring flask. • Rinse the mortar at least 3 times with approximately 5 mL aliquots of SSV, transferring the rinsing to the measuring flask between additions. • Make the suspension to volume (100 mL) with SSV and shake thoroughly to mix. • Transfer the suspension to an amber glass medicine bottle with a child-resistant closure. • The prepared suspension should be labeled with the following information “Shake well before using. Store suspension between 2º to 8ºC (36º to 46ºF) in a refrigerator. Discard after 28 days.”
*The amount of cherry flavor added is as instructed by the suppliers of the cherry flavor.

2.4 Patients With Renal Impairment

Dosage recommendations for adult patients with reduced renal function are provided in Table 1 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5 , 8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Data are not available for the use of valacyclovir tablets, USP in pediatric patients with a creatinine clearance <50 mL/min/1.73 m2.

Table 1.Valacyclovir Tablets, USP Dosage Recommendations for Adults With Renal Impairment

Indications

Normal Dosage Regimen (Creatinine Clearance ≥50 mL/min)

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

30 to 49

10 to 29

<10

Cold sores (Herpes labialis)

Do not exceed 1 day of treatment.

Two 2 gram doses taken 12 hours apart

Two 1 gram doses taken 12 hours apart

Two 500 mg doses taken 12 hours apart

500 mg single dose

Genital herpes:

Initial episode

1 gram every 12 hours

no reduction

1 gram every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours

Genital herpes:

Recurrent episode

500 mg every 12 hours

no reduction

500 mg every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours

Genital herpes:
Suppressive therapy Immunocompetent patients
1 gram every 24 hours

no reduction

500 mg every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours
Alternate dose for immunocompetent patients with ≤9 recurrences/ year
500 mg every 24 hours

no reduction

500 mg every 48 hours

500 mg every 48 hours
HIV-infected patients
500 mg every 12 hours

no reduction

500 mg every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours

Herpes zoster

1 gram every 8 hours

1 gram every 12 hours

1 gram every 24 hours

500 mg every 24 hours

Hemodialysis

Patients requiring hemodialysis should receive the recommended dose of valacyclovir tablets, USP after hemodialysis. During hemodialysis, the half-life of acyclovir after administration of valacyclovir tablets, USP is approximately 4 hours. About one third of acyclovir in the body is removed by dialysis during a 4-hour hemodialysis session.

Peritoneal Dialysis

There is no information specific to administration of valacyclovir tablets, USP in patients receiving peritoneal dialysis. The effect of chronic ambulatory peritoneal dialysis (CAPD) and continuous arteriovenous hemofiltration/dialysis (CAVHD) on acyclovir pharmacokinetics has been studied. The removal of acyclovir after CAPD and CAVHD is less pronounced than with hemodialysis, and the pharmacokinetic parameters closely resemble those observed in patients with end-stage renal disease (ESRD) not receiving hemodialysis. Therefore, supplemental doses of valacyclovir tablets, USP should not be required following CAPD or CAVHD.
Cisatracurium Besylate

Cisatracurium Besylate

CISATRACURIUM BESYLATE INJECTION SHOULD ONLY BE ADMINISTERED INTRAVENOUSLY.

The dosage information provided below is intended as a guide only. Doses of cisatracuriumbesylate injection should be individualized (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY- Individualization of Dosages). The use of a peripheral nerve stimulator will permit the most advantageous use of cisatracuriumbesylate injection, minimize the possibility of overdosage or underdosage, and assist in the evaluation of recovery.

Adults

Initial Doses

One of two intubating doses of cisatracurium besylate may be chosen, based on the desired time to tracheal intubation and the anticipated length of surgery. In addition to the dose of neuromuscular blocking agent, the presence of co-induction agents (e.g., fentanyl and midazolam) and the depth of anesthesia are factors that can influence intubation conditions. Doses of 0.15 (3 × ED95) and 0.20 (4 × ED95) mg/kg cisatracurium besylate, as components of a propofol/nitrous oxide/oxygen induction-intubation technique, may produce generally GOOD or EXCELLENT conditions for intubation in 2 and 1.5 minutes, respectively. Similar intubation conditions may be expected when these doses of cisatracurium besylate are administered as components of a thiopental/nitrous oxide/oxygen induction-intubation technique. In two intubation studies using thiopental or propofol and midazolam and fentanyl as co-induction agents, EXCELLENT intubation conditions were most frequently achieved with the 0.2 mg/kg compared to 0.15 mg/kg dose of cisatracurium besylate injection. The clinically effective durations of action for 0.15 and 0.20 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection during propofol anesthesia are 55 minutes (range: 44 to 74 minutes) and 61 minutes (range: 41 to 81 minutes), respectively. Lower doses may result in a longer time for the development of satisfactory intubation conditions. Doses up to 8 × ED95 cisatracurium besylate injection have been safely administered to healthy adult patients and patients with serious cardiovascular disease. These larger doses are associated with longer clinically effective durations of action (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Because slower times to onset of complete neuromuscular block were observed in elderly patients and patients with renal dysfunction, extending the interval between administration of cisatracurium besylate injection and the intubation attempt for these patients may be required to achieve adequate intubation conditions.

A dose of 0.03 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection is recommended for maintenance of neuromuscular block during prolonged surgical procedures. Maintenance doses of 0.03 mg/kg each sustain neuromuscular block for approximately 20 minutes. Maintenance dosing is generally required 40 to 50 minutes following an initial dose of 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate and 50 to 60 minutes following an initial dose of 0.20 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate, but the need for maintenance doses should be determined by clinical criteria. For shorter or longer durations of action, smaller or larger maintenance doses may be administered.

Isoflurane or enflurane administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen to achieve 1.25 MAC (Minimum Alveolar Concentration) may prolong the clinically effective duration of action of initial and maintenance doses. The magnitude of these effects may depend on the duration of administration of the volatile agents. Fifteen to 30 minutes of exposure to 1.25 MAC isoflurane or enflurane had minimal effects on the duration of action of initial doses of cisatracurium besylate injection and therefore, no adjustment to the initial dose should be necessary when cisatracurium besylate injection is administered shortly after initiation of volatile agents. In long surgical procedures during enflurane or isoflurane anesthesia, less frequent maintenance dosing or lower maintenance doses of cisatracurium besylate injection may be necessary. No adjustments to the initial dose of cisatracurium besylate injection are required when used in patients receiving propofol anesthesia.

Children

Initial Doses

The recommended dose of cisatracurium besylate injection for children 2 to 12 years of age is 0.10-0.15 mg/kg administered over 5 to 10 seconds during either halothane or opioid anesthesia. When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.10 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection produces maximum neuromuscular block in an average of 2.8 minutes (range: 1.8 to 6.7 minutes) and clinically effective block for 28 minutes (range: 21 to 38 minutes). When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate produces maximum neuromuscular block in about 3 minutes (range: 1.5 to 8 minutes) and clinically effective block (time to 25% recovery) for 36 minutes (range: 29 to 46 minutes).

Infants

Initial Doses

The recommended dose of cisatracurium besylate injection for intubation of infants 1 month to 23 months is 0.15 mg/kg administered over 5 to 10 seconds during either halothane or opioid anesthesia. When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate produces maximum neuromuscular block in about 2 minutes (range: 1.3 to 3.4 minutes) and clinically effective block (time to 25% recovery) for about 43 minutes (range: 34 to 58 minutes).

Use by Continuous Infusion

Infusion in the Operating Room (OR)

After administration of an initial bolus dose of cisatracurium besylate, a diluted solution of cisatracurium besylate injection can be administered by continuous infusion to adults and children aged 2 or more years for maintenance of neuromuscular block during extended surgical procedures. Infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection should be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient's response as determined by peripheral nerve stimulation. Accurate dosing is best achieved using a precision infusion device.

Infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection should be initiated only after early evidence of spontaneous recovery from the initial bolus dose. An initial infusion rate of 3 mcg/kg/min may be required to rapidly counteract the spontaneous recovery of neuromuscular function. Thereafter, a rate of 1 to 2 mcg/kg/min should be adequate to maintain continuous neuromuscular block in the range of 89% to 99% in most pediatric and adult patients under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia.

Reduction of the infusion rate by up to 30% to 40% should be considered when cisatracurium besylate injection is administered during stable isoflurane or enflurane anesthesia (administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen at the 1.25 MAC level). Greater reductions in the infusion rate of cisatracurium besylate injection may be required with longer durations of administration of isoflurane or enflurane.

The rate of infusion of atracurium required to maintain adequate surgical relaxation in patients undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery with induced hypothermia (25° to 28°C) is approximately half the rate required during normothermia. Based on the structural similarity between cisatracurium besylate injection and atracurium, a similar effect on the infusion rate of cisatracurium besylate injection may be expected.

Spontaneous recovery from neuromuscular block following discontinuation of infusion of cisatracurium besylate may be expected to proceed at a rate comparable to that following administration of a single bolus dose.

Infusion in the Intensive Care Unit (ICU)

The principles for infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection in the OR are also applicable to use in the ICU. An infusion rate of approximately 3 mcg/kg/min (range: 0.5 to 10.2 mcg/kg/min) should provide adequate neuromuscular block in adult patients in the ICU. There may be wide interpatient variability in dosage requirements and these may increase or decrease with time (see PRECAUTIONS - Long-Term Use in the Intensive Care Unit (ICU)). Following recovery from neuromuscular block, readministration of a bolus dose may be necessary to quickly re-establish neuromuscular block prior to reinstitution of the infusion.

Infusion Rate Tables

The amount of infusion solution required per minute will depend upon the concentration of cisatracurium besylate in the infusion solution, the desired dose of cisatracurium besylate, and the patient's weight. The contribution of the infusion solution to the fluid requirements of the patient also must be considered. Tables 10 and 11 provide guidelines for delivery, in mL/hr (equivalent to microdrops/minute when 60 microdrops = 1 mL), of cisatracurium besylate solutions in concentrations of 0.1 mg/mL (10 mg/100 mL) or 0.4 mg/mL (40 mg/100 mL).
Table 10. Infusion Rates of Cisatracurium Besylate for Maintenance of Neuromuscular Block During Opioid/Nitrous Oxide/Oxygen Anesthesia for a Concentration of 0.1 mg/mL Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)
1

1.5

2

3

5

Patient Weight (kg)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

6

9

12

18

30

45

27

41

54

81

135

70

42

63

84

126

210

100

60

90

120

180

300
Table 11. Infusion Rates of Cisatracurium Besylate for Maintenance of Neuromuscular Block During Opioid/Nitrous Oxide/Oxygen Anesthesia for a Concentration of 0.4 mg/mL Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)
1

1.5

2

3

5

Patient Weight (kg)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

1.5

2.3

3

4.5

7.5

45

6.8

10.1

13.5

20.3

33.8

70

10.5

15.8

21

31.5

52.5

100

15

22.5

30

45

75

Cisatracurium Besylate Injection Compatibility and Admixtures

Y-site Administration

Cisatracurium besylate injection is acidic (pH = 3.25 to 3.65) and may not be compatible with alkaline solution having a pH greater than 8.5 (e.g., barbiturate solutions).

Studies have shown that cisatracurium besylate injection is compatible with:
• 5% Dextrose injection, USP • 0.9% Sodium chloride injection, USP • 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium chloride injection, USP • SUFENTA ® (sufentanil citrate) injection, diluted as directed • ALFENTA ® (alfentanil hydrochloride) injection, diluted as directed • SUBLIMAZE ® (fentanyl citrate) injection, diluted as directed • VERSED ® (midazolam hydrochloride) injection, diluted as directed • Droperidol injection, diluted as directed
Cisatracurium besylate injection is not compatible with DIPRIVAN® (propofol) injection or TORADOL® (ketorolac) injection for Y-site administration. Studies of other parenteral products have not been conducted.

Dilution Stability

Cisatracurium besylate injection diluted in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP; 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; or 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP to 0.1 mg/mL may be stored either under refrigeration or at room temperature for 24 hours without significant loss of potency. Dilutions to 0.1 mg/mL or 0.2 mg/mL in 5% Dextrose and Lactated Ringer's Injection may be stored under refrigeration for 24 hours.

Cisatracurium besylate injection should not be diluted in Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP due to chemical instability.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are not clear, or contain visible particulates, should not be used. Cisatracurium besylate injection is a colorless to slightly yellow or greenish-yellow solution.
Atenolol

Atenolol

Hypertension

The initial dose of atenolol is 50 mg given as one tablet a day either alone or added to diuretic therapy. The full effect of this dose will usually be seen within one to two weeks. If an optimal response is not achieved, the dosage should be increased to atenolol 100 mg given as one tablet a day. Increasing the dosage beyond 100 mg a day is unlikely to produce any further benefit.

Atenolol may be used alone or concomitantly with other antihypertensive agents including thiazide-type diuretics, hydralazine, prazosin, and alpha-methyldopa.

Angina Pectoris

The initial dose of atenolol is 50 mg given as one tablet a day. If an optimal response is not achieved within one week, the dosage should be increased to atenolol 100 mg given as one tablet a day. Some patients may require a dosage of 200 mg once a day for optimal effect.

Twenty-four hour control with once daily dosing is achieved by giving doses larger than necessary to achieve an immediate maximum effect. The maximum early effect on exercise tolerance occurs with doses of 50 to 100 mg, but at these doses the effect at 24 hours is attenuated, averaging about 50% to 75% of that observed with once a day oral doses of 200 mg.

Acute Myocardial Infarction

In patients with definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, treatment with atenolol I.V. injection should be initiated as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital and after eligibility is established. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized. Treatment should begin with the intravenous administration of 5 mg atenolol over 5 minutes followed by another 5 mg intravenous injection 10 minutes later. Atenolol I.V. injection should be administered under carefully controlled conditions including monitoring of blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram. Dilutions of atenolol I.V. injection in Dextrose Injection USP, Sodium Chloride Injection USP, or Sodium Chloride and Dextrose Injection may be used. These admixtures are stable for 48 hours if they are not used immediately.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (10 mg), atenolol tablets 50 mg should be initiated 10 minutes after the last intravenous dose followed by another 50 mg oral dose 12 hours later. Thereafter, atenolol can be given orally either 100 mg once daily or 50 mg twice a day for a further 6 to 9 days or until discharge from the hospital. If bradycardia or hypotension requiring treatment or any other untoward effects occur, atenolol should be discontinued. (See full prescribing information prior to initiating therapy with atenolol tablets).

Data from other beta blocker trials suggest that if there is any question concerning the use of IV beta blocker or clinical estimate that there is a contraindication, the IV beta blocker may be eliminated and patients fulfilling the safety criteria may be given atenolol tablets 50 mg twice daily or 100 mg once a day for at least seven days (if the IV dosing is excluded).

Although the demonstration of efficacy of atenolol is based entirely on data from the first seven postinfarction days, data from other beta blocker trials suggest that treatment with beta blockers that are effective in the post-infarction setting may be continued for one to three years if there are no contraindications.

Atenolol is an additional treatment to standard coronary care unit therapy.

Elderly Patients or Patients with Renal Impairment

Atenolol is excreted by the kidneys; consequently dosage should be adjusted in cases of severe impairment of renal function. In general, dose selection for an elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy. Evaluation of patients with hypertension or myocardial infarction should always include assessment of renal function. Atenolol excretion would be expected to decrease with advancing age.

No significant accumulation of atenolol occurs until creatinine clearance falls below 35 mL/min/1.73m2. Accumulation of atenolol and prolongation of its half-life were studied in subjects with creatinine clearance between 5 and 105 mL/min. Peak plasma levels were significantly increased in subjects with creatinine clearances below 30 mL/min.

The following maximum oral dosages are recommended for elderly, renally-impaired patients and for patients with renal impairment due to other causes:

Creatinine Clearance

(mL/min/1.73m2)

Atenolol

Elimination

Half-Life (h)

Maximum Dosage

15-35

16-27

50 mg daily

< 15

> 27

25 mg daily

Some renally-impaired or elderly patients being treated for hypertension may require a lower starting dose of atenolol: 25 mg given as one tablet a day. If this 25 mg dose is used, assessment of efficacy must be made carefully. This should include measurement of blood pressure just prior to the next dose (“trough” blood pressure) to ensure that the treatment effect is present for a full 24 hours.

Although a similar dosage reduction may be considered for elderly and/or renally-impaired patients being treated for indications other than hypertension, data are not available for these patient populations.

Patients on hemodialysis should be given 25 mg or 50 mg after each dialysis; this should be done under hospital supervision as marked falls in blood pressure can occur.

Cessation of Therapy in Patients with Angina Pectoris

If withdrawal of atenolol therapy is planned, it should be achieved gradually and patients should be carefully observed and advised to limit physical activity to a minimum.
Cisatracurium Besylate

Cisatracurium Besylate

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use)

CISATRACURIUM BESYLATE INJECTION SHOULD ONLY BE ADMINISTERED INTRAVENOUSLY.

The dosage information provided below is intended as a guide only. Doses of cisatracuriumbesylate injection should be individualized (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY- Individualization of Dosages). The use of a peripheral nerve stimulator will permit the most advantageous use of cisatracuriumbesylate injection, minimize the possibility of overdosage or underdosage, and assist in the evaluation of recovery.

Adults

Initial Doses

One of two intubating doses of cisatracurium besylate may be chosen, based on the desired time to tracheal intubation and the anticipated length of surgery. In addition to the dose of neuromuscular blocking agent, the presence of co-induction agents (e.g., fentanyl and midazolam) and the depth of anesthesia are factors that can influence intubation conditions. Doses of 0.15 (3 × ED95) and 0.20 (4 × ED95) mg/kg cisatracurium besylate, as components of a propofol/nitrous oxide/oxygen induction-intubation technique, may produce generally GOOD or EXCELLENT conditions for intubation in 2 and 1.5 minutes, respectively. Similar intubation conditions may be expected when these doses of cisatracurium besylate injection are administered as components of a thiopental/nitrous oxide/oxygen induction-intubation technique. In two intubation studies using thiopental or propofol and midazolam and fentanyl as co-induction agents, EXCELLENT intubation conditions were most frequently achieved with the 0.2 mg/kg compared to 0.15 mg/kg dose of cisatracurium besylate injection. The clinically effective durations of action for 0.15 and 0.20 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection during propofol anesthesia are 55 minutes (range: 44 to 74 minutes) and 61 minutes (range: 41 to 81 minutes), respectively. Lower doses may result in a longer time for the development of satisfactory intubation conditions. Doses up to 8 × ED95 cisatracurium besylate injection have been safely administered to healthy adult patients and patients with serious cardiovascular disease. These larger doses are associated with longer clinically effective durations of action (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Because slower times to onset of complete neuromuscular block were observed in elderly patients and patients with renal dysfunction, extending the interval between administration of cisatracurium besylate injection and the intubation attempt for these patients may be required to achieve adequate intubation conditions.

A dose of 0.03 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection is recommended for maintenance of neuromuscular block during prolonged surgical procedures. Maintenance doses of 0.03 mg/kg each sustain neuromuscular block for approximately 20 minutes. Maintenance dosing is generally required 40 to 50 minutes following an initial dose of 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection and 50 to 60 minutes following an initial dose of 0.20 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection, but the need for maintenance doses should be determined by clinical criteria. For shorter or longer durations of action, smaller or larger maintenance doses may be administered.

Isoflurane or enflurane administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen to achieve 1.25 MAC (Minimum Alveolar Concentration) may prolong the clinically effective duration of action of initial and maintenance doses. The magnitude of these effects may depend on the duration of administration of the volatile agents. Fifteen to 30 minutes of exposure to 1.25 MAC isoflurane or enflurane had minimal effects on the duration of action of initial doses of cisatracurium besylate injection and therefore, no adjustment to the initial dose should be necessary when cisatracurium besylate injection is administered shortly after initiation of volatile agents. In long surgical procedures during enflurane or isoflurane anesthesia, less frequent maintenance dosing or lower maintenance doses of cisatracurium besylate injection may be necessary. No adjustments to the initial dose of cisatracurium besylate injection are required when used in patients receiving propofol anesthesia.

Children

Initial Doses

The recommended dose of cisatracurium besylate injection for children 2 to 12 years of age is 0.10 to 0.15 mg/kg administered over 5 to 10 seconds during either halothane or opioid anesthesia. When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.10 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection produces maximum neuromuscular block in an average of 2.8 minutes (range: 1.8 to 6.7 minutes) and clinically effective block for 28 minutes (range: 21 to 38 minutes). When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate produces maximum neuromuscular block in about 3 minutes (range: 1.5 to 8 minutes) and clinically effective block (time to 25% recovery) for 36 minutes (range: 29 to 46 minutes).

Infants

Initial Doses

The recommended dose of cisatracurium besylate injection for intubation of infants 1 month to 23 months is 0.15 mg/kg administered over 5 to 10 seconds during either halothane or opioid anesthesia. When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate produces maximum neuromuscular block in about 2 minutes (range: 1.3 to 3.4 minutes) and clinically effective block (time to 25% recovery) for about 43 minutes (range: 34 to 58 minutes).

Use by Continuous Infusion

Infusion in the Operating Room (OR)

After administration of an initial bolus dose of cisatracurium besylate injection, a diluted solution of cisatracurium besylate can be administered by continuous infusion to adults and children aged 2 or more years for maintenance of neuromuscular block during extended surgical procedures. Infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection should be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient's response as determined by peripheral nerve stimulation. Accurate dosing is best achieved using a precision infusion device.

Infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection should be initiated only after early evidence of spontaneous recovery from the initial bolus dose. An initial infusion rate of 3 mcg/kg/min may be required to rapidly counteract the spontaneous recovery of neuromuscular function. Thereafter, a rate of 1 to 2 mcg/kg/min should be adequate to maintain continuous neuromuscular block in the range of 89% to 99% in most pediatric and adult patients under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia.

Reduction of the infusion rate by up to 30% to 40% should be considered when cisatracurium besylate injection is administered during stable isoflurane or enflurane anesthesia (administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen at the 1.25 MAC level). Greater reductions in the infusion rate of cisatracurium besylate injection may be required with longer durations of administration of isoflurane or enflurane.

The rate of infusion of atracurium required to maintain adequate surgical relaxation in patients undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery with induced hypothermia (25° to 28°C) is approximately half the rate required during normothermia. Based on the structural similarity between cisatracurium besylate injection and atracurium, a similar effect on the infusion rate of cisatracurium besylate injection may be expected.

Spontaneous recovery from neuromuscular block following discontinuation of infusion of cisatracurium besylate may be expected to proceed at a rate comparable to that following administration of a single bolus dose.

Infusion in the Intensive Care Unit (ICU)

The principles for infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection in the OR are also applicable to use in the ICU. An infusion rate of approximately 3 mcg/kg/min (range: 0.5 to 10.2 mcg/kg/min) should provide adequate neuromuscular block in adult patients in the ICU. There may be wide interpatient variability in dosage requirements and these may increase or decrease with time (see PRECAUTIONS - Long-Term Use in the Intensive Care Unit (ICU)). Following recovery from neuromuscular block, readministration of a bolus dose may be necessary to quickly re-establish neuromuscular block prior to reinstitution of the infusion.

Infusion Rate Tables

The amount of infusion solution required per minute will depend upon the concentration of cisatracurium besylate in the infusion solution, the desired dose of cisatracurium besylate, and the patient's weight. The contribution of the infusion solution to the fluid requirements of the patient also must be considered. Tables 10 and 11 provide guidelines for delivery, in mL/hr (equivalent to microdrops/minute when 60 microdrops = 1 mL), of cisatracurium besylate solutions in concentrations of 0.1 mg/mL (10 mg/100 mL) or 0.4 mg/mL (40 mg/100 mL).
Table 10. Infusion Rates of Cisatracurium Besylate for Maintenance of Neuromuscular Block During Opioid/Nitrous Oxide/Oxygen Anesthesia for a Concentration of 0.1 mg/mL Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)
1

1.5

2

3

5

Patient Weight (kg)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

6

9

12

18

30

45

27

41

54

81

135

70

42

63

84

126

210

100

60

90

120

180

300
Table 11. Infusion Rates of Cisatracurium Besylate for Maintenance of Neuromuscular Block During Opioid/Nitrous Oxide/Oxygen Anesthesia for a Concentration of 0.4 mg/mL Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)
1

1.5

2

3

5

Patient Weight (kg)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

1.5

2.3

3

4.5

7.5

45

6.8

10.1

13.5

20.3

33.8

70

10.5

15.8

21

31.5

52.5

100

15

22.5

30

45

75

Cisatracurium Besylate Injection Compatibility and Admixtures

Y-site Administration

Cisatracurium besylate injection is acidic (pH = 3.25 to 3.65) and may not be compatible with alkaline solution having a pH greater than 8.5 (e.g., barbiturate solutions).

Studies have shown that cisatracurium besylate injection is compatible with:
• 5% Dextrose injection, USP • 0.9% Sodium chloride injection, USP • 5% Dextrose and 0.9% sodium chloride injection, USP • SUFENTA ® (sufentanil citrate) injection, diluted as directed • ALFENTA ® (alfentanil hydrochloride) injection, diluted as directed • SUBLIMAZE ® (fentanyl citrate) injection, diluted as directed • VERSED ® (midazolam hydrochloride) injection, diluted as directed • Droperidol injection, diluted as directed
Cisatracurium besylate injection is not compatible with DIPRIVAN® (propofol) injection or TORADOL® (ketorolac) injection for Y-site administration. Studies of other parenteral products have not been conducted.

Dilution Stability

Cisatracurium besylate injection diluted in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP; 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; or 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP to 0.1 mg/mL may be stored either under refrigeration or at room temperature for 24 hours without significant loss of potency. Dilutions to 0.1 mg/mL or 0.2 mg/mL in 5% Dextrose and Lactated Ringer's Injection may be stored under refrigeration for 24 hours.

Cisatracurium besylate injection should not be diluted in Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP due to chemical instability.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are not clear, or contain visible particulates, should not be used. Cisatracurium besylate injection is a colorless to slightly yellow or greenish-yellow solution.
Cisatracurium Besylate

Cisatracurium Besylate

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use)

CISATRACURIUM BESYLATE INJECTION SHOULD ONLY BE ADMINISTERED INTRAVENOUSLY.

The dosage information provided below is intended as a guide only. Doses of cisatracuriumbesylate injection should be individualized (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY- Individualization of Dosages). The use of a peripheral nerve stimulator will permit the most advantageous use of cisatracuriumbesylate injection, minimize the possibility of overdosage or underdosage, and assist in the evaluation of recovery.

Adults

Initial Doses

One of two intubating doses of cisatracurium besylate may be chosen, based on the desired time to tracheal intubation and the anticipated length of surgery. In addition to the dose of neuromuscular blocking agent, the presence of co-induction agents (e.g., fentanyl and midazolam) and the depth of anesthesia are factors that can influence intubation conditions. Doses of 0.15 (3 × ED95) and 0.20 (4 × ED95) mg/kg cisatracurium besylate, as components of a propofol/nitrous oxide/oxygen induction-intubation technique, may produce generally GOOD or EXCELLENT conditions for intubation in 2 and 1.5 minutes, respectively. Similar intubation conditions may be expected when these doses of cisatracurium besylate injection are administered as components of a thiopental/nitrous oxide/oxygen induction-intubation technique. In two intubation studies using thiopental or propofol and midazolam and fentanyl as co-induction agents, EXCELLENT intubation conditions were most frequently achieved with the 0.2 mg/kg compared to 0.15 mg/kg dose of cisatracurium besylate injection. The clinically effective durations of action for 0.15 and 0.20 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection during propofol anesthesia are 55 minutes (range: 44 to 74 minutes) and 61 minutes (range: 41 to 81 minutes), respectively. Lower doses may result in a longer time for the development of satisfactory intubation conditions. Doses up to 8 × ED95 cisatracurium besylate injection have been safely administered to healthy adult patients and patients with serious cardiovascular disease. These larger doses are associated with longer clinically effective durations of action (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Because slower times to onset of complete neuromuscular block were observed in elderly patients and patients with renal dysfunction, extending the interval between administration of cisatracurium besylate injection and the intubation attempt for these patients may be required to achieve adequate intubation conditions.

A dose of 0.03 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection is recommended for maintenance of neuromuscular block during prolonged surgical procedures. Maintenance doses of 0.03 mg/kg each sustain neuromuscular block for approximately 20 minutes. Maintenance dosing is generally required 40 to 50 minutes following an initial dose of 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection and 50 to 60 minutes following an initial dose of 0.20 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection, but the need for maintenance doses should be determined by clinical criteria. For shorter or longer durations of action, smaller or larger maintenance doses may be administered.

Isoflurane or enflurane administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen to achieve 1.25 MAC (Minimum Alveolar Concentration) may prolong the clinically effective duration of action of initial and maintenance doses. The magnitude of these effects may depend on the duration of administration of the volatile agents. Fifteen to 30 minutes of exposure to 1.25 MAC isoflurane or enflurane had minimal effects on the duration of action of initial doses of cisatracurium besylate injection and therefore, no adjustment to the initial dose should be necessary when cisatracurium besylate injection is administered shortly after initiation of volatile agents. In long surgical procedures during enflurane or isoflurane anesthesia, less frequent maintenance dosing or lower maintenance doses of cisatracurium besylate injection may be necessary. No adjustments to the initial dose of cisatracurium besylate injection are required when used in patients receiving propofol anesthesia.

Children

Initial Doses

The recommended dose of cisatracurium besylate injection for children 2 to 12 years of age is 0.10 to 0.15 mg/kg administered over 5 to 10 seconds during either halothane or opioid anesthesia. When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.10 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection produces maximum neuromuscular block in an average of 2.8 minutes (range: 1.8 to 6.7 minutes) and clinically effective block for 28 minutes (range: 21 to 38 minutes). When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate produces maximum neuromuscular block in about 3 minutes (range: 1.5 to 8 minutes) and clinically effective block (time to 25% recovery) for 36 minutes (range: 29 to 46 minutes).

Infants

Initial Doses

The recommended dose of cisatracurium besylate injection for intubation of infants 1 month to 23 months is 0.15 mg/kg administered over 5 to 10 seconds during either halothane or opioid anesthesia. When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate produces maximum neuromuscular block in about 2 minutes (range: 1.3 to 3.4 minutes) and clinically effective block (time to 25% recovery) for about 43 minutes (range: 34 to 58 minutes).

Use by Continuous Infusion

Infusion in the Operating Room (OR)

After administration of an initial bolus dose of cisatracurium besylate injection, a diluted solution of cisatracurium besylate can be administered by continuous infusion to adults and children aged 2 or more years for maintenance of neuromuscular block during extended surgical procedures. Infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection should be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient's response as determined by peripheral nerve stimulation. Accurate dosing is best achieved using a precision infusion device.

Infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection should be initiated only after early evidence of spontaneous recovery from the initial bolus dose. An initial infusion rate of 3 mcg/kg/min may be required to rapidly counteract the spontaneous recovery of neuromuscular function. Thereafter, a rate of 1 to 2 mcg/kg/min should be adequate to maintain continuous neuromuscular block in the range of 89% to 99% in most pediatric and adult patients under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia.

Reduction of the infusion rate by up to 30% to 40% should be considered when cisatracurium besylate injection is administered during stable isoflurane or enflurane anesthesia (administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen at the 1.25 MAC level). Greater reductions in the infusion rate of cisatracurium besylate injection may be required with longer durations of administration of isoflurane or enflurane.

The rate of infusion of atracurium required to maintain adequate surgical relaxation in patients undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery with induced hypothermia (25° to 28°C) is approximately half the rate required during normothermia. Based on the structural similarity between cisatracurium besylate injection and atracurium, a similar effect on the infusion rate of cisatracurium besylate injection may be expected.

Spontaneous recovery from neuromuscular block following discontinuation of infusion of cisatracurium besylate may be expected to proceed at a rate comparable to that following administration of a single bolus dose.

Infusion in the Intensive Care Unit (ICU)

The principles for infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection in the OR are also applicable to use in the ICU. An infusion rate of approximately 3 mcg/kg/min (range: 0.5 to 10.2 mcg/kg/min) should provide adequate neuromuscular block in adult patients in the ICU. There may be wide interpatient variability in dosage requirements and these may increase or decrease with time (see PRECAUTIONS - Long-Term Use in the Intensive Care Unit (ICU)). Following recovery from neuromuscular block, readministration of a bolus dose may be necessary to quickly re-establish neuromuscular block prior to reinstitution of the infusion.

Infusion Rate Tables

The amount of infusion solution required per minute will depend upon the concentration of cisatracurium besylate in the infusion solution, the desired dose of cisatracurium besylate, and the patient's weight. The contribution of the infusion solution to the fluid requirements of the patient also must be considered. Tables 10 and 11 provide guidelines for delivery, in mL/hr (equivalent to microdrops/minute when 60 microdrops = 1 mL), of cisatracurium besylate solutions in concentrations of 0.1 mg/mL (10 mg/100 mL) or 0.4 mg/mL (40 mg/100 mL).
Table 10. Infusion Rates of Cisatracurium Besylate for Maintenance of Neuromuscular Block During Opioid/Nitrous Oxide/Oxygen Anesthesia for a Concentration of 0.1 mg/mL Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)
1

1.5

2

3

5

Patient Weight (kg)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

6

9

12

18

30

45

27

41

54

81

135

70

42

63

84

126

210

100

60

90

120

180

300
Table 11. Infusion Rates of Cisatracurium Besylate for Maintenance of Neuromuscular Block During Opioid/Nitrous Oxide/Oxygen Anesthesia for a Concentration of 0.4 mg/mL Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)
1

1.5

2

3

5

Patient Weight (kg)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

1.5

2.3

3

4.5

7.5

45

6.8

10.1

13.5

20.3

33.8

70

10.5

15.8

21

31.5

52.5

100

15

22.5

30

45

75

Cisatracurium Besylate Injection Compatibility and Admixtures

Y-site Administration

Cisatracurium besylate injection is acidic (pH = 3.25 to 3.65) and may not be compatible with alkaline solution having a pH greater than 8.5 (e.g., barbiturate solutions).

Studies have shown that cisatracurium besylate injection is compatible with:
• 5% Dextrose injection, USP • 0.9% Sodium chloride injection, USP • 5% Dextrose and 0.9% sodium chloride injection, USP • SUFENTA ® (sufentanil citrate) injection, diluted as directed • ALFENTA ® (alfentanil hydrochloride) injection, diluted as directed • SUBLIMAZE ® (fentanyl citrate) injection, diluted as directed • VERSED ® (midazolam hydrochloride) injection, diluted as directed • Droperidol injection, diluted as directed
Cisatracurium besylate injection is not compatible with DIPRIVAN® (propofol) injection or TORADOL® (ketorolac) injection for Y-site administration. Studies of other parenteral products have not been conducted.

Dilution Stability

Cisatracurium besylate injection diluted in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP; 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; or 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP to 0.1 mg/mL may be stored either under refrigeration or at room temperature for 24 hours without significant loss of potency. Dilutions to 0.1 mg/mL or 0.2 mg/mL in 5% Dextrose and Lactated Ringer's Injection may be stored under refrigeration for 24 hours.

Cisatracurium besylate injection should not be diluted in Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP due to chemical instability.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are not clear, or contain visible particulates, should not be used. Cisatracurium besylate injection is a colorless to slightly yellow or greenish-yellow solution
Azelastine Hydrochlorid...

Azelastine Hydrochloride Solution Drops

The recommended dose is one drop instilled into each affected eye twice a day.
Ampicillin And Sulbacta...

Ampicillin And Sulbactam

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection may be administered by either the IV or the IM routes.

For IV administration, the dose can be given by slow intravenous injection over at least 10-15 minutes or can also be delivered, in greater dilutions with 50-100 mL of a compatible diluent as an intravenous infusion over 15-30 minutes.

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection may be administered by deep intramuscular injection. (See DIRECTIONS FOR USE-Preparation for Intramuscular Injection section.)

The recommended adult dosage of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection is 1.5 g (1 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 0.5 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) to 3 g (2 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 1 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) every six hours. This 1.5 to 3 g range represents the total of ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to a range of 1 g ampicillin/0.5 g sulbactam to 2 g ampicillin/1 g sulbactam. The total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day.

Pediatric Patients 1 Year of Age or Older

The recommended daily dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in pediatric patients is 300 mg per kg of body weight administered via intravenous infusion in equally divided doses every 6 hours. This 300 mg/kg/day dosage represents the total ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to 200 mg ampicillin/100 mg sulbactam per kg per day. The safety and efficacy of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection administered via intramuscular injection in pediatric patients have not been established. Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations, and the total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day. The course of intravenous therapy should not routinely exceed 14 days. In clinical trials, most children received a course of oral antimicrobials following initial treatment with intravenous Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection. (See CLINICAL STUDIES section.)

Impaired Renal Function

In patients with impairment of renal function the elimination kinetics of ampicillin and sulbactam are similarly affected, hence the ratio of one to the other will remain constant whatever the renal function. The dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam in such patients should be administered less frequently in accordance with the usual practice for ampicillin and according to the following recommendations:
TABLE 5. Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection Dosage Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Ampicillin/Sulbactam Half-Life (Hours) Recommended Ampicillin and Sulbactam Dosage
≥ 30

1

1.5-3 g q 6h-q 8h

15-29

5

1.5-3 g q 12h

5-14

9

1.5-3 g q 24h

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to convert this value into creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males

weight (kg) x (140 - age)

72 x serum creatinine

Females

0.85 x above value

COMPATIBILITY, RECONSTITUTION AND STABILITY

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection sterile powder is to be stored at 20 to 25°C (68 to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature.] prior to reconstitution.

When concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated, Ampicillin and Sulbactam and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted and administered separately, due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by any of the aminopenicillins.

DIRECTIONS FOR USE

General Dissolution Procedures

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection sterile powder for intravenous and intramuscular use may be reconstituted with any of the compatible diluents described in this insert. Solutions should be allowed to stand after dissolution to allow any foaming to dissipate in order to permit visual inspection for complete solubilization.

Preparation for Intravenous Use

Reconstitution of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, at the specified concentrations, with these diluents provide stable solutions for the time periods indicated in the following table: (After the indicated time periods, any unused portions of solutions should be discarded).
TABLE 6. Diluent Maximum Concentration (mg/mL) ampicillin and sulbactam Use Periods
Sterile Water for Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 25°C

45 (30/15)

48 hrs at 4°C

30 (20/10)

72 hrs at 4°C

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 25°C

45 (30/15)

48 hrs at 4°C

30 (20/10)

72 hrs at 4°C

5% Dextrose Injection

30 (20/10)

2 hrs at 25°C

30 (20/10)

4 hrs at 4°C

3 (2/1)

2 hrs at 25°C

Lactated Ringer's Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 25°C

45 (30/15)

24 hrs at 4°C

M/6 Sodium Lactate Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 25°C

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 4°C

5% Dextrose in 0.45% Saline

3 (2/1)

4 hrs at 25°C

15 (10/5)

4 hrs at 4°C

10% Invert Sugar

3 (2/1)

4 hrs at 25°C

30 (20/10)

3 hrs at 4°C

Initially, the vials may be reconstituted with Sterile Water for Injection to yield solutions containing 375 mg Ampicillin and Sulbactam per mL (250 mg ampicillin/125 mg sulbactam per mL ). An appropriate volume should then be immediately diluted with a suitable parenteral diluent to yield solutions containing 3 to 45 mg Ampicillin and Sulbactam per mL (2 to 30 mg ampicillin/1 to 15 mg sulbactam/per mL).

Preparation for Intramuscular Injection

1.5 g and 3 g Standard vials

Vials for intramuscular use may be reconstituted with Sterile Water for Injection USP, 0.5% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection USP or 2% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection USP. Consult the following table for recommended volumes to be added to obtain solutions containing 375 mg ampicillin and sulbactam per mL (250 mg ampicillin/ 125 mg sulbactam per mL).

Note: Use only freshly prepared solutions and administer within one hour after preparation.
Ampicillin and Sulbactam Vial Size Volume of Diluent to be Added Withdrawal Volume* * There is sufficient excess present to allow withdrawal and administration of the stated volumes.
1.5 g

3.2 mL

4 mL

3 g

6.4 mL

8 mL

Animal Pharmacology

While reversible glycogenosis was observed in laboratory animals, this phenomenon was dose- and time-dependent and is not expected to develop at the therapeutic doses and corresponding plasma levels attained during the relatively short periods of combined ampicillin/sulbactam therapy in man.
Methylprednisolone Acet...

Methylprednisolone Acetate

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use).

Because of possible physical incompatibilities, methylprednisolone acetate injectable suspension should not be diluted or mixed with other solutions.

The initial dosage of parenterally administered methylprednisolone acetate will vary from 4 to 120 mg depending on the specific disease entity being treated. However, in certain overwhelming, acute, life-threatening situations, administrations in dosages exceeding the usual dosages may be justified and may be in multiples of the oral doses.

It Should Be Emphasized that Dosage Requirements are Variable and Must Be Individualized on the Basis of the Disease Under Treatment and the Response of the Patient. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dose should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small increments at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. Situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient’s individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment. In this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of the corticosteroid for a period of time consistent with the patient’s condition. If after long term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

A. Administration for Local Effect

Therapy with methylprednisolone acetate does not obviate the need for the conventional measures usually employed. Although this method of treatment will ameliorate symptoms, it is in no sense a cure and the hormone has no effect on the cause of the inflammation.

1. Rheumatoid and Osteoarthritis

The dose for intra-articular administration depends upon the size of the joint and varies with the severity of the condition in the individual patient. In chronic cases, injections may be repeated at intervals ranging from one to five or more weeks depending upon the degree of relief obtained from the initial injection. The doses in the following table are given as a general guide:

Size of Joint

Examples

Range of Dosage

Large

Knees

Ankles

Shoulders

20 to 80 mg

Medium

Elbows

Wrists

10 to 40 mg

Small

Metacarpophalangeal

Interphalangeal

Sternoclavicular

Acromioclavicular

4 to 10 mg

Procedure: It is recommended that the anatomy of the joint involved be reviewed before attempting intra-articular injection. In order to obtain the full anti-inflammatory effect it is important that the injection be made into the synovial space. Employing the same sterile technique as for a lumbar puncture, a sterile 20 to 24 gauge needle (on a dry syringe) is quickly inserted into the synovial cavity. Procaine infiltration is elective. The aspiration of only a few drops of joint fluid proves the joint space has been entered by the needle. The injection site for each joint is determined by that location where the synovial cavity is most superficial and most free of large vessels and nerves. With the needle in place, the aspirating syringe is removed and replaced by a second syringe containing the desired amount of methylprednisolone acetate. The plunger is then pulled outward slightly to aspirate synovial fluid and to make sure the needle is still in the synovial space. After injection, the joint is moved gently a few times to aid mixing of the synovial fluid and the suspension. The site is covered with a small sterile dressing.

Suitable sites for intra-articular injection are the knee, ankle, wrist, elbow, shoulder, phalangeal, and hip joints. Since difficulty is not infrequently encountered in entering the hip joint, precautions should be taken to avoid any large blood vessels in the area. Joints not suitable for injection are those that are anatomically inaccessible such as the spinal joints and those like the sacroiliac joints that are devoid of synovial space. Treatment failures are most frequently the result of failure to enter the joint space. Little or no benefit follows injection into surrounding tissue. If failures occur when injections into the synovial spaces are certain, as determined by aspiration of fluid, repeated injections are usually futile.

If a local anesthetic is used prior to injection of methylprednisolone acetate, the anesthetic package insert should be read carefully and all the precautions observed.

2. Bursitis

The area around the injection site is prepared in a sterile way and a wheal at the site made with 1 percent procaine hydrochloride solution. A 20 to 24 gauge needle attached to a dry syringe is inserted into the bursa and the fluid aspirated. The needle is left in place and the aspirating syringe changed for a small syringe containing the desired dose. After injection, the needle is withdrawn and a small dressing applied.

3. Miscellaneous: Ganglion, Tendinitis, Epicondylitis

In the treatment of conditions such as tendinitis or tenosynovitis, care should be taken, following application of a suitable antiseptic to the overlying skin, to inject the suspension into the tendon sheath rather than into the substance of the tendon. The tendon may be readily palpated when placed on a stretch. When treating conditions such as epicondylitis, the area of greatest tenderness should be outlined carefully and the suspension infiltrated into the area. For ganglia of the tendon sheaths, the suspension is injected directly into the cyst. In many cases, a single injection causes a marked decrease in the size of the cystic tumor and may effect disappearance. The usual sterile precautions should be observed, of course, with each injection.

The dose in the treatment of the various conditions of the tendinous or bursal structures listed above varies with the condition being treated and ranges from 4 to 30 mg. In recurrent or chronic conditions, repeated injections may be necessary.

4. Injections for Local Effect in Dermatologic Conditions

Following cleansing with an appropriate antiseptic such as 70% alcohol, 20 to 60 mg of the suspension is injected into the lesion. It may be necessary to distribute doses ranging from 20 to 40 mg by repeated local injections in the case of large lesions. Care should be taken to avoid injection of sufficient material to cause blanching since this may be followed by a small slough. One to four injections are usually employed, the intervals between injections varying with the type of lesion being treated and the duration of improvement produced by the initial injection.

When multidose vials are used, special care to prevent contamination of the contents is essential (see WARNINGS).

B. Administration for Systemic Effect

The intramuscular dosage will vary with the condition being treated. When employed as a temporary substitute for oral therapy, a single injection during each 24-hour period of a dose of the suspension equal to the total daily oral dose of methylprednisolone tablets, USP is usually sufficient. When a prolonged effect is desired, the weekly dose may be calculated by multiplying the daily oral dose by 7 and given as a single intramuscular injection.

In pediatric patients, the initial dose of methylprednisolone may vary depending upon the specific disease entity being treated. The range of initial doses is 0.11 to 1.6 mg/kg/day. Dosage must be individualized according to the severity of the disease and response of the patient.

In patients with the adrenogenital syndrome, a single intramuscular injection of 40 mg every two weeks may be adequate. For maintenance of patients with rheumatoid arthritis, the weekly intramuscular dose will vary from 40 to 120 mg. The usual dosage for patients with dermatologic lesions benefited by systemic corticoid therapy is 40 to 120 mg of methylprednisolone acetate administered intramuscularly at weekly intervals for one to four weeks. In acute severe dermatitis due to poison ivy, relief may result within 8 to 12 hours following intramuscular administration of a single dose of 80 to 120 mg. In chronic contact dermatitis repeated injections at 5 to 10 day intervals may be necessary. In seborrheic dermatitis, a weekly dose of 80 mg may be adequate to control the condition.

Following intramuscular administration of 80 to 120 mg to asthmatic patients, relief may result within 6 to 48 hours and persist for several days to two weeks. Similarly in patients with allergic rhinitis (hay fever) an intramuscular dose of 80 to 120 mg may be followed by relief of coryzal symptoms within six hours persisting for several days to three weeks.

If signs of stress are associated with the condition being treated, the dosage of the suspension should be increased. If a rapid hormonal effect of maximum intensity is required, the intravenous administration of highly soluble methylprednisolone sodium succinate is indicated.

In treatment of acute exacerbations of multiple sclerosis daily doses of 160 mg of methylprednisolone for a week followed by 64 mg every other day for 1 month have been shown to be effective.

For the purpose of comparison, the following is the equivalent milligram dose of the various glucocorticoids:

Cortisone, 25

Triamcinolone, 4

Hydrocortisone, 20

Paramethasone, 2

Prednisolone, 5

Netamethasone, 0.75

Prednisone, 5

Dexamethasone, 0.75

Methylprednisolone, 4

Those dose relationships apply only to oral or intravenous administration of these compounds. When these substances or their derivatives are injected intramuscularly or into joint spaces, their relative properties may be greatly altered.
Penicillin G Sodium

Penicillin G Sodium

Penicillin G Sodium for lnjection, USP may be given intravenously or intramuscularly. The usual dose recommendations are as follows:

Adult Patients
Clinical Indication Dosage
Serious infections due to

susceptible strains of

streptococci (including

S. pneumoniae) and

staphylococci-septicemia,

empyema, pneumonia,

pericarditis, endocarditis and

meningitis

5 to 24 million units/day

depending on the infection

and its severity administered

in equally divided doses

every 4 to 6 hours

Anthrax

Minimum of 8 million

units/day in divided doses

every 6 hours. Higher doses

may be required depending

on susceptibility of organism.

Actinomycosis

  Cervicofacial disease

1 to 6 million units/day(*)

  Thoracic and abdominal

    disease

10 to 20 million units/day(*)

Clostridial infections

  Botulism (adjunctive

    therapy to antitoxin)

  Gas gangrene

    (debridement and/or

    surgery as indicated)

  Tetanus (adjunctive

    therapy to human tetanus

    immune globulin)

20 million units/day(*)

Diphtheria (adjunctive therapy

to antitoxin and for the

prevention of the carrier state)

2 to 3 million units/day in

divided doses for 10 to

12 days(*)

Erysipelothrix

endocarditis

12 to 20 million units/day for

4 to 6 weeks(*)

Fusospirochetosis

(severe infections of the

oropharnyx [Vincent’s], lower

respiratory tract

and genital area)

5 to 10 million

units/day(*)

Listeria infections

  Meningitis

15 to 20 million units/day for

2 weeks(*)

  Endocarditis

15 to 20 million units/day for

4 weeks(*)

Pasteurella infections including

bacteremia and meningitis

4 to 6 million units/day for

2 weeks(*)

Haverhill fever, Rat-bite fever

12 to 20 million units/day for

3 to 4 weeks(*)

Disseminated gonococcal

infections, such as meningitis

endocarditis, arthritis, etc.,

caused by penicillin-

susceptible organisms

10 million units/day(*);

duration depends on the type

of infection

Syphilis (neurosyphilis)

12 to 24 million units/day, as

2 to 4 MU every 4 hours for

10 to 14 days; many experts

recommend additional

therapy with Benzathine PCN

G 2.4 MU IM weekly for

3 doses after completion of

IV therapy

Meningococcal meningitis

and/or septicemia

24 million units/day as

2 million units every 2 hours

Serious infections, such as

pneumonia and endocarditis,

due to susceptible strains of

streptococci (including S.

pneumoniae) and

meningococcus

150,000 units/kg/day

divided in equal doses every

4 to 6 hours; duration

depends on infecting

organism and type of

infection

Meningitis caused by

susceptible strains of

pneumococcus and

meningococcus

250,000 units/kg/day

divided in equal doses every

4 hours for 7 to 14 days

depending on the infecting

organism (maximum dose of

12 to 20 million units/day)

Disseminated

Gonococcal infections

(penicillin-susceptible

strains)

weight less than 45 kg:

  Arthritis

100,000 units/kg/day in

4 equally divided doses for

7 to 10 days

  Meningitis

250,000 units/kg/day in

equal doses every

4 hours for 10 to 14 days

  Endocarditis

250,000 units/kg/day in

equal doses every 4 hours

for 4 weeks

Arthritis, meningitis,

endocarditis

weight 45 kg or greater:

10 million units/day in

4 equally divided doses with

the duration of therapy

depending on the type of

infection

Syphilis (congenital and

neurosyphilis) after the

newborn period

200,000 to 300,000

units/kg/day (administered as

50,000 units/kg every 4 to 6

hours) for 10 to 14 days

Diphtheria (adjunctive therapy

to antitoxin and for prevention

of the carrier state)

150,000 to 250,000

units/kg/day in equal doses

every 6 hours for 7 to 10

days

Rat-bite fever; Haverhill fever

(with endocarditis caused by

S. moniliformis)

150,000 to 250,000

units/kg/day in equal doses

every 4 hours for 4 weeks

*Because of its short half-life, Penicillin G is administered in divided doses, usually every 4 to 6 hours with the exception of meningococcal meningitis/septicemia, i.e., every 2 hours.

Pediatric Patients

This product should not be administered to patients requiring less than one million units per dose. (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use).

Renal Impairment

Penicillin G is relatively nontoxic, and dosage adjustments are generally required only in cases of severe renal impairment.

The recommended dosage regimens are as follows:

Creatinine clearance less than 10 mL/min/1.73 m2; administer a full loading dose (see recommended dosages in the tables above) followed by one-half of the loading dose every 8 to 10 hours.

Uremic patients with a creatinine clearance greater than 10 mL/min/1.73m2; administer a full loading dose (see recommended dosages in the tables above) followed by one-half of the loading dose every 4 to 5 hours.

Additional dosage modifications should be made in patients with hepatic disease and renal impairment.

For most acute infections, treatment should be continued for at least 48 to 72 hours after the patient becomes asymptomatic. Antibiotic therapy for Group A β-hemolytic streptococcal infections should be maintained for at least 10 days to reduce the risk of rheumatic fever.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Preparation of Solution

Solutions of penicillin should be prepared as follows: Loosen powder. Hold vial horizontally and rotate it while slowly directing the stream of diluent against the wall of the vial. Shake vial vigorously after all the diluent has been added. Depending on the route of administration, use Sterile Water for Injection, USP, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, or Dextrose Injections, USP.

Note: Penicillins are rapidly inactivated in the presence of carbohydrate solutions at alkaline pH.
PREPARATION OF SOLUTION – 5 million units Diluent Added Final Concentration
8 mL

500,000 units/mL

3 mL

1,000,000 units/mL
Ipratropium Bromide Sol...

Ipratropium Bromide Solution

The usual dosage of ipratropium bromide inhalation solution is 500 mcg (1 Unit-Dose Vial) administered three to four times a day by oral nebulization, with doses 6 to 8 hours apart. Ipratropium bromide inhalation solution unit-dose vials contain 500 mcg ipratropium bromide, USP anhydrous in 2.5 mL normal saline. Ipratropium bromide inhalation solution can be mixed in the nebulizer with albuterol or metaproterenol if used within one hour. Drug stability and safety of Ipratropium Bromide Inhalation Solution when mixed with other drugs in a nebulizer have not been established.
Pioglitazone And Metfor...

Pioglitazone And Metformin

2.1 Recommendations for All Patients

Pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be taken with meals to reduce the gastrointestinal side effects associated with metformin.

If therapy with a combination tablet containing pioglitazone and metformin is considered appropriate the recommended starting dose is:
• 15 mg/500 mg twice daily or 15 mg/850 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients with New York Heart Association (NYHA) Class I or Class II congestive heart failure: 15 mg/500 mg or 15 mg/850 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients inadequately controlled on metformin monotherapy: 15 mg/500 mg twice daily or 15 mg/850 mg once or twice daily (depending on the dose of metformin already being taken) and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients inadequately controlled on pioglitazone monotherapy: 15 mg/500 mg twice daily or 15 mg/850 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients who are changing from combination therapy of pioglitazone plus metformin as separate tablets: Pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be taken at doses that are as close as possible to the dose of pioglitazone and metformin already being taken.
Pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets may be titrated up to a maximum daily dose of 45 mg of pioglitazone and 2550 mg of metformin.

Metformin doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given 3 times a day.

After initiation of pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets or with dose increase, monitor patients carefully for adverse reactions related to fluid retention such as weight gain, edema, and signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure [see Boxed Warning and WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1)]. Liver tests (serum alanine and aspartate aminotransferases, alkaline phosphatase, and total bilirubin) should be obtained prior to initiating pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets. Routine periodic monitoring of liver tests during treatment with pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets are not recommended in patients without liver disease. Patients who have liver test abnormalities prior to initiation of pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets or who are found to have abnormal liver tests while taking pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets should be managed as described under Warnings and Precautions [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.5) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.2 Concomitant Use with an Insulin Secretagogue or Insulin

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient co-administered pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets and an insulin secretagogue (e.g., sulfonylurea), the dose of the insulin secretagogue should be reduced.

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient co-administered pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets and insulin, the dose of insulin should be decreased by 10% to 25%. Further adjustments to the insulin dose should be individualized based on glycemic response.

2.3 Concomitant Use with Strong CYP2C8 Inhibitors

Co-administration of pioglitazone (one of the ingredients in pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets) and gemfibrozil, a strong CYP2C8 inhibitor, increases pioglitazone exposure approximately 3-fold. Therefore, the maximum recommended dose of pioglitazone hydrochloride and metformin hydrochloride tablets are 15 mg/850 mg daily when used in combination with gemfibrozil or other strong CYP2C8 inhibitors [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].
Azithromycin

Azithromycin

[see Indications and Usage (1)]

2.1 Sexually Transmitted Diseases

The recommended dose of azithromycin for the treatment of non-gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis due to C. trachomatis is a single 1000 mg dose of azithromycin.

2.2 Mycobacterial Infections

Prevention of Disseminated MAC Infections

The recommended dose of azithromycin for the prevention of disseminated Mycobacterium avium complex (MAC) disease is: 1200 mg taken once weekly. This dose of azithromycin may be combined with the approved dosage regimen of rifabutin.

Treatment of Disseminated MAC Infections

Azithromycin should be taken at a daily dose of 600 mg, in combination with ethambutol at the recommended daily dose of 15 mg/kg. Other antimycobacterial drugs that have shown in vitro activity against MAC may be added to the regimen of azithromycin plus ethambutol at the discretion of the physician or health care provider.
Candesartan Cilexetil

Candesartan Cilexetil

2.1 Adult Hypertension

Dosage must be individualized. Blood pressure response is dose related over the range of 2 to 32 mg. The usual recommended starting dose of candesartan cilexetil tablets is 16 mg once daily when it is used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume depleted. Candesartan cilexetil tablets can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 8 mg to 32 mg. Larger doses do not appear to have a greater effect, and there is relatively little experience with such doses. Most of the antihypertensive effect is present within 2 weeks, and maximal blood pressure reduction is generally obtained within 4 to 6 weeks of treatment with candesartan cilexetil tablets.

Use in Hepatic Impairment: Initiate with 8 mg candesartan cilexetil tablets in patients with moderate hepatic insufficiency. Dosing recommendations cannot be provided for patients with severe hepatic insufficiency [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

Candesartan cilexetil tablets may be administered with or without food.

If blood pressure is not controlled by candesartan cilexetil tablets alone, a diuretic may be added. Candesartan cilexetil tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

2.2 Pediatric Hypertension 1 to < 17 Years of age

Candesartan cilexetil tablets may be administered once daily or divided into two equal doses. Adjust the dosage according to blood pressure response. For patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics, particularly those with impaired renal function), initiate candesartan cilexetil tablets under close medical supervision and consider administration of a lower dose [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.3)].

Children 1 to < 6 years of age:

The dose range is 0.05 to 0.4 mg/kg per day. The recommended starting dose is 0.20 mg/kg (oral suspension).

Children 6 to < 17 years of age:

For those less than 50 kg, the dose range is 2 to 16 mg per day. The recommended starting dose is 4 to 8 mg.

For those greater than 50 kg, the dose range is 4 to 32 mg per day. The recommended starting dose is 8 to 16 mg.

Doses above 0.4 mg/kg (1 to < 6 year olds) or 32 mg (6 to < 17 year olds) have not been studied in pediatric patients [seeCLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

An antihypertensive effect is usually present within 2 weeks, with full effect generally obtained within 4 weeks of treatment with candesartan cilexetil tablets.

Children < 1 year of age must not receive candesartan cilexetil tablets for hypertension.

All pediatric patients with a glomerular filtration rate less than 30 ml/min/1.73m2 should not receive candesartan cilexetil tablets since candesartan cilexetil tablets have not been studied in this population[see SPECIAL POPULATIONS (8)].

For children who cannot swallow tablets, an oral suspension may be substituted as described below:

Preparation of Oral Suspension:

Candesartan cilexetil oral suspension can be prepared in concentrations within the range of 0.1 to 2 mg/mL. Typically, a concentration of 1 mg/mL will be suitable for the prescribed dose. Any strength of candesartan cilexetil tablets can be used in the preparation of the suspension.

Follow the steps below for preparation of the suspension. The number of tablets and volume of vehicle specified below will yield 160 mL of a 1 mg/mL suspension.
• Prepare the vehicle by adding equal volumes of *Ora-Plus ® (80 mL) and *Ora-Sweet SF ® (80 mL) or, alternatively, use, *†Ora-Blend SF ® (160 mL). • Add a small amount of vehicle to the required number of candesartan cilexetil tablets (five 32 mg tablets) and grind into a smooth paste using a mortar and pestle. • Add the paste to a preparation vessel of suitable size. • Rinse the mortar and pestle clean using the vehicle and add this to the vessel. Repeat, if necessary. • Prepare the final volume by adding the remaining vehicle. • Mix thoroughly. • Dispense into suitably sized amber PET bottles. • Label with an expiry date of 100 days and include the following instructions:
Store at 20º to 25ºC (68º to 77ºF). [See USP Controlled Room Temperature]. Use within 30 days after first opening. Do not use after the expiry date stated on the bottle.

Do not freeze.

Shake well before each use.

2.3 Adult Heart Failure

The recommended initial dose for treating heart failure is 4 mg once daily. The target dose is 32 mg once daily, which is achieved by doubling the dose at approximately 2-week intervals, as tolerated by the patient.
Ipratropium Bromide And...

Ipratropium Bromide And Albuterol Sulfate Solution

The recommended dose of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution is one 3 mL vial administered 4 times per day via nebulization with up to 2 additional 3 mL doses allowed per day, if needed. Safety and efficacy of additional doses or increased frequency of administration of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution beyond these guidelines has not been studied and the safety and efficacy of extra doses of albuterol sulfate or ipratropium bromide in addition to the recommended doses of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution have not been studied.

The use of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution can be continued as medically indicated to control recurring bouts of bronchospasm. If a previously effective regimen fails to provide the usual relief, medical advice should be sought immediately, as this is often a sign of worsening COPD, which would require reassessment of therapy.

A Pari-LC-Plus™ nebulizer (with face mask or mouthpiece) connected to a PRONEB™ compressor was used to deliver Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution to each patient in one U.S. clinical study. The safety and efficacy of Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution delivered by other nebulizers and compressors have not been established.

Ipratropium Bromide and Albuterol Sulfate Inhalation Solution should be administered via jet nebulizer connected to an air compressor with an adequate air flow, equipped with a mouthpiece or suitable face mask.
Atenolol

Atenolol

Hypertension

The initial dose of atenolol is 50 mg given as one tablet a day either alone or added to diuretic therapy. The full effect of this dose will usually be seen within one to two weeks. If an optimal response is not achieved, the dosage should be increased to atenolol 100 mg given as one tablet a day. Increasing the dosage beyond 100 mg a day is unlikely to produce any further benefit.

Atenolol may be used alone or concomitantly with other antihypertensive agents including thiazide-type diuretics, hydralazine, prazosin, and alpha-methyldopa.

Angina Pectoris

The initial dose of atenolol is 50 mg given as one tablet a day. If an optimal response is not achieved within one week, the dosage should be increased to atenolol 100 mg given as one tablet a day. Some patients may require a dosage of 200 mg once a day for optimal effect.

Twenty-four hour control with once daily dosing is achieved by giving doses larger than necessary to achieve an immediate maximum effect. The maximum early effect on exercise tolerance occurs with doses of 50 to 100 mg, but at these doses the effect at 24 hours is attenuated, averaging about 50% to 75% of that observed with once a day oral doses of 200 mg.

Acute Myocardial Infarction

In patients with definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, treatment with atenolol I.V. injection should be initiated as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital and after eligibility is established. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized. Treatment should begin with the intravenous administration of 5 mg atenolol over 5 minutes followed by another 5 mg intravenous injection 10 minutes later. Atenolol I.V. injection should be administered under carefully controlled conditions including monitoring of blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram. Dilutions of atenolol I.V. injection in Dextrose Injection USP, Sodium Chloride Injection USP, or Sodium Chloride and Dextrose Injection may be used. These admixtures are stable for 48 hours if they are not used immediately.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (10 mg), atenolol tablets 50 mg should be initiated 10 minutes after the last intravenous dose followed by another 50 mg oral dose 12 hours later. Thereafter, atenolol can be given orally either 100 mg once daily or 50 mg twice a day for a further 6 to 9 days or until discharge from the hospital. If bradycardia or hypotension requiring treatment or any other untoward effects occur, atenolol should be discontinued. (See full prescribing information prior to initiating therapy with atenolol tablets).

Data from other beta blocker trials suggest that if there is any question concerning the use of IV beta blocker or clinical estimate that there is a contraindication, the IV beta blocker may be eliminated and patients fulfilling the safety criteria may be given atenolol tablets 50 mg twice daily or 100 mg once a day for at least seven days (if the IV dosing is excluded).

Although the demonstration of efficacy of atenolol is based entirely on data from the first seven postinfarction days, data from other beta blocker trials suggest that treatment with beta blockers that are effective in the post-infarction setting may be continued for one to three years if there are no contraindications.

Atenolol is an additional treatment to standard coronary care unit therapy.

Elderly Patients or Patients with Renal Impairment

Atenolol is excreted by the kidneys; consequently dosage should be adjusted in cases of severe impairment of renal function. In general, dose selection for an elderly patient should be cautious, usually starting at the low end of the dosing range, reflecting greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy. Evaluation of patients with hypertension or myocardial infarction should always include assessment of renal function. Atenolol excretion would be expected to decrease with advancing age.

No significant accumulation of atenolol occurs until creatinine clearance falls below 35 mL/min/1.73m2. Accumulation of atenolol and prolongation of its half-life were studied in subjects with creatinine clearance between 5 and 105 mL/min. Peak plasma levels were significantly increased in subjects with creatinine clearances below 30 mL/min.

The following maximum oral dosages are recommended for elderly, renally-impaired patients and for patients with renal impairment due to other causes:

Creatinine Clearance

(mL/min/1.73m2)

Atenolol

Elimination

Half-Life (h)

Maximum Dosage

15-35

16-27

50 mg daily

< 15

> 27

25 mg daily

Some renally-impaired or elderly patients being treated for hypertension may require a lower starting dose of atenolol: 25 mg given as one tablet a day. If this 25 mg dose is used, assessment of efficacy must be made carefully. This should include measurement of blood pressure just prior to the next dose (“trough” blood pressure) to ensure that the treatment effect is present for a full 24 hours.

Although a similar dosage reduction may be considered for elderly and/or renally-impaired patients being treated for indications other than hypertension, data are not available for these patient populations.

Patients on hemodialysis should be given 25 mg or 50 mg after each dialysis; this should be done under hospital supervision as marked falls in blood pressure can occur.

Cessation of Therapy in Patients with Angina Pectoris

If withdrawal of atenolol therapy is planned, it should be achieved gradually and patients should be carefully observed and advised to limit physical activity to a minimum.
Loratadine

Loratadine

adults and children 6 years and over

1 tablet daily; not more than 1 tablet in 24 hours

children under 6 years of age

ask a doctor

consumers with liver or kidney disease

ask a doctor
Diclofenac Sodium

Diclofenac Sodium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets, USP and other treatment options before deciding to use diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets, USP. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

      After observing the response to initial therapy with diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets, USP, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

      For the relief of osteoarthritis, the recommended dosage is 100 mg q.d.

      For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended dosage is 100 mg q.d. In the rare patient where diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets, USP 100 mg/day is unsatisfactory, the dose may be increased to 100 mg b.i.d. if the benefits outweigh the clinical risks of increased side effects.

      Different formulations of diclofenac (diclofenac sodium enteric-coated tablets; diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets, USP; diclofenac potassium immediate-release tablets) are not necessarily bioequivalent even if the milligram strength is the same.
Meropenem

Meropenem

2.1 Adult Patients

The recommended dose of Meropenem for Injection is 500 mg given every 8 hours for skin and skin structure infections and 1 g given every 8 hours for intra-abdominal infections. Meropenem for Injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over approximately 15 to 30 minutes. Doses of 1 g may also be administered as an intravenous bolus injection (5 to 20 mL) over approximately 3 to 5 minutes.

2.2 Use in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage should be reduced in patients with creatinine clearance of 50 mL/min or less. (See dosing table below.)

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft and Gault equation)5 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance.

Males: Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) =

Weight (kg) x (140– age)

72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Females: 0.85 x above value
Recommended Meropenem for Injection Dosage Schedule for Adult Patients With Renal Impairment
Creatinine

Clearance

(mL/min)

Dose

(dependent on

type of infection)

Dosing Interval

>50

Recommended dose (500 mg

cSSSI and 1g Intra-abdominal)

Every 8 hours

>25-50

Recommended dose

Every 12 hours

10-25

One-half recommended dose

Every 12 hours

<10

One-half recommended dose

Every 24 hours

There is inadequate information regarding the use of Meropenem for Injection in patients on hemodialysis or peritoneal dialysis.

2.3 Use in Pediatric Patients (≥ 3 Months only)

For pediatric patients from 3 months of age and older, the Meropenem for Injection dose is 10, 20 or 40 mg/kg every 8 hours (maximum dose is 2 g every 8 hours), depending on the type of infection (complicated skin and skin structure, intra-abdominal or meningitis). (See dosing table below.) Pediatric patients weighing over 50 kg should be administered Meropenem for Injection at a dose of 500 mg every 8 hours for complicated skin and skin structure infections, 1 g every 8 hours for intra-abdominal infections and 2 g every 8 hours for meningitis. Meropenem for Injection should be given as intravenous infusion over approximately 15 to 30 minutes or as an intravenous bolus injection (5 to 20 mL) over approximately 3 to 5 minutes.

There is limited safety data available to support the administration of a 40 mg/kg (up to a maximum of 2 g) bolus dose.
Recommended Meropenem for Injection Dosage Schedule for Pediatric Patients With Normal Renal Function Type of Infection Dose (mg/kg) Up to a Maximum Dose Dosing Interval
Complicated skin

and skin structure

10

500 mg

Every 8 hours

Intra-abdominal

20

1 g

Every 8 hours

Meningitis

40

2 g

Every 8 hours

There is no experience in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

2.4 Preparation of Solution

For Intravenous Bolus Administration

Constitute injection vials (500 mg and 1 g) with sterile Water for Injection. (See table below.) Shake to dissolve and let stand until clear.

Vial size

Amount of

Diluent Added

(mL)

Approximate

Withdrawable

Volume

(mL)

Approximate

Average

Concentration

(mg/mL)

500 mg

10

10

50

1 g

20

20

50

For Infusion

Infusion vials (500 mg and 1 g) may be directly constituted with a compatible infusion fluid. Alternatively, an injection vial may be constituted, then the resulting solution added to an I.V. container and further diluted with an appropriate infusion fluid [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.5) and (2.6)].

WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

2.5 Compatibility

Compatibility of Meropenem with other drugs has not been established. Meropenem should not be mixed with or physically added to solutions containing other drugs.

2.6 Stability and Storage

Freshly prepared solutions of Meropenem should be used whenever possible. However, constituted solutions of Meropenem maintain satisfactory potency at controlled room temperature 15-25°C (59-77°F) or under refrigeration at 4°C (39°F) as described below. Solutions of intravenous Meropenem should not be frozen.

Intravenous Bolus Administration

Meropenem for Injection injection vials constituted with sterile Water for Injection for bolus administration (up to 50 mg/mL of Meropenem) may be stored for up to 2 hours at controlled room temperature 15-25°C (59-77°F) or for up to 12 hours at 4°C (39°F).

Intravenous Infusion Administration

Stability in Infusion Vials: Meropenem for Injection infusion vials constituted with Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% (Meropenem concentrations ranging from 2.5 to 50 mg/mL) are stable for up to 2 hours at controlled room temperature 15-25°C (59-77°F) or for up to 18 hours at 4°C (39°F). Infusion vials of Meropenem for Injection constituted with Dextrose Injection 5% (Meropenem concentrations ranging from 2.5 to 50 mg/mL) are stable for up to 1 hour at controlled room temperature 15-25°C (59-77°F) or for up to 8 hours at 4°C (39°F).

Stability in Plastic I.V. Bags: Solutions prepared for infusion (Meropenem concentrations ranging from 1 to 20 mg/mL) may be stored in plastic intravenous bags with diluents as shown below:
* NORMOSOL is a registered trademark of Hospira Inc.
Number of Hours Stable

at Controlled Room Temperature

15-25°C (59-77°F)

Number of

Hours Stable at

4°C (39°F)

Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9%

4

24

Dextrose Injection 5%

1

4

Dextrose Injection 10%

1

2

Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection 5%/0.9%

1

2

Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection 5%/0.2%

1

4

Potassium Chloride in Dextrose

Injection 0.15%/5%

1

6

Sodium Bicarbonate in Dextrose

Injection 0.02%/5%

1

6

Dextrose Injection 5% in Normosol®-

M*

1

8

Dextrose Injection 5% in Ringers

Lactate Injection

1

4

Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection

2.5%/0.45%

3

12

Mannitol Injection 2.5%

2

16

Ringers Injection

4

24

Ringers Lactate Injection

4

12

Sodium Lactate Injection 1/6 N

2

24

Sodium Bicarbonate Injection 5%

1

4

Stability in Baxter Minibag Plus® (Manufactured by Baxter, Inc.): Solutions of Meropenem for Injection (Meropenem concentrations ranging from 2.5 to 20 mg/mL) in Baxter Minibag Plus bags with Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% may be stored for up to 4 hours at controlled room temperatures 15-25°C (59-77°F) or for up to 24 hours at 4°C (39°F). Solutions of Meropenem for Injection (Meropenem concentrations ranging from 2.5 to 20 mg/mL) in Baxter Minibag Plus® bags with Dextrose Injection 5% may be stored up to 1 hour at controlled room temperatures 15-25°C (59-77°F) or for up to 6 hours at 4°C (39°F).

Stability in Plastic Syringes, Tubing and Intravenous Infusion Sets: Solutions of Meropenem for Injection (Meropenem concentrations ranging from 1 to 20 mg/mL) in Water for Injection or Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% (for up to 4 hours) or in Dextrose Injection 5% (for up to 2 hours) at controlled room temperatures 15-25°C (59-77°F) are stable in plastic tubing and volume control devices of common intravenous infusion sets.

Solutions of Meropenem for Injection (Meropenem for Injection concentrations ranging from 1 to 20 mg/mL) in Water for Injection or Sodium Chloride Injection 0.9% (for up to 48 hours) or in Dextrose Injection 5% (for up to 6 hours) are stable at 4ºC (39ºF) in plastic syringes.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Naproxen

Naproxen

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of naproxen delayed-release tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use naproxen delayed-release tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with naproxen delayed-release tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

Different dose strengths and formulations (i.e., tablets, suspension) of the drug are not necessarily bioequivalent. This difference should be taken into consideration when changing formulation.

Although naproxen delayed-release tablets and immediate release naproxen formulations circulate in the plasma as naproxen, they have pharmacokinetic differences that may affect onset of action. Onset of pain relief can begin within 1 hour in patients taking naproxen. Because naproxen delayed-release tablets dissolve in the small intestine rather than in the stomach, the absorption of the drug is delayed compared to the other naproxen formulations (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

The recommended strategy for initiating therapy is to choose a formulation and a starting dose likely to be effective for the patient and then adjust the dosage based on observation of benefit and/or adverse events. A lower dose should be considered in patients with renal or hepatic impairment or in elderly patients (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Geriatric Patients

Studies indicate that although total plasma concentration of naproxen is unchanged, the unbound plasma fraction of naproxen is increased in the elderly. Caution is advised when high doses are required and some adjustment of dosage may be required in elderly patients. As with other drugs used in the elderly, it is prudent to use the lowest effective dose.

Patients With Moderate to Severe Renal Impairment

Naproxen-containing products are not recommended for use in patients with moderate to severe and severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) (see WARNINGS: Renal Effects).

Rheumatoid Arthritis, Osteoarthritis and Ankylosing Spondylitis

Naproxen Delayed Release Tablets

375 mg or

500 mg

twice daily

twice daily

To maintain the integrity of the enteric coating, the naproxen delayed-release tablet should not be broken, crushed or chewed during ingestion.

During long-term administration, the dose of naproxen may be adjusted up or down depending on the clinical response of the patient. A lower daily dose may suffice for long-term administration. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and the administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily is not necessary.

In patients who tolerate lower doses well, the dose may be increased to naproxen 1500 mg/day for limited periods of up to 6 months when a higher level of anti-inflammatory/analgesic activity is required. When treating such patients with naproxen 1500 mg/day, the physician should observe sufficient increased clinical benefits to offset the potential increased risk. The morning and evening doses do not have to be equal in size and administration of the drug more frequently than twice daily does not generally make a difference in response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Juvenile Arthritis

The recommended total daily dose of naproxen is approximately 10 mg/kg given in 2 divided doses (i.e., 5 mg/kg given twice a day). Naproxen delayed-release tablets are not well suited to this dosage so use of naproxen oral suspension is recommended for this indication.

Management of Pain, Primary Dysmenorrhea, and Acute Tendonitis and Bursitis

Naproxen delayed-release tablets are not recommended for initial treatment of acute pain because absorption of naproxen is delayed compared to other naproxen-containing products (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and INDICATIONS AND USAGE).

Acute Gout

Naproxen delayed-release tablets are not recommended because of the delay in absorption (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).
Ciprofloxacin

Ciprofloxacin

Adults

CIPROFLOXACIN INJECTION, USP should be administered to adults by intravenous infusion over a period of 60 minutes at dosages described in the Dosage Guidelines table. Slow infusion of a dilute solution into a larger vein will minimize patient discomfort and reduce the risk of venous irritation. (See Preparation of CIPROFLOXACIN INJECTION, USP for Administration section.)

The determination of dosage for any particular patient must take into consideration the severity and nature of the infection, the susceptibility of the causative microorganism, the integrity of the patient's host-defense mechanisms, and the status of renal and hepatic function.
* DUE TO THE DESIGNATED PATHOGENS (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE.) † Used in conjunction with metronidazole. (See product labeling for prescribing information.) ‡ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint, ciprofloxacin serum concentrations achieved in humans, reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit. 4 For a discussion of ciprofloxacin serum concentrations in various human populations, see INHALATIONAL ANTHRAX - ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. Total duration of ciprofloxacin administration (IV or oral) for inhalational anthrax (post-exposure) is 60 days.
ADULT DOSAGE GUIDELINES

Infection*

Severity

Dose

Frequency

Usual Duration

Urinary Tract

Mild/Moderate

200 mg

q12h

7-14 Days

Severe/Complicated

400 mg

q12h (or q 8h)

7-14 Days

LowerRespiratory Tract

Mild/ModerateSevere/Complicated

400 mg400 mg

q12hq8h

7-14 Days7-14 Days

Nosocomial Pneumonia

Mild/Moderate/Severe

400 mg

q8h

10-14 Days

Skin andSkin Structure

Mild/ModerateSevere/Complicated

400 mg400 mg

q12hq8h

7-14 Days7-14 Days

Bone and Joint

Mild/ModerateSevere/Complicated

400 mg400 mg

q12hq8h

≥4-6 Weeks≥4-6 Weeks

Intra-Abdominal†

Complicated

400 mg

q12h

7-14 Days

Acute Sinusitis

Mild/Moderate

400 mg

q12h

10 Days

Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis

Mild/Moderate

400 mg

q12h

28 Days

Empirical Therapy in

Severe

Febrile Neutropenic

Ciprofloxacin

400 mg

q8h

Patients

+

7-14 Days

Piperacillin

50 mg/kgNot to exceed24 g/day

q4h

Inhalational anthrax(post-exposure)‡

400 mg

q12h

60 Days

CIPROFLOXACIN INJECTION, USP should be administered by intravenous infusion over a period of 60 minutes.

Conversion of IV to Oral Dosing in Adults

CIPROFLOXACIN is also available for oral administration. Parenteral therapy may be switched to oral therapy when the condition warrants, at the discretion of the physician. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY and table below for the equivalent dosing regimens.)

Equivalent AUC Dosing Regimens

CIPROFLOXACIN Oral Dosage

Equivalent CIPROFLOXACIN INJECTION Dosage

250 mg Tablet q 12 h

200 mg IV q 12 h

500 mg Tablet q 12 h

400 mg IV q 12 h

750 mg Tablet q 12 h

400 mg IV q 8 h

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration.

Adults with Impaired Renal Function

Ciprofloxacin is eliminated primarily by renal excretion; however, the drug is also metabolized and partially cleared through the biliary system of the liver and through the intestine. These alternative pathways of drug elimination appear to compensate for the reduced renal excretion in patients with renal impairment. Nonetheless, some modification of dosage is recommended for patients with severe renal dysfunction. The following table provides dosage guidelines for use in patients with renal impairment:

RECOMMENDED STARTING AND MAINTENANCE DOSES FOR PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION

Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Dosage

> 30

See usual dosage.

5-29

200-400 mg q 18-24 hr

When only the serum creatinine concentration is known, the following formula may be used to estimate creatinine clearance:

Men: Creatinine clearance (mL/min) =

Weight (kg) × (140 - age)

72 × serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Women: 0.85 × the value calculated for men.

The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

For patients with changing renal function or for patients with renal impairment and hepatic insufficiency, careful monitoring is suggested.

Pediatrics

CIPROFLOXACIN INJECTION, USP should be administered as described in the Dosage Guidelines table. An increased incidence of adverse events compared to controls, including events related to joints and/or surrounding tissues, has been observed. (See ADVERSE REACTIONS and CLINICAL STUDIES.)

Dosing and initial route of therapy (i.e., IV or oral) for complicated urinary tract infection or pyelonephritis should be determined by the severity of the infection. In the clinical trial, pediatric patients with moderate to severe infection were initiated on 6 to 10 mg/kg IV every 8 hours and allowed to switch to oral therapy (10 to 20 mg/kg every 12 hours), at the discretion of the physician.
* The total duration of therapy for complicated urinary tract infection and pyelonephritis in the clinical trial was determined by the physician. The mean duration of treatment was 11 days (range 10 to 21 days). † Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Bacillus anthracis spores. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint, ciprofloxacin serum concentrations achieved in humans, reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit. 6 For a discussion of ciprofloxacin serum concentrations in various human populations, see INHALATIONAL ANTHRAX - ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES

Infection

Route ofAdministration

Dose(mg/kg)

Frequency

Total Duration

ComplicatedUrinary TractorPyelonephritis

Intravenous

6 to 10 mg/kg (maximum 400 mg per dose; not to be exceeded even in patients weighing> 51 kg)

Every8 hours

10-21 days*

(patients from 1 to 17 years of age)

Oral

10 mg/kg to 20 mg/kg(maximum 750 mg per dose; not to be exceeded even in patients weighing> 51 kg)

Every12 hours

Inhalational Anthrax(Post-exposure)†

Intravenous

10 mg/kg(maximum 400 mg per dose)

Every12 hours

60 days

Oral

15 mg/kg(maximum 500 mg per dose)

Every12 hours

Pediatric patients with moderate to severe renal insufficiency were excluded from the clinical trial of complicated urinary tract infection and pyelonephritis. No information is available on dosing adjustments necessary for pediatric patients with moderate to severe renal insufficiency (i.e., creatinine clearance of < 50 mL/min/1.73m2).

Preparation of CIPROFLOXACIN INJECTION, USP for Administration

Flexible Containers

Ciprofloxacin injection is available as a 0.2% premixed solution in 5% dextrose in flexible containers of 100 mL or 200 mL. The solutions in flexible containers do not need to be diluted and should be infused over a period of 60 minutes by direct infusion or through a Y-type intravenous infusion set which may already be in place.

If the Y-type or “piggyback” method of administration is used, it is advisable to discontinue temporarily the administration of any other solutions during the infusion of ciprofloxacin injection. If the concomitant use of ciprofloxacin injection and another drug is necessary, each drug should be given separately in accordance with the recommended dosage and route of administration for each drug.
Rocephin

Rocephin

Not recommended for use in children (see WARNINGS).

Lower dosages are recommended for elderly patients and adolescents. Lower dosages are also recommended for outpatients compared to hospitalized patients, who are closely supervised. Dosage should be initiated at a low level and increased according to clinical response and any evidence of intolerance. Following remission, maintenance medication may be required for a period of time and should be at the lowest dose that will maintain remission.

Usual Adult Dose

The usual adult dose is 100 to 200 mg per day. In more severely ill patients, dosage may be further increased gradually to 300 mg/day if necessary. Dosages above 300 mg/day are not recommended.

Dosage should be initiated at a lower level and increased according to tolerance and clinical response.

Treatment of patients requiring as much as 300 mg should generally be initiated in hospitals, where regular visits by the physician, skilled nursing care, and frequent electrocardiograms (ECG’s) are available.

The best available evidence of impending toxicity from very high doses of desipramine is prolongation of the QRS or QT intervals on the ECG. Prolongation of the PR interval is also significant, but less closely correlated with plasma levels. Clinical symptoms of intolerance, especially drowsiness, dizziness, and postural hypotension, should also alert the physician to the need for reduction in dosage.

Initial therapy may be administered in divided doses or a single daily dose.

Maintenance therapy may be given on a once-daily schedule for patient convenience and compliance.

Adolescent and Geriatric Dose

The usual adolescent and geriatric dose is 25 to 100 mg daily.

Dosage should be initiated at a lower level and increased according to tolerance and clinical response to a usual maximum of 100 mg daily. In more severely ill patients, dosage may be further increased to 150 mg/day. Doses above 150 mg/day are not recommended in these age groups.

Initial therapy may be administered in divided doses or a single daily dose.

Maintenance therapy may be given on a once-daily schedule for patient convenience and compliance.

Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with desipramine hydrochloride. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping desipramine hydrochloride before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of desipramine hydrochloride With Other MAOI’s, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start desipramine hydrochloride in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving desipramine hydrochloride therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, Desipramine hydrochloride should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with desipramine hydrochloride may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with desipramine hydrochloride is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).
Amlodipine Besylate And...

Amlodipine Besylate And Benazepril Hydrochloride

2.1 General Considerations

The recommended initial dose of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is one capsule of amlodipine 2.5 mg/benazepril 10 mg orally once daily.

It is usually appropriate to begin therapy with amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules only after a patient has either (a) failed to achieve the desired antihypertensive effect with amlodipine or benazepril monotherapy, or (b) demonstrated inability to achieve adequate antihypertensive effect with amlodipine therapy without developing edema.

The antihypertensive effect of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is largely attained within 2 weeks. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled, the dose may be titrated up to amlodipine 10 mg/benazepril 40 mg once daily. The dosing should be individualized and adjusted according to the patient’s clinical response.

Amlodipine is an effective treatment of hypertension in once-daily doses of 2.5-10 mg while benazepril is effective in doses of 10-80 mg. In clinical trials of amlodipine/benazepril combination therapy using amlodipine doses of 2.5-10 mg and benazepril doses of 10-40 mg, the antihypertensive effects increased with increasing dose of amlodipine in all patient groups, and the effects increased with increasing dose of benazepril in nonblack groups.

2.2 Dosage adjustment in renal impairment

Renal Impairment: Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules are not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance ≤ 30 mL/min. No dose adjustment of amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules is required in patients with creatinine clearance > 30 mL/min/1.73m2 (serum creatinine roughly ≤3 mg/dL or 265 μmol/L) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.7), Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Replacement Therapy

Amlodipine besylate and benazepril hydrochloride capsules may be substituted for the titrated components.
Rizatriptan Benzoate

Rizatriptan Benzoate

2.1 Dosing Information in Adults

The recommended starting dose of rizatriptan benzoate orally disintegrating tablets is either 5 mg or 10 mg for the acute treatment of migraines in adults. The 10 mg dose may provide a greater effect than the 5 mg dose, but may have a greater risk of adverse reactions [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Redosing in Adults

Although the effectiveness of a second dose or subsequent doses has not been established in placebo-controlled trials, if the migraine headache returns, a second dose may be administered 2 hours after the first dose. The maximum daily dose should not exceed 30 mg in any 24-hour period. The safety of treating, on average, more than four headaches in a 30-day period has not been established.

2.2 Dosing Information in Pediatric Patients (Age 6 to 17 Years)

Information related to dosage of rizatriptan benzoate in pediatric patients (6 to 17 years old) is approved for Merck & Co., Inc.’s Rizatriptan Benzoate Orally Disintegrating Tablets. However, due to Merck & Co., Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that dosage information.

2.3 Administration of Rizatriptan Benzoate Orally Disintegrating Tablets

For rizatriptan benzoate orally disintegrating tablets, administration with liquid is not necessary. Orally disintegrating tablets are packaged in a blister. The blister pack should be opened with dry hands and the orally disintegrating tablet placed on the tongue, where it will dissolve and be swallowed with the saliva.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment for Patients on Propranolol

Adult Patients

In adult patients taking propranolol, only the 5 mg dose of rizatriptan benzoate orally disintegrating tablets is recommended, up to a maximum of three doses in any 24-hour period (15 mg) [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Pediatric Patients

Dosage adjustment information of rizatriptan benzoate for pediatric patients (6 to 17 years old) taking propranolol is approved for Merck & Co., Inc.’s Rizatriptan Benzoate Orally Disintegrating Tablets. However, due to Merck & Co., Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that dosage adjustment information.
Metoprolol Tartrate

Metoprolol Tartrate

Myocardial Infarction

Early Treatment

During the early phase of definite or suspected acute myocardial infarction, initiate treatment with metoprolol tartrate as soon as possible after the patient’s arrival in the hospital. Such treatment should be initiated in a coronary care or similar unit immediately after the patient’s hemodynamic condition has stabilized.

Begin treatment in this early phase with the intravenous administration of three bolus injections of 5 mg of metoprolol tartrate each; give the injections at approximately 2-minute intervals. During the intravenous administration of metoprolol tartrate, monitor blood pressure, heart rate, and electrocardiogram.

In patients who tolerate the full intravenous dose (15 mg), initiate metoprolol tartrate tablets, 50 mg every 6 hours, 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose and continue for 48 hours. Thereafter, the maintenance dosage is 100 mg orally twice daily.

Start patients who appear not to tolerate the full intravenous dose on metoprolol tartrate tablets either 25 mg or 50 mg every 6 hours (depending on the degree of intolerance) 15 minutes after the last intravenous dose or as soon as their clinical condition allows. In patients with severe intolerance, discontinue metoprolol tartrate (see WARNINGS).

Special populations

Pediatric patients: No pediatric studies have been performed. The safety and efficacy of metoprolol tartrate in pediatric patients have not been established.

Renal impairment: No dose adjustment of metoprolol tartrate is required in patients with renal impairment.

Hepatic impairment: Metoprolol blood levels are likely to increase substantially in patients with hepatic impairment. Therefore, metoprolol tartrate should be initiated at low doses with cautious gradual dose titration according to clinical response.

Geriatric patients (>65 years): In general, use a low initial starting dose in elderly patients given their greater frequency of decreased hepatic, renal, or cardiac function, and of concomitant disease or other drug therapy.

Method of administration

Parenteral administration of metoprolol tartrate injection should be done in a setting with intensive monitoring.

Note

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Cefazolin

Cefazolin

2.1 Adult Population

The recommended adult dosages are outlined in Table 1. The intent of this pharmacy bulk package is for the preparation of solutions for IV infusion only.
* In rare instances, doses of up to 12 grams of cefazolin per day have been used.
Table 1: Recommended Dosing Schedule in Adult Patients with CrCl Greater Than or Equal To 55 mL/min.

Site and Type of Infection

Dose

Frequency

Moderate to severe infections

500 mg to 1 gram

every 6 to 8 hours

Mild infections caused bysusceptible gram-positive cocci

250 mg to 500 mg

every 8 hours

Acute, uncomplicated urinarytract infections

1 gram

every 12 hours

Pneumococcal pneumonia

500 mg

every 12 hours

Severe, life-threatening infections(e.g., endocarditis, septicemia)*

1 gram to 1.5 grams

every 6 hours

2.2 Perioperative Prophylactic Use

To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, recommended doses are:
• 1 to 2 grams IV administered 1/2 hour to 1 hour prior to the start of surgery. • For lengthy operative procedures (e.g., 2 hours or more), 500 mg to 1 gram IV during surgery (administration modified depending on the duration of the operative procedure). • 500 mg to 1 gram IV every 6 to 8 hours for 24 hours postoperatively.
It is important that (i) the preoperative dose be given just prior (1/2 hour to 1 hour) to the start of surgery so that adequate antibacterial concentrations are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial surgical incision; and (ii) cefazolin be administered, if necessary, at appropriate intervals during surgery to provide sufficient concentrations of the antibacterial drug at the anticipated moments of greatest exposure to infective organisms.

The prophylactic administration of cefazolin should usually be discontinued within a 24-hour period after the surgical procedure. In surgery where the occurrence of infection may be particularly devastating (e.g., open-heart surgery and prosthetic arthroplasty), the prophylactic administration of cefazolin may be continued for 3 to 5 days following the completion of surgery.

2.3 Patients with Renal Impairment

Cefazolin may be used in patients with renal impairment with the dosage adjustments outlined in Table 2. All reduced dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose appropriate to the severity of the infection.

Table 2: Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance

Dose

Frequency

55 mL/min. or greater

full dose

normal frequency

35 to 54 mL/min.

full dose

every 8 hours or longer

11 to 34 mL/min.

1/2 usual dose

every 12 hours

10 mL/min. or less

1/2 usual dose

every 18 to 24 hours

2.4 Pediatric Population

In pediatric patients, a total daily dosage of 25 to 50 mg per kg (approximately 10 to 20 mg per pound) of body weight, divided into 3 or 4 equal doses, is effective for most mild to moderately severe infections. Total daily dosage may be increased to 100 mg per kg (45 mg per pound) of body weight for severe infections. Since safety for use in premature infants and in neonates has not been established, the use of Cefazolin for Injection in these patients is not recommended.

Cefazolin may be used in pediatric patients with renal impairment with the dosage adjustments outlined in Table 3. All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.

Table 3: Dosage Adjustment for Pediatric Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance

Dose

Frequency

71 mL/min. or greater

full dose given inequally divided doses

normal frequency

70 to 41 mL/min.

60% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 12 hours

40 to 21 mL/min.

25% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 12 hours

20 to 5 mL/min. or less

10% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 24 hours

All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.

2.5 Preparation of Parenteral Solution

Parenteral drug products should be SHAKEN WELL when reconstituted, and inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solutions should be discarded.

Reconstituted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without a change in potency.

Directions for Proper Use of a Pharmacy Bulk Package

Not for direct infusion. This Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in a hospital pharmacy admixture service, only in a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. Using aseptic technique, the container closure may be penetrated only one time using a suitable sterile dispensing set or transfer device that allows measured dispensing of the contents. Use of a syringe and needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage. The withdrawal of container contents should be accomplished without delay. However, should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 HOURS from initial closure entry is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations. This time limit should begin with the introduction of the solvent or diluent into the Pharmacy Bulk Package. DISCARD ANY UNUSED PORTION AFTER 4 HOURS. THIS PHARMACY BULK PACKAGE IS NOT INTENDED TO BE DISPENSED AS A UNIT.

RECONSTITUTED BULK SOLUTION SHOULD NOT BE USED FOR DIRECT INFUSION.

Pharmacy Bulk Package

Reconstitute the pharmacy bulk package with Sterile Water for Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection according to the table below. SHAKE WELL. Use promptly. (Discard vial within 4 hours after initial entry.)

Vial Size

Amount of Diluent

Approximate Concentration

Approximate Available Volume

10 grams

45 mL

96 mL

1 gram/5 mL

1 gram/10 mL

51 mL

102 mL

2.7 Intravenous Administration

Intermittent or continuous infusion: Dilute reconstituted Cefazolin for Injection in 50 to 100 mL of one of the following solutions:

Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% or 10% Dextrose Injection, USP

5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP

Invert Sugar 5% or 10% in Sterile Water for Injection

Ringer’s Injection, USP

5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP

When reconstituted and further diluted according to the instructions above, cefazolin is stable for 24 hours at room temperature or for 10 days if stored under refrigeration (5°C or 41°F). Reconstituted or diluted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without change in potency.

Prior to administration parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit.
Terazosin Hydrochloride...

Terazosin Hydrochloride

If terazosin capsules administration is discontinued for several days, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen.

Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia

Initial Dose

1 mg at bedtime is the starting dose for all patients, and this dose should not be exceeded as an initial dose. Patients should be closely followed during initial administration in order to minimize the risk of severe hypotensive response.

Subsequent Doses

The dose should be increased in a stepwise fashion to 2 mg, 5 mg, or 10 mg once daily to achieve the desired improvement of symptoms and/or flow rates. Doses of 10 mg once daily are generally required for the clinical response. Therefore, treatment with 10 mg for a minimum of 4 to 6 weeks may be required to assess whether a beneficial response has been achieved. Some patients may not achieve a clinical response despite appropriate titration. Although some additional patients responded at a 20 mg daily dose, there was an insufficient number of patients studied to draw definitive conclusions about this dose. There are insufficient data to support the use of higher doses for those patients who show inadequate or no response to 20 mg daily. If terazosin administration is discontinued for several days or longer, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen.

Use With Other Drugs

Caution should be observed when terazosin capsules is administered concomitantly with other antihypertensive agents, especially the calcium channel blocker verapamil, to avoid the possibility of developing significant hypotension. When using terazosin capsules and other antihypertensive agents concomitantly, dosage reduction and retitration of either agent may be necessary (see PRECAUTIONS). Hypotension has been reported when terazosin capsules have been used with phosphodiesterase-5 (PDE-5) inhibitors.

Hypertension

The dose of terazosin capsules and the dose interval (12 or 24 hours) should be adjusted according to the patient’s individual blood pressure response. The following is a guide to its administration:

Initial Dose

1 mg at bedtime is the starting dose for all patients, and this dose should not be exceeded. This initial dosing regimen should be strictly observed to minimize the potential for severe hypotensive effects.

Subsequent Doses

The dose may be slowly increased to achieve the desired blood pressure response. The usual recommended dose range is 1 mg to 5 mg administered once a day; however, some patients may benefit from doses as high as 20 mg per day. Doses over 20 mg do not appear to provide further blood pressure effect and doses over 40 mg have not been studied. Blood pressure should be monitored at the end of the dosing interval to be sure control is maintained throughout the interval. It may also be helpful to measure blood pressure 2 to 3 hours after dosing to see if the maximum and minimum responses are similar, and to evaluate symptoms such as dizziness or palpitations which can result from excessive hypotensive response. If response is substantially diminished at 24 hours an increased dose or use of a twice daily regimen can be considered. If terazosin administration is discontinued for several days or longer, therapy should be reinstituted using the initial dosing regimen. In clinical trials, except for the initial dose, the dose was given in the morning.

Use With Other Drugs

(See above.)
Cefazolin

Cefazolin

2.1 Adult Population

The recommended adult dosages are outlined in Table 1. Cefazolin for Injection USP should be administered intravenously (IV) or intramuscularly (IM).
* In rare instances, doses of up to 12 grams of cefazolin per day have been used.
Table 1: Recommended Dosing Schedule in Adult Patients with CrCl Greater Than or Equal To 55 mL/min.

Site and Type of Infection

Dose

Frequency

Moderate to severe infections

500 mg to 1 gram

every 6 to 8 hours

Mild infections caused bysusceptible gram-positive cocci

250 mg to 500 mg

every 8 hours

Acute, uncomplicated urinarytract infections

1 gram

every 12 hours

Pneumococcal pneumonia

500 mg

every 12 hours

Severe, life-threatening infections(e.g., endocarditis, septicemia)*

1 gram to 1.5 grams

every 6 hours

2.2 Perioperative Prophylactic Use

To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, recommended doses are:
• 1 gram (IV or IM) or 2 grams IV administered 1/2 hour to 1 hour prior to the start of surgery. • For lengthy operative procedures (e.g., 2 hours or more), 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM during surgery (administration modified depending on the duration of the operative procedure). • 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM every 6 to 8 hours for 24 hours postoperatively.
It is important that (i) the preoperative dose be given just prior (1/2 hour to 1 hour) to the start of surgery so that adequate antibacterial concentrations are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial surgical incision; and (ii) cefazolin be administered, if necessary, at appropriate intervals during surgery to provide sufficient concentrations of the antibacterial drug at the anticipated moments of greatest exposure to infective organisms.

The prophylactic administration of cefazolin should usually be discontinued within a 24-hour period after the surgical procedure. In surgery where the occurrence of infection may be particularly devastating (e.g., open-heart surgery and prosthetic arthroplasty), the prophylactic administration of cefazolin may be continued for 3 to 5 days following the completion of surgery.

2.3 Patients with Renal Impairment

Cefazolin may be used in patients with renal impairment with the dosage adjustments outlined in Table 2. All reduced dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose appropriate to the severity of the infection.

Table 2: Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance

Dose

Frequency

55 mL/min. or greater

full dose

normal frequency

35 to 54 mL/min.

full dose

every 8 hours or longer

11 to 34 mL/min.

1/2 usual dose

every 12 hours

10 mL/min. or less

1/2 usual dose

every 18 to 24 hours

2.4 Pediatric Population

In pediatric patients, a total daily dosage of 25 to 50 mg per kg (approximately 10 to 20 mg per pound) of body weight, divided into 3 or 4 equal doses, is effective for most mild to moderately severe infections. Total daily dosage may be increased to 100 mg per kg (45 mg per pound) of body weight for severe infections. Since safety for use in premature infants and in neonates has not been established, the use of Cefazolin for Injection in these patients is not recommended.

Pediatric Dosage Guide

Weight

25 mg/kg/day Divided into 3 Doses

25 mg/kg/day Divided into 4 Doses

lbs

kg

ApproximateSingle Dose(mg/q8 h)

Vol. (mL)Needed withDilution of125 mg/mL

ApproximateSingle Dose(mg/q6 h)

Vol. (mL)Needed withDilution of125 mg/mL

10

4.5

40 mg

0.35 mL

30 mg

0.25 mL

20

9

75 mg

0.6 mL

55 mg

0.45 mL

30

13.6

115 mg

0.9 mL

85 mg

0.7 mL

40

18.1

150 mg

1.2 mL

115 mg

0.9 mL

50

22.7

190 mg

1.5 mL

140 mg

1.1 mL

Weight

50 mg/kg/day Divided into 3 Doses

50 mg/kg/day Divided into 4 Doses

lbs

kg

ApproximateSingle Dose(mg/q8 h)

Vol. (mL)Needed withDilution of225 mg/mL

ApproximateSingle Dose(mg/q6 h)

Vol. (mL)Needed withDilution of225 mg/mL

10

4.5

75 mg

0.35 mL

55 mg

0.25 mL

20

9

150 mg

0.7 mL

110 mg

0.5 mL

30

13.6

225 mg

1 mL

170 mg

0.75 mL

40

18.1

300 mg

1.35 mL

225 mg

1 mL

50

22.7

375 mg

1.7 mL

285 mg

1.25 mL

Cefazolin may be used in pediatric patients with renal impairment with the dosage adjustments outlined in Table 3. All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.

Table 3: Dosage Adjustment for Pediatric Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance

Dose

Frequency

71 mL/min. or greater

full dose given inequally divided doses

normal frequency

70 to 41 mL/min.

60% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 12 hours

40 to 21 mL/min.

25% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 12 hours

20 to 5 mL/min. or less

10% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 24 hours

All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.

2.5 Preparation of Parenteral Solution

Parenteral drug products should be SHAKEN WELL when reconstituted, and inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solutions should be discarded.

When reconstituted or diluted according to the instructions below, cefazolin is stable for 24 hours at room temperature or for 10 days if stored under refrigeration (5°C or 41°F). Reconstituted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without a change in potency.

Single-Dose Vials

For IM injection, IV direct (bolus) injection or IV infusion, reconstitute with Sterile Water for Injection according to the following table. SHAKE WELL.

Vial Size

Amount of Diluent

Approximate Concentration

Approximate Available Volume

500 mg

2 mL

225 mg/mL

2.2 mL

2.6 Intramuscular Administration

Reconstitute vials with Sterile Water for Injection according to the dilution table above. Shake well until dissolved. Cefazolin for Injection should be injected into a large muscle mass. Pain on injection is infrequent with Cefazolin for Injection.

2.7 Intravenous Administration

Direct (bolus) injection: Following reconstitution according to the above table, further dilute vials with approximately 5 mL Sterile Water for Injection. Inject the solution slowly over 3 to 5 minutes, directly or through tubing for patients receiving parenteral fluids (see list below).

Intermittent or continuous infusion: Dilute reconstituted Cefazolin for Injection in 50 to 100 mL of one of the following solutions:

Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% or 10% Dextrose Injection, USP

5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP

Invert Sugar 5% or 10% in Sterile Water for Injection

Ringer’s Injection, USP

5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP

Prior to administration parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit.
Cefazolin

Cefazolin

2.1 Adult Population

The recommended adult dosages are outlined in Table 1. Cefazolin for Injection USP should be administered intravenously (IV) or intramuscularly (IM).
* In rare instances, doses of up to 12 grams of cefazolin per day have been used.
Table 1: Recommended Dosing Schedule in Adult Patients with CrCl Greater Than or Equal To 55 mL/min.

Site and Type of Infection

Dose

Frequency

Moderate to severe infections

500 mg to 1 gram

every 6 to 8 hours

Mild infections caused bysusceptible gram-positive cocci

250 mg to 500 mg

every 8 hours

Acute, uncomplicated urinarytract infections

1 gram

every 12 hours

Pneumococcal pneumonia

500 mg

every 12 hours

Severe, life-threatening infections(e.g., endocarditis, septicemia)*

1 gram to 1.5 grams

every 6 hours

2.2 Perioperative Prophylactic Use

To prevent postoperative infection in contaminated or potentially contaminated surgery, recommended doses are:
• 1 gram (IV or IM) or 2 grams IV administered 1/2 hour to 1 hour prior to the start of surgery. • For lengthy operative procedures (e.g., 2 hours or more), 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM during surgery (administration modified depending on the duration of the operative procedure). • 500 mg to 1 gram IV or IM every 6 to 8 hours for 24 hours postoperatively.
It is important that (i) the preoperative dose be given just prior (1/2 hour to 1 hour) to the start of surgery so that adequate antibacterial concentrations are present in the serum and tissues at the time of initial surgical incision; and (ii) cefazolin be administered, if necessary, at appropriate intervals during surgery to provide sufficient concentrations of the antibacterial drug at the anticipated moments of greatest exposure to infective organisms.

The prophylactic administration of cefazolin should usually be discontinued within a 24-hour period after the surgical procedure. In surgery where the occurrence of infection may be particularly devastating (e.g., open-heart surgery and prosthetic arthroplasty), the prophylactic administration of cefazolin may be continued for 3 to 5 days following the completion of surgery.

2.3 Patients with Renal Impairment

Cefazolin may be used in patients with renal impairment with the dosage adjustments outlined in Table 2. All reduced dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose appropriate to the severity of the infection.

Table 2: Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance

Dose

Frequency

55 mL/min. or greater

full dose

normal frequency

35 to 54 mL/min.

full dose

every 8 hours or longer

11 to 34 mL/min.

1/2 usual dose

every 12 hours

10 mL/min. or less

1/2 usual dose

every 18 to 24 hours

2.4 Pediatric Population

In pediatric patients, a total daily dosage of 25 to 50 mg per kg (approximately 10 to 20 mg per pound) of body weight, divided into 3 or 4 equal doses, is effective for most mild to moderately severe infections. Total daily dosage may be increased to 100 mg per kg (45 mg per pound) of body weight for severe infections. Since safety for use in premature infants and in neonates has not been established, the use of Cefazolin for Injection in these patients is not recommended.

Pediatric Dosage Guide

Weight

25 mg/kg/day Divided into 3 Doses

25 mg/kg/day Divided into 4 Doses

lbs

kg

ApproximateSingle Dose(mg/q8 h)

Vol. (mL)Needed withDilution of125 mg/mL

ApproximateSingle Dose(mg/q6 h)

Vol. (mL)Needed withDilution of125 mg/mL

10

4.5

40 mg

0.35 mL

30 mg

0.25 mL

20

9

75 mg

0.6 mL

55 mg

0.45 mL

30

13.6

115 mg

0.9 mL

85 mg

0.7 mL

40

18.1

150 mg

1.2 mL

115 mg

0.9 mL

50

22.7

190 mg

1.5 mL

140 mg

1.1 mL

Weight

50 mg/kg/day Divided into 3 Doses

50 mg/kg/day Divided into 4 Doses

lbs

kg

ApproximateSingle Dose(mg/q8 h)

Vol. (mL)Needed withDilution of225 mg/mL

ApproximateSingle Dose(mg/q6 h)

Vol. (mL)Needed withDilution of225 mg/mL

10

4.5

75 mg

0.35 mL

55 mg

0.25 mL

20

9

150 mg

0.7 mL

110 mg

0.5 mL

30

13.6

225 mg

1 mL

170 mg

0.75 mL

40

18.1

300 mg

1.35 mL

225 mg

1 mL

50

22.7

375 mg

1.7 mL

285 mg

1.25 mL

Cefazolin may be used in pediatric patients with renal impairment with the dosage adjustments outlined in Table 3. All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.

Table 3: Dosage Adjustment for Pediatric Patients with Renal Impairment

Creatinine Clearance

Dose

Frequency

71 mL/min. or greater

full dose given inequally divided doses

normal frequency

70 to 41 mL/min.

60% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 12 hours

40 to 21 mL/min.

25% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 12 hours

20 to 5 mL/min. or less

10% of usual dose given inequally divided doses

every 24 hours

All dosage recommendations apply after an initial loading dose.

2.5 Preparation of Parenteral Solution

Parenteral drug products should be SHAKEN WELL when reconstituted, and inspected visually for particulate matter prior to administration. If particulate matter is evident in reconstituted fluids, the drug solutions should be discarded.

When reconstituted or diluted according to the instructions below, cefazolin is stable for 24 hours at room temperature or for 10 days if stored under refrigeration (5°C or 41°F). Reconstituted solutions may range in color from pale yellow to yellow without a change in potency.

Single-Dose Vials

For IM injection, IV direct (bolus) injection or IV infusion, reconstitute with Sterile Water for Injection according to the following table. SHAKE WELL.

Vial Size

Amount of Diluent

Approximate Concentration

Approximate Available Volume

500 mg

2 mL

225 mg/mL

2.2 mL

1 gram

2.5 mL

330 mg/mL

3 mL

2.6 Intramuscular Administration

Reconstitute vials with Sterile Water for Injection according to the dilution table above. Shake well until dissolved. Cefazolin for Injection should be injected into a large muscle mass. Pain on injection is infrequent with Cefazolin for Injection.

2.7 Intravenous Administration

Direct (bolus) injection: Following reconstitution according to the above table, further dilute vials with approximately 5 mL Sterile Water for Injection. Inject the solution slowly over 3 to 5 minutes, directly or through tubing for patients receiving parenteral fluids (see list below).

Intermittent or continuous infusion: Dilute reconstituted Cefazolin for Injection in 50 to 100 mL of one of the following solutions:

Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% or 10% Dextrose Injection, USP

5% Dextrose in Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and 0.2% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Lactated Ringer’s Injection, USP

Invert Sugar 5% or 10% in Sterile Water for Injection

Ringer’s Injection, USP

5% Sodium Bicarbonate Injection, USP

Prior to administration parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit.
Metronidazole Gel

Metronidazole Gel

Apply and rub in a thin film of metronidazole gel USP, 1% once daily to affected area(s).

A gentle cleanser should be used before the application of metronidazole gel USP, 1%.

Cosmetics may be applied after the application of metronidazole gel USP, 1%.

Not for oral, ophthalmic or intravaginal use.
Zolpidem Tartrate

Zolpidem Tartrate

2.1 Schizophrenia

Dose Selection

Ziprasidone hydrochloride capsules should be administered at an initial daily dose of 20 mg twice daily with food. In some patients, daily dosage may subsequently be adjusted on the basis of individual clinical status up to 80 mg twice daily. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should generally occur at intervals of not less than 2 days, as steady-state is achieved within 1 to 3 days. In order to ensure use of the lowest effective dose, patients should ordinarily be observed for improvement for several weeks before upward dosage adjustment.

Efficacy in schizophrenia was demonstrated in a dose range of 20 mg to 100 mg twice daily in short-term, placebo-controlled clinical trials. There were trends toward dose response within the range of 20 mg to 80 mg twice daily, but results were not consistent. An increase to a dose greater than 80 mg twice daily is not generally recommended. The safety of doses above 100 mg twice daily has not been systematically evaluated in clinical trials [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

Maintenance Treatment

While there is no body of evidence available to answer the question of how long a patient treated with ziprasidone should remain on it, a maintenance study in patients who had been symptomatically stable and then randomized to continue ziprasidone or switch to placebo demonstrated a delay in time to relapse for patients receiving ziprasidone hydrochloride capsules. [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. No additional benefit was demonstrated for doses above 20 mg twice daily. Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Dosing in Special Populations

Oral: Dosage adjustments are generally not required on the basis of age, gender, race, or renal or hepatic impairment. Ziprasidone hydrochloride capsules are not approved for use in children or adolescents.
Nighttime Sleep Aid

Nighttime Sleep Aid

The penicillinase-resistant penicillins are available for oral administration and for intramuscular and intravenous injection. The sodium salts of methicillin, oxacillin, and nafcillin may be administered parenterally and the sodium salts of cloxacillin, dicloxacillin, oxacillin, and nafcillin are available for oral use.

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to oxacillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient, therefore it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with oxacillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer term of therapy.

Concurrent administration of oxacillin and probenecid increases and prolongs serum penicillin levels. Probenecid decreases the apparent volume of distribution and slows the rate of excretion by competitively inhibiting renal tubular secretion of penicillin. Penicillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of penicillin are necessary.

Oral preparations of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins should not be used as initial therapy in serious, life-threatening infections (See PRECAUTIONS: General). Oral therapy with the penicillinase-resistant penicillins may be used to follow-up the previous use of a parenteral agent as soon as the clinical condition warrants. With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.

Recommended Dosages for Oxacillin Sodium for Injection, USP

In ADD-Vantage® System: For Intravenous Use Only

Adults: 1 to 6 grams per 24-hour period.

NOTE: For doses smaller than 1 gram use the conventional vial. Insert for conventional vial lists dosages for infants and children.

Directions for use

Oxacillin for Injection Vials in the ADD-Vantage® Drug Delivery System are for intravenous use only and are to be used with ADDVantage® diluent containers of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, 50 mL and 100 mL, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, 50 mL and 100 mL.

Reconstitute ADD-Vantage® vials as directed in the INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE section.

Only 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, and 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, are available for use in the ADD-Vantage® Delivery System for intravenous infusion of Oxacillin Sodium. The concentration of the antibiotic should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of oxacillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

If another agent is used in conjunction with oxacillin therapy, it should not be physically mixed with oxacillin but should be administered separately.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open Diluent Container:

Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Do not access vial with syringe. b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.) 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (SEE FIGURE 4.) 3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately.
To Prepare Admixture:
1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.) 3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.
Preparation for Administration:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

At concentrations ranging from 10 to 40 mg/mL in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, Oxacillin will have utility times of 4 days at room temperature (25°C).

In 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, at concentrations from 10 to 40 mg/mL Oxacillin will have utility times of 6 hours at room temperature (25°C).
Amoxicillin Capsule Amo...

Amoxicillin Capsule Amoxicillin

2.1 Dosing for Adult and Pediatric Patients > 3 Months of Age

Except for gonorrhea, treatment should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. It is recommended that there be at least 10 days’ treatment for any infection caused by Streptococcus pyogenesto prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever. In some infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.
Table 1. Dosing Recommendations for Adult and Pediatric Patients > 3 Months of Age Infection Severity* Usual Adult Dose Usual Dose for Children> 3 Months† * Dosing for infections caused by bacteria that are intermediate in their susceptibility to amoxicillin should follow the recommendations for severe infections. † The children’s dosage is intended for individuals whose weight is less than 40 kg. Children weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to the adult recommendations. Ear/Nose/Throat Skin/Skin Structure Genitourinary Tract
Mild/Moderate
500 mg every 12 hours or 250 mg every 8 hours 25 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours or 20 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 8 hours
Severe
875 mg every 12 hours or 500 mg every 8 hours 45 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours or 40 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 8 hours Lower Respiratory Tract Mild/Moderate or Severe 875 mg every 12 hours or 500 mg every 8 hours 45 mg/kg/day in divided doses every 12 hours
or

40 mg/kg/day in divided doses

every 8 hours

Gonorrhea

Acute, uncomplicated

ano-genital and urethral infections in males and females

3 grams as single oral dose

Prepubertal children:

50 mg/kg amoxicillin, combined with 25 mg/kg probenecid as a single dose.

Note: since probenecid is contraindicated in children under 2 years, do not use this regimen in children under 2 years of age.

2.2 Dosing in Neonates and Infants Aged ≤ 12 Weeks (≤ 3 Months)

Treatment should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. It is recommended that there be at least 10 days’ treatment for any infection caused by Streptococcus pyogenesto prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever. Due to incompletely developed renal function affecting elimination of amoxicillin in this age group, the recommended upper dose of amoxicillin is 30 mg/kg/day divided every 12 hours. There are currently no dosing recommendations for pediatric patients with impaired renal function.

2.3 Dosing for H. pylori Infection

Triple therapy: The recommended adult oral dose is 1 gram amoxicillin, 500 mg clarithromycin, and 30 mg lansoprazole, all given twice daily (every 12 hours) for 14 days.

Dual therapy: The recommended adult oral dose is 1 gram amoxicillin and 30 mg lansoprazole, each given three times daily (every 8 hours) for 14 days.

Please refer to clarithromycin and lansoprazole full prescribing information.

2.4 Dosing in Renal Impairment
• Patients with impaired renal function do not generally require a reduction in dose unless the impairment is severe. • Severely impaired patients with a glomerular filtration rate of < 30 mL/min. should not receive a 875-mg dose. • Patients with a glomerular filtration rate of 10 to 30 mL/min should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 12 hours, depending on the severity of the infection. • Patients with a glomerular filtration rate less than 10 mL/min should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. • Hemodialysis patients should receive 500 mg or 250 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. They should receive an additional dose both during and at the end of dialysis.
2.5 Directions for Mixing Oral Suspension

Tap bottle until all powder flows freely. Add approximately 1/3 of the total amount of water for reconstitution (see Table 2) and shake vigorously to wet powder. Add remainder of the water and again shake vigorously.
Table 2. Amount of Water for Mixing Oral Suspension Strength Bottle Size Amount of Water Required for Reconstitution
Oral Suspension 125 mg/5 mL

80 mL

55 mL

100 mL

68 mL

150 mL

102 mL

Oral Suspension 200 mg/5 mL

50 mL

34 mL

75 mL

51 mL

100 mL

68 mL

Oral Suspension 250 mg/5 mL

80 mL

55 mL

100 mL

68 mL

150 mL

102 mL

Oral Suspension 400 mg/5 mL

50 mL

34 mL

75 mL

51 mL

100 mL

68 mL

After reconstitution, the required amount of suspension should be placed directly on the child’s tongue for swallowing. Alternate means of administration are to add the required amount of suspension to formula, milk, fruit juice, water, ginger ale, or cold drinks. These preparations should then be taken immediately.

NOTE: SHAKE ORAL SUSPENSION WELL BEFORE USING. Keep bottle tightly closed. Any unused portion of the reconstituted suspension must be discarded after 14 days. Refrigeration is preferable, but not required.
Amoxicillin And Clavula...

Amoxicillin And Clavulanate Potassium

Amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium may be taken without regard to meals; however, absorption of clavulanate potassium is enhanced when amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium is administered at the start of a meal. To minimize the potential for gastrointestinal intolerance, amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium should be taken at the start of a meal.

2.1 Adults

The usual adult dose is one amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium tablet, 500 mg/125 mg every 12 hours or one amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium tablet, 250 mg/125 mg every 8 hours. For more severe infections and infections of the respiratory tract, the dose should be one amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium tablet, 875 mg/125 mg every 12 hours or one amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium tablet, 500 mg/125 mg every 8 hours. Adults who have difficulty swallowing may be given the 125 mg/5 mL or 250 mg/5 mL suspension in place of the 500 mg/125 mg tablet. The 200 mg/5 mL suspension or the 400 mg/5 mL suspension may be used in place of the 875 mg/125 mg tablet.

Two 250 mg/125 mg tablets of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium should not be substituted for one 500 mg/125 mg tablet of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium. Since both the 250 mg/125 mg and 500 mg/125 mg tablets of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium contain the same amount of clavulanic acid (125 mg, as the potassium salt), two 250 mg/125 mg tablets are not equivalent to one 500 mg/125 mg tablet of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium.

The 250 mg/125 mg tablet of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium and the 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet should not be substituted for each other, as they are not interchangeable. The 250 mg/125 mg tablet of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium and the 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet do not contain the same amount of clavulanic acid (as the potassium salt). The 250 mg/125 mg tablet of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium contains 125 mg of clavulanic acid, whereas the 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet contains 62.5 mg of clavulanic acid.

2.2 Pediatric Patients

Based on the amoxicillin component, amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium should be dosed as follows:

Neonates and Infants Aged < 12 weeks (< 3 months)

The recommended dose of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium is 30 mg/kg/day divided every 12 hours, based on the amoxicillin component. Experience with the 200 mg/28.5 mg/5 mL formulation in this age group is limited, and thus, use of the 125 mg/31.25 mg/5 mL oral suspension is recommended.

Patients Aged 12 weeks (3 months) and Older

See dosing regimens provided in Table 1. The every 12 hour regimen is recommended as it is associated with significantly less diarrhea [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

Table 1: Dosing in Patients Aged 12 weeks (3 months) and Older
* Each strength of suspension of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium is available as a chewable tablet for use by older children. † Duration of therapy studied and recommended for acute otitis media is 10 days.
INFECTION

DOSING REGIMEN

Every 12 hours

Every 8 hours

200 mg/28.5 mg/5 mL or

400 mg/57 mg/5 mL oral suspension*

125 mg/31.25 mg/5 mL or 250 mg/62.5 mg/5 mL oral suspension*

Otitis media†, sinusitis, lower respiratory tract infections, and more severe infections

45 mg/kg/day every 12 hours

40 mg/kg/day every 8 hours

Less severe infections

25 mg/kg/day every 12 hours

20 mg/kg/day every 8 hours

Patients Weighing 40 kg or More

Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations.

The 250 mg/125 mg tablet of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium should not be used until the child weighs at least 40 kg, due to the different amoxicillin to clavulanic acid ratios in the 250 mg/125 mg tablet of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium (250/125) versus the 250 mg/62.5 mg chewable tablet of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium (250/62.5).

2.3 Patients with Renal Impairment

Patients with impaired renal function do not generally require a reduction in dose unless the impairment is severe. Renal impairment patients with a glomerular filtration rate of < 30 mL/min should not receive the 875 mg/125 mg dose. Patients with a glomerular filtration rate of 10 to 30 mL/min should receive 500 mg/125 mg or 250 mg/125 mg every 12 hours, depending on the severity of the infection. Patients with a glomerular filtration rate less than 10 mL/min should receive 500 mg/125 mg or 250 mg/125 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection.

Hemodialysis patients should receive 500 mg/125 mg or 250 mg/125 mg every 24 hours, depending on severity of the infection. They should receive an additional dose both during and at the end of dialysis.

2.4 Directions for Mixing Oral Suspension

Prepare a suspension at time of dispensing as follows: Tap bottle until all the powder flows freely. Add approximately 2/3 of the total amount of water for reconstitution (see Table 2 below) and shake vigorously to suspend powder. Add remainder of the water and again shake vigorously.

Table 2: Amount of Water for Mixing Oral Suspension

Strength

Bottle Size

Amount of Water for Reconstitution

Contents of Each Teaspoonful (5 mL)

200 mg/28.5 mg/5 mL

50 mL

75 mL

100 mL

47 mL

70 mL

93 mL

200 mg amoxicillin and 28.5 mg of clavulanic acid as the potassium salt

400 mg/57 mg/5 mL

50 mL

75 mL

100 mL

45 mL

67 mL

89 mL

400 mg amoxicillin and 57 mg of clavulanic acid as the potassium salt

Note: Shake oral suspension well before using. Reconstituted suspension must be stored under refrigeration and discarded after 10 days.
Griseofulvin

Griseofulvin

Accurate diagnosis of the infecting organism is essential. Identification should be made either by direct microscopic examination of a mounting of infected tissue in a solution of potassium hydroxide or by culture on an appropriate medium.

Medication must be continued until the infecting organism is completely eradicated as indicated by appropriate clinical or laboratory examination. Representative treatment periods are tinea capitis, 4 to 6 weeks; tinea corporis, 2 to 4 weeks; tinea pedis, 4 to 8 weeks; tinea unguium – depending on rate of growth – fingernails, at least 4 months; toenails, at least 6 months.

General measures in regard to hygiene should be observed to control sources of infection or reinfection. Concomitant use of appropriate topical agents is usually required, particularly in treatment of tinea pedis. In some forms of tinea pedis, yeasts and bacteria may be involved as well as dermatophytes. Griseofulvin tablets, USP will not eradicate these associated bacterial or yeast infections.

ADULTS: 0.5 g daily (125 mg q.i.d., 250 mg b.i.d., or 500 mg/day). Patients with less severe or 300 extensive infections may require less, whereas those with widespread lesions may require a starting dose of 0.75 g to 1 g/day. This may be reduced gradually to 0.5 g or less after a response has been noted. In all cases, the dosage should be individualized.

PEDIATRIC PATIENTS (older than 2 years): A dosage of 10 mg/kg daily is usually adequate (pediatric patients from 30 to 50 lb, 125 mg to 250 mg daily; pediatric patients over 50 lb, 250 mg to 500 mg daily, in divided doses). Dosage should be individualized, as with adults. Clinical relapse will occur if the medication is not continued until the infecting organism is eradicated.

Safety is not established at higher doses than recommended.
Famciclovir

Famciclovir

Famciclovir may be taken with or without food.

2.1 Dosing Recommendation in Immunocompetent Adult Patients

Herpes labialis (cold sores): The recommended dosage of famciclovir for the treatment of recurrent herpes labialis is 1500 mg as a single dose. Therapy should be initiated at the first sign or symptom of herpes labialis (e.g., tingling, itching, burning, pain, or lesion).

Genital herpes:

Recurrent episodes: The recommended dosage of famciclovir for the treatment of recurrent episodes of genital herpes is 1000 mg twice daily for 1 day. Therapy should be initiated at the first sign or symptom of a recurrent episode (e.g., tingling, itching, burning, pain, or lesion).

Suppressive therapy: The recommended dosage of famciclovir for chronic suppressive therapy of recurrent episodes of genital herpes is 250 mg twice daily.

Herpes zoster (shingles): The recommended dosage of famciclovir for the treatment of herpes zoster is 500 mg every 8 hours for 7 days. Therapy should be initiated as soon as herpes zoster is diagnosed.

2.2 Dosing Recommendation in HIV-Infected Adult Patients

Recurrent orolabial or genital herpes: The recommended dosage of famciclovir for the treatment of recurrent orolabial or genital herpes in HIV-infected patients is 500 mg twice daily for 7 days. Therapy should be initiated at the first sign or symptom of a recurrent episode (e.g., tingling, itching, burning, pain, or lesion).

2.3 Dosing Recommendation in Patients with Renal Impairment

Dosage recommendations for adult patients with renal impairment are provided in Table 1 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Table 1 Dosage Recommendations for Adult Patients with Renal Impairment *Hemodialysis Indication and Normal Dosage Regimen Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Adjusted Dosage Regimen Dose (mg) Dosing Interval Single-Day Dosing Regimens Recurrent Genital Herpes1000 mg every 12 hours for 1 day ≥60 1000 every 12 hours for 1 day 40-59 500 every 12 hours for 1 day 20-39 500 single dose <20 250 single dose HD* 250 single dose following dialysis Recurrent Herpes Labialis1500 mg single dose ≥60 1500 single dose 40-59 750 single dose 20-39 500 single dose <20 250 single dose HD* 250 single dose following dialysis Multiple-Day Dosing Regimens Herpes Zoster500 mg every 8 hours ≥60 500 every 8 hours 40-59 500 every 12 hours 20-39 500 every 24 hours <20 250 every 24 hours HD* 250 following each dialysis Suppression of Recurrent Genital Herpes 250 mg every 12 hours ≥40 250 every 12 hours 20-39 125 every 12 hours <20 125 every 24 hours HD* 125 following each dialysis Recurrent Orolabial or Genital Herpes in HIV-Infected Patients 500 mg every 12 hours ≥40 500 every 12 hours 20-39 500 every 24 hours <20 250 every 24 hours HD* 250 following each dialysis
Allergy Medicine

Allergy Medicine

Amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, USP does not contain the same amount of clavulanic acid (as the potassium salt) as any of the other suspensions of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium. Amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, USP contains 42.9 mg of clavulanic acid per 5 mL, whereas the 200 mg/5 mL suspension of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium contains 28.5 mg of clavulanic acid per 5 mL and the 400 mg/5 mL suspension contains 57 mg of clavulanic acid per 5 mL. Therefore, the 200 mg/28.5 mg per 5 mL and 400 mg/57 mg per 5 mL suspensions of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium should notbe substituted for amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, USP as they are not interchangeable.

Dosage

Pediatric Patients 3 Months and Older

Based on the amoxicillin component (600 mg per 5 mL), the recommended dose of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, USP is 90 mg/kg/day divided every 12 hours, administered for 10 days (see chart below). This dose provides 6.4 mg/kg/day of the clavulanic acid component.

Body Weight (kg)

Volume of Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension, USP Providing 90 mg/kg/day

8

3 mL twice daily

12

4.5 mL twice daily

16

6 mL twice daily

20

7.5 mL twice daily

24

9 mL twice daily

28

10.5 mL twice daily

32

12 mL twice daily

36

13.5 mL twice daily

Pediatric Patients Weighing 40 kg and More

Experience with amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, USP in this group is not available.

Adults

Experience with amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, USP in adults is not available and adults who have difficulty swallowing should not be given amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium for oral suspension, USP in place of the 500-mg or 875-mg tablet of amoxicillin and clavulanate potassium.

Hepatically impaired patients should be dosed with caution and hepatic function monitored at regular intervals (see WARNINGSAND PRECAUTIONS(5).

Directions for Mixing Oral Suspension

Prepare a suspension at time of dispensing as follows: Tap bottle until all the powder flows freely. Add approximately 2/3 of the total amount of water for reconstitution (see table below) and shake vigorously to suspend powder. Add remainder of the water and again shake vigorously.

Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension

Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension

Bottle Size

Amount of Water Required for Reconstitution

75 mL

62 mL

125 mL

103 mL

200 mL

165 mL

Each teaspoonful (5 mL) will contain 600 mg amoxicillin as the trihydrate and 42.9 mg of clavulanic acid as the potassium salt.

NOTE: SHAKE ORAL SUSPENSION WELL BEFORE USING.

Administration

To minimize the potential for gastrointestinal intolerance, Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension, USP should be taken at the start of a meal. Absorption of clavulanate potassium may be enhanced when Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium for Oral Suspension, USP is administered at the start of a meal.
Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone may be administered intravenously or intramuscularly. However, the intent of this Pharmacy Bulk Package is for the preparation of solutions for intravenous infusion only. Ceftriaxone for injection should be administered intravenously by infusion over a period of 30 minutes.

Do not use diluents containing calcium, such as Ringer's solution or Hartmann's solution, to reconstitute ceftriaxone vials or to further dilute a reconstituted vial for IV administration because a precipitate can form. Precipitation of ceftriaxone-calcium can also occur when ceftriaxone is mixed with calcium-containing solutions in the same IV administration line. Ceftriaxone must not be administered simultaneously with calcium-containing IV solutions, including continuous calcium-containing infusions such as parenteral nutrition via a Y-site. However, in patients other than neonates, ceftriaxone and calcium-containing solutions may be administered sequentially of one another if the infusion lines are thoroughly flushed between infusions with a compatible fluid (see WARNINGS).

There have been no reports of an interaction between ceftriaxone and oral calcium-containing products or interaction between intramuscular ceftriaxone and calcium-containing products (IV or oral).

Neonates

Hyperbilirubinemic neonates, especially prematures, should not be treated with ceftriaxone for injection (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Ceftriaxone is contraindicated in neonates if they require (or are expected to require) treatment with calcium-containing IV solutions, including continuous calcium-containing infusions such as parenteral nutrition because of the risk of precipitation of ceftriaxone-calcium (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Pediatric Patients

For the treatment of skin and skin structure infections, the recommended total daily dose is 50 to 75 mg/kg given once a day (or in equally divided doses twice a day). The total daily dose should not exceed 2 grams.

For the treatment of serious miscellaneous infections other than meningitis, the recommended total daily dose is 50 to 75 mg/kg, given in divided doses every 12 hours. The total daily dose should not exceed 2 grams.

In the treatment of meningitis, it is recommended that the initial therapeutic dose be 100 mg/kg (not to exceed 4 grams). Thereafter, a total daily dose of 100 mg/kg/day (not to exceed 4 grams daily) is recommended. The daily dose may be administered once a day (or in equally divided doses every 12 hours). The usual duration of therapy is 7 to 14 days.

Adults

The usual adult daily dose is 1 to 2 grams given once a day (or in equally divided doses twice a day) depending on the type and severity of infection. For infections caused by Staphylococcus aureus(MSSA), the recommended daily dose is 2 to 4 grams, in order to achieve >90% target attainment. The total daily dose should not exceed 4 grams.

If Chlamydia trachomatis is a suspected pathogen, appropriate antichlamydial coverage should be added, because ceftriaxone sodium has no activity against this organism.

For preoperative use (surgical prophylaxis), a single dose of 1 gram administered intravenously 1/2 to 2 hours before surgery is recommended.

Generally, ceftriaxone therapy should be continued for at least 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared. The usual duration of therapy is 4 to 14 days; in complicated infections, longer therapy may be required.

When treating infections caused by Streptococcus pyogenes, therapy should be continued for at least 10 days.

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with impairment of renal or hepatic function.

DIRECTIONS FOR PROPER USE OF PHARMACY BULK PACKAGE

PHARMACY BULK PACKAGENOT FOR DIRECT INFUSION

RECONSTITUTED STOCK SOLUTION MUST BE TRANSFERRED AND FURTHER DILUTED FOR I.V. INFUSION

The 10 gram vial should be reconstituted with 95 mL of an appropriate IV diluent in a suitable work area such as a laminar flow hood. The resulting solution will contain approximately 100 mg/mL of ceftriaxone.

The container closure may be penetrated only one time, utilizing a suitable sterile transfer device or dispensing set which allows measured distribution of the contents. (A sterile substance which must be reconstituted prior to use may require a separate closure entry.) Use of this product is restricted to a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood.

The withdrawal of container contents should be accomplished without delay. However, should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 hours from initial closure entry is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations. If reconstitution is necessary, this time limit should begin with the introduction of solvent or diluent into the Pharmacy Bulk Package.

Unused portions of solution held longer than the recommended time periods should be discarded.

Reconstituted Bulk Solutions Should Not Be Used For Direct Infusion.

Transfer individual dose to appropriate intravenous solutions as soon as possible following reconstitution of the bulk package. The stability of the solution that has been transferred into a container varies according to diluent, concentration and temperature (see Compatibility and Stability). Concentrations between 10 mg/mL and 40 mg/mL are recommended; however lower concentrations may be used if desired.

Compatibility and Stability

Ceftriaxone has been shown to be compatible with Flagyl® IV (metronidazole hydrochloride). The concentration should not exceed 5 to 7.5 mg/mL metronidazole hydrochloride with ceftriaxone 10 mg/mL as an admixture. The admixture is stable for 24 hours at room temperature only in 0.9% sodium chloride injection or 5% dextrose in water (D5W). No compatibility studies have been conducted with the Flagyl® IV RTU® (metronidazole) formulation or using other diluents. Metronidazole at concentrations greater than 8 mg/mL will precipitate. Do not refrigerate the admixture as precipitation will occur.

Vancomycin, amsacrine, aminoglycosides, and fluconazole are physically incompatible with ceftriaxone in admixtures. When any of these drugs are to be administered concomitantly with ceftriaxone by intermittent intravenous infusion, it is recommended that they be given sequentially, with thorough flushing of the intravenous lines (with one of the compatible fluids) between the administrations.

Do not use diluents containing calcium, such as Ringer’s solution or Hartmann’s solution, to reconstitute ceftriaxone for injection or to further dilute a reconstituted vial for IV administration. Particulate formation can result.

Ceftriaxone for injection solutions should not be physically mixed with or piggybacked into solutions containing other antimicrobial drugs or into diluent solutions other than those listed above, due to possible incompatibility (see WARNINGS).

Ceftriaxone sodium sterile powder should be stored at 20°-25°C (68°-77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature] and protected from light. After reconstitution, protection from normal light is not necessary. The color of solutions ranges from light yellow to amber, depending on the length of storage, concentration and diluent used.

Ceftriaxone intravenous solutions, at concentrations of 10, 20 and 40 mg/mL, remain stable (loss of potency less than 10%) for the following time periods stored in glass or PVC containers:
* Data available for 10 to 40 mg/mL concentrations in this diluent in PVC containers only.
Diluent

Storage

Room Temp.

(25°C)

Refrigerated

(4°C)

Sterile Water

2 days

10 days

0.9% Sodium

Chloride Solution

2 days

10 days

5% Dextrose Solution

2 days

10 days

10% Dextrose Solution

2 days

10 days

5% Dextrose + 0.9%

Sodium Chloride Solution*

2 days

Incompatible

5% Dextrose + 0.45%

Sodium Chloride Solution

2 days

Incompatible

The following intravenous ceftriaxone solutions are stable at room temperature (25°C) for 24 hours, at concentrations between 10 mg/mL and 40 mg/mL: Sodium Lactate (PVC container), 10% Invert Sugar (glass container), 5% Sodium Bicarbonate (glass container), Freamine III (glass container), Normosol-M in 5% Dextrose (glass and PVC containers), Ionosol-B in 5% Dextrose (glass container), 5% Mannitol (glass container), 10% Mannitol (glass container).

After the indicated stability time periods, unused portions of solutions should be discarded.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter before administration.

Ceftriaxone reconstituted with 5% Dextrose or 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution at concentrations between 10 mg/mL and 40 mg/mL, and then stored in frozen state (-20°C) in PVC or polyolefin containers, remains stable for 26 weeks.

Frozen solutions of ceftriaxone for injection should be thawed at room temperature before use. After thawing, unused portions should be discarded. DO NOT REFREEZE.
Ceftazidime

Ceftazidime

Dosage

The usual adult dosage is 1 gram administered intravenously every 8 to 12 hours. The dosage should be determined by the susceptibility of the causative organisms, the severity of infection, and the condition and renal function of the patient.

The guidelines for dosage of ceftazidime for injection are listed in Table 5. The following dosage schedule is recommended.
Table 5. Recommended Dosage Schedule Adults Dose Frequency Usual recommended dosage 1 gram IV q8 to 12hr * Although clinical improvement has been shown, bacteriologic cures cannot be expected in patients with chronic respiratory disease and cystic fibrosis. † The higher dose should be reserved for immunocompromised pediatric patients or pediatric patients with cystic fibrosis or meningitis.
Uncomplicated urinary tract infections

250 mg IV

q12hr

Bone and joint infections

2 grams IV

q12hr

Complicated urinary tract infections

500 mg IV

q8 to 12hr

Uncomplicated pneumonia; mild skin and skin-structure infections

500 mg to 1 gram IV

q8hr

Serious gynecologic and intra-abdominalinfections

2 grams IV

q8hr

Meningitis

2 grams IV

q8hr

Very severe life-threatening infections,especially in immunocompromised patients

2 grams IV

q8hr

Lung infections caused by Pseudomonas spp. inpatients with cystic fibrosis with normal renalfunction*

30 to 50 mg/kg IV toa maximum of 6 gramsper day

q8hr

Neonates (0 to 4 weeks)

30 mg/kg IV

q12hr

Infants and children (1 month to 12 years)

30 to 50 mg/kg IV to amaximum of 6 gramsper day†

q8hr

Impaired Hepatic Function

No adjustment in dosage is required for patients with hepatic dysfunction.

Impaired Renal Function

Ceftazidime is excreted by the kidneys, almost exclusively by glomerular filtration. Therefore, in patients with impaired renal function (glomerular filtration rate [GFR] <50 mL/min), it is recommended that the dosage of ceftazidime be reduced to compensate for its slower excretion. In patients with suspected renal insufficiency, an initial loading dose of 1 gram of ceftazidime may be given. An estimate of GFR should be made to determine the appropriate maintenance dosage. The recommended dosage is presented in Table 6.
Table 6. Recommended Maintenance Dosages of Ceftazidime for Injection in Renal Insufficiency NOTE: IF THE DOSE RECOMMENDED IN TABLE 5 ABOVE IS LOWER THAN THAT RECOMMENDED FOR PATIENTS WITH RENAL INSUFFICIENCY AS OUTLINED IN TABLE 6, THE LOWER DOSE SHOULD BE USED. Creatinine Clearance(mL/min) Recommended UnitDose of Ceftazidime for Injection Frequency ofDosing
50 to 31

1 gram

q12hr

30 to 16

1 gram

q24hr

15 to 6

500 mg

q24hr

<5

500 mg

q48hr

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft’s equation)5 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function:

Males: Creatinine clearance (mL/min) =

Weight (kg) x (140 – age)

72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Females: 0.85 x male value

In patients with severe infections who would normally receive 6 grams of ceftazidime for injection daily were it not for renal insufficiency, the unit dose given in the table above may be increased by 50% or the dosing frequency may be increased appropriately. Further dosing should be determined by therapeutic monitoring, severity of the infection, and susceptibility of the causative organism.

In pediatric patients as for adults, the creatinine clearance should be adjusted for body surface area or lean body mass, and the dosing frequency should be reduced in cases of renal insufficiency.

In patients undergoing hemodialysis, a loading dose of 1 gram is recommended, followed by 1 gram after each hemodialysis period.

Ceftazidime for injection can also be used in patients undergoing intraperitoneal dialysis and continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis. In such patients, a loading dose of 1 gram of ceftazidime for injection may be given, followed by 500 mg every 24 hours. In addition to IV use, ceftazidime for injection can be incorporated in the dialysis fluid at a concentration of 250 mg for 2 L of dialysis fluid.

Note: Generally ceftazidime for injection should be continued for 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared, but in complicated infections longer therapy may be required.

Administration

Ceftazidime for injection may be given intravenously. Intra-arterial administration should be avoided (see PRECAUTIONS).

Intravenous Administration

The IV route is preferable for patients with bacterial septicemia, bacterial meningitis, peritonitis, or other severe or life-threatening infections, or for patients who may be poor risks because of lowered resistance resulting from such debilitating conditions as malnutrition, trauma, surgery, diabetes, heart failure, or malignancy, particularly if shock is present or pending.

Directions for Proper Use of a Pharmacy Bulk Package

Not for direct infusion. This Pharmacy Bulk Package is for use in a hospital pharmacy admixture service, only in a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. Using aseptic technique, the container closure may be penetrated only one time using a suitable sterile dispensing set or transfer device that allows measured dispensing of the contents. Use of a syringe and needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage. The withdrawal of container contents should be accomplished without delay. However, should this not be possible, a maximum time of 4 HOURS from initial closure entry is permitted to complete fluid transfer operations. This time limit should begin with the introduction of the solvent or diluent into the Pharmacy Bulk Package. DISCARD ANY UNUSED PORTION AFTER 4 HOURS. NOT FOR DIRECT INFUSION. THIS PHARMACY BULK PACKAGE IS NOT INTENDED TO BE DISPENSED AS A UNIT.

For IV infusion, constitute the 6 g Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle with Sterile Water for Injection and add an appropriate quantity of the resulting solution to an IV container with one of the compatible IV fluids listed under the COMPATIBILITY AND STABILITY section.

Intermittent IV infusion with a Y-type administration set can be accomplished with compatible solutions. However, during infusion of a solution containing ceftazidime, it is desirable to discontinue the other solution.

Freezing solution of ceftazidime for injection is not recommended.
Table 7. Preparation of Solutions of Ceftazidime for Injection
Size

Amount of Diluentto be Added(mL)

ApproximateAvailable Volume(mL)

ApproximateCeftazidime Concentration(mg/mL)

Pharmacy bulk package bottle6 grams

26

30

200

All Pharmacy Bulk Package bottles of ceftazidime for injection as supplied are under reduced pressure. When ceftazidime for injection is dissolved, carbon dioxide is released and a positive pressure develops. For ease of use please follow the recommended techniques of constitution described on the detachable Instructions for Constitution section of this insert.

Solutions of ceftazidime for injection, like those of most beta-lactam antibiotics, should not be added to solutions of aminoglycoside antibiotics because of potential interaction.

However, if concurrent therapy with ceftazidime for injection and an aminoglycoside is indicated, each of these antibiotics can be administered separately to the same patient.
Ribavirin

Ribavirin

2.1 Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

Adults

Olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules should be administered once daily in the evening, generally beginning with the 6 mg/25 mg (mg equivalent olanzapine/mg equivalent fluoxetine) capsule. While food has no appreciable effect on the absorption of olanzapine and fluoxetine given individually, the effect of food on the absorption of olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules has not been studied. Make dosage adjustments, if indicated, according to efficacy and tolerability. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules in a dose range of olanzapine 6 mg to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 mg to 50 mg [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. The safety of doses above 18 mg of olanzapine and 75 mg of fluoxetine has not been evaluated in adult clinical studies. Periodically reexamine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years of age)

Information for pediatric patients (10 to 17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s olanzapine and fluoxetine hydrochloride capsules. However, due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with the pediatric information.

2.3 Specific Populations

Start olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules at 3 mg/25 mg or 6 mg/25 mg in patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules (female gender, geriatric age, nonsmoking status) or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Titrate slowly and adjust dosage as needed in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. Olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules has not been systematically studied in patients >65 years of age or in patients <10 years of age [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.19), USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.5), and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3, 12.4)].

Treatment of Pregnant Women

When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine, a component of olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SSRIs or SNRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalizations, respiratory support, and tube feeding [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.1)].

2.4 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules. Conversely, at least 5 weeks should be allowed after stopping olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4.1)].

2.5 Use of Olanzapine and Fluoxetine Capsules with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for five weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.5)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.5)].

2.6 Discontinuation of Treatment with Olanzapine and Fluoxetine Capsules

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, a component of olanzapine and fluoxetine capsules, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.23)].
Ceftazidime

Ceftazidime

Dosage

The usual adult dosage is 1 gram administered intravenously or intramuscularly every 8 to 12 hours. The dosage and route should be determined by the susceptibility of the causative organisms, the severity of infection, and the condition and renal function of the patient.

The guidelines for dosage of ceftazidime for injection are listed in Table 5. The following dosage schedule is recommended.
Table 5. Recommended Dosage Schedule Adults Dose Frequency Usual recommended dosage 1 gram IV or IM q8 to 12hr * Although clinical improvement has been shown, bacteriologic cures cannot be expected in patients with chronic respiratory disease and cystic fibrosis. † The higher dose should be reserved for immunocompromised pediatric patients or pediatric patients with cystic fibrosis or meningitis.
Uncomplicated urinary tract infections

250 mg IV or IM

q12hr

Bone and joint infections

2 grams IV

q12hr

Complicated urinary tract infections

500 mg IV or IM

q8 to 12hr

Uncomplicated pneumonia; mild skin and skin-structure infections

500 mg to 1 gramIV or IM

q8hr

Serious gynecologic and intra-abdominalinfections

2 grams IV

q8hr

Meningitis

2 grams IV

q8hr

Very severe life-threatening infections,especially in immunocompromised patients

2 grams IV

q8hr

Lung infections caused by Pseudomonas spp. inpatients with cystic fibrosis with normal renalfunction*

30 to 50 mg/kg IV toa maximum of 6 gramsper day

q8hr

Neonates (0 to 4 weeks)

30 mg/kg IV

q12hr

Infants and children (1 month to 12 years)

30 to 50 mg/kg IV to amaximum of 6 gramsper day†

q8hr

Impaired Hepatic Function

No adjustment in dosage is required for patients with hepatic dysfunction.

Impaired Renal Function

Ceftazidime is excreted by the kidneys, almost exclusively by glomerular filtration. Therefore, in patients with impaired renal function (glomerular filtration rate [GFR] <50 mL/min), it is recommended that the dosage of ceftazidime be reduced to compensate for its slower excretion. In patients with suspected renal insufficiency, an initial loading dose of 1 gram of ceftazidime may be given. An estimate of GFR should be made to determine the appropriate maintenance dosage. The recommended dosage is presented in Table 6.
Table 6. Recommended Maintenance Dosages of Ceftazidime for Injection in Renal Insufficiency NOTE: IF THE DOSE RECOMMENDED IN TABLE 5 ABOVE IS LOWER THAN THAT RECOMMENDED FOR PATIENTS WITH RENAL INSUFFICIENCY AS OUTLINED IN TABLE 6, THE LOWER DOSE SHOULD BE USED. Creatinine Clearance (mL/min) Recommended Unit Dose of Ceftazidime for Injection Frequency of Dosing
50 to 31

1 gram

q12hr

30 to 16

1 gram

q24hr

15 to 6

500 mg

q24hr

<5

500 mg

q48hr

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (Cockcroft’s equation)5 may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function:

Males: Creatinine clearance (mL/min) =

Weight (kg) x (140 - age)

72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Females: 0.85 x male value

In patients with severe infections who would normally receive 6 grams of ceftazidime for injection daily were it not for renal insufficiency, the unit dose given in the table above may be increased by 50% or the dosing frequency may be increased appropriately. Further dosing should be determined by therapeutic monitoring, severity of the infection, and susceptibility of the causative organism.

In pediatric patients as for adults, the creatinine clearance should be adjusted for body surface area or lean body mass, and the dosing frequency should be reduced in cases of renal insufficiency.

In patients undergoing hemodialysis, a loading dose of 1 gram is recommended, followed by 1 gram after each hemodialysis period.

Ceftazidime for injection can also be used in patients undergoing intraperitoneal dialysis and continuous ambulatory peritoneal dialysis. In such patients, a loading dose of 1 gram of ceftazidime for injection may be given, followed by 500 mg every 24 hours. In addition to IV use, ceftazidime for injection can be incorporated in the dialysis fluid at a concentration of 250 mg for 2 L of dialysis fluid.

Note: Generally ceftazidime for injection should be continued for 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared, but in complicated infections longer therapy may be required.

Administration

Ceftazidime for injection may be given intravenously or by deep IM injection into a large muscle mass such as the upper outer quadrant of the gluteus maximus or lateral part of the thigh. Intra-arterial administration should be avoided (see PRECAUTIONS).

Intramuscular Administration

For IM administration, ceftazidime for injection should be constituted with one of the following diluents: Sterile Water for Injection, Bacteriostatic Water for Injection, or 0.5% or 1% Lidocaine Hydrochloride Injection. Refer to Table 7.

Intravenous Administration

The IV route is preferable for patients with bacterial septicemia, bacterial meningitis, peritonitis, or other severe or life-threatening infections, or for patients who may be poor risks because of lowered resistance resulting from such debilitating conditions as malnutrition, trauma, surgery, diabetes, heart failure, or malignancy, particularly if shock is present or pending.

For direct intermittent IV administration, constitute ceftazidime for injection as directed in Table 7 with Sterile Water for Injection. Slowly inject directly into the vein over a period of 3 to 5 minutes or give through the tubing of an administration set while the patient is also receiving one of the compatible IV fluids (see COMPATIBILITY AND STABILITY).

For IV infusion, constitute the 1 gram, or 2 gram vial and add an appropriate quantity of the resulting solution to an IV container with one of the compatible IV fluids listed under the COMPATIBILITY AND STABILITY section.

Intermittent IV infusion with a Y-type administration set can be accomplished with compatible solutions. However, during infusion of a solution containing ceftazidime, it is desirable to discontinue the other solution.

Freezing solution of ceftazidime for injection is not recommended.
Table 7. Preparation of Solutions of Ceftazidime for Injection * To obtain a dose of 1 g, withdraw 10 mL from the vial following reconstitution. † To obtain a dose of 2 g, withdraw 11.5 mL from the vial following reconstitution.
Size

Amount of Diluent to be Added (mL)

Approximate Available Volume (mL)

Approximate Ceftazidime Concentration (mg/mL)

Intramuscular

1 gram vial

3

3.6

280

Intravenous

1 gram vial

10

10.8*

100

2 gram vial

10

11.5†

170

All vials of ceftazidime for injection as supplied are under reduced pressure. When ceftazidime for injection is dissolved, carbon dioxide is released and a positive pressure develops. For ease of use please follow the recommended techniques of constitution described on the detachable Instructions for Constitution section of this insert.

Solutions of ceftazidime for injection, like those of most beta-lactam antibiotics, should not be added to solutions of aminoglycoside antibiotics because of potential interaction.

However, if concurrent therapy with ceftazidime for injection and an aminoglycoside is indicated, each of these antibiotics can be administered separately to the same patient.
Spironolactone

Spironolactone

Primary Hyperaldosteronism

Spironolactone may be employed as an initial diagnostic measure to provide presumptive evidence of primary hyperaldosteronism while patients are on normal diets.

Long Test

Spironolactone is administered at a daily dosage of 400 mg for three to four weeks. Correction of hypokalemia and of hypertension provides presumptive evidence for the diagnosis of primary hyperaldosteronism.

Short Test

Spironolactone is administered at a daily dosage of 400 mg for four days. If serum potassium increases during spironolactone administration but drops when spironolactone is discontinued, a presumptive diagnosis of primary hyperaldosteronism should be considered.

After the diagnosis of hyperaldosteronism has been established by more definitive testing procedures, spironolactone may be administered in doses of 100 to 400 mg daily in preparation for surgery. For patients who are considered unsuitable for surgery, spironolactone may be employed for long-term maintenance therapy at the lowest effective dosage determined for the individual patient.

Edema In Adults (congestive heart failure, hepatic cirrhosis, or nephrotic syndrome)

An initial daily dosage of 100 mg of spironolactone administered in either single or divided doses is recommended, but may range from 25 to 200 mg daily. When given as the sole agent for diuresis, spironolactone should be continued for at least five days at the initial dosage level, after which it may be adjusted to the optimal therapeutic or maintenance level administered in either single or divided daily doses. If, after five days, an adequate diuretic response to spironolactone has not occurred, a second diuretic that acts more proximally in the renal tubule may be added to the regimen. Because of the additive effect of spironolactone when administered concurrently with such diuretics, an enhanced diuresis usually begins on the first day of combined treatment; combined therapy is indicated when more rapid diuresis is desired. The dosage of spironolactone should remain unchanged when other diuretic therapy is added.

Essential Hypertension

For adults, an initial daily dosage of 50 to 100 mg of spironolactone administered in either single or divided doses is recommended. Spironolactone may also be given with diuretics that act more proximally in the renal tubule or with other antihypertensive agents. Treatment with spironolactone should be continued for at least two weeks, since the maximum response may not occur before this time. Subsequently, dosage should be adjusted according to the response of the patient.

Hypokalemia

Spironolactone in a dosage ranging from 25 mg to 100 mg daily is useful in treating a diuretic-induced hypokalemia, when oral potassium supplements or other potassium-sparing regimens are considered inappropriate.

Severe Heart Failure in conjunction with standard therapy (NYHA class III - IV)

Treatment should be initiated with spironolactone 25 mg once daily if the patient’s serum potassium is ≤5 mEq/L and the patient’s serum creatinine is ≤ 2.5 mg/dL. Patients who tolerate 25 mg once daily may have their dosage increased to 50 mg once daily as clinically indicated. Patients who do not tolerate 25 mg once-daily may have their dosage reduced to 25 mg every other day. See WARNINGS: Hyperkalemia in Patients with Severe Heart Failure for advice on monitoring serum potassium and serum creatinine.
Octreotide Acetate

Octreotide Acetate

Octreotide acetate may be administered subcutaneously or intravenously. Subcutaneous injection is the usual route of administration of octreotide acetate for control of symptoms. Pain with subcutaneous administration may be reduced by using the smallest volume that will deliver the desired dose. Multiple subcutaneous injections at the same site within short periods of time should be avoided. Sites should be rotated in a systematic manner.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. Do not use if particulates and/or discoloration are observed. Proper sterile technique should be used in the preparation of parenteral admixtures to minimize the possibility of microbial contamination. Octreotide acetate is not compatible in Total Parenteral Nutrition (TPN) solutions because of the formation of a glycosyloctreotide conjugate which may decrease the efficacy of the product.

Octreotide acetate is stable in sterile isotonic saline solutions or sterile solutions of dextrose 5% in water for 24 hours. It may be diluted in volumes of 50 to 200 mL and infused intravenously over 15 to 30 minutes or administered by IV push over 3 minutes. In emergency situations (e.g.: carcinoid crisis) it may be given by rapid bolus.

The initial dosage is usually 50 mcg administered twice or three times daily. Upward dose titration is frequently required. Dosage information for patients with specific tumors follows.

Acromegaly

Dosage may be initiated at 50 mcg t.i.d. Beginning with this low dose may permit adaptation to adverse gastrointestinal effects for patients who will require higher doses. IGF-I (somatomedin C) levels every 2 weeks can be used to guide titration. Alternatively, multiple growth hormone levels at 0 to 8 hours after octreotide acetate administration permit more rapid titration of dose. The goal is to achieve growth hormone levels less than 5 ng/mL or IGF-I (somatomedin C) levels less than 1.9 U/mL in males and less than 2.2 U/mL in females. The dose most commonly found to be effective is 100 mcg t.i.d., but some patients require up to 500 mcg t.i.d. for maximum effectiveness. Doses greater than 300 mcg/day seldom result in additional biochemical benefit, and if an increase in dose fails to provide additional benefit, the dose should be reduced. IGF-I (somatomedin C) or growth hormone levels should be re-evaluated at 6-month intervals.

Octreotide acetate should be withdrawn yearly for approximately 4 weeks from patients who have received irradiation to assess disease activity. If growth hormone or IGF-I (somatomedin C) levels increase and signs and symptoms recur, octreotide acetate therapy may be resumed.

Carcinoid Tumors

The suggested daily dosage of octreotide acetate during the first 2 weeks of therapy ranges from 100 to 600 mcg/day in 2 to 4 divided doses (mean daily dosage is 300 mcg). In the clinical studies, the median daily maintenance dosage was approximately 450 mcg, but clinical and biochemical benefits were obtained in some patients with as little as 50 mcg, while others required doses up to 1500 mcg/day. However, experience with doses above 750 mcg/day is limited.

VIPomas

Daily dosages of 200 to 300 mcg in 2 to 4 divided doses are recommended during the initial 2 weeks of therapy (range 150 to 750 mcg) to control symptoms of the disease. On an individual basis, dosage may be adjusted to achieve a therapeutic response, but usually doses above 450 mcg/day are not required.
Levothyroxine Sodium

Levothyroxine Sodium

General Principles

The goal of replacement therapy is to achieve and maintain a clinical and biochemical euthyroid state. The goal of suppressive therapy is to inhibit growth and/or function of abnormal thyroid tissue. The dose of Levothyroxine sodium tablets, USP that is adequate to achieve these goals depends on a variety of factors including the patient’s age, body weight, cardiovascular status, concomitant medical conditions, including pregnancy, concomitant medications, and the specific nature of the condition being treated (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS). Hence, the following recommendations serve only as dosing guidelines. Dosing must be individualized and adjustments made based on periodic assessment of the patient’s clinical response and laboratory parameters (see PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests).

Levothyroxine sodium tablets, USP are administered as a single daily dose, preferably one-half to one-hour before breakfast. Levothyroxine sodium tablets, USP should be taken at least 4 hours apart from drugs that are known to interfere with its absorption (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). Levothyroxine sodium tablets, USP should be taken with a full glass of water, (see Information for Patients).

Due to the long half-life of levothyroxine, the peak therapeutic effect at a given dose of Levothyroxine sodium tablets, USP may not be attained for 4-6 weeks.

Caution should be exercised when administering Levothyroxine sodium tablets, USP to patients with underlying cardiovascular disease, to the elderly, and to those with concomitant adrenal insufficiency (see PRECAUTIONS).

Specific Patient Populations

Hypothyroidism in Adults and in Children in Whom Growth and Puberty are Complete (see WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests)

Therapy may begin at full replacement doses in otherwise healthy individuals who are at low risk of coronary artery disease. The average full replacement dose of levothyroxine sodium is approximately 1.7 mcg/kg/day (e.g., 100-125 mcg/day for a 70 kg adult). Older patients may require less than 1 mcg/kg/day. Levothyroxine sodium doses greater than 200 mcg/day are seldom required. An inadequate response to daily doses ≥ 300 mcg/day is rare and may indicate poor compliance, malabsorption, and/or drug interactions.

For most patients older than 50 years or for patients under 50 years of age with underlying cardiac disease, an initial starting dose of 25-50 mcg/day of levothyroxine sodium is recommended, with gradual increments in dose at 6-8 week intervals, as needed. The recommended starting dose of levothyroxine sodium in elderly patients with cardiac disease is 12.5-25 mcg/day, with gradual dose increments at 4-6 week intervals. The levothyroxine sodium dose is generally adjusted in 12.5-25 mcg increments until the patient with primary hypothyroidism is clinically euthyroid and the serum TSH has normalized.

In patients with severe hypothyroidism, the recommended initial levothyroxine sodium dose is 12.5-25 mcg/day with increases of 25 mcg/day every 2-4 weeks, accompanied by clinical and laboratory assessment, until the TSH level is normalized.

In patients with secondary (pituitary) or tertiary (hypothalamic) hypothyroidism, the levothyroxine sodium dose should be titrated until the patient is clinically euthyroid and the serum free-T4 level is restored to the upper half of the normal range.

Pediatric Dosage – Congenital or Acquired Hypothyroidism (see PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests)

General Principles

In general, levothyroxine therapy should be instituted at full replacement doses as soon as possible. Delays in diagnosis and institution of therapy may have deleterious effects on the child’s intellectual and physical growth and development.

Undertreatment and overtreatment should be avoided (see PRECAUTIONS, Pediatric Use).

Levothyroxine sodium tablets, USP may be administered to infants and children who cannot swallow intact tablets by crushing the tablet and suspending the freshly crushed tablet in a small amount (5-10 mL or 1-2 teaspoons) of water. This suspension can be administered by spoon or dropper. DO NOT STORE THE SUSPENSION. Foods that decrease absorption of levothyroxine, such as soybean infant formula, should not be used for administering levothyroxine sodium tablets (see PRECAUTIONS , Drug-Food Interactions).

Newborns

The recommended starting dose of levothyroxine sodium in newborn infants is 10-15 mcg/kg/day. A lower starting dose (e.g., 25 mcg/day) should be considered in infants at risk for cardiac failure, and the dose should be increased in 4-6 weeks as needed based on clinical and laboratory response to treatment. In infants with very low (< 5 mcg/dL) or undetectable serum T4 concentrations, the recommended initial starting dose is 50 mcg/day of levothyroxine sodium.

Infants and Children

Levothyroxine therapy is usually initiated at full replacement doses, with the recommended dose per body weight decreasing with age (see Table 3). However, in children with chronic or severe hypothyroidism, an initial dose of 25 mcg/day of levothyroxine sodium is recommended with increments of 25 mcg every 2-4 weeks until the desired effect is achieved.

Hyperactivity in an older child can be minimized if the starting dose is one-fourth of the recommended full replacement dose, and the dose is then increased on a weekly basis by an amount equal to one-fourth the full-recommended replacement dose until the full recommended replacement dose is reached.
Table 3: Levothyroxine Sodium Dosing Guidelines for Pediatric Hypothyroidism AGE Daily Dose Per Kg Body Weighta 0-3 months 10-15 mcg/kg/day 3-6 months 8-10 mcg/kg/day 6-12 months 6-8 mcg/kg/day 1-5 years 5-6 mcg/kg/day 6-12 years 4-5 mcg/kg/day >12 years but growth and puberty incomplete 2-3 mcg/kg/day Growth and puberty complete 1.7 mcg/kg/day a The dose should be adjusted based on clinical response and laboratory parameters (see PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests and Pediatric Use).
Pregnancy- Pregnancy may increase levothyroxine requirements (see Pregnancy).

Subclinical Hypothyroidism- If this condition is treated, a lower levothyroxine sodium dose (e.g., 1 mcg/kg/day) than that used for full replacement may be adequate to normalize the serum TSH level. Patients who are not treated should be monitored yearly for changes in clinical status and thyroid laboratory parameters.

TSH Suppression in Well-differentiated Thyroid Cancer and Thyroid Nodules –The target level for TSH suppression in these conditions has not been established with controlled studies. In addition, the efficacy of TSH suppression for benign nodular disease is controversial. Therefore, the dose of Levothyroxine sodium tablets, USP used for TSH suppression should be individualized based on the specific disease and the patient being treated.

In the treatment of well-differentiated (papillary and follicular) thyroid cancer, levothyroxine is used as an adjunct to surgery and radioiodine therapy. Generally, TSH is suppressed to <0.1 mU/L, and this usually requires a levothyroxine sodium dose of greater than 2 mcg/kg/day. However, in patients with high-risk tumors, the target level for TSH suppression may be <0.01 mU/L.

In the treatment of benign nodules and nontoxic multinodular goiter, TSH is generally suppressed to a higher target (e.g., 0.1 to either 0.5 or 1.0 mU/L) than that used for the treatment of thyroid cancer. Levothyroxine sodium is contraindicated if the serum TSH is already suppressed due to the risk of precipitating overt thyrotoxicosis (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS).

Myxedema Coma – Myxedema coma is a life-threatening emergency characterized by poor circulation and hypometabolism, and may result in unpredictable absorption of levothyroxine sodium from the gastrointestinal tract. Therefore, oral thyroid hormone drug products are not recommended to treat this condition. Intravenous levothyroxine sodium should be administered.
Dicloxacillin Sodium

Dicloxacillin Sodium

The penicillinase-resistant penicillins are available for oral administration and for intramuscular and intravenous injection. The sodium salts of methicillin, oxacillin, and nafcillin may be administered parenterally and the sodium salts of cloxacillin, dicloxacillin, oxacillin, and nafcillin are available for oral use.

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their sensitivity to the penicillinase-resistant penicillins should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient, therefore, it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with penicillinase-resistant penicillins should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer term of therapy.

Concurrent administration of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins and probenecid increases and prolongs serum penicillin levels. Probenecid decreases the apparent volume of distribution and slows the rate of excretion by competitively inhibiting renal tubular secretion of penicillin. Penicillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of penicillin are necessary.

Oral preparations of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins should not be used as initial therapy in serious, life-threatening infections (see PRECAUTIONS – General). Oral therapy with the penicillinase-resistant penicillins may be used to follow-up the previous use of a parenteral agent as soon as the clinical condition warrants. For intramuscular gluteal injections, care should be taken to avoid sciatic nerve injury. With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.
RECOMMENDED DOSAGES FOR DICLOXACILLIN SODIUM, USP IN MILD TO MODERATE AND SEVERE INFECTIONS DRUG ADULTS CHILDREN Mild to Moderate Severe Mild to Moderate Severe * Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs.)
Dicloxacillin

125 mgevery6 hours

250 mgevery6 hours

12.5 mg/kg/day* inequallydivideddoses every6 hours

25 mg/kg/day* inequallydivideddoses every6 hours

Dicloxacillin is best absorbed when taken on an empty stomach, and should be administered at least 1 hour before or 2 hours after meals. Dicloxacillin should be taken with at least 4 fluid ounces (120 mL) of water and should not be taken in the supine position or immediately before going to bed (see PRECAUTIONS).
Quetiapine Fumarate

Quetiapine Fumarate

2.1 Important Administration Instruction

Quetiapine fumarate tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.2 Recommended Dosing

The recommended initial dose, titration, dose range and maximum quetiapine fumarate tablets dose for each approved indication is displayed in Table 1. After initial dosing, adjustments can be made upwards or downwards, if necessary, depending upon the clinical response and tolerability of the patient [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1 and 14.2)].

Table 1: Recommended Dosing for Quetiapine Fumarate Tablets
* N/A Not applicable.
Indication

Initial Dose and Titration

Recommended Dose

Maximum Dose

Schizophrenia-Adults

Day 1: 25 mg twice daily.

Increase in increments of 25 mg to 50 mg divided two or three times on Days 2 and 3 to range of 300 to 400 mg by Day 4.

Further adjustments can be made in increments of 25 to 50 mg twice a day, in intervals of not less than 2 days.

150 to 750 mg/day

750 mg/day

Schizophrenia- Adolescents (13 to 17 years)

Day 1: 25 mg twice daily.

Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg.

Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg.

Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.

Day 5: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.

Further adjustments should be in increments no greater than 100 mg/day within the recommended dose range of 400 to 800 mg/day.

Based on response and tolerability, may be administered three times daily.

400 to 800 mg/day

800 mg/day

Schizophrenia-Maintenance

N/A*

400 to 800 mg/day

800 mg/day

Bipolar Mania- Adults

Monotherapy or as an adjunct to lithium or divalproex

Day 1: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg.

Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg.

Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.

Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.

Further dosage adjustments up to 800 mg/day by Day 6 should be in increments of no greater than 200 mg/day.

400 to 800 mg/day

800 mg/day

Bipolar Mania- Children and Adolescents (10 to 17 years),

Monotherapy

Day 1: 25 mg twice daily.

Day 2: Twice daily dosing totaling 100 mg.

Day 3: Twice daily dosing totaling 200 mg.

Day 4: Twice daily dosing totaling 300 mg.

Day 5: Twice daily dosing totaling 400 mg.

Further adjustments should be in increments no greater than 100 mg/day within the recommended dose range of 400 to 600 mg/day.

Based on response and tolerability, may be administered three times daily.

400 to 600 mg/day

600 mg/day

Bipolar Depression- Adults

Administer once daily at bedtime.

Day 1: 50 mg

Day 2: 100 mg

Day 3: 200 mg

Day 4: 300 mg

300 mg/day

300 mg/day

Bipolar I Disorder Maintenance Therapy- Adults

Administer twice daily totaling 400 to 800 mg/day as adjunct to lithium or divalproex. Generally, in the maintenance phase, patients continued on the same dose on which they were stabilized.

400 to 800 mg/day

800 mg/day

Maintenance Treatment for Schizophrenia and Bipolar I Disorder

Maintenance Treatment – Patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.2)].

2.3 Dose Modifications in Elderly Patients

Consideration should be given to a slower rate of dose titration and a lower target dose in the elderly and in patients who are debilitated or who have a predisposition to hypotensive reactions [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients.

Elderly patients should be started on quetiapine fumarate tablets, 50 mg/day and the dose can be increased in increments of 50 mg/day depending on the clinical response and tolerability of the individual patient.

2.4 Dose Modifications in Hepatically Impaired Patients

Patients with hepatic impairment should be started on 25 mg/day. The dose should be increased daily in increments of 25 mg/day to 50 mg/day to an effective dose, depending on the clinical response and tolerability of the patient.

2.5 Dose Modifications when used with CYP3A4 Inhibitors

Quetiapine fumarate tablets dose should be reduced to one sixth of original dose when co-medicated with a potent CYP3A4 inhibitor (e.g., ketoconazole, itraconazole, indinavir, ritonavir, nefazodone, etc.). When the CYP3A4 inhibitor is discontinued, the dose of quetiapine fumarate tablets should be increased by 6 fold [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3) and DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1)].

2.6 Dose Modifications when used with CYP3A4 Inducers

Quetiapine fumarate tablets dose should be increased up to 5 fold of the original dose when used in combination with a chronic treatment (e.g., greater than 7 to 14 days) of a potent CYP3A4 inducer (e.g., phenytoin, carbamazepine, rifampin, avasimibe, St. John’s wort etc.). The dose should be titrated based on the clinical response and tolerability of the individual patient. When the CYP3A4 inducer is discontinued, the dose of quetiapine fumarate tablets should be reduced to the original level within 7 to 14 days [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3) and DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1)].

2.7 Reinitiation of Treatment in Patients Previously Discontinued

Although there are no data to specifically address re-initiation of treatment, it is recommended that when restarting therapy of patients who have been off quetiapine fumarate tablets for more than one week, the initial dosing schedule should be followed. When restarting patients who have been off quetiapine fumarate tablets for less than one week, gradual dose escalation may not be required and the maintenance dose may be reinitiated.

2.8 Switching from Antipsychotics

There are no systematically collected data to specifically address switching patients with schizophrenia from antipsychotics to quetiapine fumarate tablets, or concerning concomitant administration with antipsychotics. While immediate discontinuation of the previous antipsychotic treatment may be acceptable for some patients with schizophrenia, more gradual discontinuation may be most appropriate for others. In all cases, the period of overlapping antipsychotic administration should be minimized. When switching patients with schizophrenia from depot antipsychotics, if medically appropriate, initiate quetiapine fumarate tablets therapy in place of the next scheduled injection. The need for continuing existing EPS medication should be re-evaluated periodically.
Clobetasol Propionate S...

Clobetasol Propionate Shampoo

Clobetasol Propionate Shampoo, 0.05% is for topical use only, and not for ophthalmic, oral or intravaginal use.Clobetasol Propionate Shampoo, 0.05%, should be applied onto dry (not wet) scalp once a day in a thin film to the affected areas only, and left in place for 15 minutes before lathering and rinsing. The total dosage should not exceed 50 g (50 mL or 1.75 fl. oz.) per week. Move the hair away from the scalp so that one of the affected areas is exposed. Position the bottle over the lesion. Apply a small amount of the shampoo directly onto the lesion, letting the product naturally flow from the bottle (gently squeeze the bottle), avoiding any contact of the product with the facial skin, eyes or lips. In case of contact, rinse thoroughly with water. Spread the product so that the entire lesion is covered with a thin uniform film. Massage gently into the lesion and repeat for additional lesion(s). Wash your hands after applying Clobetasol Propionate Shampoo, 0.05%.Leave the shampoo in place for 15 minutes, then add water, lather and rinse thoroughly all parts of the scalp and body that came in contact with the shampoo (e.g., hands, face, neck and shoulders). Avoid contact with eyes and lips. Minimize contact to non-affected areas of the body. Although no additional shampoo is necessary to cleanse your hair, you may use a non-medicated shampoo if desired.Treatment should be limited to 4 consecutive weeks. As with other corticosteroids, therapy should be discontinued when control is achieved. If complete disease control is not achieved after 4 weeks of treatment with Clobetasol Propionate Shampoo, 0.05%, treatment with a less potent topical steroid may be substituted. If no improvement is seen within 4 weeks, reassessment of the diagnosis may be necessary.Clobetasol Propionate Shampoo, 0.05%, should not be used with occlusive dressings (shower cap or bathing cap) unless directed by a physician.
Amantadine Hydrochlorid...

Amantadine Hydrochloride

The dose of amantadine hydrochloride capsules may need reduction in patients with congestive heart failure, peripheral edema, orthostatic hypotension, or impaired renal function (see Dosage for Impaired Renal Function).

Dosage for Prophylaxis and Treatment of Uncomplicated Influenza A Virus Illness

Adult

The adult daily dosage of amantadine hydrochloride capsules is 200 mg; two 100 mg capsules as a single daily dose. The daily dosage may be split into one capsule of 100 mg twice a day. If central nervous system effects develop in once-a-day dosage, a split dosage schedule may reduce such complaints. In persons 65 years of age or older, the daily dosage of amantadine hydrochloride capsules is 100 mg.

A 100 mg daily dose has also been shown in experimental challenge studies to be effective as prophylaxis in healthy adults who are not at high risk for influenza-related complications. However, it has not been demonstrated that a 100 mg daily dose is as effective as a 200 mg daily dose for prophylaxis, nor has the 100 mg daily dose been studied in the treatment of acute influenza illness. In recent clinical trials, the incidence of central nervous system (CNS) side effects associated with the 100 mg daily dose was at or near the level of placebo. The 100 mg dose is recommended for persons who have demonstrated intolerance to 200 mg of amantadine hydrochloride daily because of CNS or other toxicities.

Pediatric Patients

1 yr. to 9 yrs. of age

The total daily dose should be calculated on the basis of 2 to 4 mg/lb/day (4.4 to 8.8 mg/kg/day), but not to exceed 150 mg per day.

9 yrs. to 12 yrs. of age

The total daily dose is 200 mg given as one capsule of 100 mg twice a day. The 100 mg daily dose has not been studied in this pediatric population. Therefore, there are no data which demonstrate that this dose is as effective as or is safer than the 200 mg daily dose in this patient population.

Prophylactic dosing should be started in anticipation of an influenza A outbreak and before or after contact with individuals with influenza A virus respiratory tract illness.

Amantadine hydrochloride capsules should be continued daily for at least 10 days following a known exposure. If amantadine is used chemoprophylactically in conjunction with inactivated influenza A virus vaccine until protective antibody responses develop, then it should be administered for 2 to 4 weeks after the vaccine has been given. When inactivated influenza A virus vaccine is unavailable or contraindicated, amantadine hydrochloride capsules should be administered for the duration of known influenza A in the community because of repeated and unknown exposure.

Treatment of influenza A virus illness should be started as soon as possible, preferably within 24 to 48 hours after onset of signs and symptoms, and should be continued for 24 to 48 hours after the disappearance of signs and symptoms.

Dosage for Parkinsonism

Adult

The usual dose of amantadine hydrochloride capsules is 100 mg twice a day when used alone. Amantadine has an onset of action usually within 48 hours.

The initial dose of amantadine hydrochloride capsules is 100 mg daily for patients with serious associated medical illnesses or who are receiving high doses of other antiparkinson drugs. After one to several weeks at 100 mg once daily, the dose may be increased to 100 mg twice daily, if necessary.

Occasionally, patients whose responses are not optimal with amantadine hydrochloride capsules at 200 mg daily may benefit from an increase up to 400 mg daily in divided doses. However, such patients should be supervised closely by their physicians.

Patients initially deriving benefit from amantadine hydrochloride capsules not uncommonly experience a fall-off of effectiveness after a few months. Benefit may be regained by increasing the dose to 300 mg daily. Alternatively, temporary discontinuation of amantadine hydrochloride capsules for several weeks, followed by reinitiation of the drug, may result in regaining benefit in some patients. A decision to use other antiparkinson drugs may be necessary.

Dosage for Concomitant Therapy

Some patients who do not respond to anticholinergic antiparkinson drugs may respond to amantadine hydrochloride capsules. When amantadine hydrochloride capsules or anticholinergic antiparkinson drugs are each used with marginal benefit, concomitant use may produce additional benefit.

When amantadine and levodopa are initiated concurrently, the patient can exhibit rapid therapeutic benefits. Amantadine hydrochloride capsules should be held constant at 100 mg daily or twice daily while the daily dose of levodopa is gradually increased to optimal benefit.

When amantadine is added to optimal well-tolerated doses of levodopa, additional benefit may result, including smoothing out the fluctuations in improvement which sometimes occur in patients on levodopa alone. Patients who require a reduction in their usual dose of levodopa because of development of side effects may possibly regain lost benefit with the addition of amantadine hydrochloride capsules.

Dosage for Drug Induced Extrapyramidal Reactions

Adult

The usual dose of amantadine hydrochloride capsules is 100 mg twice a day. Occasionally, patients whose responses are not optimal with amantadine hydrochloride capsules at 200 mg daily may benefit from an increase up to 300 mg daily in divided doses.

Dosage for Impaired Renal Function

Depending upon creatinine clearance, the following dosage adjustments are recommended:

CREATININE CLEARANCE

(mL/min/1.73m2)

AMANTADINE

HYDROCHLORIDE

CAPSULES DOSAGE

30 to 50

200 mg 1st day and 100 mg each day thereafter

15 to 29

200 mg 1st day followed by 100 mg on

alternate days

<15

200 mg every 7 days

The recommended dosage for patients on hemodialysis is 200 mg every 7 days.
Mycophenolate Mofetil

Mycophenolate Mofetil

Renal Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1 g administered orally or intravenously (over NO LESS THAN 2 HOURS) twice a day (daily dose of 2 g) is recommended for use in renal transplant patients. Although a dose of 1.5 g administered twice daily (daily dose of 3 g) was used in clinical trials and was shown to be safe and effective, no efficacy advantage could be established for renal transplant patients. Patients receiving 2 g/day of mycophenolate mofetil demonstrated an overall better safety profile than did patients receiving 3 g/day of mycophenolate mofetil.

Pediatrics (3 months to 18 years of age)

The recommended dose of mycophenolate mofetil oral suspension is 600 mg/m2 administered twice daily (up to a maximum daily dose of 2 g/10 mL oral suspension). Patients with a body surface area of 1.25 m2 to 1.5 m2 may be dosed with mycophenolate mofetil capsules at a dose of 750 mg twice daily (1.5 g daily dose). Patients with a body surface area >1.5 m2 may be dosed with mycophenolate mofetil capsules or tablets at a dose of 1 g twice daily (2 g daily dose).

Cardiac Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1.5 g bid administered intravenously (over NO LESS THAN 2 HOURS) or 1.5 g bid oral (daily dose of 3 g) is recommended for use in adult cardiac transplant patients.

Hepatic Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1 g bid administered intravenously (over NO LESS THAN 2 HOURS) or 1.5 g bid oral (daily dose of 3 g) is recommended for use in adult hepatic transplant patients.

Mycophenolate Mofetil Capsules, Tablets, and Oral Suspension

The initial oral dose of mycophenolate mofetil should be given as soon as possible following renal, cardiac or hepatic transplantation. Food had no effect on MPA AUC, but has been shown to decrease MPA Cmax by 40%. Therefore, it is recommended that mycophenolate mofetil be administered on an empty stomach. However, in stable renal transplant patients, mycophenolate mofetil may be administered with food if necessary.

Patients should be instructed to take a missed dose as soon as they remember, except if it is near the next scheduled dose, and then continue to take mycophenolate mofetil at the usual times.

Note

If required, mycophenolate mofetil oral suspension can be administered via a nasogastric tube with a minimum size of 8 French (minimum 1.7 mm interior diameter).

Patients With Hepatic Impairment

No dose adjustments are recommended for renal patients with severe hepatic parenchymal disease. However, it is not known whether dose adjustments are needed for hepatic disease with other etiologies (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).

No data are available for cardiac transplant patients with severe hepatic parenchymal disease.

Geriatrics

The recommended oral dose of 1 g bid for renal transplant patients, 1.5 g bid for cardiac transplant patients, and 1 g bid administered intravenously or 1.5 g bid administered orally in hepatic transplant patients is appropriate for elderly patients (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Mycophenolate Mofetil Intravenous

Adults

Mycophenolate mofetil intravenous is an alternative dosage form to mycophenolate mofetil capsules, tablets and oral suspension recommended for patients unable to take oral mycophenolate mofetil. Mycophenolate mofetil intravenous should be administered within 24 hours following transplantation. Mycophenolate mofetil intravenous can be administered for up to 14 days; patients should be switched to oral mycophenolate mofetil as soon as they can tolerate oral medication.

Mycophenolate mofetil intravenous must be reconstituted and diluted to a concentration of 6 mg/mL using 5% Dextrose Injection USP. Mycophenolate mofetil intravenous is incompatible with other intravenous infusion solutions. Following reconstitution, mycophenolate mofetil intravenous must be administered by slow intravenous infusion over a period of NO LESS THAN 2 HOURS by either peripheral or central vein.

CAUTION: MYCOPHENOLATE MOFETIL INTRAVENOUS SOLUTION SHOULD NEVER BE ADMINISTERED BY RAPID OR BOLUS INTRAVENOUS INJECTION (see WARNINGS).

Dosage Adjustments

In renal transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment (GFR < 25 mL/min/1.73 m2) outside the immediate posttransplant period, doses of mycophenolate mofetil greater than 1 g administered twice a day should be avoided. These patients should also be carefully observed. No dose adjustments are needed in renal transplant patients experiencing delayed graft function postoperatively (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics and PRECAUTIONS:Patients with Renal Impairement).

No data are available for cardiac or hepatic transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment. Mycophenolate mofetil may be used for cardiac or hepatic transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment if the potential benefits outweigh the potential risks.

If neutropenia develops (ANC <1.3 × 103/µL), dosing with mycophenolate mofetil should be interrupted or the dose reduced, appropriate diagnostic tests performed, and the patient managed appropriately (see WARNINGS: Neutropenia, ADVERSE REACTIONS, and PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests).
Mycophenolate Mofetil

Mycophenolate Mofetil

Renal Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1 g administered orally or intravenously (over NO LESS THAN 2 HOURS) twice a day (daily dose of 2 g) is recommended for use in renal transplant patients. Although a dose of 1.5 g administered twice daily (daily dose of 3 g) was used in clinical trials and was shown to be safe and effective, no efficacy advantage could be established for renal transplant patients. Patients receiving 2 g/day of mycophenolate mofetil demonstrated an overall better safety profile than did patients receiving 3 g/day of mycophenolate mofetil.

Pediatrics (3 months to 18 years of age)

The recommended dose of mycophenolate mofetil oral suspension is 600 mg/m2 administered twice daily (up to a maximum daily dose of 2 g/10 mL oral suspension). Patients with a body surface area of 1.25 m2 to 1.5 m2 may be dosed with mycophenolate mofetil capsules at a dose of 750 mg twice daily (1.5 g daily dose). Patients with a body surface area >1.5 m2 may be dosed with mycophenolate mofetil capsules or tablets at a dose of 1 g twice daily (2 g daily dose).

Cardiac Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1.5 g bid administered intravenously (over NO LESS THAN 2 HOURS) or 1.5 g bid oral (daily dose of 3 g) is recommended for use in adult cardiac transplant patients.

Hepatic Transplantation

Adults

A dose of 1 g bid administered intravenously (over NO LESS THAN 2 HOURS) or 1.5 g bid oral (daily dose of 3 g) is recommended for use in adult hepatic transplant patients.

Mycophenolate Mofetil Capsules, Tablets and Oral Suspension

The initial oral dose of mycophenolate mofetil should be given as soon as possible following renal, cardiac or hepatic transplantation. Food had no effect on MPA AUC, but has been shown to decrease MPA Cmax by 40%. Therefore, it is recommended that mycophenolate mofetil be administered on an empty stomach. However, in stable renal transplant patients, mycophenolate mofetil may be administered with food if necessary.

Patients should be instructed to take a missed dose as soon as they remember, except if it is near the next scheduled dose, and then continue to take mycophenolate mofetil at the usual times.

Note

If required, mycophenolate mofetil oral suspension can be administered via a nasogastric tube with a minimum size of 8 French (minimum 1.7 mm interior diameter).

Patients With Hepatic Impairment

No dose adjustments are recommended for renal patients with severe hepatic parenchymal disease. However, it is not known whether dose adjustments are needed for hepatic disease with other etiologies (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics). No data are available for cardiac transplant patients with severe hepatic parenchymal disease.

Geriatrics

The recommended oral dose of 1 g bid for renal transplant patients, 1.5 g bid for cardiac transplant patients, and 1g bid administered intravenously or 1.5 g bid administered orally in hepatic transplant patients is appropriate for elderly patients (see PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).

Mycophenolate Mofetil Intravenous

Adults

Mycophenolate mofetil intravenous is an alternative dosage form to mycophenolate mofetil capsules, tablets and oral suspension recommended for patients unable to take oral mycophenolate mofetil. Mycophenolate mofetil intravenous should be administered within 24 hours following transplantation. Mycophenolate mofetil intravenous can be administered for up to 14 days; patients should be switched to oral mycophenolate mofetil as soon as they can tolerate oral medication.

Mycophenolate mofetil intravenous must be reconstituted and diluted to a concentration of 6 mg/mL using 5% Dextrose Injection USP. Mycophenolate mofetil intravenous is incompatible with other intravenous infusion solutions. Following reconstitution, mycophenolate mofetil intravenous must be administered by slow intravenous infusion over a period of NO LESS THAN 2 HOURS by either peripheral or central vein.

CAUTION: MYCOPHENOLATE MOFETIL INTRAVENOUS SOLUTION MUST NOT BE ADMINISTERED BY RAPID OR BOLUS INTRAVENOUS INJECTION (seeWARNINGS).

Dosage Adjustments

In renal transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment (GFR < 25 mL/min/1.73 m2) outside the immediate posttransplant period, doses of mycophenolate mofetil greater than 1 g administered twice a day should be avoided. These patients should also be carefully observed. No dose adjustments are needed in renal transplant patients experiencing delayed graft function postoperatively (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics and PRECAUTIONS: Patients with Renal Impairment).

No data are available for cardiac or hepatic transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment. Mycophenolate mofetil may be used for cardiac or hepatic transplant patients with severe chronic renal impairment if the potential benefits outweigh the potential risks.

If neutropenia develops (ANC < 1.3 x 103/µL), dosing with mycophenolate mofetil should be interrupted or the dose reduced, appropriate diagnostic tests performed, and the patient managed appropriately (see WARNINGS: Neutropenia, ADVERSE REACTIONS, and PRECAUTIONS: Laboratory Tests).
Ketalar

Ketalar

Infusion-related events are related to both the concentration and the rate of administration of vancomycin. Concentrations of no more than 5 mg/mL and rates of no more than 10 mg/min are recommended in adults (see also age-specific recommendations).

In selected patients in need of fluid restriction, a concentration up to 10 mg/mL may be used; use of such higher concentrations may increase the risk of infusion-related events. An infusion rate of 10 mg/min or less is associated with fewer infusion-related events (see ADVERSE REACTIONS). Infusion-related events may occur, however, at any rate or concentration.

Patients With Normal Renal Function

Adults

The usual daily intravenous dose is 2 g divided either as 500 mg every 6 hours or 1 g every 12 hours. Each dose should be administered at no more than 10 mg/min, or over a period of at least 60 minutes, whichever is longer. Other patient factors, such as age or obesity, may call for modification of the usual intravenous daily dose.

Pediatric Patients

The usual intravenous dosage of vancomycin is 10 mg/kg per dose given every 6 hours. Each dose should be administered over a period of at least 60 minutes. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin may be warranted in these patients.

Neonates

In pediatric patients up to the age of 1 month, the total daily intravenous dosage may be lower. In neonates, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg is suggested, followed by 10 mg/kg every 12 hours for neonates in the 1st week of life and every 8 hours thereafter up to the age of 1 month. Each dose should be administered over 60 minutes. In premature infants, vancomycin clearance decreases as postconceptional age decreases. Therefore, longer dosing intervals may be necessary in premature infants. Close monitoring of serum concentrations of vancomycin is recommended in these patients.

Patients With Impaired Renal Function and Elderly Patients

Dosage adjustment must be made in patients with impaired renal function. In premature infants and the elderly, greater dosage reductions than expected may be necessary because of decreased renal function. Measurement of vancomycin serum concentrations can be helpful in optimizing therapy, especially in seriously ill patients with changing renal function. Vancomycin serum concentrations can be determined by use of microbiologic assay, radioimmunoassay, fluorescence polarization immunoassay, fluorescence immunoassay, or high-pressure liquid chromatography. If creatinine clearance can be measured or estimated accurately, the dosage for most patients with renal impairment can be calculated using the following table. The dosage of vancomycin hydrochloride for injection per day in mg is about 15 times the glomerular filtration rate in mL/min (see following table):

DOSAGE TABLE FOR VANCOMYCIN IN PATIENTS WITH IMPAIRED RENAL FUNCTION

(Adapted from Moellering et al)4

Creatinine Clearance

mL/min

Vancomycin Dose

mg/24 h

100

1,545

90

1,390

80

1,235

70

1,080

60

925

50

770

40

620

30

465

20

310

10

155

The initial dose should be no less than 15 mg/kg, even in patients with mild to moderate renal insufficiency.

The table is not valid for functionally anephric patients. For such patients, an initial dose of 15 mg/kg of body weight should be given to achieve prompt therapeutic serum concentrations. The dose required to maintain stable concentrations is 1.9 mg/kg/24 hr. In patients with marked renal impairment, it may be more convenient to give maintenance doses of 250 to 1,000 mg once every several days rather than administering the drug on a daily basis. In anuria, a dose of 1,000 mg every 7 to 10 days has been recommended.

When only serum creatinine is known, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to calculate creatinine clearance. Calculated creatinine clearances (mL/min) are only estimates. The creatinine clearance should be measured promptly.

Men:

Weight (kg) x (140- age in years)

72 x serum creatinine concentration (mg/dL)

Women:

0.85 x above value

The serum creatinine must represent a steady state of renal function. Otherwise, the estimated value for creatinine clearance is not valid. Such a calculated clearance is an overestimate of actual clearance in patients with conditions: (1) characterized by decreasing renal function, such as shock, severe heart failure, or oliguria; (2) in which a normal relationship between muscle mass and total body weight is not present, such as obese patients or those with liver disease, edema, or ascites; and (3) accompanied by debilitation, malnutrition, or inactivity.

The safety and efficacy of vancomycin administration by the intrathecal (intralumbar or intraventricular) routes have not been established.

Intermittent infusion is the recommended method of administration.

Compatibility with Other Drugs and IV Fluids
The following diluents are physically and chemically compatible (with 4 g/L vancomycin hydrochloride):
5% Dextrose Injection, USP

5% Dextrose Injection and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP

5% Dextrose and Lactated Ringer’s Injection

Normosol®-M and 5% Dextrose

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Vancomycin solution has a low pH and may cause physical instability of other compounds.

Mixtures of solutions of vancomycin and beta-lactam antibiotics have been shown to be physically incompatible. The likelihood of precipitation increases with higher concentrations of vancomycin. It is recommended to adequately flush the intravenous lines between the administration of these antibiotics. It is also recommended to dilute solutions of vancomycin to 5 mg/mL or less.

Although intravitreal injection is not an approved route of administration for vancomycin, precipitation has been reported after intravitreal injection of vancomycin and ceftazidime for endophthalmitis using different syringes and needles. The precipitates dissolved gradually, with complete clearing of the vitreous cavity over two months and with improvement of visual acuity.

Preparation and Stability
At the time of use, reconstitute the vials of Vancomycin Hydrochloride for Injection, USP with Sterile Water for Injection to a concentration of 50 mg of vancomycin/mL (see following table for volume of diluent). Concentration/Vial Volume of Diluent 500 mg 10 mL 1 g 20 mL
Parenteral drug products should be visually inspected for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

For Oral Administration

Oral vancomycin is used in treating antibiotic-associated pseudomembranous colitis caused by C. difficile and for staphylococcal enterocolitis. Vancomycin is not effective by the oral route for other types of infections. The usual adult total daily dosage is 500 mg to 2 g given in 3 or 4 divided doses for 7 to 10 days. The total daily dose in children is 40 mg/kg of body weight in 3 or 4 divided doses for 7 to 10 days. The total daily dosage should not exceed 2g. The appropriate dose may be diluted in 1 oz of water and given to the patients to drink. Common flavoring syrups may be added to the solution to improve the taste for oral administration. The diluted solution may be administered via a nasogastric tube.
Albuterol Sulfate Solut...

Albuterol Sulfate Solution

Adults and Children 2 to 12 Years of Age

The usual dosage for adults and for children weighing at least 15 kg is 2.5 mg of albuterol (one vial) administered three to four times daily by nebulization. Children weighing < 15 kg who require < 2.5 mg/dose (i.e., less than a full vial) should use albuterol inhalation solution, 0.5% instead of albuterol inhalation solution, 0.083%. More frequent administration or higher doses are not recommended. To administer 2.5 mg of albuterol, administer the entire contents of one sterile unit dose vial (3 mL of 0.083% inhalation solution) by nebulization. The flow rate is regulated to suit the particular nebulizer so that albuterol inhalation solution will be delivered over approximately 5 to 15 minutes.

The use of albuterol sulfate inhalation solution can be continued as medically indicated to control recurring bouts of bronchospasm. During this time most patients gain optimum benefit from regular use of the inhalation solution.

If a previously effective dosage regimen fails to provide the usual relief, medical advice should be sought immediately, as this is often a sign of seriously worsening asthma which would require reassessment of therapy.
Octreotide Acetate

Octreotide Acetate

Octreotide acetate may be administered subcutaneously or intravenously. Subcutaneous injection is the usual route of administration of octreotide acetate for control of symptoms. Pain with subcutaneous administration may be reduced by using the smallest volume that will deliver the desired dose. Multiple subcutaneous injections at the same site within short periods of time should be avoided. Sites should be rotated in a systematic manner.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. Do not use if particulates and/or discoloration are observed. Proper sterile technique should be used in the preparation of parenteral admixtures to minimize the possibility of microbial contamination. Octreotide acetate is not compatible in Total Parenteral Nutrition (TPN) solutions because of the formation of a glycosyloctreotide conjugate which may decrease the efficacy of the product.

Octreotide acetate is stable in sterile isotonic saline solutions or sterile solutions of dextrose 5% in water for 24 hours. It may be diluted in volumes of 50 to 200 mL and infused intravenously over 15 to 30 minutes or administered by IV push over 3 minutes. In emergency situations (e.g.; carcinoid crisis) it may be given by rapid bolus.

The initial dosage is usually 50 mcg administered twice or three times daily. Upward dose titration is frequently required. Dosage information for patients with specific tumors follows.

Acromegaly

Dosage may be initiated at 50 mcg t.i.d. Beginning with this low dose may permit adaptation to adverse gastrointestinal effects for patients who will require higher doses. IGF-I (somatomedin C) levels every 2 weeks can be used to guide titration. Alternatively, multiple growth hormone levels at 0 to 8 hours after octreotide acetate administration permit more rapid titration of dose. The goal is to achieve growth hormone levels less than 5 ng/mL or IGF-I (somatomedin C) levels less than 1.9 U/mL in males and less than 2.2 U/mL in females. The dose most commonly found to be effective is 100 mcg t.i.d., but some patients require up to 500 mcg t.i.d. for maximum effectiveness. Doses greater than 300 mcg/day seldom result in additional biochemical benefit, and if an increase in dose fails to provide additional benefit, the dose should be reduced. IGF-I (somatomedin C) or growth hormone levels should be re-evaluated at 6-month intervals.

Octreotide acetate should be withdrawn yearly for approximately 4 weeks from patients who have received irradiation to assess disease activity. If growth hormone or IGF-I (somatomedin C) levels increase and signs and symptoms recur, octreotide acetate therapy may be resumed.

Carcinoid Tumors

The suggested daily dosage of octreotide acetate during the first 2 weeks of therapy ranges from 100 to 600 mcg/day in 2 to 4 divided doses (mean daily dosage is 300 mcg). In the clinical studies, the median daily maintenance dosage was approximately 450 mcg, but clinical and biochemical benefits were obtained in some patients with as little as 50 mcg, while others required doses up to 1500 mcg/day. However, experience with doses above 750 mcg/day is limited.

VIPomas

Daily dosages of 200 to 300 mcg in 2 to 4 divided doses are recommended during the initial 2 weeks of therapy (range 150 to 750 mcg) to control symptoms of the disease. On an individual basis, dosage may be adjusted to achieve a therapeutic response, but usually doses above 450 mcg/day are not required.
Motion Medicine

Motion Medicine

Rocuronium bromide is for intravenous use only. This drug should only be administered by experienced clinicians or trained individuals supervised by an experienced clinician familiar with the use, actions, characteristics and complications of neuromuscular blocking agents. Doses of rocuronium bromide injection should be individualized and a peripheral nerve stimulator should be used to monitor drug effect, need for additional doses, adequacy of spontaneous recovery or antagonism, and to decrease the complications of overdosage if additional doses are administered.

The dosage information which follows is derived from studies based upon units of drug per unit of body weight. It is intended to serve as an initial guide to clinicians familiar with other neuromuscular blocking agents to acquire experience with rocuronium bromide.

In patients in whom potentiation of, or resistance to, neuromuscular block is anticipated, a dose adjustment should be considered [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.5), WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.9, 5.12), DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.8, 7.10), and USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6)].

2.1 Dose for Tracheal Intubation

The recommended initial dose of rocuronium bromide, regardless of anesthetic technique, is 0.6 mg/kg. Neuromuscular block sufficient for intubation (80% block or greater) is attained in a median (range) time of 1 (0.4 to 6) minute(s) and most patients have intubation completed within 2 minutes. Maximum blockade is achieved in most patients in less than 3 minutes. This dose may be expected to provide 31 (15 to 85) minutes of clinical relaxation under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia. Under halothane, isoflurane, and enflurane anesthesia, some extension of the period of clinical relaxation should be expected [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.3)].

A lower dose of rocuronium bromide (0.45 mg/kg) may be used. Neuromuscular block sufficient for intubation (80% block or greater) is attained in a median (range) time of 1.3 (0.8 to 6.2) minute(s) and most patients have intubation completed within 2 minutes. Maximum blockade is achieved in most patients in less than 4 minutes. This dose may be expected to provide 22 (12 to 31) minutes of clinical relaxation under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia. Patients receiving this low dose of 0.45 mg/kg who achieve less than 90% block (about 16% of these patients) may have a more rapid time to 25% recovery, 12 to 15 minutes.

A large bolus dose of 0.9 or 1.2 mg/kg can be administered under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia without adverse effects to the cardiovascular system [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.2)].

2.2 Rapid Sequence Intubation

In appropriately premedicated and adequately anesthetized patients, rocuronium bromide 0.6 to 1.2 mg/kg will provide excellent or good intubating conditions in most patients in less than 2 minutes [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

2.3 Maintenance Dosing

Maintenance doses of 0.1, 0.15, and 0.2 mg/kg rocuronium bromide, administered at 25% recovery of control T1 (defined as 3 twitches of train-of-four), provide a median (range) of 12 (2 to 31), 17 (6 to 50) and 24 (7 to 69) minutes of clinical duration under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.2)]. In all cases, dosing should be guided based on the clinical duration following initial dose or prior maintenance dose and not administered until recovery of neuromuscular function is evident. A clinically insignificant cumulation of effect with repetitive maintenance dosing has been observed [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.2)].

2.4 Use by Continuous Infusion

Infusion at an initial rate of 10 to 12 mcg/kg/min of rocuronium bromide should be initiated only after early evidence of spontaneous recovery from an intubating dose. Due to rapid redistribution [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)] and the associated rapid spontaneous recovery, initiation of the infusion after substantial return of neuromuscular function (more than 10% of control T1), may necessitate additional bolus doses to maintain adequate block for surgery.

Upon reaching the desired level of neuromuscular block, the infusion of rocuronium bromide must be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient’s twitch response as monitored with the use of a peripheral nerve stimulator. In clinical trials, infusion rates have ranged from 4 to 16 mcg/kg/min.

Inhalation anesthetics, particularly enflurane and isoflurane, may enhance the neuromuscular blocking action of nondepolarizing muscle relaxants. In the presence of steady-state concentrations of enflurane or isoflurane, it may be necessary to reduce the rate of infusion by 30 to 50%, at 45 to 60 minutes after the intubating dose.

Spontaneous recovery and reversal of neuromuscular blockade following discontinuation of rocuronium bromide infusion may be expected to proceed at rates comparable to that following comparable total doses administered by repetitive bolus injections [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.2)].

Infusion solutions of rocuronium bromide can be prepared by mixing rocuronium bromide with an appropriate infusion solution such as 5% glucose in water or lactated Ringers [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.6)]. These infusion solutions should be used within 24 hours of mixing. Unused portions of infusion solutions should be discarded.

Infusion rates of rocuronium bromide can be individualized for each patient using the following tables for 3 different concentrations of rocuronium bromide solution as guidelines:
Table 1. Infusion Rates Using Rocuronium Bromide Injection (0.5 mg/mL)* * 50 mg rocuronium bromide in 100 mL solution
Patient

Weight

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

14

16

(kg)

(lbs)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

22

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

15

33

7.2

9

10.8

12.6

14.4

16.2

18

21.6

25.2

28.8

20

44

9.6

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

21.6

24

28.8

33.6

38.4

25

55

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

36

42

48

35

77

16.8

21

25.2

29.4

33.6

37.8

42

50.4

58.8

67.2

50

110

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

72

84

96

60

132

28.8

36

43.2

50.4

57.6

64.8

72

86.4

100.8

115.2

70

154

33.6

42

50.4

58.8

67.2

75.6

84

100.8

117.6

134.4

80

176

38.4

48

57.6

67.2

76.8

86.4

96

115.2

134.4

153.6

90

198

43.2

54

64.8

75.6

86.4

97.2

108

129.6

151.2

172.8

100

220

48

60

72

84

96

108

120

144

168

192
Table 2. Infusion Rates Using Rocuronium Bromide Injection (1 mg/mL)* * 100 mg rocuronium bromide in 100 mL solution
Patient

Weight

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

14

16

(kg)

(lbs)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

22

2.4

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

5.4

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

15

33

3.6

4.5

5.4

6.3

7.2

8.1

9

10.8

12.6

14.4

20

44

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

25

55

6

7.5

9

10.5

12

13.5

15

18

21

24

35

77

8.4

10.5

12.6

14.7

16.8

18.9

21

25.2

29.4

33.6

50

110

12

15

18

21

24

27

30

36

42

48

60

132

14.4

18

21.6

25.2

28.8

32.4

36

43.2

50.4

57.6

70

154

16.8

21

25.2

29.4

33.6

37.8

42

50.4

58.8

67.2

80

176

19.2

24

28.8

33.6

38.4

43.2

48

57.6

67.2

76.8

90

198

21.6

27

32.4

37.8

43.2

48.6

54

64.8

75.6

86.4

100

220

24

30

36

42

48

54

60

72

84

96
Table 3. Infusion Rates Using Rocuronium Bromide Injection (5 mg/mL)* * 500 mg rocuronium bromide in 100 mL solution
Patient

Weight

Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

14

16

(kg)

(lbs)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

22

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

1

1.1

1.2

1.4

1.7

1.9

15

33

0.7

0.9

1.1

1.3

1.4

1.6

1.8

2.2

2.5

2.9

20

44

1

1.2

1.4

1.7

1.9

2.2

2.4

2.9

3.4

3.8

25

55

1.2

1.5

1.8

2.1

2.4

2.7

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

35

77

1.7

2.1

2.5

2.9

3.4

3.8

4.2

5

5.9

6.7

50

110

2.4

3

3.6

4.2

4.8

5.4

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

60

132

2.9

3.6

4.3

5

5.8

6.5

7.2

8.6

10.1

11.5

70

154

3.4

4.2

5

5.9

6.7

7.6

8.4

10.1

11.8

13.4

80

176

3.8

4.8

5.8

6.7

7.7

8.6

9.6

11.5

13.4

15.4

90

198

4.3

5.4

6.5

7.6

8.6

9.7

10.8

13

15.1

17.3

100

220

4.8

6

7.2

8.4

9.6

10.8

12

14.4

16.8

19.2

2.5 Dosage in Specific Populations

Pediatric Patients

The recommended initial intubation dose of rocuronium bromide is 0.6 mg/kg; however , a lower dose of 0.45 mg/kg may be used depending on anesthetic technique and the age of the patient.

For sevoflurane (induction) rocuronium bromide doses of 0.45 mg/kg and 0.6 mg/kg in general produce excellent to good intubating conditions within 75 seconds. When halothane is used, a 0.6 mg/kg dose of rocuronium bromide resulted in excellent to good intubating conditions within 60 seconds.

The time to maximum block for an intubating dose was shortest in infants (28 days up to 3 months) and longest in neonates (birth to less than 28 days). The duration of clinical relaxation following an intubating dose is shortest in children (greater than 2 years up to 11 years) and longest in infants.

When sevoflurane is used for induction and isoflurane/nitrous oxide for maintenance of general anesthesia, maintenance dosing of rocuronium bromide can be administered as bolus doses of 0.15 mg/kg at reappearance of T3 in all pediatric age groups. Maintenance dosing can also be administered at the reappearance of T2 at a rate of 7 to 10 mcg/kg/min, with the lowest dose requirement for neonates (birth to less than 28 days) and the highest dose requirement for children (greater than 2 years up to 11 years).

When halothane is used for general anesthesia, patients ranging from 3 months old through adolescence can be administered rocuronium bromide maintenance doses of 0.075 to 0.125 mg/kg upon return of T1 to 0.25% to provide clinical relaxation for 7 to 10 minutes. Alternatively, a continuous infusion of rocuronium bromide initiated at a rate of 12 mcg/kg/min upon return of T1 to 10% (one twitch present in train-of-four), may also be used to maintain neuromuscular blockade in pediatric patients.

Additional information for administration to pediatric patients of all age groups is presented elsewhere in the label [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.2)].

The infusion of rocuronium bromide must be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient’s twitch response as monitored with the use of a peripheral nerve stimulator. Spontaneous recovery and reversal of neuromuscular blockade following discontinuation of rocuronium bromide infusion may be expected to proceed at rates comparable to that following similar total exposure to single bolus doses [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.2)].

Rocuronium bromide is not recommended for rapid sequence intubation in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Patients

Geriatric patients (65 years or older) exhibited a slightly prolonged median (range) clinical duration of 46 (22 to 73), 62 (49 to 75), and 94 (64 to 138) minutes under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia following doses of 0.6, 0.9, and 1.2 mg/kg, respectively. No differences in duration of neuromuscular blockade following maintenance doses of rocuronium bromide were observed between these subjects and younger subjects, but greater sensitivity of some older individuals cannot be ruled out [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.2) and CLINICAL STUDIES (14.2)]. [See also WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.4)].

Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

No differences from patients with normal hepatic and kidney function were observed for onset time at a dose of 0.6 mg/kg rocuronium bromide. When compared to patients with normal renal and hepatic function, the mean clinical duration is similar in patients with end-stage renal disease undergoing renal transplant, and is about 1.5 times longer in patients with hepatic disease. Patients with renal failure may have a greater variation in duration of effect [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6, 8.7), and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

Obese Patients

In obese patients, the initial dose of rocuronium bromide 0.6 mg/kg should be based upon the patient’s actual body weight [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

An analysis across all US controlled clinical studies indicates that the pharmacodynamics of rocuronium bromide are not different between obese and non-obese patients when dosed based upon their actual body weight.

Patients with Reduced Plasma Cholinesterase Activity

Rocuronium metabolism does not depend on plasma cholinesterase so dosing adjustments are not needed in patients with reduced plasma cholinesterase activity.

Patients with Prolonged Circulation Time

Because higher doses of rocuronium bromide produce a longer duration of action, the initial dosage should usually not be increased in these patients to reduce onset time; instead, in these situations, when feasible, more time should be allowed for the drug to achieve onset of effect [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.7)].

Patients with Drugs or Conditions Causing Potentiation of Neuromuscular Block

The neuromuscular blocking action of rocuronium bromide is potentiated by isoflurane and enflurane anesthesia. Potentiation is minimal when administration of the recommended dose of rocuronium bromide occurs prior to the administration of these potent inhalation agents. The median clinical duration of a dose of 0.57 to 0.85 mg/kg was 34, 38, and 42 minutes under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen, enflurane and isoflurane maintenance anesthesia, respectively. During 1 to 2 hours of infusion, the infusion rate of rocuronium bromide required to maintain about 95% block was decreased by as much as 40% under enflurane and isoflurane anesthesia [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.3)].

2.6 Preparation for Administration of Rocuronium Bromide

Diluent Compatibility

Rocuronium bromide is compatible in solution with:

0.9% NaCl solution

sterile water for injection

5% glucose in water

lactated Ringers

5% glucose in saline

Rocuronium bromide is compatible in the above solutions at concentrations up to 5 mg/mL for 24 hours at room temperature in plastic bags, glass bottles, and plastic syringe pumps.

Drug Admixture Incompatibility

Rocuronium bromide is physically incompatible when mixed with the following drugs:

amphotericin

hydrocortisone sodium succinate

amoxicillin

insulin

azathioprine

intralipid

cefazolin

ketorolac

cloxacillin

lorazepam

dexamethasone

methohexital

diazepam

methylprednisolone

erythromycin

thiopental

famotidine

trimethoprim

furosemide

vancomycin

If rocuronium bromide is administered via the same infusion line that is also used for other drugs, it is important that this infusion line is adequately flushed between administration of rocuronium bromide and drugs for which incompatibility with rocuronium bromide has been demonstrated or for which compatibility with rocuronium bromide has not been established.

Infusion solutions should be used within 24 hours of mixing. Unused portions of infusion solutions should be discarded.

Rocuronium bromide should not be mixed with alkaline solutions [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.10)].

Visual Inspection

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and clarity prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use solution if particulate matter is present.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae.

Adults – Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months. The doses for the preceding infections may be given by either the intramuscular or intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous drip therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae.

Adults – Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months. The doses for the preceding infections may be given by either the intramuscular or intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous drip therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

This insert is for a Pharmacy Bulk Package and is intended for preparing IV admixtures only. Dosage recommendations for intramuscular injection are for informational purposes only.

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae.

Adults – Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months.

The doses for the preceding infections may be given by either the intramuscular or intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous drip therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.

For Administration by Intravenous Infusion – Reconstitute as directed below (Directions for Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package) prior to diluting with an intravenous solution.

IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Stability studies on ampicillin sodium at several concentrations in various intravenous solutions indicate the drug will lose less than 10% activity at the temperatures noted for the time periods stated.
Room Temperature (25° C)
Diluent

Concentrations

Stability Periods

Sterile Water for Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

8 hours

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

8 hours

5% Dextrose Injection USP

10 to 20 mg/mL

1 hour

5% Dextrose Injection USP

up to 2 mg/mL

2 hours

5% Dextrose and 0.45% NaCl Injection USP

up to 2 mg/mL

2 hours

Lactated Ringer’s Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

8 hours

Refrigerated (4° C)

Sterile Water for Injection USP

30 mg/mL

48 hours

Sterile Water for Injection USP

up to 20 mg/mL

72 hours

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP

30 mg/mL

24 hours

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP

up to 20 mg/mL

48 hours

Lactated Ringer’s Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

24 hours

5% Dextrose Injection USP

up to 20 mg/mL

1 hour

5% Dextrose and 0.45% NaCl Injection USP

up to 10 mg/mL

1 hour

Only those solutions listed above should be used for the intravenous infusion of Ampicillin for Injection, USP. The concentrations should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of ampicillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

Directions For Proper Use Of Pharmacy Bulk Package

This glass Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle contains 10 grams ampicillin and is designed for use in the pharmacy in preparing IV admixtures.

a) Add 94 mL Sterile Water for Injection USP. The resulting solution will contain 100 milligrams ampicillin activity per mL, and is stable up to one hour at room temperature.

b) Dilute further within ONE HOUR to a concentration of 5 mg to 10 mg per mL. See Table for suitable fluid. Use promptly. This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

c) Using aseptic technique under a laminar flow hood, the closure should be penetrated only one time after reconstitution using a suitable sterile dispensing set; which allows measured dispensing of the contents. Use of a syringe and needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage.

d) After entry, use entire contents of Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle promptly. The entire contents of the Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle must be dispensed within ONE HOUR of reconstitution. This time limit should begin with the introduction of solvent in the Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle.

e) A plastic ball attached to the pharmacy bulk package provides a suitable hanging device while dispensing contents.

Use of this product is restricted to a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Ampicillin

Ampicillin

This insert is for a Pharmacy Bulk Package and is intended for preparing IV admixtures only. Dosage recommendations for intramuscular injection are for informational purposes only.

Infections of the respiratory tract and soft tissues.

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 250 to 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 25 to 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

Infections of the gastrointestinal and genitourinary tracts (including those caused by Neisseria gonorrhoeae in females).

Patients weighing 40 kg (88 lbs) or more: 500 mg every 6 hours.

Patients weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs): 50 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses at 6- to 8- hour intervals.

In the treatment of chronic urinary tract and intestinal infections, frequent bacteriological and clinical appraisal is necessary. Smaller doses than those recommended above should not be used. Higher doses should be used for stubborn or severe infections. In stubborn infections, therapy may be required for several weeks. It may be necessary to continue clinical and/or bacteriological follow-up for several months after cessation of therapy.

Urethritis in males due to N. gonorrhoeae.

Adults – Two doses of 500 mg each at an interval of 8 to 12 hours. Treatment may be repeated if necessary or extended if required.

In the treatment of complications of gonorrheal urethritis, such as prostatitis and epididymitis, prolonged and intensive therapy is recommended. Cases of gonorrhea with a suspected primary lesion of syphilis should have darkfield examinations before receiving treatment. In all other cases where concomitant syphilis is suspected, monthly serological tests should be made for a minimum of four months.

The doses for the preceding infections may be given by either the intramuscular or intravenous route. A change to oral ampicillin may be made when appropriate.

Bacterial Meningitis

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day in equally divided doses every 3 to 4 hours. (Treatment may be initiated with intravenous drip therapy and continued with intramuscular injections.) The doses for other infections may be given by either the intravenous or intramuscular route.

Septicemia

Adults and children – 150 to 200 mg/kg/day. Start with intravenous administration for at least three days and continue with the intramuscular route every 3 to 4 hours.

Treatment of all infections should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours beyond the time that the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. A minimum of 10-days treatment is recommended for any infection caused by Group A beta-hemolytic streptococci to help prevent the occurrence of acute rheumatic fever or acute glomerulonephritis.

For Administration by Intravenous Infusion – Reconstitute as directed below (Directions for Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package) prior to diluting with an intravenous solution.

IMPORTANT: This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after the preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

Stability studies on ampicillin sodium at several concentrations in various intravenous solutions indicate the drug will lose less than 10% activity at the temperatures noted for the time periods stated.
Room Temperature (25° C)
Diluent

Concentrations

Stability Periods

Sterile Water for Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

8 hours

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

8 hours

5% Dextrose Injection USP

10 to 20 mg/mL

1 hour

5% Dextrose Injection USP

up to 2 mg/mL

2 hours

5% Dextrose and 0.45% NaCl Injection USP

up to 2 mg/mL

2 hours

Lactated Ringer’s Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

8 hours

Refrigerated (4° C)

Sterile Water for Injection USP

30 mg/mL

48 hours

Sterile Water for Injection USP

up to 20 mg/mL

72 hours

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP

30 mg/mL

24 hours

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection USP

up to 20 mg/mL

48 hours

Lactated Ringer’s Injection USP

up to 30 mg/mL

24 hours

5% Dextrose Injection USP

up to 20 mg/mL

1 hour

5% Dextrose and 0.45% NaCl Injection USP

up to 10 mg/mL

1 hour

Only those solutions listed above should be used for the intravenous infusion of Ampicillin for Injection, USP. The concentrations should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of ampicillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

Directions For Proper Use Of Pharmacy Bulk Package

This glass Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle contains 10 grams ampicillin and is designed for use in the pharmacy in preparing IV admixtures.

a) Add 94 mL Sterile Water for Injection USP. The resulting solution will contain 100 milligrams ampicillin activity per mL, and is stable up to one hour at room temperature.

b) Dilute further within ONE HOUR to a concentration of 5 mg to 10 mg per mL. See Table for suitable fluid. Use promptly. This chemical stability information in no way indicates that it would be acceptable practice to use this product well after preparation time. Good professional practice suggests that compounded admixtures should be administered as soon after preparation as is feasible.

c) Using aseptic technique under a laminar flow hood, the closure should be penetrated only one time after reconstitution using a suitable sterile dispensing set; which allows measured dispensing of the contents. Use of a syringe and needle is not recommended as it may cause leakage.

d) After entry, use entire contents of Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle promptly. The entire contents of the Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle must be dispensed within ONE HOUR of reconstitution. This time limit should begin with the introduction of solvent in the Pharmacy Bulk Package bottle.

e) A plastic ball attached to the pharmacy bulk package provides a suitable hanging device while dispensing contents.

Use of this product is restricted to a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Pramipexole Dihydrochlo...

Pramipexole Dihydrochloride

2.1 General Dosing Considerations

Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets are taken orally, with or without food.

If a significant interruption in therapy with pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets has occurred, re-titration of therapy may be warranted.

2.2 Dosing for Parkinson's Disease

In all clinical studies, dosage was initiated at a subtherapeutic level to avoid intolerable adverse effects and orthostatic hypotension. pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets should be titrated gradually in all patients. The dose should be increased to achieve a maximum therapeutic effect, balanced against the principal side effects of dyskinesia, hallucinations, somnolence, and dry mouth.

Dosing in Patients with Normal Renal Function

InitialTreatment Doses should be increased gradually from a starting dose of 0.375 mg/day given in three divided doses and should not be increased more frequently than every 5 to 7 days. A suggested ascending dosage schedule that was used in clinical studies is shown in Table 1
Table 1 Ascending Dosage Schedule of Pramipexole Dihydrochloride Tablets for Parkinson's Disease
Week

Dosage (mg)

Total Daily Dose (mg)

1

0.125 three times a day

0.375

2

0.25 three times a day

0.75

3

0.5 three times a day

1.50

4

0.75 three times a day

2.25

5

1 three times a day

3

6

1.25 three times a day

3.75

7

1.5 three times a day

4.50

Maintenance Treatment Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets were effective and well tolerated over a dosage range of 1.5 to 4.5 mg/day administered in equally divided doses three times per day with or without concomitant levodopa (approximately 800 mg/day).

In a fixed-dose study in early Parkinson's disease patients, doses of 3 mg, 4.5 mg, and 6 mg per day of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets were not shown to provide any significant benefit beyond that achieved at a daily dose of 1.5 mg/day. However, in the same fixed-dose study, the following adverse events were dose related: postural hypotension, nausea, constipation, somnolence, and amnesia. The frequency of these events was generally 2-fold greater than placebo for pramipexole doses greater than 3 mg/day. The incidence of somnolence reported with pramipexole at a dose of 1.5 mg/day was comparable to placebo.

When pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets are used in combination with levodopa, a reduction of the levodopa dosage should be considered. In a controlled study in advanced Parkinson's disease, the dosage of levodopa was reduced by an average of 27% from baseline.

Dosing in Patients with Renal Impairment

The recommended dosing of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets in Parkinson's disease patients with renal impairment is provided in Table 2.
Table 2 Dosing of Pramipexole Dihydrochloride Tablets in Parkinson’s Disease Patients with Renal Impairment
Renal Status

Starting Dose (mg)

Maximum Dose (mg)

Normal to mild impairment(creatinine Cl >50 mL/min)

0.125 three times a day

1.5 three times a day

Moderate impairment(creatinine Cl =30 to 50 mL/min)

0.125 twice a day

0.75 three times a day

Severe impairment(creatinine Cl =15 to <30 mL/min)

0.125 once a day

1.5 once a day

Very severe impairment(creatinine Cl <15 mL/minand hemodialysis patients)

The use of pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets has not been adequately studied in this group of patients.

Discontinuation of Treatment Pramipexole dihydrochloride tablets may be tapered off at a rate of 0.75 mg per day until the daily dose has been reduced to 0.75 mg. Thereafter, the dose may be reduced by 0.375 mg per day.
Vpriv

Vpriv

2.1 Dosing Information

The maximum single recommended adult dose of Sumatriptan Succinate Injection for the acute treatment of migraine or cluster headache is 6 mg injected subcutaneously. For the treatment of migraine, if side effects are dose limiting, lower doses (1 mg to 5 mg) may be used [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. For the treatment of cluster headache, the efficacy of lower doses has not been established.

The maximum cumulative dose that may be given in 24 hours is 12 mg, two 6-mg injections separated by at least 1 hour. A second 6-mg dose should only be considered if some response to a first injection was observed.

2.2 Administration Using the Autoinjector Pen

An autoinjector device is available for use with 4- mg and 6-mg prefilled syringe cartridges. With this device, the needle penetrates approximately 1/4 inch (5 to 6 mm). The injection is intended to be given subcutaneously, and intramuscular or intravascular delivery must be avoided. Instruct patients on the proper use of the autoinjector pen and direct them to use injection sites with an adequate skin and subcutaneous thickness to accommodate the length of the needle.

2.3 Administration of Doses of Sumatriptan Succinate Other than 4 or 6 mg

In patients receiving doses other than 4 mg or 6 mg, use the 6-mg single-dose vial; do not use the autoinjector pen. Visually inspect the vial for particulate matter and discoloration before administration. Do not use if particulates and discolorations are noted.
Methocarbamol

Methocarbamol

500 mg – Adults: Initial dosage, 3 tablets q.i.d.; maintenance dosage, 2 tablets t.i.d.

750 mg – Adults: Initial dosage, 2 tablets q.i.d.; maintenance dosage, 1 tablet q.4h, or 2 tablets t.i.d.

Six grams a day are recommended for the first 48 to 72 hours of treatment. (For severe conditions, 8 grams a day may be administered.) Thereafter, the dosage can usually be reduced to approximately 4 grams a day.
Fluoxetine Hydrochlorid...

Fluoxetine Hydrochloride

2.1 Major Depressive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult – In controlled trials used to support the efficacy of fluoxetine, patients were administered morning doses ranging from 20 to 80 mg/day. Studies comparing fluoxetine 20, 40, and 60 mg/day to placebo indicate that 20 mg/day is sufficient to obtain a satisfactory response in Major Depressive Disorder in most cases. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once-a-day (morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon) and should not exceed a maximum dose of 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) – In the short-term (8 to 9 week) controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses of 10 to 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)]. Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 or 20 mg/day. After 1 week at 10 mg/day, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day.

However, due to higher plasma levels in lower weight children, the starting and target dose in this group may be 10 mg/day. A dose increase to 20 mg/day may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed.

All patients – As with other drugs effective in the treatment of Major Depressive Disorder, the full effect may be delayed until 4 weeks of treatment or longer.

Maintenance/Continuation/Extended Treatment – It is generally agreed that acute episodes of Major Depressive Disorder require several months or longer of sustained pharmacologic therapy. Whether the dose needed to induce remission is identical to the dose needed to maintain and/or sustain euthymia is unknown.

Daily Dosing – Systematic evaluation of fluoxetine in adult patients has shown that its efficacy in Major Depressive Disorder is maintained for periods of up to 38 weeks following 12 weeks of open-label acute treatment (50 weeks total) at a dose of 20 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Switching Patients to a Tricyclic Antidepressant (TCA) – Dosage of a TCA may need to be reduced, and plasma TCA concentrations may need to be monitored temporarily when fluoxetine is coadministered or has been recently discontinued [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.2 Obsessive Compulsive Disorder

Initial Treatment

Adult – In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fixed daily doses of 20, 40, or 60 mg of fluoxetine or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.2)]. In one of these studies, no dose-response relationship for effectiveness was demonstrated. Consequently, a dose of 20 mg/day, administered in the morning, is recommended as the initial dose. Since there was a suggestion of a possible dose-response relationship for effectiveness in the second study, a dose increase may be considered after several weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. The full therapeutic effect may be delayed until 5 weeks of treatment or longer.

Doses above 20 mg/day may be administered on a once daily (i.e., morning) or BID schedule (i.e., morning and noon). A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended; however, doses of up to 80 mg/day have been well tolerated in open studies of OCD. The maximum fluoxetine dose should not exceed 80 mg/day.

Pediatric (children and adolescents) – In the controlled clinical trial of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of OCD, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.2)].

In adolescents and higher weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After 2 weeks, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 60 mg/day is recommended.

In lower weight children, treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. Additional dose increases may be considered after several more weeks if insufficient clinical improvement is observed. A dose range of 20 to 30 mg/day is recommended. Experience with daily doses greater than 20 mg is very minimal, and there is no experience with doses greater than 60 mg.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment – While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine, OCD is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Although the efficacy of fluoxetine after 13 weeks has not been documented in controlled trials, adult patients have been continued in therapy under double-blind conditions for up to an additional 6 months without loss of benefit. However, dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for treatment.

2.3 Bulimia Nervosa

Initial Treatment – In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Bulimia Nervosa, patients were administered fixed daily fluoxetine doses of 20 or 60 mg, or placebo [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Only the 60 mg dose was statistically significantly superior to placebo in reducing the frequency of binge-eating and vomiting. Consequently, the recommended dose is 60 mg/day, administered in the morning. For some patients it may be advisable to titrate up to this target dose over several days. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically studied in patients with bulimia.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment – Systematic evaluation of continuing fluoxetine 60 mg/day for periods of up to 52 weeks in patients with bulimia who have responded while taking fluoxetine 60 mg/day during an 8-week acute treatment phase has demonstrated a benefit of such maintenance treatment [see Clinical Studies (14.3)]. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for maintenance treatment.

2.4 Panic Disorder

Initial Treatment – In the controlled clinical trials of fluoxetine supporting its effectiveness in the treatment of Panic Disorder, patients were administered fluoxetine doses in the range of 10 to 60 mg/day [see Clinical Studies (14.4)]. Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 10 mg/day. After one week, the dose should be increased to 20 mg/day. The most frequently administered dose in the 2 flexible-dose clinical trials was 20 mg/day.

A dose increase may be considered after several weeks if no clinical improvement is observed. Fluoxetine doses above 60 mg/day have not been systematically evaluated in patients with Panic Disorder.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment – While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue fluoxetine, panic disorder is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Nevertheless, patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for continued treatment.

2.5 Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination: Depressive Episodes Associated with Bipolar I Disorder

When using fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination, also refer to the Clinical Studies section of the package insert for Symbyax.

Adult – Fluoxetine should be administered in combination with oral olanzapine once daily in the evening, without regard to meals, generally beginning with 5 mg of oral olanzapine and 20 mg of fluoxetine. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, can be made according to efficacy and tolerability within dose ranges of fluoxetine 20 to 50 mg and oral olanzapine 5 to 12.5 mg. Antidepressant efficacy was demonstrated with olanzapine and fluoxetine in combination with a dose range of olanzapine 6 to 12 mg and fluoxetine 25 to 50 mg. Safety of co-administration of doses above 18 mg olanzapine with 75 mg fluoxetine has not been evaluated in clinical studies.

Information for pediatric patients (10-17 years) is approved for Eli Lilly and Company’s Fluoxetine Capsules. However due to Eli Lilly and Company’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

Safety and efficacy of fluoxetine in combination with olanzapine was determined in clinical trials supporting approval of Symbyax (fixed-dose combination of olanzapine and fluoxetine). Symbyax is dosed between 3 mg/25 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day and 12 mg/50 mg (olanzapine/fluoxetine) per day. The following table demonstrates the appropriate individual component doses of fluoxetine and olanzapine versus Symbyax. Dosage adjustments, if indicated, should be made with the individual components according to efficacy and tolerability.
Table 1: Approximate Dose Correspondence Between Symbyax* and the Combination of Fluoxetine and Olanzapine For Use in Combination Symbyax (mg/day) Olanzapine (mg/day) Fluoxetine (mg/day) * Symbyax (olanzapine/fluoxetine HCl) is a fixed-dose combination of fluoxetine and olanzapine.
3 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

2.5

20

6 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

5

20

12 mg olanzapine/25 mg fluoxetine

10+2.5

20

6 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

5

40+10

12 mg olanzapine/50 mg fluoxetine

10+2.5

40+10

While there is no body of evidence to answer the question of how long a patient treated with fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination should remain on it, it is generally accepted that Bipolar I Disorder, including the depressive episodes associated with Bipolar I Disorder, is a chronic illness requiring chronic treatment. The physician should periodically re-examine the need for continued pharmacotherapy.

Fluoxetine monotherapy is not indicated for the treatment of depressive episodes associated with Bipolar I Disorder.

2.7 Dosing in Specific Populations

Treatment of Pregnant Women – When treating pregnant women with fluoxetine, the physician should carefully consider the potential risks and potential benefits of treatment. Neonates exposed to SSRIs or SNRIs late in the third trimester have developed complications requiring prolonged hospitalization, respiratory support, and tube feeding [see Use in Specific Populations (8.1)].

Geriatric – A lower or less frequent dosage should be considered for the elderly [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

Hepatic Impairment – As with many other medications, a lower or less frequent dosage should be used in patients with hepatic impairment [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Use in Specific Populations (8.6)].

Concomitant Illness – Patients with concurrent disease or on multiple concomitant medications may require dosage adjustments [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.4) and Warnings and Precautions (5.12)].

Fluoxetine and Olanzapine in Combination – The starting dose of oral olanzapine 2.5 to 5 mg with fluoxetine 20 mg should be used for patients with a predisposition to hypotensive reactions, patients with hepatic impairment, or patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow the metabolism of olanzapine or fluoxetine in combination (female gender, geriatric age, non-smoking status), or those patients who may be pharmacodynamically sensitive to olanzapine. Dosing modifications may be necessary in patients who exhibit a combination of factors that may slow metabolism. When indicated, dose escalation should be performed with caution in these patients. Fluoxetine and olanzapine in combination have not been systematically studied in patients over 65 years of age or in patients less than 10 years of age [see Warnings and Precautions (5.16) and Drug Interactions (7.7)].

2.8 Discontinuation of Treatment

Symptoms associated with discontinuation of fluoxetine, SNRIs, and SSRIs, have been reported [see Warnings and Precautions (5.15)].

2.9 Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with fluoxetine. Conversely, at least 5 weeks should be allowed after stopping fluoxetine before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders [see Contraindications (4.1)].

2.10 Use of Fluoxetine with Other MAOIs such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start fluoxetine capsules in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is an increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4.1)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving fluoxetine therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, fluoxetine should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for five weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with fluoxetine may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with fluoxetine is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Fluphenazine Hydrochlor...

Fluphenazine Hydrochloride

Depending on the severity and duration of symptoms, total daily dosage for adult psychotic patients may range initially from 2.5 to 10 mg and should be divided and given at six- to eight-hour intervals.

The smallest amount that will produce the desired results must be carefully determined for each individual, since optimal dosage levels of this potent drug vary from patient to patient. In general, the oral dose has been found to be approximately two to three times the parenteral dose of fluphenazine. Treatment is best instituted with a low initial dosage, which may be increased, if necessary, until the desired clinical effects are achieved. Therapeutic effect is often achieved with doses under 20 mg daily. Patients remaining severely disturbed or inadequately controlled may require upward titration of dosage. Daily doses up to 40 mg may be necessary; controlled clinical studies have not been performed to demonstrate safety of prolonged administration of such doses.

When symptoms are controlled, dosage can generally be reduced gradually to daily maintenance doses of 1 to 5 mg, often given as a single daily dose. Continued treatment is needed to achieve maximum therapeutic benefits; further adjustments in dosage may be necessary during the course of therapy to meet the patient’s requirements.

For psychotic patients who have been stabilized on a fixed daily dosage of fluphenazine hydrochloride tablets, conversion of therapy from oral fluphenazine hydrochloride dosage forms to the long-acting injectable fluphenazine decanoate may be indicated. (See fluphenazine decanoate injection labeling for conversion information.)

For geriatric patients, the suggested starting dose is 1 to 2.5 mg daily, adjusted according to the response of the patient.
Nadolol

Nadolol

DOSAGE MUST BE INDIVIDUALIZED. NADOLOL TABLETS MAY BE ADMINISTERED WITHOUT REGARD TO MEALS.

Angina Pectoris

The usual initial dose is 40 mg nadolol tablets once daily. Dosage may be gradually increased in 40 to 80 mg increments at 3 to 7 day intervals until optimum clinical response is obtained or there is pronounced slowing of the heart rate. The usual maintenance dose is 40 or 80 mg administered once daily. Doses up to 160 or 240 mg administered once daily may be needed.

The usefulness and safety in angina pectoris of dosage exceeding 240 mg per day have not been established. If treatment is to be discontinued, reduce the dosage gradually over a period of one to two weeks (see WARNINGS).

Hypertension

The usual initial dose is 40 mg nadolol tablets once daily, whether it is used alone or in addition to diuretic therapy. Dosage may be gradually increased in 40 to 80 mg increments until optimum blood pressure reduction is achieved. The usual maintenance dose is 40 or 80 mg administered once daily. Doses up to 240 or 320 mg administered once daily may be needed.

Dosage Adjustment in Renal Failure

Absorbed nadolol is excreted principally by the kidneys and, although nonrenal elimination does occur, dosage adjustments are necessary in patients with renal impairment. The following dose intervals are recommended:

Creatinine Clearance

(mL/min/1.73m2)

Dosage Interval

(hours)

>50

24

31-50

24-36

10-30

24-48

<10

40-60
Azithromycin

Azithromycin

Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsule USP, 0.4 mg once daily is recommended as the dose for the treatment of the signs and symptoms of BPH. It should be administered approximately one-half hour following the same meal each day. Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules, USP should not be crushed, chewed or opened.

For those patients who fail to respond to the 0.4 mg dose after 2 to 4 weeks of dosing, the dose of tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules, USP can be increased to 0.8 mg once daily. Tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules, USP 0.4 mg should not be used in combination with strong inhibitors of CYP3A4 (e.g., ketoconazole) [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.2)].

If tamsulosin hydrochloride capsules, USP administration is discontinued or interrupted for several days at either the 0.4 mg or 0.8 mg dose, therapy should be started again with the 0.4 mg once-daily dose.
Dextroamphetamine Sacch...

Dextroamphetamine Saccharate

Oxaliplatin injection, USP should be administered under the supervision of a qualified physician experienced in the use of cancer chemotherapeutic agents. Appropriate management of therapy and complications is possible only when adequate diagnostic and treatment facilities are readily available.

2.1 Dosage

Administer oxaliplatin injection in combination with 5-fluorouracil/leucovorin every 2 weeks. For advanced disease, treatment is recommended until disease progression or unacceptable toxicity. For adjuvant use, treatment is recommended for a total of 6 months (12 cycles):

Day 1: Oxaliplatin injection 85 mg/m2 intravenous infusion in 250 to 500 mL 5% Dextrose injection, USP and leucovorin 200 mg/m2 intravenous infusion in 5% Dextrose injection, USP both given over 120 minutes at the same time in separate bags using a Y-line, followed by 5-fluorouracil 400 mg/m2 intravenous bolus given over 2 to 4 minutes, followed by 5-fluorouracil 600 mg/m2 intravenous infusion in 500 mL 5% Dextrose injection, USP (recommended) as a 22-hour continuous infusion.

Day 2: Leucovorin 200 mg/m2 intravenous infusion over 120 minutes, followed by 5-fluorouracil 400 mg/m2 intravenous bolus given over 2 to 4 minutes, followed by 5-fluorouracil 600 mg/m2 intravenous infusion in 500 mL 5% Dextrose injection, USP (recommended) as a 22-hour continuous infusion.

Figure 1

The administration of oxaliplatin injection does not require prehydration. Premedication with antiemetics, including 5-HT3 blockers with or without dexamethasone, is recommended.

For information on 5-fluorouracil and leucovorin, see the respective package inserts.

2.2 Dose Modification Recommendations

Prior to subsequent therapy cycles, patients should be evaluated for clinical toxicities and recommended laboratory tests [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.6)]. Prolongation of infusion time for oxaliplatin from 2 hours to 6 hours may mitigate acute toxicities. The infusion times for 5-fluorouracil and leucovorin do not need to be changed.

Adjuvant Therapy in Patients with Stage III Colon Cancer

Neuropathy and other toxicities were graded using the NCI CTC scale version 1 [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.2)].

For patients who experience persistent Grade 2 neurosensory events that do not resolve, a dose reduction of oxaliplatin to 75 mg/m2 should be considered. For patients with persistent Grade 3 neurosensory events, discontinuing therapy should be considered. The infusional 5-fluorouracil/leucovorin regimen need not be altered.

A dose reduction of oxaliplatin to 75 mg/m2 and infusional 5-fluorouracil to 300 mg/m2 bolus and 500 mg/m2 22 hour infusion is recommended for patients after recovery from grade 3/4 gastrointestinal (despite prophylactic treatment) or grade 4 neutropenia or grade 3/4 thrombocytopenia. The next dose should be delayed until: neutrophils ≥1.5 × 109/L and platelets ≥75 × 109/L.

Dose Modifications in Therapy in Previously Untreated and Previously Treated Patients with Advanced Colorectal Cancer

Neuropathy was graded using a study-specific neurotoxicity scale [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.2)]. Other toxicities were graded by the NCI CTC, Version 2.

For patients who experience persistent Grade 2 neurosensory events that do not resolve, a dose reduction of oxaliplatin to 65 mg/m2 should be considered. For patients with persistent Grade 3 neurosensory events, discontinuing therapy should be considered. The 5-fluorouracil/leucovorin regimen need not be altered.

A dose reduction of oxaliplatin to 65 mg/m2 and 5-fluorouracil by 20% (300 mg/m2 bolus and 500 mg/m2 22-hour infusion) is recommended for patients after recovery from grade 3/4 gastrointestinal (despite prophylactic treatment) or grade 4 neutropenia or grade 3/4 thrombocytopenia. The next dose should be delayed until: neutrophils ≥1.5 × 109/L and platelets ≥75 × 109/L.

Dose Modifications in Therapy for Patients with Renal Impairment

In patients with normal renal function or mild to moderate renal impairment, the recommended dose of Oxaliplatin is 85 mg/m2. In patients with severe renal impairment, the initial recommended Oxaliplatin dose should be reduced to 65 mg/m2 [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.3 Preparation of Infusion Solution

Do not freeze and protect from light the concentrated solution.

A final dilution must never be performed with a sodium chloride solution or other chloride-containing solutions.

The solution must be further diluted in an infusion solution of 250 to 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP.

After dilution with 250 to 500 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, the shelf life is 6 hours at room temperature [20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F)] or up to 24 hours under refrigeration [2° to 8°C (36°to 46°F)]. After final dilution, protection from light is not required.

Oxaliplatin is incompatible in solution with alkaline medications or media (such as basic solutions of 5-fluorouracil) and must not be mixed with these or administered simultaneously through the same infusion line. The infusion line should be flushed with 5% Dextrose Injection, USP prior to administration of any concomitant medication.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration and discarded if present.

Needles or intravenous administration sets containing aluminum parts that may come in contact with oxaliplatin should not be used for the preparation or mixing of the drug. Aluminum has been reported to cause degradation of platinum compounds.
Epirubicin Hydrochlorid...

Epirubicin Hydrochloride

When possible, to reduce the risk of developing cardiotoxicity in patients receiving epirubicin hydrochloride injection after stopping treatment with other cardiotoxic agents, especially those with long half-lives such as trastuzumab, epirubicin hydrochloride injection-based therapy should be delayed until the other agents have cleared from the circulation [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.3)]. Administer epirubicin hydrochloride injection by intravenous infusion. Give epirubicin hydrochloride injection in repeated 3- to 4-week cycles. The total dose of epirubicin hydrochloride injection may be given on Day 1 of each cycle or divided equally and given on Days 1 and 8 of each cycle. The recommended dosages of epirubicin hydrochloride injection are as follows:

2.1 Recommended Dose

The recommended dose of epirubicin hydrochloride injection is 100 to 120 mg/m2. The following regimens are recommended:

CEF-120:

Cyclophosphamide

75 mg/m2 PO D 1 to 14

Epirubicin hydrochloride injection

60 mg/m2 IV D 1,8

5-Fluorouracil

500 mg/m2 IV D 1,8

Repeated every 28 days for 6 cycles

FEC-100:

5-Fluorouracil

500 mg/m2

Epirubicin hydrochloride injection

100 mg/m2

Cyclophosphamide

500 mg/m2

All drugs administered intravenously on Day 1 and repeated every 21 days for 6 cycles

Patients administered the 120-mg/m2 regimen of epirubicin hydrochloride injection should receive prophylactic antibiotic therapy.

2.2 Dose Modifications

Epirubicin hydrochloride injection dosage adjustments for hematologic and non-hematologic toxicities within a cycle of treatment, is based on nadir platelet counts <50,000/mm3, absolute neutrophil counts (ANC) <250/mm3, neutropenic fever, or Grades 3/4 nonhematologic toxicity. Reduce epirubicin hydrochloride injection Day 1 dose in subsequent cycles to 75% of the Day 1 dose given in the current cycle. Delay Day 1 chemotherapy in subsequent courses of treatment until platelet counts are ≥100,000/mm3, ANC ≥1500/mm3, and nonhematologic toxicities have recovered to ≤ Grade 1.

Bone Marrow Dysfunction

Consider administering a lower starting dose (75 to 90 mg/m2) for heavily pretreated patients, patients with pre-existing bone marrow depression, or in the presence of neoplastic bone marrow infiltration [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5)]. For patients receiving a divided dose of epirubicin hydrochloride injection (Day 1 and Day 8), the Day 8 dose should be 75% of Day 1 if platelet counts are 75,000 to 100,000/mm3 and ANC is 1000 to 1499/mm3. If Day 8 platelet counts are <75,000/mm3, ANC <1000/mm3, or Grades 3/4 nonhematologic toxicity has occurred, omit the Day 8 dose.

Hepatic Impairment

Recommendations regarding use of epirubicin hydrochloride injection in patients with hepatic impairment are not available because patients with hepatic abnormalities were not included in the adjuvant trials [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.5) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)]. In patients with elevated serum AST or serum total bilirubin concentrations, the following dose reductions are recommended:
• Bilirubin 1.2 to 3 mg/dL or AST 2 to 4 times upper limit of normal 1/2 of recommended starting dose • Bilirubin > 3 mg/dL or AST > 4 times upper limit of normal 1/4 of recommended starting dose
Renal Impairment

While no specific dose recommendation can be made based on the limited available data in patients with renal impairment, consider lower doses in patients with severe renal impairment (serum creatinine > 5 mg/dL) [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.6) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.3 Preparation and Administration Precautions

Storage of the solution for injection at refrigerated conditions can result in the formation of a gelled product. This gelled product will return to a slightly viscous to mobile solution after 2 to a maximum of 4 hours equilibration at controlled room temperature (15 to 25ºC).

Inspect parenteral drug products visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Procedures for proper handling and disposal of anticancer drugs should be used when handling and preparing epirubicin hydrochloride injection. Several guidelines on this subject have been published.1-4 [see REFERENCES (15)].

Protective Measures

Take the following protective measures when handling epirubicin hydrochloride injection:
• Train personnel in appropriate techniques for reconstitution and handling. • Exclude pregnant staff from working with this drug. • Wear protective clothing: goggles, gowns, and disposable gloves and masks when handling epirubicin hydrochloride injection. • Define a designated area for syringe preparation (preferably under a laminar flow system), with the work surface protected by disposable, plastic-backed, absorbent paper. • Place all items used for reconstitution, administration, or cleaning (including gloves) in high-risk, waste-disposal bags for high temperature incineration. • Treat spillage or leakage with dilute sodium hypochlorite (1% available chlorine) solution, preferably by soaking, and then water. Place all contaminated and cleaning materials in high-risk, waste-disposal bags for incineration. Treat accidental contact with the skin or eyes immediately by copious lavage with water, or soap and water, or sodium bicarbonate solution. However, do not abrade the skin by using a scrub brush. Seek medical attention. Always wash hands after removing gloves.
Incompatibilities

Avoid prolonged contact with any solution of an alkaline pH as it will result in hydrolysis of the drug. Do not mix epirubicin hydrochloride injection with heparin or fluorouracil due to chemical incompatibility that may lead to precipitation.

Epirubicin hydrochloride injection can be used in combination with other antitumor agents, but do not mix with other drugs in the same syringe.

Preparation of Infusion Solution

Administer epirubicin hydrochloride injection into the tubing of a freely flowing intravenous infusion (0.9% sodium chloride or 5% glucose solution). Patients receiving initial therapy at the recommended starting doses of 100 to 120 mg/m2 should generally have epirubicin hydrochloride injection infused over 15 to 20 minutes. For patients who require lower epirubicin hydrochloride injection starting doses due to organ dysfunction or who require modification of epirubicin hydrochloride injection doses during therapy, the epirubicin hydrochloride injection infusion time may be proportionally decreased, but should not be less than 3 minutes. This technique is intended to minimize the risk of thrombosis or perivenous extravasation, which could lead to severe cellulitis, vesication, or tissue necrosis. A direct push injection is not recommended due to the risk of extravasation, which may occur even in the presence of adequate blood return upon needle aspiration. Venous sclerosis may result from injection into small vessels or repeated injections into the same vein [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.9)]. Use epirubicin hydrochloride injection within 24 hours of first penetration of the rubber stopper. Discard any unused solution.
Vinoperfect Broad Spect...

Vinoperfect Broad Spectrum Spf 15 Day Perfecting Fluid

2.1 Recommended Dose

Glatopa is for subcutaneous use only. Do not administer intravenously. The recommended dose is:
• Glatopa 20 mg per mL: administer once per day
Glatopa 20 mg per mL and glatiramer acetate injection 40 mg per mL are not interchangeable.

2.2 Instructions for Use

Remove one blister-packaged prefilled syringe from the refrigerated carton. Let the prefilled syringe stand at room temperature for 20 minutes to allow the solution to warm to room temperature. Visually inspect the syringe for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. The solution in the syringe should appear clear, colorless to slightly yellow. If particulate matter or discoloration is observed, discard the syringe.

Areas for subcutaneous self-injection include arms, abdomen, hips, and thighs. The prefilled syringe is for single use only. Discard unused portions.
Lisinopril And Hydrochl...

Lisinopril And Hydrochlorothiazide

2.1 Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function

The usual dose of levofloxacin tablets is 250 mg, 500 mg, or 750 mg administered orally every 24 hours, as indicated by infection and described in Table 1.

These recommendations apply to patients with creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min. For patients with creatinine clearance <50 mL/min, adjustments to the dosing regimen are required [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.3)].

Table 1: Dosage in Adult Patients with Normal Renal Function (creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min)
* Due to the designated pathogens [see INDICATIONS AND USAGE ( 1)]. † Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician. ‡ Due to methicillin-susceptible Staphylococcus aureus , Streptococcus pneumoniae (including multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae , Haemophilus parainfluenzae , Klebsiella pneumoniae , Moraxella catarrhalis , Chlamydophila pneumoniae , Legionella pneumophila, or Mycoplasma pneumoniae [see INDICATIONS AND USAGE (1.2)]. § Due to Streptococcus pneumoniae (excluding multi-drug-resistant isolates [MDRSP]), Haemophilus influenzae , Haemophilus parainfluenzae , Mycoplasma pneumoniae , or Chlamydophila pneumoniae [see INDICATIONS AND USAGE (1.3)]. ¶ This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae , Proteus mirabilis and AP due to E. coli, including cases with concurrent bacteremia. # This regimen is indicated for cUTI due to Enterococcus faecalis , Enterococcus cloacae, Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae , Proteus mirabilis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa ; and for AP due to E. coli. Þ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.9)]. ß The safety of levofloxacin tablets in adults for durations of therapy beyond 28 days or in pediatric patients for durations beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.10) , USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.4), and CLINICAL STUDIES (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin tablet therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk. à Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis. Higher doses of levofloxacin tablets typically used for treatment of pneumonia can be used for treatment of plague, if clinically indicated.
Type of Infection*

Dosed Every 24 Hours

Duration (days)†

Nosocomial Pneumonia

750 mg

7 to 14

Community Acquired Pneumonia‡

500 mg

7 to 14

Community Acquired Pneumonia§

750 mg

5

Acute Bacterial Sinusitis

750 mg

5

500 mg

10 to 14

Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis

500 mg

7

Complicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections (SSSI)

750 mg

7 to 14

Uncomplicated SSSI

500 mg

7 to 10

Chronic Bacterial Prostatitis

500 mg

28

Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)¶

750 mg

5

Complicated Urinary Tract Infection (cUTI) or Acute Pyelonephritis (AP)#

250 mg

10

Uncomplicated Urinary Tract Infection

250 mg

3

Inhalational Anthrax (Post-Exposure), adult and pediatric patients > 50 kgÞ,ß

500 mg

60ß

Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of ageÞ,ß

see Table 2 below (2.2)

60ß

Plague, adult and pediatric patients > 50 kgà

500 mg

10 to 14

Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age

see Table 2 below (2.2)

10 to 14

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Patients

The dosage in pediatric patients ≥ 6 months of age is described below in Table 2.

Table 2 : Dosage in Pediatric Patients ≥ 6 Months of Age
* Due to Bacillus anthracis [see INDICATIONS AND USAGE (1.13)] and Yersinia pestis [see INDICATIONS AND USAGE (1.14)]. † Sequential therapy (intravenous to oral) may be instituted at the discretion of the physician. ‡ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to aerosolized B. anthracis. This indication is based on a surrogate endpoint. Levofloxacin plasma concentrations achieved in humans are reasonably likely to predict clinical benefit [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.9)]. § The safety of levofloxacin tablets in pediatric patients for durations of therapy beyond 14 days has not been studied. An increased incidence of musculoskeletal adverse events compared to controls has been observed in pediatric patients [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.10), USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.4) and CLINICAL STUDIES (14.9)]. Prolonged levofloxacin tablet therapy should only be used when the benefit outweighs the risk. ¶ Drug administration should begin as soon as possible after suspected or confirmed exposure to Yersinia pestis.
Type of Infection*

Dose

Freq. Once every

Duration†

Inhalational Anthrax (post-exposure)‡,§

Pediatric patients > 50 kg

500 mg

24 hr

60 days§

Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age

8 mg/kg (not to exceed 250 mg per dose)

12 hr

60 days§

Plague¶

Pediatric patients > 50 kg

500 mg

24 hr

10 to 14 days

Pediatric patients < 50 kg and ≥ 6 months of age

8 mg/kg (not to exceed 250 mg per dose)

12 hr

10 to 14 days

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Adults with Renal Impairment

Administer levofloxacin tablets with caution in the presence of renal insufficiency. Careful clinical observation and appropriate laboratory studies should be performed prior to and during therapy since elimination of levofloxacin may be reduced.

No adjustment is necessary for patients with a creatinine clearance ≥ 50 mL/min.

In patients with impaired renal function (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min), adjustment of the dosage regimen is necessary to avoid the accumulation of levofloxacin due to decreased clearance [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6)].

Table 3 shows how to adjust dose based on creatinine clearance.

Table 3: Dosage Adjustment in Adult Patients with Renal Impairment (creatinine clearance ˂ 50 mL/min)

Dosage in Normal Renal Function Every 24 hours

Creatinine Clearance 20 to 49 mL/min

Creatinine Clearance

10 to 19 mL/min

Hemodialysis or Chronic Ambulatory Peritoneal Dialysis (CAPD)

750 mg

750 mg every 48 hours

750 mg initial dose, then

500 mg every 48 hours

750 mg initial dose, then

500 mg every 48 hours

500 mg

500 mg initial dose, then 250 mg every 24 hours

500 mg initial dose, then

250 mg every 48 hours

500 mg initial dose, then

250 mg every 48 hours

250 mg

No dosage adjustment required

250 mg every 48 hours.

If treating uncomplicated UTI, then no dosage adjustment is required

No information on dosing adjustment is available

2.4 Drug Interaction With Chelation Agents: Antacids, Sucralfate, Metal Cations, Multivitamins

Levofloxacin tablets should be administered at least two hours before or two hours after antacids containing magnesium, aluminum, as well as sucralfate, metal cations such as iron, and multivitamin preparations with zinc or didanosine chewable/buffered tablets or the pediatric powder for oral solution [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1) and PATIENT COUNSELING INFORMATION (17.2)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

Food and Levofloxacin Tablets

Levofloxacin tablets can be administered without regard to food.

Hydration for Patients Receiving Levofloxacin Tablets

Adequate hydration of patients receiving oral levofloxacin should be maintained to prevent the formation of highly concentrated urine. Crystalluria and cylindruria have been reported with quinolones [see ADVERSE REACTIONS (6.1) and PATIENT COUNSELING INFORMATION (17.2)].
Minocycline Hydrochlori...

Minocycline Hydrochloride

The recommended dosage of minocycline hydrochloride extended-release tablets is approximately 1 mg/kg once daily for 12 weeks. Higher doses have not shown to be of additional benefit in the treatment of inflammatory lesions of acne, and may be associated with more acute vestibular side effects.

The following table shows tablet strength and body weight to achieve approximately 1 mg/kg.

Table 1: Dosing Table for Minocycline Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets

Patient’s Weight (lbs.)

Patient’s Weight (kg)

Tablet Strength (mg)

Actual mg/kg Dose

99-109

45-49

45

1-0.92

110-131

50-59

55

1.10-0.93

132-157

60-71

65

1.08-0.92

158-186

72-84

80

1.11-0.95

187-212

85-96

90

1.06-0.94

213-243

97-110

105

1.08-0.95

244-276

111-125

115

1.04-0.92

277-300

126-136

135

1.07-0.99

Minocycline hydrochloride extended-release tablets may be taken with or without food [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)]. Ingestion of food along with minocycline hydrochloride extended-release tablets may help reduce the risk of esophageal irritation and ulceration.

In patients with renal impairment, the total dosage should be decreased by either reducing the recommended individual doses and/or by extending the time intervals between doses [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.4)].
Ketoconazole Shampoo

Ketoconazole Shampoo

Apply the shampoo to the damp skin of the affected area and a wide margin surrounding this area. Lather, leave in place for 5 minutes, and then rinse off with water.

One application of the shampoo should be sufficient.
Tacrolimus

Tacrolimus

2.1 Dosage in Adult Kidney, Liver or Heart Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for adult patients with kidney, liver or heart transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 1. The initial dose of tacrolimus capsules, USP should be administered no sooner than 6 hours after transplantation in the liver and heart transplant patients. In kidney transplant patients, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules, USP may be administered within 24 hours of transplantation, but should be delayed until renal function has recovered. For blood concentration monitoring details see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.6 ).

Table 1 Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Adults
* In a second smaller trial, the initial dose of tacrolimus was 0.15 to 0.2 mg/kg/day and observed tacrolimus concentrations were 6 to 16 ng/mL during months 1 to 3 and 5 to 12 ng/mL during months 4 to 12 [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].
Patient Population

Recommended Tacrolimus Capsules Initial Oral Dosage

Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours

Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations

Adult kidney transplant patients

In combination with azathioprine

0.2 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 3: 7 to 20 ng/mL

month 4 to 12: 5 to 15 ng/mL

In combination with MMF/IL-2 receptor antagonist*

0.1 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 12: 4 to 11 ng/mL

Adult liver transplant patients

0.10 to 0.15 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL

Adult heart transplant patients

0.075 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 3: 10 to 20 ng/mL

month ≥4: 5 to 15 ng/mL

Dosing should be titrated based on clinical assessments of rejection and tolerability. Lower tacrolimus capsules, USP dosages than the recommended initial dosage may be sufficient as maintenance therapy. Adjunct therapy with adrenal corticosteroids is recommended early post-transplant.

The data in kidney transplant patients indicate that the Black patients required a higher dose to attain comparable trough concentrations compared to Caucasian patients (Table 2).
Table 2 Comparative Dose and Trough Concentrations Based on Race
Time After Transplant

Caucasian

n=114

Black

n=56

Dose

(mg/kg)

Trough Concentrations

(ng/mL)

Dose

(mg/kg)

Trough Concentrations (ng/mL)

Day 7

0.18

12

0.23

10.9

Month 1

0.17

12.8

0.26

12.9

Month 6

0.14

11.8

0.24

11.5

Month 12

0.13

10.1

0.19

11

Initial Dose – Injection

Tacrolimus injection should be used only as a continuous IV infusion and when the patient cannot tolerate oral administration of tacrolimus capsules, USP. Tacrolimus injection should be discontinued as soon as the patient can tolerate oral administration of tacrolimus capsules, USP, usually within 2 to 3 days. In a patient receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

The observed trough concentrations described above pertain to oral administration of tacrolimus capsules, USP only; while monitoring tacrolimus capsules concentrations in patients receiving tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion may have some utility, the observed concentrations will not represent comparable exposures to those estimated by the trough concentrations observed in patients on oral therapy.

The recommended starting dose of tacrolimus injection is 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day in kidney and liver transplant and 0.01 mg/kg/day in heart transplant given as a continuous IV infusion. Adult patients should receive doses at the lower end of the dosing range. Concomitant adrenal corticosteroid therapy is recommended early post-transplantation.

Anaphylactic reactions have occurred with injectables containing castor oil derivatives, such as tacrolimus injection [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.11)].

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Liver Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for pediatric patients with liver transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 3. For blood concentration monitoring details see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.6 ). If necessary, pediatric patients may start on an IV dose of 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day.
Table 3 Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Children
Patient Population

Recommended Tacrolimus Capsules Initial Oral Dosage

Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours

Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations

Pediatric liver transplant patients

0.15 to 0.20 mg/kg/day

Month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL

Pediatric liver transplantation patients without pre-existing renal or hepatic dysfunction have required and tolerated higher doses than adults to achieve similar blood concentrations.

Experience in pediatric kidney and heart transplantation patients is limited.

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Due to its potential for nephrotoxicity, consideration should be given to dosing tacrolimus capsules, USP at the lower end of the therapeutic dosing range in patients who have received a liver or heart transplant and have pre-existing renal impairment. Further reductions in dose below the targeted range may be required.

In kidney transplant patients with post-operative oliguria, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules, USP should be administered no sooner than 6 hours and within 24 hours of transplantation, but may be delayed until renal function shows evidence of recovery.

2.4 Dosage Adjustments in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Due to the reduced clearance and prolonged half-life, patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child Pugh ≥ 10) may require lower doses of tacrolimus capsules, USP. Close monitoring of blood concentrations is warranted.

The use of tacrolimus capsules, USP in liver transplant recipients experiencing post-transplant hepatic impairment may be associated with increased risk of developing renal insufficiency related to high whole-blood concentrations of tacrolimus. These patients should be monitored closely and dosage adjustments should be considered. Some evidence suggests that lower doses should be used in these patients [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.1), USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.7) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

It is recommended that patients initiate oral therapy with tacrolimus capsules, USP if possible.

Initial dosage and observed tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations for adults are shown in Table 1 and for pediatrics in Table 3 [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.1, 2.2)]; for blood concentration monitoring details in kidney transplant patients [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.1)].

It is important to take tacrolimus capsules, USP consistently every day either with or without food because the presence and composition of food decreases the bioavailability of tacrolimus capsules, USP [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

Patients should not eat grapefruit or drink grapefruit juice in combination with tacrolimus capsules, USP [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.2)]

Tacrolimus capsules, USP should not be used simultaneously with cyclosporine. Tacrolimus capsules, USP or cyclosporine should be discontinued at least 24 hours before initiating the other. In the presence of elevated tacrolimus capsules, USP or cyclosporine concentrations, dosing with the other drug usually should be further delayed.

In patients unable to take oral tacrolimus capsules, USP, therapy may be initiated with tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion. If IV therapy is necessary, conversion from IV to oral tacrolimus is recommended as soon as oral therapy can be tolerated. This usually occurs within 2 to 3 days. In patients receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

2.6 Therapeutic Drug Monitoring

Monitoring of tacrolimus blood concentrations in conjunction with other laboratory and clinical parameters is considered an essential aid to patient management for the evaluation of rejection, toxicity, dose adjustments and compliance. Observed whole blood trough concentrations can be found in Table 1. Factors influencing frequency of monitoring include but are not limited to hepatic or renal dysfunction, the addition or discontinuation of potentially interacting drugs and the post-transplant time. Blood concentration monitoring is not a replacement for renal and liver function monitoring and tissue biopsies. Data from clinical trials show that tacrolimus whole blood concentrations were most variable during the first week post-transplantation.

The relative risks of toxicity and efficacy failure are related to tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations. Therefore, monitoring of whole blood trough concentrations is recommended to assist in the clinical evaluation of toxicity and efficacy failure.

Methods commonly used for the assay of tacrolimus include high performance liquid chromatography with tandem mass spectrometric detection (HPLC/MS/MS) and immunoassays. Immunoassays may react with metabolites as well as parent compound. Therefore assay results obtained with immunoassays may have a positive bias relative to results of HPLC/MS. The bias may depend upon the specific assay and laboratory. Comparison of the concentrations in published literature to patient concentrations using the current assays must be made with detailed knowledge of the assay methods and biological matrices employed. Whole blood is the matrix of choice and specimens should be collected into tubes containing ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA) anti-coagulant. Heparin anti-coagulation is not recommended because of the tendency to form clots on storage. Samples which are not analyzed immediately should be stored at room temperature or in a refrigerator and assayed within 7 days; see assay instructions for specifics. If samples are to be kept longer they should be deep frozen at -20° C. One study showed drug recovery >90% for samples stored at -20° C for 6 months, with reduced recovery observed after 6 months.
Enoxaparin Sodium

Enoxaparin Sodium

All patients should be evaluated for a bleeding disorder before administration of enoxaparin sodium injection, unless the medication is needed urgently. Since coagulation parameters are unsuitable for monitoring enoxaparin sodium injection activity, routine monitoring of coagulation parameters is not required [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9)].

For subcutaneous use, enoxaparin sodium injection should not be mixed with other injections or infusions. For intravenous use (i.e., for treatment of acute STEMI), enoxaparin sodium injection can be mixed with normal saline solution (0.9%) or 5% dextrose in water.

Enoxaparin sodium injection is not intended for intramuscular administration.

2.1 Adult Dosage

Abdominal Surgery

In patients undergoing abdominal surgery who are at risk for thromboembolic complications, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 40 mg once a day administered by SC injection with the initial dose given 2 hours prior to surgery. The usual duration of administration is 7 to 10 days; up to 12 days administration has been administered in clinical trials.

Hip or Knee Replacement Surgery

In patients undergoing hip or knee replacement surgery, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 30 mg every 12 hours administered by SC injection. Provided that hemostasis has been established, the initial dose should be given 12 to 24 hours after surgery. For hip replacement surgery, a dose of 40 mg once a day SC, given initially 12 (±3) hours prior to surgery, may be considered. Following the initial phase of thromboprophylaxis in hip replacement surgery patients, it is recommended that continued prophylaxis with enoxaparin sodium injection 40 mg once a day be administered by SC injection for 3 weeks. The usual duration of administration is 7 to 10 days; up to 14 days administration has been administered in clinical trials.

Medical Patients During Acute Illness

In medical patients at risk for thromboembolic complications due to severely restricted mobility during acute illness, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 40 mg once a day administered by SC injection. The usual duration of administration is 6 to 11 days; up to 14 days of enoxaparin sodium injection has been administered in the controlled clinical trial.

Treatment of Deep Vein Thrombosis With or Without Pulmonary Embolism

In outpatient treatment, patients with acute deep vein thrombosis without pulmonary embolism who can be treated at home, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 1 mg/kg every 12 hours administered SC. In inpatient (hospital) treatment, patients with acute deep vein thrombosis with pulmonary embolism or patients with acute deep vein thrombosis without pulmonary embolism (who are not candidates for outpatient treatment), the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 1 mg/kg every 12 hours administered SC or 1.5 mg/kg once a day administered SC at the same time every day. In both outpatient and inpatient (hospital) treatments, warfarin sodium therapy should be initiated when appropriate (usually within 72 hours of enoxaparin sodium injection). Enoxaparin sodium injection should be continued for a minimum of 5 days and until a therapeutic oral anticoagulant effect has been achieved (International Normalization Ratio 2.0 to 3.0). The average duration of administration is 7 days; up to 17 days of enoxaparin sodium injection administration has been administered in controlled clinical trials.

Unstable Angina and Non-Q-Wave Myocardial Infarction

In patients with unstable angina or non-Q-wave myocardial infarction, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is 1 mg/kg administered SC every 12 hours in conjunction with oral aspirin therapy (100 to 325 mg once daily). Treatment with enoxaparin sodium injection should be prescribed for a minimum of 2 days and continued until clinical stabilization. The usual duration of treatment is 2 to 8 days; up to 12.5 days of enoxaparin sodium injection has been administered in clinical trials. [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2) and Clinical Studies (14.5)].

Treatment of Acute ST-Segment Elevation Myocardial Infarction

In patients with acute ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction, the recommended dose of enoxaparin sodium injection is a single IV bolus of 30 mg plus a 1 mg/kg SC dose followed by 1 mg/kg administered SC every 12 hours (maximum 100 mg for the first two doses only, followed by 1 mg/kg dosing for the remaining doses). Dosage adjustments are recommended in patients ≥75 years of age [see Dosage and Administration (2.3)]. All patients should receive aspirin as soon as they are identified as having STEMI and maintained with 75 to 325 mg once daily unless contraindicated.

When administered in conjunction with a thrombolytic (fibrin-specific or non-fibrin specific), enoxaparin sodium injection should be given between 15 minutes before and 30 minutes after the start of fibrinolytic therapy. In the pivotal clinical study, the enoxaparin sodium injection treatment duration was 8 days or until hospital discharge, whichever came first. An optimal duration of treatment is not known, but it is likely to be longer than 8 days.

For patients managed with percutaneous coronary intervention (PCI): If the last enoxaparin sodium injection SC administration was given less than 8 hours before balloon inflation, no additional dosing is needed. If the last enoxaparin sodium injection SC administration was given more than 8 hours before balloon inflation, an IV bolus of 0.3 mg/kg of enoxaparin sodium injection should be administered [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

2.2 Renal Impairment

Although no dose adjustment is recommended in patients with moderate (creatinine clearance 30-50 mL/min) and mild (creatinine clearance 50-80 mL/min) renal impairment, all such patients should be observed carefully for signs and symptoms of bleeding.

The recommended prophylaxis and treatment dosage regimens for patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <30 mL/min) are described in Table 1 [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Table 1 Dosage Regimens for Patients with Severe Renal Impairment (creatinine clearance <30mL/minute) Indication Dosage Regimen
Prophylaxis in abdominal surgery

30 mg administered SC once daily

Prophylaxis in hip or knee replacement surgery

30 mg administered SC once daily

Prophylaxis in medical patients during acute illness

30 mg administered SC once daily

Inpatient treatment of acute deep vein thrombosis with or without pulmonary embolism, when administered in conjunction with warfarin sodium

1 mg/kg administered SC once daily

Outpatient treatment of acute deep vein thrombosis without pulmonary embolism, when administered in conjunction with warfarin sodium

1 mg/kg administered SC once daily

Prophylaxis of ischemic complications of unstable angina and non-Q-wave myocardial infarction, when concurrently administered with aspirin

1 mg/kg administered SC once daily

Treatment of acute ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction in patients <75 years of age, when administered in conjunction with aspirin

30 mg single IV bolus plus a 1 mg/kg SC dose followed by 1 mg/kg administered SC once daily.

Treatment of acute ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction in geriatric patients ≥75 years of age, when administered in conjunction with aspirin

1 mg/kg administered SC once daily (no initial bolus)

2.3 Geriatric Patients with Acute ST-Segment Elevation Myocardial Infarction

For treatment of acute ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction in geriatric patients ≥75 years of age, do not use an initial IV bolus. Initiate dosing with 0.75 mg/kg SC every 12 hours (maximum 75 mg for the first two doses only, followed by 0.75 mg/kg dosing for the remaining doses) [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

No dose adjustment is necessary for other indications in geriatric patients unless kidney function is impaired [see Dosage and Administration (2.2)].

2.4 Administration

Enoxaparin sodium injection is a clear, colorless to pale yellow sterile solution, and as with other parenteral drug products, should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration.

The use of a tuberculin syringe or equivalent is recommended when using enoxaparin sodium injection multiple-dose vials to assure withdrawal of the appropriate volume of drug.

Enoxaparin sodium injection must not be administered by intramuscular injection. Enoxaparin sodium injection is intended for use under the guidance of a physician.

For subcutaneous administration, patients may self-inject only if their physicians determine that it is appropriate and with medical follow-up, as necessary. Proper training in subcutaneous injection technique (with or without the assistance of an injection device) should be provided.

Subcutaneous Injection Technique

Patients should be lying down and enoxaparin sodium injection administered by deep SC injection. To avoid the loss of drug when using the 30 and 40 mg prefilled syringes, do not expel the air bubble from the syringe before the injection. Administration should be alternated between the left and right anterolateral and left and right posterolateral abdominal wall. The whole length of the needle should be introduced into a skin fold held between the thumb and forefinger; the skin fold should be held throughout the injection. To minimize bruising, do not rub the injection site after completion of the injection.

Enoxaparin sodium injection prefilled syringes and graduated prefilled syringes are for single, one-time use only and are available with a system that shields the needle after injection.

Remove the prefilled syringe from the blister packaging by peeling at the arrow as directed on the blister. Do not remove by pulling on the plunger as this may damage the syringe.
1. Remove the needle shield by pulling it straight off the syringe (see Figure A). If adjusting the dose is required, the dose adjustment must be done prior to injecting the prescribed dose to the patient. Figure A 2. Inject using standard technique, pushing the plunger to the bottom of the syringe (see Figure B). Figure B 3. Remove the syringe from the injection site keeping your finger on the plunger rod (see Figure C). Figure C 4. Orient the needle away from you and others, and activate the safety system by firmly pushing the plunger rod. The protective sleeve will automatically cover the needle and an audible “click” will be heard to confirm shield activation (see Figure D). Figure D 5. Immediately dispose of the syringe in the nearest sharps container (see Figure E). Figure E
NOTE:
• The safety system can only be activated once the syringe has been emptied. • Activation of the safety system must be done only after removing the needle from the patient’s skin. • Do not replace the needle shield after injection. • The safety system should not be sterilized.
Activation of the safety system may cause minimal splatter of fluid. For optimal safety activate the system while orienting it downwards away from yourself and others.

Intravenous (Bolus) Injection Technique

For intravenous injection, the multiple-dose vial should be used. Enoxaparin sodium injection should be administered through an intravenous line. Enoxaparin sodium injection should not be mixed or co-administered with other medications. To avoid the possible mixture of enoxaparin sodium injection with other drugs, the intravenous access chosen should be flushed with a sufficient amount of saline or dextrose solution prior to and following the intravenous bolus administration of enoxaparin sodium injection to clear the port of drug. Enoxaparin sodium injection may be safely administered with normal saline solution (0.9%) or 5% dextrose in water.
Repaglinide

Repaglinide

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of type 2 diabetes with repaglinide.

The patient's blood glucose should be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels are of value in monitoring the patient's longer term response to therapy.

Short-term administration of repaglinide may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well controlled on diet.

Repaglinide doses are usually taken within 15 minutes of the meal but time may vary from immediately preceding the meal to as long as 30 minutes before the meal.

Starting Dose

For patients not previously treated or whose HbA1c is <8%, the starting dose should be 0.5 mg with each meal. For patients previously treated with blood glucose-lowering drugs and whose HbA1c is ≥8%, the initial dose is 1 or 2 mg with each meal preprandially (see previous paragraph).

Dose Adjustment

Dosing adjustments should be determined by blood glucose response, usually fasting blood glucose. Postprandial glucose levels testing may be clinically helpful in patients whose pre-meal blood glucose levels are satisfactory but whose overall glycemic control (HbA1c) is inadequate. The preprandial dose should be doubled up to 4 mg with each meal until satisfactory blood glucose response is achieved. At least one week should elapse to assess response after each dose adjustment.

The recommended dose range is 0.5 mg to 4 mg taken with meals. Repaglinide may be dosed preprandially 2, 3, or 4 times a day in response to changes in the patient's meal pattern. The maximum recommended daily dose is 16 mg.

Patient Management

Long-term efficacy should be monitored by measurement of HbA1c levels approximately every 3 months. Failure to follow an appropriate dosage regimen may precipitate hypoglycemia or hyperglycemia. Patients who do not adhere to their prescribed dietary and drug regimen are more prone to exhibit unsatisfactory response to therapy including hypoglycemia. When hypoglycemia occurs in patients taking a combination of repaglinide and a thiazolidinedione or repaglinide and metformin, the dose of repaglinide should be reduced.

Patients Receiving Other Oral Hypoglycemic Agents

When repaglinide is used to replace therapy with other oral hypoglycemic agents, repaglinide may be started on the day after the final dose is given. Patients should then be observed carefully for hypoglycemia due to potential overlapping of drug effects. When transferred from longer half-life sulfonylurea agents (e.g., chlorpropamide) to repaglinide, close monitoring may be indicated for up to one week or longer.

Combination Therapy

If repaglinide monotherapy does not result in adequate glycemic control, metformin or a thiazolidinedione may be added. If metformin or thiazolidinedione monotherapy does not provide adequate control, repaglinide may be added. The starting dose and dose adjustments for repaglinide combination therapy is the same as for repaglinide monotherapy. The dose of each drug should be carefully adjusted to determine the minimal dose required to achieve the desired pharmacologic effect. Failure to do so could result in an increase in the incidence of hypoglycemic episodes. Appropriate monitoring of FPG and HbA1c measurements should be used to ensure that the patient is not subjected to excessive drug exposure or increased probability of secondary drug failure.
Loryna

Loryna

2.1 How to Take LorynaTM (drospirenone and ethinyl estradiol tablets, USP)

Take one tablet by mouth at the same time every day. The failure rate may increase when pills are missed or taken incorrectly.

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, drospirenone and ethinyl estradiol tablets must be taken exactly as directed, in the order directed on the blister pack. Single missed pills should be taken as soon as remembered.

2.2 How to Start LorynaTM (drospirenone and ethinyl estradiol tablets, USP)

Instruct the patient to begin taking LorynaTM tablets either on the first day of her menstrual period (Day 1 Start) or on the first Sunday after the onset of her menstrual period (Sunday Start).

Day 1 Start

During the first cycle of LorynaTM tablets use, instruct the patient to take one peach drospirenone and ethinyl estradiol tablet daily, beginning on Day 1 of her menstrual cycle. (The first day of menstruation is Day 1.) She should take one peach LorynaTM tablet daily for 24 consecutive days, followed by one white inert tablet daily on Days 25 through 28. LorynaTM tablets should be taken in the order directed on the package at the same time each day, preferably after the evening meal or at bedtime with some liquid, as needed. LorynaTM tablets can be taken without regard to meals. If drospirenone and ethinyl estradiol tablets are first taken later than the first day of the menstrual cycle, LorynaTM tablets should not be considered effective as a contraceptive until after the first 7 consecutive days of product administration. Instruct the patient to use a non-hormonal contraceptive as back-up during the first 7 days. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

Sunday Start

During the first cycle of LorynaTM tablets use, instruct the patient to take one peach LorynaTM tablet daily, beginning on the first Sunday after the onset of her menstrual period. She should take one peach LorynaTM tablet daily for 24 consecutive days, followed by one white inert tablet daily on Days 25 through 28. LorynaTM tablets should be taken in the order directed on the package at the same time each day, preferably after the evening meal or at bedtime with some liquid, as needed. LorynaTM tablets can be taken without regard to meals. LorynaTM tablets should not be considered effective as a contraceptive until after the first 7 consecutive days of product administration. Instruct the patient to use a non-hormonal contraceptive as back-up during the first 7 days. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

The patient should begin her next and all subsequent 28-day regimens of LorynaTM tablets on the same day of the week that she began her first regimen, following the same schedule. She should begin taking her peach tablets on the next day after ingestion of the last white tablet, regardless of whether or not a menstrual period has occurred or is still in progress. Anytime a subsequent cycle of LorynaTM tablets are started later than the day following administration of the last white tablet, the patient should use another method of contraception until she has taken a peach LorynaTM tablets daily for seven consecutive days.

When switching from a different birth control pill

When switching from another birth control pill, LorynaTM tablets should be started on the same day that a new pack of the previous oral contraceptive would have been started.

When switching from a method other than a birth control pill

When switching from a transdermal patch or vaginal ring, LorynaTM tablets should be started when the next application would have been due. When switching from an injection, LorynaTM tablets should be started when the next dose would have been due. When switching from an intrauterine contraceptive or an implant, LorynaTM tablets should be started on the day of removal.

Withdrawal bleeding usually occurs within 3 days following the last peach tablet. If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occurs while taking LorynaTM tablets, instruct the patient to continue taking LorynaTM tablets by the regimen described above. Counsel her that this type of bleeding is usually transient and without significance; however, advise her that if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, she should consult her healthcare provider.

Although the occurrence of pregnancy is low if LorynaTM tablets are taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur, consider the possibility of pregnancy. If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed dosing schedule (missed one or more active tablets or started taking them on a day later than she should have), consider the possibility of pregnancy at the time of the first missed period and take appropriate diagnostic measures. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, rule out pregnancy. Discontinue LorynaTM tablets if pregnancy is confirmed.

The risk of pregnancy increases with each active peach tablet missed. For additional patient instructions regarding missed pills, see the "WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS" section in the FDA Approved Patient Labeling . If breakthrough bleeding occurs following missed tablets, it will usually be transient and of no consequence. If the patient misses one or more white tablets, she should still be protected against pregnancy provided she begins taking a new cycle of peach tablets on the proper day.

For postpartum women who do not breastfeed or after a second trimester abortion, start LorynaTM tablets no earlier than 4 weeks postpartum due to the increased risk of thromboembolism. If the patient starts on LorynaTM tablets postpartum and has not yet had a period, evaluate for possible pregnancy, and instruct her to use an additional method of contraception until she has taken LorynaTM tablets for 7 consecutive days.

2.3 Advice in Case of Gastrointestinal Disturbances

In case of severe vomiting or diarrhea, absorption may not be complete and additional contraceptive measures should be taken. If vomiting occurs within 3 to 4 hours after tablet-taking, this can be regarded as a missed tablet.
Diazepam

Diazepam

The penicillinase-resistant penicillins are available for oral administration and for intramuscular and intravenous injection. The sodium salts of methicillin, oxacillin, and nafcillin may be administered parenterally and the sodium salts of cloxacillin, dicloxacillin, oxacillin, and nafcillin are available for oral use.

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to oxacillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient, therefore it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with oxacillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer term of therapy.

Concurrent administration of oxacillin and probenecid increases and prolongs serum penicillin levels. Probenecid decreases the apparent volume of distribution and slows the rate of excretion by competitively inhibiting renal tubular secretion of penicillin. Penicillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of penicillin are necessary.

Oral preparations of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins should not be used as initial therapy in serious, life-threatening infections (See PRECAUTIONS: General). Oral therapy with the penicillinase-resistant penicillins may be used to follow-up the previous use of a parenteral agent as soon as the clinical condition warrants. With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.

Recommended Dosages for Oxacillin Sodium for Injection, USP

In ADD-Vantage® System: For Intravenous Use Only

Adults: 1 to 6 grams per 24-hour period.

NOTE: For doses smaller than 1 gram use the conventional vial. Insert for conventional vial lists dosages for infants and children.

Directions for use

Oxacillin for Injection Vials in the ADD-Vantage® Drug Delivery System are for intravenous use only and are to be used with ADDVantage® diluent containers of 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, 50 mL and 100 mL, or 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, 50 mL and 100 mL.

Reconstitute ADD-Vantage® vials as directed in the INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE section.

Only 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, and 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, are available for use in the ADD-Vantage® Delivery System for intravenous infusion of Oxacillin Sodium. The concentration of the antibiotic should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of oxacillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

If another agent is used in conjunction with oxacillin therapy, it should not be physically mixed with oxacillin but should be administered separately.

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

To Open Diluent Container:

Peel overwrap from the corner and remove container. Some opacity of the plastic due to moisture absorption during the sterilization process may be observed. This is normal and does not affect the solution quality or safety. The opacity will diminish gradually.

To Assemble Vial and Flexible Diluent Container:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Remove the protective covers from the top of the vial and the vial port on the diluent container as follows: a. To remove the breakaway vial cap, swing the pull ring over the top of the vial and pull down far enough to start the opening (SEE FIGURE 1), then pull straight up to remove the cap. (SEE FIGURE 2.) NOTE: Do not access vial with syringe. b. To remove the vial port cover, grasp the tab on the pull ring, pull up to break the three tie strings, then pull back to remove the cover. (SEE FIGURE 3.) 2. Screw the vial into the vial port until it will go no further. THE VIAL MUST BE SCREWED IN TIGHTLY TO ASSURE A SEAL. This occurs approximately 1/2 turn (180°) after the first audible click. (SEE FIGURE 4.) The clicking sound does not assure a seal; the vial must be turned as far as it will go. NOTE: Once vial is seated, do not attempt to remove. (SEE FIGURE 4.) 3. Recheck the vial to assure that it is tight by trying to turn it further in the direction of assembly. 4. Label appropriately.
To Prepare Admixture:
1. Squeeze the bottom of the diluent container gently to inflate the portion of the container surrounding the end of the drug vial. 2. With the other hand, push the drug vial down into the container telescoping the walls of the container. Grasp the inner cap of the vial through the walls of the container. (SEE FIGURE 5.) 3. Pull the inner cap from the drug vial. (SEE FIGURE 6.) Verify that the rubber stopper has been pulled out, allowing the drug and diluent to mix. 4. Mix container contents thoroughly and use within the specified time.
Preparation for Administration:

(Use Aseptic Technique)
1. Confirm the activation and admixture of vial contents. 2. Check for leaks by squeezing container firmly. If leaks are found, discard unit as sterility may be impaired. 3. Close flow control clamp of administration set. 4. Remove cover from outlet port at bottom of container. 5. Insert piercing pin of administration set into port with a twisting motion until the pin is firmly seated. NOTE: See full directions on administration set carton. 6. Lift the free end of the hanger loop on the bottom of the vial, breaking the two tie strings. Bend the loop outward to lock it in the upright position, then suspend container from hanger. 7. Squeeze and release drip chamber to establish proper fluid level in chamber. 8. Open flow control clamp and clear air from set. Close clamp. 9. Attach set to venipuncture device. If device is not indwelling, prime and make venipuncture. 10. Regulate rate of administration with flow control clamp.
WARNING: Do not use flexible container in series connections.

At concentrations ranging from 10 to 40 mg/mL in 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP, Oxacillin will have utility times of 4 days at room temperature (25°C).

In 5% Dextrose Injection, USP, at concentrations from 10 to 40 mg/mL Oxacillin will have utility times of 6 hours at room temperature (25°C).
Introvale

Introvale

Although the occurrence of pregnancy is unlikely if InrovaleTM are taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur while taking white (inactive) tablets, the possibility of pregnancy must be considered. Appropriate diagnostic measures to rule out pregnancy should be taken at the time of any missed menstrual period. InrovaleTM should be discontinued if pregnancy is confirmed.

The dosage of InrovaleTMis one peach (active) tablet daily for 84 consecutive days, followed by 7 days of white (inert) tablets. To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets must be taken exactly as directed and at intervals not exceeding 24 hours. Ideally, the tablets should be taken at the same time of the day on each day of active treatment. The tablets should not be removed from the protective blister packaging to avoid damage to the product.

During the first cycle of medication, the patient is instructed to begin taking InrovaleTM on the first Sunday after the onset of menstruation. If menstruation begins on a Sunday, the first tablet (peach) is taken that day. One peach tablet should be taken daily for 84 consecutive days, followed by 7 days on which a white (inert) tablet is taken. Withdrawal bleeding should occur during the 7 days following discontinuation of peach active tablets. During the first cycle, contraceptive reliance should not be placed on InrovaleTM until a peach (active) tablet has been taken daily for 7 consecutive days and a non-hormonal backup method of birth control (such as condoms or spermicide) should be used during those 7 days. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

The patient begins her next and all subsequent 91-day courses of tablets without interruption on the same day of the week (Sunday) on which she began her first course, following the same schedule: 84 days on which peach tablets are taken followed by 7 days on which white tablets are taken. If in any cycle the patient starts tablets later than the proper day, she should protect herself against pregnancy by using a non-hormonal backup method of birth control until she has taken a peach tablet daily for 7 consecutive days.

If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occurs , the patient is instructed to continue on the same regimen. This type of bleeding may be transient and without significance; however, if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, the patient is advised to consult her healthcare provider.

For patient instructions regarding missed pills, see the "WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS" section in the DETAILED PATIENT LABELING. Any time the patient misses two or more peach tablets, she should also use another method of non-hormonal back-up contraception until she has taken a peach tablet daily for seven consecutive days. If the patient misses one or more white tablets, she is still protected against pregnancy provided she begins taking peach tablets again on the proper day. The possibility of ovulation increases with each successive day that scheduled peach tablets are missed. The risk of pregnancy increases with each active (peach) tablet missed.

In the nonlactating mother, InrovaleTMmay be initiated no earlier than day 28 postpartum, for contraception due to the increased risk for thromboembolism. When the tablets are administered in the postpartum period, the increased risk of thromboembolic disease associated with the postpartum period must be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS, WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS concerning thromboembolic disease). The patient should be advised to use a nonhormonal back-up method for the first 7 days of tablet-taking. However, if intercourse has already occurred, the possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered. Levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets may be initiated immediately after a first-trimester abortion; if the patient starts levonorgestrel and ethinyl estradiol tablets immediately, additional contraceptive measures are not needed.
Donepezil Hydrochloride...

Donepezil Hydrochloride

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets should be taken in the evening, just prior to retiring.

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.1 Mild to Moderate Alzheimer's Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride tablets shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day.

The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride tablets might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2 Severe Alzheimer's Disease

Donepezil hydrochloride tablets have been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at a dose of 10 mg administered once daily.

2.3 Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride tablets is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer's disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride tablets steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks.
Syeda

Syeda

2.1 How to Take SyedaTM

Take one tablet by mouth at the same time every day. The failure rate may increase when pills are missed or taken incorrectly.

To achieve maximum contraceptive effectiveness, SyedaTM must be taken as directed, in the order directed on the blister pack. Single missed pills should be taken as soon as remembered.

2.2 How to Start SyedaTM

Instruct the patient to begin taking SyedaTM either on the first day of her menstrual period (Day 1 Start) or on the first Sunday after the onset of her menstrual period (Sunday Start).

Day 1 Start

During the first cycle of SyedaTM use, instruct the patient to take one yellow SyedaTM daily, beginning on Day 1 of her menstrual cycle. (The first day of menstruation is Day 1.) She should take one yellow SyedaTM daily for 21 consecutive days, followed by one white tablet daily on Days 22 through 28. SyedaTM should be taken in the order directed on the package at the same time each day, preferably after the evening meal or at bedtime with some liquid, as needed. SyedaTM can be taken without regard to meals. If SyedaTM is first taken later than the first day of the menstrual cycle, SyedaTM should not be considered effective as a contraceptive until after the first 7 consecutive days of product administration. Instruct the patient to use a non-hormonal contraceptive as back-up during the first 7 days. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

Sunday Start

During the first cycle of SyedaTM use, instruct the patient to take one yellow SyedaTM daily, beginning on the first Sunday after the onset of her menstrual period. She should take one yellow SyedaTMdaily for 21 consecutive days, followed by one white tablet daily on Days 22 through 28. SyedaTM should be taken in the order directed on the package at the same time each day, preferably after the evening meal or at bedtime with some liquid, as needed. SyedaTM can be taken without regard to meals. SyedaTM should not be considered effective as a contraceptive until after the first 7 consecutive days of product administration. Instruct the patient to use a non-hormonal contraceptive as back-up during the first 7 days. The possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of medication should be considered.

The patient should begin her next and all subsequent 28-day regimens of SyedaTM on the same day of the week that she began her first regimen, following the same schedule. She should begin taking her yellow tablets on the next day after ingestion of the last white tablet, regardless of whether or not a menstrual period has occurred or is still in progress. Anytime a subsequent cycle of SyedaTM is started later than the day following administration of the last white tablet, the patient should use another method of contraception until she has taken a yellow SyedaTM daily for seven consecutive days.

When switching from a different birth control pill

When switching from another birth control pill, SyedaTM should be started on the same day that a new pack of the previous oral contraceptive would have been started.

When switching from a method other than a birth control pill

When switching from a transdermal patch or vaginal ring, SyedaTMshould be started when the next application would have been due. When switching from an injection, SyedaTM should be started when the next dose would have been due. When switching from an intrauterine contraceptive or an implant, SyedaTMshould be started on the day of removal.

Withdrawal bleeding usually occurs within 3 days following the last yellow tablet. If spotting or breakthrough bleeding occurs while taking SyedaTM, instruct the patient to continue taking SyedaTM by the regimen described above. Counsel her that this type of bleeding is usually transient and without significance; however, advise her that if the bleeding is persistent or prolonged, she should consult her healthcare provider.

Although the occurrence of pregnancy is low if SyedaTM is taken according to directions, if withdrawal bleeding does not occur, consider the possibility of pregnancy. If the patient has not adhered to the prescribed dosing schedule (missed one or more active tablets or started taking them on a day later than she should have), consider the possibility of pregnancy at the time of the first missed period and take appropriate diagnostic measures. If the patient has adhered to the prescribed regimen and misses two consecutive periods, rule out pregnancy. Discontinue SyedaTM if pregnancy is confirmed.

The risk of pregnancy increases with each active yellow tablet missed. For additional patient instructions regarding missed pills, see the “WHAT TO DO IF YOU MISS PILLS” section in the FDA-Approved Patient Labeling. If breakthrough bleeding occurs following missed tablets, it will usually be transient and of no consequence. If the patient misses one or more white tablets, she should still be protected against pregnancy provided she begins taking a new cycle of yellow tablets on the proper day.

For postpartum women who do not breastfeed or after a second trimester abortion, start SyedaTM no earlier than 4 weeks postpartum due to the increased risk of thromboembolism. If the patient starts SyedaTM postpartum and has not yet had a period, evaluate for possible pregnancy, and instruct her to use an additional method of contraception until she has taken SyedaTM for 7 consecutive days.

2.3 Advice in Case of Gastrointestinal Disturbances

In case of severe vomiting or diarrhea, absorption may not be complete and additional contraceptive measures should be taken. If vomiting occurs within 3 to 4 hours after tablet-taking, this can be regarded as a missed tablet.
Donepezil Hydrochloride...

Donepezil Hydrochloride

Donepezil hydrochloride orally disintegrating tablets should be taken in the evening, just prior to retiring.

Donepezil hydrochloride orally disintegrating tablets can be taken with or without food.

Allow Donepezil hydrochloride orally disintegrating tablets to dissolve on the tongue and follow with water.

2.1 Mild to Moderate Alzheimer's Disease

The dosages of donepezil hydrochloride orally disintegrating tablets shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials are 5 mg and 10 mg administered once per day.

The higher dose of 10 mg did not provide a statistically significantly greater clinical benefit than 5 mg. There is a suggestion, however, based upon order of group mean scores and dose trend analyses of data from these clinical trials, that a daily dose of 10 mg of donepezil hydrochloride orally disintegrating tablets might provide additional benefit for some patients. Accordingly, whether or not to employ a dose of 10 mg is a matter of prescriber and patient preference.

2.2 Severe Alzheimer's Disease

Donepezil hydrochloride orally disintegrating tablets have been shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials at a dose of 10 mg administered once daily.

2.3 Titration

The recommended starting dose of donepezil hydrochloride orally disintegrating tablets is 5 mg once daily. Evidence from the controlled trials in mild to moderate Alzheimer's disease indicates that the 10 mg dose, with a one week titration, is likely to be associated with a higher incidence of cholinergic adverse events compared to the 5 mg dose. In open-label trials using a 6 week titration, the type and frequency of these same adverse events were similar between the 5 mg and 10 mg dose groups. Therefore, because donepezil hydrochloride steady state is achieved about 15 days after it is started and because the incidence of untoward effects may be influenced by the rate of dose escalation, a dose of 10 mg should not be administered until patients have been on a daily dose of 5 mg for 4 to 6 weeks.
Lorazepam

Lorazepam

Lorazepam is administered orally. For optimal results, dose, frequency of administration, and duration of therapy should be individualized according to patient response. To facilitate this, 0.5 mg, 1 mg, and 2 mg tablets are available.

The usual range is 2 to 6 mg/day given in divided doses, the largest dose being taken before bedtime, but the daily dosage may vary from 1 to 10 mg/day.

For anxiety, most patients require an initial dose of 2 to 3 mg/day given b.i.d. or t.i.d.

For insomnia due to anxiety or transient situational stress, a single daily dose of 2 to 4 mg may be given, usually at bedtime.

For elderly or debilitated patients, an initial dosage of 1 to 2 mg/day in divided doses is recommended, to be adjusted as needed and tolerated.

The dosage of lorazepam should be increased gradually when needed to help avoid adverse effects. When higher dosage is indicated, the evening dose should be increased before the daytime doses.
Tri-estarylla

Tri-estarylla

2.1 How to Start Tri-Estarylla™

Tri-Estarylla™ (norgestimate and ethinyl estradiol tablets, USP), is dispensed in a blister pack [see HOW SUPPLIED/STORAGE AND HANDLING (16)]. Tri-Estarylla™ may be started using either a Day 1 start or a Sunday start (see Table 1). For the first cycle of a Sunday Start regimen, an additional method of contraception should be used until after the first 7 consecutive days of administration.

2.2 How to Take Tri-Estarylla™

Table 1: Instructions for Administration of Tri-Estarylla™
Complete instructions to facilitate patient counseling on proper tablet usage are located in the FDA-Approved Patient Labeling.
Starting COCs in women not currently using hormonal contraception (Day 1 Start or Sunday Start)

Important: Consider the possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of this product.

Tablet Color:
• Tri-Estarylla™ active tablets are white (Day 1 to Day 7), light blue (Day 8 to Day 14) and blue (Day15 to Day 21). • Tri-Estarylla™ has green inactive tablets (Day 22 to Day 28).
Day 1 Start:
• Take first active tablet without regard to meals on the first day of menses. • Take subsequent active tablets once daily at the same time each day for a total of 21 days. • Take one green inactive tablet daily for 7 days and at the same time of day that active tablets were taken. • Begin each subsequent blister pack on the same day of Tri-Estarylla™ the week as the first cycle blister pack (i.e., on the day after taking the last inactive tablet)
Sunday Start:
• Take first active tablet without regard to meals on the first Sunday after the onset of menses. Due to the potential risk of becoming pregnant, use additional non-hormonal contraception (such as condoms and spermicide) for the first seven days of the patient's first cycle pack of Tri-Estarylla™. • Take subsequent active tablets once daily at the same time each day for a total of 21 days. • Take one green inactive tablet daily for the following 7 days and at the same time of day that active tablets were taken. • Begin each subsequent pack on the same day of the week as the first cycle pack (i.e., on the Sunday after taking the last inactive tablet) and additional non-hormonal contraceptive is not needed. • Switching to Tri-Estarylla™ from another oral contraceptive
Start on the same day that a new pack of the previous oral contraceptive would have started.
• Switching from another contraceptive method to Tri-Estarylla™
Start Tri-Estarylla™:
• Transdermal patch • On the day when next application would have been scheduled • Vaginal ring • On the day when next insertion would have been scheduled • Injection • On the day when next injection would have been scheduled • Intrauterine contraceptive • On the day of removal • If the IUD is not removed on first day of the patient's menstrual cycle, additional non-hormonal contraceptive (such as condoms and spermicide) is needed for the first seven days of the first cycle pack. • Implant • On the day of removal
Starting Tri-Estarylla™ after Abortion or Miscarriage

First-trimester
• After a first-trimester abortion or miscarriage, Tri-Estarylla™ may be started immediately. An additional method of contraception is not needed if Tri-Estarylla™ is started immediately. • If Tri-Estarylla™ is not started within 5 days after termination of the pregnancy, the patient should use additional non-hormonal contraception (such as condoms and spermicide) for the first seven days of her first cycle blister pack of Tri-Estarylla™.
Second-trimester
• Do not start until 4 weeks after a second-trimester abortion or miscarriage, due to the increased risk of thromboembolic disease. Start Tri-Estarylla™, following the instructions in Table 1 for Day 1 or Sunday start, as desired. If using Sunday start, use additional non-hormonal contraception (such as condoms and spermicide) for the first seven days of the patient's first cycle pack of Tri-Estarylla™. [See CONTRAINDICATIONS (4), WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1), and FDA-Approved Patient Labeling.]
Starting Tri-Estarylla™ after Childbirth
• Do not start until 4 weeks after delivery, due to the increased risk of thromboembolic disease. Start contraceptive therapy with Tri-Estarylla™ following the instructions in Table 1 (above) for women not currently using hormonal contraception. • Tri-Estarylla™ is not recommended for use in lactating women [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.3)]. • If the woman has not yet had a period postpartum, consider the possibility of ovulation and conception occurring prior to use of Tri-Estarylla™. [See CONTRAINDICATIONS (4), WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1), USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.1 and 8.3), and FDA-Approved Patient Labeling].
BEFORE YOU START TAKING YOUR PILLS
1. DECIDE WHAT TIME OF DAY YOU WANT TO TAKE YOUR PILL. It is important to take it at about the same time every day. 2. LOOK AT YOUR PILL BLISTER PACK
The pill pack has 21 "active" pills (with hormones) to take for 3 weeks. This is followed by 1 week of "reminder" green pills (without hormones).

3.ALSO FIND:
1) where on the pack to start taking pills, 2) in what order to take the pills (follow the arrows) 3) The week numbers as shown in the diagram below
4.BE SURE YOU HAVE READY AT ALL TIMES:
Another kind of birth control (such as a condom or spermicide) to use as a back-up method in case you miss pills. An extra, full pill blister pack.
2.3 Missed Tablets
Table 2: Instructions for Missed Tri-Estarylla™ Tablets
If one active tablet is missed in Weeks 1, 2, or 3

Take the tablet as soon as possible. Continue taking one tablet a day until the pack is finished.

If two active tablets are missed in Week 1 or Week 2

Take the two missed tablets as soon as possible and the next two active tablets the next day. Continue taking one tablet a day until the pack is finished. Additional non-hormonal contraception (such as condoms and spermicide) should be used as back-up if the patient has sex within 7 days after missing tablets.

If two active tablets are missed in the third week or three or more active tablets are missed in a row in Weeks 1, 2, or 3

Day 1 start: Throw out the rest of the pack and start a new pack that same day. Sunday start: Continue taking one tablet a day until Sunday, then throw out the rest of the pack and start a new pack that same day. Additional non-hormonal contraception (such as condoms and spermicide) should be used as back-up if the patient has sex within 7 days after missing tablets.

2.4 Advice in Case of Gastrointestinal Disturbances

In case of severe vomiting or diarrhea, absorption may not be complete and additional contraceptive measures should be taken. If vomiting or diarrhea occurs within 3 to 4 hours after taking an active tablet, handle this as a missed tablet [see FDA-Approved Patient Labeling].

2.5 Tri-Estarylla™ Use for Acne

The timing of initiation of dosing with Tri-Estarylla™ for acne should follow the guidelines for use of Tri-Estarylla™ as an oral contraceptive. Consult the DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION section (2.1) for instructions
Lansoprazole

Lansoprazole

Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules are available in 15 mg and 30 mg strengths. Directions for use specific to the route and available methods of administration for this dosage form is presented below. Lansoprazole should be taken before eating. Lansoprazole products SHOULD NOT BE CRUSHED OR CHEWED. In the clinical trials, antacids were used concomitantly with lansoprazole.

2.1 Recommended Dose

Indication

Recommended Dose

Frequency

Duodenal Ulcers

  Short-Term Treatment

15 mg

Once daily for 4 weeks

  Maintenance of Healed

15 mg

Once daily

H. pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence*

Triple Therapy:

Lansoprazole

30 mg

Twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days

Amoxicillin

1 gram

Twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days

Clarithromycin

500 mg

Twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days

Dual Therapy:

    Lansoprazole

30 mg

Three times daily (q8h) for 14 days

    Amoxicillin

1 gram

Three times daily (q8h) for 14 days

Benign Gastric Ulcer

  Short-Term Treatment

30 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

NSAID-associated Gastric Ulcer

  Healing

30 mg

Once daily for 8 weeks†

  Risk Reduction

15 mg

Once daily for up to 12 weeks†

Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD

15 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

Short -Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis

30 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks‡

Pediatric

(1 to 11 years of age)Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD and Short-Term Treatment of Erosive Esophagitis

≤ 30 kg

15 mg

Once daily for up to 12 weeks§

> 30 kg

30 mg

Once daily for up to 12 weeks§

(12 to 17 years of age)Short-Term Treatment of Symptomatic GERD

  Nonerosive GERD

15 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

  Erosive Esophagitis

30 mg

Once daily for up to 8 weeks

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

15 mg

Once daily#

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions Including Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome

60 mg

Once daily¶

*Please refer to amoxicillin and clarithromycin full prescribing information for CONTRAINDICATIONS and WARNINGS, and for information regarding dosing in elderly and renally-impaired patients.

†Controlled studies did not extend beyond indicated duration.

‡For patients who do not heal with lansoprazole for 8 weeks (5 to 10%), it may be helpful to give an additional 8 weeks of treatment. If there is a recurrence of erosive esophagitis, an additional 8 week course of lansoprazole may be considered.

§The lansoprazole dose was increased (up to 30 mg twice daily) in some pediatric patients after 2 or more weeks of treatment if they remained symptomatic. For pediatric patients unable to swallow an intact capsule please see Administration Options.

¶Varies with individual patient. Recommended adult starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 90 mg twice daily have been administered. Daily dose of greater than 120 mg should be administered in divided doses. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison Syndrome have been treated continuously with lansoprazole for more than 4 years.

# Controlled studies did not extend beyond 12 months

Patients should be instructed that if a dose is missed, it should be taken as soon as possible. However, if the next scheduled dose is due, the patient should not take the missed dose, and should be instructed to take the next dose on time. Patients should be instructed not to take 2 doses at one time to make up for a missed dose.

2.2 Special Populations

Renal impairment patients and geriatric patients do not require dosage adjustment. However, consider dose adjustment in patients with severe liver impairment [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS(8.5, 8.6, 8.7)].

2.3 Important Administration Information

Administration Options

Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules-Oral Administration
• Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules should be swallowed whole. • Alternatively, for patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, lansoprazole delayed-release capsules can be opened and administered as follows: o Open capsule. o Sprinkle intact granules on one tablespoon of either applesauce, ENSURE pudding, cottage cheese, yogurt or strained pears. o Swallow immediately. • Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules may also be emptied into a small volume of either apple juice, orange juice or tomato juice and administered as follows: o Open capsule. o Sprinkle intact granules into a small volume of either apple juice, orange juice or tomato juice (60 mL – approximately 2 ounces). o Mix briefly. o Swallow immediately. o To ensure complete delivery of the dose, the glass should be rinsed with two or more volumes of juice and the contents swallowed immediately.
Lansoprazole delayed-release capsules- Nasogastric Tube (≥ 16 French) Administration
• For patients who have a nasogastric tube in place, lansoprazole delayed-release capsules can be administered as follows: • Open capsule. • Mix intact granules into 40 mL of apple juice. DO NOT USE OTHER LIQUIDS. • Inject through the nasogastric tube into the stomach. • Flush with additional apple juice to clear the tube.
USE IN OTHER FOODS AND LIQUIDS HAS NOT BEEN STUDIED CLINICALLY AND IS THEREFORE NOT RECOMMENDED.
Cefpodoxime Proxetil Gr...

Cefpodoxime Proxetil Granule

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE for indicated pathogens.)

Granules for Oral Suspension

Cefpodoxime Proxetil for Oral Suspension, USP may be given without regard to food. The recommended dosages, durations of treatment, and applicable patient population are as described in the following chart:

Adults and Adolescents (age 12 years and older)
Type of Infection Total Daily Dose Dose Frequency Duration
Pharyngitis and/or tonsillitis

200 mg

100 mg Q 12 hours

5 to 10 days

Acute community-acquired pneumonia

400 mg

200 mg Q 12 hours

14 days

Uncomplicated gonorrhea (men and women) and rectal gonococcal infections (women)

200 mg

single dose

Skin and skin structure

800 mg

400 mg Q 12 hours

7 to 14 days

Acute maxillary sinusitis

400 mg

200 mg Q 12 hours

10 days

Uncomplicated urinary tract infection

200 mg

100 mg Q 12 hours

7 days

Infants and Pediatric Patients (age 2 months through 12 years)
Type of Infection Total Daily Dose Dose Frequency Duration
Acute otitis media

10 mg/kg/day(Max 400 mg/day)

5 mg/kg Q 12 h(Max 200 mg/dose)

5 days

Pharyngitis and/or tonsillitis

10 mg/kg/day(Max 200 mg/day)

5 mg/kg/dose Q 12 h(Max 100 mg/dose)

5 to 10 days

Acute maxillary sinusitis

10 mg/kg/day(Max 400 mg/day)

5 mg/kg Q 12 hours(Max 200 mg/dose)

10 days

Patients with Renal Dysfunction

For patients with severe renal impairment (<30 mL/min creatinine clearance), the dosing intervals should be increased to Q 24 hours. In patients maintained on hemodialysis, the dose frequency should be 3 times/week after hemodialysis.

When only the serum creatinine level is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to estimate creatinine clearance (mL/min). For this estimate to be valid, the serum creatinine level should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males:(mL/min)

Weight (kg) × (140 - age) 72 × serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)

Females:(mL/min)

0.85 × above value

Patients with Cirrhosis

Cefpodoxime pharmacokinetics in cirrhotic patients (with or without ascites) are similar to those in healthy subjects. Dose adjustment is not necessary in this population.

Preparation of Suspension
Constitution Directions for Oral Suspension ConstitutedVolume FinalConcentrations Directions
50 mL

50 mg per 5 mL

Suspend in a total of 32 mL of distilled water. Method: First, shake the bottle to loosen the granules. Then add the water in two approximately equal portions, shaking vigorously after each aliquot of water.

100 mL

50 mg per 5 mL

Suspend in a total of 63 mL of distilled water. Method: First, shake the bottle to loosen the granules. Then add the water in two approximately equal portions, shaking vigorously after each aliquot of water.

50 mL

100 mg per 5 mL

Suspend in a total of 32 mL of distilled water. Method: First, shake the bottle to loosen the granules. Then add the water in two approximately equal portions, shaking vigorously after each aliquot of water.

100 mL

100 mg per 5 mL

Suspend in a total of 63 mL of distilled water. Method: First, shake the bottle to loosen the granules. Then add the water in two approximately equal portions, shaking vigorously after each aliquot of water.

After mixing, the suspension should be stored in a refrigerator, 2° to 8°C (36° to 46°F). Shake well before using. Keep container tightly closed. The mixture may be used for 14 days. Discard unused portion after 14 days.
Octreotide Acetate

Octreotide Acetate

Octreotide acetate may be administered subcutaneously or intravenously. Subcutaneous injection is the usual route of administration of octreotide acetate for control of symptoms. Pain with subcutaneous administration may be reduced by using the smallest volume that will deliver the desired dose. Multiple subcutaneous injections at the same site within short periods of time should be avoided. Sites should be rotated in a systematic manner.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration. Do not use if particulates and/or discoloration are observed. Proper sterile technique should be used in the preparation of parenteral admixtures to minimize the possibility of microbial contamination. Octreotide acetate is not compatible in Total Parenteral Nutrition (TPN) solutions because of the formation of a glycosyloctreotide conjugate which may decrease the efficacy of the product.

Octreotide acetate is stable in sterile isotonic saline solutions or sterile solutions of dextrose 5% in water for 24 hours. It may be diluted in volumes of 50 to 200 mL and infused intravenously over 15 to 30 minutes or administered by IV push over 3 minutes. In emergency situations (e.g.; carcinoid crisis) it may be given by rapid bolus.

The initial dosage is usually 50 mcg administered twice or three times daily. Upward dose titration is frequently required. Dosage information for patients with specific tumors follows.

Acromegaly

Dosage may be initiated at 50 mcg t.i.d. Beginning with this low dose may permit adaptation to adverse gastrointestinal effects for patients who will require higher doses. IGF-I (somatomedin C) levels every 2 weeks can be used to guide titration. Alternatively, multiple growth hormone levels at 0 to 8 hours after octreotide acetate administration permit more rapid titration of dose. The goal is to achieve growth hormone levels less than 5 ng/mL or IGF-I (somatomedin C) levels less than 1.9 U/mL in males and less than 2.2 U/mL in females. The dose most commonly found to be effective is 100 mcg t.i.d., but some patients require up to 500 mcg t.i.d. for maximum effectiveness. Doses greater than 300 mcg/day seldom result in additional biochemical benefit, and if an increase in dose fails to provide additional benefit, the dose should be reduced. IGF-I (somatomedin C) or growth hormone levels should be re-evaluated at 6-month intervals.

Octreotide acetate should be withdrawn yearly for approximately 4 weeks from patients who have received irradiation to assess disease activity. If growth hormone or IGF-I (somatomedin C) levels increase and signs and symptoms recur, octreotide acetate therapy may be resumed.

Carcinoid Tumors

The suggested daily dosage of octreotide acetate during the first 2 weeks of therapy ranges from 100 to 600 mcg/day in 2 to 4 divided doses (mean daily dosage is 300 mcg). In the clinical studies, the median daily maintenance dosage was approximately 450 mcg, but clinical and biochemical benefits were obtained in some patients with as little as 50 mcg, while others required doses up to 1500 mcg/day. However, experience with doses above 750 mcg/day is limited.

VIPomas

Daily dosages of 200 to 300 mcg in 2 to 4 divided doses are recommended during the initial 2 weeks of therapy (range 150 to 750 mcg) to control symptoms of the disease. On an individual basis, dosage may be adjusted to achieve a therapeutic response, but usually doses above 450 mcg/day are not required.
Perphenazine

Perphenazine

Dosage must be individualized and adjusted according to the severity of the condition and the response obtained. As with all potent drugs, the best dose is the lowest dose that will produce the desired clinical effect. Since extrapyramidal symptoms increase in frequency and severity with increased dosage, it is important to employ the lowest effective dose. These symptoms have disappeared upon reduction of dosage, withdrawal of the drug, or administration of an antiparkinsonian agent.

Prolonged administration of doses exceeding 24 mg daily should be reserved for hospitalized patients or patients under continued observation for early detection and management of adverse reactions. An antiparkinsonian agent, such as trihexyphenidyl hydrochloride or benztropine mesylate, is valuable in controlling drug-induced extrapyramidal symptoms.

Suggested dosages for various conditions follow:

Moderately disturbed nonhospitalized patients with schizophrenia

4 to 8 mg t.i.d. initially; reduce as soon as possible to minimum effective dosage.

Hospitalized patients with schizophrenia

8 to 16 mg b.i.d. to q.i.d.; avoid dosages in excess of 64 mg daily.

Severe nausea and vomiting in adults

8 to 16 mg daily in divided doses; 24 mg occasionally may be necessary; early dosage reduction is desirable.

Elderly Patients

With increasing age, plasma concentrations of perphenazine per daily ingested dose increase. Geriatric dosages of perphenazine preparations have not been established, but initiation of lower dosages is recommended. Optimal clinical effect or benefit may require lower doses for a longer duration. Dosing of perphenazine may occur before bedtime, if required.
Clomipramine Hydrochlor...

Clomipramine Hydrochloride

The treatment regimens described below are based on those used in controlled clinical trials of clomipramine in 520 adults, and 91 children and adolescents with OCD. During initial titration, clomipramine should be given in divided doses with meals to reduce gastrointestinal side effects. The goal of this initial titration phase is to minimize side effects by permitting tolerance to side effects to develop or allowing the patient time to adapt if tolerance does not develop.

Because both clomipramine and its active metabolite, desmethylclomipramine, have long elimination half-lives, the prescriber should take into consideration the fact that steady-state plasma levels may not be achieved until 2 to 3 weeks after dosage change (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY). Therefore, after initial titration, it may be appropriate to wait 2 to 3 weeks between further dosage adjustments.

Initial Treatment/Dose Adjustment (Adults)

Treatment with clomipramine hydrochloride should be initiated at a dosage of 25 mg daily and gradually increased, as tolerated, to approximately 100 mg during the first 2 weeks. During initial titration, clomipramine should be given in divided doses with meals to reduce gastrointestinal side effects. Thereafter, the dosage may be increased gradually over the next several weeks, up to a maximum of 250 mg daily. After titration, the total daily dose may be given once daily at bedtime to minimize daytime sedation.

Initial Treatment/Dose Adjustment (Children and Adolescents)

As with adults, the starting dose is 25 mg daily and should be gradually increased (also given in divided doses with meals to reduce gastrointestinal side effects) during the first 2 weeks, as tolerated, up to a daily maximum of 3 mg/kg or 100 mg, whichever is smaller. Thereafter, the dosage may be increased gradually over the next several weeks up to a daily maximum of 3 mg/kg or 200 mg, whichever is smaller (see PRECAUTIONS: Pediatric Use). As with adults, after titration, the total daily dose may be given once daily at bedtime to minimize daytime sedation.

Maintenance/Continuation Treatment (Adults, Children, and Adolescents)

While there are no systematic studies that answer the question of how long to continue clomipramine, OCD is a chronic condition and it is reasonable to consider continuation for a responding patient. Although the efficacy of clomipramine after 10 weeks has not been documented in controlled trials, patients have been continued in therapy under double-blind conditions for up to 1 year without loss of benefit. However, dosage adjustments should be made to maintain the patient on the lowest effective dosage, and patients should be periodically reassessed to determine the need for treatment. During maintenance, the total daily dose may be given once daily at bedtime.

Switching a Patient To or From a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Intended to Treat Psychiatric Disorders

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders and initiation of therapy with clomipramine. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping Anafranil before starting an MAOI intended to treat psychiatric disorders (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Use of Clomipramine With Other MAOIs, Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start clomipramine in a patient who is being treated with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue because there is increased risk of serotonin syndrome. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, other interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

In some cases, a patient already receiving clomipramine therapy may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of serotonin syndrome in a particular patient, clomipramine should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for symptoms of serotonin syndrome for two weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with clomipramine may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue (see WARNINGS).

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with clomipramine is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of emergent symptoms of serotonin syndrome with such use (see WARNINGS).
Ondansetron

Ondansetron

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Highly Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage of ondansetron is 24 mg given as three 8 mg tablets administered 30 minutes before the start of single-day highly emetogenic chemotherapy, including cisplatin ≥50 mg/m2. Multiday, single-dose administration of a 24 mg dosage has not been studied.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of a 24 mg dosage in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Moderately Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron tablet given twice-a-day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with a subsequent dose 8 hours after the first dose. One 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered twice-a-day (every 12 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Pediatric Use

For pediatric patients 12 years of age and older, the dosage is the same as for adults. For pediatric patients 4 through 11 years of age, the dosage is one 4 mg ondansetron tablet given 3 times a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with subsequent doses 4 and 8 hours after the first dose. One 4 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 3 times a day (every 8 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Radiotherapy, Either Total Body Irradiation, or Single High-Dose Fraction or Daily Fractions to the Abdomen

The recommended oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron tablet given 3 times a day.

For total body irradiation, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before each fraction of radiotherapy administered each day.

For single high-dose fraction radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for 1 to 2 days after completion of radiotherapy.

For daily fractionated radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for each day radiotherapy is given.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron tablets in the prevention of radiation-induced nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

The recommended dosage is 16 mg given as two 8 mg ondansetron tablets, 1 hour before induction of anesthesia.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron tablets in the prevention of postoperative nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh2 score of 10 or greater), clearance is reduced and apparent volume of distribution is increased with a resultant increase in plasma half-life. In such patients, a total daily dose of 8 mg should not be exceeded.
Lansoprazole

Lansoprazole

H. pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

The recommended adult oral dose is 30 mg lansoprazole, 1 g amoxicillin, and 500 mg clarithromycin administered together twice daily (morning and evening) for 10 or 14 days (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE.)

Lansoprazole Delayed-Release Capsules USP, 30 mg, Amoxicillin Capsules USP, 500 mg, and Clarithromycin Tablets USP, 500 mg is not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance less than 30 mL/min.
Amiodarone Hydrochlorid...

Amiodarone Hydrochloride

2.1 General Instructions for Use

Swallow tablets whole. Do not crush, chew, or break tablets because this will increase the rate of guanfacine release. Do not administer with high fat meals, due to increased exposure.

2.2 Dose Selection

Take guanfacine extended-release tablets orally once daily, either in the morning or evening, at approximately the same time each day. Begin at a dose of 1 mg/day, and adjust in increments of no more than 1 mg/week.

In monotherapy clinical trials, there was dose- and exposure-related clinical improvement as well as risks for several clinically significant adverse reactions (hypotension, bradycardia, sedative events). To balance the exposure-related potential benefits and risks, the recommended target dose range depending on clinical response and tolerability for guanfacine extended-release tablets is 0.05 to 0.12 mg/kg/day (total daily dose between 1 to 7 mg. (See Table 1).

Table 1: Recommended Target Dose Range for Therapy with Guanfacine Extended-Release Tablets

Weight

Target dose range (0.05 - 0.12 mg/kg/day)

25 to 33.9 kg

2 to 3 mg/day

34 to 41.4 kg

2 to 4 mg/day

41.5 to 49.4 kg

3 to 5 mg/day

49.5 to 58.4 kg

3 to 6 mg/day

58.5 to 91 kg

4 to 7 mg/day

>91 kg

5 to 7 mg/day

Doses above 4 mg/day have not been evaluated in children (ages 6 to 12 years) and doses above 7 mg/day have not been evaluated in adolescents (ages 13 to 17 years)

In the adjunctive trial which evaluated guanfacine extended-release tablets treatment with psychostimulants, the majority of patients reached optimal doses in the 0.05 to 0.12 mg/kg/day range. Doses above 4 mg/day have not been studied in adjunctive trials.

2.3 Switching from Immediate-Release Guanfacine to Guanfacine Extended-Release Tablets

If switching from immediate-release guanfacine, discontinue that treatment, and titrate with guanfacine extended-release tablets following above recommended schedule.

Do not substitute for immediate-release guanfacine tablets on a milligram-per-milligram basis, because of differing pharmacokinetic profiles. Guanfacine extended-release tablets has significantly reduced Cmax (60% lower), bioavailability (43% lower), and a delayed Tmax (3 hours later) compared to those of the same dose of immediate-release guanfacine[see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Maintenance Treatment

Pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Healthcare providers should periodically re-evaluate the long-term use of guanfacine extended-release tablets and adjust weight-based dosage as needed. The majority of children and adolescents reach optimal doses in the 0.05-0.12 mg/kg/day range. Doses above 4 mg/day have not been evaluated in children (ages 6-12 years) and above 7 mg/day have not been evaluated in adolescents (ages 13-17 years) [see Clinical Studies (14)].

2.5 Discontinuation of Treatment

Following discontinuation of guanfacine extended-release tablets, patients may experience increases in blood pressure and heart rate [see Adverse Reactions (6.1)]. Patients/caregivers should be instructed not to discontinue guanfacine extended-release tablets without consulting their health care provider. Monitor blood pressure and pulse when reducing the dose or discontinuing the drug. Taper the daily dose in decrements of no more than 1 mg every 3 to 7 days to avoid rebound hypertension.

2.6 Missed Doses

When reinitiating patients to the previous maintenance dose after two or more missed consecutive doses, consider titration based on patient tolerability.

2.7 Dosage Adjustment with Concomitant Use of Strong CYP3A4 Inhibitors or Inducers

Dosage adjustments for guanfacine extended-release tablets are recommended with concomitant use of strong CYP3A4 inhibitors (e.g., ketoconazole), or CYP3A4 inducers (e.g., carbamazepine) (Table 2) [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Table 2: Guanfacine Extended-Release Tablets Dosage Adjustments for Patients Taking Concomitant CYP3A4 Inhibitors or Inducers
Clinical Scenarios Starting guanfacine extended-release tablets while currently on a CYP3A4 modulator Continuing guanfacine extended-release tablets while adding a CYP3A4 modulator Continuing guanfacine extended-release tablets while stopping a CYP3A4 modulator
CYP3A4Strong Inhibitors

Decrease guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage to half the recommended level. (see Table 1)

Decrease guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage to half the recommended level. (see Table 1)

Increase guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage to recommended level. (see Table 1)

CYP3A4Strong Inducers

Consider increasing guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage up to double the recommended level. (see Table 1)

Consider increasing guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage up to double the recommended level over 1 to 2 weeks. (see Table 1)

Decrease guanfacine extended-release tablets dosage to recommended level over 1 to 2 weeks. (see Table 1)
Naratriptan

Naratriptan

2.1 Dosing Information

The recommended dose of naratriptan tablets are 1 mg or 2.5 mg.

If the migraine returns or if the patient has only partial response, the dose may be repeated once after 4 hours, for a maximum dose of 5 mg in a 24-hour period.

The safety of treating an average of more than 4 migraine attacks in a 30‑day period has not been established.

2.2 Dosage Adjustment in Patients With Renal Impairment

Naratriptan tablets are contraindicated in patients with severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance: <15 mL/min) because of decreased clearance of the drug [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4), USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6), CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

In patients with mild to moderate renal impairment, the maximum daily dose should not exceed 2.5 mg over a 24‑hour period and a 1 mg starting dose is recommended [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6), CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Patients With Hepatic Impairment

Naratriptan tablets are contraindicated in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh grade C) because of decreased clearance [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4), USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.7), CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

In patients with mild or moderate hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh grade A or B), the maximum daily dose should not exceed 2.5 mg over a 24-hour period and a 1-mg starting dose is recommended[see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.7), CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].
Pioglitazone

Pioglitazone

2.1 Recommendations for All Patients

Pioglitazone tablets, USP should be taken once daily and can be taken without regard to meals.

The recommended starting dose for patients without congestive heart failure is 15 mg or 30 mg once daily.

The recommended starting dose for patients with congestive heart failure (NYHA Class I or II) is 15 mg once daily.

The dose can be titrated in increments of 15 mg up to a maximum of 45 mg once daily based on glycemic response as determined by HbA1c.

After initiation of pioglitazone tablets, USP or with dose increase, monitor patients carefully for adverse reactions related to fluid retention such as weight gain, edema, and signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure [see Boxed Warning and Warnings and Precautions (5.5)].

Liver tests (serum alanine and aspartate aminotransferases, alkaline phosphatase, and total bilirubin) should be obtained prior to initiating pioglitazone tablets, USP. Routine periodic monitoring of liver tests during treatment with pioglitazone tablets, USP is not recommended in patients without liver disease. Patients who have liver test abnormalities prior to initiation of pioglitazone tablets, USP or who are found to have abnormal liver tests while taking pioglitazone tablets, USP should be managed as described under Warnings and Precautions [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.2 Concomitant Use with an Insulin Secretagogue or Insulin

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets, USP and an insulin secretagogue (e.g., sulfonylurea), the dose of the insulin secretagogue should be reduced.

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone tablets, USP and insulin, the dose of insulin should be decreased by 10% to 25%. Further adjustments to the insulin dose should be individualized based on glycemic response.

2.3 Coadministration with Strong CYP2C8 Inhibitors

Coadministration of pioglitazone tablets, USP and gemfibrozil, a strong CYP2C8 inhibitor, increases pioglitazone exposure approximately 3-fold. Therefore, the maximum recommended dose of pioglitazone tablets, USP is 15 mg daily when used in combination with gemfibrozil or other strong CYP2C8 inhibitors [see Drug Interactions (7.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Nafcillin

Nafcillin

The penicillinase-resistant penicillins are available for oral administration and for intramuscular and intravenous injection. The sodium salts of methicillin, oxacillin and nafcillin may be administered parenterally and the sodium salts of cloxacillin, dicloxacillin, oxacillin and nafcillin are available for oral use.

Nafcillin for Injection is available for intramuscular and intravenous injection. The usual I.V. dosage for adults is 500 mg every 4 hours. For severe infections, 1 g every 4 hours is recommended. Administer slowly over at least 30 to 60 minutes to minimize the risk of vein irritation and extravasation.
RECOMMENDED DOSAGE FOR NAFCILLIN FOR INJECTION, USP
Drug

Adults

Infants and Children

<40 kg (88 lbs)

Other Recommendations

Nafcillin

500 mg IM every 4 to 6 hours

IV every 4 hours

25 mg/kg IM twice daily

Neonates 10 mg/kg IM twice daily

Nafcillin

1 gram IM or IV every 4 hours (severe infections)

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to nafcillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type and severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient; therefore, it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with nafcillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. The treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer duration of therapy.

Concurrent administration of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins and probenecid increases and prolongs serum penicillin levels. Probenecid decreases the apparent volume of distribution and slows the rate of excretion by competitively inhibiting renal tubular secretion of penicillin.

Oral preparations of the penicillinase-resistant penicillins should not be used as initial therapy in serious, life-threatening infections (see PRECAUTIONS: General). Oral therapy with the penicillinase-resistant penicillins may be used to follow-up the previous use of a parenteral agent as soon as the clinical condition warrants.

Nafcillin-probenecid therapy is generally limited to those infections where very high serum levels of nafcillin are necessary.

No dosage alterations are necessary for patients with renal dysfunction, including those on hemodialysis. Hemodialysis does not accelerate nafcillin clearance from the blood.

For patients with hepatic insufficiency and renal failure, measurement of nafcillin serum levels should be performed and dosage adjusted accordingly.

For intramuscular gluteal injections, care should be taken to avoid sciatic nerve injury. With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.

Do not add supplementary medication to Nafcillin for Injection, USP.

Prior to administration parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration whenever solution and container permit.
Losartan Potassium

Losartan Potassium

Adult Hypertensive Patients

Losartan potassium tablets, USP may be administered with other antihypertensive agents, and with or without food.

Dosing must be individualized. The usual starting dose of losartan potassium tablets, USP is 50 mg once daily, with 25 mg used in patients with possible depletion of intravascular volume (e.g., patients treated with diuretics) (see WARNINGS, Hypotension — Volume-Depleted Patients) and patients with a history of hepatic impairment (see PRECAUTIONS, General). Losartan potassium tablets, USP can be administered once or twice daily with total daily doses ranging from 25 mg to 100 mg.

If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-a-day dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response. The effect of losartan is substantially present within one week but in some studies the maximal effect occurred in 3 to 6 weeks (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Hypertension).

If blood pressure is not controlled by losartan potassium tablets, USP alone, a low dose of a diuretic may be added. Hydrochlorothiazide has been shown to have an additive effect (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Hypertension).

No initial dosage adjustment is necessary for elderly patients or for patients with renal impairment, including patients on dialysis.

Pediatric Hypertensive Patients greater than or equal to 6 years of age

The usual recommended starting dose is 0.7 mg/kg once daily (up to 50 mg total) administered as a tablet or a suspension (see Preparation of Suspension). Dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses above 1.4 mg/kg (or in excess of 100 mg) daily have not been studied in pediatric patients. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics,Special Populations and Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects and WARNINGS, Hypotension — Volume-Depleted Patients.

Losartan potassium tablets, USP are not recommended in pediatric patients less than 6 years of age or in pediatric patients with glomerular filtration rate less than 30 mL/min/1.73 m2 (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacokinetics, Special Populations, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects and PRECAUTIONS).

Preparation of Suspension (for 200 mL of a 2.5 mg/mL suspension)

Add 10 mL of Purified Water USP to an 8 ounce (240 mL) amber polyethylene terephthalate (PET) bottle containing ten 50 mg losartan potassium tablets, USP. Immediately shake for at least 2 minutes. Let the concentrate stand for 1 hour and then shake for 1 minute to disperse the tablet contents. Separately prepare a 50/50 volumetric mixture of Ora-Plus™* and Ora-Sweet SF™* Add 190 mL of the 50/50 Ora-Plus™/Ora-Sweet SF™ mixture to the tablet and water slurry in the PET bottle and shake for 1 minute to disperse the ingredients. The suspension should be refrigerated at 2 to 8°C (36 to 46°F) and can be stored for up to 4 weeks. Shake the suspension prior to each use and return promptly to the refrigerator.

Hypertensive Patients with Left Ventricular Hypertrophy

The usual starting dose is 50 mg of losartan potassium tablets, USP once daily. Hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg daily should be added and/or the dose of losartan potassium tablets, USP should be increased to 100 mg once daily followed by an increase in hydrochlorothiazide to 25 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Reduction in the Risk of Stroke).

Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients

The usual starting dose is 50 mg once daily. The dose should be increased to 100 mg once daily based on blood pressure response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Nephropathy in Type 2 Diabetic Patients). Losartan potassium tablets, USP may be administered with insulin and other commonly used hypoglycemic agents (e.g., sulfonylureas, glitazones and glucosidase inhibitors).
Calcipotriene 0.005% An...

Calcipotriene 0.005% And Betamethasone Dipropionate 0.064% Ointment

Apply an adequate layer of calcipotriene 0.005% and betamethasone dipropionate 0.064% ointment to the affected area(s) once daily for up to 4 weeks. The maximum weekly dose should not exceed 100 g. Treatment of more than 30% body surface area is not recommended. Calcipotriene 0.005% and betamethasone dipropionate 0.064% ointment should be rubbed in gently and completely. Patients should wash their hands after applying calcipotriene 0.005% and betamethasone dipropionate 0.064% ointment.

Calcipotriene 0.005% and betamethasone dipropionate 0.064% ointment is not for oral, ophthalmic, or intravaginal use.
Ampicillin And Sulbacta...

Ampicillin And Sulbactam

The pharmacy bulk package is for preparation of solutions for IV infusion only. Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection should be administered by slow intravenous injection over at least 10-15 minutes or can also be delivered, in greater dilutions with 50-100 mL of a compatible diluent as an intravenous infusion over 15-30 minutes.

The recommended adult dosage of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection is 1.5 g (1 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 0.5 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) to 3 g (2 g ampicillin as the sodium salt plus 1 g sulbactam as the sodium salt) every six hours. This 1.5 to 3 g range represents the total of ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to a range of 1 g ampicillin/0.5 g sulbactam to 2 g ampicillin/1 g sulbactam. The total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day.

Pediatric Patients 1 Year of Age or Older

The recommended daily dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection in pediatric patients is 300 mg per kg of body weight administered via intravenous infusion in equally divided doses every 6 hours. This 300 mg/kg/day dosage represents the total ampicillin content plus the sulbactam content of Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection, and corresponds to 200 mg ampicillin/100 mg sulbactam per kg per day. Pediatric patients weighing 40 kg or more should be dosed according to adult recommendations, and the total dose of sulbactam should not exceed 4 grams per day. The course of intravenous therapy should not routinely exceed 14 days. In clinical trials, most children received a course of oral antimicrobials following initial treatment with intravenous Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection. (See CLINICAL STUDIES section.)

Impaired Renal Function

In patients with impairment of renal function the elimination kinetics of ampicillin and sulbactam are similarly affected, hence the ratio of one to the other will remain constant whatever the renal function. The dose of Ampicillin and Sulbactam in such patients should be administered less frequently in accordance with the usual practice for ampicillin and according to the following recommendations:

TABLE 5.
Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection Dosage Guide for Patients with Renal Impairment Creatinine Clearance (mL/min/1.73m2) Ampicillin/Sulbactam Half-Life (Hours) Recommended Ampicillin and Sulbactam Dosage
≥ 30

1

1.5-3 g q 6h-q 8h

15-29

5

1.5-3 g q 12h

5-14

9

1.5-3 g q 24h

When only serum creatinine is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to convert this value into creatinine clearance. The serum creatinine should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males

weight (kg) x (140 ˗ age)

72 x serum creatinine

Females

0.85 x above value

COMPATIBILITY, RECONSTITUTION AND STABILITY

When concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated, Ampicillin and Sulbactam and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted and administered separately, due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by any of the aminopenicillins.

Intravenous AdministrationDIRECTIONS FOR USE

Directions for Proper Use of Pharmacy Bulk Package

Ampicillin and Sulbactam for Injection sterile powder for intravenous use may be reconstituted with any of the compatible diluents described in this insert. Solutions should be allowed to stand after dissolution to allow any foaming to dissipate in order to permit visual inspection for complete solubilization. Ampicillin and Sulbactam concentrations between 3 and 45 mg (2 to 30 mg ampicillin/1 to 15 mg sulbactam/mL) are recommended for intravenous use.

The 15 gram bottle may be reconstituted with either 92 mL Sterile Water for Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection. The diluent should be added in two separate aliquots in a suitable work area, such as a laminar flow hood. Add 50 mL of solution, shake to dissolve. Then add an additional 42 mL and shake. The solution should be allowed to stand after dissolution to allow any foaming to dissipate in order to permit visual inspection for complete solubilization. The resultant solution will have a final concentration of approximately 100 mg/mL ampicillin and 50 mg/mL sulbactam. The closure may be penetrated only one time after reconstitution, if needed, using a suitable sterile transfer device or dispensing set that allows for measured dispensing of the contents.

After reconstitution, use within two hours if stored at room temperature, or within four hours if stored under refrigeration.

Reconstituted Bulk Solution Should Not be Used For Direct Infusion

If the reconstituted bulk solution is stored for less than one hour at 20 to 25°C (68 to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature] prior to further dilution, the use periods indicated in Table 6 apply for the diluted solutions.

If the bulk solution is stored for one to two hours at 20 to 25°C (68 to 77°F) [See USP Controlled Room Temperature] and then diluted with Sterile Water for Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection to the following concentrations, the use periods indicated in Table 7 apply.

Any unused portions of solution that remain after the indicated time periods should be discarded.
TABLE 6. Diluent Maximum Concentration (mg/mL) ampicillin and sulbactam Use Periods
Sterile Water for Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

48 hrs at 4°C

30 (20/10)

72 hrs at 4°C

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

48 hrs at 4°C

30 (20/10)

72 hrs at 4°C

5% Dextrose Injection

30 (20/10)

2 hrs at 21°C

30 (20/10)

4 hrs at 4°C

3 (2/1)

2 hrs at 21°C

Lactated Ringer's Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

24 hrs at 4°C

M/6 Sodium Lactate Injection

45 (30/15)

8 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

12 hrs at 4°C

5% Dextrose in 0.45% Saline

3 (2/1)

4 hrs at 21°C

15 (10/5)

4 hrs at 4°C

10% Invert Sugar

3 (2/1)

4 hrs at 21°C

30 (20/10)

3 hrs at 4°C
Table 7.
IV Solution

Maximum Concentration

(mg/mL) Ampicillin/Sulbactam

Use Period

Sterile Water for Injection, USP

45 (30/15)

4 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

24 hrs at 4°C

0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP

45 (30/15)

4 hrs at 21°C

45 (30/15)

24 hrs at 4°C

Animal Pharmacology

While reversible glycogenosis was observed in laboratory animals, this phenomenon was dose- and time-dependent and is not expected to develop at the therapeutic doses and corresponding plasma levels attained during the relatively short periods of combined ampicillin/sulbactam therapy in man.
Ribavirin

Ribavirin

Ribavirin should be taken with food. Ribavirin should be given in combination with peginterferon alfa-2a; it is important to note that ribavirin should never be given as monotherapy. See peginterferon alfa-2a package insert for all instructions regarding peginterferon alfa-2a dosing and administration.

2.1 Chronic Hepatitis C Monoinfection

Adult Patients

The recommended dose of ribavirin tablets is provided in Table 1. The recommended duration of treatment for patients previously untreated with ribavirin and interferon is 24 to 48 weeks.

The daily dose of ribavirin tablets is 800 mg to 1200 mg administered orally in two divided doses. The dose should be individualized to the patient depending on baseline disease characteristics (e.g., genotype), response to therapy, and tolerability of the regimen (see Table 1).
Table 1. Peginterferon alfa-2a and Ribavirin Tablets Dosing Recommendations Genotypes 2 and 3 showed no increased response to treatment beyond 24 weeks (see Table 10).Data on genotypes 5 and 6 are insufficient for dosing recommendations. * See peginterferon alfa-2a package insert for further details on peginterferon alfa-2a dosing and administration, including dose modification in patients with renal impairment.
Hepatitis C Virus (HCV) Genotype

Peginterferon alfa-2a Dose* (once weekly)

Ribavirin Tablets Dose(daily)

Duration

Genotypes 1,4

180 mcg

<75 kg =1000 mg

48 weeks

≥75 kg =1200 mg

48 weeks

Genotypes 2, 3

180 mcg

800 mg

24 weeks

Pediatric Patients

Peginterferon alfa-2a is administered as 180 mcg/1.73m2 x BSA once weekly subcutaneously, to a maximum dose of 180 mcg, and should be given in combination with ribavirin. The recommended treatment duration for patients with genotype 2 or 3 is 24 weeks and for other genotypes is 48 weeks.

Ribavirin should be given in combination with peginterferon alfa-2a. Ribavirin is available only as a 200 mg tablet and therefore the healthcare provider should determine if this sized tablet can be swallowed by the pediatric patient. The recommended doses for ribavirin are provided in Table 2. Patients who initiate treatment prior to their 18th birthday should maintain pediatric dosing through the completion of therapy.
Table 2. Ribavirin Dosing Recommendations for Pediatric Patients * approximately 15 mg/kg/day
Body Weight inkilograms (kg)

RibavirinDaily Dose*

Ribavirin Numberof Tablets

23 – 33

400 mg/day

1 x 200 mg tablet A.M.1 x 200 mg tablet P.M.

34 – 46

600 mg/day

1 x 200 mg tablet A.M.2 x 200 mg tablets P.M.

47 – 59

800 mg/day

2 x 200 mg tablets A.M.2 x 200 mg tablets P.M.

60 – 74

1000 mg/day

2 x 200 mg tablets A.M.3 x 200 mg tablets P.M.

≥75

1200 mg/day

3 x 200 mg tablets A.M.3 x 200 mg tablets P.M.

2.2 Chronic Hepatitis C with HIV Coinfection

Adult Patients

The recommended dose for treatment of chronic hepatitis C in patients coinfected with HIV is peginterferon alfa-2a 180 mcg subcutaneous once weekly and ribavirin tablets 800 mg by mouth daily for a total duration of 48 weeks, regardless of HCV genotype.

2.3 Dose Modifications

Adult and Pediatric Patients

If severe adverse reactions or laboratory abnormalities develop during combination ribavirin tablets/peginterferon alfa-2a therapy, the dose should be modified or discontinued, if appropriate, until the adverse reactions abate or decrease in severity. If intolerance persists after dose adjustment, ribavirin tablets/peginterferon alfa-2a therapy should be discontinued. Table 3 provides guidelines for dose modifications and discontinuation based on the patient’s hemoglobin concentration and cardiac status.

Ribavirin tablets should be administered with caution to patients with pre-existing cardiac disease. Patients should be assessed before commencement of therapy and should be appropriately monitored during therapy. If there is any deterioration of cardiovascular status, therapy should be stopped [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Table 3. Ribavirin Dose Modification Guidelines in Adults and Pediatrics
Laboratory Values

Body weight inkilograms (kg)

Hemoglobin <10 g/dL in patients with no cardiac disease, orDecrease in hemoglobin of ≥2 g/dL during any 4 week period in patients with history of stable cardiac disease

Hemoglobin <8.5 g/dL in patients with no cardiac disease, or Hemoglobin <12 g/dL despite 4 weeks at reduced dose in patients with history of stable cardiac disease

Adult Patients older than 18 years of age

Any weight

1 x 200 mg tablet A.M.2 x 200 mg tablets P.M.

Discontinue Ribavirin

Pediatric Patients 5 to 18 years of age

23 – 33 kg

1 x 200 mg tablet A.M.

34 – 46 kg

1 x 200 mg tablet A.M.1 x 200 mg tablet P.M.

47 – 59 kg

1 x 200 mg tablet A.M.1 x 200 mg tablet P.M.

Discontinue Ribavirin

60 – 74 kg

1 x 200 mg tablet A.M.2 x 200 mg tablets P.M.

≥75 kg

1 x 200 mg tablet A.M.2 x 200 mg tablets P.M.

The guidelines for ribavirin dose modifications outlined in this table also apply to laboratory abnormalities or adverse reactions other than decreases in hemoglobin values.

Adult Patients

Once ribavirin tablets have been withheld due to either a laboratory abnormality or clinical adverse reaction, an attempt may be made to restart ribavirin tablets at 600 mg daily and further increase the dose to 800 mg daily. However, it is not recommended that ribavirin tablets be increased to the original assigned dose (1000 mg to 1200 mg).

Pediatric Patients

Upon resolution of a laboratory abnormality or clinical adverse reaction, an increase in ribavirin dose to the original dose may be attempted depending upon the physician's judgment. If ribavirin has been withheld due to a laboratory abnormality or clinical adverse reaction, an attempt may be made to restart ribavirin at one-half the full dose.

2.4 Renal Impairment

The total daily dose of ribavirin tablets should be reduced for patients with creatinine clearance less than or equal to 50 mL/min; and the weekly dose of peginterferon alfa-2a should be reduced for creatinine clearance less than 30 mL/min as follows in Table 4[see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Pharmacokinetics (12.3), and peginterferon alfa-2aPackage Insert].
Table 4 Dosage Modification for Renal Impairment
Creatinine

Clearance

Peginterferon alfa-2a Dose

(once weekly)

Ribavirin Tablets Dose

(daily)

30 to 50 mL/min

180 mcg

Alternating doses, 200 mg and400 mg every other day

Less than 30 mL/min

135 mcg

200 mg daily

Hemodialysis

135 mcg

200 mg daily

The dose of ribavirin tablets should not be further modified in patients with renal impairment. If severe adverse reactions or laboratory abnormalities develop, ribavirin tablets should be discontinued, if appropriate, until the adverse reactions abate or decrease in severity. If intolerance persists after restarting ribavirin tablets, ribavirin tablets/peginterferon alfa-2a therapy should be discontinued.

No data are available for pediatric subjects with renal impairment.

2.5 Discontinuation of Dosing

Discontinuation of peginterferon alfa-2a/ribavirin tablets therapy should be considered if the patient has failed to demonstrate at least a 2 log10 reduction from baseline in HCV RNA by 12 weeks of therapy, or undetectable HCV RNA levels after 24 weeks of therapy.

Peginterferon alfa-2a/ribavirin tablets therapy should be discontinued in patients who develop hepatic decompensation during treatment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].
Clarithromycin

Clarithromycin

Clarithromycin tablets, USP may be given with or without food.

Clarithromycin may be administered without dosage adjustment in the presence of hepatic impairment if there is normal renal function. In patients with severe renal impairment (CLCR < 30 mL/min), the dose of clarithromycin should be reduced by 50%. However, when patients with moderate or severe renal impairment are taking clarithromycin concomitantly with atazanavir or ritonavir, the dose of clarithromycin should be reduced by 50% or 75% for patients with CLCR of 30 to 60 mL/min or < 30 mL/min, respectively.
ADULT DOSAGE GUIDELINES Clarithromycin Tablets Infection Dosage(q12h) Duration(days)
Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis due toS. pyogenes

250 mg

10

Acute maxillary sinusitis due toH. influenzae M. catarrhalis S. pneumoniae

500 mg

14

Acute exacerbation of chronic bronchitis due to

H. influenzae

500 mg

7-14

H. parainfluenzae

500 mg

7

M. catarrhalis

250 mg

7-14

S. pneumoniae

250 mg

7-14

Community-Acquired Pneumonia due to

H. influenzae

250 mg

7

H. parainfluenzae

--

--

M. catarrhalis

--

--

S. pneumoniae

250 mg

7-14

C. pneumoniae

250 mg

7-14

M. pneumoniae

250 mg

7-14

Uncomplicated skin and skin structureS. aureus S. pyogenes

250 mg

7-14

H. pylori Eradication to Reduce the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

Triple Therapy: Clarithromycin/Lansoprazole/Amoxicillin

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin, 30 mg lansoprazole, and 1 gram amoxicillin, all given twice daily (q12h) for 10 or 14 days. (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES sections.)

Triple Therapy: Clarithromycin/Omeprazole/Amoxicillin

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin, 20 mg omeprazole, and 1 gram amoxicillin, all given twice daily (q12h) for 10 days. (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES sections.) In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 18 days of omeprazole 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy: Clarithromycin/Omeprazole

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin given three times daily (q8h) and 40 mg omeprazole given once daily (qAM) for 14 days. (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES sections.) An additional 14 days of omeprazole 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy: Clarithromycin/Ranitidine Bismuth Citrate

The recommended adult dose is 500 mg clarithromycin given twice daily (q12h) or three times daily (q8h) and 400 mg ranitidine bismuth citrate given twice daily (q12h) for 14 days. An additional 14 days of 400 mg twice daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief. Clarithromycin and ranitidine bismuth citrate combination therapy is not recommended in patients with creatinine clearance less than 25 mL/min. (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES sections.)

Children

The usual recommended daily dosage is 15 mg/kg/day divided q12h for 10 days.
PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES
Based on Body WeightDosing Calculated on 7.5 mg/kg q12h

Weight

Dose (q12h)

kg

lbs

9

20

62.5 mg

17

37

125 mg

25

55

187.5 mg

33

73

250 mg

Mycobacterial Infections

Prophylaxis

The recommended dose of clarithromycin for the prevention of disseminated Mycobacterium avium disease is 500 mg b.i.d. In children, the recommended dose is 7.5 mg/kg b.i.d. up to 500 mg b.i.d. No studies of clarithromycin for MAC prophylaxis have been performed in pediatric populations and the doses recommended for prophylaxis are derived from MAC treatment studies in children. Dosing recommendations for children are in the table above.

Treatment

Clarithromycin is recommended as the primary agent for the treatment of disseminated infection due to Mycobacterium aviumcomplex. Clarithromycin should be used in combination with other antimycobacterial drugs that have shown in vitro activity against MAC or clinical benefit in MAC treatment. (See CLINICAL STUDIES.) The recommended dose for mycobacterial infections in adults is 500 mg b.i.d. In children, the recommended dose is 7.5 mg/kg b.i.d. up to 500 mg b.i.d. Dosing recommendations for children are in the table above.

Clarithromycin therapy should continue if clinical response is observed. Clarithromycin can be discontinued when the patient is considered at low risk of disseminated infection.
Ketoconazole

Ketoconazole

ADULTS AND CHILDREN WEIGHING OVER 20 KG:

For genitourinary or gastrointestinal tract infections other than gonorrhea in men and women, the usual dose is 500 mg qid in equally spaced doses; severe or chronic infections may require larger doses. For the treatment of gonorrhea in both men and women, a single oral dose of 3.5 grams of ampicillin administered simultaneously with 1 gram of probenecid is recommended. Physicians are cautioned to use no less than the above recommended dosage for the treatment of gonorrhea. Follow-up cultures should be obtained from the original site(s) of infection 7 to 14 days after therapy. In women, it is also desirable to obtain culture test-of-cure from both the endocervical and anal canals. Prolonged intensive therapy is needed for complications such as prostatitis and epididymitis.

For respiratory tract infections, the usual dose is 250 mg qid in equally spaced doses.

CHILDREN WEIGHING 20 KG OR LESS:

For genitourinary or gastrointestinal tract infections, the usual dose is 100 mg/kg/day total, qid in equally divided and spaced doses. For respiratory infections, the usual dose is 50 mg/kg/day total, in equally divided and spaced doses three to four times daily. Doses for children should not exceed doses recommended for adults.

ALL PATIENTS, IRRESPECTIVE OF AGE AND WEIGHT:

Larger doses may be required for severe or chronic infections. Although ampicillin is resistant to degradation by gastric acid, it should be administered at least one-half hour before or two hours after meals for maximal absorption. Except for the single dose regimen for gonorrhea referred to above, therapy should be continued for a minimum of 48 to 72 hours after the patient becomes asymptomatic or evidence of bacterial eradication has been obtained. In infections caused by hemolytic strains of streptococci, a minimum of 10 days’ treatment is recommended to guard against the risk of rheumatic fever of glomerulonephritis (see PRECAUTIONS–Laboratory Tests). In the treatment of chronic urinary or gastrointestinal infections, frequent bacteriologic and clinical appraisal is necessary during therapy and may be necessary for several months afterwards. Stubborn infections may require treatment for several weeks. Smaller doses than those indicated above should not be used.
Penicillin V Potasium

Penicillin V Potasium

The dosage of penicillin V should be determined according to the sensitivity of the causative microorganisms and the severity of infection, and adjusted to the clinical response of the patient.

The usual dosage recommendations for adults and children 12 years and over are as follows:

Streptococcal Infections

Mild to moderately severe – of the upper respiratory tract and including scarlet fever and erysipelas: 125 to 250 mg (200,000 to 400,000 units) every 6 to 8 hours for 10 days.

Pneumococcal Infections

Mild to moderately severe – of the respiratory tract, including otitis media: 250 to 500 mg (400,000 to 800,000 units) every 6 hours until the patient has been afebrile for at least 2 days.

Staphylococcal Infections

Mild infections of skin and soft tissue (culture and sensitive tests should be performed): 250 to 500 mg (400,000 to 800,000 units) every 6 to 8 hours.

Fusospirochetosis (Vincent’s infection)

of the oropharynx. Mild to moderately severe infections: 250 to 500 mg (400,000 to 800,000 units) every 6 to 8 hours.

For the prevention of recurrence following rheumatic fever and/or chorea: 125 to 250 mg (200,000 to 400,000 units) twice daily on a continuing basis.

For prophylaxis against bacterial endocarditis1 in patients with congenital heart disease or rheumatic or other acquired valvular heart disease when undergoing dental procedures or surgical procedures of the upper respiratory tract: 2 gram of penicillin V (1 gram for children under 60 lbs.) 1 hour before the procedure, and then, 1 gram (500 mg for children under 60 lbs.) 6 hours later.
Enskyce

Enskyce

The recommended adult dose of Sumatriptan Nasal Spray for the acute treatment of migraine is 5 mg, 10 mg, or 20 mg. The 20-mg dose may provide a greater effect than the 5-mg and 10-mg doses, but may have a greater risk of adverse reactions [see Clinical Studies (14)].

The 5-mg and 20-mg doses are given as a single spray in 1 nostril. The 10-mg dose may be achieved by the administration of a single 5-mg dose in each nostril.

If the migraine has not resolved by 2 hours after taking Sumatriptan Nasal Spray, or returns after a transient improvement, 1 additional dose may be administered at least 2 hours after the first dose. The maximum daily dose is 40 mg in a 24-hour period.

The safety of treating an average of more than 4 headaches in a 30‑day period has not been established.
Losartan Potassium And ...

Losartan Potassium And Hydrochlorothiazide

Hypertension

Dosing must be individualized. The usual starting dose of losartan is 50 mg once daily, with 25 mg recommended for patients with intravascular volume depletion (e.g., patients treated with diuretics) (see WARNINGS, Hypotension - Volume-Depleted Patients) and patients with a history of hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS, Impaired Hepatic Function) Losartan can be administered once or twice daily at total daily doses of 25 to 100 mg. If the antihypertensive effect measured at trough using once-a-day dosing is inadequate, a twice-a-day regimen at the same total daily dose or an increase in dose may give a more satisfactory response.

Hydrochlorothiazide is effective in doses of 12.5 to 50 mg once daily and can be given at doses of 12.5 to 25 mg as losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide.

To minimize dose-independent side effects, it is usually appropriate to begin combination therapy only after a patient has failed to achieve the desired effect with monotherapy.

The side effects (see WARNINGS) of losartan are generally rare and apparently independent of dose; those of hydrochlorothiazide are a mixture of dose-dependent (primarily hypokalemia) and dose-independent phenomena (e.g., pancreatitis), the former much more common than the latter. Therapy with any combination of losartan and hydrochlorothiazide will be associated with both sets of dose-independent side effects.

Replacement Therapy: The combination may be substituted for the titrated components.

Dose Titration by Clinical Effect: A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with losartan monotherapy (see above) or hydrochlorothiazide alone, may be switched to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg once daily. A patient whose blood pressure is not adequately controlled with losartan 100 mg monotherapy (see above) may be switched to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 100 mg/25mg once daily. If blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg once daily.

A patient whose blood pressure is inadequately controlled by 25 mg once daily of hydrochlorothiazide, or is controlled but who experiences hypokalemia with this regimen, may be switched to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily, reducing the dose of hydrochlorothiazide without reducing the overall expected antihypertensive response. The clinical response to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 50 mg/12.5 mg should be subsequently evaluated, and if blood pressure remains uncontrolled after about 3 weeks of therapy, the dose may be increased to two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg once daily.

The usual dose of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide is one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily. More than two tablets of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily or more than one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg once daily is not recommended. The maximal antihypertensive effect is attained about 3 weeks after initiation of therapy.

Use in Patients with Renal Impairment: The usual regimens of therapy with losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide may be followed as long as the patient's creatinine clearance is greater than 30 mL/min. In patients with more severe renal impairment, loop diuretics are preferred to thiazides, so losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide is not recommended.

Patients with Hepatic Impairment: Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide is not recommended for titration in patients with hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS, Impaired Hepatic Function) because the appropriate 25 mg starting dose of losartan cannot be given.

Severe Hypertension

The starting dose of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets for initial treatment of severe hypertension is one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 50 mg/12.5 mg once daily (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects). For patients who do not respond adequately to losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets, 50 mg/12.5 mg after 2 to 4 weeks of therapy, the dosage may be increased to one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg once daily. The maximum dose is one tablet of losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide 100 mg/25 mg once daily. Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets are not recommended as initial therapy in patients with hepatic impairment (see WARNINGS, Impaired Hepatic Function) because the appropriate 25 mg starting dose of losartan cannot be given. It is also not recommended for use as initial therapy in patients with intravascular volume depletion (e.g., patients treated with diuretics, see WARNINGS, Hypotension - Volume-Depleted Patients).

Hypertensive Patients with Left Ventricular Hypertrophy

Treatment should be initiated with losartan potassium tablets 50 mg once daily. Hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg should be added or losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 50 mg/12.5 mg substituted if the blood pressure reduction is inadequate. If additional blood pressure reduction is needed, losartan potassium tablets 100 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 12.5 mg or losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100 mg/12.5 mg may be substituted, followed by losartan potassium tablets 100 mg and hydrochlorothiazide 25 mg or losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets 100 mg/25 mg. For further blood pressure reduction other antihypertensives should be added (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY, Pharmacodynamics and Clinical Effects, Losartan Potassium, Reduction in the Risk of Stroke).

Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Losartan potassium and hydrochlorothiazide tablets may be administered with or without food.
Promethazine Hydrochlor...

Promethazine Hydrochloride

Promethazine hydrochloride tablets are contraindicated for children under 2 years of age (see WARNINGS: Black Box Warning and Use in Pediatric Patients).

Allergy

The average oral dose is 25 mg taken before retiring; however, 12.5 mg may be taken before meals and on retiring, if necessary. Single 25 mg doses at bedtime or 6.25 mg to 12.5 mg taken 3 times daily will usually suffice. After initiation of treatment, in children or adults, dosage should be adjusted to the smallest amount adequate to relieve symptoms. The administration of promethazine HCl in 25 mg doses will control minor transfusion reactions of an allergic nature.

Motion Sickness

The average adult dose is 25 mg taken twice daily. The initial dose should be taken one-half to one hour before anticipated travel and be repeated 8 to 12 hours later if necessary. On succeeding days of travel, it is recommended that 25 mg be given on arising and again before the evening meal. For children, promethazine hydrochloride tablets, syrup, or rectal suppositories, 12.5 mg to 25 mg, twice daily, may be administered.

Nausea and Vomiting

Antiemetics should not be used in vomiting of unknown etiology in children and adolescents (see WARNINGS: Use in Pediatric Patients).

The average effective dose of promethazine hydrochloride tablets for the active therapy of nausea and vomiting in children or adults is 25 mg. When oral medication cannot be tolerated, the dose should be given parenterally or by rectal suppository. 12.5 mg to 25 mg doses may be repeated, as necessary, at 4 to 6 hour intervals.

For nausea and vomiting in children, the usual dose is 0.5 mg per pound of body weight, and the dose should be adjusted to the age and weight of the patient and the severity of the condition being treated.

For prophylaxis of nausea and vomiting, as during surgery and the postoperative period, the average dose is 25 mg repeated at 4 to 6 hour intervals, as necessary.

Sedation

This product relieves apprehension and induces a quiet sleep from which the patient can be easily aroused. Administration of 12.5 mg to 25 mg promethazine HCl by the oral route or by rectal suppository at bedtime will provide sedation in children. Adults usually require 25 mg to 50 mg for nighttime, presurgical, or obstetrical sedation.

Pre- and Postoperative Use

Promethazine HCl in 12.5 mg to 25 mg doses for children and 50 mg doses for adults the night before surgery relieves apprehension and produces a quiet sleep.

For preoperative medication, children require doses of 0.5 mg per pound of body weight in combination with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the appropriate dose of an atropine like drug.

Usual adult dosage is a 50 mg promethazine HCl with an appropriately reduced dose of narcotic or barbiturate and the required amount of a belladonna alkaloid.

Postoperative sedation and adjunctive use with analgesics may be obtained by the administration of 12.5 mg to 25 mg in children and 25 mg to 50 mg doses in adults. Promethazine hydrochloride tablets are contraindicated for children under 2 years of age.
Imiquimod

Imiquimod

Malaria Treatment in Adults

Treatment of mild to moderate malaria in adults caused by mefloquine-susceptible strains of P. falciparum or by P. vivax

Dosage: Five tablets (1250 mg) mefloquine hydrochloride to be given as a single oral dose. The drug should not be taken on an empty stomach and should be administered with at least 8 oz (240 mL) of water.

If a full-treatment course with mefloquine does not lead to improvement within 48 to 72 hours, mefloquine should not be used for retreatment. An alternative therapy should be used. Similarly, if previous prophylaxis with mefloquine failed, mefloquine should not be used for curative treatment (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE).
Note: Patients with acute P. vivax malaria, treated with mefloquine, are at high risk of relapse because mefloquine does not eliminate exoerythrocytic (hepatic phase) parasites. To avoid relapse after initial treatment of the acute infection with mefloquine, patients should subsequently be treated with an 8-aminoquinoline derivative (eg, primaquine).
Malaria Prophylaxis in Adults

Dosage: One 250 mg mefloquine hydrochloride tablet once weekly.

Prophylactic drug administration should begin 1 week before arrival in an endemic area. Subsequent weekly doses should be taken regularly, always on the same day of each week, preferably after the main meal. To reduce the risk of malaria after leaving an endemic area, prophylaxis must be continued for 4 additional weeks to ensure suppressive blood levels of the drug when merozoites emerge from the liver. Tablets should not be taken on an empty stomach and should be administered with at least 8 oz (240 mL) of water.

In certain cases, eg, when a traveler is taking other medication, it may be desirable to start prophylaxis 2 to 3 weeks prior to departure, in order to ensure that the combination of drugs is well tolerated (see PRECAUTIONS: Drug Interactions).

When prophylaxis with mefloquine fails, physicians should carefully evaluate which antimalarial to use for therapy.

Malaria Treatment in Pediatric Patients

Treatment of mild to moderate malaria in pediatric patients caused by mefloquine-susceptible strains of P. falciparum

Dosage: 20 to 25 mg/kg body weight. Splitting the total therapeutic dose into 2 doses taken 6 to 8 hours apart may reduce the occurrence or severity of adverse effects. The pediatric dose should not exceed the adult dose.

Experience with mefloquine in pediatric patients weighing less than 20 kg is limited. The drug should not be taken on an empty stomach and should be administered with ample water. The tablets may be crushed and suspended in a small amount of water, milk or other beverage for administration to small children and other persons unable to swallow them whole.

If a full-treatment course with mefloquine does not lead to improvement within 48 to 72 hours, mefloquine should not be used for retreatment. An alternative therapy should be used. Similarly, if previous prophylaxis with mefloquine has failed, mefloquine should not be used for curative treatment.

In pediatric patients, the administration of mefloquine for the treatment of malaria has been associated with early vomiting. In some cases, early vomiting has been cited as a possible cause of treatment failure (see PRECAUTIONS). If a significant loss of drug product is observed or suspected because of vomiting, a second full dose of mefloquine should be administered to patients who vomit less than 30 minutes after receiving the drug. If vomiting occurs 30 to 60 minutes after a dose, an additional half-dose should be given. If vomiting recurs, the patient should be monitored closely and alternative malaria treatment considered if improvement is not observed within a reasonable period of time.

The safety and effectiveness of mefloquine to treat malaria in pediatric patients below the age of 6 months have not been established.

Malaria Prophylaxis in Pediatric Patients

The recommended prophylactic dose of mefloquine is approximately 5 mg/kg body weight once weekly. One 250 mg mefloquine hydrochloride tablet should be taken once weekly in pediatric patients weighing over 45 kg. In pediatric patients weighing less than 45 kg, the weekly dose decreases in proportion to body weight:

30 to 45 kg: 3/4 tablet

20 to 30 kg: 1/2 tablet

Experience with mefloquine in pediatric patients weighing less than 20 kg is limited.
Omeprazole

Omeprazole

Omeprazole delayed-release capsules, USP should be taken before eating. In the clinical trials, antacids were used concomitantly with omeprazole.

Patients should be informed that the omeprazole delayed-release capsule should be swallowed whole.

For patients unable to swallow an intact capsule, alternative administration options are available [seeDOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION(2.8)]

2.1 Short-Term Treatment of Active Duodenal Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose of omeprazole delayed-release capsules, USP is 20 mg once daily. Most patients heal within four weeks. Some patients may require an additional four weeks of therapy.

2.2 H. pylori Eradication for the Reduction of the Risk of Duodenal Ulcer Recurrence

Triple Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin/amoxicillin) — The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg plus clarithromycin 500 mg plus amoxicillin 1000 mg each given twice daily for 10 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 18 days of omeprazole delayed-release capsules 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

Dual Therapy (omeprazole/clarithromycin) — The recommended adult oral regimen is omeprazole delayed-release capsules 40 mg once daily plus clarithromycin 500 mg three times daily for 14 days. In patients with an ulcer present at the time of initiation of therapy, an additional 14 days of omeprazole 20 mg once daily is recommended for ulcer healing and symptom relief.

2.3 Gastric Ulcer

The recommended adult oral dose is 40 mg once daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.4 Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease (GERD)

The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with symptomatic GERD and no esophageal lesions is 20 mg daily for up to 4 weeks. The recommended adult oral dose for the treatment of patients with erosive esophagitis and accompanying symptoms due to GERD is 20 mg daily for 4 to 8 weeks.

2.5 Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

The recommended adult oral dose is 20 mg daily. Controlled studies do not extend beyond 12 months [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.4)]

2.6 Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions

The dosage of omeprazole delayed-release capsules in patients with pathological hypersecretory conditions varies with the individual patient. The recommended adult oral starting dose is 60 mg once daily. Doses should be adjusted to individual patient needs and should continue for as long as clinically indicated. Doses up to 120 mg three times daily have been administered. Daily dosages of greater than 80 mg should be administered in divided doses. Some patients with Zollinger-Ellison syndrome have been treated continuously with omeprazole for more than 5 years.

2.7 Pediatric Patients

For the treatment of GERD and maintenance of healing of erosive esophagitis, the recommended daily dose for pediatric patients 2 to 16 years of age is as follows:
Patient Weight Omeprazole Daily Dose
10 < 20 kg

10 mg

≥ 20 kg

20 mg

On a per kg basis, the doses of omeprazole required to heal erosive esophagitis in pediatric patients are greater than those for adults.

Alternative administrative options can be used for pediatric patients unable to swallow an intact capsule [seeDOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.8) ].

2.8 Alternative Administration Options

Omeprazole is available as a delayed-release capsule.

For patients who have difficulty swallowing capsules, the contents of an omeprazole delayed-release capsule can be added to applesauce. One tablespoon of applesauce should be added to an empty bowl and the capsule should be opened. All of the pellets inside the capsule should be carefully emptied on the applesauce. The pellets should be mixed with the applesauce and then swallowed immediately with a glass of cool water to ensure complete swallowing of the pellets. The applesauce used should not be hot and should be soft enough to be swallowed without chewing. The pellets should not be chewed or crushed. The pellets/applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.
Ribavirin

Ribavirin

Under no circumstances should ribavirin capsules be opened, crushed, or broken. Ribavirin should be taken with food [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Ribavirin should not be used in patients with creatinine clearance less than 50 mL/min.

2.2 Ribavirin/INTRON A Combination Therapy

Adults

Duration of Treatment – Interferon Alpha-naïve Patients

The recommended dose of INTRON A is 3 million IU three times weekly subcutaneously. The recommended dose of ribavirin capsules depends on the patient’s body weight (refer to Table 1). The recommended duration of treatment for patients previously untreated with interferon is 24 to 48 weeks. The duration of treatment should be individualized to the patient depending on baseline disease characteristics, response to therapy, and tolerability of the regimen [see Indications and Usage (1.1), and Clinical Studies (14)]. After 24 weeks of treatment, virologic response should be assessed. Treatment discontinuation should be considered in any patient who has not achieved an HCV-RNA below the limit of detection of the assay by 24 weeks. There are no safety and efficacy data on treatment for longer than 48 weeks in the previously untreated patient population.

Duration of Treatment – Retreatment with INTRON A/Ribavirin in Relapse Patients

In patients who relapse following nonpegylated interferon monotherapy, the recommended duration of treatment is 24 weeks.
Table 1. Recommended Dosing
Body Weight

Ribavirin Capsules

≤75 kg

2 x 200 mg capsules AM3 x 200 mg capsules PMdaily orally

>75 kg

3 x 200 mg capsules AM3 x 200 mg capsules PMdaily orally

Pediatrics

The recommended dose of ribavirin is 15 mg/kg per day orally (divided dose AM and PM). INTRON A for Injection by body weight of 25 kg to 61 kg is 3 million IU/m2 three times weekly subcutaneously.

The recommended duration of treatment is 48 weeks for pediatric patients with genotype 1. After 24 weeks of treatment, virologic response should be assessed. Treatment discontinuation should be considered in any patient who has not achieved an HCV-RNA below the limit of detection of the assay by this time. The recommended duration of treatment for pediatric patients with genotype 2/3 is 24 weeks.

2.3 Laboratory Tests

The following laboratory tests are recommended for all patients treated with ribavirin, prior to beginning treatment and then periodically thereafter.
• Standard hematologic tests - including hemoglobin (pretreatment, Week 2 and Week 4 of therapy, and as clinically appropriate [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2, 5.7)]), complete and differential white blood cell counts, and platelet count. • Blood chemistries - liver function tests and TSH. • Pregnancy - including monthly monitoring for women of childbearing potential. • ECG [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
2.4 Dose Modifications

If severe adverse reactions or laboratory abnormalities develop during combination ribavirin/INTRON A therapy modify, or discontinue the dose until the adverse reaction abates or decreases in severity [see Warnings and Precautions (5)]. If intolerance persists after dose adjustment, combination therapy should be discontinued.

Ribavirin should not be used in patients with creatinine clearance less than 50 mL/min. Patients with impaired renal function and those over the age of 50 should be carefully monitored with respect to development of anemia [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2), Use in Specific Populations (8.5), and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Ribavirin should be administered with caution to patients with pre-existing cardiac disease. Patients should be assessed before commencement of therapy and should be appropriately monitored during therapy. If there is any deterioration of cardiovascular status, therapy should be stopped [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

For patients with a history of stable cardiovascular disease, a permanent dose reduction is required if the hemoglobin decreases by greater than or equal to 2 g/dL during any 4-week period. In addition, for these cardiac history patients, if the hemoglobin remains less than 12 g/dL after 4 weeks on a reduced dose, the patient should discontinue combination therapy.

It is recommended that a patient whose hemoglobin level falls below 10 g/dL have his/her ribavirin dose modified or discontinued per Table 2[see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
Table 2. Guidelines for Dose Modification and Discontinuation of INTRON A Based on Laboratory Parameters in Adults and Pediatrics * Pediatric patients who have pre-existing cardiac conditions and experience a hemoglobin decrease greater than or equal to 2 g/dL during any 4-week period during treatment should have weekly evaluations and hematology testing. † These guidelines are for patients with stable cardiac disease [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].
LaboratoryParameters

ReduceRibavirinDaily Dose(see note 1) if:

ReduceINTRON ADose(see note 2) if:

DiscontinueTherapy if:

WBC

N/A

1.0 to <1.5 x 109/L

<1.0 x 109/L

Neutrophils

N/A

0.5 to <0.75 x 109/L

<0.5 x 109/L

Platelets

N/A

25 to < 50 x 109/L(adults)

<25 x 109/L(adults)

N/A

50 to <70 x 109/L(pediatrics)

<50 x 109/L(pediatrics)

Creatinine

N/A

N/A

>2 mg/dL(pediatrics)

Hemoglobin in patients without history of cardiac disease

8.5 to <10 g/dL

N/A

<8.5 g/dL

Reduce Ribavirin Dose by200 mg/day andINTRON A Dose by Half if:

Hemoglobin in patients with history of stable cardiac disease*,†

≥2 g/dL decrease in hemoglobin during any four week period during treatment

<8.5 g/dL or <12 g/dL after four weeks of dose reduction

Note 1: Adult patients: 1st dose reduction of ribavirin is by 200 mg/day (except in patients receiving the 1,400 mg, dose reduction should be by 400 mg/day). If needed, 2nd dose reduction of ribavirin is by an additional 200 mg/day. Patients whose dose of ribavirin is reduced to 600 mg daily receive one 200 mg capsule in the morning and two 200 mg capsules in the evening. Pediatric patients: 1st dose reduction of ribavirin is to 12 mg/kg/day, 2nd dose reduction of ribavirin is to 8 mg/kg/day.

Note 2: For patients on ribavirin/INTRON A combination therapy: reduce INTRON A dose by 50%.

Refer to labeling for INTRON A for additional information about how to reduce an INTRON A dose.

2.5 Discontinuation of Dosing

Adults

Regardless of genotype, previously treated patients who have detectable HCV-RNA at week 12 or 24 are highly unlikely to achieve SVR and discontinuation of therapy should be considered.
Adapalene Gel

Adapalene Gel

Apply a thin film of adapalene gel, 0.3% to the entire face and any other affected areas of the skin once daily in the evening, after washing gently with a non-medicated soap. Avoid application to the areas of skin around eyes, lips, and mucous membranes. A mild transitory sensation of warmth or slight stinging may occur shortly after the application of adapalene gel, 0.3%. Patients should be instructed to minimize sun exposure. Patients may be instructed to use moisturizers for relief of dry skin or irritation.

If therapeutic results are not noticed after 12 weeks of treatment, therapy should be re-evaluated.

For topical use only. Not for ophthalmic, oral or intravaginal use.
Piperacillin And Tazoba...

Piperacillin And Tazobactam

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.1 Adult Patients

The usual total daily dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for adults is 3.375 g every six hours totaling 13.5 g (12 g piperacillin/1.5 g tazobactam). The usual duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment is from 7 to 10 days.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.2 Nosocomial Pneumonia

Initial presumptive treatment of patients with nosocomial pneumonia should start with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection at a dosage of 4.5 g every six hours plus an aminoglycoside, totaling 18 g (16 g piperacillin/2 g tazobactam). The recommended duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment for nosocomial pneumonia is 7 to 14 days. Treatment with the aminoglycoside should be continued in patients from whom P. aeruginosais isolated.

2.3 Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance ≤ 40 mL/min) and dialysis patients (hemodialysis and CAPD), the intravenous dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be reduced to the degree of actual renal function impairment. The recommended daily doses of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for patients with renal impairment are as follows:
Table 1: Recommended Dosing of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection in Patients with Normal Renal Function and Renal Impairment (As total grams piperacillin/tazobactam) Renal Function(creatinine clearance,mL/min) All Indications(except nosocomialpneumonia) NosocomialPneumonia * Creatinine clearance for patients not receiving hemodialysis † 0.75 g (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each hemodialysis session on hemodialysis days
>40 mL/min

3.375 q 6 h

4.5 q 6 h

20-40 mL/min*

2.25 q 6 h

3.375 q 6 h

<20 mL/min*

2.25 q 8 h

2.25 q 6 h

Hemodialysis†

2.25 q 12 h

2.25 q 8 h

CAPD

2.25 q 12 h

2.25 q 8 h

For patients on hemodialysis, the maximum dose is 2.25 g every twelve hours for all indications other than nosocomial pneumonia and 2.25 g every eight hours for nosocomial pneumonia. Since hemodialysis removes 30% to 40% of the administered dose, an additional dose of 0.75 g piperacillin and tazobactam for injection (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each dialysis period on hemodialysis days. No additional dosage of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is necessary for CAPD patients.

2.4 Pediatric Patients

For children with appendicitis and/or peritonitis 9 months of age or older, weighing up to 40 kg, and with normal renal function, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage is 100 mg piperacillin/12.5 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours. For pediatric patients between 2 months and 9 months of age, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage based on pharmacokinetic modeling, is 80 mg piperacillin/10 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Pediatric patients weighing over 40 kg and with normal renal function should receive the adult dose.

It has not been determined how to adjust piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

2.5 Reconstitution and Dilution of Powder Formulations

Single dose vials

Reconstitute piperacillin and tazobactam for injection vials with a compatible reconstitution diluent from the list provided below.

2.25 g, 3.375 g, and 4.5 g piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be reconstituted with 10 mL, 15 mL, and 20 mL, respectively. Swirl until dissolved.

Compatible Reconstitution Diluents for Single Dose Vials

0.9% sodium chloride for injection

Sterile water for injection

Dextrose 5%

Bacteriostatic saline/parabens

Bacteriostatic water/parabens

Bacteriostatic saline/benzyl alcohol

Bacteriostatic water/benzyl alcohol

Reconstituted piperacillin and tazobactam for injection solutions for single dose vials should be further diluted (recommended volume per dose of 50 mL to 150 mL) in a compatible intravenous solution listed below. Administer by infusion over a period of at least 30 minutes. During the infusion it is desirable to discontinue the primary infusion solution.

Compatible Intravenous Solutions for Single Dose Vials

0.9% sodium chloride for injection

sterile water for injection‡

Dextran 6% in saline

Dextrose 5%

LACTATED RINGER’S SOLUTION IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH PIPERACILLIN AND TAZOBACTAM FOR INJECTION.

‡ Maximum recommended volume per dose of sterile water for injection is 50 mL.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be mixed with other drugs in a syringe or infusion bottle since compatibility has not been established.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not chemically stable in solutions that contain only sodium bicarbonate and solutions that significantly alter the pH.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be added to blood products or albumin hydrolysates. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Stability of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection Powder Formulations Following Reconstitution

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection reconstituted from single dose vials is stable in glass and plastic containers (plastic syringes, I.V. bags and tubing) when used with compatible diluents.

Single dose vials should be used immediately after reconstitution. Discard any unused portion after 24 hours if stored at room temperature (20°C to 25°C [68°F to 77°F]), or after 48 hours if stored at refrigerated temperature (2°C to 8°C [36°F to 46°F]). Vials should not be frozen after reconstitution.

Stability studies in the I.V. bags have demonstrated chemical stability (potency, pH of reconstituted solution and clarity of solution) for up to 24 hours at room temperature and up to one week at refrigerated temperature. Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection contains no preservatives. Appropriate consideration of aseptic technique should be used.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection reconstituted from single dose vials can be used in ambulatory intravenous infusion pumps. Stability of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection in an ambulatory intravenous infusion pump has been demonstrated for a period of 12 hours at room temperature. Each dose was reconstituted and diluted to a volume of 37.5 mL or 25 mL. One-day supplies of dosing solution were aseptically transferred into the medication reservoir (I.V. bags or cartridge). The reservoir was fitted to a preprogrammed ambulatory intravenous infusion pump per the manufacturer's instructions. Stability of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not affected when administered using an ambulatory intravenous infusion pump.

2.7 Compatibility with Aminoglycosides

Due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by piperacillin, piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides are recommended for separate administration. Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted, diluted, and administered separately when concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

In circumstances where co-administration via Y-site is necessary, Y-site infusion only with the following aminoglycosides under the following conditions:
Table 2: Compatibility with Aminoglycosides * Diluent volumes apply to single dose vials † The concentration ranges in Table 2 are based on administration of the aminoglycoside in divided doses (10 to 15 mg/kg/day in two daily doses for amikacin and 3 to 5 mg/kg/day in three daily doses for gentamicin). Administration of amikacin or gentamicin in a single daily dose or in doses exceeding those stated above via Y-site with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection has not been evaluated. See package insert for each aminoglycoside for complete Dosage and Administration instructions.
Aminoglycoside

Piperacillin andTazobactam forInjection Dose(grams)

Piperacillin andTazobactam forInjection DiluentVolume* (mL)

Aminoglycoside ConcentrationRange† (mg/mL)

AcceptableDiluents

Amikacin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

1.75 – 7.5

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Gentamicin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

0.7 – 3.32

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Only the concentration and diluents for amikacin or gentamicin with the dosages of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection listed above have been established as compatible for coadministration via Y-site infusion. Simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion in any manner other than listed above may result in inactivation of the aminoglycoside by piperacillin and tazobactam for injection.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not compatible with tobramycin for simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion. Compatibility of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection with other aminoglycosides has not been established.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Zolpidem Tartrate

Zolpidem Tartrate

2.1 Dosage in Adults

Use the lowest effective dose for the patient. The recommended initial dose is 5 mg for women and either 5 or 10 mg for men, taken only once per night immediately before bedtime with at least 7 to 8 hours remaining before the planned time of awakening. If the 5 mg dose is not effective, the dose can be increased to 10 mg. In some patients, the higher morning blood levels following use of the 10 mg dose increase the risk of next day impairment of driving and other activities that require full alertness [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1)]. The total dose of zolpidem tartrate tablets should not exceed 10 mg once daily immediately before bedtime.

The recommended initial doses for women and men are different because zolpidem clearance is lower in women.

2.2 Special Populations

Elderly or debilitated patients may be especially sensitive to the effects of zolpidem tartrate. Patients with hepatic insufficiency do not clear the drug as rapidly as normal subjects. The recommended dose of zolpidem tartrate tablets in both of these patient populations is 5 mg once daily immediately before bedtime [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1); USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.5)].

2.3 Use with CNS Depressants

Dosage adjustment may be necessary when zolpidem tartrate tablets are combined with other CNS depressant drugs because of the potentially additive effects [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1)].

2.4 Administration

The effect of zolpidem tartrate tablets may be slowed by ingestion with or immediately after a meal.
Pravastatin Sodium

Pravastatin Sodium

2.1 General Dosing Information

The patient should be placed on a standard cholesterol-lowering diet before receiving pravastatin sodium tablets and should continue on this diet during treatment with pravastatin sodium tablets [see NCEP Treatment Guidelines for details on dietary therapy].

2.2 Adult Patients

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily. If a daily dose of 40 mg does not achieve desired cholesterol levels, 80 mg once daily is recommended. In patients with significant renal impairment, a starting dose of 10 mg daily is recommended. Pravastatin sodium tablets can be administered orally as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

2.3 Pediatric Patients

Children (Ages 8 to 13 Years, Inclusive)

The recommended dose is 20 mg once daily in children 8 to 13 years of age. Doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Adolescents (Ages 14 to 18 Years)

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily in adolescents 14 to 18 years of age. Doses greater than 40 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Children and adolescents treated with pravastatin should be reevaluated in adulthood and appropriate changes made to their cholesterol-lowering regimen to achieve adult goals for LDL-C [see INDICATIONS AND USAGE (1.2)].

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Altering Therapy

Pravastatin sodium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. When administering a bile-acid-binding resin (e.g., cholestyramine, colestipol) and pravastatin, pravastatin sodium tablets should be given either 1 hour or more before or at least 4 hours following the resin. [See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3).]

2.5 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine

In patients taking immunosuppressive drugs such as cyclosporine concomitantly with pravastatin, therapy should begin with 10 mg of pravastatin sodium once-a-day at bedtime and titration to higher doses should be done with caution. Most patients treated with this combination received a maximum pravastatin sodium dose of 20 mg/day. In patients taking cyclosporine, therapy should be limited to 20 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1)and DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Clarithromycin

In patients taking clarithromycin, therapy should be limited to 40 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.2)].
Rivastigmine Tartrate

Rivastigmine Tartrate

2.1       Recommended Dosing

Rivastigmine tartrate should be taken with meals in divided doses in the morning and evening.

Alzheimer’s Disease

The dosage of rivastigmine tartrate shown to be effective in controlled clinical trials in Alzheimer’s disease is 6 mg to 12 mg per day, administered twice a day (daily doses of 3 mg to 6 mg twice a day). There is evidence from the clinical trials that doses at the higher end of this range may be more beneficial.

Initial Dose

Initiate treatment with the 1.5 mg twice a day with rivastigmine tartrate.

Dose Titration

After a minimum of 2 weeks and if well tolerated, increase the dose to 3 mg twice a day. Subsequent increases to 4.5 mg twice a day and 6 mg twice a day should be attempted after a minimum of 2 weeks at the previous dose and if well tolerated. The maximum dose is 6 mg twice a day (12 mg per day).

Parkinson’s Disease Dementia

The dosage of rivastigmine tartrate shown to be effective in the single controlled clinical trial conducted in dementia associated with Parkinson’s disease is 3 mg to 12 mg per day, administered twice a day (daily doses of 1.5 mg to 6 mg twice a day).

Initial Dose

Initiate treatment with the 1.5 mg twice a day with rivastigmine tartrate.

Dose Titration

After a minimum of 4 weeks and if well tolerated, increase the dose to 3 mg twice a day. Subsequent increases to 4.5 mg twice a day and 6 mg twice a day should be attempted after a minimum of 4 weeks at the previous dose and if well tolerated. The maximum dose is 6 mg twice a day (12 mg per day).

Interruption of Treatment

If adverse effects (e.g., nausea, vomiting, abdominal pain, loss of appetite) cause intolerance during treatment, the patient should be instructed to discontinue treatment for several doses and then restart at the same or next lower dose level.

If dosing is interrupted for 3 days or fewer, restart treatment with the same or lower dose of rivastigmine tartrate. If dosing is interrupted for more than 3 days, treatment should be restarted with 1.5 mg twice a day and titrated as described above [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

2.2       Dosing in Specific Populations

Dosing Modifications in Patients with Renal or Hepatic Impairment

Pharmacokinetic studies of oral rivastigmine in patients with moderate to severe renal impairment (glomerular filtration rate [GFR] <50 mL/min) and mild to moderate hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score 5 to 9) showed reduced clearance of the drug [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6, 8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Accordingly, such patients may be able to only tolerate lower doses. No data are available on the use of rivastigmine in patients with severe hepatic impairment.

Dosing Modifications in Patients with Low Body Weight

Because rivastigmine blood levels vary with body weight [see Use in Specific Populations (8.8), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)], careful titration and monitoring should be performed in patients with low body weight. In patients with low body weight (less than 50 kg), monitor closely for toxicities (e.g., excessive nausea, vomiting), and consider reducing the dose if such toxicities develop.

2.3       Important Administration Instructions

Rivastigmine tartrate oral solution and rivastigmine tartrate capsules may be interchanged at equal doses. Caregivers should direct questions about the administration of rivastigmine tartrate oral solution to either their physician or pharmacist [see Patient Counseling Information (17)].
Levetiracetam Solution

Levetiracetam Solution

2.1 Important Administration Instructions

Levetiracetam oral solution USP, 100 mg/mL is given orally with or without food. The levetiracetam oral solution USP, 100 mg/mL dosing regimen depends on the indication, age group, dosage form (tablets or oral solution), and renal function.

Prescribe the oral solution for pediatric patients with body weight ≤ 20 kg. Prescribe the oral solution or tablets for pediatric patients with body weight above 20 kg.

When using the oral solution in pediatric patients, dosing is weight-based (mg per kg) using a calibrated measuring device (not a household teaspoon or tablespoon).

2.2 Partial Onset Seizures

Adults 16 Years and Older In clinical trials, daily doses of 1000 mg, 2000 mg, and 3000 mg, given as twice-daily dosing were shown to be effective. Although in some studies there was a tendency toward greater response with higher dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1)], a consistent increase in response with increased dose has not been shown.

Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Additional dosing increments may be given (1000 mg/day additional every 2 weeks) to a maximum recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. Doses greater than 3000 mg/day have been used in open-label studies for periods of 6 months and longer. There is no evidence that doses greater than 3000 mg/day confer additional benefit.

Pediatric Patients Dosing information in pediatric patients less than 4 years of age as adjunctive therapy in the treatment of partial onset seizures is approved for UCB, Inc.’s levetiracetam tablets and oral solution. However, due to UCB, Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that pediatric information.

4 Years to < 16 Years Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). If a patient cannot tolerate a daily dose of 60 mg/kg, the daily dose may be reduced. In the clinical efficacy trial, the mean daily dose was 44 mg/kg. The maximum daily dose was 3000 mg/day.

Levetiracetam Oral Solution USP, 100 mg/mL Weight-Based Dosing Calculation For Pediatric Patients

The following calculation should be used to determine the appropriate daily dose of oral solution for pediatric patients:
Daily dose (mg/kg/day) x patient weight (kg) Total daily dose (mL/day) = ---------------------------------------------------------------- 100 mg/mL
2.3 Myoclonic Seizures in Patients 12 Years of Age and Older with Juvenile Myoclonic Epilepsy

Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Dosage should be increased by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been studied.

2.4 Primary Generalized Tonic-Clonic Seizures

Adults 16 Years and Older Treatment should be initiated with a dose of 1000 mg/day, given as twice-daily dosing (500 mg twice daily). Dosage should be increased by 1000 mg/day every 2 weeks to the recommended daily dose of 3000 mg. The effectiveness of doses lower than 3000 mg/day has not been adequately studied.

Pediatric Patients Ages 6 to <16 Years Treatment should be initiated with a daily dose of 20 mg/kg in 2 divided doses (10 mg/kg twice daily). The daily dose should be increased every 2 weeks by increments of 20 mg/kg to the recommended daily dose of 60 mg/kg (30 mg/kg twice daily). The effectiveness of doses lower than 60 mg/kg/day has not been adequately studied. Patients with body weight ≤20 kg should be dosed with oral solution. Patients with body weight above 20 kg can be dosed with either tablets or oral solution [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)]. Only whole tablets should be administered.

2.5 Adult Patients with Impaired Renal Function

Levetiracetam oral solution USP, 100 mg/mL dosing must be individualized according to the patient's renal function status. Recommended doses and adjustment for dose for adults are shown in Table 1. In order to calculate the dose recommended for patients with renal impairment, creatinine clearance adjusted for body surface area must be calculated. To do this an estimate of the patient's creatinine clearance (CLcr) in mL/min must first be calculated using the following formula:

[140-age (years)] x weight (kg)CLcr = --------------------------------------------- (x 0.85 for female patients) 72 x serum creatinine (mg/dL)

Then CLcr is adjusted for body surface area (BSA) as follows: CLcr (mL/min)CLcr (mL/min/1.73m2) =---------------------------- x 1.73 BSA subject (m2)

Table 1: Dosing Adjustment Regimen For Adult Patients With Impaired Renal Function
Group Creatinine Clearance(mL/min/1.73m2) Dosage(mg) Frequency Normal > 80 500 to 1,500 Every 12 hours Mild 50 to 80 500 to 1,000 Every 12 hours Moderate 30 to 50 250 to 750 Every 12 hours Severe < 30 250 to 500 Every 12 hours ESRD patients using dialysis ---- 500 to 1,0001 Every 24 hours1
1 Following dialysis, a 250 to 500 mg supplemental dose is recommended.
Amoxicillin And Clavula...

Amoxicillin And Clavulanate Potassium

Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Extended Release Tablets should be taken at the start of a meal to enhance the absorption of amoxicillin and to minimize the potential for gastrointestinal intolerance. Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Extended Release Tablets are not recommended to be taken with a high‑fat meal, because clavulanate absorption is decreased. [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.1 Adults

The recommended dose of Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Extended Release Tablets is 4,000 mg/250 mg daily according to the following table:

Indication

Dose

Duration

Acute bacterial sinusitis

2 tablets q12h

10 days

Community‑acquired pneumonia

2 tablets q12h

7-10 days

Tablets of Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Tablets (250 mg or 500 mg) CANNOT be used to provide the same dosages as Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Extended Release Tablets. This is because Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Extended Release Tablets contains 62.5 mg of clavulanic acid, while the Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 250-mg and 500-mg tablets each contain 125 mg of clavulanic acid. In addition, the Extended Release Tablet provides an extended time course of plasma amoxicillin concentrations compared to immediate-release tablets. Thus, two Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium 500-mg tablets are not equivalent to one Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Extended Release tablet.

Scored Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Extended Release Tablets are available for adult patients who have difficulty swallowing. The scored tablet is not intended to reduce the dosage of medication taken; as stated in the table above, the recommended dose of Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Extended Release Tablets is two tablets twice a day (every 12 hours).

2.2 Renally Impaired Patients

The pharmacokinetics of Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Extended Release Tablets have not been studied in patients with renal impairment. Amoxicillin and Clavulanate Potassium Extended Release Tablets are contraindicated in patients with a creatinine clearance of <30 mL/min and in hemodialysis patients [see Contraindications (4)].

2.3 Hepatically Impaired Patients

Hepatically impaired patients should be dosed with caution and hepatic function monitored at regular intervals [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

2.4 Pediatric Use

Pediatric patients who weigh 40 kg or more and can swallow tablets should receive the adult dose [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

2.5 Geriatric Use

No dosage adjustment is required for the elderly [see Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].
Doxercalciferol

Doxercalciferol

Adult Administration

For intravenous use only. The optimal dose of doxercalciferol injection must be carefully determined for each patient.

The recommended initial dose of doxercalciferol injection is 4 mcg administered intravenously as a bolus dose three times weekly at the end of dialysis (approximately every other day). The initial dose should be adjusted, as needed, in order to lower blood iPTH into the range of 150 to 300 pg/mL. The dose may be increased at 8-week intervals by 1 to 2 mcg if iPTH is not lowered by 50% and fails to reach the target range. Dosages higher than 18 mcg weekly have not been studied. Drug administration should be suspended if iPTH falls below 100 pg/mL and restarted one week later at a dose that is at least 1 mcg lower than the last administered dose. During titration, iPTH, serum calcium, and serum phosphorus levels should be obtained weekly. If hypercalcemia, hyperphosphatemia, or a serum calcium times phosphorus product greater than 55 mg2/dL2 is noted, the dose of doxercalciferol injection should be decreased or suspended and/or the dose of phosphate binders should be appropriately adjusted. If suspended, the drug should be restarted at a dose that is 1 mcg lower.

Dosing must be individualized and based on iPTH levels with monitoring of serum calcium and serum phosphorus levels. Table 5 presents a suggested approach in dose titration:

Tablet 5: Initial Dosing

iPTH Level

Doxercalciferol Injection Dose

>400 pg/mL

4 mcg three times per week at the end of dialysis, or approximately every other day

Dose Titration

iPTH Level

Doxercalciferol Injection Dose

Decrease by <50% and above 300 pg/mL

Increase by 1 to 2 mcg at eight-week intervals as necessary

Decrease by >50% and above 300 pg/mL

Maintain

150 - 300 pg/mL

Maintain

<100 pg/mL

Suspend for one week, then resume at a dose that is at least 1 mcg lower

Discard unused portion.
V Hp

V Hp

2.1 Hypertension

Dosage must be individualized. The usual starting dose of telmisartan tablets is 40 mg once a day. Blood pressure response is dose-related over the range of 20 to 80 mg [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

Most of the antihypertensive effect is apparent within 2 weeks and maximal reduction is generally attained after 4 weeks. When additional blood pressure reduction beyond that achieved with 80 mg telmisartan tablets is required, a diuretic may be added.

No initial dosage adjustment is necessary for elderly patients or patients with renal impairment, including those on hemodialysis. Patients on dialysis may develop orthostatic hypotension; their blood pressure should be closely monitored.

Telmisartan tablets may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Telmisartan tablets may be administered with or without food.
Ondansetron

Ondansetron

Instructions for Use/Handling Ondansetron Orally Disintegrating Tablets

Do not attempt to push ondansetron orally disintegrating tablets, USP through the foil backing. With dry hands, PEEL BACK the foil backing of 1 blister and GENTLY remove the tablet. IMMEDIATELY place the ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet on top of the tongue where it will dissolve in seconds, then swallow with saliva. Administration with liquid is not necessary.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Highly Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage of ondansetron hydrochloride is 24 mg given as three 8-mg tablets administered 30 minutes before the start of single-day highly emetogenic chemotherapy, including cisplatin ≥ 50 mg/m2. Multiday, single-dose administration of a 24 mg dosage has not been studied.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of a 24 mg dosage in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Moderately Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage is one 8-mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet, USP given twice a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with a subsequent dose 8 hours after the first dose. One 8-mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet, USP should be administered twice a day (every 12 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Pediatric Use

For pediatric patients 12 years of age and older, the dosage is the same as for adults. For pediatric patients 4 through 11 years of age, the dosage is one 4-mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet, USP given 3 times a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with subsequent doses 4 and 8 hours after the first dose. One 4-mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet, USP should be administered 3 times a day (every 8 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Radiotherapy, Either Total Body Irradiation, or Single High-Dose Fraction or Daily Fractions to the Abdomen

The recommended oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet, USP given 3 times a day.

For total body irradiation

One 8-mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet, USP should be administered 1 to 2 hours before each fraction of radiotherapy administered each day.

For single high-dose fraction radiotherapy to the abdomen

One 8-mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet, USP should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for 1 to 2 days after completion of radiotherapy.

For daily fractionated radiotherapy to the abdomen

One 8-mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablet, USP should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for each day radiotherapy is given.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of, ondansetron orally disintegrating tablets, USP, in the prevention of radiation-induced nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

The recommended dosage is 16 mg given as two 8-mg ondansetron orally disintegrating tablets, USP 1 hour before induction of anesthesia.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron orally disintegrating tablets, USP in the prevention of postoperative nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh2 score of 10 or greater), clearance is reduced and apparent volume of distribution is increased with a resultant increase in plasma half-life. In such patients, a total daily dose of 8 mg should not be exceeded.
Ondansetron

Ondansetron

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Highly Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage of ondansetron is 24 mg given as three 8 mg tablets administered 30 minutes before the start of single-day highly emetogenic chemotherapy, including cisplatin ≥50 mg/m2. Multiday, single-dose administration of a 24 mg dosage has not been studied.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of a 24 mg dosage in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Moderately Emetogenic Cancer Chemotherapy

The recommended adult oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron tablet given twice-a-day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with a subsequent dose 8 hours after the first dose. One 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered twice-a-day (every 12 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Pediatric Use

For pediatric patients 12 years of age and older, the dosage is the same as for adults. For pediatric patients 4 through 11 years of age, the dosage is one 4 mg ondansetron tablet given 3 times a day. The first dose should be administered 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy, with subsequent doses 4 and 8 hours after the first dose. One 4 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 3 times a day (every 8 hours) for 1 to 2 days after completion of chemotherapy.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated With Radiotherapy, Either Total Body Irradiation, or Single High-Dose Fraction or Daily Fractions to the Abdomen

The recommended oral dosage is one 8 mg ondansetron tablet given 3 times a day.

For total body irradiation, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before each fraction of radiotherapy administered each day.

For single high-dose fraction radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for 1 to 2 days after completion of radiotherapy.

For daily fractionated radiotherapy to the abdomen, one 8 mg ondansetron tablet should be administered 1 to 2 hours before radiotherapy, with subsequent doses every 8 hours after the first dose for each day radiotherapy is given.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron tablets in the prevention of radiation-induced nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population.

Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

The recommended dosage is 16 mg given as two 8 mg ondansetron tablets, 1 hour before induction of anesthesia.

Pediatric Use

There is no experience with the use of ondansetron tablets in the prevention of postoperative nausea and vomiting in pediatric patients.

Geriatric Use

The dosage is the same as for the general population.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Renal Function

The dosage recommendation is the same as for the general population. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients With Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh2 score of 10 or greater), clearance is reduced and apparent volume of distribution is increased with a resultant increase in plasma half-life. In such patients, a total daily dose of 8 mg should not be exceeded.
Nevirapine

Nevirapine

2.1 General Dosing Considerations
• Nevirapine extended-release tablets must be swallowed whole and must not be chewed, crushed, or divided. • Nevirapine extended-release tablets can be taken with or without food.
Pediatric use information is approved for BoehringerIngelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc.’s Viramune XR® (nevirapine) extended-release tablets. However, due to BoehringerIngelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that information.

2.2 Adult Patients

Patients Not Currently Taking Immediate-Release Nevirapine

Patients must initiate therapy with one 200 mg tablet of immediate-release nevirapine daily for the first 14 days in combination with other antiretroviral agents (this lead-in period should be used because it has been found to lessen the frequency of rash), followed by one 400 mg tablet of nevirapine extended-release tablets once daily.

Switching Patients From Immediate-Release Nevirapine to Nevirapine Extended-Release Tablets

Patients already on a regimen of immediate-release nevirapine twice daily in combination with other antiretroviral agents can be switched to nevirapine extended-release tablets 400 mg once daily in combination with other antiretroviral agents without the 14-day lead-in period of immediate-release nevirapine.

2.3 Pediatric Patients

Pediatric use information is approved for BoehringerIngelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc.’s Viramune XR® (nevirapine) extended-release tablets. However, due to BoehringerIngelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc.’s marketing exclusivity rights, this drug product is not labeled with that information.

2.4 Monitoring of Patients

Intensive clinical and laboratory monitoring, including liver enzyme tests, is essential at baseline and during the first 18 weeks of treatment with nevirapine. The optimal frequency of monitoring during this period has not been established. Some experts recommend clinical and laboratory monitoring more often than once per month, and in particular, would include monitoring of liver enzyme tests prior to beginning the 14-day lead-in period with immediate-release nevirapine, prior to initiation of nevirapine extended-release tablets, and at two weeks after initiation of nevirapine extended-release tablets therapy. After the initial 18-week period, frequent clinical and laboratory monitoring should continue throughout nevirapine extended- release tablets treatment [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5)]. In some cases, hepatic injury has progressed despite discontinuation of treatment.

Patients already on a regimen of immediate-release nevirapine twice daily who switch to nevirapine extended-release tablets once daily should continue with their ongoing clinical and laboratory monitoring.

2.5 Dosage Adjustment

Patients with Rash

Discontinue nevirapine if a patient experiences severe rash or any rash accompanied by constitutional findings[seeBOXED WARNING and WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.2). Do not initiate therapy with nevirapine extended-release tablets if a patient experiences mild to moderate rash without constitutional symptoms during the 14-day lead-in period of immediate-release nevirapine until the rash has resolved[see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.2)]. The total duration of the once daily lead-in dosing period should not exceed 28 days at which point an alternative regimen should be sought.

Patients with Hepatic Events

If a clinical (symptomatic) hepatic event occurs, permanently discontinue nevirapine. Do not restart nevirapine after recovery[see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1)].

Patients with Dose Interruption

For patients who interrupt nevirapine extended-release tablets dosing for more than 7 days, restart the recommended lead-in dosing with immediate-release nevirapine, using one 200 mg tablet daily for the first 14 days.

Patients with Renal Impairment

Patients with CrCL greater than or equal to 20 mL per min and not requiring dialysis do not require an adjustment in dosing. The pharmacokinetics of nevirapine have not been evaluated in patients with CrCL less than 20 mL per min. An additional 200 mg dose of immediate-release nevirapine following each dialysis treatment is indicated in patients requiring dialysis. Nevirapine metabolites may accumulate in patients receiving dialysis; however, the clinical significance of this accumulation is not known [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)]. Nevirapine extended-release tablets have not been studied in patients with renal dysfunction.
Bupropion Hydrochloride...

Bupropion Hydrochloride

2.1 General Instructions for Use

To minimize the risk of seizure, increase the dose gradually [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)]. Increases in dose should not exceed 100 mg per day in a 3-day period. Bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP should be swallowed whole and not crushed, divided, or chewed. Bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP may be taken with or without food.

The recommended starting dose is 200 mg per day, given as 100 mg twice daily. After 3 days of dosing, the dose may be increased to 300 mg per day, given as 100 mg 3 times daily, with at least 6 hours between successive doses. Dosing above 300 mg per day may be accomplished using the 75- or 100-mg tablets.

A maximum of 450 mg per day, given in divided doses of not more than 150 mg each, may be considered for patients who show no clinical improvement after several weeks of treatment at 300 mg per day. Administer the 100-mg tablet 4 times daily to not exceed the limit of 150 mg in a single dose.

It is generally agreed that acute episodes of depression require several months or longer of antidepressant drug treatment beyond the response in the acute episode. It is unknown whether the dose of bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP needed for maintenance treatment is identical to the dose that provided an initial response. Periodically reassess the need for maintenance treatment and the appropriate dose for such treatment.

2.2 Dose Adjustment in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In patients with moderate to severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 7 to 15), the maximum dose of bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP is 75 mg per day. In patients with mild hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 5 to 6), consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of dosing [see Use in Specific Populations (8.7), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.3 Dose Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP in patients with renal impairment (Glomerular Filtration Rate <90 mL/min) [see Use in Specific Populations (8.6), Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Switching a Patient to or from a Monoamine Oxidase Inhibitor (MAOI) Antidepressant

At least 14 days should elapse between discontinuation of an MAOI intended to treat depression and initiation of therapy with bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP. Conversely, at least 14 days should be allowed after stopping bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP before starting an MAOI antidepressant [see Contraindications (4), Drug Interactions (7.6)].

2.5 Use of Bupropion Hydrochloride Tablets, USP with Reversible MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP in a patient who is being treated with a reversible MAOI such as linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. Drug interactions can increase the risk of hypertensive reactions. In a patient who requires more urgent treatment of a psychiatric condition, non-pharmacological interventions, including hospitalization, should be considered [see Contraindications (4), Drug Interactions (7.6)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks of hypertensive reactions in a particular patient, bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue.

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with bupropion hydrochloride tablets, USP is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of a drug interaction with such use [see Contraindications (4), Drug Interactions (7.6)].
Azithromycin

Azithromycin

2.1 Adult Patients

[See Indications and Usage (1.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]
Infection* Recommended Dose/Duration of Therapy
Community-acquired pneumonia

Pharyngitis/tonsillitis (second-line therapy)

Skin/skin structure (uncomplicated)

500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5

Acute bacterial exacerbations of chronic obstructive pulmonary disease

500 mg once daily for 3 days

OR

500 mg as a single dose on Day 1, followed by 250 mg once daily on Days 2 through 5

Acute bacterial sinusitis

500 mg once daily for 3 days

Genital ulcer disease (chancroid)

One single 1 gram dose

Non-gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis

One single 1 gram dose

Gonococcal urethritis and cervicitis

One single 2 gram dose

*DUE TO THE INDICATED ORGANISMS [see Indications and Usage (1.1)]

Azithromycin tablets can be taken with or without food.

2.2 Pediatric Patients1
Infection* Recommended Dose/Duration of Therapy
Acute otitis media

30 mg/kg as a single dose or 10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days or 10 mg/kg as a single dose on Day 1 followed by 5 mg/kg/day on Days 2 through 5.

Acute bacterial sinusitis

10 mg/kg once daily for 3 days.

Community-acquired pneumonia

10 mg/kg as a single dose on Day 1 followed by 5 mg/kg once daily on Days 2 through 5.

Pharyngitis/tonsillitis

12 mg/kg once daily for 5 days.

*DUE TO THE INDICATED ORGANISMS [see Indications and Usage (1.2)]

1see dosing tables below for maximum doses evaluated by indication

Azithromycin can be taken with or without food.

PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR OTITIS MEDIA, ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS, AND COMMUNITYACQUIRED PNEUMONIA (Age 6 months and above, [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)])Based on Body Weight
OTITIS MEDIA AND COMMUNITY-ACQUIRED PNEUMONIA: (5-Day Regimen)* Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day Day 1 and 5 mg/kg/day Days 2 to 5. Weight 100 mg/5 mL 200 mg/5 mL Total mL per Treatment Course Total mg per Treatment Course Kg Lbs. Day 1 Days 2-5 Day 1 Days 2-5
5

11

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

1.25 mL; (¼ tsp)

7.5 mL

150 mg

10

22

5 mL; (1 tsp)

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

15 mL

300 mg

20

44

5 mL; (1 tsp)

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

7.5 mL; (1½ tsp)

3.75 mL; (¾ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

10 mL; (2 tsp)

5 mL; (1 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

12.5 mL; (2½ tsp)

6.25 mL; (1¼ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

* Effectiveness of the 3-day or 1-day regimen in pediatric patients with community-acquired pneumonia has not been established.
OTITIS MEDIA AND ACUTE BACTERIAL SINUSITIS: (3-Day Regimen)* Dosing Calculated on 10 mg/kg/day. Weight 100 mg/5 mL 200 mg/5 mL Total mL per Treatment Course Total mg per Treatment Course Kg Lbs. Days 1-3 Days 1-3
5

11

2.5 mL; (1/2 tsp)

7.5 mL

150 mg

10

22

5 mL; (1 tsp)

15 mL

300 mg

20

44

5 mL (1 tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

7.5 mL (1½ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

10 mL (2 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

12.5 mL (2 ½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

*Effectiveness of the 5-day or 1-day regimen in pediatric patients with acute bacterial sinusitis has not been established.
OTITIS MEDIA: (1-Day Regimen) Dosing Calculated on 30 mg/kg as a single dose. Weight 200 mg/5 mL Total mL per Treatment Course Total mg per Treatment Course Kg Lbs. 1-Day Regimen
5

11

3.75 mL;(3/4 tsp)

3.75 mL

150 mg

10

22

7.5 mL;(1½ tsp)

7.5 mL

300 mg

20

44

15 mL;(3 tsp)

15 mL

600 mg

30

66

22.5 mL;(4½ tsp)

22.5 mL

900 mg

40

88

30 mL;(6 tsp)

30 mL

1200 mg

50 and above

110 and above

37.5 mL;(7½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

The safety of re-dosing azithromycin in pediatric patients who vomit after receiving 30 mg/kg as a single dose has not been established. In clinical studies involving 487 patients with acute otitis media given a single 30 mg/kg dose of azithromycin, eight patients who vomited within 30 minutes of dosing were re-dosed at the same total dose.

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis: The recommended dose of azithromycin for children with pharyngitis/tonsillitis is 12 mg/kg once daily for 5 days. (See chart below.)

PEDIATRIC DOSAGE GUIDELINES FOR PHARYNGITIS/TONSILLITIS (Age 2 years and above, [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)])Based on Body Weight
PHARYNGITIS/TONSILLITIS: (5-Day Regimen) Dosing Calculated on 12 mg/kg/day for 5 days. Weight 200 mg/5 mL Total mL per Treatment Course Total mg per Treatment Course Kg Lbs. Day 1-5
8

18

2.5 mL; (½ tsp)

12.5 mL

500 mg

17

37

5 mL; (1 tsp)

25 mL

1000 mg

25

55

7.5 mL; (1½ tsp)

37.5 mL

1500 mg

33

73

10 mL; (2 tsp)

50 mL

2000 mg

40

88

12.5 mL; (2½ tsp)

62.5 mL

2500 mg
Carbamazepine Er

Carbamazepine Er

Carbamazepine suspension in combination with liquid chlorpromazine or thioridazine results in precipitate formation, and, in the case of chlorpromazine, there has been a report of a patient passing an orange rubbery precipitate in the stool following coadministration of the two drugs (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions). Because the extent to which this occurs with other liquid medications is not known, carbamazepine suspension should not be administered simultaneously with other liquid medications or diluents.

Monitoring of blood levels has increased the efficacy and safety of anticonvulsants (see PRECAUTIONS, Laboratory Tests). Dosage should be adjusted to the needs of the individual patient. A low initial daily dosage with a gradual increase is advised. As soon as adequate control is achieved, the dosage may be reduced very gradually to the minimum effective level. Medication should be taken with meals.

Since a given dose of carbamazepine suspension will produce higher peak levels than the same dose given as the tablet, it is recommended to start with low doses (children 6 to 12 years: 1/2 teaspoon q.i.d.) and to increase slowly to avoid unwanted side effects.

Conversion of patients from oral carbamazepine tablets to carbamazepine suspension: Patients should be converted by administering the same number of mg per day in smaller, more frequent doses (i.e. b.i.d. tablets to t.i.d. suspension).

Carbamazepine extended-release is an extended-release formulation for twice-a-day administration. When converting patients from carbamazepine conventional tablets to carbamazepine extended-release, the same total daily mg dose of carbamazepine extended-release should be administered. Carbamazepine extended-release tablets must be swallowed whole and never crushed or chewed. Carbamazepine extended-release tablets should be inspected for chips or cracks. Damaged tablets, or tablets without a release portal, should not be consumed. Carbamazepine extended-release tablet coating is not absorbed and is excreted in the feces; these coatings may be noticeable in the stool.

Epilepsy (SEE INDICATIONS AND USAGE)

Adults and children over 12 years of age - Initial: Either 200 mg b.i.d. for tablets and extended-release tablets, or 1 teaspoon q.i.d. for suspension (400 mg/day). Increase at weekly intervals by adding up to 200 mg/day using a b.i.d. regimen of carbamazepine extended-release or a t.i.d. or q.i.d. regimen of the other formulations until the optimal response is obtained. Dosage generally should not exceed 1000 mg daily in children 12 to 15 years of age, and 1200 mg daily in patients above 15 years of age. Doses up to 1600 mg daily have been used in adults in rare instances. Maintenance: Adjust dosage to the minimum effective level, usually 800 to 1200 mg daily.

Children 6 to 12 years of age - Initial: Either 100 mg b.i.d. for tablets or extended-release tablets, or 1/2 teaspoon q.i.d. for suspension (200 mg/day). Increase at weekly intervals by adding up to 100 mg/day using a b.i.d. regimen of carbamazepine extended-release or a t.i.d. or q.i.d. regimen of the other formulations until the optimal response is obtained. Dosage generally should not exceed 1000 mg daily. Maintenance: Adjust dosage to the minimum effective level, usually 400 to 800 mg daily.

Children under 6 years of age - Initial: 10 to 20 mg/kg/day b.i.d. or t.i.d. as tablets, or q.i.d. as suspension. Increase weekly to achieve optimal clinical response administered t.i.d. or q.i.d. Maintenance: Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 35 mg/kg. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the therapeutic range. No recommendation regarding the safety of carbamazepine for use at doses above 35 mg/kg/24 hours can be made.

Combination Therapy: Carbamazepine may be used alone or with other anticonvulsants. When added to existing anticonvulsant therapy, the drug should be added gradually while the other anticonvulsants are maintained or gradually decreased, except phenytoin, which may have to be increased (see PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions, and Pregnancy Category D).

Trigeminal Neuralgia (SEE INDICATIONS AND USAGE)

Initial: On the first day, either 100 mg b.i.d. for tablets or extended-release tablets, or 1/2 teaspoon q.i.d. for suspension, for a total daily dose of 200 mg. This daily dose may be increased by up to 200 mg/day using increments of 100 mg every 12 hours for tablets or extended-release tablets, or 50 mg (1/2 teaspoon) q.i.d. for suspension, only as needed to achieve freedom from pain. Do not exceed 1200 mg daily. Maintenance: Control of pain can be maintained in most patients with 400 to 800 mg daily. However, some patients may be maintained on as little as 200 mg daily, while others may require as much as 1200 mg daily. At least once every 3 months throughout the treatment period, attempts should be made to reduce the dose to the minimum effective level or even to discontinue the drug.
Dosage Information Initial Dose Subsequent Dose Maximum Daily Dose Indication Tablet* Extended-Release Tablets Suspension Tablet* Extended-Release Tablets Suspension Tablet* Extended-Release Tablets Suspension Epilepsy Under 6 yr 10-20 mg/kg/dayb.i.d. or t.i.d. 10-20 mg/kg/dayq.i.d. Increase weekly to achieve optimal clinical response, t.i.d. or q.i.d. Increase weekly to achieve optimal clinical response, t.i.d. or q.i.d. 35 mg/kg/24 hr (see Dosage and Administration section above) 35 mg/kg/24 hr (see Dosage and Administration section above) 6-12 yr 100 mg b.i.d.(200 mg/day) 100 mg b.i.d.(200 mg/day) ½ tsp q.i.d.(200 mg/day) Add up to 100 mg/day at weekly intervals, t.i.d. or q.i.d. Add 100 mg/day at weekly intervals, b.i.d. Add up to 1 tsp (100 mg)/day at weekly intervals, t.i.d. or q.i.d. 1000 mg/24 hr Over 12 yr 200 mg b.i.d.(400 mg/day) 200 mg b.i.d.(400 mg/day) 1 tsp q.i.d.(400 mg/day) Add up to 200 mg/day at weekly intervals, t.i.d. or q.i.d. Add up to 200 mg/day at weekly intervals, b.i.d. Add up to 2 tsp (200 mg)/day at weekly intervals, t.i.d. or q.i.d. 1000 mg/24 hr (12-15 yr)1200 mg/24 hr (>15 yr)1600 mg/24 hr (adults, in rare instances) Trigeminal Neuralgia 100 mg b.i.d.(200 mg/day) 100 mg b.i.d.(200 mg/day) ½ tsp q.i.d.(200 mg/day) Add up to 200 mg/day in increments of 100 mg every 12 hr Add up to 200 mg/day in increments of 100 mg every 12 hr Add up to 2 tsp (200 mg)/day in increments of 50 mg (½ tsp) q.i.d. 1200 mg/24 hr
*Tablet = Chewable or conventional tablets
Piperacillin And Tazoba...

Piperacillin And Tazobactam

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.1     Adult Patients

The usual total daily dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for adults is 3.375 g every six hours totaling 13.5 g (12.0 g piperacillin/1.5 g tazobactam). The usual duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment is from 7 to 10 days.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be administered by intravenous infusion over 30 minutes.

2.2     Nosocomial Pneumonia

Initial presumptive treatment of patients with nosocomial pneumonia should start with piperacillin and tazobactam for injection at a dosage of 4.5 g every six hours plus an aminoglycoside, totaling 18.0 g (16.0 g piperacillin/2.0 g tazobactam). The recommended duration of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection treatment for nosocomial pneumonia is 7 to 14 days. Treatment with the aminoglycoside should be continued in patients from whom P. aeruginosa is isolated.

2.3     Renal Impairment

In patients with renal impairment (creatinine clearance ≤ 40 mL/min) and dialysis patients (hemodialysis and CAPD), the intravenous dose of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be reduced to the degree of actual renal function impairment. The recommended daily doses of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection for patients with renal impairment are as follows:

Table 1: Recommended Dosing of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection in Patients with Normal Renal Function and Renal Impairment (As total grams piperacillin/tazobactam)
Renal Function
(creatinine clearance,

All Indications

Nosocomial

mL/min)

(except nosocomial pneumonia)

Pneumonia

>40 mL/min

3.375 q6h

4.5 q6h

20-40 mL/min*

2.25 q6h

3.375 q6h

<20 mL/min*

2.25 q8h

2.25 q6h

Hemodialysis**

2.25 q12h

2.25 q8h

CAPD

2.25 q12h

2.25 q8h

*Creatinine clearance for patients not receiving hemodialysis**0.75 g (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each hemodialysis session on hemodialysis days

For patients on hemodialysis, the maximum dose is 2.25 g every twelve hours for all indications other than nosocomial pneumonia and 2.25 g every eight hours for nosocomial pneumonia. Since hemodialysis removes 30% to 40% of the administered dose, an additional dose of 0.75 g piperacillin and tazobactam for injection (0.67 g piperacillin/0.08 g tazobactam) should be administered following each dialysis period on hemodialysis days. No additional dosage of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is necessary for CAPD patients.

2.4     Pediatric Patients

For children with appendicitis and/or peritonitis 9 months of age or older, weighing up to 40 kg, and with normal renal function, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage is 100 mg piperacillin/12.5 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours. For pediatric patients between 2 months and 9 months of age, the recommended piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage based on pharmacokinetic modeling, is 80 mg piperacillin/10 mg tazobactam per kilogram of body weight, every 8 hours [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. Pediatric patients weighing over 40 kg and with normal renal function should receive the adult dose. It has not been determined how to adjust piperacillin and tazobactam for injection dosage in pediatric patients with renal impairment.

2.5     Reconstitution and Dilution of Powder Formulations

Single Dose Vials

Reconstitute piperacillin and tazobactam for injection vials with a compatible reconstitution diluent from the list provided below.

2.25 g, 3.375 g, and 4.5 g piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should be reconstituted with 10 mL, 15 mL, and 20 mL, respectively. Swirl until dissolved.

Compatible Reconstitution Diluents for Single Dose Vials0.9% Sodium chloride for injectionSterile water for injection‡ Dextrose 5%Bacteriostatic saline/parabensBacteriostatic water/parabensBacteriostatic saline/benzyl alcoholBacteriostatic water/benzyl alcohol

Reconstituted piperacillin and tazobactam for injection solution should be further diluted (recommended volume per dose of 50 mL to 150 mL) in a compatible intravenous solution listed below. Administer by infusion over a period of at least 30 minutes. During the infusion it is desirable to discontinue the primary infusion solution.

Compatible Intravenous Solutions for Pharmacy Bulk Package Bottles and Single Dose Vials0.9% Sodium chloride for injectionSterile water for injection‡ Dextran 6% in salineDextrose 5%

LACTATED RINGER’S SOLUTION IS NOT COMPATIBILE WITH PIPERACILLIN AND TAZOBACTAM FOR INJECTION.‡ Maximum recommended volume per dose of sterile water for injection is 50 mL.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be mixed with other drugs in a syringe or infusion bottle since compatibility has not been established.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not chemically stable in solutions that contain only sodium bicarbonate and solutions that significantly alter the pH.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection should not be added to blood products or albumin hydrolysates.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter or discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Stability of Piperacillin and Tazobactam for Injection Powder Formulations Following Reconstitution

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection reconstituted from single vials is stable in glass and plastic containers (plastic syringes, I.V. bags and tubing) when used with compatible diluents. Discard unused portions after storage for 24 hours at room temperature or after storage for 48 hours at refrigerated temperature 2°C to 8°C (36°F to 46°F).

Single dose vials should be used immediately after reconstitution. Discard any unused portion after 24 hours if stored at room temperature 20°C to 25°C (68°F to 77°F), or after 48 hours if stored at refrigerated temperature 2°C to 8°C (36°F to 46°F). Vials should not be frozen after reconstitution.

Stability studies in the I.V. bags have demonstrated chemical stability (potency, pH of reconstituted solution and clarity of solution) for up to 24 hours at room temperature and up to one week at refrigerated temperature. Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection contains no preservatives. Appropriate consideration of aseptic technique should be used.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection reconstituted from single vials can be used in ambulatory intravenous infusion pumps. Stability of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection in an ambulatory intravenous infusion pump has been demonstrated for a period of 12 hours at room temperature. Each dose was reconstituted and diluted to a volume of 37.5 mL or 25 mL. One-day supplies of dosing solution were aseptically transferred into the medication reservoir (I.V. bags or cartridge). The reservoir was fitted to a preprogrammed ambulatory intravenous infusion pump per the manufacturer's instructions. Stability of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not affected when administered using an ambulatory intravenous infusion pump.

2.6     Compatibility with Aminoglycosides

Due to the in vitro inactivation of aminoglycosides by piperacillin, Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides are recommended for separate administration. Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection and aminoglycosides should be reconstituted, diluted, and administered separately when concomitant therapy with aminoglycosides is indicated [see Drug Interactions (7.1)].

In circumstances where co-administration via Y-site is necessary, piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is compatible for simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion only with the following aminoglycosides under the following conditions:

Table 2: Compatibility with Aminoglycosides

Aminoglycoside

Piperacillin and TazobactamDose(grams)

Piperacillin and Tazobactam Diluent Volume (mL)

Aminoglycoside Concentration Range a (mg/mL)

Acceptable Diluents

Amikacin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

1.75 – 7.5

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

Gentamicin

2.25, 3.375, 4.5

50, 100, 150

0.7 – 3.32

0.9% sodium chloride or 5% dextrose

aThe concentration ranges in Table 2 are based on administration of the aminoglycoside in divided doses (10-15 mg/kg/day in two daily doses for amikacin and 3-5 mg/kg/day in three daily doses for gentamicin). Administration of amikacin or gentamicin in a single daily dose or in doses exceeding those stated above via Y-site with piperacillin and tazobactam has not been evaluated. See package insert for each aminoglycoside for complete Dosage and Administration instructions.

Only the concentration and diluents for amikacin or gentamicin with the dosages of piperacillin and tazobactam for injection listed above have been established as compatible for coadministration via Y-site infusion. Simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion in any manner other than listed above may result in inactivation of the aminoglycoside by piperacillin and tazobactam for injection.

Piperacillin and tazobactam for injection is not compatible with tobramycin for simultaneous coadministration via Y-site infusion. Compatibility of piperacillin and tazobactam with other aminoglycosides has not been established.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.
Methylphenidate Hydroch...

Methylphenidate Hydrochloride

Dosage should be individualized according to the needs and responses of the patient.

Adults

Tablets: Administer in divided doses 2 or 3 times daily, preferably 30 to 45 minutes before meals. Average dosage is 20 to 30 mg daily. Some patients may require 40 to 60 mg daily. In others, 10 to 15 mg daily will be adequate. Patients who are unable to sleep if medication is taken late in the day should take the last dose before 6 p.m.

Sustained-Release Tablets: Methylphenidate hydrochloride sustained-release tablets have a duration of action of approximately 8 hours. Therefore, methylphenidate hydrochloride sustained-release tablets may be used in place of methylphenidate hydrochloride tablets when the 8-hour dosage of methylphenidate hydrochloride sustained-release corresponds to the titrated 8-hour dosage of Methylphenidate hydrochloride . Methylphenidate hydrochloride sustained-release tablets must be swallowed whole and never crushed or chewed.

Children (6 years and over)

Methylphenidate hydrochloride should be initiated in small doses, with gradual weekly increments. Daily dosage above 60 mg is not recommended.

If improvement is not observed after appropriate dosage adjustment over a 1-month period, the drug should be discontinued.

Tablets: Start with 5 mg twice daily (before breakfast and lunch) with gradual increments of 5 to 10 mg weekly.

Sustained-Release Tablets: Methylphenidate hydrochloride sustained-release tablets have a duration of action of approximately 8 hours. Therefore, methylphenidate hydrochloride sustained-release tablets may be used in place of methylphenidate hydrochloride tablets when the 8-hour dosage of methylphenidate hydrochloride sustained-release corresponds to the titrated 8-hour dosage of methylphenidate hydrochloride. Methylphenidate hydrochloride sustained-release tablets must be swallowed whole and never crushed or chewed.

If paradoxical aggravation of symptoms or other adverse effects occur, reduce dosage, or, if necessary, discontinue the drug.

Methylphenidate hydrochloride should be periodically discontinued to assess the child’s condition. Improvement may be sustained when the drug is either temporarily or permanently discontinued.

Drug treatment should not and need not be indefinite and usually may be discontinued after puberty.
Aristospan

Aristospan

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see PRECAUTIONS)

General

The initial dosage of Aristospan (triamcinolone hexacetonide injectable suspension, USP) may vary from 2 to 48 mg per day depending on the specific disease entity being treated. However, in certain overwhelming, acute, life-threatening situations, administration in dosages exceeding the usual dosages may be justified and may be in multiples of the oral dosages.

It Should Be Emphasized That Dosage Requirements Are Variable and Must Be Individualized on the Basis of the Disease Under Treatment and the Response of the Patient. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. Situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient’s individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment. In this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of the corticosteroid for a period of time consistent with the patient’s condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

In pediatric patients, the initial dose of triamcinolone may vary depending on the specific disease entity being treated. The range of initial doses is 0.11 to 1.6 mg/kg/day in three or four divided doses (3.2 to 48 mg/m2bsa/day).

For the purpose of comparison, the following is the equivalent milligram dosage of the various glucocorticoids:

Cortisone, 25

Triamcinolone, 4

Hydrocortisone, 20

Paramethasone, 2

Prednisolone, 5

Betamethasone, 0.75

Prednisone, 5

Dexamethasone, 0.75

Methylprednisolone, 4

These dose relationships apply only to oral or intravenous administration of these compounds. When these substances or their derivatives are injected intramuscularly or into joint spaces, their relative properties may be greatly altered.

Directions for Use

Strict aseptic administration technique is mandatory.

Topical ethylchloride spray may be used locally before injection.

The syringe should be gently agitated to achieve uniform suspension before use. Since this product has been designed for ease of administration, a small bore needle (not smaller than 23 gauge) may be used.

Dilution

Aristospan suspension may also be mixed with 1% or 2% Lidocaine Hydrochloride, using the formulations which do not contain parabens. Similar local anesthetics may also be used. Diluents containing methylparaben, propylparaben, phenol, etc. should be avoided since these compounds may cause flocculation of the steroid. These dilutions will retain full potency for one week, but care should be exercised to avoid contamination of the vial’s contents and the dilutions should be discarded after 7 days.

Aristospan suspension 5 mg/mL may also be diluted, if desired, with Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection USP, (5% and 10% Dextrose), Sodium Chloride Injection USP, or Sterile Water for Injection USP.

The optimum dilution, i.e., 1:1, 1:2, 1:4, should be determined by the nature of the lesion, its size, the depth of injection, the volume needed, and location of the lesion. In general, more superficial injections should be performed with greater dilution. Certain conditions, such as keloids, require a less dilute suspension such as 5 mg/mL, with variation in dose and dilution as dictated by the condition of the individual patient. Subsequent dosage, dilution, and frequency of injections are best judged by the clinical response.

Intralesional or Sublesional

Average Dose

Up to 0.5 mg per square inch of affected skin injected intralesionally or sublesionally. The frequency of subsequent injections is best determined by the clinical response. If desired, the vial may be diluted as indicated under Directions for Use.

A lesser initial dosage range of Aristospan may produce the desired effect when the drug is administered to provide a localized concentration. The site of the injection and the volume of the injection should be carefully considered when Aristospan is administered for this purpose.
Aristospan

Aristospan

NOTE: CONTAINS BENZYL ALCOHOL (see PRECAUTIONS)

General

The initial dosage of Aristospan (triamcinolone hexacetonide injectable suspension, USP) may vary from 2 to 48 mg per day depending on the specific disease entity being treated. However, in certain overwhelming, acute, life-threatening situations, administration in dosages exceeding the usual dosages may be justified and may be in multiples of the oral dosages.

It Should Be Emphasized That Dosage Requirements are Variable and Must Be Individualized on the Basis of the Disease Under Treatment and the Response of the Patient. After a favorable response is noted, the proper maintenance dosage should be determined by decreasing the initial drug dosage in small decrements at appropriate time intervals until the lowest dosage which will maintain an adequate clinical response is reached. Situations which may make dosage adjustments necessary are changes in clinical status secondary to remissions or exacerbations in the disease process, the patient’s individual drug responsiveness, and the effect of patient exposure to stressful situations not directly related to the disease entity under treatment. In this latter situation it may be necessary to increase the dosage of the corticosteroid for a period of time consistent with the patient’s condition. If after long-term therapy the drug is to be stopped, it is recommended that it be withdrawn gradually rather than abruptly.

In pediatric patients, the initial dose of triamcinolone may vary depending on the specific disease entity being treated. The range of initial doses is 0.11 to 1.6 mg/kg/day in three or four divided doses (3.2 to 48 mg/m2bsa/day).

For the purpose of comparison, the following is the equivalent milligram dosage of the various glucocorticoids:

Cortisone, 25

Triamcinolone, 4

Hydrocortisone, 20

Paramethasone, 2

Prednisolone, 5

Betamethasone, 0.75

Prednisone, 5

Dexamethasone, 0.75

Methylprednisolone, 4

These dose relationships apply only to oral or intravenous administration of these compounds. When these substances or their derivatives are injected intramuscularly or into joint spaces, their relative properties may be greatly altered.

Directions for Use

Strict aseptic administration technique is mandatory.

Topical ethylchloride spray may be used locally before injection.

The syringe should be gently agitated to achieve uniform suspension before use. Since this product has been designed for ease of administration, a small bore needle (not smaller than 23 gauge) may be used.

Dilution

Aristospan suspension may be mixed with 1% or 2% Lidocaine Hydrochloride, using the formulations which do not contain parabens. Similar local anesthetics may also be used. Diluents containing methylparaben, propylparaben, phenol, etc., should be avoided since these compounds may cause flocculation of the steroid. These dilutions will retain full potency for one week, but care should be exercised to avoid contamination of the vial’s contents and the dilutions should be discarded after 7 days.

Intra-articular

Average dose - 2 to 20 mg (0.1 mL to 1 mL)

The dose depends on the size of the joint to be injected, the degree of inflammation, and the amount of fluid present. In general, large joints (such as knee, hip, shoulder) require 10 to 20 mg. For small joints (such as interphalangeal, metacarpophalangeal), 2 to 6 mg, may be employed. When the amount of synovial fluid is increased, aspiration may be performed before administering Aristospan. Subsequent dosage and frequency of injection can best be judged by clinical response.

The usual frequency of injection into a single joint is every three or four weeks, and injection more frequently than that is generally not advisable. To avoid possible joint destruction from repeated use of intra-articular corticosteroids, injection should be as infrequent as possible, consistent with adequate patient care. Attention should be paid to avoiding deposition of drug along the needle path which might produce atrophy.
Entacapone

Entacapone

The recommended dose of entacapone tablets is one 200 mg tablet administered concomitantly with each levodopa and carbidopa dose to a maximum of 8 times daily (200 mg x 8 = 1,600 mg per day). Clinical experience with daily doses above 1,600 mg is limited.

Entacapone tablets should always be administered in association with levodopa and carbidopa. Entacapone has no antiparkinsonian effect of its own.

In clinical trials, the majority of patients required a decrease in daily levodopa dose if their daily dose of levodopa had been greater than or equal to 800 mg or if patients had moderate or severe dyskinesias before beginning treatment.

To optimize an individual patient’s response, reductions in daily levodopa dose or extending the interval between doses may be necessary. In clinical trials, the average reduction in daily levodopa dose was about 25% in those patients requiring a levodopa dose reduction. (More than 58% of patients with levodopa doses above 800 mg daily required such a reduction.)

Entacapone tablets can be combined with both the immediate and sustained-release formulations of levodopa and carbidopa.

Entacapone tablets may be taken with or without food (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Patients With Impaired Hepatic Function

Patients with hepatic impairment should be treated with caution. The AUC and Cmax of entacapone approximately doubled in patients with documented liver disease, compared to controls. However, these studies were conducted with single-dose entacapone without levodopa and dopa decarboxylase inhibitor coadministration, and therefore the effects of liver disease on the kinetics of chronically administered entacapone have not been evaluated (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics of Entacapone).

Withdrawing Patients from Entacapone Tablets

Rapid withdrawal or abrupt reduction in the entacapone tablets dose could lead to emergence of signs and symptoms of Parkinson’s Disease (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies), and may lead to Hyperpyrexia and Confusion, a symptom complex resembling the neuroleptic malignant syndrome (see PRECAUTIONS: Other Events Reported With Dopaminergic Therapy). This syndrome should be considered in the differential diagnosis for any patient who develops a high fever or severe rigidity. If a decision is made to discontinue treatment with entacapone tablets, patients should be monitored closely and other dopaminergic treatments should be adjusted as needed. Although tapering entacapone tablets has not been systematically evaluated, it seems prudent to withdraw patients slowly if the decision to discontinue treatment is made.
Omidria

Omidria

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules are for oral administration once daily in the morning.

Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules may be swallowed as whole capsules or alternatively may be administered by sprinkling the capsule contents on a small amount of applesauce (see specific instructions below). Dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules and/or their contents should not be crushed, chewed, or divided.

The capsules may be carefully opened and the beads sprinkled over a spoonful of applesauce. The mixture of drug and applesauce should be consumed immediately in its entirety. The drug and applesauce mixture should not be stored for future use.

Dosage should be individualized according to the needs and responses of the patient.

2.1 Patients New to Methylphenidate

The recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for patients who are not currently taking dexmethylphenidate or racemic methylphenidate, or for patients who are on stimulants other than methylphenidate, is 5 mg/day for pediatric patients and 10 mg/day for adult patients.

Dosage may be adjusted in 5 mg increments for pediatric patients and in 10 mg increments for adult patients. In general, dosage adjustments may proceed at approximately weekly intervals. The patient should be observed for a sufficient duration at a given dose to ensure that a maximal benefit has been achieved before a dose increase is considered. In dose-response (fixed-dose) studies (pediatric from 10 to 30 mg/day and adult from 20 to 40 mg/day), all doses were effective vs. placebo. There was no clear finding, however, of greater average benefits for the higher doses compared to the lower doses. Adverse events and discontinuations, however, were dose-related. Doses above 30 mg/day in pediatrics and 40 mg/day in adults have not been studied and are not recommended.

2.2 Patients Currently Using Methylphenidate

For patients currently using methylphenidate, the recommended starting dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules is half the total daily dose of racemic methylphenidate. Patients currently using dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride immediate-release tablets may be switched to the same daily dose of dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules.

2.3 Maintenance/Extended Treatment

There is no body of evidence available from controlled trials to indicate how long the patient with ADHD should be treated with dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules. It is generally agreed, however, that pharmacological treatment of ADHD may be needed for extended periods. Nevertheless, the physician who elects to use dexmethylphenidate hydrochloride extended-release capsules for extended periods in patients with ADHD should periodically reevaluate the long-term usefulness of the drug for the individual patient with periods off medication to assess the patient’s functioning without pharmacotherapy. Improvement may be sustained when the drug is either temporarily or permanently discontinued.

2.4 Dose Reduction and Discontinuation

If paradoxical aggravation of symptoms or other adverse events occur, the dosage should be reduced, or, if necessary, the drug should be discontinued.

If improvement is not observed after appropriate dosage adjustment over a 1-month period, the drug should be discontinued.
Fluoxetine Hydrochlorid...

Fluoxetine Hydrochloride

2.1 Recommendations for All Patients

Pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets should be taken once daily with the first main meal.

Pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets are available as a 30 mg pioglitazone plus 2 mg glimepiride or a 30 mg pioglitazone plus 4 mg glimepiride tablet. If therapy with a combination tablet containing pioglitazone and glimepiride is considered appropriate the recommended starting dose is:
• 30 mg/2 mg or 30 mg/4 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients inadequately controlled on glimepiride monotherapy: 30 mg/2 mg or 30 mg/4 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients inadequately controlled on pioglitazone monotherapy: 30 mg/2 mg once daily and gradually titrated, as needed, after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response and tolerability, • for patients who are changing from combination therapy of pioglitazone plus glimepiride as separate tablets: Pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets should be taken at doses that are as close as possible to the dose of pioglitazone and glimepiride already being taken, • for patients currently on a different sulfonylurea monotherapy or switching from combination therapy of pioglitazone plus a different sulfonylurea (e.g., glyburide, glipizide, chlorpropamide, tolbutamide, acetohexamide): 30 mg/2 mg once daily and adjusted after assessing adequacy of therapeutic response. Observe for hypoglycemia for one to two weeks due to the potential overlapping drug effect. • for patients with systolic dysfunction, the lowest approved dose of pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets should be prescribed only after titration from 15 mg to 30 mg of pioglitazone has been safely tolerated.
After initiation of pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets or with dose increase, monitor patients carefully for hypoglycemia and adverse reactions related to fluid retention such as weight gain, edema, and signs and symptoms of congestive heart failure [see BOXED WARNING and WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.7)].

Liver tests (serum alanine and aspartate aminotransferases, alkaline phosphatase, and total bilirubin) should be obtained prior to initiating pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets. Routine periodic monitoring of liver tests during treatment with pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets are not recommended in patients without liver disease. Patients who have liver test abnormalities prior to initiation of pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets or who are found to have abnormal liver tests while taking pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets should be managed as described under Warnings and Precautions [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.5) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.2 Concomitant Use with an Insulin Secretagogue or Insulin

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets and an insulin secretagogue, the dose of the insulin secretagogue should be reduced.

If hypoglycemia occurs in a patient coadministered pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets and insulin, the dose of insulin should be decreased by 10% to 25%. Further adjustments to the insulin dose should be individualized based on glycemic response.

2.3 Concomitant Use with Strong CYP2C8 Inhibitors

Coadministration of pioglitazone and gemfibrozil, a strong CYP2C8 inhibitor, increases pioglitazone exposure approximately 3-fold. Therefore, the maximum recommended dose of pioglitazone is 15 mg daily when used in combination with gemfibrozil or other strong CYP2C8 inhibitors. If gemfibrozil or other CYP2C8 inhibitors need to co-administered, patients should switch to individual components of pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets because the minimum dose of pioglitazone in pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets exceeds 15 mg [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.4 Concomitant Use with Colesevelam

When colesevelam is coadministered with glimepiride, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glimepiride is reduced. Therefore, pioglitazone hydrochloride and glimepiride tablets should be administered at least four hours prior to colesevelam [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.6) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].
Gkhair Anti-dandruff

Gkhair Anti-dandruff

2.1 General Dosing Recommendations
• Ropinirole extended-release tablets are taken once daily, with or without food [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3) ]. • Tablets must be swallowed whole and must not be chewed, crushed, or divided. • If a significant interruption in therapy with ropinirole extended-release tablets has occurred, retitration of therapy may be warranted.
2.2 Dosing for Parkinson’s Disease

The starting dose is 2 mg taken once daily for 1 to 2 weeks, followed by increases of 2 mg/day at 1-week or longer intervals as appropriate, based on therapeutic response and tolerability. The maximum recommended dose of ropinirole extended-release tablets is 24 mg/day.

In clinical trials, dosage was initiated at 2 mg/day and gradually titrated based on individual patient therapeutic response and tolerability. Doses greater than 24 mg/day have not been studied in clinical trials. Patients should be assessed for therapeutic response and tolerability at a minimal interval of 1 week or longer after each dose increment. Monitor patients during dose titration because too rapid a rate of titration may lead to dose selection that may not provide additional benefit, but that may increase the risk of adverse reactions [seeCLINICAL STUDIES (14.2)]. Due to the flexible dosing design used in clinical trials, specific dose response information could not be determined.

Ropinirole extended-release tablets should be discontinued gradually over a 7–day period.

Renal Impairment

No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with moderate renal impairment (creatinine clearance of 30 to 50 mL/min). The recommended initial dose of ropinirole extended-release tablets for patients with end-stage renal disease on hemodialysis is 2 mg once daily. Further dose escalations should be based on tolerability and need for efficacy. The recommended maximum total daily dose is 18 mg/day in patients receiving regular dialysis. Supplemental doses after dialysis are not required. The use of ropinirole extended-release tablets in patients with severe renal impairment without regular dialysis has not been studied.

2.3 Switching From Immediate-Release Ropinirole Tablets to Ropinirole Extended-Release Tablets

Patients may be switched directly from immediate-release ropinirole to ropinirole extended-release tablets. The initial dose of ropinirole extended-release tablets should most closely match the total daily dose of the immediate-release formulation of ropinirole hydrochloride, as shown in Table 1.
Table 1. Conversion from Immediate-Release Ropinirole to Ropinirole Extended-Release Tablets
Immediate-Release Ropinirole Tablets Total Daily Dose (mg)

Ropinirole Extended-Release Tablets

Total Daily Dose (mg)

0.75 to 2.25

2

3 to 4.5

4

6

6

7.5 to 9

8

12

12

15

16

18

18

21

20

24

24

Following conversion to ropinirole extended-release tablets, the dose may be adjusted depending on therapeutic response and tolerability [seeDOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.2)].

2.4 Effect of Gastrointestinal Transit Time on Medication Release

Ropinirole extended-release tablets are designed to release medication over a 24-hour period. If rapid gastrointestinal transit occurs, there may be risk of incomplete release of medication and medication residue being passed in the stool.
Voriconazole

Voriconazole

2.1 Instructions for Use in All Patients

Voriconazole for injection requires reconstitution to 10 mg/mL and subsequent dilution to 5 mg/mL or less prior to administration as an infusion, at a maximum rate of 3 mg/kg per hour over 1 to 2 hours.

Do not administer as an IV bolus injection.

2.2 Use of Voriconazole for Injection With Other Parenteral Drug Products

Blood products and concentrated electrolytes

Voriconazole for injection must not be infused concomitantly with any blood product or short-term infusion of concentrated electrolytes, even if the two infusions are running in separate intravenous lines (or cannulas).

Electrolyte disturbances such as hypokalemia, hypomagnesemia and hypocalcemia should be corrected prior to initiation of and during voriconazole therapy [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.8)].

Intravenous solutions containing (non-concentrated) electrolytes

Voriconazole for injection can be infused at the same time as other intravenous solutions containing (non-concentrated) electrolytes, but must be infused through a separate line.

Total parenteral nutrition (TPN)

Voriconazole for injection can be infused at the same time as total parenteral nutrition, but must be infused in a separate line. If infused through a multiple-lumen catheter, TPN needs to be administered using a different port from the one used for voriconazole for injection.

2.3 Recommended Dosing in Adults

Invasive aspergillosis and serious fungal infections due to Fusarium spp. and Scedosporium apiospermum

See Table 1. Therapy must be initiated with the specified loading dose regimen of intravenous voriconazole on Day 1 followed by the recommended maintenance dose regimen. Intravenous treatment should be continued for at least 7 days. Once the patient has clinically improved and can tolerate medication given by mouth, the oral tablet form or oral suspension form of voriconazole may be utilized. The recommended oral maintenance dose of 200 mg achieves a voriconazole exposure similar to 3 mg/kg IV; a 300 mg oral dose achieves an exposure similar to 4 mg/kg IV. Switching between the intravenous and oral formulations is appropriate because of the high bioavailability of the oral formulation in adults [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12)].

Candidemia in non-neutropenic patients and other deep tissue Candida infections

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for at least 14 days following resolution of symptoms or following last positive culture, whichever is longer.

Esophageal Candidiasis

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for a minimum of 14 days and for at least 7 days following resolution of symptoms.
Table 1. Recommended Dosing Regimen Loading dose Maintenance Dose*,† Infection IV IV Oral‡ * Increase dose when voriconazole is co-administered with phenytoin or efavirenz (7); Decrease dose in patients with hepatic impairment (2.7) † In healthy volunteer studies, the 200 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUCτ) similar to a 3 mg/kg IV q12h dose; the 300 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUCτ) similar to a 4 mg/kg IV q12h dose [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12)]. ‡ Adult patients who weigh less than 40 kg should receive half of the oral maintenance dose. § In a clinical study of invasive aspergillosis, the median duration of intravenous voriconazole therapy was 10 days (range 2-85 days). The median duration of oral voraconazole therapy was 76 days (range 2 to 232 days) [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]. ¶ In clinical trials, patients with candidemia received 3 mg/kg IV q12h as primary therapy, while patients with other deep tissue Candida infections received 4 mg/kg q12h as salvage therapy. Appropriate dose should be based on the severity and nature of the infection. # Not evaluated in patients with esophageal candidiasis.
Invasive Aspergillosis§

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

Candidemia in nonneutropenic patients and other deep tissue Candida infections

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

3-4 mg/kg q12h¶

200 mg q12h

Esophageal Candidiasis

#

#

200 mg q12h

Scedosporiosis and Fusariosis

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

2.4 Dosage Adjustment

If patient response is inadequate, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 200 mg every 12 hours (similar to 3 mg/kg IV q12h) to 300 mg every 12 hours (similar to 4 mg/kg IV q12h). For adult patients weighing less than 40 kg, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 100 mg every 12 hours to 150 mg every 12 hours. If patient is unable to tolerate 300 mg orally every 12 hours, reduce the oral maintenance dose by 50 mg steps to a minimum of 200 mg every 12 hours (or to 100 mg every 12 hours for adult patients weighing less than 40 kg).

If patient is unable to tolerate 4 mg/kg IV q12h, reduce the intravenous maintenance dose to 3 mg/kg q12h.

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be increased when co-administered with phenytoin or efavirenz [see Drug Interactions (7)].

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be reduced in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, Child-Pugh Class A and B [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.7)]. There are no PK data to allow for dosage adjustment recommendations in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class C).

Duration of therapy should be based on the severity of the patient’s underlying disease, recovery from immunosuppression, and clinical response.

2.5 Intravenous Administration

Reconstitution

The powder is reconstituted with 19 mL of Water For Injection to obtain an extractable volume of 20 mL of clear concentrate containing 10 mg/mL of voriconazole. It is recommended that a standard 20 mL (non-automated) syringe be used to ensure that the exact amount (19 mL) of Water for Injection is dispensed. Discard the vial if a vacuum does not pull the diluent into the vial. Shake the vial until all the powder is dissolved.

Dilution

Voriconazole for injection must be infused over 1 to 2 hours, at a concentration of 5 mg/mL or less. Therefore, the required volume of the 10 mg/mL voriconazole for injection concentrate should be further diluted as follows (appropriate diluents listed below):
1. Calculate the volume of 10 mg/mL voriconazole for injection concentrate required based on the patient’s weight (see Table 2). 2. In order to allow the required volume of voriconazole for injection concentrate to be added, withdraw and discard at least an equal volume of diluent from the infusion bag or bottle to be used. The volume of diluent remaining in the bag or bottle should be such that when the 10 mg/mL voriconazole for injection concentrate is added, the final concentration is not less than 0.5 mg/mL nor greater than 5 mg/mL. 3. Using a suitable size syringe and aseptic technique, withdraw the required volume of voriconazole for injection concentrate from the appropriate number of vials and add to the infusion bag or bottle. Discard Partially Used Vials.
The final voriconazole for injection solution must be infused over 1 to 2 hours at a maximum rate of 3 mg/kg per hour.
Table 2. Required Volumes of 10 mg/mL Voriconazole for Injection Concentrate Volume of Voriconazole for Injection Concentrate (10 mg/mL) required for: Body Weight (kg) 3 mg/kg dose (number of vials) 4 mg/kg dose (number of vials) 6 mg/kg dose (number of vials)
30

9 mL (1)

12 mL (1)

18 mL (1)

35

10.5 mL (1)

14 mL (1)

21 mL (2)

40

12 mL (1)

16 mL (1)

24 mL (2)

45

13.5 mL (1)

18 mL (1)

27 mL (2)

50

15 mL (1)

20 mL (1)

30 mL (2)

55

16.5 mL (1)

22 mL (2)

33 mL (2)

60

18 mL (1)

24 mL (2)

36 mL (2)

65

19.5 mL (1)

26 mL (2)

39 mL (2)

70

21 mL (2)

28 mL (2)

42 mL (3)

75

22.5 mL (2)

30 mL (2)

45 mL (3)

80

24 mL (2)

32 mL (2)

48 mL (3)

85

25.5 mL (2)

34 mL (2)

51 mL (3)

90

27 mL (2)

36 mL (2)

54 mL (3)

95

28.5 mL (2)

38 mL (2)

57 mL (3)

100

30 mL (2)

40 mL (2)

60 mL (3)

Voriconazole for injection is a single dose unpreserved sterile lyophile. Therefore, from a microbiological point of view, once reconstituted, the product should be used immediately. If not used immediately, in-use storage times and conditions prior to use are the responsibility of the user and should not be longer than 24 hours at 2° to 8°C (36° to 46°F). This medicinal product is for single use only and any unused solution should be discarded. Only clear solutions without particles should be used.

The reconstituted solution can be diluted with:

9 mg/mL (0.9%) Sodium Chloride USP

Lactated Ringers USP

5% Dextrose and Lactated Ringers USP

5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride USP

5% Dextrose USP

5% Dextrose and 20 mEq Potassium Chloride USP

0.45% Sodium Chloride USP

5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride USP

The compatibility of voriconazole for injection with diluents other than those described above is unknown (see Incompatibilities below).

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Incompatibilities

Voriconazole for injection must not be diluted with 4.2% Sodium Bicarbonate Infusion. The mildly alkaline nature of this diluent caused slight degradation of voriconazole after 24 hours storage at room temperature. Although refrigerated storage is recommended following reconstitution, use of this diluent is not recommended as a precautionary measure. Compatibility with other concentrations is unknown.

2.7 Use in Patients With Hepatic Impairment

In the clinical program, patients were included who had baseline liver function tests (ALT, AST) up to 5 times the upper limit of normal. No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with this degree of abnormal liver function, but continued monitoring of liver function tests for further elevations is recommended [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.9)].

It is recommended that the standard loading dose regimens be used but that the maintenance dose be halved in patients with mild to moderate hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class A and B) [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

Voriconazole has not been studied in patients with severe hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class C) or in patients with chronic hepatitis B or chronic hepatitis C disease. Voriconazole has been associated with elevations in liver function tests and clinical signs of liver damage, such as jaundice, and should only be used in patients with severe hepatic impairment if the benefit outweighs the potential risk. Patients with hepatic insufficiency must be carefully monitored for drug toxicity.

2.8 Use in Patients With Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of orally administered voriconazole are not significantly affected by renal impairment. Therefore, no adjustment is necessary for oral dosing in patients with mild to severe renal impairment [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3 )].

In patients with moderate or severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min), accumulation of the intravenous vehicle, SBECD, occurs. Oral voriconazole should be administered to these patients, unless an assessment of the benefit/risk to the patient justifies the use of intravenous voriconazole. Serum creatinine levels should be closely monitored in these patients, and, if increases occur, consideration should be given to changing to oral voriconazole therapy [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.10)].

Voriconazole is hemodialyzed with clearance of 121 mL/min. The intravenous vehicle, SBECD, is hemodialyzed with clearance of 55 mL/min. A 4-hour hemodialysis session does not remove a sufficient amount of voriconazole to warrant dose adjustment.
Calcitonin Salmon Spray

Calcitonin Salmon Spray

2.1     Basic Dosing Information

The recommended dose of calcitonin-salmon nasal spray is 1 spray (200 International Units) per day administered intranasally, alternating nostrils daily.

2.2     Priming (Activation) of Pump

Unopened calcitonin-salmon nasal spray should be stored in the refrigerator. Before using the first dose of calcitonin-salmon nasal spray, the patient should wait until it has reached room temperature. To prime the pump before it is used for the first time, the bottle should be held upright and the two white side arms of the pump depressed toward the bottle, repeat until a full spray is released. The pump is primed once the first full spray is emitted. To administer, the nozzle should first be carefully placed into the nostril while the patient’s head is in the upright position, then the pump should be firmly depressed toward the bottle. The pump should not be primed before each daily dose.

2.3     Recommendations for Calcium and Vitamin D Supplementation

Patients who use calcitonin-salmon nasal spray should receive adequate calcium (at least 1000 mg elemental calcium per day) and vitamin D (at least 400 International Units per day).
Imipramine Hydrochlorid...

Imipramine Hydrochloride

Depression

Lower dosages are recommended for elderly patients and adolescents. Lower dosages are also recommended for outpatients as compared to hospitalized patients who will be under close supervision. Dosage should be initiated at a low level and increased gradually, noting carefully the clinical response and any evidence of intolerance. Following remission, maintenance medication may be required for a longer period of time, at the lowest dose that will maintain remission.

Usual Adult Dose

Hospitalized Patients

Initially, 100 mg/day in divided doses gradually increased to 200 mg/day as required. If no response after two weeks, increase to 250 to 300 mg/day.

Outpatients

Initially, 75 mg/day increased to 150 mg/day. Dosages over 200 mg/day are not recommended. Maintenance, 50 to 150 mg/day.

Adolescent and Geriatric Patients

Initially, 30 to 40 mg/day; it is generally not necessary to exceed 100 mg/day.

Childhood Enuresis

Initially, an oral dose of 25 mg/day should be tried in children aged 6 and older. Medication should be given one hour before bedtime. If a satisfactory response does not occur within one week, increase the dose to 50 mg nightly in children under 12 years; children over 12 may receive up to 75 mg nightly. A daily dose greater than 75 mg does not enhance efficacy and tends to increase side effects. Evidence suggests that in early night bedwetters, the drug is more effective given earlier and in divided amounts, i.e., 25 mg in mid-afternoon, repeated at bedtime. Consideration should be given to instituting a drug-free period following an adequate therapeutic trial with a favorable response. Dosage should be tapered off gradually rather than abruptly discontinued; this may reduce the tendency to relapse. Children who relapse when the drug is discontinued do not always respond to a subsequent course of treatment.

A dose of 2.5 mg/kg/day should not be exceeded. ECG changes of unknown significance have been reported in pediatric patients with doses twice this amount.

The safety and effectiveness of imipramine hydrochloride as temporary adjunctive therapy for nocturnal enuresis in children less than 6 years of age has not been established.
Testosterone Cypionate

Testosterone Cypionate

Bacteriologic studies to determine the causative organisms and their susceptibility to oxacillin should always be performed. Duration of therapy varies with the type of severity of infection as well as the overall condition of the patient, therefore it should be determined by the clinical and bacteriological response of the patient. In severe staphylococcal infections, therapy with oxacillin should be continued for at least 14 days. Therapy should be continued for at least 48 hours after the patient has become afebrile, asymptomatic, and cultures are negative. Treatment of endocarditis and osteomyelitis may require a longer duration of therapy.

With intravenous administration, particularly in elderly patients, care should be taken because of the possibility of thrombophlebitis.
RECOMMENDED DOSAGES FOR OXACILLIN FOR INJECTION, USP Drug Adults Infants and Children<40 kg (88 lbs) OtherRecommendations
Oxacillin

250 to 500 mg IM or IV every 4 to 6 hours (mild to moderate infections)

50 mg/kg/day IM or IV in equally divided doses every 6 hours (mild to moderate infections)

1 gram IM or IV every 4 to 6 hours (severe infections)

100 mg/kg/day IM or IV in equally divided doses every 4 to 6 hours (severe infections)

Premature and Neonates 25 mg/kg/day IM or IV

Directions for use

For Intramuscular Use

Use Sterile Water for Injection, USP. Add 5.4 mL to the 1 gram vial and 10.6 mL to the 2 gram vial. Shake well until a clear solution is obtained. After reconstitution, vials will contain 250 mg of active drug per 1.5 mL of solution. The reconstituted solution is stable for 3 days at 70° F or for one week under refrigeration (40° F).

For Direct Intravenous Use

Use Sterile Water for Injection, USP or Sodium Chloride Injection, USP. Add 10 mL to the 1 gram vial and 20 mL to the 2 gram vial. Withdraw the entire contents and administer slowly over a period of approximately 10 minutes.

For Administration by Intravenous Drip

Reconstitute as directed above (For Direct Intravenous Use) prior to diluting with Intravenous Solution.
STABILITY PERIODS FOR OXACILLIN FOR INJECTION, USP Concentration mg/mL Sterile Waterfor Injection, USP 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP M/6MolarSodium Lactate Solution 5% Dextrose inWater 5% Dextrose in 0.45% Sodium Chloride 10% Invert Sugar Injection, USP Lactated Ringers Solution
ROOM TEMPERATURE (25°C)

10 to 100

4 Days

4 Days

10 to 30

24 Hrs

24 Hrs

0.5 to 2

6 Hrs

6 Hrs

6 Hrs

REFRIGERATION (4°C)

10 to 100

7 Days

7 Days

10 to 30

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

4 Days

FROZEN (-15°C)

50 to 100

30 Days

250/1.5 mL

30 Days

100

30 Days

10 to 100

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

30 Days

Stability studies on oxacillin sodium at concentrations of 0.5 mg/mL and 2 mg/mL in various intravenous solutions listed below indicate the drug will lose less than 10% activity at room temperature (70° F) during a 6-hour period.

IV Solution

5% Dextrose in Normal Saline

10% D-Fructose in Water

10% D-Fructose in Normal Saline

Lactated Potassic Saline Injection

10% Invert Sugar in Normal Saline

10% Invert Sugar Plus 0.3% Potassium Chloride in Water

Travert 10% Electrolyte #1

Travert 10% Electrolyte #2

Travert 10% Electrolyte #3

Only those solutions listed above should be used for the intravenous infusion of oxacillin sodium. The concentration of the antibiotic should fall within the range specified. The drug concentration and the rate and volume of the infusion should be adjusted so that the total dose of oxacillin is administered before the drug loses its stability in the solution in use.

If another agent is used in conjunction with oxacillin therapy, it should not be physically mixed with oxacillin but should be administered separately.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit.

Do not add supplementary medication to oxacillin for injection, USP.
Benztropine Mesylate

Benztropine Mesylate

One or two drops instilled into the conjunctival sac(s) every four to six hours. During the initial 24 to 48 hours, the dosage may be increased to one or two drops every two (2) hours. Frequency should be decreased gradually as warranted by improvement in clinical signs. Care should be taken not to discontinue therapy prematurely.

Not more than 20 mL should be prescribed initially and the prescription should not be refilled without further evaluation as outlined in PRECAUTIONS above.
Quinapril Hydrochloride...

Quinapril Hydrochloridehydrochlorothiazide

2.1Usual Dosage

Treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) should be initiated before the patient’s planned quit day, while the patient is still smoking, because it takes approximately 1 week of treatment to achieve steady-state blood levels of bupropion. The patient should set a “target quit date” within the first 2 weeks of treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR).

Dosing

To minimize the risk of seizure:
• Begin dosing with one 150-mg tablet per day for 3 days. • Increase dose to 300 mg/day given as one 150-mg tablet twice each day with an interval of at least 8 hours between each dose. • Do not exceed 300 mg/day.
Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) should be swallowed whole and not crushed, divided, or chewed, as this may lead to an increased risk of adverse effects including seizures [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.3)].

Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) may be taken with or without food [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.2 Duration of Treatment

Treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) should be continued for 7 to 12 weeks. If the patient has not quit smoking after 7 to 12 weeks, it is unlikely that he or she will quit during that attempt so treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) should probably be discontinued and the treatment plan reassessed. The goal of therapy with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) is complete abstinence.

Discuss discontinuing treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) after 12 weeks if the patient feels ready but consider whether the patient may benefit from ongoing treatment. Patients who successfully quit after 12 weeks of treatment but do not feel ready to discontinue treatment should be considered for ongoing therapy with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR); longer treatment should be guided by the relative benefits and risks for individual patients.

It is important that patients continue to receive counseling and support throughout treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) and for a period of time thereafter.

2.3 Individualization of Therapy

Patients are more likely to quit smoking and remain abstinent if they are seen frequently and receive support from their physicians or other healthcare professionals. It is important to ensure that patients read the instructions provided to them and have their questions answered. Physicians should review the patient’s overall smoking cessation program that includes treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR). Patients should be advised of the importance of participating in the behavioral interventions, counseling, and/or support services to be used in conjunction with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) [see MEDICATION GUIDE].

Patients who fail to quit smoking during an attempt may benefit from interventions to improve their chances for success on subsequent attempts. Patients who are unsuccessful should be evaluated to determine why they failed. A new quit attempt should be encouraged when factors that contributed to failure can be eliminated or reduced, and conditions are more favorable.

2.4 Maintenance

Tobacco dependence is a chronic condition. Some patients may need on-going treatment. Whether to continue treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) for periods longer than 12 weeks for smoking cessation must be determined for individual patients.

2.5Combination Treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) and a Nicotine Transdermal System (NTS)

Combination treatment with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) and NTS may be prescribed for smoking cessation. The prescriber should review the complete prescribing information for both Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) and NTS before using combination treatment [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14)]. Monitoring for treatment-emergent hypertension in patients treated with the combination of Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) and NTS is recommended.

2.6Dose Adjustment for Patients with Hepatic Impairment

In patients with moderate to severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 7 to 15), the maximum dose should not exceed 150 mg every other day. In patients with mild hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score: 5 to 6), consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of dosing [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.7), CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.7Dose Adjustment for Patients with Renal Impairment

Consider reducing the dose and/or frequency of Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) in patients with renal impairment (Glomerular Filtration Rate less than 90 mL/min) [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.8 Use of Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) with Reversible MAOIs Such as Linezolid or Methylene Blue

Do not start Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) in a patient who is being treated with a reversible MAOI such as linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. Drug interactions can increase the risk of hypertensive reactions [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4), DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.6)].

In some cases, a patient already receiving therapy with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) may require urgent treatment with linezolid or intravenous methylene blue. If acceptable alternatives to linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are not available and the potential benefits of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue treatment are judged to outweigh the risks or hypertensive reactions in a particular patient, Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) should be stopped promptly, and linezolid or intravenous methylene blue can be administered. The patient should be monitored for 2 weeks or until 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue, whichever comes first. Therapy with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) may be resumed 24 hours after the last dose of linezolid or intravenous methylene blue.

The risk of administering methylene blue by non-intravenous routes (such as oral tablets or by local injection) or in intravenous doses much lower than 1 mg/kg with Bupropion Hydrochloride Extended-Release Tablets, USP (SR) is unclear. The clinician should, nevertheless, be aware of the possibility of a drug interaction with such use [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4) and DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.6)].
Azacitidine

Azacitidine

2.1 First Treatment Cycle

The recommended starting dose for the first treatment cycle, for all patients regardless of baseline hematology laboratory values, is 75 mg/m2 subcutaneously or intravenously, daily for 7 days. Patients should be premedicated for nausea and vomiting.

Complete blood counts, liver chemistries and serum creatinine should be obtained prior to first dose.

2.2 Subsequent Treatment Cycles

Cycles should be repeated every 4 weeks. The dose may be increased to 100 mg/m2 if no beneficial effect is seen after 2 treatment cycles and if no toxicity other than nausea and vomiting has occurred. It is recommended that patients be treated for a minimum of 4 to 6 cycles. However, complete or partial response may require additional treatment cycles. Treatment may be continued as long as the patient continues to benefit.

Patients should be monitored for hematologic response and renal toxicities [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)], and dosage delay or reduction as described below may be necessary.

2.3 Dosage Adjustment Based on Hematology Laboratory Values
• For patients with baseline (start of treatment) WBC ≥3.0 x10 9/L, ANC ≥1.5 x10 9/L, and platelets ≥75.0 x10 9/L, adjust the dose as follows, based on nadir counts for any given cycle:
Nadir Counts

% Dose in the Next Course

ANC (x109/L) <0.50.5 - 1.5>1.5

Platelets (x109/L) <25.025.0 - 50.0>50.0

50%67%100%
• For patients whose baseline counts are WBC <3.0 x10 9/L, ANC<1.5 x10 9/L, or platelets <75.0 x10 9/L, dose adjustments should be based on nadir counts and bone marrow biopsy cellularity at the time of the nadir as noted below, unless there is clear improvement in differentiation (percentage of mature granulocytes is higher and ANC is higher than at onset of that course) at the time of the next cycle, in which case the dose of the current treatment should be continued.
WBC or Platelet Nadir% decrease in countsfrom baseline

Bone MarrowBiopsy Cellularity at Time of Nadir (%)

30 - 60

15 - 30

<15

% Dose in the Next Course

50 - 75

100

50

33

>75

75

50

33

If a nadir as defined in the table above has occurred, the next course of treatment should be given 28 days after the start of the preceding course, provided that both the WBC and the platelet counts are >25% above the nadir and rising. If a >25% increase above the nadir is not seen by day 28, counts should be reassessed every 7 days. If a 25% increase is not seen by day 42, then the patient should be treated with 50% of the scheduled dose.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment Based on Serum Electrolytes and Renal Toxicity

If unexplained reductions in serum bicarbonate levels to <20 mEq/L occur, the dosage should be reduced by 50% on the next course. Similarly, if unexplained elevations of BUN or serum creatinine occur, the next cycle should be delayed until values return to normal or baseline and the dose should be reduced by 50% on the next treatment course [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

2.5 Use in Geriatric Patients

Azacitidine and its metabolites are known to be substantially excreted by the kidney, and the risk of toxic reactions to this drug may be greater in patients with impaired renal function. Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3) and Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

2.6 Preparation of Azacitidine for Injection

Azacitidine for Injection is a cytotoxic drug and, as with other potentially toxic compounds, caution should be exercised when handling and preparing Azacitidine for Injection suspensions [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16)].

If reconstituted Azacitidine for Injection comes into contact with the skin, immediately and thoroughly wash with soap and water. If it comes into contact with mucous membranes, flush thoroughly with water.

The Azacitidine for Injection vial is single-use and does not contain any preservatives. Unused portions of each vial should be discarded properly [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16)]. Do not save any unused portions for later administration.

2.7 Instructions for Subcutaneous Administration

Azacitidine for Injection should be reconstituted aseptically with 4 mL sterile water for injection. The diluent should be injected slowly into the vial. Vigorously shake or roll the vial until a uniform suspension is achieved. The suspension will be cloudy. The resulting suspension will contain azacitidine 25 mg/mL. Do not filter the suspension after reconstitution. Doing so could remove the active substance.

Preparation for Immediate Subcutaneous Administration: Doses greater than 4 mL should be divided equally into 2 syringes. The product may be held at room temperature for up to 1 hour, but must be administered within 1 hour after reconstitution.

Preparation for Delayed Subcutaneous Administration: The reconstituted product may be kept in the vial or drawn into a syringe. Doses greater than 4 mL should be divided equally into 2 syringes. The product must be refrigerated immediately. When Azacitidine for Injection is reconstituted using water for injection that has not been refrigerated, the reconstituted product may be held under refrigerated conditions (2ºC - 8ºC, 36ºF - 46ºF) for up to 8 hours. When Azacitidine for Injection is reconstituted using refrigerated (2ºC - 8ºC, 36ºF - 46ºF) water for injection, the reconstituted product may be stored under refrigerated conditions (2ºC - 8ºC, 36ºF - 46ºF) for up to 22 hours. After removal from refrigerated conditions, the suspension may be allowed to equilibrate to room temperature for up to 30 minutes prior to administration.

Subcutaneous Administration

To provide a homogeneous suspension, the contents of the dosing syringe must be re-suspended immediately prior to administration. To re-suspend, vigorously roll the syringe between the palms until a uniform, cloudy suspension is achieved.

Azacitidine for Injection suspension is administered subcutaneously. Doses greater than 4 mL should be divided equally into 2 syringes and injected into 2 separate sites. Rotate sites for each injection (thigh, abdomen, or upper arm). New injections should be given at least one inch from an old site and never into areas where the site is tender, bruised, red, or hard.

Suspension Stability: Azacitidine for Injection reconstituted with non-refrigerated water for injection for subcutaneous administration may be stored for up to 1 hour at 25°C (77°F) or for up to 8 hours between 2°C and 8°C (36°F and 46°F); when reconstituted with refrigerated (2ºC - 8ºC, 36ºF - 46ºF) water for injection, it may be stored for 22 hours between 2°C and 8°C (36°F and 46°F).

2.8 Instructions for Intravenous Administration

Reconstitute the appropriate number of Azacitidine for Injection vials to achieve the desired dose. Reconstitute each vial with 10 mL sterile water for injection. Vigorously shake or roll the vial until all solids are dissolved. The resulting solution will contain azacitidine 10 mg/mL. The solution should be clear. Parenteral drug product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Withdraw the required amount of Azacitidine for Injection solution to deliver the desired dose and inject into a 50 - 100 mL infusion bag of either 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection or Lactated Ringer's Injection.

Intravenous Solution Incompatibility

Azacitidine for Injection is incompatible with 5% Dextrose solutions, Hespan, or solutions that contain bicarbonate. These solutions have the potential to increase the rate of degradation of Azacitidine for Injection and should therefore be avoided.

Intravenous Administration

Azacitidine for Injection solution is administered intravenously. Administer the total dose over a period of 10 - 40 minutes. The administration must be completed within 1 hour of reconstitution of the Azacitidine for Injection vial.

Solution Stability: Azacitidine for Injection reconstituted for intravenous administration may be stored at 25°C (77°F), but administration must be completed within 1 hour of reconstitution.
Carbidopa

Carbidopa

Individual tablets should not be fractionated and only one tablet should be administered at each dosing interval.

Generally speaking, carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets should be used as a substitute for patients already stabilized on equivalent doses of carbidopa-levodopa and entacapone. However, some patients who have been stabilized on a given dose of carbidopa-levodopa may be treated with carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets if a decision has been made to add entacapone (see below).

The optimum daily dosage of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets must be determined by careful titration in each patient. Carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets are available in six strengths, each in a 1:4 ratio of carbidopa to levodopa and combined with 200 mg of entacapone in a standard release formulation (carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets containing 12.5 mg of carbidopa, 50 mg of levodopa and 200 mg of entacapone; carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets containing 18.75 mg of carbidopa, 75 mg of levodopa and 200 mg of entacapone; carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets containing 25 mg of carbidopa, 100 mg of levodopa and 200 mg of entacapone; carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets containing 31.25 mg of carbidopa, 125 mg of levodopa and 200 mg of entacapone; carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets containing 37.5 mg of carbidopa, 150 mg of levodopa and 200 mg of entacapone; and carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets containing 50 mg of carbidopa, 200 mg of levodopa and 200 mg of entacapone).

Therapy should be individualized and adjusted according to the desired therapeutic response.

Studies show that peripheral dopa decarboxylase is saturated by carbidopa at approximately 70 mg to 100 mg a day. Patients receiving less than this amount of carbidopa are more likely to experience nausea and vomiting.

Clinical experience with daily doses above 1,600 mg of entacapone is limited. It is recommended that no more than one carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablet be taken at each dosing administration.

Thus the maximum recommended daily dose of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets containing 50 mg, 75 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg and 150 mg of levodopa, defined by the maximum daily dose of entacapone, is eight tablets per day. Because there is limited experience with total daily doses of carbidopa greater than 300 mg, the maximum recommended daily dose of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets containing 200 mg of levodopa is six tablets per day.

How to transfer patients taking carbidopa-levodopa preparations and entacapone tablets to carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets

There is no experience in transferring patients currently treated with formulations of carbidopa-levodopa other than immediate-release carbidopa-levodopa with a 1:4 ratio (controlled-release formulations, or standard-release presentations with a 1:10 ratio of carbidopa-levodopa) and entacapone to carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets.

Patients who are currently treated with entacapone 200 mg tablet with each dose of standard-release carbidopa-levodopa, can be directly switched to the corresponding strength of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablet containing the same amounts of levodopa and carbidopa. For example, patients receiving one tablet of standard-release carbidopa-levodopa 25 mg/100 mg and one tablet of entacapone 200 mg at each administration can be switched to a single carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablet (containing 25 mg of carbidopa, 100 mg of levodopa and 200 mg of entacapone).

How to transfer patients not currently treated with entacapone tablets from carbidopa-levodopa to carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets

In patients with Parkinson’s disease who experience the signs and symptoms of end-of-dose “wearing-off” on their current standard-release carbidopa-levodopa treatment, clinical experience shows that patients with a history of moderate or severe dyskinesias or taking more than 600 mg of levodopa per day are likely to require a reduction in daily levodopa dose when entacapone is added to their treatment. Since dose adjustment of the individual components is impossible with fixed-dose products, it is recommended that patients first be titrated individually with a carbidopa-levodopa product (ratio 1:4) and an entacapone product, and then transferred to a corresponding dose of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablet once the patient’s status has stabilized.

In patients who take a total daily levodopa dose up to 600 mg, and who do not have dyskinesias, an attempt can be made to transfer to the corresponding daily dose of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablet. Even in these patients, a reduction of carbidopa-levodopa or entacapone may be necessary however, the provider is reminded that this may not be possible with carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablet. Since entacapone prolongs and enhances the effects of levodopa, therapy should be individualized and adjusted if necessary according to the desired therapeutic response.

Maintenance of Carbidopa, Levodopa and Entacapone Tablets Treatment

Therapy should be individualized and adjusted for each patient according to the desired therapeutic response.

When less levodopa is required, the total daily dosage of carbidopa-levodopa should be reduced by either decreasing the strength of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets at each administration or by decreasing the frequency of administration by extending the time between doses.

When more levodopa is required, the next higher strength of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablet should be taken and/or the frequency of doses should be increased, up to a maximum of 8 times daily of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets containing 50 mg, 75 mg, 100 mg, 125 mg, and 150 mg of levodopa, and maximum of 6 times daily of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets, containing 200 mg of levodopa.

Addition of Other Antiparkinsonian Medications

Standard drugs for Parkinson’s disease may be used concomitantly while carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets are being administered, although dosage adjustments may be required.

Interruption of Therapy

Sporadic cases of a symptom complex resembling Neuroleptic Malignant Syndrome (NMS) have been associated with dose reductions and withdrawal of levodopa preparations. Patients should be observed carefully if abrupt reduction or discontinuation of carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets is required, especially if the patient is receiving neuroleptics. (See WARNINGS.)

If general anesthesia is required, carbidopa, levodopa and entacapone tablets may be continued as long as the patient is permitted to take fluids and medication by mouth. If therapy is interrupted temporarily, the patient should be observed for symptoms resembling NMS, and the usual daily dosage may be administered as soon as the patient is able to take oral medication.

Special Populations

Patients With Impaired Hepatic Function

Patients with hepatic impairment should be treated with caution. The AUC and Cmax of entacapone approximately doubled in patients with documented liver disease, compared to controls. However, these studies were conducted with single-dose entacapone without levodopa and dopa decarboxylase inhibitor coadministration, and therefore the effects of liver disease on the kinetics of chronically administered entacapone have not been evaluated (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics of Entacapone).
Azacitidine

Azacitidine

2.1 First Treatment Cycle

The recommended starting dose for the first treatment cycle, for all patients regardless of baseline hematology laboratory values, is 75 mg/m2 subcutaneously or intravenously, daily for 7 days. Patients should be premedicated for nausea and vomiting.

Complete blood counts, liver chemistries and serum creatinine should be obtained prior to first dose.

2.2 Subsequent Treatment Cycles

Cycles should be repeated every 4 weeks. The dose may be increased to 100 mg/m2 if no beneficial effect is seen after 2 treatment cycles and if no toxicity other than nausea and vomiting has occurred. It is recommended that patients be treated for a minimum of 4 to 6 cycles. However, complete or partial response may require additional treatment cycles. Treatment may be continued as long as the patient continues to benefit.

Patients should be monitored for hematologic response and renal toxicities [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)], and dosage delay or reduction as described below may be necessary.

2.3 Dosage Adjustment Based on Hematology Laboratory Values
• For patients with baseline (start of treatment) WBC ≥3.0 x10 9/L, ANC ≥1.5 x10 9/L, and platelets ≥75.0 x10 9/L, adjust the dose as follows, based on nadir counts for any given cycle:
Nadir Counts

% Dose in the Next Course

ANC (x109/L) <0.50.5 - 1.5>1.5

Platelets (x109/L) <25.025.0 - 50.0>50.0

50%67%100%
• For patients whose baseline counts are WBC <3.0 x10 9/L, ANC<1.5 x10 9/L, or platelets <75.0 x10 9/L, dose adjustments should be based on nadir counts and bone marrow biopsy cellularity at the time of the nadir as noted below, unless there is clear improvement in differentiation (percentage of mature granulocytes is higher and ANC is higher than at onset of that course) at the time of the next cycle, in which case the dose of the current treatment should be continued.
WBC or Platelet Nadir% decrease in countsfrom baseline

Bone MarrowBiopsy Cellularity at Time of Nadir (%)

30 - 60

15 - 30

<15

% Dose in the Next Course

50 - 75

100

50

33

>75

75

50

33

If a nadir as defined in the table above has occurred, the next course of treatment should be given 28 days after the start of the preceding course, provided that both the WBC and the platelet counts are >25% above the nadir and rising. If a >25% increase above the nadir is not seen by day 28, counts should be reassessed every 7 days. If a 25% increase is not seen by day 42, then the patient should be treated with 50% of the scheduled dose.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment Based on Serum Electrolytes and Renal Toxicity

If unexplained reductions in serum bicarbonate levels to <20 mEq/L occur, the dosage should be reduced by 50% on the next course. Similarly, if unexplained elevations of BUN or serum creatinine occur, the next cycle should be delayed until values return to normal or baseline and the dose should be reduced by 50% on the next treatment course [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3)].

2.5 Use in Geriatric Patients

Azacitidine and its metabolites are known to be substantially excreted by the kidney, and the risk of toxic reactions to this drug may be greater in patients with impaired renal function. Because elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, care should be taken in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function [see Warnings and Precautions (5.3) and Use in Specific Populations (8.5)].

2.6 Preparation of Azacitidine for Injection

Azacitidine for Injection is a cytotoxic drug and, as with other potentially toxic compounds, caution should be exercised when handling and preparing Azacitidine for Injection suspensions [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16)].

If reconstituted Azacitidine for Injection comes into contact with the skin, immediately and thoroughly wash with soap and water. If it comes into contact with mucous membranes, flush thoroughly with water.

The Azacitidine for Injection vial is single-use and does not contain any preservatives. Unused portions of each vial should be discarded properly [see How Supplied/Storage and Handling (16)]. Do not save any unused portions for later administration.

2.7 Instructions for Subcutaneous Administration

Azacitidine for Injection should be reconstituted aseptically with 4 mL sterile water for injection. The diluent should be injected slowly into the vial. Vigorously shake or roll the vial until a uniform suspension is achieved. The suspension will be cloudy. The resulting suspension will contain azacitidine 25 mg/mL. Do not filter the suspension after reconstitution. Doing so could remove the active substance.

Preparation for Immediate Subcutaneous Administration: Doses greater than 4 mL should be divided equally into 2 syringes. The product may be held at room temperature for up to 1 hour, but must be administered within 1 hour after reconstitution.

Preparation for Delayed Subcutaneous Administration: The reconstituted product may be kept in the vial or drawn into a syringe. Doses greater than 4 mL should be divided equally into 2 syringes. The product must be refrigerated immediately. When Azacitidine for Injection is reconstituted using water for injection that has not been refrigerated, the reconstituted product may be held under refrigerated conditions (2ºC - 8ºC, 36ºF - 46ºF) for up to 8 hours. When Azacitidine for Injection is reconstituted using refrigerated (2ºC - 8ºC, 36ºF - 46ºF) water for injection, the reconstituted product may be stored under refrigerated conditions (2ºC - 8ºC, 36ºF - 46ºF) for up to 22 hours. After removal from refrigerated conditions, the suspension may be allowed to equilibrate to room temperature for up to 30 minutes prior to administration.

Subcutaneous Administration

To provide a homogeneous suspension, the contents of the dosing syringe must be re-suspended immediately prior to administration. To re-suspend, vigorously roll the syringe between the palms until a uniform, cloudy suspension is achieved.

Azacitidine for Injection suspension is administered subcutaneously. Doses greater than 4 mL should be divided equally into 2 syringes and injected into 2 separate sites. Rotate sites for each injection (thigh, abdomen, or upper arm). New injections should be given at least one inch from an old site and never into areas where the site is tender, bruised, red, or hard.

Suspension Stability: Azacitidine for Injection reconstituted with non-refrigerated water for injection for subcutaneous administration may be stored for up to 1 hour at 25°C (77°F) or for up to 8 hours between 2°C and 8°C (36°F and 46°F); when reconstituted with refrigerated (2ºC - 8ºC, 36ºF - 46ºF) water for injection, it may be stored for 22 hours between 2°C and 8°C (36°F and 46°F).

2.8 Instructions for Intravenous Administration

Reconstitute the appropriate number of Azacitidine for Injection vials to achieve the desired dose. Reconstitute each vial with 10 mL sterile water for injection. Vigorously shake or roll the vial until all solids are dissolved. The resulting solution will contain azacitidine 10 mg/mL. The solution should be clear. Parenteral drug product should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

Withdraw the required amount of Azacitidine for Injection solution to deliver the desired dose and inject into a 50 - 100 mL infusion bag of either 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection or Lactated Ringer's Injection.

Intravenous Solution Incompatibility

Azacitidine for Injection is incompatible with 5% Dextrose solutions, Hespan, or solutions that contain bicarbonate. These solutions have the potential to increase the rate of degradation of Azacitidine for Injection and should therefore be avoided.

Intravenous Administration

Azacitidine for Injection solution is administered intravenously. Administer the total dose over a period of 10 - 40 minutes. The administration must be completed within 1 hour of reconstitution of the Azacitidine for Injection vial.

Solution Stability: Azacitidine for Injection reconstituted for intravenous administration may be stored at 25°C (77°F), but administration must be completed within 1 hour of reconstitution.
Desloratadine

Desloratadine

Desloratadine tablets may be taken without regard to meals.

2.1 Adults and Adolescents 12 Years of Age and Over

The recommended dose of desloratadine tablets is one 5-mg tablet once daily.

2.5 Adults with Hepatic or Renal Impairment

In adult patients with liver or renal impairment, a starting dose of one 5-mg tablet every other day is recommended based on pharmacokinetic data. Dosing recommendation for children with liver or renal impairment cannot be made due to lack of data [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].
Valsartan

Valsartan

2.1     Adult Hypertension

The recommended starting dose of valsartan is 80 mg or 160 mg once daily when used as monotherapy in patients who are not volume-depleted. Patients requiring greater reductions may be started at the higher dose. Valsartan may be used over a dose range of 80 mg to 320 mg daily, administered once a day.

The antihypertensive effect is substantially present within 2 weeks and maximal reduction is generally attained after 4 weeks. If additional antihypertensive effect is required over the starting dose range, the dose may be increased to a maximum of 320 mg or a diuretic may be added. Addition of a diuretic has a greater effect than dose increases beyond 80 mg.

No initial dosage adjustment is required for elderly patients, for patients with mild or moderate renal impairment, or for patients with mild or moderate liver insufficiency. Care should be exercised with dosing of valsartan in patients with hepatic or severe renal impairment.

Valsartan may be administered with other antihypertensive agents.

Valsartan may be administered with or without food.

2.2     Pediatric Hypertension 6 to 16 Years of Age

For children who can swallow tablets, the usual recommended starting dose is 1.3 mg/kg once daily (up to 40 mg total). The dosage should be adjusted according to blood pressure response. Doses higher than 2.7 mg/kg (up to 160 mg) once daily have not been studied in pediatric patients 6 to 16 years old.

For children who cannot swallow tablets, or children for whom the calculated dosage (mg/kg) does not correspond to the available tablet strengths of valsartan, the use of a suspension is recommended. Follow the suspension preparation instructions below (see Preparation of Suspension) to administer valsartan as a suspension. When the suspension is replaced by a tablet, the dose of valsartan may have to be increased. The exposure to valsartan with the suspension is 1.6 times greater than with the tablet.

No data are available in pediatric patients either undergoing dialysis or with a glomerular filtration rate <30 mL/min/1.73 m2[see Pediatric Use (8.4)].

Valsartan is not recommended for patients <6 years old [see Adverse Reactions (6.1), Clinical Studies (14.1)].

Preparation of Suspension (for 160 mL of a 4 mg/mL suspension)

Add 80 mL of Ora-Plus®* oral suspending vehicle to an amber glass bottle containing 8 valsartan 80 mg tablets, and shake for a minimum of 2 minutes. Allow the suspension to stand for a minimum of 1 hour. After the standing time, shake the suspension for a minimum of 1 additional minute. Add 80 mL of Ora-Sweet SF®* oral sweetening vehicle to the bottle and shake the suspension for at least 10 seconds to disperse the ingredients. The suspension is homogenous and can be stored for either up to 30 days at room temperature (below 30°C/86°F) or up to 75 days at refrigerated conditions (2-8°C/35-46°F) in the glass bottle with a child-resistant screw-cap closure. Shake the bottle well (at least 10 seconds) prior to dispensing the suspension.

*Ora-Sweet SF® and Ora-Plus® are registered trademarks of Paddock Laboratories, Inc.

2.3     Heart Failure

The recommended starting dose of valsartan is 40 mg twice daily. Uptitration to 80 mg and 160 mg twice daily should be done to the highest dose, as tolerated by the patient. Consideration should be given to reducing the dose of concomitant diuretics. The maximum daily dose administered in clinical trials is 320 mg in divided doses.

2.4     Post-Myocardial Infarction

Valsartan may be initiated as early as 12 hours after a myocardial infarction. The recommended starting dose of valsartan is 20 mg twice daily. Patients may be uptitrated within 7 days to 40 mg twice daily, with subsequent titrations to a target maintenance dose of 160 mg twice daily, as tolerated by the patient. If symptomatic hypotension or renal dysfunction occurs, consideration should be given to a dosage reduction. Valsartan may be given with other standard post-myocardial infarction treatment, including thrombolytics, aspirin, beta-blockers, and statins.
Divalproex Sodium

Divalproex Sodium

2.1 Important Dosing and Administration Information

In selecting a digoxin injection dosing regimen, it is important to consider factors that affect digoxin blood levels (e.g., body weight, age, renal function, concomitant drugs) since toxic levels of digoxin are only slightly higher than therapeutic levels. Dosing can be either initiated with a loading dose followed by maintenance dosing if rapid titration is desired or initiated with maintenance dosing without a loading dose.

Parenteral administration of digoxin should be used only when the need for rapid digitalization is urgent or when the drug cannot be taken orally. Intramuscular injection can lead to severe pain at the injection site, thus intravenous administration is preferred. If the drug must be administered by the intramuscular route, it should be injected deep into the muscle followed by massage. For adults, no more than 500 mcg of digoxin injection should be injected into a single site. For pediatric patients, no more than 200 mcg of digoxin injection should be injected into a single site.

Administer the dose over a period of 5 minutes or longer and avoid bolus administration to prevent systemic and coronary vasoconstriction. Mixing of digoxin injection with other drugs in the same container or simultaneous administration in the same intravenous line is not recommended.

Digoxin injection can be administered undiluted or diluted with a 4-fold or greater volume of Sterile Water for Injection, 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, or 5% Dextrose Injection. The use of less than a 4-fold volume of diluent could lead to precipitation of the digoxin. Immediate use of the diluted product is recommended.

If tuberculin syringes are used to measure very small doses do not flush with the parenteral solution after its contents are expelled into an indwelling vascular catheter to avoid overadministration of digoxin.

Consider interruption or reduction in digoxin injection dose prior to electrical cardioversion [see Warnings and Precautions (5.4)].

2.2 Loading Dosing Regimen in Adults and Pediatric Patients
Table 1. Recommended Digoxin Injection Loading Dose Age Total IV Loading Dose (mcg/kg) Administer half the total loading dose initially,then ¼ the loading dose every 6 to 8 hours twice mcg = microgram
Premature

15-25

Full-Term

20-30

1-24 Months

30-50

2-5 Years

25-35

5-10 Years

15-30

Adults and pediatric patients over 10 years

8-12

2.3 Maintenance Dosing in Adults and Pediatric Patients Over 10 Years Old

The maintenance dose is based on lean body weight, renal function, age, and concomitant products [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

The recommended starting maintenance doses in adults and pediatric patients over 10 years old with normal renal function are given in Table 2. Doses may be increased every 2 weeks according to clinical response, serum drug levels, and toxicity.
Table 2. Recommended Starting Digoxin Injection Maintenance Dosage in Adults and Pediatric Patients Over 10 Years Old mcg = microgram
Age

Total Intravenous Maintenance Dose, mcg/kg/day (given once daily)

Adults and pediatric patients over 10 years

2.4-3.6

Table 3 provides the recommended (once daily) maintenance dose for adults and pediatric patients over 10 years old (to be given once daily) according to lean body weight and renal function. The doses are based on studies in adult patients with heart failure. Alternatively, the maintenance dose may be estimated by the following formula (peak body stores lost each day through elimination):

Total Maintenance Dose = Loading Dose (i.e., Peak Body Stores) x % Daily Loss/100

(% Daily Loss = 14 + Creatinine clearance/5)

Reduce the dose of digoxin injection in patients whose lean weight is an abnormally small fraction of their total body mass because of obesity or edema.
Table 3. Recommended Maintenance Dose (in micrograms given once daily) of Digoxin Injection in Pediatric Patients Over 10 Years Old and Adults by Lean Body Weight and by Renal Function Lean Body Weight* Corrected CreatinineClearance† kg 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Number of Days Before Steady State Achieved‡ * The doses listed assume average body composition. † For adults, creatinine clearance was corrected to 70 kg body weight or 1.73 m 2 body surface area. If only serum creatinine concentrations (Scr) are available, a corrected Ccr may be estimated in men as (140 – Age)/Scr. For women, this result should be multiplied by 0.85. For pediatric patients, the modified Schwartz equation may be used. The formula is based on height in cm and Scr in mg/dL where k is a constant. Ccr is corrected to 1.73 m 2 body surface area. During the first year of life, the value of k is 0.33 for pre-term babies and 0.45 for term infants. The k is 0.55 for pediatric patients and adolescent girls and 0.7 for adolescent boys. GFR (mL/min/1.73 m 2) = (k x Height)/Scr ‡ If no loading dose administered
10 mL/min

64

80

96

112

128

144

160

19

20 mL/min

72

90

108

126

144

162

180

16

30 mL/min

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

14

40 mL/min

88

110

132

154

176

198

220

13

50 mL/min

96

120

144

168

192

216

240

12

60 mL/min

104

130

156

182

208

234

260

11

70 mL/min

112

140

168

196

224

252

280

10

80 mL/min

120

150

180

210

240

270

300

9

90 mL/min

128

160

192

224

256

288

320

8

100 mL/min

136

170

204

238

272

306

340

7

2.4 Maintenance Dosing in Pediatric Patients Less Than 10 Years Old

The starting maintenance dose for heart failure in pediatric patients less than 10 years old is based on lean body weight, renal function, age, and concomitant products [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)]. The recommended starting maintenance doses for pediatric patients are given in Table 4. These recommendations assume the presence of normal renal function.
Table 4. Recommended Starting Digoxin Injection Maintenance Dosage in Pediatric Patients Less Than 10 Years Old Age Dose Regimen, mcg/kg/dose (given TWICE daily) mcg = microgram
Premature

1.9-3.1

Full-Term

3.0-4.5

1-24 Months

4.5-7.5

2-5 Years

3.8-5.3

5-10 Years

2.3-4.5

Table 5 provides average daily maintenance dose requirements for pediatric patients less than 10 years old (to be given twice daily) with heart failure based on age, lean body weight, and renal function.
Table 5. Recommended Maintenance Dose (in micrograms given TWICE daily) of Digoxin Injection in Pediatric Patients Less Than 10 Years of Age* Based upon Lean Body Weight and Renal Function* Lean Body Weight Corrected CreatinineClearance† kg 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 Number of Days Before Steady State Achieved‡ * Recommended are doses to be given twice daily. † The modified Schwartz equation may be used to estimate creatinine clearance. See footnote a under Table 3. ‡ If no loading dose administered.
10 mL/min

8

16

32

48

64

80

96

19

20 mL/min

9

18

36

54

72

90

108

16

30 mL/min

10

20

40

60

80

100

120

14

40 mL/min

11

22

44

66

88

110

132

13

50 mL/min

12

24

48

72

96

120

144

12

60 mL/min

13

26

52

78

104

130

156

11

70 mL/min

14

28

56

84

112

140

168

10

80 mL/min

15

30

60

90

120

150

180

9

90 mL/min

16

32

64

96

128

160

192

8

100 mL/min

17

34

68

102

136

170

204

7

2.5 Monitoring to Assess Safety, Efficacy, and Therapeutic Blood Levels

Monitor for signs and symptoms of digoxin toxicity and clinical response. Adjust dose based on toxicity, efficacy, and blood levels.

Serum digoxin levels less than 0.5 ng/mL have been associated with diminished efficacy, while levels above 2 ng/mL have been associated with increased toxicity without increased benefit.

Interpret the serum digoxin concentration in the overall clinical context, and do not use an isolated measurement of serum digoxin concentration as the basis for increasing or decreasing the digoxin injection dose. Serum digoxin concentrations may be falsely elevated by endogenous digoxin-like substances [see Drug Interactions (7.4)]. If the assay is sensitive to these substances, consider obtaining a baseline digoxin level before starting digoxin injection and correct post-treatment values by the reported baseline level.

Obtain serum digoxin concentrations just before the next scheduled digoxin injection dose or at least 6 hours after the last dose. The digoxin concentration is likely to be 10 to 25% lower when sampled right before the next dose (24 hours after dosing) compared to sampling 8 hours after dosing (using once-daily dosing). However, there will be only minor differences in digoxin concentrations using twice daily dosing whether sampling is done at 8 or 12 hours after a dose.

2.6 Switching from Intravenous Digoxin to Oral Digoxin

When switching from intravenous to oral digoxin formulations, make allowances for differences in bioavailability when calculating maintenance dosages (see Table 6).
Table 6. Comparison of the Systemic Availability and Equivalent Doses of Oral and Intravenous Digoxin
AbsoluteBioavailability

Equivalent Doses (mcg)

Digoxin Tablets

60-80%

62.5

125

250

500

Digoxin Intravenous Injection

100%

50

100

200

400
Clindamycin In 5 Percen...

Clindamycin In 5 Percent Dextrose

If diarrhea occurs during therapy, this antibiotic should be discontinued (see WARNING box).

Adults: Parenteral (IV Administration): Serious infections due to aerobic gram-positive cocci and the more susceptible anaerobes (NOT generally including Bacteroidesfragilis, Peptococcus species and Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens):

600 to 1200 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

More severe infections, particularly those due to proven or suspectedBacteroidesfragilis, Peptococcus species, or Clostridium species other than Clostridium perfringens:

1200 to 2700 mg/day in 2, 3 or 4 equal doses.

For more serious infections, these doses may have to be increased. In life-threatening situations due to either aerobes or anaerobes these doses may be increased. Doses of as much as 4800 mg daily have been given intravenously to adults. See Infusion Rates section below.

Alternatively, drug may be administered in the form of a single rapid infusion of the first dose followed by continuous IV infusion as follows:
To Maintain Serum Clindamycin Levels Rapid Infusion Rate Maintenance Infusion Rate
Above 4 mcg/mL

10 mg/min for 30 min

0.75 mg/min

Above 5 mcg/mL

15 mg/min for 30 min

1 mg/min

Above 6 mcg/mL

20 mg/min for 30 min

1.25 mg/min

Neonates (less than 1 month):

15 to 20 mg/kg/day in 3 to 4 equal doses. The lower dosage may be adequate for small prematures.

Pediatric patients 1 month of age to 16 years: Parenteral (IV) administration: 20 to 40 mg/kg/day in 3 or 4 equal doses. The higher doses would be used for more severe infections. As an alternative to dosing on a body weight basis, pediatric patients may be dosed on the basis of square meters body surface: 350 mg/m2/day for serious infections and 450 mg/m2/day for more severe infections.

Parenteral therapy may be changed to oral clindamycin palmitate hydrochloride powder for oral solution or clindamycin hydrochloride capsule when the condition warrants and at the discretion of the physician.

In cases of β-hemolytic streptococcal infections, treatment should be continued for at least 10 days.

Infusion Rates

Infusion rates for clindamycin in 5% dextrose injection should not exceed 30 mg per minute. The usual infusion rates are as follows:
Dose Strength Time
300 mg/50 mL

6 mg/mL

10 min

600 mg/50 mL

12 mg/mL

20 min

900 mg/50 mL

18 mg/mL

30 min

Administration of more than 1200 mg in a single 1-hour infusion is not recommended.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit.

DIRECTIONS FOR USE

Clindamycin in 5% dextrose injection in Cryovac Plastic Container

Premixed clindamycin in 5% dextrose injection is for intravenous administration using sterile equipment. Check for minute leaks prior to use by squeezing bag firmly. If leaks are found, discard solution as sterility may be impaired. Do not add supplementary medication. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use unless solution is clear and seal is intact.

Caution: Do not use plastic containers in series connections. Such use could result in air embolism due to residual air being drawn from the primary container before administration of the fluid from the secondary container is complete.

Preparation for Administration:
1. Suspend container from eyelet support. 2. Remove protector from outlet port at bottom of container. 3. Attach administration set. Refer to complete directions accompanying set.
Tobramycin Solution

Tobramycin Solution

Dosage

The 300 mg dose of tobramycin inhalation solution is the same for patients regardless of age or weight. Tobramycin inhalation solution has not been studied in patients less than 6 years old. Doses should be inhaled as close to 12 hours apart as possible and not less than 6 hours apart.

You should not mix tobramycin inhalation solution with dornase alfa (PULMOZYME®, Genentech) in the nebulizer.

If you are taking several medications the recommended order is as follows: bronchodilator first, followed by chest physiotherapy, then other inhaled medications and, finally, tobramycin inhalation solution.

The recommended dosage for both adults and pediatric patients 6 years of age and older is 1 single-use ampule (300 mg) administered BID for 28 days. Dosage is not adjusted by weight. All patients should be administered 300 mg BID. The doses should be taken as close to 12 hours apart as possible; they should not be taken less than 6 hours apart.

Tobramycin inhalation solution is inhaled while the patient is sitting or standing upright and breathing normally through the mouthpiece of the nebulizer. Nose clips may help the patient breathe through the mouth.

Tobramycin inhalation solution is administered BID in alternating periods of 28 days. After 28 days of therapy, patients should stop tobramycin inhalation solution therapy for the next 28 days, and then resume therapy for the next 28 day on/28 day off cycle.

Tobramycin inhalation solution is supplied as a single-use ampule and is administered by inhalation, using a hand-held PARI LC PLUS™ Reusable Nebulizer with a DeVilbiss® Pulmo-Aide® compressor. Tobramycin inhalation solution is not for subcutaneous, intravenous or intrathecal administration.

Usage

Tobramycin inhalation solution is administered by inhalation over an approximately 15-minute period, using a hand-held PARI LC PLUS™ Reusable Nebulizer with a DeVilbiss® Pulmo-Aide® compressor. Tobramycin inhalation solution should not be diluted or mixed with dornase alfa (PULMOZYME®, Genentech) or other medications in the nebulizer.

During clinical studies, patients on multiple therapies were instructed to take them first, followed by tobramycin inhalation solution.
Voriconazole

Voriconazole

2.1 Instructions for Use in All Patients

Voriconazole tablets should be taken at least one hour before or after a meal.

2.3 Recommended Dosing in Adults

Invasive Aspergillosis and Serious Fungal Infections due to Fusarium Spp. and Scedosporium Apiospermum

See Table 1. Therapy must be initiated with the specified loading dose regimen of intravenous voriconazole on Day 1 followed by the recommended maintenance dose regimen. Intravenous treatment should be continued for at least 7 days. Once the patient has clinically improved and can tolerate medication given by mouth, the oral tablet form or oral suspension form of voriconazole may be utilized. The recommended oral maintenance dose of 200 mg achieves a voriconazole exposure similar to 3 mg/kg IV; a 300 mg oral dose achieves an exposure similar to 4 mg/kg IV. Switching between the intravenous and oral formulations is appropriate because of the high bioavailability of the oral formulation in adults [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12)].

Candidemia in Non-neutropenic Patients and Other Deep Tissue Candida Infections

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for at least 14 days following resolution of symptoms or following last positive culture, whichever is longer.

Esophageal Candidiasis

See Table 1. Patients should be treated for a minimum of 14 days and for at least 7 days following resolution of symptoms.
Table 1 Recommended Dosing Regimen
Infection

Loading Dose

Maintenance Dosea,b

IV

IV

Oralc

Invasive Aspergillosisd

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

Candidemia in nonneutropenic patients and other deep tissue Candida infections

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

3 to 4 mg/kg q12he

200 mg q12h

Esophageal Candidiasis

f

f

200 mg q12h

Scedosporiosis and Fusariosis

6 mg/kg q12h for the first 24 hours

4 mg/kg q12h

200 mg q12h

a Increase dose when voriconazole is co-administered with phenytoin or efavirenz (7); Decrease dose in patients with hepatic impairment (2.7)

bIn healthy volunteer studies, the 200 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUCτ) similar to a 3 mg/kg IV q12h dose; the 300 mg oral q12h dose provided an exposure (AUCτ) similar to a 4 mg/kg IV q12h dose [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12)].

c Adult patients who weigh less than 40 kg should receive half of the oral maintenance dose.

d In a clinical study of invasive aspergillosis, the median duration of intravenous voriconazole therapy was 10 days (range 2 to 85 days). The median duration of oral voriconazole therapy was 76 days (range 2 to 232 days) [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].

e In clinical trials, patients with candidemia received 3 mg/kg IV q12h as primary therapy, while patients with other deep tissue Candida infections received 4 mg/kg q12h as salvage therapy. Appropriate dose should be based on the severity and nature of the infection

f Not evaluated in patients with esophageal candidiasis.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment

If patient response is inadequate, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 200 mg every 12 hours (similar to 3 mg/kg IV q12h) to 300 mg every 12 hours (similar to 4 mg/kg IV q12h). For adult patients weighing less than 40 kg, the oral maintenance dose may be increased from 100 mg every 12 hours to 150 mg every 12 hours. If patient is unable to tolerate 300 mg orally every 12 hours, reduce the oral maintenance dose by 50 mg steps to a minimum of 200 mg every 12 hours (or to 100 mg every 12 hours for adult patients weighing less than 40 kg).

If patient is unable to tolerate 4 mg/kg IV q12h, reduce the intravenous maintenance dose to 3 mg/kg q12h.

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be increased when co-administered with phenytoin or efavirenz [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7)].

The maintenance dose of voriconazole should be reduced in patients with mild to moderate hepatic impairment, Child-Pugh Class A and B [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.7)]. There are no PK data to allow for dosage adjustment recommendations in patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh Class C).

Duration of therapy should be based on the severity of the patient’s underlying disease, recovery from immunosuppression, and clinical response.

2.7 Use in Patients With Hepatic Impairment

In the clinical program, patients were included who had baseline liver function tests (ALT, AST) up to 5 times the upper limit of normal. No dose adjustment is necessary in patients with this degree of abnormal liver function, but continued monitoring of liver function tests for further elevations is recommended [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.9)].

It is recommended that the standard loading dose regimens be used but that the maintenance dose be halved in patients with mild to moderate hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class A and B) [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

Voriconazole tablets have not been studied in patients with severe hepatic cirrhosis (Child-Pugh Class C) or in patients with chronic hepatitis B or chronic hepatitis C disease. Voriconazole tablets have been associated with elevations in liver function tests and clinical signs of liver damage, such as jaundice, and should only be used in patients with severe hepatic impairment if the benefit outweighs the potential risk. Patients with hepatic insufficiency must be carefully monitored for drug toxicity.

2.8 Use in Patients With Renal Impairment

The pharmacokinetics of orally administered voriconazole tablets are not significantly affected by renal impairment. Therefore, no adjustment is necessary for oral dosing in patients with mild to severe renal impairment [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

In patients with moderate or severe renal impairment (creatinine clearance <50 mL/min), accumulation of the intravenous vehicle, SBECD, occurs. Oral voriconazole should be administered to these patients, unless an assessment of the benefit/risk to the patient justifies the use of intravenous voriconazole. Serum creatinine levels should be closely monitored in these patients, and, if increases occur, consideration should be given to changing to oral voriconazole therapy [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.10)].

Voriconazole is hemodialyzed with clearance of 121 mL/min. The intravenous vehicle, SBECD, is hemodialyzed with clearance of 55 mL/min. A 4-hour hemodialysis session does not remove a sufficient amount of voriconazole to warrant dose adjustment.
Acnefree Oil-free Acne ...

Acnefree Oil-free Acne Cleanser

2.1 How to Start Estarylla™

Estarylla™ (norgestimate and ethinyl estradiol tablets, USP), dispensed in a blister pack [see HOW SUPPLIED/STORAGE AND HANDLING (16)]. Estarylla™ may be started using either a Day 1 start or a Sunday start (see Table 1). For the first cycle of a Sunday Start regimen, an additional method of contraception should be used until after the first 7 consecutive days of administration.

2.2 How to Take Estarylla™
Table 1: Instructions for Administration of Estarylla™ Complete instructions to facilitate patient counseling on proper tablet usage are located in the FDA-Approved Patient Labeling.
Starting COCs in women not currently using hormonal contraception (Day 1 Start or Sunday Start)

Important: Consider the possibility of ovulation and conception prior to initiation of this product.

Tablet Color:
• Estarylla™ active tablets are blue (Day 1 to Day 21). • Estarylla™ has green inactive tablets (Day 22 to Day 28)
Day 1 Start:
• Take first active tablet without regard to meals on the first day of menses. • Take subsequent active tablets once daily at the same time each day for a total of 21 days. • Take one green inactive tablet daily for 7 days and at the same time of day that active tablets were taken. • Begin each subsequent blister pack on the same day of Estarylla™ the week as the first cycle blister pack (i.e., on the day after taking the last inactive tablet)
Sunday Start:
• Take first active tablet without regard to meals on the first Sunday after the onset of menses. Due to the potential risk of becoming pregnant, use additional non-hormonal contraception (such as condoms and spermicide) for the first seven days of the patient's first cycle blister pack of Estarylla ™. • Take subsequent active tablets once daily at the same time each day for a total of 21 days. • Take one green inactive tablet daily for the following 7 days and at the same time of day that active tablets were taken. • Begin each subsequent blister pack on the same day of the week as the first cycle blister pack (i.e., on the Sunday after taking the last inactive tablet) and additional non-hormonal contraceptive is not needed. • Switching to Estarylla ™ from another oral contraceptive
Start on the same day that a new blister pack of the previous oral contraceptive would have started.
• Switching from another contraceptive method to Estarylla ™
Start Estarylla™:
• Transdermal patch
On the day when next application would have been scheduled
• Vaginal ring • On the day when next insertion would have been scheduled • Injection • On the day when next injection would have been scheduled • Intrauterine contraceptive • On the day of removal • If the IUD is not removed on first day of the patient's menstrual cycle, additional non-hormonal contraceptive (such as condoms and spermicide) is needed for the first seven days of the first cycle blister pack. • Implant • On the day of removal
Starting Estarylla™ after Abortion or Miscarriage

First-trimester
• After a first-trimester abortion or miscarriage, Estarylla™ may be started immediately. An additional method of contraception is not needed if Estarylla™ is started immediately. • If Estarylla™ is not started within 5 days after termination of the pregnancy, the patient should use additional non-hormonal contraception (such as condoms and spermicide) for the first seven days of her first cycle blister pack of Estarylla™.
Second-trimester
• Do not start until 4 weeks after a second-trimester abortion or miscarriage, due to the increased risk of thromboembolic disease. Start Estarylla™, following the instructions in Table 1 for Day 1 or Sunday start, as desired. If using Sunday start, use additional non-hormonal contraception (such as condoms and spermicide) for the first seven days of the patient's first cycle blister pack of Estarylla TM [see CONTRAINDICATIONS (4), WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1), and FDA-Approved Patient Labeling].
Starting Estarylla™ after Childbirth
• Do not start until 4 weeks after delivery, due to the increased risk of thromboembolic disease. Start contraceptive therapy with Estarylla™ following the instructions in Table 1 for women not currently using hormonal contraception. • Estarylla™ is not recommended for use in lactating women [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.3)]. • If the woman has not yet had a period postpartum, consider the possibility of ovulation and conception occurring prior to use of Estarylla™. [See CONTRAINDICATIONS (4), WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1), USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.1 and 8.3), and FDA-Approved Patient Labeling].
BEFORE YOU START TAKING YOUR PILLS
• DECIDE WHAT TIME OF DAY YOU WANT TO TAKE YOUR PILL. It is important to take it at about the same time every day. • LOOK AT YOUR PILL PACK
The pill blister pack has 21 "active" pills (with hormones) to take for 3 weeks. This is followed by 1 week of "reminder" green pills (without hormones).

There are 21 blue “active” pills, and 7 green “remainder” pills.

3. ALSO FIND:
1. where on the blister pack to start taking pills, 2. in what order to take the pills (follow the arrows) 3. The week numbers as shown in the diagram below 4 BE SURE YOU HAVE READY AT ALL TIMES:
Another kind of birth control (such as a condom or spermicide) to use as a back-up method in case you miss pills.

An extra, full pill blister pack.

2.3 Missed Tablets

Table 2: Instructions for Missed Estarylla™ Tablets

If one active tablet is missed in Weeks 1, 2, or 3

Take the tablet as soon as possible. Continue taking one tablet a day until the blister pack is finished.

If two active tablets are missed in Week 1 or Week 2

Take the two missed tablets as soon as possible and the next two active tablets the next day. Continue taking one tablet a day until the blister pack is finished. Additional non-hormonal contraception (such as condoms and spermicide) should be used as back-up if the patient has sex within 7 days after missing tablets.

If two active tablets are missed in the third week or three or more active tablets are missed in a row in Weeks 1, 2, or 3

Day 1 start: Throw out the rest of the blister pack and start a new pack that same day. Sunday start: Continue taking one tablet a day until Sunday, then throw out the rest of the blister pack and start a new blister pack that same day. Additional non-hormonal contraception (such as condoms and spermicide) should be used as back-up if the patient has sex within 7 days after missing tablets.

2.4 Advice in Case of Gastrointestinal Disturbances

In case of severe vomiting or diarrhea, absorption may not be complete and additional contraceptive measures should be taken. If vomiting or diarrhea occurs within 3 to 4 hours after taking an active tablet, handle this as a missed tablet [see FDA-Approved Patient Labeling].
Pravastatin Sodium

Pravastatin Sodium

2.1 General Dosing Information

The patient should be placed on a standard cholesterol-lowering diet before receiving pravastatin sodium tablets and should continue on this diet during treatment with pravastatin sodium tablets [see NCEP Treatment Guidelines for details on dietary therapy].

2.2 Adult Patients

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily. If a daily dose of 40 mg does not achieve desired cholesterol levels, 80 mg once daily is recommended. In patients with significant renal impairment, a starting dose of 10 mg daily is recommended. Pravastatin sodium tablets can be administered orally as a single dose at any time of the day, with or without food. Since the maximal effect of a given dose is seen within 4 weeks, periodic lipid determinations should be performed at this time and dosage adjusted according to the patient’s response to therapy and established treatment guidelines.

2.3 Pediatric Patients

Children (Ages 8 to 13 Years, Inclusive)

The recommended dose is 20 mg once daily in children 8 to 13 years of age. Doses greater than 20 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Adolescents (Ages 14 to 18 Years)

The recommended starting dose is 40 mg once daily in adolescents 14 to 18 years of age. Doses greater than 40 mg have not been studied in this patient population.

Children and adolescents treated with pravastatin should be reevaluated in adulthood and appropriate changes made to their cholesterol-lowering regimen to achieve adult goals for LDL-C [see INDICATIONS AND USAGE (1.2)].

2.4 Concomitant Lipid-Altering Therapy

Pravastatin sodium tablets may be used with bile acid resins. When administering a bile-acid-binding resin (e.g., cholestyramine, colestipol) and pravastatin, pravastatin sodium tablets should be given either 1 hour or more before or at least 4 hours following the resin. [See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3).]

2.5 Dosage in Patients Taking Cyclosporine

In patients taking immunosuppressive drugs such as cyclosporine concomitantly with pravastatin, therapy should begin with 10 mg of pravastatin sodium once-a-day at bedtime and titration to higher doses should be done with caution. Most patients treated with this combination received a maximum pravastatin sodium dose of 20 mg/day. In patients taking cyclosporine, therapy should be limited to 20 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.1)and DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.1)].

2.6 Dosage in Patients Taking Clarithromycin

In patients taking clarithromycin, therapy should be limited to 40 mg of pravastatin sodium once daily [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.2)].
Brimonidine Tartrate So...

Brimonidine Tartrate Solution

The recommended dose is one drop of Brimonidine tartrate ophthalmic solution, 0.2% in the affected eye(s) three times daily, approximately 8 hours apart.

Brimonidine tartrate ophthalmic solution, 0.2% may be used concomitantly with other topical ophthalmic drug products to lower intraocular pressure. If more than one topical ophthalmic product is being used, the products should be administered at least 5 minutes apart.
Ranitidine Hydrochlorid...

Ranitidine Hydrochloride Capsule Ranitidine Hydrochloride

Active Duodenal Ulcer

The current recommended adult oral dosage of ranitidine for duodenal ulcer is 150 mg twice daily. An alternative dosage of 300 mg once daily after the evening meal or at bedtime can be used for patients in whom dosing convenience is important. The advantages of one treatment regimen compared to the other in a particular patient population have yet to be demonstrated (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Trials: Active Duodenal Ulcer). Smaller doses have been shown to be equally effective in inhibiting gastric acid secretion in US studies, and several foreign trials have shown that 100 mg twice daily is as effective as the 150 mg dose.

Antacid should be given as needed for relief of pain (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics).

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal Ulcers

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg at bedtime.

Pathological Hypersecretory Conditions (such as Zollinger-Ellison syndrome)

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day. In some patients it may be necessary to administer ranitidine 150 mg doses more frequently. Dosages should be adjusted to individual patient needs, and should continue as long as clinically indicated. Dosages up to 6 g/day have been employed in patients with severe disease.

Benign Gastric Ulcer

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Maintenance of Healing of Gastric Ulcers

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg at bedtime.

GERD

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Erosive Esophagitis

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg four times a day.

Maintenance of Healing of Erosive Esophagitis

The current recommended adult oral dosage is 150 mg twice a day.

Pediatric Use

The safety and effectiveness of ranitidine has been established in the age-group of 1 month to 16 years. There is insufficient information about the pharmacokinetics of ranitidine in neonatal patients (less than 1 month of age) to make dosing recommendations.

The following 3 subsections provide dosing information for each of the pediatric indications.

Treatment of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers

The recommended oral dose for the treatment of active duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg twice daily to a maximum of 300 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients.

Maintenance of Healing of Duodenal and Gastric Ulcers

The recommended oral dose for the maintenance of healing of duodenal and gastric ulcers is 2 to 4 mg/kg once daily to a maximum of 150 mg/day. This recommendation is derived from adult clinical studies and pharmacokinetic data in pediatric patients.

Treatment of GERD and Erosive Esophagitis

Although limited data exist for these conditions in pediatric patients, published literature supports a dosage of 5 to 10 mg/kg per day, usually given as two divided doses.

Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Renal Function

On the basis of experience with a group of subjects with severely impaired renal function treated with ranitidine, the recommended dosage in patients with a creatinine clearance <50 mL/min is 150 mg every 24 hours. Should the patient’s condition require, the frequency of dosing may be increased to every 12 hours or even further with caution. Hemodialysis reduces the level of circulating ranitidine. Ideally, the dosing schedule should be adjusted so that the timing of a scheduled dose coincides with the end of hemodialysis.

Elderly patients are more likely to have decreased renal function, therefore caution should be exercised in dose selection, and it may be useful to monitor renal function (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Pharmacokinetics: Geriatrics and PRECAUTIONS: Geriatric Use).
Brimonidine Tartrate So...

Brimonidine Tartrate Solution

The recommended dose is one drop of Brimonidine Tartrate Ophthalmic Solution, 0.15% in the affected eye(s) three-times daily, approximately 8 hours apart.

Brimonidine Tartrate Ophthalmic Solution, 0.15% may be used concomitantly with other topical ophthalmic drug products to lower intraocular pressure. If more than one topical ophthalmic product is being used, the products should be administered at least 5 minutes apart.
Calcium Acetate

Calcium Acetate

The recommended initial dose of calcium acetate for the adult dialysis patient is 2 gelcaps with each meal. Increase the dose gradually to lower serum phosphorus levels to the target range, as long as hypercalcemia does not develop. Most patients require 3-4 gelcaps with each meal.
Timolol Maleate Solutio...

Timolol Maleate Solution

Timolol maleate ophthalmic solution is available in concentrations of 0.25 and 0.5 percent. The usual starting dose is one drop of 0.25 percent timolol maleate ophthalmic solution in the affected eye(s) twice a day. If the clinical response is not adequate, the dosage may be changed to one drop of 0.5 percent solution in the affected eye(s) twice a day.

Since in some patients the pressure-lowering response to timolol may require a few weeks to stabilize, evaluation should include a determination of intraocular pressure after approximately 4 weeks of treatment with timolol.

If the intraocular pressure is maintained at satisfactory levels, the dosage schedule may be changed to one drop once a day in the affected eye(s). Because of diurnal variations in intraocular pressure, satisfactory response to the once-a-day dose is best determined by measuring the intraocular pressure at different times during the day.

Dosages above one drop of 0.5 percent timolol maleate ophthalmic solution twice a day generally have not been shown to produce further reduction in intraocular pressure. If the patient's intraocular pressure is still not at a satisfactory level on this regimen, concomitant therapy with other agent(s) for lowering intraocular pressure can be instituted.

The concomitant use of two topical beta-adrenergic blocking agents is not recommended. (See PRECAUTIONS, Drug Interactions, Beta-adrenergic blocking agents.)
Cromolyn Sodium Solutio...

Cromolyn Sodium Solution Drops

The dose is 1 or 2 drops in each eye 4 to 6 times a day at regular intervals. One drop contains approximately 1.6 mg cromolyn sodium.

Patients should be advised that the effect of cromolyn sodium ophthalmic solution therapy is dependent upon its administration at regular intervals, as directed.

Symptomatic response to therapy (decreased itching, tearing, redness, and discharge) is usually evident within a few days, but longer treatment for up to six weeks is sometimes required. Once symptomatic improvement has been established, therapy should be continued for as long as needed to sustain improvement.

If required, corticosteroids may be used concomitantly with Cromolyn Sodium Ophthalmic Solution USP, 4%.
Glipizide

Glipizide

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of diabetes mellitus with glipizide or any other hypoglycemic agent. In addition to the usual monitoring of urinary glucose, the patient’s blood glucose must also be monitored periodically to determine the minimum effective dose for the patient; to detect primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication; and to detect secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood-glucose-lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness. Glycosylated hemoglobin levels may also be of value in monitoring the patient’s response to therapy.

Short-term administration of glipizide may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually controlled well on diet.

In general, glipizide should be given approximately 30 minutes before a meal to achieve the greatest reduction in postprandial hyperglycemia.

Initial Dose

The recommended starting dose is 5 mg, given before breakfast. Geriatric patients or those with liver disease may be started on 2.5 mg.

Titration

Dosage adjustments should ordinarily be in increments of 2.5 to 5 mg, as determined by blood glucose response. At least several days should elapse between titration steps. If response to a single dose is not satisfactory, dividing that dose may prove effective. The maximum recommended once daily dose is 15 mg. Doses above 15 mg should ordinarily be divided and given before meals of adequate caloric content. The maximum recommended total daily dose is 40 mg.

Maintenance

Some patients may be effectively controlled on a once-a-day regimen, while others show better response with divided dosing. Total daily doses above 15 mg should ordinarily be divided. Total daily doses above 30 mg have been safely given on a b.i.d. basis to long-term patients.

In elderly patients, debilitated or malnourished patients, and patients with impaired renal or hepatic function, the initial and maintenance dosing should be conservative to avoid hypoglycemic reactions (see PRECAUTIONS section).

Patients Receiving Insulin

As with other sulfonylurea-class hypoglycemics, many stable non-insulin-dependent diabetic patients receiving insulin may be safely placed on glipizide. When transferring patients from insulin to glipizide, the following general guidelines should be considered:
For patients whose daily insulin requirement is 20 units or less, insulin may be discontinued and glipizide therapy may begin at usual dosages. Several days should elapse between glipizide titration steps. For patients whose daily insulin requirement is greater than 20 units, the insulin dose should be reduced by 50% and glipizide therapy may begin at usual dosages. Subsequent reductions in insulin dosage should depend on individual patient response. Several days should elapse between glipizide titration steps.
During the insulin withdrawal period, the patient should test urine samples for sugar and ketone bodies at least three times daily. Patients should be instructed to contact the prescriber immediately if these tests are abnormal. In some cases, especially when patient has been receiving greater than 40 units of insulin daily, it may be advisable to consider hospitalization during the transition period.

Patients Receiving Other Oral Hypoglycemic Agents

As with other sulfonylurea-class hypoglycemics, no transition period is necessary when transferring patients to glipizide. Patients should be observed carefully (1 to 2 weeks) for hypoglycemia when being transferred from longer half-life sulfonylureas (e.g., chlorpropamide) to glipizide due to potential overlapping of drug effect.

When colesevelam is coadministered with glipizide ER, maximum plasma concentration and total exposure to glipizide is reduced. Therefore, glipizide tablets should be administered at least 4 hours prior to colesevelam.
Granisetron

Granisetron

2.1 Prevention of Chemotherapy-Induced Nausea and Vomiting

Adult Patients

The recommended dosage for granisetron hydrochloride injection is 10 mcg/kg administered intravenously within 30 minutes before initiation of chemotherapy, and only on the day(s) chemotherapy is given.

Infusion Preparation

Granisetron hydrochloride injection may be administered intravenously either undiluted over 30 seconds, or diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride or 5% Dextrose and infused over 5 minutes.

Stability

Intravenous infusion of granisetron hydrochloride injection should be prepared at the time of administration. However, granisetron hydrochloride injection has been shown to be stable for at least 24 hours when diluted in 0.9% Sodium Chloride or 5% Dextrose and stored at room temperature under normal lighting conditions.

As a general precaution, granisetron hydrochloride injection should not be mixed in solution with other drugs. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration before administration whenever solution and container permit.

Pediatric Patients

The recommended dose in pediatric patients 2 to 16 years of age is 10 mcg/kg [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14)]. Pediatric patients under 2 years of age have not been studied.
Klor-conef

Klor-conef

The usual dietary potassium intake by the average adult is 50 to 100 mEq per day. Potassium depletion sufficient to cause hypokalemia usually requires the loss of 200 mEq or more of potassium from the total body store.

Dosage must be adjusted to the individual needs of each patient. The dose for the prevention of hypokalemia is typically 25 mEq per day. Doses of 50 to 100 mEq per day or more are used for the treatment of potassium depletion. Dosage should be divided if more than 25 mEq per day is given such that no more than 25 mEq is given in a single dose.

The usual adult dose is 25 to 100 mEq of potassium per day (one KLOR-CON®/EF tablet 1 to 4 times daily after meals).

Each KLOR-CON®/EF tablet should be dissolved in at least 4 ounces of cold or ice water. These preparations, like other potassium supplements, must be properly diluted to avoid the possibility of gastrointestinal irritation.
Klor-con

Klor-con

The usual dietary potassium intake by the average adult is 50 to 100 mEq per day. Potassium depletion sufficient to cause hypokalemia usually requires the loss of 200 mEq or more of potassium from the total body store.

Dosage must be adjusted to the individual needs of each patient. The dose for the prevention of hypokalemia is typically in the range of 20 mEq per day. Doses of 40-100 mEq per day or more are used for the treatment of potassium depletion. Dosage should be divided if more than 20 mEq per day is given such that no more than 20 mEq is given in a single dose.

Each Klor-Con® Extended-release Tablet provides 8 mEq or 10 mEq of potassium chloride.

Klor-Con® Extended-release Tablets should be taken with meals and with a glass of water or other liquid. This product should not be taken on an empty stomach because of its potential for gastric irritation (see WARNINGS).

NOTE: Klor-Con® Extended-release Tablets must be swallowed whole and never crushed, chewed, or sucked.
Klor-con M

Klor-con M

The usual dietary intake of potassium by the average adult is 50 to 100 mEq per day. Potassium depletion sufficient to cause hypokalemia usually requires the loss of 200 or more mEq of potassium from the total body store.

Dosage must be adjusted to the individual needs of each patient. The dose for the prevention of hypokalemia is typically in the range of 20 mEq per day. Doses of 40-100 mEq per day or more are used for the treatment of potassium depletion. Dosage should be divided if more than 20 mEq per day is given such that no more than 20 mEq is given in a single dose.

Each Klor-Con® M20 tablet provides 1500 mg of potassium chloride equivalent to 20 mEq of potassium.

Each Klor-Con® M15 tablet provides 1125 mg of potassium chloride equivalent to 15 mEq of potassium.

Each Klor-Con® M10 tablet provides 750 mg of potassium chloride equivalent to 10 mEq of potassium.

Klor-Con® M tablets should be taken with meals and with a glass of water or other liquid. This product should not be taken on an empty stomach because of its potential for gastric irritation (see WARNINGS).

Patients having difficulty swallowing whole tablets may try one of the following alternate methods of administration:
Break the tablet in half and take each half separately with a glass of water. Prepare an aqueous (water) suspension as follows: Place the whole tablet(s) in approximately one-half glass of water (4 fluid ounces). Allow approximately 2 minutes for the tablet(s) to disintegrate. Stir for about half a minute after the tablet(s) has disintegrated. Swirl the suspension and consume the entire contents of the glass immediately by drinking or by the use of a straw. Add another one fluid ounce of water, swirl, and consume immediately. Then, add an additional one fluid ounce of water, swirl, and consume immediately.Aqueous suspension of Klor-Con® M extended-release tablet that is not taken immediately should be discarded. The use of other liquids for suspending Klor-Con® M tablets is not recommended.
Decitabine

Decitabine

There are two regimens for decitabine for injection administration. With either regimen it is recommended that patients be treated for a minimum of 4 cycles; however, a complete or partial response may take longer than 4 cycles.

Complete blood counts and platelet counts should be performed as needed to monitor response and toxicity, but at a minimum, prior to each cycle. Liver chemistries and serum creatinine should be obtained prior to initiation of treatment.

2.1 Treatment Regimen – Option 1

Decitabine for injection is administered at a dose of 15 mg/m2 by continuous intravenous infusion over 3 hours repeated every 8 hours for 3 days. This cycle should be repeated every 6 weeks. Patients may be premedicated with standard anti-emetic therapy.

If hematologic recovery (ANC ≥ 1,000/μL and platelets ≥ 50,000/μL) from a previous decitabine for injection treatment cycle requires more than 6 weeks, then the next cycle of decitabine for injection therapy should be delayed and dosing temporarily reduced by following this algorithm:
• Recovery requiring more than 6, but less than 8 weeks − Decitabine for injection dosing to be delayed for up to 2 weeks and the dose temporarily reduced to 11 mg/m 2 every 8 hours (33 mg/m 2/day, 99 mg/m 2/cycle) upon restarting therapy. • Recovery requiring more than 8, but less than 10 weeks − Patient should be assessed for disease progression (by bone marrow aspirates); in the absence of progression, the decitabine for injection dose should be delayed up to 2 more weeks and the dose reduced to 11 mg/m 2 every 8 hours (33 mg/m 2/day, 99 mg/m 2/cycle) upon restarting therapy, then maintained or increased in subsequent cycles as clinically indicated.
2.2 Treatment Regimen – Option 2

Decitabine for injection is administered at a dose of 20 mg/m2 by continuous intravenous infusion over 1 hour repeated daily for 5 days. This cycle should be repeated every 4 weeks. Patients may be premedicated with standard anti-emetic therapy.

If myelosuppression is present, subsequent treatment cycles of decitabine for injection should be delayed until there is hematologic recovery (ANC ≥ 1,000/μL platelets ≥ 50,000/μL).

2.3 Patients with Non-hematologic Toxicity

Following the first cycle of decitabine for injection treatment, if any of the following non-hematologic toxicities are present, decitabine for injection treatment should not be restarted until the toxicity is resolved: 1) serum creatinine ≥ 2 mg/dL; 2) SGPT, total bilirubin ≥ 2 times ULN; 3) and active or uncontrolled infection.

2.4 Instructions for Intravenous Administration

Decitabine for injection is a cytotoxic drug and caution should be exercised when handling and preparing decitabine for injection. Procedures for proper handling and disposal of antineoplastic drugs should be applied. Several guidances on this subject have been published.1-4 .

Decitabine for injection should be aseptically reconstituted with 10 mL of Sterile Water for Injection (USP); upon reconstitution, each mL contains approximately 5 mg of decitabine at pH 6.7 to 7.3. Immediately after reconstitution, the solution should be further diluted with 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, or Lactated Ringer’s Injection to a final drug concentration of 0.1 to 1 mg/mL. Unless used within 15 minutes of reconstitution, the diluted solution must be prepared using cold (2˚C to 8˚C) infusion fluids and stored at 2˚C to 8˚C (36˚F to 46˚F) for up to a maximum of 7 hours until administration.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if there is evidence of particulate matter or discoloration.
Diclofenac Sodium

Diclofenac Sodium

Carefully consider the potential benefits and risks of diclofenac sodium delayed-release tablets and other treatment options before deciding to use diclofenac sodium delayed-release tablets. Use the lowest effective dose for the shortest duration consistent with individual patient treatment goals (see WARNINGS).

After observing the response to initial therapy with diclofenac sodium delayed-release tablets, the dose and frequency should be adjusted to suit an individual patient’s needs.

For the relief of osteoarthritis, the recommended dosage is 100 to 150 mg/day in divided doses (50 mg b.i.d. or t.i.d., or 75 mg b.i.d.).

For the relief of rheumatoid arthritis, the recommended dosage is 150 to 200 mg/day in divided doses (50 mg t.i.d. or q.i.d., or 75 mg b.i.d.).

For the relief of ankylosing spondylitis, the recommended dosage is 100 to 125 mg/day, administered as 25 mg q.i.d., with an extra 25 mg dose at bedtime if necessary.

Different formulations of diclofenac (diclofenac sodium enteric-coated tablets; diclofenac sodium extended-release tablets; diclofenac potassium immediate-release tablets) are not necessarily bioequivalent even if the milligram strength is the same.
Ketorolac Tromethamine ...

Ketorolac Tromethamine Solution

The recommended dose of ketorolac tromethamine ophthalmic solution, 0.4% is one drop four times a day in the operated eye as needed for pain and burning/stinging for up to 4 days following corneal refractive surgery.

Ketorolac tromethamine ophthalmic solution has been safely administered in conjunction with other ophthalmic medications such as antibiotics, beta blockers, carbonic anhydrase inhibitors, cycloplegics, and mydriatics.
Gentamicin Sulfate Solu...

Gentamicin Sulfate Solution

Instill one or two drops into the affected eye(s) every four hours. In severe infections, dosage may be increased to as much as two drops once every hour.
Betaxolol Hydrochloride...

Betaxolol Hydrochloride Solution Drops

The recommended dose is one to two drops of Betaxolol Hydrochloride Ophthalmic Solution in the affected eye(s) twice daily. In some patients, the intraocular pressure lowering responses to Betaxolol Hydrochloride Ophthalmic Solution may require a few weeks to stabilize. As with any new medication, careful monitoring of patients is advised.

If the intraocular pressure of the patient is not adequately controlled on this regimen, concomitant therapy with pilocarpine and other miotics, and/or epinephrine and/or carbonic anhydrase inhibitors can be instituted.
Dexamethasone Sodium Ph...

Dexamethasone Sodium Phosphate Solution

The duration of treatment will vary with the type of lesion and may extend from a few days to several weeks, according to therapeutic response. Relapses, more common in chronic active lesions than in self-limited conditions, usually respond to treatment.

Eye: Instill one or two drops of solution into the conjunctival sac every hour during the day and every two hours during the night as initial therapy. When a favorable response is observed, reduce dosage to one drop every four hours. Later, further reduction in dosage to one drop three or four times daily may suffice to control symptoms.

Ear: Clean the aural canal thoroughly and sponge dry. Instill the solution directly into the aural canal. A suggested initial dosage is three or four drops two or three times a day. When a favorable response is obtained, reduce dosage gradually and eventually discontinue.

If preferred, the aural canal may be packed with a gauze wick saturated with solution. Keep the wick moist with the preparation and remove from the ear after 12 to 24 hours. Treatment may be repeated as often as necessary at the discretion of the physician.
Diclofenac Sodium Solut...

Diclofenac Sodium Solution

Cataract Surgery: One drop of Diclofenac Sodium Ophthalmic Solution should be applied to the affected eye, 4 times daily beginning 24 hours after cataract surgery and continuing throughout the first 2 weeks of the post-operative period.

Corneal Refractive Surgery: One or two drops of Diclofenac Sodium Ophthalmic Solution should be applied to the operative eye within the hour prior to corneal refractive surgery.

Within 15 minutes after surgery, one or two drops should be applied to the operative eye and continued 4 times daily for up to 3 days.

To report SUSPECTED ADVERSE REACTIONS, contact Sandoz Inc., at 1-800-525-8747 or FDA at 1-800-FDA-1088 or www.fda.gov/medwatch
Cefpodoxime Proxetil

Cefpodoxime Proxetil

(See INDICATIONS AND USAGE for indicated pathogens.)

Film-coated Tablets

Cefpodoxime Proxetil Tablets, USP should be administered orally with food to enhance absorption. (See CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY.)

The recommended dosages, durations of treatment, and applicable patient population are as described in the following chart:

Adults and Adolescents (age 12 years and older)
Type of Infection Total Daily Dose Dose Frequency Duration
Pharyngitis and/or tonsillitis

200 mg

100 mg Q 12 hours

5 to 10 days

Acute community-acquired pneumonia

400 mg

200 mg Q 12 hours

14 days

Acute bacterial exacerbations of chronic bronchitis

400 mg

200 mg Q 12 hours

10 days

Uncomplicated gonorrhea (men and women) and rectal gonococcal infections (women)

200 mg

single dose

Skin and skin structure

800 mg

400 mg Q 12 hours

7 to 14 days

Acute maxillary sinusitis

400 mg

200 mg Q 12 hours

10 days

Uncomplicated urinary tract infection

200 mg

100 mg Q 12 hours

7 days

Patients with Renal Dysfunction

For patients with severe renal impairment (<30 mL/min creatinine clearance), the dosing intervals should be increased to Q 24 hours. In patients maintained on hemodialysis, the dose frequency should be 3 times/week after hemodialysis.

When only the serum creatinine level is available, the following formula (based on sex, weight, and age of the patient) may be used to estimate creatinine clearance (mL/min). For this estimate to be valid, the serum creatinine level should represent a steady state of renal function.

Males:(mL/min)

Weight (kg) × (140 - age) 72 × serum creatinine (mg/100 mL)

Females:(mL/min)

0.85 × above value

Patients with Cirrhosis

Cefpodoxime pharmacokinetics in cirrhotic patients (with or without ascites) are similar to those in healthy subjects. Dose adjustment is not necessary in this population.
Argatroban

Argatroban

Each 50 mL glass vial contains 50 mg argatroban (1 mg/mL); and, as supplied, is ready for intravenous infusion. Dilution is not required.

Argatroban Injection is a clear, colorless to pale yellow solution. Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Do not use if solution is cloudy, contains precipitates, or if the white flip top cap is not intact.

Vial may be inverted for use with a medical infusion set.

2.1 Dosing in Patients with Heparin-Induced Thrombocytopenia

Initial Dosage:

Before administering argatroban, discontinue heparin therapy and obtain a baseline aPTT. The recommended initial dose of Argatroban for adult patients without hepatic impairment is 2 mcg/kg/min, administered as a continuous infusion (see Table 1).
Table 1. Recommended Doses and Infusion Rates for 2 mcg/kg/min Dose of Argatroban for Patients With HIT* and Without Hepatic Impairment (1 mg/mL Concentration)
*with or without thrombosis
Body Weight (kg) Dose (mcg/min) Infusion Rate (mL/hr) 50 100 6 60 120 7 70 140 8 80 160 10 90 180 11 100 200 12 110 220 13 120 240 14 130 260 16 140 280 17
Monitoring Therapy:

For use in HIT, therapy with Argatroban Injection is monitored using the aPTT with a target range of 1.5 to 3 times the initial baseline value (not to exceed 100 seconds). Tests of anticoagulant effects (including the aPTT) typically attain steady-state levels within 1 to 3 hours following initiation of Argatroban Injection. Check the aPTT 2 hours after initiation of therapy and after any dose change to confirm that the patient has attained the desired therapeutic range.

Dosage Adjustment:

After the initiation of Argatroban Injection, adjust the dose (not to exceed 10 mcg/kg/min) as necessary to obtain a steady state aPTT in the target range [see Clinical Studies (14.1)].

2.2 Dosing in Patients Undergoing Percutaneous Coronary Intervention

Initial Dosage:

Initiate an infusion of Argatroban Injection at 25 mcg/kg/min and administer a bolus of 350 mcg/kg via a large bore intravenous line over 3 to 5 minutes (see Table 2). Check an activated clotting time (ACT) 5 to 10 minutes after the bolus dose is completed. The PCI procedure may proceed if the ACT is greater than 300 seconds.

Dosage Adjustment:

If the ACT is less than 300 seconds, an additional intravenous bolus dose of 150 mcg/kg should be administered, the infusion dose increased to 30 mcg/kg/min, and the ACT checked 5 to 10 minutes later (see Table 2).

If the ACT is greater than 450 seconds, the infusion rate should be decreased to 15 mcg/kg/min, and the ACT checked 5 to 10 minutes later (Table 3).

Continue titrating the dose until a therapeutic ACT (between 300 and 450 seconds) has been achieved; continue the same infusion rate for the duration of the PCI procedure.

In case of dissection, impending abrupt closure, thrombus formation during the procedure, or inability to achieve or maintain an ACT over 300 seconds, additional bolus doses of 150 mcg/kg may be administered and the infusion dose increased to 40 mcg/kg/min. Check the ACT after each additional bolus or change in the rate of infusion.
Table 2. Recommended Starting and Maintenance Doses (Within the Target ACT Range) of Argatroban Injection in Patients Undergoing PCI Without Hepatic Impairment (1 mg/mL Concentration)
NOTE: 1 mg = 1000 mcg; 1 kg = 2.2 lbs
Body Weight (kg) Starting Bolus Dose (350 mcg/kg) Starting Maintenance Continuous Infusion Dosing For ACT 300-450 seconds 25 mcg/kg/min Bolus Dose (mcg) Bolus Volume (mL) Continuous Infusion Dose (mg/min) Continuous Infusion Rate (mL/hr) 50 17500 18 1250 75 60 21000 21 1500 90 70 24500 25 1750 105 80 28000 28 2000 120 90 31500 32 2250 135 100 35000 35 2500 150 110 38500 39 2750 165 120 42000 42 3000 180 130 45500 46 3250 195 140 49000 49 3500 210 Table 3. Recommended Dose Adjustments of Argatroban Injection for Patients Outside of ACT Target Range Undergoing PCI Without Hepatic Impairment (1 mg/mL Concentration)
NOTE: 1 mg = 1000 mcg; 1 kg – 2.2 lbs

† Additional intravenous bolus dose of 150 mcg/kg should be administered if ACT less than 300 seconds.

* No bolus dose is given if ACT greater than 450 seconds.
Body Weight (kg) If ACT Less than 300 seconds Dosage Adjustment† 30 mcg/kg/min If ACT Greater than 450 seconds Dosage Adjustment* 15 mcg/kg/min Additional Bolus Dose (mcg) Bolus Volume (mL) Continuous Infusion Dose (mcg/min) Continuous Infusion Rate (mL/hr) Continuous Infusion Dose (mcg/min) Continuous Infusion Rate (mL/hr) 50 7500 8 1500 90 750 45 60 9000 9 1800 108 900 54 70 10500 11 2100 126 1050 63 80 12000 12 2400 144 1200 72 90 13500 14 2700 162 1350 81 100 15000 15 3000 180 1500 90 110 16500 17 3300 198 1650 99 120 18000 18 3600 216 1800 108 130 19500 20 3900 234 1950 117 140 21000 21 4200 252 2100 126
Monitoring therapy:

For use in PCI, therapy with Argatroban Injection is monitored using ACT. Obtain ACTs before dosing, 5 to 10 minutes after bolus dosing, following adjustments in the infusion rate, and at the end of the PCI procedure. Obtain additional ACTs every 20 to 30 minutes during a prolonged procedure.

Continued Anticoagulation after PCI:

If a patient requires anticoagulation after the procedure, Argatroban Injection may be continued, but at a rate of 2 mcg/kg/min and adjusted as needed to maintain the aPTT in the desired range [see Dosage and Administration (2.1)].

2.3 Dosing in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

For adult patients with HIT and moderate or severe hepatic impairment (based on Child-Pugh classification), an initial dose of 0.5 mcg/kg/min is recommended, based on the approximately 4-fold decrease in argatroban clearance relative to those with normal hepatic function. Monitor the aPTT closely, and adjust the dosage as clinically indicated.

Monitoring Therapy:

Achievement of steady state aPTT levels may take longer and require more dose adjustments in patients with hepatic impairment compared to patients with normal hepatic function.

For patients with hepatic impairment undergoing PCI who have HIT or are at risk for HIT, carefully titrate argatroban until the desired level of anticoagulation is achieved. Use of Argatroban in PC patients with clinically significant hepatic disease or AST/ALT levels ≥ 3 times the upper limit of normal should be avoided. [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

2.4 Dosing in Pediatric Patients With Heparin-Induced Thrombocytopenia/Heparin-Induced Thrombocytopenia and Thrombosis Syndrome

Initial Dosage:

Initial argatroban infusion doses are lower for seriously ill pediatric patients compared to adults with normal hepatic function [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)].

Monitoring Therapy:

In general, therapy with argatroban is monitored using the aPTT. Tests of anticoagulant effects (including the aPTT) typically attain steady-state levels within one to three hours following initiation of argatroban in patients without hepatic impairment [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)]. Dose adjustment may be required to attain the target aPTT. Check the aPTT two hours after initiation of therapy and after any dose change to confirm that the patient has attained the desired therapeutic range.

Dosage Adjustment: [see Use in Specific Populations (8.4)]

2.5 Conversion to Oral Anticoagulant Therapy

Initiating Oral Anticoagulant Therapy

When converting patients from Argatroban to oral anticoagulant therapy, consider the potential for combined effects on the International Normalized Ratio (INR). To avoid prothrombotic effects and to ensure continuous anticoagulation when initiating warfarin, overlap Argatroban Injection and warfarin therapy. There are insufficient data available to recommend the duration of the overlap. Initiate therapy using the expected daily dose of warfarin. A loading dose of warfarin should not be used.

The relationship between INR and bleeding risk is altered when argatroban and warfarin are coadministered. The combination of argatroban and warfarin does not cause further reduction in the vitamin-K dependent factor Xa activity than that which is seen with warfarin alone. The relationship between INR obtained on combined therapy and INR obtained on warfarin alone is dependent on both the dose of argatroban and the thromboplastin reagent used. The INR value on warfarin alone (INRw) can be calculated from the INR value on combination argatroban and warfarin therapy [see Drug Interactions (7.2) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)].

Co-Administration of Warfarin and Argatroban Injection at Doses up to 2 mcg/kg/min: Measure INR daily while Argatroban Injection and warfarin are co-administered. In general, with doses of Argatroban Injection up to 2 mcg/kg/min, Argatroban Injection can be discontinued when the INR is greater than 4 on combined therapy. After Argatroban Injection is discontinued, repeat the INR measurement in 4 to 6 hours. If the repeat INR is below the desired therapeutic range, resume the infusion of Argatroban Injection and repeat the procedure daily until the desired therapeutic range on warfarin alone is reached.

Co-Administration of Warfarin and Argatroban Injection at Doses Greater than 2 mcg/kg/min: For doses greater than 2 mcg/kg/min, the relationship of INR between warfarin alone to the INR on warfarin plus argatroban is less predictable. In this case, in order to predict the INR on warfarin alone, temporarily reduce the dose of Argatroban Injection to a dose of 2 mcg/kg/min. Repeat the INR on Argatroban Injection and warfarin 4 to 6 hours after reduction of the Argatroban Injection dose and follow the process outlined above for administering Argatroban Injection at doses up to 2 mcg/kg/min.
Ropivacaine Hydrochlori...

Ropivacaine Hydrochloride

The rapid injection of a large volume of local anesthetic solution should be avoided and fractional (incremental) doses should always be used. The smallest dose and concentration required to produce the desired result should be administered.

There have been adverse event reports of chondrolysis in patients receiving intra-articular infusions of local anesthetics following arthroscopic and other surgical procedures. Ropivacaine hydrochloride injection is not approved for this use (see WARNINGS and DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION).

The dose of any local anesthetic administered varies with the anesthetic procedure, the area to be anesthetized, the vascularity of the tissues, the number of neuronal segments to be blocked, the depth of anesthesia and degree of muscle relaxation required, the duration of anesthesia desired, individual tolerance, and the physical condition of the patient. Patients in poor general condition due to aging or other compromising factors such as partial or complete heart conduction block, advanced liver disease or severe renal dysfunction require special attention although regional anesthesia is frequently indicated in these patients. To reduce the risk of potentially serious adverse reactions, attempts should be made to optimize the patient's condition before major blocks are performed, and the dosage should be adjusted accordingly.

Use an adequate test dose (3 to 5 mL of a short-acting local anesthetic solution containing epinephrine) prior to induction of complete block. This test dose should be repeated if the patient is moved in such a fashion as to have displaced the epidural catheter. Allow adequate time for onset of anesthesia following administration of each test dose.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are discolored or which contain particulate matter should not be administered.
Table 7 Dosage Recommendations * = Not Applicable † = The dose for a major nerve block must be adjusted according to site of administration and patient status. Supraclavicular brachial plexus blocks may be associated with a higher frequency of serious adverse reactions, regardless of the local anesthetic used (see PRECAUTIONS). ‡ = Median dose of 21 mg per hour was administered by continuous infusion or by incremental injections (top-ups) over a median delivery time of 5.5 hours. § = Cumulative doses up to 770 mg of ropivacaine hydrochloride over 24 hours (intraoperative block plus postoperative infusion); Continuous epidural infusion at rates up to 28 mg per hour for 72 hours have been well tolerated in adults, ie, 2016 mg plus surgical dose of approximately 100 to 150 mg as top-up. Conc. Volume Dose Onset Duration mg/mL (%) mL mg min hours SURGICAL ANESTHESIA Lumbar Epidural 5 (0.5%) 15 to 30 75 to 150 15 to 30 2 to 4 Administration 7.5 (0.75%) 15 to 25 113 to 188 10 to 20 3 to 5 Surgery 10 (1%) 15 to 20 150 to 200 10 to 20 4 to 6 Lumbar Epidural 5 (0.5%) 20 to 30 100 to 150 15 to 25 2 to 4 Administration 7.5 (0.75%) 15 to 20 113 to 150 10 to 20 3 to 5 Cesarean Section Thoracic Epidural 5 (0.5%) 5 to 15 25 to 75 10 to 20 n/a* Administration 7.5 (0.75%) 5 to 15 38 to 113 10 to 20 n/a* Surgery Major Nerve Block† 5 (0.5%) 35 to 50 175 to 250 15 to 30 5 to 8 (eg, brachial plexus block) 7.5 (0.75%) 10 to 40 75 to 300 10 to 25 6 to 10 Field Block(eg, minor nerve block and infiltration) 5 (0.5%) 1 to 40 5 to 200 1 to 15 2 to 6 LABOR PAIN MANAGEMENT Lumbar Epidural Administration Initial Dose 2 (0.2%) 10 to 20 20 to 40 10 to 15 0.5 to 1.5 Continuous infusion‡ 2 (0.2%) 6 to 14mL/h 12 to 28mg/h n/a* n/a* Incrementalinjections (top-up)‡ 2 (0.2%) 10 to 15mL/h 20 to 30mg/h n/a* n/a* POSTOPERATIVE PAIN MANAGEMENT Lumbar Epidural Administration Continuous infusion§ 2 (0.2%) 6 to 14mL/h 12 to 28mg/h n/a* n/a* Thoracic Epidural Administration 2 (0.2%) 6 to 14mL/h 12 to 28mg/h n/a* n/a* Continuous infusion§ Infiltration 2 (0.2%) 1 to 100 2 to 200 1 to 5 2 to 6 (eg, minor nerve block) 5 (0.5%) 1 to 40 5 to 200 1 to 5 2 to 6
The doses in the table are those considered to be necessary to produce a successful block and should be regarded as guidelines for use in adults. Individual variations in onset and duration occur. The figures reflect the expected average dose range needed. For other local anesthetic techniques standard current textbooks should be consulted.

When prolonged blocks are used, either through continuous infusion or through repeated bolus administration, the risks of reaching a toxic plasma concentration or inducing local neural injury must be considered. Experience to date indicates that a cumulative dose of up to 770 mg ropivacaine hydrochloride administered over 24 hours is well tolerated in adults when used for postoperative pain management: ie, 2016 mg. Caution should be exercised when administering ropivacaine hydrochloride for prolonged periods of time, eg, >70 hours in debilitated patients.

For treatment of postoperative pain, the following technique can be recommended: If regional anesthesia was not used intraoperatively, then an initial epidural block with 5 to 7 mL ropivacaine hydrochloride is induced via an epidural catheter. Analgesia is maintained with an infusion of ropivacaine hydrochloride, 2 mg/mL (0.2%). Clinical studies have demonstrated that infusion rates of 6 to 14 mL (12 to 28 mg) per hour provide adequate analgesia with nonprogressive motor block. With this technique a significant reduction in the need for opioids was demonstrated. Clinical experience supports the use of ropivacaine hydrochloride epidural infusions for up to 72 hours.
Anastrozole

Anastrozole

2.1 Recommended Dose

The dose of anastrozole is one 1 mg tablet taken once a day. For patients with advanced breast cancer, anastrozole should be continued until tumor progression. Anastrozole can be taken with or without food.

For adjuvant treatment of early breast cancer in postmenopausal women, the optimal duration of therapy is unknown. In the ATAC trial anastrozole was administered for five years. [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)]

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with renal impairment or for elderly patients. [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.6)]

2.2 Patients with Hepatic Impairment

No changes in dose are recommended for patients with mild-to-moderate hepatic impairment. Anastrozole has not been studied in patients with severe hepatic impairment. [see USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.7)]
Levobunolol Hydrochlori...

Levobunolol Hydrochloride Solution

The recommended starting dose is one to two drops of Levobunolol Hydrochloride Ophthalmic Solution 0.5% in the affected eye(s) once a day. In patients with more severe or uncontrolled glaucoma, Levobunolol Hydrochloride Ophthalmic Solution 0.5% can be administered b.i.d. As with any new medication, careful monitoring of patients is advised.

Dosages above one drop of Levobunolol Hydrochloride Ophthalmic Solution 0.5% b.i.d. are not generally more effective. If the patient's IOP is not at a satisfactory level on this regimen, concomitant therapy with dipivefrin and/or epinephrine, and/or pilocarpine and other miotics, and/or systemically administered carbonic anhydrase inhibitors, such as acetazolamide, can be instituted. Patients should not typically use two or more topical ophthalmic beta-adrenergic blocking agents simultaneously.
Proin 75

Proin 75

2.1 Dosage in Adult Kidney, Liver, or Heart Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for adult patients with kidney, liver, or heart transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 1. The initial dose of tacrolimus capsules, USP should be administered no sooner than 6 hours after transplantation in the liver and heart transplant patients. In kidney transplant patients, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules, USP may be administered within 24 hours of transplantation, but should be delayed until renal function has recovered. For blood concentration monitoring details see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.6 ).

Table 1 Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Adults
* In a second smaller trial, the initial dose of tacrolimus was 0.15 to 0.2 mg/kg/day and observed tacrolimus concentrations were 6 to 16 ng/mL during months 1 to 3 and 5 to 12 ng/mL during months 4 to 12 [see CLINICAL STUDIES (14.1)].
Patient Population

Recommended Tacrolimus Capsules Initial Oral Dosage

Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours

Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations

Adult kidney transplant patients

In combination with azathioprine

0.2 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 3: 7 to 20 ng/mL

month 4 to 12: 5 to 15 ng/mL

In combination with MMF/IL-2 receptor antagonist*

0.1 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 12: 4 to 11 ng/mL

Adult liver transplant patients

0.10 to 0.15 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL

Adult heart transplant patients

0.075 mg/kg/day

month 1 to 3: 10 to 20 ng/mL

month ≥4: 5 to 15 ng/mL

Dosing should be titrated based on clinical assessments of rejection and tolerability. Lower tacrolimus capsules, USP dosages than the recommended initial dosage may be sufficient as maintenance therapy. Adjunct therapy with adrenal corticosteroids is recommended early post-transplant.

The data in kidney transplant patients indicate that the Black patients required a higher dose to attain comparable trough concentrations compared to Caucasian patients (Table 2).
Table 2 Comparative Dose and Trough Concentrations Based on Race
Time After Transplant

Caucasian

n=114

Black

n=56

Dose

(mg/kg)

Trough Concentrations

(ng/mL)

Dose

(mg/kg)

Trough Concentrations (ng/mL)

Day 7

0.18

12

0.23

10.9

Month 1

0.17

12.8

0.26

12.9

Month 6

0.14

11.8

0.24

11.5

Month 12

0.13

10.1

0.19

11

Initial Dose – Injection

Tacrolimus injection should be used only as a continuous IV infusion and when the patient cannot tolerate oral administration of tacrolimus capsules, USP. Tacrolimus injection should be discontinued as soon as the patient can tolerate oral administration of tacrolimus capsules, USP, usually within 2 to 3 days. In a patient receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

The observed trough concentrations described above pertain to oral administration of tacrolimus capsules, USP only; while monitoring tacrolimus capsules concentrations in patients receiving tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion may have some utility, the observed concentrations will not represent comparable exposures to those estimated by the trough concentrations observed in patients on oral therapy.

The recommended starting dose of tacrolimus injection is 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day in kidney and liver transplant and 0.01 mg/kg/day in heart transplant given as a continuous IV infusion. Adult patients should receive doses at the lower end of the dosing range. Concomitant adrenal corticosteroid therapy is recommended early post-transplantation.

Anaphylactic reactions have occurred with injectables containing castor oil derivatives, such as tacrolimus injection[see WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS (5.11)].

2.2 Dosage in Pediatric Liver Transplant Patients

The initial oral dosage recommendations for pediatric patients with liver transplants along with recommendations for whole blood trough concentrations are shown in Table 3. For blood concentration monitoring details see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.6 ). If necessary, pediatric patients may start on an IV dose of 0.03 to 0.05 mg/kg/day.
Table 3 Summary of Initial Oral Dosage Recommendations and Observed Whole Blood Trough Concentrations in Children
Patient Population

Recommended Tacrolimus Capsules Initial Oral Dosage

Note: daily doses should be administered as two divided doses, every 12 hours

Observed Tacrolimus Whole Blood Trough Concentrations

Pediatric liver transplant patients

0.15 to 0.20 mg/kg/day

Month 1 to 12: 5 to 20 ng/mL

Pediatric liver transplantation patients without pre-existing renal or hepatic dysfunction have required and tolerated higher doses than adults to achieve similar blood concentrations.

Experience in pediatric kidney and heart transplantation patients is limited.

2.3 Dosage Adjustment in Patients with Renal Impairment

Due to its potential for nephrotoxicity, consideration should be given to dosing tacrolimus capsules, USP at the lower end of the therapeutic dosing range in patients who have received a liver or heart transplant and have pre-existing renal impairment. Further reductions in dose below the targeted range may be required.

In kidney transplant patients with post-operative oliguria, the initial dose of tacrolimus capsules, USP should be administered no sooner than 6 hours and within 24 hours of transplantation, but may be delayed until renal function shows evidence of recovery.

2.4 Dosage Adjustments in Patients with Hepatic Impairment

Due to the reduced clearance and prolonged half-life, patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child Pugh ≥ 10) may require lower doses of tacrolimus capsules, USP. Close monitoring of blood concentrations is warranted.

The use of tacrolimus capsules, USP in liver transplant recipients experiencing post-transplant hepatic impairment may be associated with increased risk of developing renal insufficiency related to high whole-blood concentrations of tacrolimus. These patients should be monitored closely and dosage adjustments should be considered. Some evidence suggests that lower doses should be used in these patients [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.1 ), USE IN SPECIFIC POPULATIONS (8.7) and CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

2.5 Administration Instructions

It is recommended that patients initiate oral therapy with tacrolimus capsules, USP if possible.

Initial dosage and observed tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations for adults are shown in Table 1 and for pediatrics in Table 3 [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.1, 2.2)]; for blood concentration monitoring details in kidney transplant patients [see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION (2.1)].

It is important to take tacrolimus capsules, USP consistently every day either with or without food because the presence and composition of food decreases the bioavailability of tacrolimus capsules, USP [see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY (12.3)].

Patients should not eat grapefruit or drink grapefruit juice in combination with tacrolimus capsules, USP [see DRUG INTERACTIONS (7.2)].

Tacrolimus capsules, USP should not be used simultaneously with cyclosporine. Tacrolimus capsules, USP or cyclosporine should be discontinued at least 24 hours before initiating the other. In the presence of elevated tacrolimus capsules, USP or cyclosporine concentrations, dosing with the other drug usually should be further delayed.

In patients unable to take oral tacrolimus capsules, USP, therapy may be initiated with tacrolimus injection as a continuous IV infusion. If IV therapy is necessary, conversion from IV to oral tacrolimus is recommended as soon as oral therapy can be tolerated. This usually occurs within 2 to 3 days. In patients receiving an IV infusion, the first dose of oral therapy should be given 8 to 12 hours after discontinuing the IV infusion.

2.6 Therapeutic Drug Monitoring

Monitoring of tacrolimus blood concentrations in conjunction with other laboratory and clinical parameters is considered an essential aid to patient management for the evaluation of rejection, toxicity, dose adjustments and compliance. Observed whole blood trough concentrations can be found in Table 1. Factors influencing frequency of monitoring include but are not limited to hepatic or renal dysfunction, the addition or discontinuation of potentially interacting drugs and the post-transplant time. Blood concentration monitoring is not a replacement for renal and liver function monitoring and tissue biopsies. Data from clinical trials show that tacrolimus whole blood concentrations were most variable during the first week post-transplantation.

The relative risks of toxicity and efficacy failure are related to tacrolimus whole blood trough concentrations. Therefore, monitoring of whole blood trough concentrations is recommended to assist in the clinical evaluation of toxicity and efficacy failure.

Methods commonly used for the assay of tacrolimus include high performance liquid chromatography with tandem mass spectrometric detection (HPLC/MS/MS) and immunoassays. Immunoassays may react with metabolites as well as parent compound. Therefore assay results obtained with immunoassays may have a positive bias relative to results of HPLC/MS. The bias may depend upon the specific assay and laboratory. Comparison of the concentrations in published literature to patient concentrations using the current assays must be made with detailed knowledge of the assay methods and biological matrices employed. Whole blood is the matrix of choice and specimens should be collected into tubes containing ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA) anti-coagulant. Heparin anti-coagulation is not recommended because of the tendency to form clots on storage. Samples which are not analyzed immediately should be stored at room temperature or in a refrigerator and assayed within 7 days; see assay instructions for specifics. If samples are to be kept longer they should be deep frozen at -20° C. One study showed drug recovery >90% for samples stored at -20° C for 6 months, with reduced recovery observed after 6 months.
Latanoprost Solution

Latanoprost Solution

The recommended dosage is one drop (1.5 μg) in the affected eye(s) once daily in the evening. If one dose is missed, treatment should continue with the next dose as normal.

The dosage of Latanoprost Ophthalmic Solution should not exceed once daily; the combined use of two or more prostaglandins, or prostaglandin analogs including Latanoprost Ophthalmic Solution is not recommended. It has been shown that administration of these prostaglandin drug products more than once daily may decrease the intraocular pressure lowering effect or cause paradoxical elevations in IOP.

Reduction of the intraocular pressure starts approximately 3 to 4 hours after administration and the maximum effect is reached after 8 to 12 hours.

Latanoprost Ophthalmic Solution may be used concomitantly with other topical ophthalmic drug products to lower intraocular pressure. If more than one topical ophthalmic drug is being used, the drugs should be administered at least five (5) minutes apart.
Arava

Arava

2.1 Epilepsy

Divalproex sodium delayed release capsules are administered orally. As divalproex sodium delayed release capsules dosage is titrated upward, concentrations of clonazepam, diazepam, ethosuximide, lamotrigine, tolbutamide, phenobarbital, carbamazepine, and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Complex Partial Seizures

For adults and children 10 years of age or older.

Monotherapy (Initial Therapy)

Divalproex sodium delayed release capsules have not been systematically studied as initial therapy. Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

The probability of thrombocytopenia increases significantly at total trough valproate plasma concentrations above 110 mcg/mL in females and 135 mcg/mL in males. The benefit of improved seizure control with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

Conversion to Monotherapy

Patients should initiate therapy at 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage should be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50-100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made.

Concomitant antiepilepsy drug (AED) dosage can ordinarily be reduced by approximately 25% every 2 weeks. This reduction may be started at initiation of divalproex sodium delayed release capsules therapy, or delayed by 1 to 2 weeks if there is a concern that seizures are likely to occur with a reduction. The speed and duration of withdrawal of the concomitant AED can be highly variable, and patients should be monitored closely during this period for increased seizure frequency.

Adjunctive Therapy

Divalproex sodium delayed release capsules may be added to the patient's regimen at a dosage of 10 to 15 mg/kg/day. The dosage may be increased by 5 to 10 mg/kg/week to achieve optimal clinical response. Ordinarily, optimal clinical response is achieved at daily doses below 60 mg/kg/day. If satisfactory clinical response has not been achieved, plasma levels should be measured to determine whether or not they are in the usually accepted therapeutic range (50 to 100 mcg/mL). No recommendation regarding the safety of valproate for use at doses above 60 mg/kg/day can be made. If the total daily dose exceeds 250 mg, it should be given in divided doses.

In a study of adjunctive therapy for complex partial seizures in which patients were receiving either carbamazepine or phenytoin in addition to valproate, no adjustment of carbamazepine or phenytoin dosage was needed [see Clinical Studies (14)]. However, since valproate may interact with these or other concurrently administered AEDs as well as other drugs, periodic plasma concentration determinations of concomitant AEDs are recommended during the early course of therapy [see Drug Interactions (7)].

Simple and Complex Absence Seizures

The recommended initial dose is 15 mg/kg/day, increasing at one week intervals by 5 to 10 mg/kg/day until seizures are controlled or side effects preclude further increases. The maximum recommended dosage is 60 mg/kg/day. If the total daily dose exceeds 250 mg, it should be given in divided doses.

A good correlation has not been established between daily dose, serum concentrations, and therapeutic effect. However, therapeutic valproate serum concentrations for most patients with absence seizures are considered to range from 50 to 100 mcg/mL. Some patients may be controlled with lower or higher serum concentrations [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

As the divalproex sodium delayed release capsules dosage is titrated upward, blood concentrations of phenobarbital and/or phenytoin may be affected [see Drug Interactions (7.2)].

Antiepilepsy drugs should not be abruptly discontinued in patients in whom the drug is administered to prevent major seizures because of the strong possibility of precipitating status epilepticus with attendant hypoxia and threat to life.

In epileptic patients previously receiving valproic acid therapy, divalproex sodium delayed release capsules should be initiated at the same daily dose and dosing schedule. After the patient is stabilized on divalproex sodium delayed release capsules, a dosing schedule of two or three times a day may be elected in selected patients.

2.2 General Dosing Advice

Dosing in Elderly Patients

Due to a decrease in unbound clearance of valproate and possibly a greater sensitivity to somnolence in the elderly, the starting dose should be reduced in these patients. Dosage should be increased more slowly and with regular monitoring for fluid and nutritional intake, dehydration, somnolence, and other adverse reactions. Dose reductions or discontinuation of valproate should be considered in patients with decreased food or fluid intake and in patients with excessive somnolence. The ultimate therapeutic dose should be achieved on the basis of both tolerability and clinical response [see Warnings and Precautions (5.14), Use in Specific Populations (8.5) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

Dose-Related Adverse Reactions

The frequency of adverse effects (particularly elevated liver enzymes and thrombocytopenia) may be dose-related. The probability of thrombocytopenia appears to increase significantly at total valproate concentrations of ≥ 110 mcg/mL (females) or ≥ 135 mcg/mL (males) [see Warnings and Precautions (5.8)]. The benefit of improved therapeutic effect with higher doses should be weighed against the possibility of a greater incidence of adverse reactions.

G.I. Irritation

Patients who experience G.I. irritation may benefit from administration of the drug with food or by slowly building up the dose from an initial low level.

Administration of Sprinkle Capsules

Divalproex sodium delayed release capsules may be swallowed whole or may be administered by carefully opening the capsule and sprinkling the entire contents on a small amount (teaspoonful) of soft food such as applesauce or pudding. The drug/food mixture should be swallowed immediately (avoid chewing) and not stored for future use. Each capsule is oversized to allow ease of opening.
Cisatracurium Besylate

Cisatracurium Besylate

CISATRACURIUM BESYLATE INJECTION SHOULD ONLY BE ADMINISTERED INTRAVENOUSLY.

The dosage information provided below is intended as a guide only. Doses of cisatracuriumbesylate injection should be individualized (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY- Individualization of Dosages). The use of a peripheral nerve stimulator will permit the most advantageous use of cisatracuriumbesylate injection, minimize the possibility of overdosage or underdosage, and assist in the evaluation of recovery.

Adults

Initial Doses

One of two intubating doses of cisatracurium besylate may be chosen, based on the desired time to tracheal intubation and the anticipated length of surgery. In addition to the dose of neuromuscular blocking agent, the presence of co-induction agents (e.g., fentanyl and midazolam) and the depth of anesthesia are factors that can influence intubation conditions. Doses of 0.15 (3 × ED95) and 0.20 (4 × ED95) mg/kg cisatracurium besylate, as components of a propofol/nitrous oxide/oxygen induction-intubation technique, may produce generally GOOD or EXCELLENT conditions for intubation in 2 and 1.5 minutes, respectively. Similar intubation conditions may be expected when these doses of cisatracurium besylate injection are administered as components of a thiopental/nitrous oxide/oxygen induction-intubation technique. In two intubation studies using thiopental or propofol and midazolam and fentanyl as co-induction agents, EXCELLENT intubation conditions were most frequently achieved with the 0.2 mg/kg compared to 0.15 mg/kg dose of cisatracurium besylate injection. The clinically effective durations of action for 0.15 and 0.20 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection during propofol anesthesia are 55 minutes (range: 44 to 74 minutes) and 61 minutes (range: 41 to 81 minutes), respectively. Lower doses may result in a longer time for the development of satisfactory intubation conditions. Doses up to 8 × ED95 cisatracurium besylate injection have been safely administered to healthy adult patients and patients with serious cardiovascular disease. These larger doses are associated with longer clinically effective durations of action (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY).

Because slower times to onset of complete neuromuscular block were observed in elderly patients and patients with renal dysfunction, extending the interval between administration of cisatracurium besylate injection and the intubation attempt for these patients may be required to achieve adequate intubation conditions.

A dose of 0.03 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection is recommended for maintenance of neuromuscular block during prolonged surgical procedures. Maintenance doses of 0.03 mg/kg each sustain neuromuscular block for approximately 20 minutes. Maintenance dosing is generally required 40 to 50 minutes following an initial dose of 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate and 50 to 60 minutes following an initial dose of 0.20 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate, but the need for maintenance doses should be determined by clinical criteria. For shorter or longer durations of action, smaller or larger maintenance doses may be administered.

Isoflurane or enflurane administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen to achieve 1.25 MAC (Minimum Alveolar Concentration) may prolong the clinically effective duration of action of initial and maintenance doses. The magnitude of these effects may depend on the duration of administration of the volatile agents. Fifteen to 30 minutes of exposure to 1.25 MAC isoflurane or enflurane had minimal effects on the duration of action of initial doses of cisatracurium besylate injection and therefore, no adjustment to the initial dose should be necessary when cisatracurium besylate injection is administered shortly after initiation of volatile agents. In long surgical procedures during enflurane or isoflurane anesthesia, less frequent maintenance dosing or lower maintenance doses of cisatracurium besylate injection may be necessary. No adjustments to the initial dose of cisatracurium besylate injection are required when used in patients receiving propofol anesthesia.

Children

Initial Doses

The recommended dose of cisatracurium besylate injection for children 2 to 12 years of age is 0.10-0.15 mg/kg administered over 5 to 10 seconds during either halothane or opioid anesthesia. When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.10 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate injection produces maximum neuromuscular block in an average of 2.8 minutes (range: 1.8 to 6.7 minutes) and clinically effective block for 28 minutes (range: 21 to 38 minutes). When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate produces maximum neuromuscular block in about 3 minutes (range: 1.5 to 8 minutes) and clinically effective block (time to 25% recovery) for 36 minutes (range: 29 to 46 minutes).

Infants

Initial Doses

The recommended dose of cisatracurium besylate injection for intubation of infants 1 month to 23 months is 0.15 mg/kg administered over 5 to 10 seconds during either halothane or opioid anesthesia. When administered during stable opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia, 0.15 mg/kg cisatracurium besylate produces maximum neuromuscular block in about 2 minutes (range: 1.3 to 3.4 minutes) and clinically effective block (time to 25% recovery) for about 43 minutes (range: 34 to 58 minutes).

Use by Continuous Infusion

Infusion in the Operating Room (OR)

After administration of an initial bolus dose of cisatracurium besylate, a diluted solution of cisatracurium besylate injection can be administered by continuous infusion to adults and children aged 2 or more years for maintenance of neuromuscular block during extended surgical procedures. Infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection should be individualized for each patient. The rate of administration should be adjusted according to the patient's response as determined by peripheral nerve stimulation. Accurate dosing is best achieved using a precision infusion device.

Infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection should be initiated only after early evidence of spontaneous recovery from the initial bolus dose. An initial infusion rate of 3 mcg/kg/min may be required to rapidly counteract the spontaneous recovery of neuromuscular function. Thereafter, a rate of 1 to 2 mcg/kg/min should be adequate to maintain continuous neuromuscular block in the range of 89% to 99% in most pediatric and adult patients under opioid/nitrous oxide/oxygen anesthesia.

Reduction of the infusion rate by up to 30% to 40% should be considered when cisatracurium besylate injection is administered during stable isoflurane or enflurane anesthesia (administered with nitrous oxide/oxygen at the 1.25 MAC level). Greater reductions in the infusion rate of cisatracurium besylate injection may be required with longer durations of administration of isoflurane or enflurane.

The rate of infusion of atracurium required to maintain adequate surgical relaxation in patients undergoing coronary artery bypass surgery with induced hypothermia (25° to 28°C) is approximately half the rate required during normothermia. Based on the structural similarity between cisatracurium besylate injection and atracurium, a similar effect on the infusion rate of cisatracurium besylate injection may be expected.

Spontaneous recovery from neuromuscular block following discontinuation of infusion of cisatracurium besylate may be expected to proceed at a rate comparable to that following administration of a single bolus dose.

Infusion in the Intensive Care Unit (ICU)

The principles for infusion of cisatracurium besylate injection in the OR are also applicable to use in the ICU. An infusion rate of approximately 3 mcg/kg/min (range: 0.5 to 10.2 mcg/kg/min) should provide adequate neuromuscular block in adult patients in the ICU. There may be wide interpatient variability in dosage requirements and these may increase or decrease with time (see PRECAUTIONS - Long-Term Use in the Intensive Care Unit (ICU)). Following recovery from neuromuscular block, readministration of a bolus dose may be necessary to quickly re-establish neuromuscular block prior to reinstitution of the infusion.

Infusion Rate Tables

The amount of infusion solution required per minute will depend upon the concentration of cisatracurium besylate in the infusion solution, the desired dose of cisatracurium besylate, and the patient's weight. The contribution of the infusion solution to the fluid requirements of the patient also must be considered. Tables 10 and 11 provide guidelines for delivery, in mL/hr (equivalent to microdrops/minute when 60 microdrops = 1 mL), of cisatracurium besylate solutions in concentrations of 0.1 mg/mL (10 mg/100 mL) or 0.4 mg/mL (40 mg/100 mL).
Table 10. Infusion Rates of Cisatracurium Besylate for Maintenance of Neuromuscular Block During Opioid/Nitrous Oxide/Oxygen Anesthesia for a Concentration of 0.1 mg/mL Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)
1

1.5

2

3

5

Patient Weight (kg)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

6

9

12

18

30

45

27

41

54

81

135

70

42

63

84

126

210

100

60

90

120

180

300
Table 11. Infusion Rates of Cisatracurium Besylate for Maintenance of Neuromuscular Block During Opioid/Nitrous Oxide/Oxygen Anesthesia for a Concentration of 0.4 mg/mL Drug Delivery Rate (mcg/kg/min)
1

1.5

2

3

5

Patient Weight (kg)

Infusion Delivery Rate (mL/hr)

10

1.5

2.3

3

4.5

7.5

45

6.8

10.1

13.5

20.3

33.8

70

10.5

15.8

21

31.5

52.5

100

15

22.5

30

45

75

Cisatracurium Besylate Injection Compatibility and Admixtures

Y-site Administration

Cisatracurium besylate injection is acidic (pH = 3.25 to 3.65) and may not be compatible with alkaline solution having a pH greater than 8.5 (e.g., barbiturate solutions).

Studies have shown that cisatracurium besylate injection is compatible with:
• 5% Dextrose injection, USP • 0.9% Sodium chloride injection, USP • 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium chloride injection, USP • SUFENTA ® (sufentanil citrate) injection, diluted as directed • ALFENTA ® (alfentanil hydrochloride) injection, diluted as directed • SUBLIMAZE ® (fentanyl citrate) injection, diluted as directed • VERSED ® (midazolam hydrochloride) injection, diluted as directed • Droperidol injection, diluted as directed
Cisatracurium besylate injection is not compatible with DIPRIVAN® (propofol) injection or TORADOL® (ketorolac) injection for Y-site administration. Studies of other parenteral products have not been conducted.

Dilution Stability

Cisatracurium besylate injection diluted in 5% Dextrose Injection, USP; 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP; or 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, USP to 0.1 mg/mL may be stored either under refrigeration or at room temperature for 24 hours without significant loss of potency. Dilutions to 0.1 mg/mL or 0.2 mg/mL in 5% Dextrose and Lactated Ringer's Injection may be stored under refrigeration for 24 hours.

Cisatracurium besylate injection should not be diluted in Lactated Ringer's Injection, USP due to chemical instability.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration whenever solution and container permit. Solutions which are not clear, or contain visible particulates, should not be used. Cisatracurium besylate injection is a colorless to slightly yellow or greenish-yellow solution.
Omnitrope

Omnitrope

The weekly dose should be divided over 6 or 7 days of subcutaneous injections.

Therapy with Omnitrope® should be supervised by a physician who is experienced in the diagnosis and management of pediatric patients with short stature associated with GHD, Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS), Turner syndrome (TS), those who were born small for gestational age (SGA), Idiopathic Short Stature (ISS) and adult patients with either childhood onset or adult onset GHD.

2.1 Dosing of Pediatric Patients

General Pediatric Dosing Information

The Omnitrope® dosage and administration schedule should be individualized based on the growth response of each patient.

Response to somatropin therapy in pediatric patients tends to decrease with time. However, in pediatric patients, the failure to increase growth rate, particularly during the first year of therapy, indicates the need for close assessment of compliance and evaluation for other causes of growth failure, such as hypothyroidism, undernutrition, advanced bone age and antibodies to recombinant human GH (rhGH).

Treatment with Omnitrope® for short stature should be discontinued when the epiphyses are fused.

Pediatric Growth Hormone Deficiency (GHD)

Generally, a dosage of 0.16 to 0.24 mg/kg body weight /week is recommended. The weekly dose should be divided over 6 or 7 days of subcutaneous injections.

Prader-Willi Syndrome (PWS)

Generally, a dosage of 0.24 mg/kg body weight/week is recommended. The weekly dose should be divided over 6 or 7 days of subcutaneous injections.

Small for Gestational Age (SGA)

Generally, a dosage of up to 0.48 mg/kg body weight/week is recommended. The weekly dose should be divided over 6 or 7 days of subcutaneous injections.

Turner Syndrome (TS)

Generally, a dose of 0.33 mg/kg body weight/week is recommended. The weekly dose should be divided over 6 or 7 days of subcutaneous injections.

Idiopathic Short Stature (ISS)

Generally, a dose up to 0.47 mg/kg of body weight/week is recommended. The weekly dose should be divided over 6 or 7 days of subcutaneous injections.

2.2 Dosing of Adult Patients

Adult Growth Hormone Deficiency (GHD)

Based on the weight-based dosing utilized in clinical studies with another somatropin product, the recommended dosage at the start of therapy is not more than 0.04 mg/kg/week given as a daily subcutaneous injection. The dose may be increased at 4- to 8-week intervals according to individual patient requirements to not more than 0.08 mg/kg/week. Clinical response, side effects, and determination of age- and gender-adjusted serum IGF-I levels may be used as guidance in dose titration.

Alternatively, taking into account recent literature, a starting dose of approximately 0.2 mg/day (range, 0.15-0.30 mg/day) may be used without consideration of body weight. This dose can be increased gradually every 1-2 months by increments of approximately 0.1 to 0.2 mg/day, according to individual patient requirements based on the clinical response and serum IGF-I concentrations. During therapy, the dose should be decreased if required by the occurrence of adverse events and/or serum IGF-I levels above the age- and gender-specific normal range. Maintenance dosages vary considerably from person to person.

A lower starting dose and smaller dose increments should be considered for older patients, who are more prone to the adverse effects of somatropin than younger individuals. In addition, obese individuals are more likely to manifest adverse effects when treated with a weight-based regimen. In order to reach the defined treatment goal, estrogen-replete women may need higher doses than men. Oral estrogen administration may increase the dose requirements in women.

2.3 Preparation and Administration

Omnitrope® Cartridge 5 mg/1.5 mL and Cartridge 10 mg/1.5 mL

Each cartridge of Omnitrope® must be inserted into its corresponding Omnitrope® Pen 5 or Omnitrope® Pen 10 delivery system. Instructions for delivering the dosage are provided in the Omnitrope® INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE booklet enclosed with the Omnitrope® drug and the Omnitrope® Pens.

Omnitrope® for injection 5.8 mg/vial

Instructions for delivering the dosage are provided in the INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE leaflets enclosed with the Omnitrope® drug.

Once the diluent is added to the lyophilized powder, swirl gently; do not shake. Shaking may cause denaturation of the active ingredient.

Parenteral drug products should always be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Omnitrope® MUST NOT BE INJECTED if the solution is cloudy or contains particulate matter. Use it only if it is clear and colorless. Omnitrope must be refrigerated at 2° to 8°C (36° to 46°F).

Patients and caregivers who will administer Omnitrope® in medically unsupervised situations should receive appropriate training and instruction on the proper use of Omnitrope® from the physician or other suitably qualified health professional.

The dosage of Omnitrope® must be adjusted for the individual patient. The dose should be given daily by subcutaneous injections (administered preferably in the evening). Omnitrope® may be given in the thigh, buttocks, or abdomen.

Injection sites should always be rotated to avoid lipoatrophy.
Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone Sodium

Ceftriaxone may be administered intravenously or intramuscularly.

Do not use diluents containing calcium, such as Ringer’s solution or Hartmann’s solution, to reconstitute ceftriaxone vials or to further dilute a reconstituted vial for IV administration because a precipitate can form. Precipitation of ceftriaxone-calcium can also occur when ceftriaxone is mixed with calcium-containing solutions in the same IV administration line.

Ceftriaxone must not be administered simultaneously with calcium-containing IV solutions, including continuous calcium-containing infusions such as parenteral nutrition via a Y-site. However, in patients other than neonates, ceftriaxone and calcium-containing solutions may be administered sequentially of one another if the infusion lines are thoroughly flushed between infusions with a compatible fluid (see WARNINGS).

There have been no reports of an interaction between ceftriaxone and oral calcium-containing products or interaction between intramuscular ceftriaxone and calcium-containing products (IV or oral).

Neonates

Hyperbilirubinemic neonates, especially prematures, should not be treated with ceftriaxone for injection. Ceftriaxone is contraindicated in premature neonates (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Ceftriaxone is contraindicated in neonates (≤ 28 days) if they require (or are expected to require) treatment with calcium-containing IV solutions, including continuous calcium-containing infusions such as parenteral nutrition because of the risk of precipitation of ceftriaxone-calcium (see CONTRAINDICATIONS).

Intravenous doses should be given over 60 minutes in neonates to reduce the risk of bilirubin encephalopathy.

Pediatric Patients

For the treatment of skin and skin structure infections, the recommended total daily dose is 50 to 75 mg/kg given once a day (or in equally divided doses twice a day). The total daily dose should not exceed 2 grams.

For the treatment of acute bacterial otitis media, a single intramuscular dose of 50 mg/kg (not to exceed 1 gram) is recommended (see INDICATIONS AND USAGE).

For the treatment of serious miscellaneous infections other than meningitis, the recommended total daily dose is 50 to 75 mg/kg, given in divided doses every 12 hours. The total daily dose should not exceed 2 grams.

In the treatment of meningitis, it is recommended that the initial therapeutic dose be 100 mg/kg (not to exceed 4 grams). Thereafter, a total daily dose of 100 mg/kg/day (not to exceed 4 grams daily) is recommended. The daily dose may be administered once a day (or in equally divided doses every 12 hours). The usual duration of therapy is 7 to 14 days.

Adults

The usual adult daily dose is 1 to 2 grams given once a day (or in equally divided doses twice a day) depending on the type and severity of infection. The total daily dose should not exceed 4 grams.

If Chlamydia trachomatis is a suspected pathogen, appropriate antichlamydial coverage should be added, because ceftriaxone sodium has no activity against this organism.

For the treatment of uncomplicated gonococcal infections, a single intramuscular dose of 250 mg is recommended.

For preoperative use (surgical prophylaxis), a single dose of 1 gram administered intravenously 1/2 to 2 hours before surgery is recommended.

Generally, ceftriaxone therapy should be continued for at least 2 days after the signs and symptoms of infection have disappeared. The usual duration of therapy is 4 to 14 days; in complicated infections, longer therapy may be required.

When treating infections caused by Streptococcus pyogenes, therapy should be continued for at least 10 days.

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with impairment of renal or hepatic function (see PRECAUTIONS).

The dosages recommended for adults require no modification in elderly patients, up to 2 g per day, provided there is no severe renal and hepatic impairment (see PRECAUTIONS).

Directions for Use

Intramuscular Administration

Reconstitute ceftriaxone sodium powder with the appropriate diluent (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Compatibility and Stability).

Inject diluent into vial, shake vial thoroughly to form solution. Withdraw entire contents of vial into syringe to equal total labeled dose.

After reconstitution, each 1 mL of solution contains approximately 250 mg or 350 mg equivalent of ceftriaxone according to the amount of diluent indicated below. If required, more dilute solutions could be utilized. A 350 mg/mL concentration is not recommended for the 250 mg vial since it may not be possible to withdraw the entire contents.

As with all intramuscular preparations, ceftriaxone should be injected well within the body of a relatively large muscle; aspiration helps to avoid unintentional injection into a blood vessel.
Vial Dosage Size Amount of Diluent to be Added 250 mg/mL 350 mg/mL
250 mg

0.9 mL

–

500 mg

1.8 mL

1 mL

1 g

3.6 mL

2.1 mL

2 g

7.2 mL

4.2 mL

Intravenous Administration

Ceftriaxone should be administered intravenously by infusion over a period of 30 minutes, except in neonates where administration over 60 minutes is recommended to reduce the risk of bilirubin encephalopathy. Concentrations between 10 mg/mL and 40 mg/mL are recommended; however, lower concentrations may be used if desired. Reconstitute vials with an appropriate IV diluent (see DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION: Compatibility and Stability).
Vial Dosage Size Amount of Diluent to be Added
250 mg

2.4 mL

500 mg

4.8 mL

1 g

9.6 mL

2 g

19.2 mL

After reconstitution, each 1 mL of solution contains approximately 100 mg equivalent of ceftriaxone. Withdraw entire contents and dilute to the desired concentration with the appropriate IV diluent.

Compatibility and Stability

Do not use diluents containing calcium, such as Ringer’s solution or Hartmann’s solution, to reconstitute ceftriaxone for injection vials or to further dilute a reconstituted vial for IV administration. Particulate formation can result.

Ceftriaxone has been shown to be compatible with Flagyl® IV (metronidazole hydrochloride). The concentration should not exceed 5 to 7.5 mg/mL metronidazole hydrochloride with ceftriaxone 10 mg/mL as an admixture. The admixture is stable for 24 hours at room temperature only in 0.9% sodium chloride injection or 5% dextrose in water (D5W). No compatibility studies have been conducted with the Flagyl® IV RTU® (metronidazole) formulation or using other diluents. Metronidazole at concentrations greater than 8 mg/mL will precipitate. Do not refrigerate the admixture as precipitation will occur.

Vancomycin, amsacrine, aminoglycosides, and fluconazole are incompatible with ceftriaxone in admixtures. When any of these drugs are to be administered concomitantly with ceftriaxone by intermittent intravenous infusion, it is recommended that they be given sequentially, with thorough flushing of the intravenous lines (with one of the compatible fluids) between the administrations.

Ceftriaxone for injection solutions should not be physically mixed with or piggybacked into solutions containing other antimicrobial drugs or into diluent solutions other than those listed above, due to possible incompatibility (see WARNINGS).

Ceftriaxone sodium sterile powder should be stored at 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature] and protected from light. After reconstitution, protection from normal light is not necessary. The color of solutions ranges from light yellow to amber, depending on the length of storage, concentration and diluent used.

Ceftriaxone intramuscular solutions remain stable (loss of potency less than 10%) for the following time periods:
Diluent Concentration Storage mg/mL Room Temp. (25°C) Refrigerated (4°C)
Sterile Water for Injection

100

250, 350

2 days

24 hours

10 days

3 days

0.9% Sodium Chloride Solution

100

250, 350

2 days

24 hours

10 days

3 days

5% Dextrose Solution

100

250, 350

2 days

24 hours

10 days

3 days

Bacteriostatic Water + 0.9% Benzyl Alcohol

100

250, 350

24 hours

24 hours

10 days

3 days

1% Lidocaine Solution (without epinephrine)

100

250, 350

24 hours

24 hours

10 days

3 days

Ceftriaxone intravenous solutions, at concentrations of 10, 20 and 40 mg/mL, remain stable (loss of potency less than 10%) for the following time periods stored in glass or PVC containers:
Diluent Storage Room Temp. (25°C) Refrigerated (4°C) * Data available for 10 to 40 mg/mL concentrations in this diluent in PVC containers only.
Sterile Water

2 days

10 days

0.9% Sodium

Chloride Solution

2 days

10 days

5% Dextrose Solution

2 days

10 days

10% Dextrose Solution

2 days

10 days

5% Dextrose + 0.9%

Sodium Chloride Solution*

2 days

Incompatible

5% Dextrose + 0.45%

Sodium Chloride Solution

2 days

Incompatible

The following intravenous ceftriaxone solutions are stable at room temperature (25°C) for 24 hours, at concentrations between 10 mg/mL and 40 mg/mL: Sodium Lactate (PVC container), 10% Invert Sugar (glass container), 5% Sodium Bicarbonate (glass container), Freamine III (glass container), Normosol-M in 5% Dextrose (glass and PVC containers), Ionosol-B in 5% Dextrose (glass container), 5% Mannitol (glass container), 10% Mannitol (glass container).

After the indicated stability time periods, unused portions of solutions should be discarded.

NOTE: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter before administration.

Ceftriaxone reconstituted with 5% Dextrose or 0.9% Sodium Chloride solution at concentrations between 10 mg/mL and 40 mg/mL, and then stored in frozen state (-20°C) in PVC or polyolefin containers, remains stable for 26 weeks.

Frozen solutions of ceftriaxone for injection should be thawed at room temperature before use. After thawing, unused portions should be discarded. DO NOT REFREEZE.
Ondansetron

Ondansetron

2.1 Prevention of Nausea and Vomiting Associated with Initial and Repeat Courses of Emetogenic Chemotherapy

Ondansetron Injection, USP should be diluted in 50 mL of 5% Dextrose Injection or 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection before administration.

Adults

The recommended adult intravenous dosage of Ondansetron Injection, USP is three 0.15-mg/kg doses up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.2)]. The first dose is infused over 15 minutes beginning 30 minutes before the start of emetogenic chemotherapy. Subsequent doses (0.15 mg/kg up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose) are administered 4 and 8 hours after the first dose of Ondansetron Injection, USP.

Pediatrics

For pediatric patients 6 months through 18 years of age, the intravenous dosage of Ondansetron Injection, USP is three 0.15-mg/kg doses up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose [see Clinical Studies (14.1) and Clinical Pharmacology (12.2, 12.3)]. The first dose is to be administered 30 minutes before the start of moderately to highly emetogenic chemotherapy. Subsequent doses (0.15 mg/kg up to a maximum of 16 mg per dose) are administered 4 and 8 hours after the first dose of Ondansetron Injection, USP. The drug should be infused intravenously over 15 minutes.

2.2 Prevention of Postoperative Nausea and Vomiting

Ondansetron Injection, USP should not be mixed with solutions for which physical and chemical compatibility have not been established. In particular, this applies to alkaline solutions as a precipitate may form.

Adults

The recommended adult intravenous dosage of Ondansetron Injection, USP is 4 mg undiluted administered intravenously in not less than 30 seconds, preferably over 2 to 5 minutes, immediately before induction of anesthesia, or postoperatively if the patient did not receive prophylactic antiemetics and experiences nausea and/or vomiting occurring within 2 hours after surgery. Alternatively, 4 mg undiluted may be administered intramuscularly as a single injection for adults. While recommended as a fixed dose for patients weighing more than 40 kg, few patients above 80 kg have been studied. In patients who do not achieve adequate control of postoperative nausea and vomiting following a single, prophylactic, preinduction, intravenous dose of ondansetron 4 mg, administration of a second intravenous dose of 4 mg ondansetron postoperatively does not provide additional control of nausea and vomiting.

Pediatrics

For pediatric patients 1 month through 12 years of age, the dosage is a single 0.1-mg/kg dose for patients weighing 40 kg or less, or a single 4-mg dose for patients weighing more than 40 kg. The rate of administration should not be less than 30 seconds, preferably over 2 to 5 minutes immediately prior to or following anesthesia induction, or postoperatively if the patient did not receive prophylactic antiemetics and experiences nausea and/or vomiting occurring shortly after surgery. Prevention of further nausea and vomiting was only studied in patients who had not received prophylactic Ondansetron Injection, USP.

2.3 Stability and Handling

After dilution, do not use beyond 24 hours. Although Ondansetron Injection, USP is chemically and physically stable when diluted as recommended, sterile precautions should be observed because diluents generally do not contain preservative.

Ondansetron Injection, USP is stable at room temperature under normal lighting conditions for 48 hours after dilution with the following intravenous fluids: 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.9% Sodium Chloride Injection, 5% Dextrose and 0.45% Sodium Chloride Injection, and 3% Sodium Chloride Injection.

Note: Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration before administration whenever solution and container permit.

Precaution: Occasionally, ondansetron precipitates at the stopper/vial interface in vials stored upright. Potency and safety are not affected. If a precipitate is observed, resolubilize by shaking the vial vigorously.

2.4 Dosage Adjustment for Patients with Impaired Hepatic Function

In patients with severe hepatic impairment (Child-Pugh score of 10 or greater), a single maximal daily dose of 8 mg infused over 15 minutes beginning 30 minutes before the start of the emetogenic chemotherapy is recommended. There is no experience beyond first-day administration of ondansetron in these patients [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].
Metformin Hydrochloride...

Metformin Hydrochloride

There is no fixed dosage regimen for the management of hyperglycemia in patients with type 2 diabetes with metformin or any other pharmacologic agent. Dosage of metformin must be individualized on the basis of both effectiveness and tolerance, while not exceeding the maximum recommended daily dose. The maximum recommended daily dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 2550 mg in adults and 2000 mg in pediatric patients (10 to 16 years of age).

Metformin should be given in divided doses with meals and should be started at a low dose, with gradual dose escalation, both to reduce gastrointestinal side effects and to permit identification of the minimum dose required for adequate glycemic control of the patient.

During treatment initiation and dose titration (see Recommended Dosing Schedule), fasting plasma glucose should be used to determine the therapeutic response to metformin and identify the minimum effective dose for the patient. Thereafter, glycosylated hemoglobin should be measured at intervals of approximately three months. The therapeutic goal should be to decrease both fasting plasma glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin levels to normal or near normal by using the lowest effective dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets, either when used as monotherapy or in combination with sulfonylurea or insulin.

Monitoring of blood glucose and glycosylated hemoglobin will also permit detection of primary failure, i.e., inadequate lowering of blood glucose at the maximum recommended dose of medication, and secondary failure, i.e., loss of an adequate blood glucose lowering response after an initial period of effectiveness.

Short-term administration of metformin may be sufficient during periods of transient loss of control in patients usually well-controlled on diet alone.

Recommended Dosing Schedule

Adults

In general, clinically significant responses are not seen at doses below 1500 mg per day. However, a lower recommended starting dose and gradually increased dosage is advised to minimize gastrointestinal symptoms.

The usual starting dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets is 500 mg twice a day or 850 mg once a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly or 850 mg every 2 weeks, up to a total of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses. Patients can also be titrated from 500 mg twice a day to 850 mg twice a day after 2 weeks. For those patients requiring additional glycemic control, metformin may be given to a maximum daily dose of 2550 mg per day. Doses above 2000 mg may be better tolerated given three times a day with meals.

Pediatrics

The usual starting dose of metformin tablets is 500 mg twice a day, given with meals. Dosage increases should be made in increments of 500 mg weekly up to a maximum of 2000 mg per day, given in divided doses.

Transfer from Other Antidiabetic Therapy

When transferring patients from standard oral hypoglycemic agents other than chlorpropamide to metformin, no transition period generally is necessary. When transferring patients from chlorpropamide, care should be exercised during the first two weeks because of the prolonged retention of chlorpropamide in the body, leading to overlapping drug effects and possible hypoglycemia.

Concomitant Metformin Hydrochloride and Oral Sulfonylurea Therapy in Adult Patients

If patients have not responded to four weeks of the maximum dose of metformin HCl monotherapy, consideration should be given to gradual addition of an oral sulfonylurea while continuing metformin HCl tablets at the maximum dose, even if prior primary or secondary failure to a sulfonylurea has occurred. Clinical and pharmacokinetic drug-drug interaction data are currently available only for metformin plus glyburide (glibenclamide).

With concomitant metformin HCl and sulfonylurea therapy, the desired control of blood glucose may be obtained by adjusting the dose of each drug. In a clinical trial of patients with type 2 diabetes and prior failure on glyburide, patients started on metformin 500 mg and glyburide 20 mg were titrated to 1000/20 mg, 1500/20 mg, 2000/20 mg or 2500/20 mg of metformin and glyburide, respectively, to reach the goal of glycemic control as measured by FPG, HbA1c and plasma glucose response (see CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY: Clinical Studies). However, attempts should be made to identify the minimum effective dose of each drug to achieve this goal. With concomitant metformin HCl and sulfonylurea therapy, the risk of hypoglycemia associated with sulfonylurea therapy continues and may be increased. Appropriate precautions should be taken. (See Package Insert of the respective sulfonylurea.)

If patients have not satisfactorily responded to one to three months of concomitant therapy with the maximum dose of metformin and the maximum dose of an oral sulfonylurea, consider therapeutic alternatives including switching to insulin with or without metformin.

Concomitant Metformin and Insulin Therapy in Adult Patients

The current insulin dose should be continued upon initiation of metformin therapy. Metformin therapy should be initiated at 500 mg once daily in patients on insulin therapy. For patients not responding adequately, the dose of metformin should be increased by 500 mg after approximately 1 week and by 500 mg every week thereafter until adequate glycemic control is achieved. The maximum recommended daily dose is 2500 mg for metformin. It is recommended that the insulin dose be decreased by 10% to 25% when fasting plasma glucose concentrations decrease to less than 120 mg/dL in patients receiving concomitant insulin and metformin. Further adjustment should be individualized based on glucose-lowering response.

Specific Patient Populations

Metformin is not recommended for use in pregnancy. Metformin is not recommended in patients below the age of 10 years.

The initial and maintenance dosing of metformin hydrochloride tablets should be conservative in patients with advanced age, due to the potential for decreased renal function in this population. Any dosage adjustment should be based on a careful assessment of renal function. Generally, elderly, debilitated, and malnourished patients should not be titrated to the maximum dose of metformin hydrochloride tablets.

Monitoring of renal function is necessary to aid in prevention of lactic acidosis, particularly in the elderly. (See WARNINGS.)
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride

adults and children 6 years and over

One 10 mg tablet once daily; do not take more than one 10 mg tablet in 24 hours. A 5 mg product may be appropriate for less severe symptoms.

adults 65 years and over

ask a doctor

children under 6 years of age

ask a doctor

consumers with liver or kidney disease

ask a doctor

Other information
• Store between 20º to 25º C (68º to 77º F)
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride

• may be taken with or without water
adults and children 6 years and over

1 to 2 tablets once daily; depending upon severity of symptoms; do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours

adults 65 years and over

1 tablet once a day; do not take more than 1 tablet in 24 hours

children under 6 years of age

ask a doctor

consumers with liver or kidney disease

ask a doctor

Other information
• Store between 20º to 25º C (68º to 77º F)
Cetirizine Hydrochlorid...

Cetirizine Hydrochloride

adults and children 6 years and over

1 to 2 tablets once daily; depending upon severity of symptoms; do not take more than 2 tablets in 24 hours

adults 65 years and over

1 tablet once a day; do not take more than 1 tablet in 24 hours

children under 6 years of age

ask a doctor

consumers with liver or kidney disease

ask a doctor

Other information
• Store between 20º to 25º C (68º to 77º F)
Altavera

Altavera

There is currently no dosage information available for this product. We apologize for any inconvenience.
Testosterone Cypionate

Testosterone Cypionate

Testosterone cypionate injection, USP is for intramuscular use only.

It should not be given intravenously. Intramuscular injections should be given deep in the gluteal muscle.

The suggested dosage for testosterone cypionate injection, USP varies depending on the age, sex, and diagnosis of the individual patient. Dosage is adjusted according to the patient’s response and the appearance of adverse reactions.

Various dosage regimens have been used to induce pubertal changes in hypogonadal males; some experts have advocated lower dosages initially, gradually increasing the dose as puberty progresses, with or without a decrease to maintenance levels. Other experts emphasize that higher dosages are needed to induce pubertal changes and lower dosages can be used for maintenance after puberty. The chronological and skeletal ages must be taken into consideration, both in determining the initial dose and in adjusting the dose.

For replacement in the hypogonadal male, 50 to 400 mg should be administered every two to four weeks.

Parenteral drug products should be inspected visually for particulate matter and discoloration prior to administration, whenever solution and container permit. Warming and shaking the vial should redissolve any crystals that may have formed during storage at temperatures lower than recommended.
Amitriptyline Hydrochlo...

Amitriptyline Hydrochloride

Oral Dosage

Dosage should be initiated at a low level and increased gradually, noting carefully the clinical response and any evidence of intolerance.

Initial Dosage for Adults

For outpatients, 75 mg of amitriptyline HCl a day in divided doses is usually satisfactory. If necessary, this may be increased to a total of 150 mg per day. Increases are made preferably in the late afternoon and/or bedtime doses. A sedative effect may be apparent before the antidepressant effect is noted, but an adequate therapeutic effect may take as long as 30 days to develop.

An alternate method of initiating therapy in outpatients is to begin with 50 to 100 mg amitriptyline HCl at bedtime. This may be increased by 25 or 50 mg as necessary in the bedtime dose to a total of 150 mg per day.

Hospitalized patients may require 100 mg a day initially. This can be increased gradually to 200 mg a day if necessary. A small number of hospitalized patients may need as much as 300 mg a day.

Adolescent and Elderly Patients

In general, lower dosages are recommended for these patients. Ten mg 3 times a day with 20 mg at bedtime may be satisfactory in adolescent and elderly patients who do not tolerate higher dosages.

Maintenance

The usual maintenance dosage of amitriptyline HCl is 50 to 100 mg per day. In some patients, 40 mg per day is sufficient. For maintenance therapy, the total daily dosage may be given in a single dose, preferably at bedtime. When satisfactory improvement has been reached, dosage should be reduced to the lowest amount that will maintain relief of symptoms. It is appropriate to continue maintenance therapy 3 months or longer to lessen the possibility of relapse.

Usage in Pediatric Patients

In view of the lack of experience with the use of this drug in pediatric patients, it is not recommended at the present time for patients under 12 years of age.

Plasma Levels

Because of the wide variation in the absorption and distribution of tricyclic antidepressants in body fluids, it is difficult to directly correlate plasma levels and therapeutic effect. However, determination of plasma levels may be useful in identifying patients who appear to have toxic effects and may have excessively high levels, or those in whom lack of absorption or noncompliance is suspected. Because of increased intestinal transit time and decreased hepatic metabolism in elderly patients, plasma levels are generally higher for a given oral dose of amitriptyline hydrochloride than in younger patients. Elderly patients should be monitored carefully and quantitative serum levels obtained as clinically appropriate. Adjustments in dosage should be made according to the patient’s clinical response and not on the basis of plasma levels.2
2 Hollister, L.E.; Monitoring Tricyclic Antidepressant Plasma Concentrations. JAMA 1979; 241(23):2530-2533.
Oxycodone Hydrochloride...

Oxycodone Hydrochloride

2.1 Initial Dosing

OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS should be prescribed only by healthcare professionals who are knowledgeable in the use of potent opioids for the management of chronic pain.

OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS 80 mg tablets, a single dose greater than 40 mg, or a total daily dose greater than 80 mg are only for use in patients in whom tolerance to an opioid of comparable potency has been established. Patients considered opioid tolerant are those receiving, for one week or longer, at least 60 mg oral morphine/day, 25 mcg transdermal fentanyl/hour, 30 mg oral oxycodone/day, 8 mg oral hydromorphone/day, 25 mg oral oxymorphone/day, or an equianalgesic dose of another opioid.

Initiate the dosing regimen for each patient individually, taking into account the patient's prior analgesic treatment experience, and risk factors for addiction, abuse, and misuse [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)]. Monitor patients closely for respiratory depression, especially within the first 24-72 hours of initiating therapy with OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS [see Warnings and Precautions (5.2)].

OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS must be taken whole, one tablet at a time, with enough water to ensure complete swallowing immediately after placing in the mouth [see Patient Counseling Information (17)]. Crushing, chewing, or dissolving OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS will result in uncontrolled delivery of oxycodone and can lead to overdose or death [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

Use of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS as the First Opioid Analgesic

Initiate treatment with OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS with one 10 mg tablet orally every 12 hours.

Use of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS in Patients who are not Opioid Tolerant

The starting dose for patients who are not opioid tolerant is OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS 10 mg orally every 12 hours. Patients who are opioid tolerant are those receiving, for one week or longer, at least 60 mg oral morphine per day, 25 mcg transdermal fentanyl per hour, 30 mg oral oxycodone per day, 8 mg oral hydromorphone per day, 25 mg oral oxymorphone per day, or an equianalgesic dose of another opioid.

Use of higher starting doses in patients who are not opioid tolerant may cause fatal respiratory depression.

Conversion from other Oral Oxycodone Formulations to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

Patients receiving other oral oxycodone formulations may be converted to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS by administering one-half of the patient's total daily oral oxycodone dose as OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS every 12 hours.

Conversion from other Opioids to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

Discontinue all other around-the-clock opioid drugs when OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS therapy is initiated.

There are no established conversion ratios for conversion from other opioids to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS defined by clinical trials. Discontinue all other around-the-clock opioid drugs when OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS therapy is initiated and initiate dosing using OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS 10 mg orally every 12 hours.

It is safer to underestimate a patient’s 24-hour oral oxycodone requirements and provide rescue medication (e.g., immediate-release opioid) than to overestimate the 24-hour oral oxycodone requirements which could result in adverse reactions. While useful tables of opioid equivalents are readily available, there is substantial inter-patient variability in the relative potency of different opioid drugs and products.

Conversion from Methadone to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

Close monitoring is of particular importance when converting from methadone to other opioid agonists. The ratio between methadone and other opioid agonists may vary widely as a function of previous dose exposure. Methadone has a long half-life and can accumulate in the plasma.

Conversion from Transdermal Fentanyl to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

Eighteen hours following the removal of the transdermal fentanyl patch, OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS treatment can be initiated. Although there has been no systematic assessment of such conversion, a conservative oxycodone dose, approximately 10 mg every 12 hours of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS, should be initially substituted for each 25 mcg/hr fentanyl transdermal patch. Follow the patient closely during conversion from transdermal fentanyl to OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS, as there is limited documented experience with this conversion.

2.2 Titration and Maintenance of Therapy

Individually titrate OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS to a dose that provides adequate analgesia and minimizes adverse reactions. Continually reevaluate patients receiving OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS to assess the maintenance of pain control and the relative incidence of adverse reactions, as well as monitoring for the development of addiction, abuse and misuse. Frequent communication is important among the prescriber, other members of the healthcare team, the patient, and the caregiver/family during periods of changing analgesic requirements, including initial titration. During chronic therapy, periodically reassess the continued need for the use of opioid analgesics.

Patients who experience breakthrough pain may require a dose increase of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS or may need rescue medication with an appropriate dose of an immediate-release analgesic. If the level of pain increases after dose stabilization, attempt to identify the source of increased pain before increasing the OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS dose. Because steady-state plasma concentrations are approximated in 1 day, OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS dosage may be adjusted every 1 to 2 days. If unacceptable opioid-related adverse reactions are observed, the subsequent dose may be reduced. Adjust the dose to obtain an appropriate balance between management of pain and opioid-related adverse reactions.

There are no well-controlled clinical studies evaluating the safety and efficacy with dosing more frequently than every 12 hours. As a guideline, the total daily oxycodone dose usually can be increased by 25% to 50% of the current dose, each time an increase is clinically indicated.

2.3 Patients with Hepatic Impairment

For patients with hepatic impairment, start dosing patients at 1/3 to 1/2 the usual starting dose followed by careful dose titration [see Clinical Pharmacology (12.3)].

2.4 Discontinuation of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

When the patient no longer requires therapy with OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS, use a gradual downward titration of the dose to prevent signs and symptoms of withdrawal in the physically dependent patient. Do not abruptly discontinue OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS.

2.5 Administration of OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS

Instruct patients to swallow OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS intact. The tablets are not to be crushed, dissolved, or chewed due to the risk of rapid release and absorption of a potentially fatal dose of oxycodone [see Warnings and Precautions (5.1)].

Instruct patients to take OXYCODONE HCl EXTENDED-RELEASE TABLETS one tablet at a time and with enough water to ensure complete swallowing immediately after placing in the mouth [see Warnings and Precautions (5.9) and Patient Counseling Information (17)].
Hydroxychloroquine Sulf...

Hydroxychloroquine Sulfate

DOSAGE AND ADMINISTRATION

One tablet of 200 mg of hydroxychloroquine sulfate is equivalent to 155 mg base.

Malaria

Suppression

In adults, 400 mg (= 310 mg base) on exactly the same day of each week. In infants and children, the weekly suppressive dosage is 5 mg, calculated as base, per kg of body weight, but should not exceed the adult dose regardless of weight.

If circumstances permit, suppressive therapy should begin two weeks prior to exposure. However, failing this, in adults an initial double (loading) dose of 800 mg (= 620 mg base), or in children 10 mg base/kg may be taken in two divided doses, six hours apart. The suppressive therapy should be continued for eight weeks after leaving the endemic area.

Treatment of the acute attack

In adults, an initial dose of 800 mg (= 620 mg base) followed by 400 mg (= 310 mg base) in six to eight hours and 400 mg (= 310 mg base) on each of two consecutive days (total 2 g hydroxychloroquine sulfate or 1.55 g base). An alternative method, employing a single dose of 800 mg (= 620 mg base), has also proved effective.

The dosage for adults may also be calculated on the basis of body weight; this method is preferred for infants and children. A total dose representing 25 mg of base per kg of body weight is administered in three days, as follows:

First dose: 10 mg base per kg (but not exceeding a single dose of 620 mg base).

Second dose: 5 mg base per kg (but not exceeding a single dose of 310 mg base) 6 hours after first dose.

Third dose: 5 mg base per kg 18 hours after second dose.

Fourth dose: 5 mg base per kg 24 hours after third dose.

For radical cure of vivax and malariae malaria concomitant therapy with an 8-aminoquinoline compound is necessary.
Cefprozil

Cefprozil

Cefprozil is administered orally.
Population/Infection Dosage (mg) Duration (days) * In the treatment of infections due to Streptococcus pyogenes, cefprozil should be administered for at least 10 days. † Not to exceed recommended adult doses.
ADULTS (13 years and older)

UPPER RESPIRATORY TRACT

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis

500 q24h

10*

Acute Sinusitis (For moderate to severe infections, the higher dose should be used)

250 q12h or500 q12h

10

LOWER RESPIRATORY TRACT

Secondary Bacterial Infection of Acute Bronchitis and Acute Bacterial Exacerbation of Chronic Bronchitis

500 q12h

10

SKIN AND SKIN STRUCTURE

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections

250 q12h or500 q24h or500 q12h

10

CHILDREN (2 years – 12 years)

UPPER RESPIRATORY TRACT†

Pharyngitis/Tonsillitis

7.5 mg/kgq12h

10*

SKIN AND SKIN STRUCTURE†

Uncomplicated Skin and Skin Structure Infections

20 mg/kgq24h

10

INFANTS ( CHILDREN (6 months – 12 years)

UPPER RESPIRATORY TRACT†

Otitis Media (See INDICATIONS AND USAGE and CLINICAL STUDIES)

15 mg/kgq12h

10

Acute Sinusitis (For moderate to severe infections, the higher dose should be used)

7.5 mg/kgq12h or15 mg/kgq12h

10

Renal Impairment

Cefprozil may be administered to patients with impaired renal function.

The following dosage schedule should be used.
* Cefprozil is in part removed by hemodialysis; therefore, cefprozil should be administered after the completion of hemodialysis.
Creatinine Clearance (mL/min)

Dosage (mg)

Dosing Interval

30–120

Standard

standard

0–29*

50% of standard

standard

Hepatic Impairment

No dosage adjustment is necessary for patients with impaired hepatic function.

Reconstitution Directions for Oral Suspension

Prepare the suspension at the time of dispensing; for ease in preparation, add water in two portions and shake well after each aliquot.
Total Amount of Water Required for Reconstitution
Bottle Size

Final Concentration

125 mg/5 mL

Final Concentration

250 mg/5 mL

50 mL

36 mL

36 mL

75 mL

54 mL

54 mL

100 mL

72 mL

72 mL

After mixing, store in a refrigerator and discard unused portion after 14 days.

Store dry powder at 20° to 25°C (68° to 77°F) [see USP Controlled Room Temperature] prior to constitution.
Timolol Gfs

Timolol Gfs

Instill one drop of Timolol GFS (either 0.25% or 0.5%) in the affected eye(s) once daily. It may be used alone or in combination with other intraocular pressure lowering medications.

Sandoz Inc

Manufacturer Details

Share This Page

Sandoz Inc Drugs